AT

v7 \\
y
SAY
AT NS 4
<> <= 5
a
A
ay Pa <a?
es as
Le
wee Fe a { ~
vv wry oe

Z.

ee |

A
Ee et |S EEE .:

eer w:
Se

<j \ A Abin) Ue Tipsons ini el
= ee RD, a cee ee 4 i

art et ee

e Flee sp Ate

ik here
OP ACA Pa a
(Sa ee

ec } Tee i} J Welty nen | WAT bv f 1 cy i i ‘i

{ I i i
i
me rf
« Hale)
Nw vPiMrArey
POU ED ni
‘ \!

Wie

Beak

wh ATLA

eta }
MON

PreOee sOlNGs

OF IHE

Indiana Academy of Science

1904.

EDITOR, - - DONALDSON BODINE.

ASSOCIATE EDITORS:

AMOS BUTLER, W. S. BLATCHLEY,
C. H. EIGENMANN, P. N. EVANS,
LYNN B. MCMULLEN, THOMAS GRAY,

JOHN S. WRIGHT.

LIBRARY
NEW YORK
BOTANICAL

GARDEN,

INDIANAPOLIS, IND.

1905.

=

INDIANAPOLIS:
Wn. B. BURFORD, PRINTER.

1905.

EXECUTIVE DEPARTMENT,

THE STATE OF INDIANA,
February 15, “sf

Received by the Governor, examined and referred to the Auditor of State
for verification of the financial statement.

OFFICE OF AUDITOR OF STATE, \
INDIANAPOLIS, February 15, 1905. {
The within report, so far as the same relates to moneys drawn from the State
Treasury, has been examined and found correct.
D. *E. SHERRICK,
Auditor of State.

FEBRUARY 15, 1905.
Returned by the Auditor of State, with above certificate, and transmitted to
Secretary of State for publication, upon the order of the Board of Commissioners
of Public Printing and Binding.
UNION B. HUNT,
Private Secretary.

Filed in the office of the Secretary of State of the State of Indiana, Febru-
ary 15, 1905.
DANIEL E. STORMS,
Secretary of State.

Received the within report and delivered to the printer February 15, 1905.
THOS. J. CARTER,
Clerk Printing Bureau.

(3)

EBLE SOR iCONEHINGS:

PAGE
An act to provide for the publication of the reports and papers of the

indianatAcademy of Science... .'2.< s.c0s 2..-.cnee ee Homie See ee 5
An act for the protection of birds, their nests and eggs.......... ..... 17
Din Cers:s LOOt— LOO Beta. Siteateh cise Siete mies nian anne sibeeate eaten ee ee 9
Committees sl904=H1905 5. oases She Ssreeilewias. ne cise see ocies Sa Gees eee 10
Principals oficers! since OLrganizationereeee eel eaeeiee ere eneene 1g
1 sy 60 (0) gE | Lek er ener ane eI Pe re Ae eMac TS co 12
GOnstibUtion ci. 6 3 se oo wnsesa oe eee one ea oe Re peRie sees ee ser eee eee 13
Bye LGA WS sin oicste ore os Solasa Pepsin elo reat ce a eos Ss SO ISTE ae eee 15
MemiberssiHellowsss cess neces oer Oe eae eee oe ee 16
MemberssenOn-resid emt) scacoe oercieuc velo onesie he eis cree Gil eine Gea ee 17
MiemIpers MACELVC ws ic eer ond PeOniOR OUR Cine eet eae ek eee 18
histo féreipn ‘correspondents s. 2... sai. wtekaewielowts adore 2s so ie rae ee 22
Program! of, the Twentieth Annual) Meeting) 252. .-s:-- cee eee 28
Report of the Twentieth Annual Meeting of the Indiana Academy of

Sie (21) oh Mein AA ie EaG Dio Cs DOCTOR one Caer Aaroee rman onmaTe oo cc: 32
Report of the’ Spring Meeting, of 19047 e322 oe ace es nece ees ee 2 oe 32
Papers presented at the Twentieth Annual Meeting ................... 33
TNA OK Mae ot chen, 5 ie Rica heel raters esate alone’ nS oe a eid SUIS ae ae eee 315

17 1907

JN

;

AN ACT TO PROVIDE FOR THE PUBLICATION OF THE REPORTS
AND PAPERS OF THE INDIANA ACADEMY OF SCIENCE.

[Approved March 11, 1895.] LIBRA

NEW Yi

WHEREAS, The Indiana Academy of Science, a chartered BOTANIE
scientific association, has embodied in its constitution a ESTE: GARDE

provision that it will, upon the request of the Governor, or of the several
departments of the State government, through the Governor, and through
its council as an advisory body, assist in the direction and execution
of any investigation within its province, without pecuniary gain to the
Academy, provided only that the necessary expenses of such investigation
are borne by the State; and,

WHEREAS, The reports of the meetings of said Academy, with the
several papers read before it, have very great educational, industrial
and economic value, and should be preserved in permanent form; and

WHEREAS, The Constitution of the State makes it the duty of the
General Assembly to encourage by all suitable means intellectual, scien-
tific and agricultural improvement; therefore,

Section 1. Be it enacted by the General Assembly of the

Publication of
State of Indiana, That hereafter the annual reports of the the Reports of
the Indiana
Academy of

with the report for the year 1894, including all papers of Science.

meetings of the Indiana Academy of Science, beginning

scientific or economic value, presented at such meetings, after they shall
have been edited and prepared for publication as hereinafter provided,
shall be published by and under the direction of the Commissioners
of Public Printing and Binding.

Sec. 2. Said reports shall be edited and: prepared for
Editing

publication without expense to the State, by a corps of
Reports.

editors to be selected and appointed by the Indiana Acad-
emy of Science, who shall not, by reason of such services, have any
claim against the State for compensation. The form, style of binding,
paper, typography and manner and extent of illustration of

: ‘ Number of
such reports, shall be determined by the editors, subject printed

to the approval of the Commissioners of Public Printing Reports.

and Stationery. Not less than 1,500 nor more than 3,000 copies of each

p= ai
oa

6

of said reports shall be published, the size of the edition within said
limits to be determined by the concurrent action of the editors and the
Commissioners of Public Printing and Stationery: Provided, That not
to exceed six hundred dollars ($600) shall be expended for
PDD such publication in any one year, and not to extend beyond
1896: Provided, That no sums shall be deemed to be appropriated for
the year 1894.
Sec. 3. All except three hundred copies of each volume
Peete, of said reports shall be placed in the custody of the State
Librarian, who shall furnish one copy thereof to each pub-
lic library in the State, one copy to each university, college or normal
school in the State, one copy to each high school in the State having
a library, which shall make application therefor, and one copy to such
other institutions, societies or persons as may be designated by the
Academy through its editors or its council. The remaining three hundred
copies shall be turned over to the Academy to be disposed OLAS ene
may determine. In order to provide for the preservation of the same
it shall be the duty of the Custodian of the State House to provide
and place at the disposal of the Academy one of the unoccupied rooms
of the State House, to be designated as the office of the Indiana Academy
of Science, wherein said copies of said reports belongins to the Academy,
together with the original manuscripts, drawings, etc., thereof can be
safely kept, and he shall also equip the same with the necessary shelving
and furniture.
Sec. 4. An emergency is hereby declared to exist for
Hmereency- the immediate taking effect of this act, and it shall there-
fore take effect and be in force from and after its passage.

AN ACT FOR THE PROTECTION OF BIRDS, THEIR NESTS
AND EGGS.

[Approved March 5, 1891.]

SEcTION 1. Be it enacted by the General Assembly of the

State of Indiana, That it shall be unlawful for any person ee
to kill any wild bird other than a game bird, or purchase, offer for sale
any such wild bird after it has been killed, or to destroy the nests or
the eggs of any wild bird.

Sec. 2. For the purpose of this act the following shall
be considered game birds: the Anatidz, commonly called SO RIO EC:
swans, geese, brant, and river and sea ducks; the Rallidz, commonly
known as rails, coots, mudhens, and gallinules; the Limicolz, commonly
known as shore birds, plovers, surf birds, snipe, woodcock and sand-
pipers, tattlers and curlews; the Galline, commonly known as wild
turkeys, grouse, prairie chickens, quail, and pheasants, all of which are
not intended to be affected by this act.

Src. 38. Any person violating the provisions of Section
1 of this act shall, upon conviction, be fined in a sum not penal
less than ten nor more than fifty dollars, to which may be added im-
prisonment for not less than five days nor more than thirty days.

Src. 4. Sections 1 and 2 of this act shall not apply to
any person holding a permit giving the right to take birds See
or their nests and eggs for scientific purposes, as provided in Section
5 of this act.

Src. 5. Permits may be granted by the Executive Pormiterte
Board of the Indiana Academy of Science to any properly Science.
accredited person, permitting the holder thereof to collect birds, their
nests or eggs for strictly scientific purposes. In order to obtain such
permit the applicant for the same must present to said Board written
testimonials from two well-known scientific men certifying to the good
character and fitness of said applicant to be entrusted with such privilege,
and pay to said Board one dollar to defray the necessary expenses
attending the granting of such permit, and must file with
said Board a properly executed bond in the sum of two EAT
~ hundred dollars, signed by at least two responsible citizens of the State
as sureties. The bond shall be forfeited to the State and

ond
the permit become void upon proof that the holder of forfeited.

8

such permit has killed any bird or taken the nests or eggs of any bird
for any other purpose than that named in this section, and shall further
be subject for each offense to the penalties provided in this act.

Sec. 6. The permits authorized by this act shall be
BN OOEE in force for two years only from the date of their issue,

and shall not be transferable.

Sec. 7. The English or European House Sparrow
SURES OS SEEN, (Passer domesticus), crows, hawks, and other birds of prey
are not included among the birds protected by this act.

Sec. 8. All acts or parts of acts heretofore passed in
pehsmevcaled: conflict with the provisions of this act are hereby repealed.

Sec. 9. An emergency is declared to exist for the im-
ERGO mediate taking effect of this act, therefore the same shall

be in force and effect from and after its passage.

OFFICERS—1904-1905.

PRESIDENT,
JOHN S. WRIGHT.

VICE-PRESIDENT,
ROBERT HESSLER.

SECRETARY,
LYNN B. McMULLEN.

ASSISTANT SECRETARY,
J. H. RANSOM.

PRESS SECRETARY,
GAS ABBOLT:

TREASURER,
WILLIAM A. McBETH.

EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE.

JOHN 8. WRIGHT,
ROBERT HESSLER,
Lynn B. McMULLEN,
J. H. RANsom,

G. A. ABBOTT,
WiLiiaM A. McCBETH,
CaRL L. MEEs,
WILLISS. BLATCHLEY,
HaRVEY W. WILEY,

EOIN Y Fick ots. is
ICHTHYOLOGY ..
HERPETOLOGY )

MAMMALOGY j

ORNITHOLOGY
ENTOMOLOGY ...

“Deceased.

M. B. THomas, J. C. ARTHUR,

D. W. DENNIS, J. L. CAMPBELL, *

C. H. EIGENMANN, OP EAs

C. A. WALDO, T. C. MENDENHALL,

THOMAS GRayY, JOHN C. BRANNER,

STANLEY COULTER, Je ED OENG

Amos W. BUTLER, JOHN M. COULTER,

W. A. NOoYE-, Davip S. JORDAN.
CURATORS.

Be apa iene nw Ses aac ors Sas avarerc ne eal Amos W. BUTLER.

FE de ir RN ae oe Bo W.S. BLATCHLEY.

10

COMMITTEES, 1904-1905.

PROGRAM.
Lynn. B. McMULLEN, JOHN 8. WRIGHT, A. L. FOLEY.
MEMBERSHIP.
J. H. Ransom, R. L. Lyons, W. A. McBeEtH.
NOMINATIONS.
J. C. ARTHUR, A. S. HATHAWAY, W. J. MOENKHAUS.
AUDITING.
THOMAS GRAY, A. J. BIGNEY.
STATE LIBRARY.
JOHN S. WRIGHT, A. J. BIGNEY, O. L. KELSO.

LEGISLATION FOR THE RESTRICTION OF WEEDS.
M. B. THOMAS, D. M. MorTriErR, C. C. DEAM.

PROPAGATION AND PROTECTION OF GAME AND FISH.

C. H. EIGENMANN, A. W. BUTLER, GLENN CULBERTSON.

EDITOR.

DoNALDSON BopDINE, Wabash College, Crawfordsville.

DIRECTORS OF BIOLOGICAL SURVEY.

O. H. EIGENMANN, M. B. THOMAS,
CHARLES R. DRYER, p
STANLEY COULTER, J. C. ARTHGR:

RELATIONS OF THE ACADEMY TO THE STATE.

C. A. WaLDoO, WILLIAM WATSON WOOLLEN, R. W. McBripz,
G. W. BENTON.

GRANTING PERMITS FOR COLLECTING BIRDS AND FISHES.
A. W. BUTLER, D. W. DENNIS, W. J. MoOENKHAUS.

DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROCEEDINGS.

THOMAS GRAY, L. J. RETTGER, JOHN S. WRIGHT,
DONALDSON BODINE, H. L. BRUNER.

1

sae “UPPEOW VOM
UMEGOW “VM

"WOGOW “V “MA

"** 1oJUeg
“* Toque
"** TOJUed
"** TOWN

“"* TOQUE

Seth One cay

eee e ee ee ee eee te eee ee eslec ee

ee ce ry

aieltnie(ol #ishe) vis (6) eee!

CC Ce ee Oy

yoqqy ‘yy fcc
H0qddV “VY »
00dV “VD
O04)

eee

ULOSUBY “HL

azyTnYg “Vy

Pac "+ ezaTnyog *

aZ}TNYOS *

AouSTG *

V
V
ssa foes eter sousig ‘f°
if
Lf
if

CC

cece ewe w eer ee eee tees cele wee eee 6 ote eee ae esos

i

a@aq¢d¢daa a

PS esulpog wOospleuog

UvVULION “AA AA
J TBULION “MM “M
{ aoynog Aepurys

ov) aie)(a) 9) 14) \eelelulelecele) evenel| sia

Oh OC OG OOD 0.0000 Coe oto Onlin Oo Chosen OOD OOO On OG cmioair rol lag
sree auayer(ons))si alle) (s\m lela! e) el e\a bails isl )ie ie>= ce) sWalie\es)e)(s)s le ialaltaleiieis) eter | se

PoMWuisiihie elms itallu lela) ’a) alle) alisliellele\erell ls \e

WMOsUvY “Hf Ue. “A uudry
dk
eulpog uospTeu0g

+ ASTIN
"QU STI AA
"QUST
"QU STI
"GUSTIN Ҥ uUyOL
“QUST “S WyOr
“QUSTIAA “S WYyOL
“"QusTIM “S uyor
“4USTIM “S UYOL
"FUSIIM Ҥ UYyOL
font OPI@AA “Vv ‘O
““reyyng “AM soulry
royyugd “A soury
1apjng “MM soury
‘reyyng “MM soury
ropNg “M soulry
‘-repynug “MA soury
ropng “MM soury
ropug ‘A souy

‘Sg uyor
‘S$ yor
‘g uyor
‘S ayor

“"QUSTIM “§ uyOr

“AOTYOIVI “SAA
A9VIIM “MM AOAIVTT
“-semI0U, “q “
sone stuueq “MA ‘Cd
“UURUIUOSIY “HO
Imi OPK OPIeM “VO

se eee sak0 NT ae “M
Bina re ana
“Teqduep T “¢

‘TIequopuey *O “VL
“‘jeuuvig ‘QO myor
erat ae
““r0yTMOH “TW uyor
“UBpIOL "g PIABG

* SO6I-F06T
*"F061-S06T
*$061-G06T
~ GO6I- L061
“1061-0061
*0061-668T

ea £-£681
be €-Z68T

saa T-0681
"* "06-688

*[[PAOVS wh, Ie
TAoog “LL
*[T[PAONS “TL sf
TToAoog “Lf
*[[PA009 al nitty
“UOUTLBYS “dq “M
“HOUUBYS ‘d “NM.
“HOTUBYS ‘d “Mm
“HOUTLBYS ‘d “M
‘OPIRM “VO
‘OPTRM “V “O
‘suUTyUOP “qd ‘O
‘suTyuor “q ‘O
‘suryuor “q ‘O
‘suTyuer “q °O
‘suITyuOr “g ‘CO
‘suULyUOL ‘gq ‘CO
“MAN OSVaAAY,

‘AUVLAYOAG SSANg

‘AUVLANOUG “LSSW

‘AUVLANOAG

“INAGISANg

HONATIOS HO ANAGVOV VNVIGNI GHL AO SHAOIMAO

In Memorianr

JouN LYLE CAMPBELL

Born, Salem, Indiana, October 18, 1827.

Died, Crawfordsville, Indiana, September 7, 1904.

President Indiana Academy Science, 1891-1892.

13

CONSTITUTION.

ARTICLE Tf.

Section 1. This association shall be called the Indiana Academy
of Science.

Src. 2. The objects of this Academy shall be scientific research
and the diffusion of knowledge concerning the various departments of
science; to promote intercourse between men engaged in scientific work,
especially in Indiana; to assist by investigation and discussion in devel-
oping and making known the material, educational and other resources
and riches of the State; to arrange and prepare for publication such
reports of investigation and discussions as may further the aims and
objects of the Academy as set forth in these articles.

Whereas, the State has undertaken the publication of such proceed-
ings, the Academy will, upon request of the Governor, or of one of
the several departments of the State, through the Governor, act through
its council as an advisory body in the direction and execution of any
investigation within its province as stated. The necessary expenses
incurred in the prosecution of such investigation are to be borne by
the State; no pecuniary gain is to come to the Academy for its advice
or direction of such investigation.

The regular proceedings of the Academy as published by the State
shall become a public document.

ARTICLE II.

SecTIon 1. Members of this Academy shall be honorary fellows,
fellows, non-resident members or active members.

Sec. 2. Any person engaged in any department of scientific work,
or in original research in any department of science, shall be eligible
to active membership. Active members may be annual or life members.
Annual members may be elected at any meeting of the Academy;
they shall sign the constitution, pay an admission fee of two dollars,

14

and thereafter an annual fee of one dollar. Any person who shall
at one time contribute fifty dollars to the funds of this Academy
may be elected a life member of the Academy, free of assessment.
Non-resident members may be elected from those who have been active
members but who have removed from the State. In any case, a three-
fourths vote of the members present shall elect to membership. Appli-
cations for membership in any of the foregoing classes shall be referred
to a committee on application for membership, who shall consider such
application and report to the Academy before the election.

Sec. 3. The members who are actively engaged in scientific work,
who have recognized standing as scientific men, and who have been
members of the Academy at least one year, may be recommended for
nomination for election as fellows by three fellows or members per-
sonally acquainted with their work and character. Of members so
nominated a number not exceeding five in one year May, on recom-
mendation of the Executive Committee, be elected as fellows. At the
meeting at which this is adopted, the members of the Executive Com-
mittee for 1894 and fifteen others shall be elected fellows, and those
now honorary members shall become honorary fellows. Honorary fel-
lows may be elected on account of special prominence in science. on
the written recommendation of two members of the Academy. In
any case a three-fourths vote of the members present shall elect.

ARTICLE III.

Section 1. The officers of this Academy shall be chosen by ballot
at the annual meeting, and shall hold office one year. They shall
consist of a President, Vice-President, Secretary, Assistant Secretary,
Press Secretary, and Treasurer, who shall perform the duties usually
pertaining to their respective offices and in addition, with the ex-Presi-
dents of the Academy, shall constitute an Executive Committee. The
President shall, at each annual meeting, appoint two members to be
a committee which shall prepare the programs and have charge of the
arrangements for all meetings for one year.

Sec. 2. The annual meeting of this Academy shall be held in the
city of Indianapolis within the week following Christmas of each year,
unless otherwise ordered by the Executive Committee. There shall

15

also be a Summer meeting at such time and place as may be decided
upon by the Executive Committee. Other meetings may be called at
the discretion of the Executive Committee. The past Presidents, together
with the officers and Executive Committee, shall constitute the Council
of the Academy, and represent it in the transaction of any necessary
business not specially provided for in this constitution, in the interim
between general meetings.

Sec. 3. This constitution may be altered or amended at any annual
meeting by a three-fourths majority of the attending members of at
least one year’s standing. No question of amendment shall be decided
on the day of its presentation.

BY-LAWS.

1. On motion, any special department of science shall be assigned
to a curator, whose duty it shall be, with the assistance of the other
members interested in the same department, to endeavor to advance
knowledge in that particular department. Hach curator shall report
at such time and place as the Academy shall direct. These reports
shall include a brief summary of the progress of the department during
the year preceding the presentation of the report.

2. The President shall deliver a public address on the morning of
one of the days of the meeting at the expiration of his term of office.

3. The Press Secretary shall attend to the securing of proper news-
paper reports of the meetings and assist the Secretary.

4. No special meeting of the Academy shall be held without a notice
of the same haying been sent to the address of each member at least
fifteen days before such meeting.

5. No bill against the Academy shall be paid without an order
signed by the President and countersigned by the Secretary.

6. Members who shall allow their dues to remain unpaid for two
years, having been annually notified of their arrearage by the Treasurer,
shall have their names stricken from the roll.

7. Ten members shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of
business.

16

MEMBERS.

FELLOWS.
ER rele A CY: a Sere ear neti F1B98. Se ceric es Bloomington.
itrankeMVe cAnaTeWw Sissi) cioee ieee 1904: Seca ee Bloomington.
pO AT GWU: op. ercinciscrewielstolas = oe - 1893 Zmeclas eres Lafayette.
George W. Benton.............. 1896S Feshon oe: Indianapolis.
AG Se IONCY s sre am sete deen Pee. te i Pier ooiomear Moore’s Hill.
PAN UG ELT OT Sars ia ysyatateeteustere opis sPans RON emit o Bane West Lafayette.
Donaldson Bodmesssc> oes 1399 ee eee Crawfordsville.
Weas>. blatchley-2cesn--e.ccece a 1893 anatase Indianapolis.
EPG SAB TUNEL: cosets Bee cotioeeaee TS9ON: Be Sire Irvington.
Severance Burrage .............. 1 SOS 2s eee Lafayette.
IAG WW; Butler Ss. sac see seeks: Rott Beep aeran Indianapolis.
Jeli Camppellztenneec nee e aes NS OS ees ae hole coe Crawfordsville.
Mel COOKS se teehee tec O02 eee eee Santiago, Cuba.
Johny. Coulter sreueee wees 1898 Beene sigseee= Chicago, 1.
StanleysCoulterte 5 sere eccese IEE an ouseaoctorde Lafayette.
Glenn Culbertson ........... Pmt OOO Sy tase menus creer Hanover.
IDESW. = Dennis seejs-bincciseioecs = acts 1S95 cede ae See aoest Richmond.
Cine eDEVCE. fc5.. 5 sue ener eee 1 SOA ae A as ches cee Terre Haute.
Coy Higenmanni ss. sce sae UBOS a at at-tecreetesee Bloomington.
Percy; NOEOneB Vans. ce aeneroee NOI irs tise West Lafayette.
ENP eM Oley krat acer siheeeties Gee Nese cna o dea aeee Bloomington.
Katherine E. Golden............ USOB Ee isis eoei ce Lafayette.
Mee en GOld ens sor aaareeenete ener 1899 Saas oo ee Lafayette.
DWV perv n GOSS se eiere tye a eee Ibot Be Roan Sar oiee Lafayette.
PBNOMASH GCA Yi seit each LEOS Ree) pee Terre Haute.
ASS: cblathaway: << Sacsc0 oeestaes 1895 <2 Bee es ee Terre Haute.
DV cee se DOSE rot accaeteneterccerdoenorsee 19023 5 Get. dees Lafayette.
Robert Hessler ..... Lae coe ne eee Ihey? SI eSoctee abue cco Logansport.
IMPACTS ORs eck oe taste ieee 1893 eaters Cee ee Lafayette.
Edwin S. Johannott ........... 1904 Se onsen Terre Haute.
ArthureWendii Ck eoaas serene i ols tole PaO rcreeo nee Terre Haute.
Feo bert sl by.OnS ssaccictas se se ticlerers ES9G sii ce ae Sosa Bloomington.
IWirA eMC eb hire <A evccyuse he 1904 iene eee Terre Haute.

“Date of election.
“Deceased.

17

Wiehe MTATStOre fx: S oeissiecokts os 3 ys ISB eke wattace rene eee Bloomington.
NOS MICOS acs crnis ces ewe ce a sl ce SOAs Sac eee Terre Haute.

eA. Maller, sa: OS 2 we vies OTE ea Set: ete Bloomington.
Vind. Mocnishans sis. oe suse ares TOON eee base oe Bloomington.
Joseph Moorea tae sese sce FU SOG Wee A ee ceeet ess Richmond.

Da ViSeNOTGLEDe ya creas ceteetrs US9O0s oceme seine c= Bloomington.
Semi INAVIOR ote heer Sees. os See Se ee ce Greencastle.

RV RE ONT DING VES 26 wicscceiteltes a ds ses NBO Ore trcoainee Washington, D. C.
dic. LB lool sn als(ornereesigning byob CCeCe IMS 0445 ceers a crociets Lafayette.

NR PLNCU URED Te nial ett a craterenc ss is ISOC Ae fee sees aes Terre Haute.

Jeet: Scovell:.. Se ASN OA a Oe SOT are eters Fe Terre Haute.

Allexe Sminblyj. cata nstsetoe date art ea ts.s.s 1893s Sse . Chicago, Ill.

Wie EreMOLOMG. 5S .s hal eee eNews Ihc} BY? iene ipamiaaee eis Lafayette.

POSED Owealln-err eases ce crore sc ot eta te chen er cRERE Swarthmore, Pa.
PR se UDOMAS © 6 cso Soe ees SO Siero a ascent eet Crawfordsville.
ORMAC Wal dort soem cuietas cores + Ite} Bias Gren omeene Lafayette.

Hes VVCDSUGL ress eco tarsieners 1S94ee ae ee Chamiparen, Lik
WAcCObMVWestlund, seae0. sea se es IRSA SPeaeamosn Sientee echt 5 Lafayette.

ETRY ep VELL O Mires saree site oite a aro es 195 eee ones: Washington, D. C.
OTA TSE AW EEA OY acreas cue sie oka Ret Vole Sc eee Rote ee Indianapolis.

NON-RESIDENT MEMBERS.

IGOR st ee N SIG Y*: fe tre iale wn radieetele sibs oe teade wie Charleston, S.C.

NR Amst AIM OM wks seyaietstoiciaGieiale eas @eheteveictets < ack Grand Forks, N. D.

Ts CHET 11 0065 95 AAS ga Stanford University, Cal.
Rete Camp bellies erty tcieiete os as os see gierccis bc," Stanford University, Cal.
22\. \WVGU Se iid 6 ie ete 2 Worcester, Mass.

mV CLINATN GE. Antists tarcire crested < ors tyes apeyisiviee Washington, D. C.
Charles H. Gilbert........ Byte ciate doe hates Stanford University, Cal.
MOM OTCOL erect eR eile eisce tales eondainies eens Stanford University, Cal.
COMWR EL ALOTGtS Siem sireseid seals ss 6s.cdisea og ett Syracuse, N. Y.

Os 12, IBIS. SR aeGao 06cU 0: ACO ROO e ear New York City.

BG iyyeu ley Ear ES cya eto e eine onc-siajere ois, sae ie es ee Stockton, Cal.

0), 12. AIG San codon bo COS Op ER OSO CnC eO Cron. Stanford University, Cal.
1D), Bod GREE he oe akong 5 had a cje OCI Ice eee Stanford University, Cal.
Jos USHA GN eos es | oe eee ae ee eee Tufts College, Mass.

“Date of election.
2—A. OF SCIENCE, ’04.

18

De Mach oumall...c2pe om ee ee OR ee Bronx Park, New York City.
Cor Mendenkalll cect cc . «hone ee Worcester, Mass.

Alfred Springer ............ ~ a, Bee StS HAE SOS 5 Cincinnati, Ohio.

Tee Winderwoode fis: tsa Ese ec ch: New York City.

Ro bertuB :..Wardetesree.= a '1s.o2 sate ee ee Washington, D. C.

Enest Wis kere fuerte ce.) see eee ere Clemson College, S. C.

ACTIVE MEMBERS.

George Abbottiwts ean... scot. see eae Indianapolis.
George-©." Ashita 24-5 sar. ee Frankfort.

BG ward A vires. |; a5 Wiad tas ae eye ene nee Lafayette.
Bdward: Hugh wBangsesty.. cease eee ee Indianapolis.
Walter Dt Ba kenge tiene, 8 rt rock MEE 1 nie Indianapolis.
Arthur MstB anteater: ao lhcx see ae Franklin.

SAW s BCCGE> zea Peta oye aoe tee hee Bloomington.
Wiatliam NN: Blanchard. 2505.54. oes Greencastle.

id wan IVE Blake Vee sats Pinca ee ee eee Lafayette.
ILGeuH PB enn htise ee Ae ee tee foes ke Valparaiso.
Gharles'S” Bomdiavreset 56... ot eee eee coon Richmond.
TOC el ST COLE eee Pepe te ohn ter ee eh to eae ee ee Delphi.

Lye 11 Wael 5750 Ce Sane ere ee et ves Gi ae ge ea Weston, Oregon.
Herman S.C bamibenr) ain sehen sren sear Indianapolis.

By eh. (Chan sleet oe era aia an cuedlarte Bicknell.
OttosOr Clay tone se ees ieee eA Nee ee Geneva.
Howard W. Clark ..... CF SAGeeOnaeN ta cex acelas CHICAGO UUs
George Clements ...... id hole 9 UE a aes See Crawfordsville.
Charlest@lickener ies oe oes aso etna eine Silverwood, R. D. No. 1.
Oi COR ahr: ata Che cerntk one ae Cer trate Mankato, Minn.
Wralliramét ClitiordsCoxs Aes staan ceatesiste cies sees Columbus.

Je PAM Oracwelhee chrom malas n tails, arate areas Crawfordsville.
NI berty ba Groweseea ee ct ce cies SOA Oran ee Charleston, Ill.
MSE =Crowelleeeseaecee amo ad lentciseeeaee Ae Franklin.
Edward Roscoe Cumings.............. AACS Sr Bloomington.
Alida; ME: ¢Cunming ham 0. as dene asiwids oat Alexandria.
lixarerv 40) ide IDEN og aden Gnoon obbea En douppooo° Indianapolis.

1 odie DEW piolyoral sadn, eaieb.orka ch otane ie oat omnOn nen Baltimore, Md.

Charlesu@s Deampaeey eee etc eee lub One

Marhhay DORM siete | tice tins has Sevsiwle sets seis Westfield.
Pietra l8) (Mea ere cae sree ys¥a oi eieecere vets coe « @ oe Gio be arecee Syracuse.
lsigimanginlel io ID es sae gedaoc supa d lao mNseese Lafayette.
[dining IDG, pea Re Sek beta odes scoop tee bEeo ete Indianapolis.
lonanalc Tes, LBiGhyethe Ee cuos. ce saat aeecoes Cosme ocr Indianapolis.
Wh, Ise IBhgeysley | Pope ociootdiod aa moc cn Ome aaee eae Columbus.
SHINO (Coe ONGLOS Reese aoe OCO Oe Coe Moe an eee Evansville.

Carlton G. Ferris .
Thy INES STEHT OVET 2" ose ces Sette: Renn Bi ener aie Cre eon ane eae

Big Rapids, Mich.

19

Urmeyville.
AV IVaiil fo adiTemee Nap INS KOs rn aes lepcy ame eeuels versus, wrote @y mere Richmond.
Web Hletehier ... oa .. be RTA oa eNO _... Indianapolis.
Pater TUMEUR ape os eee Pa eats hl 2k an ae ego New Albany.
Meclnia 1D (Canoe le sae egies ce atone mes er meoenncE Montpelier.
@hrar les eWay Garretts. emcpias cect e sista choriaceeciart Logansport.
igyolceris (a (Cablilmeny ts Soceics cere Bere eesOOt rica Le Terre Haute.
\Weeraronate(COuUlClN 3' Sees Sega perce n ear ere eee Rochester.
iol roam Eten seat acts riot evans susarareders vers Bascom.
Wiener La vernebavel ie ern me cotnas beatin momen Indianapolis.
Ml catey ape TNO . ek obo c,h cua acatanct ciate» 2! ayo None Cos Greencastle.
SO MMT OWMer ge tie cw ene aateelsi sok a\vie say eche as Indianapolis.
dianialic’ ky, (aukesesno ee een So e8 com bnabe Gone enero oe: Terre Haute.
“Sis. TBASIIIE 1 Gil aT,6 IS eee orto es Cyrene nee re Madison.
Telia d]; LEMIUCK ENON AOS Goo eoausa ona: ome aioe asec Logansport.
a) FV GN LETT ATI Y copeinataysicressse, Saou sere ete eyek ayeisie a, 6/2 8) ec Lafayette.
PN GTIMD SsELOLe HE Aes ies ae histo. scotee Stas wes aes Richmond.
UGS Mee EMU DAK: oo x8 hoe pers kouciss oie srelerties os South Bend.
PO uMMINeg Elunt ye va ee ether ecGueg) Meare mica sierehadhs.s Indianapolis.
OH ACK SOM core robir mus ate ie, leis oye els eve slis.e walierd ase Greencastle.
MEXom OMS OMS pep cieeatreecrsiet re ei eientis uel 56 menos ec Ft. Wayne.
lamAC IDE ACMI ss ae osoes oo tobo Cee ecor Ioan amee Kokomo.
VVpsrl ere ewe OID CSeie) as eeapepe cnerc; acct c ans.oue aordeuatete akeon ets West Lafayette.
(Clini dine ey atereeebac . | amo Ros enern eect Boulder, Colo.
APC SO roe rescence cislong iol ps: aisrene a's e/a «ern Terre Haute.
orton AS Kent)... 2-525. Dae Seda stance ee iat .......Crawfordsville.
Charles ie lise Kena Decree ayers 65) <<< areym.ctersienie 58 2% Champaign, II.
lela Jl JLB ea alo gabe COO pon tame mare ne Lebanon.
\iallibic nan 1 DE IEE) ages a ag AEG IO OmCACToO oe tocton Richmond.

View MOCK WOOG: 6.08... cenuesie es oases 4 A se eee Indianapolis.

20

Robert Wesley-McBride=s-. 25-6 s0600- US Gio ie Indianapolis.
oussecaum\icClelilan teats eerie Indianapolis.
Richard C. McClaskey...... Lesyal Cheroiatetarelatentele steer Terre Haute.
feynnb. MGMilion. ence wae Ch me cr ee ene Indianapolis.
BawardiG.-Mahin= cece. naccete tikes see West Lafayette.
James E. Manchester.... .... ........ ent 6 Vincennes.
Clarke Micka eee eerie NETO AORTA GAIA COE 6 2 Indianapolis.
IWieG Middleton sincs se tacc ute ec eran ae eas Richmond.

EL el; EON ES OMEIY: oe cc cc wisp oa pho ee alee Oo oe South Bend.

NV akverue.. Morgan. scr atten on eee oe eer Terre Haute.
Fred Mutchler siete’ gh ov falere oie otaeropstvenere extol Terre Haute.
@harles Hs Newlin’ nc 6sa-7.cs ott ceteihee tee ern Irvington.

John Newlin 7 i. atte ce ey eile ete cites Seen core West Lafayette.
John BH. Newsom. 2. 0.2.0. see sieves ss os oeee ss obantord Universityaa@aie
EVV, NODC resins Aeterna ee cine oe Se .Chicago, Ill.
DAS OWEN <a! sabe een eieanicncer sine eieintre serene anne Franklin.

ROM OR SP EeInce aerate ei eee eer oe Indianapolis.
Reape: (POlK. h nren aera oo aoa ne eae Greenwood.
SAMCSVAL SM PTICO nee errs erie ai heiress teehee Ft. Wayne.
rank VAT Presto. sce iocice een rinn Indianapolis.

PAR Ele: PUTA Cin, crete Co ARO oe ee Fayetteville, Ark.
Ol aA WRVAINS CY a.2).:ctor) roa. evete ere lenceria eee See Bloomington.
Ryland Peablith soto e oie aitoee eee us Jos Moore Danville.
Alibert:B eRea rans nestor se coseice ke cisions ook wee Marietta, Wash.
PMCS ox EOC HNOUAS Har woe rete csscy stents cucs-oco harass Peru.

GilesHe. Ripley; s,s hee eegteapiane aces alte we Decorah, Iowa.
George by. ROberiszee esc lon oes oe Greensburg.

ID PACS OGHTOCK ae ryare ce term crea en le oie essere Bloomington.
Joh RAS Chnavples.e en sey eine cree cee eter Lafayette.

eA MOCITIEZE. cicery aac We acees pee raiee eee ke ee Ft. Wayne.
Jonny W,zshepherd.. | conc atenen oes aoe hos . . Terre Haute.
ClaudcySiebenthall anaes ae ceca aceite Indianapolis.
Deu OLOUAKER no-no se etken (LPeT oe See ee Madison, Wis.
(On J2ihoeroShomjiles 2 Shaan genous oot SNe ak Leland Stanford, Cal.
Rettay ba opeCalsse ec aaeeeeaeree bs coon Seon wilidnnare

JESS tod dard enon scressrotatlucs serene ee ae .Indianapolis.
@harleseE a Stegmlaier> Avon nic «1s dato eiererentereere eee . Greensburg.

Williaa Stewart Sac 521. ccm cotereet nous cet orice Burlington, Vt.

Wallan s.0 ULOCUCI ecianisaan. ce a ctoetetem aie ecaees Indianapolis.
EAT Kael civ OL eters sien ae cenerstctoos via si oels witotelerere ts Ft. Wayne.
epee MOM SOM pene aos) oles oieiel Sc eiec flere cles weer els ole Richmond.
COST LO TA Gl SIGW, OO Cee ye cany faseicrereteteteceyare erat che leyalere avs, 0co Indianapolis.
Nod Fists gerro hyo) Nh ste Seco ancien ce ReC CeCe ere Oxford, Ohio.
PD ITC LE OY Clic me retaratsvacaiso one avevoretelsvolSieuersrete: 3 ereieve Goshen.
Je\5 1B UO DRRER CAN Go meh ees 0 Bpeihehten cera MeIO ERO North Manchester.
Wie ssn; Is GORGE. © cylin « ocaie «erors feics ss. slajaleye Sieteye’e Worthington.
Art tittes © se VC BGG: Ase clecers srcig) sisiin ee « sis terovsiaiele a ists Rockport.
EIPa See VIO OLNECS Arse yarsyarsneva ode ents cveieie cls ale oS s/ elev claiers Ft. Wayne.
Jo LEIS NACI Se aod doe edcie GHOmo Oa GD OEOOO Cnt Huntington.
Hicepra keel WV CLO ic cieve ols, sisters crete pictals Sjsre eletepevese «rete Indianapolis.
TD Eye) 4 BS AY Ci eo eee SEE LOM eI OEE aeRO ee Indianapolis.
SSO ee Vice GEM AICT 2). = a535)shatha le, aisle slenG oun eichays eleeints West Lafayette.
rede @s AVWiliVuGOmaleeticieteere er ctcicia munity clevelets cuereusreie Delphi
VV tear WiNIGGEIE Socn sco ccrcinsie wisie's sia ores South Bend.
ING TSE me VV MLTR TIAS ye fo ei Nogeicrel tava yas ots ate lors lovevers's eta Terre Haute.
Wralltam> Watson Woollen’. 0.0.02. 0cc000 so Indianapolis.
PLE VIOOISG YAN ..5,..*src sre caeicls Sah Ssikco avai aislereloeae asters Indianapolis.
Nena Cys PVIOUSE 1. css okey oa scies icine elt oi aisles 016 Weleiele'e Terre Haute.
Be HGS ABI EIN GS, ha wey Gray see's) ats'y sinim wm iabiarviara' el 6 esi Bloomington.
AG WO WS tcercrererane isis ae acs sia aleve 1k ciatesue sont Lessee 53
Non-resident members ............:.-----: 20
ANCHIVOeMEMDCLS ayer seee ciisteeieoelersievere cele stele 126

21

22

LIST OF FOREIGN CORRESPONDENTS.

AFRICA.

Dr. J. Medley Wood, Natal Botanical Gardens, Berea Durban, South
Africa.
South African Philosophical Society, Cape Town, South Africa.

ASIA.
China Branch Royal Asiatic Society, Shanghai, China.
Asiatic Society of Bengal, Calcutta, India.
Geological Survey of India, Calcutta, India.
Indian Museum of India, Calcutta, India.
India Survey Department of India, Calcutta, India.

Deutsche Gesellschaft, fiir Natur- und V6lkerkunde Ostasiens, Tokio,
Japan.
Imperial University, Tokio, Japan.

Koninklijke Naturkundige Vereeniging in Nederlandsch-Indie, Batavia,
Java.

Hon. D. D. Baldwin, Honolulu, Hawaiian Islands.

EUROPE.

V. R. Tschusizu Schmidhoffen, Villa Tannenhof, Halle in Salzburg,
Austria.

Herman von Vilas, Innsbruck, Austria.

Ethnologische Mittheilungen aus Ungarn, Budapest, Austro-Hungary.

Mathematische und Naturwissenschaftliche Berichte aus Ungarn, Buda-
pest, Austro-Hungary.

Kk. K. Geologische Reichsanstalt, Vienna (Wien), Austro-Hungary.

Ix. U. Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft, Budapest, Austro-Hungary.

Naturwissenschaftlich-Medizinischer Verein in Innsbruck (Tyrol), Aus-
tro-Hungary.

Editors ‘“Termeszetrajzi Fuzetk,’ Hungarian National Museum, Buda
pest, Austro-Hungary.

Dr. Eugen Dadai, Adj. am. Nat. Mus., Budapest, Austro-Hungary.

23

Dr. Julius von Madarasz, Budapest, Austro-Hungary.

K. K. Naturhistorisches Hofmuseum, Vienna (Wien), Austro-Hungary.
Ornithological Society of Vienna (Wien), Austro-Hungary.
Zodlogische-Botanische Gesellschaft in Wien (Vienna), Austro-Hungary.
Dr. J. von Csato, Nagy Enyed, Austro-Hungary.

Botanic Garden, K. K.. Universitiit, Wien (Vienna), Austro-Hungary.

Malacological Society of Belgium, Brussels, Belgium.

Royal Academy of Science, Letters and Fine Arts, Brussels, Belgium.

Royal Linnean Society, Brussels, Belgium.

Societé Belge de Geologie, de Paleontologié et Hydrologie, Brussels,
Belgium.

Societé Royale de Botanique, Brussels, Belgium.

Societé Geologique de Belgique, Liége, Belgium.

Royal Botanical Gardens, Brussels, Belgium.

Bristol Naturalists’ Society, Bristol, England.

Geological Society of London, London, England.

Dr. E. M. Holmes, British Pharm. Soc’y, Bloomsbury Sq., London, W. C.,
England.

Jenner Institute of Preventive Medicine, London, England.

The Librarian, Linnean Society, Burlington House, Piccadilly, London
W., England.

Liverpool Geological Society, Liverpool, England.

Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society, Manchester, England.

“Nature,” London, England.

Royal Botanical Society, London, England.

Royal Kew Gardens, London, England.

Royal Geological Society of Cornwall, Penzance, England.

Royal Microscopical Society, London, England.

Zoodlogical Society, London, England.

Lieut.-Col. John Biddulph, 438 Charing Cross, London, England.

Dr. G. A. Boulenger, British Mus. (Nat. Hist.), London, England.

F. DuCane Godman, 10 Chandos St., Cavendish Sq., London, England.

Mr. Howard Saunders, 7 Radnor Place, Hyde Park, London W., England.

Phillip L. Sclater, 3 Hanover Sq., London W., England.

Dr. Richard Bowlder Sharpe, British Mus. (Nat. Hist.), London, England.

Prof. Alfred Russell Wallace, Corfe View, Parkstone, Dorset, England.

24

Botanical Society of France, Paris, France.

Ministérie de l’Agriculture, Paris, France.

Societé Entomologique de France, Paris, France.

L’Institut Grand Ducal de Luxembourg, Luxembourg, Lux., France.
Soc. de Horticulture et de Botan. de Marseille, Marseilles, France.
La Soc. Linneenne de Normandie, Caen, France.

Societé Linneenne de Bordeaux, Bordeaux, France.

Soc. des Naturelles, etc., Nantes, France.

Zodlogical Society of France, Paris, France.

Baron Louis d’Hamonville, Meurthe et Moselle, France.

Pasteur Institute, Lille, France.

Museum d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris, France.

Boutanischer Verein der Proyinz Brandenburg, Berlin, Germany.

Deutsche Geologische Gesellschaft. Berlin, Germany.

Entomologischer Verein in Berlin, Berlin, Germany.

Journal fiir Ornithologie, Berlin, Germany.

Prof. Dr. Jean Cabanis, Alte Jacob Strasse, 103 A., Berlin, Germany.

Augsburger Naturhistorischer Verein, Augsburg, Germany.

Count Hans von Berlspen. Miinden, Germany.

Braunschweiger Verein fiir Naturwissenschaft, Braunschweig, Germany.

Bremer Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein, Bremen, Germany.

Ornithologischer Verein Miinchen, Thierschstrasse, 3712, Miinchen, Ger-
many.

Royal Botanical Gardens, Berlin W., Germany.

Kaiserliche Leopoldische-Carolinische Deutsche Akademie der Naturfor-
scher, Halle‘a Saale, Wilhemstrasse 37, Germany.

Koéniglich-Siichsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, Mathematisch-
Physische Classe, Leipzig, Saxony, Germany.

Naturhistorische Gesellschaft zu Hanover, Hanover, Prussia, Germany.

Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein in Hamburg, Hamburg, Germany.

Verein fiir Erdkunde, Leipzig, Germany.

Verein fiir Naturkunde, Wiesbaden, Prussia.

Belfast Natural History and Philosophical Society, Belfast, Ireland.
Royal Dublin Society, Dublin.
Royal Botanic Gardens, Glasnevin, County Dublin, Ireland.

Societa Entomologica Italiana, Fiorence, Italy.

Prof. H. H. Giglioli, Museum Vertebrate Zoédlogy, Florence, Italy.
Dr. Alberto Perngia, Museo Civico di Storia Naturale, Genoa, Italy.
Societa Italiana de Scienze Naturali, Milan, Italy.

Societa Africana d’Italia, Naples, Italy.

Dell’ Academia Pontifico de Nuovi Lincei, Rome, Italy.
Minister of Agriculture, Industry and Commerce, Rome, Italy.
Rassegna della Scienze Geologiche in Italia, Rome, Italy.

R. Comitato Geologico d’Italia, Rome, Italy.

Prof. Count Tomasso Salvadori, Zodlog. Museum, Turin, Italy.

Royal Norwegian Society of Sciences, Throndhjem, Norway.
Dr. Robert Collett, IKongl. Frederiks Uniy. Christiana, Norway.

Academia Real des Sciencias de Lisboa (Lisbon), Portugal.

Comité Geologique de Russie, St. Petersburg, Russia.

Imperial Academy of Sciences, St. Petersburg, Russia.

Imperial Society of Naturalists, Moscow, Russia.

Jardin Imperial de Botanique, St. Petersburg, Russia.

The Botanical Society of Edinburgh, Edinburgh, Scotland.

John J. Dalgleish, Brankston Grange, Bogside Sta., Sterling, Scotland.
Edinburgh Geological Society, Edinburgh, Scotland.

Geological Society of Glasgow, Scotland.

John A. Harvie-Brown, Duniplace House, Larbert, Stirlingshire, Scotland.
Natural History Society, Glasgow, Scotland.

“Philosophical Society of Glasgow, Glasgow, Scotland.

Royal Society of Edinburgh, Edinburgh, Scotland.

Royal Physical Society, Edinburgh, Scotland.

Royal Botanic Garden, Edinburgh, Scotland.

Barcelona Academia de Ciencias y Artes, Barcelona, Spain.
Royal Academy of Sciences, Madrid, Spain.

Institut Royal Geologique de Suéde, Stociholm, Sweden.
Societé Entomologique a Stockholm, Stockholm, Sweden.
Royal Swedish Academy of Science, Stockholm, Sweden.

26

Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Basel, Switzerland.

Naturforschende Gesellschaft in Berne, Berne, Switzerland.

La Societé Bontanique Suisse, Geneva, Switzerland.

Societé Helvetique de Sciences Naturelles, Geneva, Switzerland.

Societé de Physique et d’Historie Naturelle de Geneva, Geneva, Switzer-
land.

Concilium Bibliographicum, Ztirich-Oberstrasse, Switzerland.

Naturforschende Gesellschaft, Ztirich, Switzerland.

Schweizerische Botanische Gesellschaft, Ziirich, Switzerland.

Prof. Herbert H. Field, Zitirich, Switzerland.

AUSTRALIA.

Linnean Society of New South Wales, Sidney, New South Wales.
Royal Society of New South Wales, Sidney, New South Wales.

Prof. Liveridge, F. R. S., Sidney, New South Wales.

Hon. Minister of Mines, Sidney, New South Wales.

Mr. E. P. Ramsey, Sidney, New South Wales.

Royal Society of Queensland, Brisbane, Queensland.

Royal Society of South Australia, Adelaide, South Australia.
Victoria Pub. Library, Museum and Nat. Gallery, Melbourne, Victoria.
Prof. W. L. Buller, Wellington, New Zealand.

NORTH AMERICA.

Natural Hist. Society of British Columbia, Victoria, British Columbia.
Canadian Record of Science, Montreal, Canada.
McGill University, Montreal, Canada.

2

Natural Society, Montreal, Canada.

Natural History Society, St. Johns, New Brunswick.
Nova Scotia Institute of Science, Halifax, N. S.
Manitoba Historical and Scientific Society, Winnipeg, Manitoba.
Dr. T. Mellwraith, Cairnbrae, Hamilton, Ontaria.

The Royal Society of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario.
Natural History Society, Toronto, Ontario.

Hamilton Association Library, Hamilton, Ontario.
Canadian Entomologist, Ottawa, Ontario.

Department of Marine and Fisheries, Ottawa, Ontario.
Ontario Agricultural College, Guelph, Ontario.

Canadian Institute, Toronto.

Ottawa Field Naturalists’ Club, Ottawa, Ontario.
University of Toronto, Toronto.

Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario.
La Naturaliste Canadian, Chicontini, Quebec.

La Naturale Za, City of Mexico.

Mexican Society of Natural History, City of Mexico.

Museo Nacional, City of Mexico.

Sociedad Cientifica Antonio Alzate, City of Mexico.

Sociedad Mexicana de Geographia y Estadistica de la Republica Mexi-
cana, City of Mexico.

WEST INDIES.

Botanical Department, Port of Spain, Trinidad, British West Indies.

Victoria Institute, Trinidad, British West Indies.

Museo Nacional, San Jose, Costa Rica, Central America.

Dr. Anastasia Alfaro, Secy. National Museum, San Jose, Costa Rica.

Rafael Arango, Havana, Cuba.

Jamaica Institute, Kingston, Jamaica, West Indies.

The Hope Gardens, Kingston, Jamaica, West Indies.

Estacion Central Agronomica Departments de Patologia, Santiago de las
Vegas, Cuba.

SOUTH AMERICA.

Argentina Historia Natural Florentine Amegline, Buenos Ayres, Argen-
tine Republic.

Musée de la Plata, Argentine Republic.

Nacional Academia des Ciencias, Cordoba, Argentine Republic.

Sociedad Cientifica Argentine, Buenos Ayres.

Museo Nacional, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil.

Sociedad de Geographia, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil.

Dr. Herman von Jhering, Dir. Zoil. Sec. Con. Geog. e Geol. de Sao
Paulo, Rio Grande do Sul, Brazil.

Deutscher Wissenschaftlicher Verein in Santiago, Santiago, Chili.
Societé Scientifique du Chili, Santiago, Chili.
Sociedad Guatemalteca de Ciencias, Guatemala, Guatemala.

PROGRAM

OF THE

SLVV ENT LE et ANNUAL MEE trie

OF IHE

INDIANA ACADEMY OF SCIENCE,

SHORTRIDGE HIGH SCHOOL, INDIANAPOLIS,

November 25, 19OA.

OFFICERS AND EX-OFFICIO EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE.

CARL L. MEES, President. J. H. RANSOM, Assistant Secretary.
GLENN CULBERTSON, Vice-President. G. A. ABBOTT, Press Secretary.
JOHN S. WRIGHT, Secretary. W. A. McBETH, Treasurer.
W.S. BLATCHLEY, THOMAS GRAY, O. P. Hay,
H. W. WItry, SraNLEY COULTER, T. C. MENDENHALL,
M. B. THomas, Amos W. BuTLer, JOHN C. BRANNER,
D. W. DgEnnis, W.A.NOoyEs, J.P. D. Joun,
C. H. EIGENMANN, J.C. ARTHUR, JOHN M. CouLtEr,
C. A. WaLpo, J. L.CaMPBELL, Davin 8. JORDAN.

The sessions of the Academy will be held in the Shortridge High School. The Presi-
dent’s address will be given in the auditorium of the Shortridge High School.

Headquarters will be at the English Hotel. A rate of $2.00 and up per day, American
plan, will be made to all persons who make it known at the time of registering that they

are members of the Academy.
Reduced railroad rates for the members can not be secured under the present pattae of
the Traffic Association. Many of the colleges can secure special rates on the various roadg.

PROGRAM COMMITTEE.

GrorGE W. Beyron, Indianapolis. Joun S. Wricut, Indianapolis.
KATHERINE E. GOLDEN, Lafayette.

GENERAL PROGRAM.

THURSDAY, NOVEMBER 24.
Meeting of Executive Committee at Hotel Headquarters................--- 8:00 p. m.

Fripay, NOVEMBER 25.

(Glare nul Scions noaacouh 5050 Boodab bebe dasa bddddeds UaUO dou decd DoponadbeDGOKNe: 9:00 a. m.
TOR halted ANG eae sdoo cuss dag SDao0d oO ddbo 0O00 0000 doHODN cS0U.00D8 000006 11:00 a. m.
General Session, followed by Sectional Meetings............ceceeceeeee cee 2:00 p. m.

LIST OF PAPERS TO BE READ.

ADDRESS BY THE RETIRING PRESIDENT,
CART EE: MEES;
At ll o’clock Friday morning, at Shortridge High School.
Subject: ‘Electricity and Matter; Recent Developments.’’

The following ,apers will be read in the order in which they appear on the program,
except that certain papers will be presented “ pari passu’’ in sectional meetings. Whena
paper is called and the reader is not present, it will be dropped to the end of the list, unless
by mutual agreement an exchange can be made with another whose time is approximately
the same. Where no time was sent with the papers, they have been uniformly assigned ten
minutes. Opportunity will be given after the reading of each paper for a brief discussion.

N. B.— By the order of the Academy, no paper can be read until an abstract of its contents or
the written paper has been placed in the hands of the Secretary.

GENERAL.
LeOMyeOUust=—Oruse ANGuiOChs Lonme =:, ices + eine ocrsicea’ cc ascents crete) v.cre mae. cte/ela are Robert Hessler
2. Old Water Power Mills of Carroll County, 10m........... Oe ae cee Fred J. Breeze
3. Photography for the Nature Student (illustrated by the stereopticon), 20 m. ~
Benjamin W. Douglass
**4, The Rosebud Indian Celebration, 10m.......................++--+---- Albert B. Reagan
PHYSICS, MATHEMATICS, ASTRONOMY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY.
5. A Device for Determining the Period of a Pendulum, 5 m.....Herman S. Chamberlain
6. Some Experiments with a Simple Jolly Balance, 10 m............... Lynn B. McMullen
RONG SRDS Sel oer) vectra ice neie es cna seine acem'siere 60:2 Rolla R. Ramsey and W. P. Haseman
8. Electro-Magnetic Induction in Different Conductors, 10 m.

Arthur L. Foley and C. A. Evans
9. Interference Fringes from the Path of an Electric Discharge, 5 m.
Arthur L. Foley and J. H. Haseman
10. On the Deformation of Surfaces Referred to a Conjugate System of Lines, 10 m.
; Burke Smith

11. Warped Surfaces with two Distinct Rectilinear Directrices, 10 m........... C. A. Waldo
12. A New Form of Mathematical Models, 10m .... .........e.eee cece cece tees C. A. Waldo
13. Measures of Some Neglected Pairs of Double Stars,5m ...............-- John A. Miller
14. An Esker in Tippecanoe County, Indiana, 10 m...........-....... 02+. eee W.A. McBeth
Te Notes OnEthenvVIssIssippleDelta,plormse se eect ce sits ofa 15 ais ate «le lols « ole oiaie ro oiete W.A. McBeth

lia. The Newtonian Idea of the Calculus, 20 m..........- 2.2.2. 2222 cece eeeee- A.S. Hathaway

50

ble
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.

#993.
*24,
=

296

or

28.
29.
30.
3l.

32.
Soe
34.
35.
36.
aT.

ETHNOLOGY.
The: Cli Dwellersiof Arizona, Om se-cec- ease eae ee eee cote e eee Albert B. Reagan
All Saints’ Day at Jemez, New Mexico, 10 m............ 22.2.0 +... 2-0: Albert B. Reagan
ThetPenrtentiessa Om: o.2s5-c sence emencee cesar cee te, aa Albert B. Reagan
Pho Mtatachins Dance, 0imts asc o-e. eee oe <n Eee eee Albert B. Reagan
schesMoccasn.Games Oi ose oss teen ose er ee ee ee Albert B. Reagan
TheyApachewledreineEG ames 10 meee eae eee oe eee eer eee Albert B. Reagan

The Apache Ceremonies Performed Over the Daughter of C 30, 10 m. Albert B. Reagan

BOTANY AND ZOOLOGY.

AvHeronry near tushville, (ndianaso Wl. sss 2a: cae eee se eae oe cee ose D. W. Dennis
Notes from the Indiana State Forestry Reservation, 10 m......... Charles Piper Smith
Notes Upon Some Little Known Members of the Indiana Flora, 10 m.

Charles Piper Smith

Pollination of Campanula Americana, 3 m...........--- Rtas eee Moses N. Elrod
Additions to the Indiana hloras Driers soos cee e eee eee acs eee ene Charles C. Deam
Physiological Apparatus for Botany, 10m..................... Seas Frank M. Andrews
On the Nomenclature of Fungi Having Many Fruit Forms, 15m.......... J.C. Arthur
Amphispores of the Grass and Sedge Rusts, 15 m................... ..------ J.C. Arthur
Preliminary Notes on the North American Species of the Genus Cuscuta

iby abstract) .10 mc cco coeus codes cc cscinemweseesecminss, Gepcemeewes Stanley Coulter
‘The Poisonous:Plants of Indiana; 10am... 22.6555 -.ce0c sei cesciss se oee cer Stanley Coulter
Birdsiand| Eirwits sl Ouse cae ce olka tere eee eee eo Le hoa A. W. Butler
The Sclerenchymatous Tyloses in Brosimum Aubletii,10m..... Katherine E. Golden
The Effect of Environment on the Action of Cytase,10m......... Katherine E. Golden
Additions to the Flora of Marion County, Indiana,3m........ Benjamin W. Douglass
Additions to the List of Gall Producing Insects, common to Indiana

(abstract) Sumines cc son cece see oie oe ee re orl ee Pee eee ee Mel T. Cook

“Not presented.
=*By title.

31

EDITORIAL NOTICE.

All members of the Academy will doubtless be ready to assist in any efforts put forth
having in view correct and early publications of the Proceedings. To this end the following
conditions of publication are announced by the editor:

1. All papers to be included in the report of 1904 must be in the hands of the editor not
later than December 10, 1904.

2. All papers should be typewritten as far as the nature of the subject will allow.

3. All tracings and maps should be drawn to correspond with the size of the page of the
Proceedings, and must come within the following limits: 4'4x7 inches. If necessary it
may be made to cover two pages, or measure 84x11 inches.

4. Authors are especially requested to carefully mark and number all illustrations, and
to carefully indicate in the MSS. the exact location of such illustrations.

5. To insure proper representation of mathematical work, authors are particularly
cautioned to send in carefully traced figures on separate paper.

6. The limits of the appropriation require that all illustrations shall be in one color,

and either photographs or etchings. As a consequence, all illustrations must be in black
and white.

32

THE TWENTIETH ANNUAL MEETING OF THE
INDIANA ACADEMY OF SCIENCE.

The twentieth annual meeting of the Indiana Academy of Science was
held in Indianapolis, Thursday and Friday, November 24 and 25, 1904.

Thursday at 8 p. m. the Executive Committee met in session at hotel
headquarters.

President Carl L. Mees, at 9 a. m. Friday, called the Academy to
order in general session in the assembly hall of the Shortridge High School.
The transaction of routine and miscellaneous business occupied the atten-
tion of the Academy until 11 a. m., when the retiring President, Carl L.
Mees, delivered an address upon: ‘‘Electricity and Matter; Recent De-

a)

velopments. Following this address came an adjournment until 2 p. m.,
when papers of general interest were presented before the Academy as a
whole. From 3:30 to 5 p. m., the time for adjournment, sectional meet-

ings were held.

THE SPRING MEETING OF 1904.

The spring meeting of 1904 was held at Indianapolis, Thursday and
Friday, April 28 and 29.

On Thursday evening an informal meeting was arranged at the Com-
mercial Club. The principal topic for discussion was the interference of
the Academy’s set date of meeting with the dates usnally chosen by the
American Association for the Advancement of Science. The point was
finally settled by making the date of the 1904 winter meeting November 24
and 25.

Friday morning most of the members of the Academy attended the
meetings of the Indiana Science Teachers’ Association.

Friday noon the Indianapolis members were the hosts at a luncheon at
the Commercial Club.

Later various excursions were enjoyed by various members, some visit-
ing the Kingan packing plant, others the Central Hospital for the Insane,
and still other enthusiasts tramped over the country north and northeast
of Indianapolis, under the leadership of W. S. Blatchley, studying the
geological and botanical features of that district.

City Dust—CavusE anpD EFFECT.
ROBERT HESSLER.

This paper is in line with one read a year ago on “Cold and Colds”
and is really a continuation of the same subject. The influence of dust
on the health of man is, however, such a vast one that in a brief paper
like this only one or two phases can be taken up.

In a general way we can say that dust is a product and an accompani-
ment of civilization. There are of course special kinds of dust with
whose production man has nothing to do, such as the dust of sandy
deserts, voleanic dust, and the dust arising along the trails of animals
going to salt licks, ete., but in a general way the terms dust and man go
together. Dust is solid matter in a state of fine division, so fine that
it can be wafted or blown about by the wind. Among primitive people
there is little dust, their mode of life forbids its formation and their
nomadic or out of door existence prevents its accumulation.

Paradoxical as it may seem, the amount of dust in a modern city
is not an index of a high degree of civilization, no more than is the
presence of dirt and filth or its accumulation in a house an index of a
high social standing of a family.

In a general way it may be said that accumulation of dust in a
city is the result of the ignorance of common sanitary laws, of apathy
on the part of the citizens, and ct bad politics in those having the man-
agement of municipal affairs. A housewife who allows dust to accu-
mulate is said to be slovenly; a tidy housekeeper is one who gets rid
of the dust as soon as possible and does not allow it to accumulate. We
have not yet reached a point where we can make similar distinctions be-
tween cities—we simply speak of one place being less dirty than another.

Cosmopolitan travelers tell us how clean some people and their cities
are and how the streets correspond with the interior of their houses.
The Japanese and the Dutch seem to stand at the head of the list, but
I have no doubt that in the course of time other nations will reach
the same standard of cleanliness, and, I may add, of general health.

Kinds of Dust: Confining ourselves to the kinds of dust due to the
activity of man and disregarding special or rare kinds, such as factory
dust, for instance, we can in a general way distinguish two kinds.

3—A. OF SCIENCE, ’04.

oF

1. Common country road dust, due to the attrition of solid matter--
the hoofs of the horse and the wheels of the vehicle on the road material,
the stone or gravel or merely the common dirt. This kind of dust is
mixed with only a small amount of other, vegetable, matter, the drop-
pings of horses chiefly. Irom a sanitary standpoint it is not very ob-
jectionable, although it may be so esthetically.

2. City dust, the dust of the sanitarian, the dust par excellence. City
dust has @ complex composition. Most of it comes from the droppings of
horses and originally existed in the form of hay, oats and corn. The fine-
ness of the particles depends on the length of time it remains on the street
to be pulverized by traftic. The wear of the street paving material under
the horse’s hoof and of vehicles adds an appreciable amount; more is
added by litter falling from passing wagons, or is brought in from the
mud roads adhering to the wheels. Soot, due to the imperfect com-
bustion of coal, lends character to the city dust and in our American
cities there is much of it, especially during the cold season of the year,
Man himself adds not a little directly: the wear and tear of clothing and
the shedding of epidermal scales adds a minute quantity—and much
comes from his mouth, in the form of tobacco juice, saliva, and the
abnormal secretions due to an unhealthy condition of the mucous mem-
branes. City dust acquires peculiar properties on this account and thus
making it differ radically from all other forms of dust.

More might be said on the causation of dust, but much more Gan be
said concerning its influence or effects, aud to this I will now turn.

Effects of Dust: The most noticeable effect of city dust is that it
makes a city, its houses and inhabitants, look dirty. The dust is blown
all about and settles over everything, indoors and out, and the house-
Wife is kept busy trying to keep things looking clean.

There is an old saying about an ill wind that blows nobody good.
The laundryman flourishes in a dusty city, clean linen means frequent
laundering. The doctor flogzishes because dust means sickness and
disease. ‘There is good money in that for me,” a physician remarked, as
a dense cloud of dust was seen coming down the street. But the indi-
vidual, par excellence, benefited is the patent medicine man; he flourishes
exceedingly in a dusty city and his nostrums are in great demand.

Now this brings up a phase of city life and of the city dust ques-
tion that is rarely considered. The scientist who has no medical educa-

tion and no practical experience with eilments and diseases can not

30
fully realize the importance of the subject, while, on the other hand, the
average physician pays too little attention to the scientific but non-
medical aspects of it. As a matter of fact most physicians are so dis-
gusted with the subject, and patent medicines are in such bad repute
with them, that they think it beneath their dignity to notice it—and
so the patent medicine man flourishes unmolested.

But, it will be argued, if the patent medicine man flourishes that
is evidence that his wares are in demand; if there were no demand he
would not flourish. Of course. The law of demand and supply might
be quoted. It might also be said that reading maketh a full man—but
that hardly applies to the reader of the patent medicine advertisements
in the newspapers.

Consulting the Literature: Every worker in science knows what it
means to look up the literature of a subject. ‘‘Consulting the literature,”
is a common expression. Now when it comes to the kind of literature
just referred to we need not look far nor long to find it. The very first
newspaper or magazine you get hold of will be full of it. Did you
eyer examine, not to say study, such advertisements? Can it be said of
the man who does not and can not read that he is keeping back the
progress of his race in its attempts to solve the problems that are con-
stantly arising as man gets farther and farther away from the condition
of primitive man? The man who reads patent medicine literature for the
purpose of getting valuable or useful information is certainly to be
pitied.

In & general way patent medicines and the names of common ail-
ments, not to say diseases, go together; the one presupposes the other.
Ailments and diseases fall into groups, likewise do patent medicines and
their advertisements. If it can be shown that in some of our dusty
cities in which the spitting habit prevails three-fourths of the patent
medicines are advertised for ailments directly due to the inhalation of
city dust, we at once see the importance of the question of pure and
impure air and we dimly realize the effects of the dust.

We all know that life depends on the exidation of organic substances
used as food, enabling us to keep up bodily activities. Oxidation means
the use of air. Pure air is an important factor in determining health;
very impure air can not sustain life and partially impure air may place

the body at a disadvantage in the struggle with its surroundings.

36

Individually susceptibility to impure air differs widely. When impure
air is badly borne and bodily functioning is not carried on normally, we
speak of ill-health and disease. Disease may result from the use of bad
air, and in a general -way, bad air means air contaminated by dust, as
already mentioned.

Ailments and diseases have a cause, just like all other phenomena in-
this world. Some diseases are due to parasites, the preying of one form
of life upon another. Some forms of life flourish only at the expense of
human beings and are constantly transferred from one person to another.
Some diseases and their causes are always among us, such as consump-
tion and malaria; others come and go, as cholera and yellow fever. Some
diseases are transferred mainly through the drinking water, as typhoid
fever and cholera; other diseases are propagated by the bite of the mos-
quito, as yellow fever and malaria. Some diseases are transmitted
through the agency of dust, and hence we speak of air-borne diseases,
like tuberculosis, pneumonia, bronchitis and the like.

Some diseases are well defined and can be readily diagnosed, such
as those just mentioned; others are obscure and their causes ill-defined.
In a general way it may be said that the names of diseases and ailments
in common use are hames of ill-defined application, that is, there is
nothing definite about them, and they are not used in the best medical
literature of today. The words “cold,” “biliousness,” ‘‘catarrh,”’ ‘‘rheu-
matism,” and the like, do not express apything definite.

Air-borne diseases like tuberculosis and pneumonia are known as
specific diseases due to a definite cause; if the cause is absent then the
effect, the disease, will also be absent. Ailments are minor affections
and are not always due to some one definite cause: headache or a pain
in the arm are ailments and may arise from a variety of causes.

It is scarcely necessary to make any specific reference to the science
of bacteriology—which concerns itself with what are popularly known as
“oerms,” or to the number of established facts which it embraces. Any-
one arguing in opposition to bacteria as a cause of diseases will not even
get a respectful hearing from a qualified bacteriologist—it seems to him a
waste of time. A man might as well deny the theory of universal gravita-
tion as to deny the germ theory of disease.

Ailments Due to Infected Dust: Inhaling city dust may bring on a
variety of ailments, as well as definite diseases. City residents may com-

plain of various pains and aches during or after the prevalence of a dust

37

storm or after having been confined to a room or hall with a dusty atmos-
phere, and country people may complain of not feeling well every time
they come from a trip to the dusty city or take a ride on a dusty rail-
way car. Although the effects of inhaling a bad atmosphere or dust differ
somewhat in different individuals, yet by observing certain individuals for
a long time, and observing a great many now and then, we may be able
to draw some conclusions with a reasonable degree of accuracy.

In a general way it may be said that when the air is free from
sputum or expectoration, certain ailments and diseases are also absent.
The Japanese are remarkably free from ailments that are very common
among us: The Japanese do not spit and they also have clean homes.
North pole explorers and weather observers on high mountains are free
from colds, catarrh, rheumatic aches and pains, bronchitis, and a host
of other ailments and diseases—simply because the air is pure and the
active causes are absent. *

The inhalation of a sputum contaminated air has been found to pro-
duce a definite reaction in man. In some individuals a reaction occurs
under even a slight exposure, others may require a severe exposure, some
may escape entirely. We know that in some of the epidemic diseases
there are always some individuals who escape. The reaction due to in-
haling infected air or dust, may be characterized about as follows: There
is an irritation of the mucous Membranes; vague wandering pains or
aches throughout the body, mostly referable to the muscles and ligaments,
and at times more strongly localized at some point, as in the back or in
an arm; there is a feeling of lassitude or discomfort, rising to severe
headache, feverishness, loss of appetite and even vomiting. In some indi-
viduals there is cough on account of the unusual irritation of the respira-
tory mucous membranes; some complain mainly of the nervous symptoms
and the inability of applying themselves to any task; in some the wander-
ing or localized pains may predominate.

The above symptoms have been grouped together and the name Dust
Disease has been applied to them. When, therefore, we say a man has
dust disease, we at once have some definite idea of the nature of his
ailment, and of its cause.

As a general rule an attack of dust disease declines and disappears
of its own accord in the course of a day or a few days, but in a bad
atmosphere it may continue for several weeks. Other diseases, like bron-

9
19)

FD

chitis, tonsilitis and pneumonia or tuberculosis may follow, and we can
never be sure that an attack will pass off lightly.

Now if we study the advertisements of patent medicines in the news-
papers we will find that they vary in amount, that is in number and size,
being most common in the fall and spring and when the dust is at its
maximum, and least common in the summer—when the streets are
sprinkled and the sputum is sterilized by the hot rays of the sun. We
will moreover find that three-fourths of the names of the ailments, not
to speak of diseases, mentioned in the newspaper advertisements are
simply synonyms of dust disease and are due to the inhalation of dust.
I will give a list: cold, hoarseness, throat trouble, sickening breath, foul
breath, catarrh, grip, sore throat, tonsilitis, pleurisy, a stitch in the side,
backache, kidney complaint, kidney disease, lumbago, stiff back, lame
back, rheumatism, muscular rheumatism, a touch of rheumatism, aching
joints, headache, sick headache, nervous headache, neuralgia, nervous
prostration, the blues, brain fag, neurasthenia, biliousness, bilious fever,
a touch of malaria. All of these names should of course be in quotation
marks. We find also the terms dizziness, faintness, irritability, restless-
ness and sleeplessness given as names of ailments, and faceache and car
sickness are mentioned as diseases.

Now I do not mean to say that in every case of ill-health or of sick-
ness, where the above names are applied, the cause is to be traced to the
inhalation of infected dust, because something else may be at the bottom
of it, but I believe that most cases of such self-diagnosed ailments (and
where the afHlicted individual calls for an advertised nostrum at the drug
store) are simply cases of dust infection. Hyen stomach and bowel dis-
turbances in many instances come under the same head, that is, caused
by the dust—if not by inhalation, then by the dust which settles on food,
as the cold victuals of a dusty restaurant or on fruits and vegetables ex-
posed to the dust of the street. As a matter of fact there is a form of
dust infection which manifests itself mainly by a disturbance of the
gastric mucous Membranes, with abundant secretion of mucus and often
accompanied by severe vomiting.

Where one symptom, or its location in the body, dominates, it may
give character to the ailment and thereby determine its popular name,
or its patent medicine name. For instance, if the secretion of mucus

or muco-pus is the chief symptom then we have “ecatarrh;”’ if the pain in

39

the back predominates, we hear the words “backache,” or “lumbago” or
“rheumatism,” or even “disease of the kidneys.”

One of the peculiarities of the human iind is that the moment a name
is given to a thing, to a phenomenon or even a sensation, it is, by many
men at least, regarded as a something definite, as an entity. This is es-
pecially true in the case of abnormal conditions of the human body. The
average man does not regard an ailment simply as a warning from na-
ture that something is wrong and that means should be taken to correct
the cendition—by removing the cause, but he regards it as an entity that
should or must be overcome by an antagonist, an antidote, or in other
words a “medicine.” Hence a pain calls for a “pain killer’ and a cough
for a “cough cure.” That chronic ill-health and disease may result
from such a course is well known to medical men, and that is why they
say the more patent medicines the people use the more work there is
for the doctors.

With the active cause constantly present, that is infective dust, there
are of course many cases of ill-health. Minor ailments make up the
great mass of daily complaints of ill-health. There may be simple mal-
aise or lassitude, or well defined aches and pains for which we are
not able to account and take them as a matter of course. The relationship
between a ride on a dusty street car on the way down town or the con-
finement to an illy-ventilated, dusty room or an exposure to clouds of
street dust, to a subsequent attack of running nose or feverishness,
wandering pains and aches or headache or biliousness or loss of appetite,
is seldom considered. People have to have their attention called to these
things and led to realize that a polluted atmosphere means ill-health and
may lead to a well-defined disease.

The Patent Medicine Habit: When a man feels bad he of course
wants something to make him feel good or well. Simple means, such as
quiet, rest, fasting, good air, may be all that is needed for a day or
two to enable nature to bring about a-normal condition. But few persons
pursue such a course: It is easier to stop in at the drug store and eall
for one of those widely advertised nostrums guaranteed to “kill the pain”
or “stop the cough.” Repeated and increased doses may be required,
but that does not matter so long as relief follows, and no serious thought
is given the matter until nature rebels and a serious disease is the result.
Pain in nearly every case is simply a warning that something is wrong,

40

and a cough in most instances is simply an effort on nature’s part to get
rid of some irritating material. When we get a particle of food into
the windpipe we cough until it comes up, but when the cough is due to
the inhalation of a mass of irritating dust particles we (that is, some of
us) use a “cough cure.”

With the active cause, the infected dust, so plentifully present and
with a frequent reaction or effect, that is the presence of an ailment, we
have hence another effect: a large variety of nostrums or patent medi-
cines—to counteract the reaction due to inhaling infected dust. In ad-
vertising these the long list of names giver above is used. Usually some
one name is given in large type, followed by several others in smaller
type and from time to time there is a shifting, one of the synonyms in
the small type will be advanced to head the list. There are several sets
of these words or names, depending on the part of the body where the
symptoms of the dust infection are mainly localized. If, for instance the
pain is mainly in the back, the chief word and the minor ones will likely
be: BACKACHE, lumbago, rheumatism, diseases of the kidneys; by
changing we get DISEASE OF THE KIDNEYS, backache, lumbago, ete.,
each of the words being in turn used in large type. For the throat and
chest we have: COLD, catarrh, grip, threat trouble, weak lungs, tonsil-
itis, ete. Tor the nervous conditions we Lave words like headache, neu-
ralgia, biliousness, neurasthenia, etc. With a large list of words there
can be considerable shifting about. All these points are brought out in
the clippings which I will show. The relative amount of space occupied
by patent medicine advertisements in the newspapers of different Indiana
towns and cities will also be shown by clippings. An examination will
show that a minimum of such advertisements in a city Means a com-
paratively clean city, while, on the other hand, in a dirty and dusty city
the newspapers are full of advertisements of patent medicines relating
to ailments and diseases directly attributable to the inhalation of a dust
polluted atmosphere. Nature exacts her dues. What the people save
by neglecting to keep their cities clean, they are compelled to spend, or
do spend, for patent medicines in the yain attempt to counteract the
evil infiuence of the dust. A comparative study of patent medicine ad-
vertisements in the newspapers of different cities, states and nations,
furnishes much food for thought. Civie pride and dust seem incem-

patible. To ke able to point with pride to one’s home city is quite

41

bs ¥ f
different from having to explain to your visiting friend why everything
is dirty and dusty.

It would be interesting to know the financial aspects or statistics of
this subject, the cost of keeping a city clean and the cost of time lost on
account of ill-health and the cost of so-called remedies used in attempting
to counteract the evil influence of the dust. There is of course a wide
gap between a headache or a cold and preumonia or tuberculosis, there
are all stages of ill-health between such extremes and between the at-
tendant loss of time and money.

Some of the nostrums are advertised for the cure of specific diseases
like tuberculosis or consumption—a disease easily curable as a rule, in its
early stages, but not by swallowing a lot of patent medicines. What is
not claimed for patent medicines is not worth claiming. That reputable
physicians do not prescribe patent medicines needs scarcely be mentioned.

It is of some interest to know that some of the most widely adver-
tised nostrums can be made at a cost of one or two cents per gallon—
the container and label of many costing more than the ingredients. There
must of necessity be a large margin of profit or a “medicine” costing a
few cents and selling for a dollar could not be advertised so extensively
and so persistently.

In conclusion: As our country becomes more and more densely popu-
lated various sanitary problems arise and press for solution. This is
especially true of our cities. Houses of brick and stone are displacing
those built of wood and thus lessening the danger from fire.. The open
ditch has given place to the underground sewer; the mud road to the
paved street. Shallow wells disappear before the advent of water works,
and the latter themselves are getting a better supply by means of filtra-
tion.

Water-borne diseases have been reduced to a minimum in many cities
and epidemics are prevented. The occurrence of many diseases, such as
the plague, cholera, typhus, smallpox and the like, have been reduced to
a minimum, if not entirely prevented, by proper precautions, based on a
proper knowledge of their active cause and its diffusion.

What about preventing the ravages of ailments and diseases trans-
mitted through the agency of the dust? What are we doing to reduce the
amount of dust to a minimum? What efforts are we making to have
pure air in our public halls, churches, street cars, and in the city gener-
ally?

42

What shall we do with the persistent floor and sidewalk spitter?
Will education cause him to be displaced Ly a generation of non-spitters?
What can we do for the poor, ignorant man, and his family, who keeps
himself poor buying patent medicines—medicines which may give relief

but which can not cure.

The chief charts used in illustrating ike paper were as follows:

1. Chart showing the common names used in patent medicine adver-
tisements. The names were arranged in three columns, the first giving
names of ailments of a catarrhal nature or of the respiratory system,
and marked in red; the second column, marked in blue, contained names

of the rheumatic and aching type, thus::

‘SCatarrh” “‘Rheumatism ”’

‘*Colds”’ ‘* Backache ”’

‘“Grip-? ‘*Lame Back’’

‘*Sore Throat ’’ ‘*Kidney Disease ”’

‘‘ Pleurisy ”’ ‘‘ Aching Joints ”’
Ete. Ete.

In the third column were given the names used more especially in con-
nection with the nervous and gastric manifestations of dust infection,
such as nervousness, headache, neuralgia, gastritis, a touch of malaria,
ete.

2. Chart showing the amount of space occupied by advertisements of
patent medicines in the newspapers of different cities and towns. The
total space occupied by medical ads of all kinds, and that means of nos-
trums and of quacks, varied from 2.5 to 14.2 per cent., while the ads of
dust disease nostrums (as indicated on chart 1) varied from 1.1 per cent.
in a comparatively clean city, up to 10 per cent. (and even more) in a
dusty city.

(Are we justified in concluding that if the inhabitants of a clean
city pay $1.10 per year, those of a dusty city are compelled at the same
time to pay $10.00 for patent medicines?)

3. An exhibit of the total number of ads and the amount of space
they occupy in newspapers of half a dozen different cities. Clippings all
pasted on jong rolls of paper. The contrast between a clean and a dusty

city is thus shown in a striking manner.

45

4. A selection of large ads, some occupying a full page. Most of
these appeared at times when the dust was at its maximum, namely in the
fall and again in the spring. The title of this sheet was: ‘‘Who Pays the
Biil?”

5. Chart showing the seasonal prevalence of patent medicine ads.
The fall and spring tides; low ebb in the summer. (In the summer the
sputum on the sidewalks is sterilized by the hot rays of the sun, the
streets are sprinkled and doors and windows are open.)

6. Clippings pasted on sheets showing the changes in names in the
same advertisement at different times of the year, and from day to day
or week to week. The words catarrh, colds, rheumatism, kidney disease.
etc., being marked in red or blue—as indicated on chart No. 1.

45
Aw ESKER IN TIPPECANOE County, IND.

Won. A. McBETH.

An Esker in Tippecanoe County, Indiana.

An esker or serpent kame is a serpentine ridge of sand and gravel evi-
dently formed by a stream flowing in a tunnel at the bottom of a glacier
or in a canyon through it.

An interesting example of this feature extends through sections 1, 2,
11, and 10, Town 21 north, Range 5 west, in Tippecanoe County, Indiana.
Its northeast end is about one-half mile southwest of South Raub, a sta-

tion on the C. I. & L. Ry. (Monon Route) nine miles south of Lafayette.

46

From the station and railway, it is visible and easily distinguished from
the bordering prairie lands by its forested surface.

This ridge exceeds two miles in length and varies in height from a
few feet at the ends to fifty or sixty feet along the main body. Its sides
slope at angles of 20° to 35° away from the arching crest. Its height
is quite uniform, but few irregularities occurring in the whole length.
The base of the ridge is from twenty to thirty rods wide.

An interesting observation is that the outside or convex sides of
bends have the steeper slopes, a fact bearing on the theory of stream
origin.

The material is stream gravel assorted from the glacial drift arranged
in layers which slope to the southwest. This arrangement of the mate-
rial indicates stream action and shows the course of the stream that de-
posited the esker. Excavations to obtain gravel for road making occur
at points x x x shown on the map and the characteristic structure is
shown in each. Mounds of gravel occur in line with the general trend of
the esker at each end. <A chain of these elevations extends a mile from
the southwest end.

The valley, a half mile wide, comprising the esker trough, extends
from the vicinity of South Raub station to the Independence-Darlington
moraine near Sugar Grove, where it crosses the divide and connects with
the valley of Shawnee Creek, which flows west. The trough is now tray-
ersed by the Little Wea Creek, which flows northeast, just the reverse
of direction followed by the stream which built the esker. This creek
rises at the gap through the moraine at Sugar Grove and it leaves the
trough by a deep narrow valley through another moraine at a little dis-
tance north of South Raub. Mounds of gravel near the station and fur-
ther to the northeast may lie in the course of the stream that deposited
the esker.

The problem of the slope of the esker trough opposite to the direc-
tion of the sub-glacial stream that originally corraded it suggests the
explanation of hydrostatic pressure in the tunnel.

1 he cause of the deposit of gravel and sand as an esker may be re-
lated to the reverse slope of the esker trough causing the stream to grade
up to a slope line in the opposite direction, which would carry it over
the divide at Sugar Grove.

47

Notes oN THE DELTA OF THE MissrissippPI RIVER.

Witiiam A. McBETH.

The large scale map of the Alluvial Valley of the Lower Mississippi
River published by the Mississippi River Commission, St. Louis, Mo., is a
fine example of map making and a most valuable adjunct to geography
study in the public high schools and colleges.

A study of this map reveals many interesting facts related to the
growth of the delta that the stream has formed in the edge of the Gulf
of Mexico. Various questions are suggested by this study. What land
area has been added to the continent by the river? What facts or fea-
tures observable on the map indicate delta area? What is the origin of
such lakes as Pontchartrain, Maurepas and Grand? How do the lakes
in the delta differ from those along the river above Baton Rouge? What
do the bays along the seaward border of the delta indicate as to the
manner of growth of the land area and of the origin of lakes in the
delta? Why does the river become straighter toward the mouth? What
is the cause of the abrupt bend just below New Orleans? Why does
the river flow so persistently to the southeast through the delta?

It is generally stated that the delta extends from the mouth of Red
River southward because here the distributary farthest upstream leaves
the river. This statement seems somewhat arbitrarily derived from the
earlier definition which describes a delta as the land included within the
divided mouths of a river, rather than the land formed by a river about
its mouth. A line extended from Baton Rouge to New Iberia connects
the south edges of the uplands on the opposite sides of the river and
seems a proper division between the filled valley above and the area of
added land or delta proper. South of this line, the great fan of the
delta projects, breaking the great curve of the north shore of the gulf.
Below this line the shape and size of the lakes change abruptly from
narrow, ox-bow lakes, formed by the river cutting across the necks of its
bends, to large, broad, irregular shaped lakes, evidently formed by irregu-
lar deposit, leaving areas of the gulf unfilled. Lake Pontchartrain, for ex-
ample, is a portion of the former gulf surface inclosed between the up-
lands to the north of it and the advancing delta on the south. Notice
how near the south shore of this lake the river flows. Notice the stream
from within the limits of New Orleans extending along the strip of land

Fa

1

a
re)
3

cf
9

ee Sn MH
“<W eat

ae me Pn
x AS of Ais hia
a i pele We rei ae

‘i nt 1H ft ] :

4, aA “ IK te mi)
1 : ep | OFT ent ty eh Se &
iy if | Vid i if : e ao ‘3
' i Nal [| iM 31 Mh Hi Al WD a! as: e
rh { | } ay ig mh LY I . ! aa gS
Tl) cM XK af I hk DH i 1
o we na Ali; it i eal 4! ph AN >
thee tt AeA T RT ea ‘All
eA raf Min ip “| RGM A AMS
i . tin fine a, va eat ne
ae a >in We ih

Meg

ra Sa : N
yf ee :

a»
wn
oS

SS (Joh
ae

—
: Fa zal
ri =
' aa (

=== oS
==

ai ay if i ELA
li; . :
_"

AO miles

The Delta of t 16 9
Mississippi River
20 ™1.

49

between Lake Pontchartrain and Lake Borgne. This stream is evidently
a former distributary of the main stream. The bays along the edge of
the delta of which Barataria, Timbalier end Terre Bonne are examples,
show how the advancing delta arms extend around areas of gulf and
hem them in. Notice particularly Bay Marchand, at the mouth of Bayou
la Fourche, and the separation of Timbalier and Terre Bonne bays by the
long narrow delta of Bayou Terre Bonne.

This inclosing process is aided by the formation of barrier beaches
from point to point by wave action. True delta area is further indicated
by the straighter course of the river below Baton Rouge. The river is
very meandering through the whole length of the alluvial valley on
account of the gentle slope of the river bed, but below Baton Rouge it
becomes increasingly straight, although in the distance of two hundred
forty miles the fall is but five feet, or one-fourth inch per mile. _As
streams always acquire the meandering habit on gentle slopes, this ap-
parent contradiction of the law of stream flow furnishes an interesting
problem. I piopose this explanation: The river flowing into the gulf
produces a current some distance out from the shore along the sides of
which the sediment is deposited more rapidly than in the swifter central
line of flow. Finally the narrow mud banks appear above the surface
along the course laid out by the current in the still waters of the gulf.
The tendency to meander shown at the head of the delta indicates the
inclination of the stream to conform to law. The stream is forming
meanders. Below New Orleans an abrupt bend appears as an apparent
refutation of the explanation of the straight lower course. This bend
represen:s an accident in the direct forward movement of the delta. Ob-
serve the streams beginning near the eastern curve of this bend and the
tract of land extending east and partially inclosing Lake Borgne and
Mississippi Sound on the south. These streams and this strip of land
indicate a former course of the river. A crevass across the narrow south
bank caused the abandonment of the part below and the abrupt turn of
the river. <A crevass called “The Jump,” twenty miles above the mouth
ot the river, indicates how a repetition of the above accident may occur.
A submarine fan is approaching the surface outside of this gap. The
southeast trend of the river through the delta and of the main area of
the delta itself may be due to the eastward movement of the Gulf

Stream off shore which deflected the incoming river current to the east.

4—A. or Screncr, ’04.

51

THE Poisonous PuLants oF INDIANA.

STANLEY COULTER.

It is the purpose in this paper to consider only those plants occurring
within the limits of Indiana, which are said to be contact poisons. The
list as assembled from various authorities is sufficiently extended to raise
question as to the character of the facts upon which the forms were
included among the contact poisons. The list, as I have been able to
eollate it, is as follows:

Alisma Plantago-aquatica L. Water plantain.

Arisaema triphyllum (L.) Torr. Jack in the Pulpit. Indian Turnip.

Arisaema Dracontium (L.) Schott. Green Dragon.

Spathyema fcetida (L.) Raf. Skunk Cabbage.

Veratrum yiride Ait. Indian Poke. White Hellebore.

Cypripedium hirsutum Mill. Yellow Lady’s Slipper.

Urtica gracilis Ait. Slender Nettle.

Urtica dioica L. Stinging Nettle.

Urticastrum divaricatum (L.) Kuntze. Wood Nettle.

Polygonum hydropiper L. Smartweed. Water Pepper.

Polygonum punctatum Ell. Water Smartweed.

Phytolacca decandra L. Pokeberry.

Actza rubra (Ait.) Willd. Red Baneberry.

Delphinium consolida L. Field Larkspur.

Anemone quinquefolia L. Wind flower. Wild Anemone.

Clematis Virginiana L. Virgin’s Bower. Wild Clematis.

Ranunculus sceleratus L. Ditch Crowfoot. Cursed Crowfoot.

Ranunculus acris L. Tall oc Meadow Buttercup.

Ranunculus bulbosus L. Bulbous Buttercup.

Podophyllum peltatum L. May Apple. Mandrake.

Sanguinaria Canadensis L. Bloodroot.

Cruciferae: Various genera, including the mustards, pepper-grass and
horseradish.

Drosera rotundifolia L. Round-leaved Sundew.

Ailanthus glandulosa Desf. Tree of Heaven.

Euphorbia: Not only all of the fourteen species reported from Indi-
ana, but all of the hundred of more species occurring in the United
States.

Rhus Vernix L. Poison Elder. Poison Ash. Poison Dogwood.

Rhus radicans L. Poison Ivy. Poison Oak.

Direa palustris L. Leatherwood. Moose-wood.

Aralia spinosa L. Angelica Tree. Hercules Club.

Solanum Dulcamara L. Poison Nightshade.

Datura Stramonium L. Jamestown or Jimson-weed. Thorn Apple.

Datura Tatula L. Purple-stemmed Jimson.

Verbascum Thapsus L. Common Mullein.

Catalpa Catalpa (L.) Karst. Catalpa. Indian Bean.

Lobelia inflata L. Indian Tobacco.

Xanthium strumarium L. Cocklebur. Burthistle.

Solidago: All species to be regarded with suspicion by persons with
sensitive skins. Solidago odora Ait., said to be particularly dangerous
because of a “volatile oil that is an irritant and rubefacient.”

Leptilon Canadense (L.) Britton. Horse-weed. Flea Bane.

Bidens frondosa L. Common Beggarticks. Spanish Needles.

Anthemis Cotula L. Common Dog-fennel.

Arctium Lappa L. Burdock.

To these may be added the commonly cultivated—

Tropeolum majus L. Nasturtium.

Nerium Oleander L. Oleander.

Primula obconica Hance. Primrose.

This is a rather startling array of dangerous plants, especially to the
field botanist who has been handling most of them with perfect impunity
for years. It occurred to me some years 2go that it would be interesting
to examine the list carefully and so far as possible to conduct a series of
experiments confirming or disproving the correctness of the inclusion of
the above forms in the list. This I have been able to do with the aid of
a number of students who offered themselves as subjects for the experi-
ments. In the last five years I have been able to secure twenty-two
persons to aid me in the work.

The most cursory examination breaks the preceding list into two
sharply separate groups. In the one the skin irritation is due to the action

of some specific substance of the plant, as in the case of Rhus; in the

53

- other the skin irritation is plainly due to mechanical causes. as in the case
of Arctium and Xanthium. There seems to be no good reason why any
plant with piercing surface outgrowths, such as Bur-grass (Cenchrus
tribuloides L.), should not be included in the latter group and the list
almost indefinitely extended. Very little was done experimentally with
such plants, for though persistent and sometimes festering sores may
result from handling them, the irritation is due to traumatic, not to toxic,
causes.

In the first group of plants an additional separation may be made into
those poisonous by mere handling and these whose poisonous properties
seem to be liberated only as the result of dry trituration or grinding, the
well known irritant effects of the dust arising from the dried roots of
Podophyllum being a case in point.

It will thus be found that the number of plants which are really con-
tact poisons, under ordinary handling is very much reduced and the long
continued immunity of those of us who have collected widely is not after
all as wonderful as it might at first seem. As a matter of fact it would
seem that any plant, which in any way and under any conditions however
extraordinary produced a skin irritation had been promptly placed among
the contact poisons. There is also to be considered the personal idiosyn-
cerasy. Some persons are peculiarly susceptible to plant poisons, either
because of an especially sensitive skin or of some constitutional condition
which makes them remarkably non-resistant to the sequelae of skin
lesions of any sort. Asa result of this consideration of the personal equa-
tion the list of plants poisonous by contact is still further reduced.

A rather careful experimental study of the plants in the above list has
been made with the following results:

In all cases the procedure was simpJe but was deemed sufficient to
demonstrate the poisonous or non-poisonous character of the plant. The
plant was first handled freely in the way of collecting and making herb-
arium specimens. If after some days. no results were apparent, the part
of the plant said to contain the poisonous element was rubbed upon the
back of the forearm until serum, and at times blood, exuded, the juice of
the plant and the serum being allowed to dry upon the arm. If no results
followed, it was considered safe to infer that the form was not a contact
poison.

Water plantain (Alisma Plantago-aquatica L), common throughout the
state in mud and shallow waters. is said by the National Dispensatory to

54

contain in the leaves “fan acrid principle strong enough to irritate the
skin.” No one of the twenty-two subjecis showed the slightest trace of
skin irritation as the result of treatment as indicated in the preceding
paragraph. The leaves were taken at different dates, but no results con-
firming the above statement were secured.

The Indian Turnip and Green Dragon (Ariszema triphyllum (L.) Torr.,
and A. Dracontium (L.) Schott) are said to be ‘‘violently acrid and almost
caustic in every part, frequently producing intolerable itching and in-
flammation of the skin.” None of the twenty-two subjects showed the
slightest unpleasant results from the free handling of the above species.
As a result of the more yigorous treatment five showed a vesicular in-
flammation lasting for three or four days. The inflammation was ac-
companied by considerable itching, which, however, was not so violent
as to merit the term “intolerable.” Of the five showing unpleasant effects,
two were young ladies, who proved so susceptible to almost any type of
skin lesions that they were unable to continue the work.

The Skunk Cabbage (Spathyema fcetida (L.) Raf.) is said to be “harm-
less as to the leaves, but with root so acrid as to produce intolerable itch-
ing and inflammation.’ No results were secured from frequent and rather
rough handling of the roots. Later the juice was expressed by pressure
and allowed to dry upon the arms, rubbed to extreme redness, of five
sub-ects. Neither itching nor inflammation resulted. The latter test was
repeated in April, May, June and September, four additional subjects
being used, but in every case failing to confirm the reputation of the plant
as a skin irritant.

Indian Poke (Veratrum viride Ait.), sparingly found in many localities,
growing in swamps and wet woods, will, it is alleged, if “applied to the
skin in moist condition cause redness and burning.’ The plant is so
occasional in its occurrence that it need scarcely be taken into account.
Two experiments upon myself gave absolutely no redness or burning. It
is, however, fair to state that these experiments should not be regarded as
determinative, since not even the poison ivy (Rhus radicans L.) produces
any skin irritation, except when the skin has been rubbed to redness with
the crushed leaves and the juice allowed to dry upon the surface.

Cypripedium hirsutum Mill., the Yellow Lady’s Slipper or Moccasin
flower, is said to be “irritating to the skin, in some cases poisoning as
severely as Rhus.” Eleven out of the twenty-two persons experimented

55

upon showed unpleasant effects from the mere handling of this species in
collection and determination. Six others were poisoned as a result of the
rubbing process, only five escaping entirely. In almost every class I have
numerous cases of poisoning easily referable to this form. The poisonous
property seems most active during the flowering season, the plant being
practically innocuous after seed maturation. The effect shows first as a
hyperzemia, later becoming vesicular and even pustular if untreated. It
yields readily, however, to ordinary emollient treatment and can be fairly
limited in its spread by frequently bathing the adjacent parts with alcohol.
My attention was first called to the poisonous character of the plant by
Dr. D. T. MacDougal and continued observation but serves to confirm the
view that many cases of poisoning attributed to the poison ivy should be
referred to this species. The attractiveness of the flower serves to lead
many persons to collect it in large masses and if the results reported
above are at all indicative, it is doubtless chargeable with many cases of
poisoning occurring in the early spring.

The nettles including Urtica dioica L., Urtica gracilis Ait. and Urtica-
strum divaricatum (L.) Kuntze, poison through the action of acrid con-
stituents, producing an intolerable burning. The inflammation, however,
yields so readily to treatment by cooling lotions and is so ephemeral in its
character if untreated, that the plants are to be considered as annoying
rather than poisonous. None of twenty-two subjects escaped the intense
burning following the handling of these forms. The inflamed condition
never persisted over two or three hours even after a rather vigorous
whipping of the skin with the plants.

Of the Smartweeds, two, Polygonum hydropiper L., and P. punctatum
Ell., it is said ‘‘cause itching and burning of the skin.’”’ In the experi-
ments tried this proved true if the expressed juice was applied to mucous
membranes, especially those of the eye. In no case was any irritation
observable where the application was to the skin. In this case also, the
irritation was but temporary and yielded readily to bathing the affected
parts in cold water.

That Pokeberry (Phytolacca decandra L.) contains a principle which
is an internal poison is well known. The claim, however, that the ‘green
plant and root irritate the skin, affecting chiefly mucous membranes,”
does not seem to be so well made out. Only eight subjects were treated
with this species and in no instance were any inflammatory symptoms ob-

56

servable. Later the dried root was ground and a very annoying and
somewhat persistent irritation of the mucous membranes of the eye re-
sulted, yielding only to treatment by an oculist. It is fair inference that
no part of the Pokeberry is a contact poison in the ordinary acceptance of
the term, although the plant does possess a poisonous principle which
under exceptional conditions may produce an inflammation of a somewhat
obstinate and therefore serious character.

The Baneberry (Acteea rubra (Ait.) Willd.) is said to contain a ‘‘vesicat-

9

ing principle.” Experimentation upon fifteen subjects failed to verify this
statement. In this case, as in all others where negative results were ob-
tained, the experiments were repeated several times at different stages of
the development of the plant.

The Field Larkspur (Delphinium consolida L.) is also claimed to be a
skin irritant. “A specific element in the seeds produces in tincture great
burning and inflammation of the skin.” Vhe experiments upon this form
were unsatisfactory because of the small amount of material available.
The tincture applied to the skin produced some slight burning and in-
flammation, although the latter was no greater than would be expected
from a similar treatment with pure alcohol. Evidently, however, the
Field Larkspur is in no sense to be considered a plant dangerous to handle.

The Wild Anemone or Wind flower (Anemone quinquefolia L.), said to
be “irritating to the skin, producing redness and itching,’ was found, so
far as the experiments went, to be perfectly innocuous, not even those
who were most susceptible to skin irritations showing the slightest sign of
inflammatory symptoms.

The Virgin’s Bower or Wild Clematis (Clematis Virginiana L.), said to
contain an “aerid irritant producing blisters’, affected nine out of seven-
teen subjects; four by the mere handling, the other five as a result of rub-
bing the skin with the leaves and flowers. A marked hyperzemia preceded
the vesicular stage of the inflammation, which in no case was of more
than three days duration.

Three of the Crowfoots or Buttercups (Ranunculus sceleratus L., R.
acris L., and R. bulbosus L.), it is alleged, ‘cause inflammation and ulcers,
the root being especially rich in poisonous substances.’ Of these R.
sceleratus and R. bulbosus are sufficiently occasional in our area to be
neglected. R. acris, also, as at present delimited by systematists, is of

relatively scant occurrence in Indiana. Seven subjects were used. None

51

showed any ill effects from treatment with aerial parts. Two showed
sharp inflammation from rubbing the skin with the root, but neither
showed any indication of ulcers although the inflammation was left un-
treated. Inflammatory symptoms disappeared at the end of the sixth day,
in both cases.

The familiar May Apple (Podophyllum peltatum L.) has been included
in the lists of plants poisonous by contact from the earliest times. Both
leaves and roots are said to be “poisonous and drastic” by some authors;
others content themselves with the statement “rather poisonous”; still
others attribute the “poisonous principle chiefly to the root, the powder of
which affects the mucous membranes.” Of the truth of the last state-
ment there can be no doubt, as scores of careless or ignorant workers in
the laberatories of manufacturing pharmacists can testify. Concerning
the other two, there is at least room for reasonable doubt. No record has
come to my notice of any case of poisoning from the mere handling, and
I have in the past few years directed the work of classes in such a way as
to secure the maximum amount of handling of every part of the plant.
Twenty subjects submitted to the rubbinz process, using aerial parts of
the plant, and nineteen showed no signs of inflammation. One was a sub-
ject referred to in a previous paragraph as peculiarly susceptible to in-
flammation after skin lesions of any sort. In this case a rather persistent
inflammation followed the experiment, requiring between two and three
weeks’ treatment before it was completely reduced. Five submitted to
the rubbing process with fresh roots with no untoward results. The irri-
tating effect of the dry powder of the root upon mucous membranes was
considered too well established to need verification. It is a safe inference
that any part of the May Apple may be handled with safety, even the
dry root being apparently harmless, and only irritating when in the form
of a finely comminuted powder.

The common Bloodroot (Sanguinaria Canadensis L.) is another plant
regarded with suspicion by some authors. It is said that the ‘dust of the
dried root is irritating apd that frequently the handling of the root
poisons." No experiments were made as to the effect of the dust pro-
duced by the grinding of dried roots, but both dried and fresh roots were
persistently handled without record of poisoning in a single case out of
seventeen. Seven showed no ill effects from rubbing the arm with the
fresh root.

58

The Cruciferee named are such well known irritants as to need no
special discussion, although in none of the forms did any irritation arise
from a free and rather rough handling of the plants.

The round leayed Sundew (Drosera rotundifolia L.) is classed as a
skin irritant. It is so rare in our area that it scarcely deserves mention.
Experiments were possible only with dried specimens. Of the five sub-
jects selected none showed any signs of skin irritation as a result of
either treatment. The material used was collected in August, the experi-
ments were made the following February, the plants haying been sub-
jected to the usual drying.

The Tree of Heaven (Ailanthus glandulosa Desf.), it is said, “should
be regarded with suspicion.” No experiments were tried with this form
and a somewhat extended examination fails to reveal any instance in
which poisoning resulted from its handling. Personally I have handled it
for years, and have rather encouraged classes to handle it but have failed
utterly to find the form at all poisonous cr even irritating.

Of the Spurges (Euphorbias) more than one hundred species occur in
the United States. Loudon says of them, ‘‘Every one is so acrid as to cor-
rode and ulcerate the body wherever applied.” This somewhat vigorous
arraignment of the genus does not seem fully justified by the behavior
of the local forms. In the experiments upon ten subjects E. maculata L.,
BE. humistrata Engelm., E. nutans Lag. and E. commutata Engelm., pro-
duced no ill effects from handling. Rubbing the arm vigorously with the
crushed plants and allowing the latex to dry produced a marked irritation
in five of the ten subjects and a light vesicular inflammation in another.
The inflammation was somewhat obstinate, in two cases requiring the
attention of a physician. In the case of the flowering Spurge (Huphorbia
corollata L.) six out of ten subjects were distinctly poisoned by merely
handling the plant in its flowering condition. In this case the plant was
gathered in masses as for decorative purposes, thus attempting to imitate
the manner in which this attractive form is usually handled. Allowing
the latex to dy upon the arm caused evident poisoning in nine of the ten
cases. The experience with the other species named above led to the
prompt treatment of the inflammations, so that nothing can be said as to
the persistence or ultimate character of the irritation. The inference may
be drawn that the majority of our native spurges are not such virulent
contact poisons that they can not be handled in the ordinary way without
danger. Euphorbia corollata is, however, to be regarded as dangerous,

9

Or

especially in the flowering period, and, as that extends from April to Oc-
tober, it is probably to be avoided at all times. Apart from the results
of these experiments I have records of twenty-three cases of poisoning
unmistakably chargeable to this form. In my opinion many cases of poi-
soning attributed to Rhus are to be referred to this species.

Of the Sumach, the poison ivy (Rhus radicans L.) is perhaps the most
familiar, although the poison elder (Rhus Vernix L.) is by far the more
poisonous. According to Robert Hessler, M. D.,* “Many persons proof
against the common poison ivy readily succumb to this species.” Fortu-
nately the restricted range of the species, it being confined to the swamp
regions of the northern part of the state, its favorite location being tam-
arack swamps, prevents it from being as dangerous as its virulence would
indicate. The poison ivy, however, because of its almost universal dis-
tribution through the state is perhaps the most dangerous of the plants
in the list. In the experiments, seventeen out of twenty-two poisoned
by merely handling the plant. The remaining five responded vigoriously
to the rubbing process. The character of the inflammation is too well
known to need description in this connection. One of the subjects, a
young man of about twenty-two, who was poisoned as the result of
“rubbing,” allowed himself to go without treatment for three weeks, in
order that he might determine whether or not he would in the future be
more susceptible to ivy-poisoning. His case of poisoning was quite
severe, involving the whole arm and spreading to the neck, being perhaps
more serious than ordinary cases. He wrote me last summer that he had
not since the experiment escaped with less than two or three poison
attacks a year. I have heard from two others that they also have poi-
soned since that time by the slightest contact with poison ivy. On the
other hand, the other two members of the group of five do not seem to
poison any more readily than before the experiment. In the poison ivy,
also, the poisonous principle seems most active during the flowering sea-
son. The statement that Rhus poisoning occurs from the handling of
dried herbarium specimens has not proven true in my experience. De-
terminative material placed in the hands of class after class, has never
caused a single case of poisoning. It is fair to conclude that two out of
three persons will be more or less affected by simply handling poison ivy,
and perhaps nine out of ten if the plant is handled at all roughly. No
other one of our indigenous plants is so generally poisonous.

1Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci., 1896, p. 21.

60

It is snid of the Leatherwood (Direa palustris L.) that the “fresh bark
applied to the skin causes redness and yesication and sores, which are
very difficult to heal.’ Eight subjects were treated by binding pieces of
freshly stripped bark upon their arms, allowing them to remain for
periods ranging from two to twenty-four hours. Six showed no evil effects
of any kind, while in the cases of the other two a somewhat painful hy-
perzemia resulted, easily reduced by an application of vaseline. Somewhat
strangely, the two affected represented the extremes of time, two and
twenty-four hours. Three other students chewed the fresh bark for a
few minutes and in each case an extremely painful blistering of the
mouth resulted. In my own case, tried sabsequently, the mucous mem-
branes of the mouth did not become normal for nearly a month. In the
ordinary use of the term, the leatherwood is not a contact poison, al-
though in exceptional cases it may prove such.

Aralia spinosa L., Angelica Tree or Hercules Club, was found without
irritating principle in three cases, the small amount of material available
precluding more extended experimentation. It is claimed that “green
bark from roots or small shrubs acts as an irritant.” As far as the re-
sults go the statement is without foundation.

It is the popular belief that Solanum Dulcamara L., poison or purple-
leaved nightshade is one of the most virulent contact poisons. By some
authorities it is claimed to be an even more virulent skin poison than
poison ivy, the symptoms being similar, but the poison much more diffi-
cult to eradicate from the system. Tests made upon fifteen subjects failed
utterly to justify the popular view. The plants were used in all stages
and at all seasons, but in every case without the slightest irritation. I
have tried many times to poison myself with this species, frequently
taking plants selected by persons who claimed an absolute knowledge of
the poisonous character of the form and always without untoward results.
The result of these experiments makes it almost certain that the purple-
leaved nightshade should not be considered as one of our poisonous plants.

The “Jimson” weeds (Datura Stramonium L. and D. Tatula L.) also
have a bad reputation. Fourteen subjects were tested and in no case was
there any sign of inflammation. No experiment was made to verify the
statement that the forms ‘occasionally cause a swelling of the eyelids.”
It is probable that none of our native species of Solanaceae are as poison-
ous as the foliage of the potato and tomato, to which frequent cases of

skin poisoning may be definitely referred.

61

The common Mullein (Verbascum Thapsus L.) is irritating to the skin
because of its wooly hairs, the leaves being often applied to the throat for
the rubefacient effect. Its action is so evidently mechanical that no ex-
periments were tried.

The flowers of the Catalpa (Catalpa Catalpa (L.) I<arst.) are said to be
irritant to many persons, causing “reddening of the skin.” In experiments
tried and often repeated upon twenty subjects, no such results were ob-
tained, although in some cases the flowers were rubbed upon the cheeks
vigorously, the juice being allowed to remain for several hours. I have
also been unable to find any definite record confirming the statement.

Indian Tobacco (Lobelia inflata 1..), “when applied to the skin is cap-
able of producing irritation.” Experiments upon fifteen persons failed to
confirm this alleged fact.

The Cockleburs (Xanthium) are irritant on account of dust and lairs
with which they are covered and not because of a toxie principle. No
experiments were made with this form,

Of the Goldenrods (Solidago) the statement is made that the ‘whole
family is to be regarded with suspicion by persons with sensitive skin.
Solidago odora, Ait. possesses a volatile oil that is an irritant and rube-
facient.” Twenty-two persons were subjected to tests with various
species of goldenrod, but no results were obtained to indicate the presence
of a toxic element in our native species. Solidago odora was used with
five subjects without resulting inflammation. It is extremely doubtful
whether any skin irritation is produced by species of this genus save
through mechanical causes.

The common Fleabane (Leptilon Canadense (L.) Brit.) it is said ‘‘con-
tains a volatile oil possessing irritating qualities to those handling.”
Eleven persons were used in experiments upon this form. Two had skin
irritations following the free handling of this plant. Five others were
poisoned by the “rubbing” process. Four were unaffected under either
procedure. In this case also, the maximum point of the toxie principle
seemed to be the flowering season.

Common Beggar Ticks or Spanish Needles (Bidens frondosa L.), it is
alleged, “causes itching on handling.’ Out of fifteen persons this was
found to be true in three cases, one of them being peculiarly susceptible to
skin irritation, as mentioned in a preceding paragraph. Four others were
affected by the “rubbing” process. The remaining eight reported no

change in skin sensations.

62

Ordinary Dog-fennel (Anthemis Cotula L.) was found to affect seven
out of twenty persons as the result of free handling. Seven others were
poisoned following rubbing and six were unaffected. The statement that
the ‘juice is sufficiently acrid to poison sensitive skins” seems borne out
by the results.

Arctium Lappa L., or Burdock, is a skin irritant through mechanical
action, the dry burs producing the most serious inflammations, although
the leaves, because of their roughness, are also irritant. The resultant
inflammations after handling were so evidently traumatic that no experi-
ments were made.

It is claimed that the ordinary cultivated Nasturtium (Tropzolum
majus L.) “in exceptional cases produces dermatitis.”” Repeated experi-
ments with all parts of the plant upon twenty-two subjects failed to give
any verification to this statement. After extended inquiry I have failed
to find any person who knew of any case of poisoning due to this plant.

The Oleander (Nerium Oleander L.), so largely cultivated, is prebably
under certain conditions poisonous. ‘An acrid principle in the leaves
affects some people as Rhus.’ Loudon contents himself with saying “it is

b]

poisonous.” Figuier calls it a “formidable poison.” Van Hasselt says
it causes ‘an internal burning and itching when rubbed in the skin.”
Five persons were experimented upon in the manner indicated by Van
Hasselt and all suffered a greater or less irritation accompanied by burn-
ing and itching. It is probable that the thick-walled epidermal cells pre-
vent poisoning in the ordinary handling of the plant. The most painful
case of skin poison I experienced was from the oleander. It was, how-
ever, of short duration and in none of the cases indicated the persistence
or tendency to recurrence of Rhus.

Of the cultivated Primroses, one, Primula obconica Hance, is occa-
sional irritant. The cause, however, is plainly enough traumatic. No
experiments were undertaken, although I know of one case in which the
handling of this species is invariably followed by an annoying skin irri-
tation.

The results of these experiments may be summarized as follows:

f{. The great majority of the plants included in the preceding list are
harmless under ordinary handling.

2. Some of these may act as skin irritants as the result of prolonged
application or unusually rough handling. Careful washing after handling
any of the forms will reduce the danger to a minimum.

63

3. The following species are definiteiy contact poisons, arranged in
order of their virulence.

Rhus Vernix L.

Rhus radicans.

Euphorbia corollata.

Cypripedium hirsutum.

Anthemis Cotula.

Leptilon Canadense.

Clematis Virginiana.

Bidens frondosa.

The nettles are not included in this iist on account of the ephemeral
character of the irritation they produce, nor are there included a number
of forms which poison under unusual conditions, such as grinding or long
continued applications.

4. Of the plants named, the two species of the genus Rhus are the
only ones affecting all upon whom experiments were tried, if we except
the nettles.

5. Sixteen plants included in the list proved absolutely harmless under
the conditions of the experiments. Probably all in the list with the ex-
ception of the first three or four may be safely handled under ordinary
conditions.

The data bearing upon conclusion 3 may be tabulated as follows:

|
+ ffected b
pubergt \ffected by 5 Second 4
Experiment. First Method. Peace
EUR e BETS 5 share aiccccenste A sieleresee's ace No | Experimeni|ts.
UhnaS era Gi CANS).v ec seein. oe cornices he a 22 1 5
Haphorbiarcorollata jaqasesce c+ sees 10 6 3
Cypripedium hirsutum .............. 22 11 6
AmphHemisi Cotulla smees. cscs s cence cs 20 a 7
Heptilon Canadense: .... 6.2.6. ewes 11 2 5
Wlematis: Vatginiana, (20. 2... sec cs e 17 4 5
SA MOTN POT GONA 1.0 2'.< leas fore age ofoses 15 3 4
i

64

AMPHISPORES OF THE GRASS AND SEDGE Rusts.

J. C. ARTHUR.

( Abstract. )

The paper described and illustrated the uredospores and amphispores
of five species of Puccinia from central United States, and one species
of Uromyces from Northern India, all occurring upon various kinds of
grasses; they were P. verans Farl., P. Tripsaci D. & H., P. Stipe Arth.,
P. tosta Arth., P. Cryptandri E. & B., and U. Rottboellie Arth. It also
described and illustrated the amphispores, the uredospores not being
known, of three species of Puccinia from the United States occurring upon
different species of Carer; they were P. Caricis-strictw Diet., P. atrofusca
(D. & T.) Holw., and P. Garrettii Arth. These are all the species of rusts
so far known to possess amphispores. This kind of spore is the resting
or winter form of the uredospore. They are not uredospores, however,
accurately speaking, because they show distinct structural differences,

often very great, and are correspondingly modified physiologically.

65

EcotogicaL Notes on THE Birps Occurrinc WitrHiIn A Raptus
oF Kive Mies or THE INDIANA UNIVERSITY Campus.*

By WALDO LEE MCATEE.

With Photographic Illustrations by CLARENCE Guy LITTELL.

At various times since 1888 students of Indiana University interested
in birds have kept records of the migrations, breeding habits, etc., of the
birds within a radius of several miles of Bloomington. Twenty sets of
migration records, covering fourteen seasons, are on file in the archives
of the Biological Survey at Washington, D. C.

Three lists of birds have been prepared by former students.

W.S. Blatchley in 1886 recorded the “Winter Birds of the Vicinity of
Bloomington, Indiana,” in the Hoosier Naturalist I, pp. 169-171.

B. W. Evermann published a list of ‘Birds of Monroe County, Indi-
ana,’ in the Hoosier Naturalist II, pp. 187-145 and 164. He enumerates
179 species.

C. H. Bollman listed 192 species in an unpublished paper on file: in the
Biological Survey.

“The Hoosier Naturalist,’ in which Evéermann’s and Blatchley’s lists
were published has long been extinct and ‘the two papers are not ac-
cessible.

Some of the above lists and part of the migration records were used
by Amos W. Butler in his “Birds of Indiana” published in the 22d Annual
Report of the Department of Geology and Natural Resources, Indianap-
olis, 1897.

Pertinent facts contained in the above sources have been brought
together in the present paper. They have been confirmed or supple-
mented by the author’s observations extending through the last four
years. While the material presented is chiefly of local interest it contains
additions to our knowledge of the birds of Indiana and the more general

subject of bird migration. Wherever possible, the authority for any state-

*Contributions from the Zojlogical Laboratory of Indiana University, under the direc-
tion of C. H. Eigenmann. No. 60.

5—A. or Screncr, ’04.

66

ment is indicated. When no authority is given the author is responsible
for the data.

The following is a list of observers most quoted. Their initials are
used to indicate their authority.

V. H. Barnett.
W. S. Blatchley.
C. H. Bollman.
C. H. Eigenmann.
B. W. Evermann.
Wi. Haihn:

P. J. Hartman. -
C. H. Kennedy.
E. M. Kindle.

Cc. G. Littell.

W. L. MecAtee.
N. B. Myers.

A. B. Ulrey.

G. G. Williamson.

When other authorities are quoted their names are given in full.

To make the facts contained in this paper more readily accessible to
teachers and students they have been placed in tabular form and ap-
pear at the end of the paper. The table and the index were prepared by
C. H. Frazee and Leonard Haseman.

The region over which observations have been made, embracing the
territory within about five miles of Bloomington, is varied in its topogra-
phy. On the east and north are many rocky ravines, some of them contain-
ing cascades. At Bloomington, to the south of it and some distance to the
west the surface is gently rolling and has typical features of the odlitic
limestone area of Indiana. To the west in the Mitchell limestone area
the surface is pitted with various sinkholes beneath which are caves of
considerable extent. Bloomington and the area about it are well drained
by rock bound brooks running in part to the north through Rocky Branch,
Griffy Creek and Bean Blossom, finally tlowing into the North Fork of
White River. Other brooks, the Jordan River and Clear Creek drain the
southern part of Bloomington through Clear Creek into the East Fork of
White River. The extreme eastern part of the area is drained into Salt

Creek and thence into the East Fork of White River. The western part

67

is rich in springs and sinkholes filled with water, the general trend of the
underground drainage of this area being southward. ‘There are no large
streams or other large bodies of water or swamp in the region under
consideration. Two artificial ponds have been constructed in recent years,
a smaller one which supplies the Monon R. R. yards with water and a
larger one which is the storage reservoir of the Bloomington waterworks.

-The region is fairly forested, largely by second growth timber, though
in some parts of the Knobstone region the primeval forests remain.

The area is not well suited to aquatic birds but offers many favorable
localities to terrestial migrants and residents.

The total number of species recorded is two hundred and twenty-five,
and includes seventy per cent. of the birds recorded from the entire State.
Of this number ninety-eight nest here and thirty-nine of the breeding
birds are also permanent residents. Twenty-one are winter visitants.
‘Ninety-six are migrants and are seen during a few days in spring and
fall. Six are extinct, two are included on rather doubtful evidence, and
one is a hypothetic species. The last three groups are included in the
supplemental list. One hundred species have been observed on or over
the University Campus.

Each species which has been observed on or over the campus of In-
diana University is marked by an asterisk. In cases of species which
are either winter or summer residents, the recorded extremes of their
stay are given. In the case of transients the limits of their arrival and
departure are given for both of the migratory seasons. Extinct and
hypothetie species are referred to a supplemental list. The numbers in
brackets and the nomeclature are those of the A. O. U. check-list.

I am under obligations to Prof. W. W. Cooke and Mr. A. W. Butler
for permission to examine migration schedules.

1. [8] Colymbus auritus Linn. Horned Grebe.

Common migrant. April 11 to 24. This species is classed as a com-
mon migrant wholly upon evidence obtained in the spring of 1903. It
had not heretofore been recorded from the county, but circumstances lead
me to believe that it has merely been overlooked. The first specimen
was obtained April 11, by Mr. J. J. Batchelor and Mr. James Simonton.
Three others were seen that day. The following numbers were seen at
the dates given:—7, April 12; 4, April 13; 2, April 17; 2. April 18; 2, April
19, and 2, April] 24.

68

2 [6] Podilymbus podiceps (Linn.). Pied-billed Grebe.
Common migrant. March © to April 29 and October 7 to November 30.
May be found in nearly any sink or quarry-hole during the migratory sea-

son.

MIGRATION RECORD.
Ma re ee ee rata Mel eee 1885. 1886. 1887.
Observers. fone cet tote ees CataB: C. H. B. G.G. W. G..G.W.
Burstiseenes 036 See. Be Oa Le ES Lng aulllicts Pe eens ieee re 4-10 3-26
IN GRE SOC occ ke dae Neyer iteircee Sao AA haar) nero Eek es 4-16. “ali. eee eee
Commons sees PERE A SEES Re oP cia te, eae flaca ee
last Seen rst Sect ce take real oe eee | ees See LOST tS | SO a eee Sets
Abuntianee asaya Ore nak ea ee eee Common. |Not common)...........- Not common
NGA Tyce he Ee ence Soe ET: 1899. 1899. | 1902. 1903.
~ | |
Obsenwere..- > saan Tee Ie RON rane ah pS INES IMIS opto cecteee: W DH Weelieonte
MIPSESCON scr scys ce cette nao s AR BAG. Ra ieevetnaic cere ls Sree oe 3-8
ING XG ISG CID scseo ce nee rene Oe ee oe SR a clare Fie oe ial a Oee nite Soe Cae ae eee 4-19
COMMON TR tee arte eee eae ee ae EET eee eres ees oral eer se Reyes ee pores + Sarai
Bia et spent ot oe ee Ne ae oe AT Sena eee eed OU 4-99 4-29
Abundances scat me eee eee ee Rare. |eeertece ese Poe ee ommntons

3. [7] Gavia imber (Gunn.). Loon.

Commen migrant., April 1 to May 11. Loons may be seen on the
larger ponds any morning after a stormy night in April. Before the
waterworks and railroad reservoirs were made these birds were not seen.
Bollman and Evermann do not give the Loon in their lists of 1886 and

1887.
MIGRATION RECORD.

WAT comes nad neg cosh Seow a ouecinie: sine tin sieve sie Saeco eieaciee esa ae aterm eres 1886. 1903.
Observers «ic cbis ahacac- tes Res tees oe lero ast eane eel aera ere bela Be We gHiz ere Ven eaves
Bins tis@e@m he sap baviee Retin Masons ee eine esos eee eee eet Gm een eeu teas _ 4-1 ar 4-13
Nextiséen .isci)s. cou na a DRE he Ree ee ee ee 4-15
CommoOne cise ROS ow sees eBedala hs sien e tele Ue oes lemes ate oie ieinsiete ee ess] helo eee ae 4-15
Wastieeni-s ence nec MEOH asa Ncedots cncind GanontoCoOUMA Chae GOODAdDadolly ospoocn.s 5-11
7A) OUAGIEH ELI ae nda oe aneiciodo qdco osennpmeeeoaduny eacibooba ud dand dacddsGcasfoogrH8 a0 wace Common.

69

4. [60] Larus philadelphia (Ord). Bonaparte’s Gull.

Rare migrant. One record April 16, 19038: <A flock of one hundred
“gulls” of three sizes was reported in April, 1902, by J. J. Batchelor.
From his descriptions I concluded that these were either Forster’s or the
common Tern, and Bonaparte’s and the Herring Gull. When these. birds
appear so far from any large body of water it is always after a;period
of very high winds.

5. [69] Sterna forsteri Nutt. Forster’s Tern.
Rare migrant. Four seen May 13, 1903.
6. [70] Sterna hirundo Linn. Common Tern.
Not common migrant (C. H. B. ’86).
[120] Phalacrocoraxr dilophus (Swain). Double-crested Cormorant.
Rare transient (C. H. B. ’86). May 3, 1885 (C. H. B.).
8. [129] Merganser americanus (Cass.). American Merganser.

Common migrant. In 1887 B. W. Evermann classed it as not common.
In late years, however, the Fish Duck has become a common spring
visitor to the reservoirs.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Mapa eg ree nse ote METS Be BETIS worsen vik Sa nated a saeld ste elorste lols Suvae Metalerew Sinton steenaweemee eens 1903
MH BROTME Ciera. ft schoo ei aka ny siecle Ss cine « ereiotetcinne]stenret TSN ois eae ees Seale Sto Roars atlas oan Snide ee Wiel Mi.
LOD GOH Repo Gadde. Saas Dos ecanseoo a0 Dor ae RES ie oL aereran oe mos WostomshReldesbertejons Megane 4-16
BNR ROE Meet sch ooo isjh-ice ak Mo ewjacursimeis career wales Send asie Acialese's oe peteeys tenable esi chinalse 4-19
CPTTAO I Ses SS eae keue agate Oa S47 SSS DCOSCONT A CEROeor ena oe OnE BES Ter ann alae Reece 5-14
LDS SEG Sesgog Bag ban cee teapot Gete Sean COREE OEE Re OC. Tee ISPart Sie wemerr arora 5-14
LNG FO SoG Ape apanicecSebe agedcebOr do postra Ca GOOD COI e OCC IC RBSen TS AMIOHe AaenPin ae anne Common.

9. [131] Lophodytes cucullatus (Linn.). Hooded Merganser.
* Common transient (C. H. B. ’86). March 4, 1885 (C. H. B.). Several
specimens, without dates, are in the University collection. é
10. [132] Anas boschas Linn. Mallard.*
Abundant migrant. February 10 to April 23. After the example of
Prof. W. W. Cooke all records simply given as ‘‘ducks” are referred to
this species. si

70

MIGRATION RECORD.
DAGTY OSA RCE oes a ERS ICE herr tine as MER RCO Coe | 1886. | 1892. 1903.
Observers. Seccsee sees lo ee eee OPEL eee B.W.E E.M.K. | W.L.M.
LOTT) ot =) 1 ae eae PEAS See od eh er ee hens SS 6) Ea ees Sei) 2-10
INiextseeni 226 i tiscali bite sos chia Meee oe eae Oh! ey ee eee 3-8
Com NOD ysiccisviancsnce Veneeic ete cea ine ee eer Ere come eoaee 4-3 4-23
1 BS -Y- 3) eae ORE Sar ROCHE EEC rs Ioncccnaancanosansanal BaAcserttosalllaanibs tases 4-23 .
ADU RTC e555 :5 osratatnin oS rey rw agate Bre Sint cevereroee toto ae net asl ee eee eee Common.
11. [189] Nettion carolinensis (Gmel.). Green-winged Teal.

Not common migrant (B. W. E. ’87). March 4 to April 17.

fe

MIGRATION RECORD.
DVO BTM crescsslels ates Sala ratois rar ofatore ne oe nicl reneic OPED eRe tee whale Baereeee | 1886. | 1903.
QODSERVOT sons jos cede Oa rela oe Te coe ee ome eee | B.W.E W.L.M
UT St SOOM) pccnisin nk sete eC Teiglole oe Seer TRE TA aCe Pee Se 3-4 4-10
INO Kt BE CMA sce o oc ee aN EeOeoe See Oe PE Steer ereaee 3-5: | ~ \eeeenee eee
Oyo TC) 1 ee cae ee eee an iene A Ao ee ce EE Rn ei: re mE donoidcnellaconoe oc- + net
Toast: 2G Ons ecclieceeisascion de Sedans ins oid ae oe ace oe a ato are a BTR EE ee 4-17
Abundance 3.3 Sccss: aco eset een eRe Ee ee eee ease Not common!Not common
12. [142] Spatula clypeata (Linn.). Shoveller.

Common migrant. March 20 to May 8. The first migrants

are males

and are seen in small numbers; later in the season the flocks are mixed,

but the females are then generally in the majority.

MIGRATION RECORD.

MOM Ries cic.cts cela cig. o os inin ste Soloarete terete reroretlaw uereiecs 1886. 1896, 1902. 1903.
Gicetnert hol Sno, Me amas B.W.E. | W.S.B. | W.L.M.| W.L.M.
Hinstesee Ml css sistcaoctciiee atts atereeemaeease lt eec pine selocincel lserisietradteioee ee 3-20
ICS. 4-1) RR Ce ate nee ne en aan nied Sieneniiand neormnriae in |soncomeancaad Sears cs occ 4-5
ComM ON fe sedsnsceg lasers aes Masao se aie Sina cla sacl > s@ieare sera s atoieoale eles cet | Ne eee eee 4-19
Dias tisee nessa ve sgscsasssiscene se caseteiwieanae 5-8 5-8 4-13 4 21
IAD UNOAN Cesc csi nare Rae eee ete seine eee Not;common 25.02 -1ese eae Common.

13. 148 Dafila acuta (Linn.). Pintail.
Rare migrant. Feb. 26 to March 4.

MIGRATION RECORD.

“TUTTE, glee od SARS GCI US ce aE STO IES Naren IC Ae eat er gt | 1886. | 1902
BIREMNVION es ses oan oan ease LORIE RE Cea RC Atel SB ace ae aioe SOUR AErTC B W.E W.L.M
MUSERCAREG Te fore elisa one eaiet 6 net oelete laistacise ei eg caetepnminern acid oo, sau ainiensore rele is 2-26 3-1
NEERING OMT re eye haya sah casibae oie oa is aang ale purest ceoee ene oe oa Deena | 3-4 | SaaS tia ae

14. [144] Aix sponsa (Linn.). Wood Duck.*

Rare migrant. March 24 to May. Formerly a common summer resi-
dent (C. H. B. ’86), and the most common duck, often seen near the
campus (B. W. E. °87). Reported breeding in 1887 (G. G. W.), and in recent
years (A. W. Butler, *97).. At present this duck is extremely rare; the
only one reported since 1897 was seen in May, 1902 (T. J. Headlee).

MIGRATION RECORD.

WIGHT? 5 adicetaedin Rentig na Qo RG SHEE PES OD a SE GEE CCE onC I a er amar hE | 1885. | 1887.
CUS ECR css RaA Anion cE SGD EES Gace PF DEBE CEST Sek REECE Or a Ecler a amneee C.H.B G.G. W.
LDTRIC, CEO ae SSSR EAB ey eS eer Ne etn IE 77 Oo ee A ee 3-31 3 34
INEST & CE CTS ge nS earn Ct a ra OR a 4-1 | 3-26

15. [146] Aythya americana (Eyt.). Redhead.

Although this bird is a common migrant in neighboring localities,
there is but one record of its occurrence here. Four were taken March 20,
1903.

16. [147] dAythya vallisneria (Wils.). Canvas-back.

Common migrant (C. H. B. ’86). Common April 23, 1903.
17. [148] Aythya marila (Linn.). American Seaup Duck.

One record. March 4, 1886 (B. W. E.).

18. [149] Aythya affinis (Eyt.). Lesser Scaup Duck.*

Common migrant. March 9 to May 8. The Little Blue-bill is the
most common duck. As is the case with the Shoveller, the first migrants
are males. The females, however, are present in larger numbers than
the males in the flocks seen later in the season.

(es
MIGRATION RECORD.
| |

AV Gia Bes oe Serres easiness RR oe eee ee ee ee | 1885. | 1886. 1902. 1903.
Observer. fence ne eee ee eae C.H.B: | BeWlE. | WoL. Mo | Wet ee
Minstiee em: brcsvw eet Soe Ae eae ae eee ane Boe walicscee eee e 3-27 3-9
INewtis Pench ace encie oe ene ae ne eee ae ee ities if eis Ta aE 4-5 1-5
Common. 5.25% Wetie ooe eee ee ae aS Peet | See eect tote can aise aoe eee eee 4-21
REESE Neste ihr oe Rens Be ee eR EEE 5-8 4-19 4-26
Aun da 16 6 sais ar Seas cats oe ee ee oes ee Peo eee sree cea Common. | Common.

19. [151] Clangula clangula americana (Bonap.). American Golden-eye.
~ Rather common migrant. There are several records, but the only
date at hand is March 1, 1902.
20. [153] Charitonetta albeola (Linn.). Buftle-head.
Very rare migrant (B. W. E. ’87). March 5, 1886 (B. W. E.).
21. [166] Oidemia perspicillata (Linn.). Surf Scoter.

Rare: one seen in 1886, “a storm duck” (C. H. B.). Of very unusual
occurrence away from large bodies of water in this latitude. The only
other records for the State are for the year 1875.

22. [167] Erismatura jamaicensis (Gmel.). tuddy Duck.

Not common migrant. April 24, 1903.

23. [169.1] Chen carulescens (Lirn.). Blue Goose.

Rare migrant (C. Hf B: °86).

24. [172] Branta canadensis (Linn.). Canada Goose.*

Common migrant. February 17 to April 12. October 31 to Novem-
ber: 24. On two occasions, 3—2, ’°02 and 2—17, ’03, Wild Geese were
seen flying south. On both of these dates there was a sudden drop
in the temperature, in the latter case to six degrees below zero. ‘Those
seen 4—12, 1903, were flying through a driving rain. A Canada Goose
remained about the campus of the University for about a week ending
3—27, °02. At nights it flew in all directions over the campus from
pond to pond, and its loud calling provoked a still more yociferous dem-

onstration from the watchdogs below.

MIGRATION RECORD: |

—

Marni sesste ete. d fsa! | 1885. | 1885. | 1900. | 1992. 1902. 1903.
Sueerver Races sees C.H. B. CHB: N.B.M.| W.L.M.} W.L.M.| W.L.M.
First seen........ a BSE NRE papeeerre rae 3-3 Ean Pekar Fees ae
ooo IS Bp eee RE eee | 38 a ES Pe oa 32
BUR PERTD OT Hie oss cis cral| eases Sato dices Se oe weak wie yl acce iw peed =e SSE alee rere eee NCAR
ee re 11-94 fe cc oo eee 1:7 510-81 4-12
Abundance ......... “Common. |Not common] ..........- Common. | Common.! Common.

25. [190] Botaurus lentiginosus (Montag.). American Bittern.*

* Rather. rare migrant. » April 5 to May 18, August 7 to October 22):
Most often seen on the weedy margins of a pond but not rarely in’
the open glades of a forest, or in the pine groves where they flap heavily
from treetop to treetop, making a tremendous clatter in rising and

alighting.
’ MIGRATION RECORD. | s
% i. THY NHR Nts are W
“GDI SRG e IBS ES OR SA ena 1885 1885. 1886 1888 1892
| |
rs |
MIDEDEVOT Say eo oe roe oan eee ee CH eb. Clin Be Wiekie |e asa A.B.U
IDNR GED 7 ORs Goan see eerste] Pee ieee eras oe aiid Lee ee 4-27 ++ 4-23
MSREISCOH De cthahk ess caecakysaealoeee mera te. QE She EN td See el Beas tooled 5-+
‘CUTTE BeGR bn oe See adersat ober) (beeiae omc Icon one) [Aes Sean | eae eT (one aS
MTARUEREEN or ates ree inch ds eee en's | 5-13 10-22 ee [aa Ss Oe Sa [ant owas
PPREYTEN GIT CO Wyci ce iconrs bee. reek eee Rare. Rare Notcommon) ..c.../38... | RE:
*Foster Hight. +E.M.K. ++ Wylie and Mitchell. Re are
eM i We Pe SIR: ASE as ckt eC av: | 1900. 1901.° | © 1902. -| 1903.
BEEN G 2 oni sahieaiejomnns Coane pes epee s ening ay: W.L.M.| W.L.M.| W.L.M.| W.L. M.
MOMTAURREE Tee oh ee yee se eic oe Sena Oise ciate oan 4-17 fe DE ee eksacare) sear 4-5
OO GSR STERTIR SES pon SeOC COU ROOGS OMe cA GEn BREE aD es a= anon ae nee ADAG) > Mire qesenceumere 4-2]
LATHER SERRE Se Gaeta Ra ESOC OER | CARER SC CaaS SS bate alee (ear ES oe
OPTUS BGI GSS Seige aor Ie oe OE eee eee | TE aoe ER ODP ESOT. 5-4 4-22
PUG WIC On got coe ae cahs oho ee wee agcelas et Se aes Reo Sait Ase Pe Skene ee ene eae eS es Rath’rrare

74

26. [191] Ardetta evilis (@mel.). Least Bittern.

Rare migrant. One was taken alive and kept in the laboratory for
a week in May, 1902. lt was fed small fishes, which it swallowed
readily. Its appetite was amazing but was the cause of its death. A
large mass of fish bones became stuck in its cesophagus and put an
end to his gastronomic feats and to his career.
27. [194] Ardea herodias Linn. Great Blue Heron

Rather rare migrant. March 12 to April 30. August 25.

MIGRATION RECORD.

WOaPies.s ccerece ats costtameneee eae | 1885. | 1886. 1901. 1902. | 1903.
Observer... 2222.25. coon | C.H.B. W.S.B. | W.L.M. | Bicknell. | W. L. M.
First seen ss. <-2-2 oso cinaseeeet 3-25 4-8 4-22 fpesehetisest 3-12
Next keen s.c5.. co ssc ieee: | B26. Sal ict ata motets | ete tent ae ae ieen Seer | selector
Common 32.05.05 -no ee ee | aero cicancecl| ances dweesl[ieerosetere sees Jepaecoas occ | Silene sieiatentae
Lent woeni.cucc sheng eee elt eae eee ee | 8-95 4-30
Abundance! j2e--25-neses eae Noticommon |r -sccoce sell neces Joelle ene Rath’r rare

28.- [196] Herodias egretta (Gmel.). American Egret.

Rare migrant, not observed since 1887. “The earliest record for
Indiana is that given by Prof. Evermann from Bloomington, April 10,
1887” (A. W. Butler). Evermann also says a few were seen in August,
1886. C. H. Bollman called it a rare transient in 1886, but makes the
remark that it might be added to the list of summer residents as he
had taken it July 29, 1885. It has also been taken in this county by
I. N. Corr and S. E. Meek.

29. [201] Butorides virescens Linn. Green Heron.* Figs. 1-5.

Common summer resident. April 10 to September 22. In 1901 C. E.
Edmonson found a colony of ten or twelve nests in a small clump of
cedars near the water-works reservoir. June 3, 1901, a nest was found
in a small cedar, about 50 yards from a pond. It was 25 feet high
in a dense thicket of small trees. The nest was poorly made of sticks and
the eggs were visible from below. There were 5 eggs. On June 11
these were hatched, and on the 19th the young were well covered with
down and were hopping around among the branches (W. L. H.). May
11, 1903, a Green Heron’s nest with 6 eggs was found 13 feet up in
an apple tree in an orchard. Five eggs were in the lower layer, the
sixth on top. There was another nest about 20 feet up in an adjoining

ax
de

tree, which contained four eggs. The eggs in the first nest were hatched
May 29 (C. G. L.).
MIGRATION RECORD.

BPMN T Oo ces icrsic tacos ees anirac sit ine step | 1885. | 1885. 1886. | 1892, 1893.
NBER tay aie osc cd cots ei taceeaae CSE eee] ee oo bLa E> aoe) Gober Bsa! yay Keo ley Me ne
MIIMLASO ET Occ ea. aocrepaeslcvakewcciee yoy a eeencennse 4-24 4-22 4-17
MMII B@EN ta, .cscck sctetina ba Goscoenans 4-188 oo [ad toinh warts ADO EO Ccrstnteltina ack || Scioto asics
SOON TION represses Sccwis.ce' si isy aisles weheseine | Ba DB onl enearea corneal [arate ate maida eee G Setire eine [aelets ae fasts ot
MEABEESG EN eae fission elicit coer = saorseas Win stoyaisiaiwiene shane 9-22 | Gite ers see del eesaian cis cits | wielenieieeler orcs
PROUMGUNCE.cccc sevessi-ossins cee eeses [Abundant A caciaetie: |Abundant. Rare Rare
WGI 3. Gan SUGE rn AD SESOn EOE SOEUR SnD BER as aaa 1899. | 1900. 19025 | 1903.
WRRELVODe ce ercee heen conn tans sath econ ates Nabe | NB. M..| C. Bok} W. i. M:
PITS DRG Glin cccile sas rectoanal et eines welce steele bai 5-16 4-17 4-23 4-10
PNGRCBOON Gs Sere x Al lociintysnia ce ome eaueere wisi le scare lina kbeesemuas Lis) sme OR rare 4-14
COTTE Gh? Seay pap be esos Se Se ose COREE Unetin tenn! (acHcn eae aaae La ete ae SR ts 5-11
MRE UB COIN e ners oe toh coera aiaicra sa sors eteeis ecrath nie alaioreimiatel| le cle erst ie etelece tne cis MBatocatonte I erarelase wiatiate [lacus pongttetes
FANG RROGY set eeteacmacciie nd. .ieectieeeieee ses) COMMON.)| COMMON. |e vecemece oe Common.

30. [204] Grus americana (Linn.). Whooping Crane.

“Mr. Charles Dury, of Cincinnati, O., informs me that there is a
specimen in the Cuvier Club in that city that was taken near Bloom-
ington, Ind.” (A. W. Butler.)
3L. [214] Porzana carolina (Linn.). Sora.

Rare migrant. B. W. Evermann says it is not often seen and gives
two dates—May 5, 1886, and April 15, 1887. C. H. Bollman, ’86, records
it as a transient. It was also seen May 8, 1900. (N. B. M.)

32 [215] Porzana noveboracensis (Gmel.). Yellow Rail.

Not common. (B. W. E. ’87.) “Prof. Evermann met with it near
Bloomington in August, 1885, where one specimen was taken alive in
a marsh” (A. W. Butler).

33. [219] Gallinula galeata (Licht.). Florida Gallinule.

Rare migrant. Two specimens taken May 10, 1880, by H. S. Bates.
34. [221] Fulica americana Gmel. American Coot.

Rare migrant. April 12 and 26, 1903 (W. L. M.), and April 17, 1900
(N. B. M.).

76

35. [228]. Philohela minor (Gmel.). American Woodcock. my
Reckoned as a common summer resident in 1886, this bird can now
be ranked only as a rare migrant.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Y one SRT PE Ane ORO Gea Gate orto me sale Rese 1885 1902 ; 1903...

GPRORVOr eA cos oor ee ce eee lame Sees ae fee | C.H.B. | W.L, Mo) eWalaite
WISE SOON te Sento ee eee ere eee eee NER |. °3-29 3-4 4-19

Nias dbo minns creer Ae Rowe esha ees berate See ales Ae ee ae Jaten
(Ohy rib rity) GAR lenge Rete Rens: SA i ornate ae Sre ods fem anim ace tru erie oaD os 0 Phe.
Waahscens eee is cece eee ree PRE ease 2 relies Catster < * oe eee
ENburn dace scien c oe ees eee esis ees eee oe .....|Common.| Rare. © ‘Rare.

36. [2380] Gallinago delicata (Ord.). Wilson’s Snipe.*
Common migrant. March 6 to May 10. September 22 to October
28. Common ialong all small streams in March and April.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Wgreta fF chy emesis oe eee i885. | 1885. - | 1886, | = 188m,
Oborvat eae CS Wsan Pes | c.H.B. | C.H.B. | B.W.E. | G.G.W.
Hirstseenoe se. e eae ce ee RRL POR Pt ae Halts pee eee 8-15 3-25
Neatscan perch ee ee eee ee ST TSAS ae ane aes 3-18 4-2
Com MON osc sg shies eres wiieremee ae vial Blows ‘sreiwrelels | eevee parse eee neal Kp cascoc
TeteOOnt hheee as ee oe | 4-22 9-22 325% | 418%
AIPUNG ANCE Ns soae asc dene arene ee eae ‘Abundant. Not common, Common. Common.
“W.S.B. | *B, W. E
aA 508k GAR eee oe eo ti Ryne vos oss | eet BOO esi cea OU2s 1902. 1903.
WRG VOL Ise Bene oe Tee ee N.B.M. | W.L.M. | W.L.M.| P.J. oH.
TERS ne a mee ath es ent ene EDT em Salli on bec) Bacto opa nse. 3-6
Bn 2p € OI{21: | MESSRS REPRE Re ios rete tacts eteieat SoUIOn Mobo nantoaeass ocllsc auc: ie
(Goma Onesie arecke cs eosiercieea steers steal Secmetmn ats A=1G. —'|\ 2x coerce 4-17"
Lagercen eco ee ge Rr pass AST SeaUi eal ees 10-08 eee
Abundances eae oe eee eee Common.| Common. Commine b aatt: a own aa seke
Ww.L.M

“——" - i eet

ae

~T
~J

37. [239]. Actodromas maculata (Vieil].). Pectoral Sandpiper.

‘Moderately common migrant. March 15 to May 9. This bird seems
to have been quite common during the spring of 1885. The bulk of
the species departed May 3.

MIGRATION RECORD.

VIED See eee £4 Se cS ee | 1885. | 1886. | 1887. 1903..
(Po SLE CET Aa ci ee ie eae, Se ie sa ge | Cc. H.B | B.W.E BW... |, Wal. M:
peterties nt BT) RS oS co 3-27 3-15 315 |
eR RG ies SA er | SY LD ae COR eae a ok SEIS ~~ | eee See
DEERME he oe Aces coc ae ets os == cee kev oe ves | et eS ee areas ee i preewere =
LDS 2S ELT aa Oe eae gr a |} 5-9 5-5 | BA cee Pere 4-29

| Common .|-2<=2.2444 esa Not common

LLL ERG Cpt RE fe ee |

38 (242) Actodromas minutilla (Vieill.). Least Sandpiper.
Rare migrant (B.-W. E. ’87).
39. [246] Evreunetes pusillus (Linn.). Semipalmated Sandpiper.
: Rare migrant (B. W. E. ’87). Twelve were seen April 26, 1903 (H. H.
Lane), and one May 3, 1903.
490. [254] Totanus melanoleucus (Gmel.). Greater Yellow-legs.

Not observed until the spring of 1903 when it was seen in small
numbers on April 26, 29 and 30 and May-1i (W. L. M.). A bird con-
spicuous by restless actions accompanied by continual and piercing cries.
41. (255} Totanus flavipes (Gmel.). Yellow-legs.

One- record. Concerning the year 1895, which was remarkabte- for
early arrivals of the Yellow-legs, Butler says: “The last report from
southern Indiana that spring was from Bloomington, where it was noted
April 26” (Juday).

42.” [256] Helodromas solitarius (Wils. ). Solitary Sandpiper.

Common migrant and perhaps raré summer resident. April 23 to
June 9. October 6. This bird has been reported as early as March
20, but.these dates should probably be referred to some other species,
perhaps Wilson’s Snipe. One observer records it as a summer resident
while another gives a queried affirmation. The date, June 9, is an ex-
tremely late one if the Solitary Sandpiper is to be considered purely
as a migrant. But it probably indicates summer residence, since in the
Alaskan breeding grounds young have been found in the same month

'

78

(June 28, ’03, Charlie Creek, Yukon River. W. H. Osgood). A commor
bird during the migratory season in all muddy places. Seen as early as
September 20 in fall.. Will probably be found in August.

MIGRATION RECORD.

WORT st aac csiaseon toee | 1886. 1887. 1892. 1899. 1900. | 1903. | 1903.
ODEGrVOE <0. scseeseenees ClHE Bs |G Gary E.M.K.| N.B.M.| N.B M.| W.L. M.| W.L. M.
Kirstseomtacs.casecees 5-3 4-28 5-7 4-29 5-3 4293" eS eee
NextBeen).sss.ccnt eke 5-5 4-30" 3 [ecard ecg Be eee nes 54 4-30

GOmMon 6-2 os ese tee all Saas Rae ee ate cone eietaee Gell memaretiserce 5 12 5=3. wi sseamnee
Mast Seene.-.-ecss ees iy hae Perret omen (RA a oe SB 5-16 5-12 6-9 106
Abundance............. Rares |s.-cconee HATOr A ecco oet lines enn Common|\--+-- es

43. [261] Bartramia longicauda (Bechst.). Bartramian Sandpiper.

Not common transient (C. H. B. ’86.).
44. [263] Actitis macularia (Linn.). Spotted Sandpiper.

Common migrant and rare summer resident. April 12. There is
one egg in the University collection from this locality. Found in the

same places as the Solitary Sandpiper but in smaller numbers.

MIGRATION RECORD.

MORE ia ccid cnc tésn cases Secbeseaeecines | 1885. | 1892. 1900. | 1901. | 1903.
Observertocec ovesaase science ettecces C. H. B. | EB. MoK. ON. BoM. |) WD. Mal aWesleaete
Miratis@@n sac seac- ccc asc see eeecs so le ay ATi Sale 4-19
INextiseont:..05¢cccres ce <2 acocmee }- 5-2 E- 4298 <3) 53. tewicarsios 4-24
Comm ON soe oes ses wee ee tee Geo ie Bl becreoncksoneet) Wan acoronGe| |akaoceorcr 4-28

| CLALCG) CetGe aaanBe aco Sabor DO cba scobarodecc:| meccestcadss lsorcicsoaonmol|sacuas caccée | |-ecceephetesets
IASTOTE COG) auee done Gooanceces succes Common. Rares. |ceccesssassdl aceebere Common

45. [273] Oxyechus vocifera (Linn.). Killdeer.* Fig. 6.

Abundant summer resident and rare winter resident. January 31 to
Dec. 12. Nest and four eggs found April 12, 1903 (C. E. Edmondson).
Another set found May 12, 1903, in a depression in the ground lined
with dry grass (C. G. L.). During several dark and cloudy or rainy

79

nights (March 5 to 13, 1903), the well-known piercing notes of this bird
were heard everywhere at all hours. On Noy. 29, °03, a Killdeer was
seen on the snow when there was no open water. The few uncovered
muddy snots were filled with tracks and probings.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Wear. .<.5-s-- Seite | 1884. | 1885. | 1885. | 1886. | 1886.
OWSONVON .5 scx en fis Petes a see Ses CoH Ey || (CS Haks,), COB. Be | BW. EB. W.B.
WITSEROGN ca 52% 5s 5 -<0 wseeae sts 3-18 Via. aon (Sees Teas ete Sadi oo feswae ese ate
INDXGEOOMS 22 (ooo ahs ate tee eee Sale es ees sae BEY Pewee tories aan re SHS) JAN OBSE AE. does
“PLATT OeAS oS danas aeseceak Beene CnC enars S19 Ss ects sdaren = agers pilisn 5 seeceres
UST CT AR Me pae sects see aS RS [oe Sacto eetel Ieee Grace 12-120 © Wass 3-265. 11

Ze! COSTAE EAC SRO ae eos ee Le a Abundant./Abundant.! Common.) Common.

WW 5: B.

Meare cccacoritcs thciee ence Ses | 1892. 1899. | 1900. 1901. | 1902.
servers oasc88 6 fs cases |e AB: U- | N.B.M. | No BoM? |eWiMs,|| We a. Mi:
HOPRGMCON cwce)s oSjssqckcsces Ges 3-24 3-2 3-9 3-17 -2

Ne RERGGI cass ccioureceke cet ee 4-2 5-3 4-20 3-19* 3-7
“PTT DS AES SSRs a Secs Scere] peer mnaeeted (Seca: oe cee) Csaee ae aan 3-24 3-26
LUD ECUI OTIS Sets ae ese en [Pan ert ae Sey Se | I See 22 Wes aoa ctacqa)l|a-atomnebees
PUTA NCE so 002s ce ches sates Common.| Rare. |Not common Abundant. Abundant.

= Vion. B:

46. [289] Colinus virginianus (Linn.). Bob-white.*

Bob-white is scarcely a common resident at present. In 1886 C. H.
Bolilmann considered it abundant. May 18, 1903, a nest and two eggs
were found in a rather damp spot in a large dense woods and June
14, young ones were seen running about with their mother (C. G. L.).
Coveys have been observed rather late; eight were seen April 15. 1902,
and seven, May 16, 1908. The so-called “crazy” season was at its height
Gctober 11, 1902. <A score of instances was noted of their flying in
open doors and against windows. More often seen in the woods than

in open fields.

80 eae

47. [300] Bonasa, umbellus (Linn.). Ruffed Grouse.

As late as 1886 the Ruffed Grouse was a common resident in. Mon-
roe County (C. H. B.), and in 1887 was frequently seen in the hills north-
east of town (B. W. E.), and was rather common in deep woods (W.S.
3B.). These phrases are far from indicative of the occurrence of the
Ruffed Grouse at present. In four years of continuous field-work but
one bird has been observed each year. April 7, 1901, a splendid male
was seen; March 23, 1902, one.was found dead; Sept. 23, 1902, one
flew through a window into a house, and March 14; 1903, one- was
Seen in a dense, tangled and wild tract of woods which was swept
by a hurricane several years ago (P. J. H.). It is in this place that
the Ruffed Grouse will probably persist longest in this county, and it
may be found there in sparing numbers for several years. Three were
seen in this locality on April 9, 1904, and two more on April 16. In Brown,
the adjoining county east, the Ruffed Grouse was classed as common
as late as 1894 (KH. M. K.).

48. [316] Zenaidura macroura (Linn.). Mourning Dove.* Figs. Vatoe

Common resident, Jess numerous in winter, though it is sometimes
seen in bands of four to twelve in this season. They become common
after the first week of March, and the dates are rather regular—Marech
8, ’01, March 9, 02, March 8, ’03. <A bird of even distribution, equally
liable to be met with in thickets or more open woods or in plowed lands
or weedy fields. A most attractive creature of beautiful appearance
and pleasing manner, in the mating season filling the air with the
sonorous melody of his love.

The point of greatest interest in regard to the Mourning Dove is
its early nesting. Mr. A. W. Butler says: ‘They begin cooing about the
middle of March. * * * They mate early, and their nests, with com-
plement of eggs are often found early in April—April 4, Franklin
County.” ~B. W. Evermann found a nest and set of eggs here April
17, 1886. In the last few years, however, nests and eggs have been
found at much earlier dates. In 1901, the first nest was found March
17; no eggs were seen, however, until April 7 and April 10. Those found
on the latter date were hatched April 14, therefore they must have been
laid about on the first and second days of April. The nest was in a
tangle ‘of vines on a rail fence. In 1902 the record was as follows:

Cooing March 7—nest complete March 27—one egg seen March 28. This

81

egg and nest were then destroyed by an unfortunate accident. Three
other nests were found, however, on the 29th, each of which contained
either one or two eggs. All of these nests were placed in small cedar
trees. A Dove was heard cooing imperfectly November 9. Doves began
cooing in 1908 on March 5. The first nest was found in a cedar, March
22; on April 8 it contained one egg and one young dove just hatched.
Reckoning the period of incubation as two weeks, this nest must have
had a full set of eggs on March 25 or 26. Another nest was in a pine
tree and had young two and one-half inches long on April11. These
were at least a week old, probably more. Then this nest must have
contained a full complement of eggs on March 21. On April 24 a nest
containing two eggs was found flat on the ground under a mandrake.
49. [325] Cathartes aura (Linn.). Turkey Vulture.*

With one exception all the records show that the Buzzard is ¥ resi-
dent only a little over nine months in the year, January 31 to November
21. In 1892 E. M. J<Xindle said that a few were permanent fesidents.
They are quite abundant in this county, and it is not an uncommon’
thing to see them in companies-of ten to sixty gliding about in circling
paths in the upper air.

B. W. Evermann found a full set of eggs April 17, 1886. This is
earlier than any other date reported from the State. C. G. Littell found
young just hatched in a nest in a hollow log in a large, dense and
damp woods, May 19, ’03. According to the owner of the place Buzzards
had roosted at this spot for three years before.

MIGRATION RECORD.

MG Tsease rag seing ase 1885. 1885. | 1886. 1892. 1893. 1899,
Observer...2co..5- CHB: CHEB. seis. eel ob MaKe SR MK. |) oN. -BSM.
First seen......... Cal heat ee ee Meee 2-22 2-6 2-22 2-26
Next seen:.... <.2: De Biot Muartallt: ince cect 2-23 2-13 2-25 4-1
ROME HOM srcjiee stems SESS aie ie Gee oD Oee] Penance tae 2-13* 3-2 4-2
WiaSAB eM ter cerrortdet litte ers ies omens ITE al Se eamendem [Bcogee canons] lo bebamao teal loacmogercess
Abundance. ......| Very common.| Abundant.| Common. | Common.| Common.) Common.
| *B.W.E.| A.B. U. | |

6—A. or Screncr, ’94,

NiGErs ses ese 1900. 1901. 1902, | 1902 1903.

|
Observer .......... N.B.M W.L.M.| W.L.M. | W.L.M. | W.L.M
First seen......... 4-5 2-17 2-26 | ae aI 1-31
Next seen..... 4-18 3-3 Bo |: Rely | Ween ees 2-10
Commons esaees: 4-18 3-17 SEDO) ae acess eee 3-8
IGWStRECE NaF 5 50 ho See ose as ee eee See eee H-80 Wis eeeesese
Abundance....... Common. | Abundant.) Abundant) Abundant.) Abundant.
50. [326] Cutharista urubu (Vieill.). Black Vulture.

Rare spring and summer visitant.
1890” (A. W. Butler).
[327]

dl.

Rare summer visitant.

were seen in August, 1885.

52.

of years are February 28, ’85 (C. H. B.), and April 19, ’02.

nearly every year, and it was probably common March 14,

[331]
Rare migrant.

Elanoides forficatus (Linn.).

One was seen May 16, 1903.
Swallow-tailed Kite.

11-21
Abundant.

“It was noted in Monroe County,

All that have been reported from this county
One was taken on the 4th (C. H. B.), and

two were seen of which one was taken on the eighteenth (B. W. E.).

Corcus hudsonius (Linn. ).

Marsh Hawk.
The earliest and latest dates of arrival for a series

It

several were seen in a densely wooded creek bottom (P. J. H.).

53.

tions, especially in March and October.

breeding.
54.

[332]
An uncommon

[333 ]

Accipiter velox (Wils. ).
common

Accipiter cooperii (Bonap. ).

resident;

Resident; not common; breeds.

ary and March.
[334]

5d.

Accipiter atricapillus (Wils. ).

in

Wiis:

Cooper’s Hawk.*

Sharp-shinned Hawk.*

1903,

is seen
when

winter and during the migra-
Blatchley reports it as

Most numerous in January, Febru-

American Goshawk.

Rare winter visitor; one taken November 22, 1885 (G. G. W.).

56.

on
-~I

[337]
Common resident; breeds.
[339] Buteo lineatus (Gmel.).

Common resident:

Buteo borealis (Gmel. ).

breeds.

Red tailed Hawk.*
Nest and eggs April 19, 1903.
Red-shouldered Hawk.*

This and the last species are somewhat

confined to the wilder parts of the country, but are occasionally seen

flying over the city.

io)
cy

58. [343] Buteo platypterus (Vieill.). Broad-winged Hawk.*
Rather rare resident. Not reported from this county before 1892.
More often seen in recent years. Commonest in April and October.

69, [847a] Archibuteo lagopus sancti-johannis (Gmel.). American Rough-
legged Hawk.

-Rare winter visitor; February 21, 1885 (C. H. B.).
60, [349] Aquila chrysaetos (Linn.). Golden Eagle.

Rare winter visitor; a few seen every winter. Has been observed
as late as May 15, 1903 (W. L. M.) in Brown County, where it is as
likely to remain to breed as in any part cf Indiana. Last date for
Monroe County, November 28, 1903.

61. [852] Halizetus leucocephalus Linn.). Bald Eagle.

Rare winter visitor. Considered less rare than the last by W. S.
Blatchley and B. W. Evermann. But in recent years the Bald Eagle
has not been observed at all, while Golden Eagles have been seen and
captured every year. The last date is July 29, 1885 (S. E. Meek). This
date suggests a possibility of summer residence of this bird also.

62. [357] Falco colunbarius Linn. Pigeon Hawk.

Rare migrant, taken several times during 1885-1887, but not observed
in recent years. March 12, 1887 (W. S. B.). April 28, 1885 (C. H. B.).
November 7, 1885 (G. G. W.)

63. [3860] Falco sparverius Linn. American Sparrow Hawk.*

Common resident, less numerous in winter; in fact, they are entirely
absent some winters as they were during those of 1900-1901, 1902-1903
and 1884-1885. They become common in March—March 15, 1902, Mareh
19, 1903, March 26, 1885 (C. H. B.). They have been observed mating
March 17, *°03 (W. L. M.), and repairing a nest on the University cam-
pus, which has been used for years, on April 11, 1901 and 1903. In
years when they do not winter it is seen that the females are the
first migrants, as for example, in 1885. The first and second dates for
females were March 17 and 20, whilé males were not seen until March
23 and 24.

64. [864] Pandion haliaétus carolinensis (Gmel.). American Osprey.

Rather rare migrant. March 12 to April 29. November. C. H.
Bollmann saw but one in four years, March 12, 1885. B. W. Evermann
said it was occasional on the White River (87), and E. M. Kindle
reported it during November, 1892. Of late it has been seen frequently

84

in the central part of the county; the record for 1993 is as follows:
First seen April 138, next April 17, and last April 29.
65. [366] Asio wilsonianus (Less.). American Long-eared Owl.

Rare winter visitor... Fall 1886 (B. W. H.); Jan. 30,:1883 (W. 8. B.);
March 19, 1885 (C. H. B.), are the only dates at hand.

66. [867] Asio accipitrinus. (Pall.). Short-eared Owl.

“Very rare; two seen in the fall of 1886” (B. W. E.). .
67. [368] Syrnium varium (Barton). Barred Owl.*

Considered a common resident by C. H. Bollmann, B. W. Eyermann
and W. S. Blatchley. The last is authority for a breeding record. I
know but little concerning the occurrence of owls in Monroe County.
In fact owls are more rare here at present than in any place where
I have ever made observations. The only record of a Barred Owl in
three years is March 24, 1902, when one was heard. That this con-
dition is only a temporary one is shown by the fact that in the fall
of 1900 Screech Owls were abundant and Great Horned and Barred
Owls were often heard and seen.

68. [372] Cryptoglasc acadica (Gmel.). Saw-whet Owl.*

Rare resident. August 20, 1884. One was taken in the University
power plant November 27, 1886 (C. H. B.).

69. [373] Megascops asio (Linn.). Screech Owl.*

Common resident. Breeds. The red phase prevails. With the excep-
tion of the fall of 1900 this has been a rare bird here in the last few
years.

This is the fellow who can best explain the meaning of the series
of fan-like scratches which we see after a fresh fall of snow on either
side of two parallel rows of tiny dots which end in a little carmine
punctuated pit—the shambles of a Peromyscus. A Screech Owl which had
the sad affliction of a cataract on one eye was placed in a roomy cage
with two whitefooted mice with which to satisfy his appetite. Morning
dawned on the scene of an unexpected tragedy. Two mice, with golden
coats and pretty white steckings, were nestled in a warm bed of bright
rufous feathers, Sleeping away the effects of a banquet of owl.

70. [875] Bubo virginianus (Gmel.). Great Horned Owl.

Common resident (C. H. B. and B. W. E.). Breeds (W. S. B.). As
in the case of the other Striges, rare since 1990. The only recent date
is Whareh: 22> 1903 - (Ee deel):

85

The following epitaph is of interest: ‘“ ‘Old Bubo,’ the college pet.
Caught in a steel trap in September, 1885, and kept in the basement
of Owen Hall until January, 1886, when he died.”

71. [876] Nyctea nyctea (Linn.). Snowy Owl. |

-+ Rare winter visitor (C. H. B. ’86.). Last date, January 25, 1903
(Pe J. H.).

72. [387] | Coccyzus americanus (Linn.). Yellow-billed Cuckoo.*

- Common summer resident. April 138 to Sept. 24. Breeds. <A nest
of the, Yellow-billed Cuckoo was found May 30, 1901. It contained one
egg on that day and two on the next. It was in a spice-bush three
feet above the ground and was built of sticks and partly lined with
leaves (W. L. H.). May 25, 1908, a nest and two eggs were found
about seven feet up in a grapevine (C. G. L.). In 1885 a nest with
‘fresh eggs was found as late as June 30, by B. W. Evermann (Butler).
“The.qgsual nest is a mere pretense, a flimsy structure of a few sticks,
with a few blossoms, generally of the oak, upon which to lay the eggs.
Occasionally a very substantial nest is. built—one such was found at
Bloomington, Ind., by my friend, Mr. O. M. Meyncke” (Butler).

MIGRATION RECORD.

VGH RAC ecto ccaenteee 1885. 1885. 1886. | 1892. 1893.
-—
ODSEnVER co cceecccetmttee: CoHsB: CH= Bs GieGre Wee fab Ke, ecb Mee
BiTSh SEEM. Paeers rae sires 5-17 IRNESS diss Tee 4-13 5-7 5-15
Wextiseen-..-.-2. an ee i bt een he Sere Ra 5-5* 5-13 5-21
Comino gerac co. e eo eancrece': 5-24 ice ee ORE acs (Bite “SESE acres aa ah i's
DEIR ORIOT ere cies ones Pretec cnc cee | 9-24 Keser ase Oe Mller macmost seeracine
PCAN TUTE GC Oisecr sins «:cuslsteoyn re Very common. Very Bem ons Common.| Common. | Common.
| “B.W.E.
SSS l 33 aa ie
GH iano aenincepacnincee caacieae TESS ie eetu00s 1902. 1902. 1903.
MP SEY VERA. ccs datewt acs alc dele eras cca N.B.M. | N.B.M. | W.L.M. | W.L.M. W.L. M.
MTS ROOM Sian seers nies muse « 4-28 5-15 OHO a | BlGaieiace eee 5-5
MreeWaeen sca te neat 4-29 anon bi Sh aia | Se a 5-10
Pacterenn rein 5-4 5-17 “Ulin eae 5-13
WANS SOLENT 6 One Wace Gorin SOUS OES eL EIR SC eS Eon el (SRE RIE Se AE Es | eee sar a2 1s) ence. sis
PAS MIL ANCES nitina are cowie scene Common.| Common. | Common.| Common. | Common.

86

73. [888] Covcyzus erythrophthalmus (Wils.). Black-billed Cuckoo.* Fig. 11.

Common summer resident. May 12 to Sept. 22. Breeds. May 20,
1903, C. G. Littell found a nest and three eggs about eight feet up
in a cedar. The nest was a mere platform.

In 1887 B. W. Evermann said that this species was apparently more
common than the last. If there is any difference in numbers at present
the Black-billed Cuckoo is the more rare of the two species. All rec-
ords since 1892 show the same state of affairs. In 1894, E. M. Kindle
corsidered this bird rare and the last common in Brown County. At
this place the present species is a much more regular migrant than
the Yellow-billed Cuckoo. Records of five springs show that it arrived
either on the 12th or 13th of May. May 12, 1893, Mr. E. M. Windle
heard them calling as they passed over, and on April 13, 1886, Mr. G.
G. Williamson heard the calling of Cuckoos, “Yellow or Black-billed
or both.” This is much the earliest date that has been recorded for
either species within the State. In all probability the birds heard were
Yellow-billed Cuckoos, as they are much more irregular than the Black-

billed in the time of their arrival and are always observed earlier.

MIGRATION RECORD.

WeOAR hasecceccadeecs 1885. 1885. 1886. 1892. 1893. 1902 1903.
Obsenvyeticescc.cccei: | C.H.B.| C.H. B B. W.E. | E.M.K.|E. M. K.| W. L. M.| W. L. M
Birstseenisiscse. + <2 0s | Baldi b cceen ase 5-13 5-13 Ges) Wi EARS occ 5-12
Newtsaant nt | S16 ieee reece oe de oeecrans oll Reoe eee ce Reet eer | teat er aee 5-13
Commontee-eerteacis Belo ee OR one Paley oeallinde ah | see
Wiastisqen merece 5 | SOP SEBE QED Ara arcloaiteieetersy ling atwctnenstvall| eels! cicteiats O21) = alec saemecicls
Abundance......... ; Abund. | Abund..| Very com.| Com. |......... Com. Com.

74. [3890] Ceryle alcyon (Linn.). Belted Kingfisher.
Common summer resident; rare winter resident. March 5 to No-
vember 9. Jan. 4, 1893 (E. M. Ix.). Breeds. The females become numer-

ous in spring before the males.

MIGRATION RECORD.

VWioG So aaaapensaaaee | 1885. | 1885. | 1886. | 1887. | 1892. | 1892-3.
Observer .......... C: H-B: ¢.. HB: B.W.E. | G.G..W. |cE: M. K,;,| BE. MK
First seen......... S-SIM ba bie siancaiese mae as 3-22 3-26 4 (ea Benaeson ates
Next seen......... Tee acest SOC aaoeree = eae |e eer (ae cA
CODTICT RE ARB Gane learns eas onbel Reece Sapicor rR Scel sata Sir oc Seba IRSEesSon msec ari: Sal pescoensace
MARDEN GAs cca Acee | cca wee © ats i eta de Sk ENR esol Boe anecaaecs) Peon nie mare 1-4, ’93
Abundance....... Common. Wess commion:|'> ‘are: © (|h. 5.0.0.4: Common. |:...........
NGM RS tease aiecatent reece 1893. | 1900. 1902. 1902. | 1903. | 1903.
Observer .............. E. M. K. | N.B.M. | W.L.M. | W.l.M.} W.L.M. | W.L.M.
First seon............ 3-12 a AStee | aaeet—o fereries Eines Bon ies |Peeee secs
Next seen............ | 4-26 4-28 AS Cha ae) Rees 26 ilies ease
MIO See oe. cee lone or cce cee ae | Ar | Lael nS ae te | Pe oot QA TE Owen once ees
ant HOON 5.22 2-5. ee teee ees settee nesses coerce stig Ru eae Rares 11-7
Abundance ........... Common.| Notvery | Scarce. | Common.| Common.| Common.
| common.

75. [393] Dryobates villosus (Linn.). Hairy Woodpecker.*

Common resident: breeds. A less familiar bird than the next, but
it is occasionally seen in the city. But his contact with civilization
generally gives him a dingy color and a ruffled coat.

76. [894] Dryobates pubescens (Linn.). Southern Downy Woodpecker.*
Fig. 12.

Common resident; breeds. Possibly more common than the last;
apparently so because of its more confiding attitude towards man. Nest
and one egg in a rail April 23, 1903 (C. G. L.). But the nest has been
found with only two eggs in it as late as May 15, 1901.

77. [402] Sphyrapicus varius (Linn.). Yellow-bellied Sapsucker.*

Regularly a very common migrant: occasionally a common winter
resident. Eight were seen January 21, 1903, in a group of cedars and
pines less than an acre in area. It did not winter in 1901-1902. B. W.
Evermann gives it as a rare resident, and W. S. Blatchley says it breeds.
There are no later dates in spring, however, than May 1, 1903 (W. L. M.),
and May 5, 1885 (C. H. B.). It was observed mating April 8, 1903 (W.

88

L. M.), but it would be an unusual occurrence for it to breed this far

south. According to C. H. Bollmann’s schedule for 1885 the males

arrive and depart earlier than the females.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Wenn a Sein acocl uses ap ae aay wAShoS 1885. 1885. 1886. 1887.» ;

' - z 7 2 boa Ty ra
Observer sc case ee ee CATS | C2HSE: col GE es Bh GGIW.s Gea
irs tase € Weer ar momey eae Spee, wed) aie 9-15 | 3-15 3-31
Next meen sts icc vscc@higcentos| eS Oke ads 9-24 “| 3-254 4-1
Gommnion: 2224.02 eee oe -4 4-4 Qe OD ASP. pea eee : Boe
Piast scons <2. spe eee le I ADO Sa ae a | deus oat
Abundance s.-25-6-e2c0-= Sees Common. Common.|Veryecommon| Rare. .......... ee

“W.S.B. |
Venere Na en 1892 1900. | 1901. -|: 1902. | 1903,
|

Observer <3)... ier cobe (7B.M.K.| N. BOM. | W.L.M. | W.L.M. | W.L.M,
Raree kon |. fob sts eva ee eee PO ae a er
Next Scene ese a ee eee 4-17 4210) 1-929) 2 3299 ©, | ee

Commons. alate chess eee ete eee | LOT ana earl

UPASLARG CIEe ss ee eee ee eee rae es 3 Se ae Peers bees Cr 5-1
Aan GUN Ces cr ss cured sane ane Common.} Common..)............ | Common. | Tolerably
§ 1 ‘ Common.
| | *V.H.B

78. [405a] Ceophleus pileatus abieticola Bangs. Northern Pileated Wood-
pecker. Ts ;

Quite rare resident; very probably breeds. Although it is now re-
stricted to the wildest and least visited parts cf the county and is present
there in but small numbers, it must haye been tolerably common as
late as 1885. Seven specimens were taken that year—March 21, Maren
22, a male; March 29, a male and a female (C. H. B.): two specimens

were taken along Bean Blossom Creek in August (3. W. E.), and one

89

Was seen December 24, by W.-S. Blatchley. It has been seen or. taken
several times since: all the dates follow: November 3, 1887, J. Gra-
ham; February 13, 1892, two seen, one of which, a female, was taken,
A. B. Ulrey; one seen in 1898 and one about February 7, 1901, V. H.
Barnett; two seen and one, a male, taken January 20, 1903, by Mr.
Whitaker. The last specimen was winged and brought in alive. It
hammered to pieces the pine box used for a cage and escaped into
the streets.. After several adventures it was. with difficulty recaptured
and placed in a wire cage at the University. He tried to shatter this,
too, but of course was. unsuccessful. His accuracy was shown by his
repeatedly pecking a wire, not more than one-sixteenth of an inch
in diameter, which he hit squarely every time. He lived about three
days in captivity. Two of these roble birds were also seen on May 17,
1954.. In a steady majestic flight they winged their way across some
fields and a highway that lay between two dense forests, their favorite
retreats.

79. [406] Melanerpes erythrocephalus (Linn.). Red-headed Woodpecker.*

Abundant summer resident; not uncommon winter resident. All of
the Redheads sometimes migrate in the fall, and leave us no winter
residents. Such was the case in the years 1892 and 1905. The autumn
of the latter year was noticeable for the very scanty production of
beechnuts and acorns. In 1893 after their winter’s absence they were
first seen April 19 and became abundant April 28 and 29 (E. M. K.).
For three years prior to 1903 the Redhead was a very common winter
resident, in fact, the most common and most equally distributed winter
bird. It became common each year from the middle of February to the
1st of March.

The mating call was heard as early as February 15, 1903. The
nest and five eggs were found May 29, 1903 (C. G. L.).

Redheaded Woodpeckers are very quarrelsome, and are continually
driving other birds from their favorite trees. Their attentions seem
especially directed against their little cousin, the Dowry, although Jun-
cos, Tufted Titmice and Nuthatches are not slighted. They have been
observed to come to the ground to attack a Tufted Titmouse. They
are capable of making as large an animal as the Fox Squirrel beat
a hasty retreat. Sparrow Hawks, too, are put to flight, but the Red-
headed tyrant often finds his master in the English Sparrow.

90

There is nothing in the Redhead to suggest the flycatcher, but he
really is an expert in that line. A flash of color often attracts your
eye to a nearby treetop, and you see that it is the Redhead, who
is diminishing the insect population. In one or two or three swoops,
as gracefully as Myiarchus himself, he obtains his luncheon.

80. [409] Centurus carolinus (Linn.). Red-bellied Woodpecker.*

Common summer resident: less common winter resident. An _ in-
crease in number is noticeable about the middle of March. Common
April 8, 1903.

A yery garrulous bird; a single individual often fills the woods with
a din of his varied cries; stimulation and excitement are not needed to
provoke a demonstration but he seems to do it for the pure love of making
a racket.

81. [412a] Coluptes auratus luteus Bangs. Northern Flicker.* Fig. 13.

Abundant summer resident and yery common winter resident. Be-
comes abundant in March. Mating call heard as early as February
15, 1903, and as late as November 20, 1902. A nest and two eggs were
found in an apple tree April 22, 1903 (C. G. L.).

82. [417] Antrostomus vociferus (Wils.). Whip-poor-will.*
Rather common summer resident, but on account of its peculiar

habits not commonly observed.

MIGRATION RECORD.

War. si se0:. aaaceee 1885. 1886. 1892. 1893. | 1899. | 1903.
Observer ---s.-;. 5... C3H.B 7 | Wiis.) Be E.M.K. E.M:K. | N.B.M. | W.L. M.
First seen.......... 5-17 4-21 5-7 4-29 4-95 4-29
Next seen.......... Fp) | LOR ee 5-13 5B “|esos sanmeate 4-30
Common’ 5 a. #. -%.< 5. iY (phe BEEP eee eee Sere c= erent hace Aer | lene sarrcsce| Secs osetec
1A) We ecaestel eanbanecrerc laeocaucacdad |poeameuacmaude li caoriectenor! ponermcoacbe| fi tccccte cece
Abundance......... Common.| Common. |Not common)............|......-+-++ Common.
“Co Ho B:

OL

88. [420] Chordeiles virginianus (Gmel.). Night Hawk.*

Common summer resident. (C. H. B.) April 28 to Sept. 21. Abun-
dant migrant, especially in fall.

MIGRATION RECORD.
VCD oA pS GS OER Sc REE SES RSIS See | 1885. | 1885. | 1886. | 1892. 1893.
MIDSBEV OT sees se cos senor rec eieeeee CH. C.H. B: | G@°G. W. | E.M.K E.M. K.
ORT RIAROE NG seca res occ c ccsecee tees B-1Givte Gl suse eae 5-6 5-6 5-10
ING@RURGEN coer oon neo eci eee ce nes HS YG el | San ascot nen ISise 5-13 5-12
CORITTITITT Ocoee dearer ers ee F277. yeaa ae ba coe Eee | as Sl era ar
LDCS oy RAR Ses ere ae Pe a (Re aD les Aeon eect sac cemacs staal eeeee fokeee
if

AMMO ANCE tek case ecaee Abundant |Abundant |Abundant. Common. | Common.
OTT es Saas AROS EEE ERO ee Manis Seen ees 1899. 1901 1902. 1903.
WEBEVENT Neseatri hein sa ctacirasinalocaeSeenciens N.B.M Wolo |) WeloM.. | Wale
TEE GIDE hogan othe Oe ROC oe eee aE a ee Real 5-14 5-20 4-28
Ma mtIR OOM Sante creme cect iacereloisoae tecisiectoe nt 5-26 Los | Oe (aa eee (St otie eiteicic
UNTATITT Cage eke ad J attee Baz bine Boa pee se Be cece aoe CR nes] ORE ae neR SE [Eee eT SERSIaM| (Es Rain a
IRRIR CONE aera ys oe wee Sem ce osean ele con Goma woah cinciwisinid l(a cateie vines Datel) wrens seca
TAIT TG Senn Scan Aa are SG Common.| Common. /Abundant.|............
84. [423] Chetura pelagica (Linn.). Chimney Swift.*

Abundant summer resident.

April 4 to October 14.

April 4, 1892

(E. M. K.) is as early as it has been reported from the State, while
October 14, 1902, is the latest date for the State. On the date
one was found clinging to a maple tree in the campus. It was quite

latter
numb and offered no resistance when picked up. It quickly recovered
its vitality in a warm room, however, The outside temperature was 64°.

1903. Nest
1903 (C. G. L.) in a large chimney about six feet from the top.

Nestbuilding April </, and five eggs found June 5,

MIGRATION RECORD.
ORT Ae oa sie dle Sehices oe hea | 1885. 1885. 1886. 1892. 1893.
Observer.....- C2 H-B C.H.B B. W.E E.M.K. | E.M.K
WITS Ree Ny. x cnno nent core toceeienene A= Gee a eee ov eater 4-11 4-4. 4-7
INGX Se Ns... moaisersse mre nimaeee Me anne pace 4-14* 4-17 4-8
Contmone ects e eo ars Coe BVT Sosa nee ae de tens oe 8 cess ae eee eee
Was GISCON.o sccsseiee sane eee eee |scanscsdasce MORASS Nore oeee SPs ovo POEs eee |
AND ONGaMN COem scar. ee eon eee Abundant.|Abundant.|/Abundant.| Common. | Common
| =e Gras
|
VGA Tae cece neonate eee ea eee Oe to 1899. 1902. 1902. 1903.
OHSErVer- = spect ae ei eee eee IN; BM (Wie Me Wie ie es L.M.
Rirsbapen 5 Seem cee eae eee eae 4-19 15S eal ee ie 4.8 .
INoxESGON cr acca ee eae Seen eee 4-20 rh aed een es 4-9 |
COMMON Ae.8 sox ech oeeeeeeesice ees eee 4-26 UB Gra aulipana secs. 4-10
TASES BOM 5555 52-5 BONE ore ante nos pads ales RIE Naell sisiewnislecwteisis@ra eos cstoineeains 10-14 Baers, fos
J ALTTENG EN NC cherterme ner Bere ce oOr aIGOOESSPDDOBSCORIONS Common. Abundant.|/Abundant.} Abundant.
85. [428] Trochilus colubris Linn. Ruby-throated Hummingbird.*

Common summer resident. April 29 to September 26. The malés
migrate about a week ahead of the females. Nest and two eggs May

15, 1902.

MIGRATION RECORD.

MCAT se acatcemutocen estes 1882. 1885. 1885. 1885. 1886. 1892.
ieee en aetat oanse B. W.E Cc. H.B CHB C2 HSB G.G.W. | E.M.K
MITStSeen ee nee csc: 5-13 Ff 4-29 STA Ue earearcoare 4-29 4 29
IN@XtiSCOM tia. ete ciies||(toseb em nee 4-30 | bth Med ohGoacn ssne 4-30" secs
Common ieee EE] Biel peccceecood) oncces eet oan eateries ol [cat sces ooo:
J PES AGG heerpetsneacees| sasonoocadch sodadsaa=rsa| edad ioDnoos i rol Se lesan occ
Abundance............ Common. Abundant./Abundant.|Abundant.|..... ..... Not very
ears common.

“WiGiiibs Jone a oben Sa pae eed Bic mcr ee cermeuaogas 1900. 1901. - 1902. 1903.
MU RETVIGIA eee temic aeernclsreists sosieracaieinisce ie aria | Nee Ba Mies | maw). aeons | = es Wylie. IM. W.L. M.
PROBE CML EE sete. ee enna Socio aoa tinice dwierne ieee 5-5 5-4 nivel eclectoene arene
Wexbseen =... ....: Beer atte seat Ione ee ie SB-8 Bette = a ial A a a
_ DIDTOAT OF diced seb anne a aee eens saeccnen | 5-10 Fi Set ol Soe sae Seated neuen erection
Me Ei Be erie Sane ot a dai tina snes [ow ou wetiweact joe o> Sennitees |e coseer eset sare 9-26
PAD UI AN COS sac aren Gam ct se arcsec Cav ale te Eee Common.| Common. Moderately | Common.
: common.
a >

86. [444]. . Tyrannus tyrannus (Linn.).- Kingbird.* Fig. 14.

Common summer resident. April 13 to September 5. Mating April
29, 1903. Nest and four eggs on‘the topmost limb of an apple tree,
May 28, 1903 (C. G. L.).

MIGRATION RECORD.

i ene 1885. 1885. 1886. 1887. 1892.
Sate ee C.H.B. | C.H.B. | W.S.B. | G.G.W. | E.M.K.
HES TASUO Hh asee necine eer sincere cities ARMie, |e hones ates | 4-13 4-24 4-18
PU GESCUN SS So. tester sees a Meee setae cd iettee Paro fa Ne 4-27
MUO TNO Meee Get oats anc os Sa wes seas (COE eae be aeees ARI ease lac ara enters ser 4-27
AS ESS ECM bears a civose oct ais bale ean oe aprasucs seas OSS ed tae AEN acted laenereercace
PATINA COY. Ganthelce ciok wa oo anielsieeee Abundant.|Abundant.; Common. |...........- Common.

*G.G. W

7C.H.B
WEEN SY Gen One Dra Ap AICO DOR OC OIL OCGA OPO DCT nn Eeets _ 1893. 1900. 1901. 1903.
MUMS EEE etic sto a sta carers mote eles eres ela weetee a ete sic E.M.K. | Nee cM |e Wisela ied vy cela lr,
LOSES HIS Gye ls Sead ae i ee Ae Sena ar ae ere Ae 4-16 | 4-23 4-30 4-19
Rebar ee ee tetera RY 406 | 4-28 5-4 4-29
CICTERTACT eNOS RSE SES Cae enon on ca aca ne] (Eceaiareceeee [Secetneneods 5-6 4-29
DAW SECS ed bees os aaeede sccuetonesenbadedaneeos | lssppecccuses | Re ocean (oceeseac ann zen oeonmcdo
BAUR EU Ya CL SUN Oe eee stay feo icfo ralacs eee nlelecohn seeeweak ewes Ss Common. | Common.| Common. | Common.

94

87. [452] Myiarchus crinitus (Linn.). Crested Flycatcher. *

Common summer resident. April 18 to September 7. Nestbuilding
May 14, 1901; six eggs May 27. In 1902 a nest and 5 eggs were found
May 21; the eggs were hatched June 2 and the young birds had flown
June 11 (Gertrude. Hitze). Another nest with six young about ready
to leave was found June 12. It was in a hollow apple tree about 6%
feet up (C. G. L..).

Later in the season, in August and September, these birds may be
seen trooping around with a brood of lusty youngsters almost as large
as themselves. These little family groups are pleasing objects in the
sultry brightness of an open grove or beside the dimly lighted paths
of the forest. Myiarchus here, as at all places and all times, seems.
to fit into his surroundings perfectly. Everywhere he is full of un-

conscious dignity and is perfectly at home.

MIGRATION RECORD.

WOAT Goce sacen: | 1885. 1885. 1886. 1887. 1892. 1893.
Observer ........ | C.H B. | C.H.B | Geo Be |Gn Gaal: E. M.K. E. M.K
First seen...... | y (Cae a ee apace 4-23 4-25 4-24 4-18
Next seen ...... ay Seaese nae Bros ae oes 2 Tee
Common)s.-..---- AED) Ss ee owe mere tlce cole ser oe mail rem hac Oos 4-27 | 4-26
Gastiseen 3 ee cces |i s<ccnenss es Neyo il eeckaeenisen J-cenee serene |oeeeereecee oes Ife coe siete
Abundance..... Be Verycommon, Common pesteaeee= Verycommon, Common.
MG RN ios biotastis)s asiscste's cle sams meeles 1899 | 1900. 1901 19.2 1903
Observer. spines sess caren eeeeorent N.B.M.| N.B.M.| W.L.M | W.L.M. | Woii. Me
Mirst seen ces carn nae cet eset 4-22 56 5-6 4-27 4-28
IN@XUREON Ese csce castes seco see 4-28 5-7 5-7 4-28 4-29
Commonsoectescscakee scacaeree 5-3 5-8 5-9 4-27 4-29
MAS URECO Mo accmertinlaienie econ eens snieorcice smear nes eec meant seaeee ae escal| hae cieroseleesn | eee eee
Aba dan Ole. <-sosjossecesbiaeemn eet Common.| Common. |} Common.| Common. | Common-

88. [456] Sayornis phebe (Lath.). Phoebe.* Fig. 15.
Common summer resident. March 1 to October 17. An early mi-

grant and an early breeder. B. W. Evermann gives the date March

V5

1, but does not give the year, although it is probably 1887. KE. M.
Kindle saw it March 2, 1893. They are found first at the nesting
places: March 17, 1901, a pair was seen at a quarry; March 14, 1902,
one was seen at a bridge near a pond and on the first date in 1903,
March 12, they were common at the caves; eleven were seen about
the mouths of three caves. Nestbuilding March 22, 1902. Nest com-
plete April 2, 1908. April 12, 1903, a nest and five eggs were found
under a bridge (C. G. L.). Well-grown young have been seen May 6,
1899 (N. B. M.), and May 7, 1901.

The Phoebe seems to be better pleased if a suitable nesting site
can be found near the dwellings of man. There he lives out his quiet
and beneficial career, an unobtrusive yet confiding bird.

MIGRATION RECORD.

MERLE a cciectsoct seen nee 1884, 1835 1885. | 1886. | 1887. | 1892.
(lbserveri.-..cesccce CHS Beal Cab be | C. Hi sBem| Wiese || Gra GracWrop let Wie Han Ess
Pirst SOON sie eicheras os 3-18 Be) Ll icaeneene acdk 3-10) == 3-20 3-25

ING Xt SOOM ice ne cics ciate eMac cteeeaener Daedie wile sence weet Seay ee lentes 3-26
MOMMA ON eect ccc eis el| sees uieeals zo Lee te illest reictstcicls SalG fee | sem eee ent 3-29
MASEISCEN Ys = oyateierersaicieisia)taeces essa lieitaagsesuenin ne fe sSoanscacnool papas sa seallocconsouade
AND UNGANCE) setisstciaies otcl| seems sclne Abundant.|/Abundant.| Common.|............ Common.
MORI Ge aces ieee scene | 1893. | 1899. | 1901. 1902. | 1902. | 1903.
GIEEECVET, oye chine c-.<c0) | E.M.K. | N.B.M. | W.L.M.| W.L.M.| W.L.M. | W.L.M.
First BOOMS rast. sacawes 3-2 4-13 “eal 3-14 SS iauenacaee 3-6
Next seen............. 3-10 5-14 3-24 321 Ged peed Sec 3-12
Common.............. [STG Rae eee cy eal iereeeere 3-12
Last seen ... Dace s shel ase icet Mae aees a4 ite peince cere fall erica eiaiaieis 1S PA el eapeuadeconc
Abundance .......... Common : Common.| Common. | Common.) Common. |} Common.

96

.

89. [459]

Rare transient.

Nuttallornis borealis (Swains. ).
April 30, 1885 (C: H. B.).

Olive-sided Flycatcher.
The only other recoré

for the southern part of the State is that of May 12, 1885, Wheatland,

IKknox County (Robert Ridgway).

deviation from the ordinary migration route in that one year?

90. [461]

Contopus virens (Linn. ).

Very common summer resident.

reported much earlier, as for instance:

(N.

The most common Flycatcher.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Wocd Pewee.*
April 26 to October 5.
April 15, 1899, and April 7, 1900-
B. M.), but these records are probably due to wrong identification.

Do these dates indicate au accidental

Has been:

MG Ar anos cc ermine wen oase det ones 1885. 1885 1886. 1892. 1893.
ODSORVER.vocseGe eth acecs aueeee es CoHSB aie CyH nb C. H. B E.M. kK. | E.M.K
MirsbiseON™.cssseersasa eae a eae oe head Mae ees 4-26 5-18 5-6
INOXE-SOGTi a. = seats sate eee ee} 5-5 SO BBAOASCHBO Ey ae era eee er icint ic .
UCTTING eG: gaeenaacddiccacnacconcds O=IG) 2 shee cerca coe , 4. el ee ER RE IadE eo Goce:
WaStiseen ys Se cose eae. cordance recess lees os cents LOS] Rosier mieeieeiete | 2 Sark ede eee ees
Jk HOETG IN NOC. Ree pacae one et Geer Abundant Abundant. Common.| Common. |.........-..
| *B. W. E.
ING AE Seaton arts os Siocon cee mae amin een eae 1900. | 1902. 1902 1903.
Observers: coe sos nen tee abasic eerie seen N.B. M. | Wi. 5M.) W. eM. | Wee
RTstiseenes saeceosee act ste cise ce eae meee eS 5-2 | LT) (aoe eee ase ee 4-28
INIGx GEGEN eee oiacs atom ole dennae cieiaee ee ie et see 5-8 ISS ars hee 5-10
Cho TTC) ec aenES ap Aaa eGomnG.S CUnaaLnTOUL aaaGar 5-8 [Seem scree perlite eres 5-10
GAS tse CNY oa som scsi seel sn cliente acese noe deat esis Re wien ome a oa ee analotaers Bese 10-5 |< cee
ENTEGRA nen aaa nee sachs bo CASONe Common. | Common. }............ Common.

91. [463] Empidonax flaviventris Baird. Yellow-bellied Flycatcher.
These dates rep-

Rather common migrant.

April 17 to August 29.

resent the extremes of arrival and departure for the State as well

as for the county.

MIGRATION RECORD.
| |
YORE Rh Os SOR ae eel ee Se 1885. 1885. 1886. 1892. | 1903.
CEDRORY Oligses tea eee nace ee « CoHoB: | CH. Be i W.S. Be] Ae Be Us W.L.M.
Mab RUeHN sce oc hc ass Soa 4-28 | 8-26 4-17 5-7 4-28
2 GE ACG) i ite ee 5-1 Re = 1 ie Cnet neces ernie cee 4-29
OMAN ON sree wat skies tases acess = ISS Cheon eee! BOmeiC AOR? ce ai Agni aAis [omeenyNErsreed Imansnee kr emeree
IMAL ROBIRE sian rot ii wintats coer 5-19 DO rere alr a7. vattranls | eras SMS as olor mittens
Abundance’... 0. ... 2... .2..s200-- | Common. | Common. |............|.........0.. Not common
|
92. [465] Empidonax virescens (Vieill.). Green-crested Flycatcher.*

_Common summer resident. April 15 to September 18. Considered
abundant by C. H. Bollmann and B. W. Evermann in 1886 and 1887.
There are four nests, two with eggs, in the University collection.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Verret Oe ase ae ee ey oe ee es 1885. | 1895.9 |p 886: 1887.
OGRBEV GIs: tee” corrects se catecondan oeenae cane eo = | C.H.B. CH. B. | B.aW. i. | B. W.E.
PRAT AEG AN tetas Sei sick oho owe e eat cen ke 5-14 [tee atest 4-27 4-15
ING-EIHAGOMNI CS. aah st s.ch.-e ses cok ee ae eee cbc os Slot: assests Bale. se. cece ae
CTL TST eset Se se a pean eis aianay Ba apenas Bailie Ol ease ne i | tiling] HERB Sacer
MARA ROOT Ges ae nine ae Sor cee ote Oe tae be Ones (Sass Fear Salil ae ites ne Seek a
FAUST ENC eps el tncr oie cere ara Abundant. Abundant. Abundant.|Abundant.
SG |

WEDD Se Se Racise Brae Bona eee OEE ae eee 1892. 1900. 1903.
ME CIAICTRES SS = Rercbte Gace toda a = SC iet ane aera teen ACB. |e oNiis er Mine Wes Lia Mi
RIAP PCE See tects nt rte siento se aber a ~cer 4d cans an tena pelces.- 5-7 52s Naas. eke soe
INGRLAR OD Tit ssc Petarin oSeig erraeiees Seton 6 casi ve Sas ae news solledee bevnwet Sai, loskaos aoe
SMO cathe Meecha Tee esate celetts occas Poscenne nds cee /sety ees 5-8 6-9
ETA ROR Iie oe ee eee he at Sar Oe Oa Dae to Sada faa. dean nn 2ci| Mmagam ieee a | eterew celles
PAIRING O45 Coat ee ton oe i ma ee a ae ose FoR eens ee esbre re ade- | Common. | Common.

93. [466] Empidonar traillii (Aud.). Traill’s Flycatcher.
“In Monroe County, Prof. Evermann found it an uncommon summer
resident” (Butler).

7—A. oF Screncr, 704.

MIGRATION RECORD.

(CS) ae RC oe See Pie en SS on serie Pee nae aoe ret PLE ee oats

ry
Qo
Go
we
—
oo
R

!
ODSERVER Ses see ee Cee Ee Eee iS C. H. B. C: HEB:

Mrs t SCO Roache ee Soe ce oe eT ahs oe EOE ee 5-14

INextseen iy .ne ceo 5-15. Ul Seve eee
Comimonena--s-6c SL cen ac et Sct sae aed ata a EN a mara AS ea AGhc fc |, ene
TAS ESCH aio) tcc. eh Hoses ma tacnte le creas ink inet len dee DRE a Pa aN Eeee ee coe eee 8-27
Alpun dances. sot seecececne Acie ote erent: Atha aoeelopnane eiensoe a ei Not rare. |Not common

94. [467] Empidonay minimus Baird. Least Flycatcher.*

Common migrant. April 21 to May 19. September 12 to 18. It
has been reported by two observers as ” summer resident (B. W. E.
and N. B. M.). but these records are probably wrong. The bulk of
the species departed May 138, ’85 (C. H. B.).

MIGRATION RECORD.

WO ALAA eee 1885. 1885. 1892. | 1899. | 1901. | 1903.
Observers (s-ec-acs case HRecOPa fea ed Fea 5 2 | E. M. K. | N.B.M. | W.L.M. | W.L. M.
First seen.............4 4-21 9-12 5-8 5-5 | 4-88 4-29
INextiseenenrctios.aeaee 4-23 9-13 Dal eosnlercere Re ane ccs 4-30
COMULG Messner | 4-30 9-15 | Bak racers |e anae eae | O(a orci oa Oe eee
Ihast.seenvess crete 5-19 9-18 Josette cece ie eeee eee [eevee eens 5-13
Abundance ..... ..vsss Abundant Common. | ESS Serato el nee eter | Common. | Common.
*A. B. U. | |

95. [474b] Otocoris alpestris praticola Hensh. Prairie Horned Lark.*

Common resident: more abundant in winter and during the migra-
tions. They became common March 26, 19038. Many notes are given
under the name Otocoris alpestris, but this is probably due to faulty
nomenclature; all such notes were considered as referring to the sub-
species, although it is not improbable that O. alpestris will be found
here in winter.

March 25, 1902. The Horned Larks were singing continually, and
one of them was observed in his aerial evolutions. About dusk one

began: singing all the time, flitting upward a little way, then poised

I)

on stretched and quivering wing, then up again and poising, until he
was nearly out of sight. The climax was a straight, swift dive, with
wings closed, toward the earth. He did not open his wings until he
was within a few feet of the ground, when he settled lightly down
and went quietly to feeding as if nothing had happened. Four young
Were seen just ready to leave the nest May 10, 1908. G. G. Williamson
obtained an adult female and a young male May 29, 1886.

96. [477] Cyanocitta cristuta (Linn.). Blue Jay.* Fig. 16.

Abundant resident; sometimes less numerous in winter.

Jays were nearly all mated March 8, 1903, and a pair was observed
mating February 16, 1901. This pair began a nest but abandoned it
When about one-fourth completed, February 22. N. B. Myers observed
them nestbuilding March 3, 1899. More usual dates are: Nestbuilding,
March 17, °03; March 22, *02, a half-completed nest was found; nest
completed March 26, 1902, and 1903; three pairs nestbuilding April 1,
‘O01; nests with three eggs were found April 15 and 17, 1903 (W. L. M.).
The former was between two rafters in a corncrib and was built partly
of mud (C. G. L.). A Blue Jay was seen sitting on unhatched eggs May
16, 1903.

“As spring approaches they become very vocal, uttering many calls,
some very pretty notes, varying from loud to low. Evidently some

of the latter are intended solely for one female to hear. * * * With

us the season of song begins early in March * * * as early as March
8. * * * With it comes pairing time, which I have known them to

continue until April 25° (A. W. Butlew. As is above stated the Blue
Jay has a great number of calls, many of which are principally used
during the mating season. But the writer has never heard a Jay give
a call during that season that has not been heard during every other
month from September to June at some time during the past four years.
Careful observations and a separate series of notes have been made with
the above conclusion as a result.

On April 28 and 29, 1993, at a time of very abundant nocturnal
migration, many Jays were seen migrating by day. They flew steadily
and quite high (about 200 ft.). in a northeast direction. The flight
of the 29th was exactly similar to that of the 28th: no Jays were
even 200 yards from the path. Whether the flight kept up all night
is a question. Following are a few groups observed on each day and the

approximate time elapsing between their passage of a given point: April

100

abe
The woods below were

28—12: immediately, 3;
April 29—3;- 2
furnished with their usual numbers of noisy Jays; but neither migrants

1 minute, 8; 4 minutes, 8; 15 minutes,

9.

minutes, 9; 1 minute, 2; etc.
nor residents seemed to be influenced by the presence of the other.
97. [488]

The crow is quite common in Monroe County, but the numbers in

Corvus brachyrhynchos C. L. Brehm. Common Crow.*

which it occurs seem insignificant to one accustomed to enormous roosts.
Crows are very rarely seen in flocks of as many as one hundred individ-
uals. About 1886 there was quite an extensive roost in Turner’s (Cedar)
Grove (W. S. B.), but at the present time there is no roost of any size in
the county.

The nest has been noted by B. W. Evermann as early as March 20.
A half-finished nest was seen April 4, 1903 (C. G. L.).

with eggs were found April 20, 1902 (W. L. M.), and a nest with 5

Two nests, one

young was found about fifty feet from the ground in a beech, April 26,
L903 "(C. Gioia):
98. [494] Bobolink.*

Common migrant, usually appearing during the first week of May,
although it has been observed on April 17, 1885 (C. H. B.) and 1893
(E. M. KIx.). It may be observed until a month later; May, 17 (C. H. B.,
*85).

Dolichonyx oryzivorus (Linn. ).

August 29 to September 1. The males arrive and depart earlier

than the females; males were seen from April 17 to May 5 and females
from May 2 to 17, 1885 (C. H. B.).

On a rainy morning in May (5-3-0383) a Bobolink was found in an
apple tree in town, singing with%all the yivacity of mid-June. This is the

first time I have heard it sing during migration.

MIGRATION RECORD.

MG ATH. scsatoee reece 1882. | 1883. | 1885. 1885. 1885. 1886.
Observer : savas eee B. W.E 1335 A/S Adee a0 Lele e C2HoB C.H.B. | Bicknell.
Furst seenyacer ataccee | 5-6 5-6 | & 4-17 P 5-2 8-29 5-3
INGE ALT Le) Ns OBS Soasatee | sishicaa Donoso lInpadoadcance | 5-2 5-4 9-1 5-4
Commronvs.- ae eaten eee eee eae 5-6 [eeeeeraee de pga ill eves ee Se acm [iccchy oh ree Ntem 5-5t
Wastisbon:s Acct ere reece: 5-5 Dale tae alll ereteccremite ohare liste keer kemets
Abundance ........-.- Ratherrare| Common. | Common.) Common. |} Common.) Common.
| *C. H. B.
| |4@.. W.

101
BOHR MS eC sneer iste | 1887. 1888. 1893. 1901. 1902. 1903.
WPSERREN=. S.ceae: ses | G.G.W. | Butler E.M.K W.L.M. | W.L.M.| W.L.M
HInstSEeNions dc sassee| 5-1 5-6 4-17 5-6 5-5 5-2
INGXt SCGN.% 7.1. 07-10 | Pioe bathe || Se acter, sare eis 5-6 Halt eae ask 5-3
Womans ersseties aces | ee ae Ces. 0 [OPIN tae LTE aero 5-13 5-10 5-14
Last seen’ 2. < 2s. 2-0 feet ee eentater tall hia stores OEM ors cd Belay mlicte ao area 5-14
Abundance ........... COMMON hes -crac ater es a les eae sae he Common.) Common.| Common
99. [495] Molothrus ater (Bodd.). Cowbird.*

Abundant summer resident.
early as April 22 (86 B. W. E.).

March 7 to October 17.
The Cardinal and Indigo Bunting seem

Eggs found as

to be the coerced foster-parents more often than other birds of this

region.
MIGRATION RECORD.
PVG HIM cc ls cettoo mde a 1884. 1885. 1885. | 1886. | 1887. 1892. 1893.
Observen...csc.-6s- (0187 5 (eel Die enii@ayel 8 legal Ste C.H.B. |B. W.E.| G.G. W.| BE. M. K.| E.M.K.
Hirstseen .jcc--5--- 3-23 1 to need nea Ronctonae 3-7 3-23 3-25 3-11
INO mEReeI eee 5 le teens A Org bilby patiieoa ieee 3-14 Leese seees. 4-9 3-19
Wommmonr ease tc | once ko ALD eal so totes Sects Bide seh oils | EME arss Ey fan ee Sect
}
inst Been ssc os [oss le elwce ane See haere [pears fea ee acre th ea koe
JA DIMER KCC ones BSS] | eoepemcen Abundant.|/Abundant.|Common ..........| Common|/Common
SCE Dee sae Mee tence ce 1899. 1900. | 11901. 1902. | 1902. | 1903.
Ohserver css o08 f. .- N.B.M Ney Issues| WViecblagl>s ole Wasp lazy. | W.L.M. | W.L.M;
|
IM YRtIR@ ON 2 2se. ee 4-15 4-7 3-23 SS1At 4 mre ee esas 3-17
Nextiseeninsses. sccest 4-17 4-12 3-25* Bray sie ne Pee 3-21
|
COMM OR eriesee tase 4-27 ADR ral Noe mete cet AOS All ee eet vara 3-21
TEE GRICE sS tps tGel PERS eee deal [aSoas ietnecl Gone DeSEnaany Maneiise.ocne a We ey meee
Abundance ........... Common.| Common.| Common. |Abundant.|Abundant |Abundant.
*W.L. M.

102

100. [498] <Agelaius phaenicens (Linn.). Red-winged Blackbird.*
Abundant migrant and common summer resident. March 4 to Noyem-
ber 16. There are two nests each containing two eggs in the University
collection taken by C. H. Bollman, 1885. <A bird with striking dress and
musical call, as often observed remote from as near bodies of water dur-

ing the migrations.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Wenrasc 2 aasor eee | 1883. 1885. 1886. 1887. 1892. 1893.
Observer ....-..-.. | CH. B. | 0-H B. | B.Wo Bs. 1G: G.W. | Se Me E.M.K.
First seen......... een | Seren 3-4 4-2 326 | 4-26
Next,seens=.----—- 3-14 | Sa Eaisoe Rese oT haa seo hes as Ppa | 4-2* [se
Common ......... i o—10 eee eeeescewe| ances sete cele cee 4-12 fines eiepaetsnraes
Last seen .....-.-.]----......- | 2) a eR eee en es Se/° ps) | ee oh / soem ny teene
Abundance . _.4.../Abundant. Abundant. Notcommon)’2.... <----- Not eereerent Not very
' common.

| *A.B.U. |

Womnsas.cns aedee eee 1900. 1901. 1902. 1902. 1903. | ~~ 1903:
Obsenverrssss-. s256-8 | N. B. M. | W.L. M. | NVAAS Mi Weenie W.L.M. | W.L.M.
First seen............. le ASabt soe eSely, 3-4 Be tee | 35 | See
Next seen............. 322 | 324 Tes pee oa | 36) 3)
Commons. 2<-eeccee 3-23 5-t 310, Ste soot BAF. AS Volicearr de ercees
Last seen ............- Bees eas ta ees Co cee i ee Fe
Abundance ...........| Not very |Abundant.'Abundant. Abundant. Abondant.|Abondanis
common.

101. [501] Nturnella magna (Linn.). Meadowlark.* Fig. 17.

The Meadowlark is an abundant summer resident and not uncommon
winter resident. It becomes abundant at some time from January to
March: January 21, 1903 to March 16, 1899 (N. B. M.).

They have been observed gregarious and with no tendency to pairing
March 31, and mated April 7 in the same year. The nest with full com-
plement of eggs was found May 1, °03 (C. G. L.); May 7, ’01; and four
young and an egg were found May 10, 01. They seem to be careless
sometimes in regard to the disposal of the eggs. A nest with four

young was found May 27, ‘01 (W. L. H.): two days later the young

103

were all there, still covered with down, but when the nest was disturbed,
two eggs rolled out of the feathers about the nest.

“T have known them in full song Mareh 8 * * * After the harvest
is over and the young are able to take care of themselves, most of the
Meadowlarks seek choice spots. and but seldom are their songs heard”
(Butler). Butler also mentions hearing their song in September and
November. The writer has heard them singing every month in the year,
nine of which are spent in this region. Following are some dates for
Bloomington: 9-28; 10-12; 11-8; 12-18, ’02; 1-24; 2-26; 3-2; 4-3; 5-1; 6-9, ’03.

The Meadowlark is another bird which migrates considerably by day.
The immense, noisy flocks of February and March are always on the
move. Fifty of these birds were seen as early as January 21, 1903, flying
over due north at a height which made it necessary to use a powerful
field-glass to identify them.

This species, as well as most of the members of the family Icteridae, is
noted for its gregarious habits. That the different species should show
such habits inter se, as do the swallows, is a more remarkable thing.
That this seems to be the case is the only logical conclusion to be drawn
from a study of local migration schedules. For instance, for a few days
previous to March 21, 1903, Meadowlarks and Grackles, both resident
species were the only /cterid@ seen. On the 21st, however, these species
became augumented in numbers while Rusty Grackles, Redwings and
Cowbirds, not seen for several days before, again made their appearance
in considerable numbers. This family migration is to be observed in the
Tctcride@ at the time the species become abundant and not at their first
arrival. The Orioles move together in the same way and become numer-
ous at about the same time.

102. [506] Icterus spurius (Linn.). Orchard Oriole.*

Common summer resident, abundant and conspicuous during the
spring migration. April 17 to August 29. These dates are each one day
earlier than the recorded limits of its stay in the State. Six years out of
ten, this species arrived before the Baltimore Oriole. This is a somewhat
different proportion than the two out of fifteen obtained by A. W. Butler.
The difference may be explained by a change in habit, as the dates of
arrival of the Orchard Oriole before that of its relative are all included
in the last seven years in which observations have been made at this

point. This change in date of arrival is probably correlated with the

104

steady increase in numbers in this species and decrease in the next (vide
Butler, Birds of Ind.. p. 899).

The first song was heard April 28, 1903, and males in the second year
plumage were seen singing April 29 and May 10, 1903. The Orchard
Oriole is an abundant breeder here; the nest and complement of eggs
have been found May 17, 1901.

MIGRATION RECORD.

WOabyS i 8, -cociseeratnens 1885. TSS5 pay eeel S865 aon 1 S862 ome SR7e 1892.
Observertcesa ae-er C.H.B C.H.B C.H. B.. 9G. G.-W. | 1G. GW elastin Menke
First seen............. Cd De al eo a RGAE CP jeeatel erantts Seo 4-24 4-26
Next seen cec2ccceeinn-c AeD2b me llssacinecatenee BA 2BF > «| Se ntpaenike se 4-27: 21 saree
(CHITHING) Has Seen sopaedee - 74s) ni IoguSobnoodnl aeaareanaane | jesMacdsiciars, osteo eye eee Baan Ash
Whastiseen \ oo. sctihsce: | Leen ecee 8229 been |e eset he oe Cee Cee
Abundance ........... |Abundant.|/Abundant.| Common. |............|.....5...2e:[eeeeee seveee
G.G. W

Vent we owck eee e: |. 1898. . | 1899. | 1900. | 1901. 1902, | 1903,
Observier-=.-) aceon es E.M.K. | N.B.M. | N.B.M. | WL. M.. | WL) Mel Wiel:
First seen............. 4-17 4-22 amu | 498 | 428 | 4-24
IN@Xtiseelin.ce sca saleecee eee | 4-27 4-25 | 4-29 | 4-30 4-28
Common scenester Ioveee earns | 4-29 Jesse es sees 5-3 5-4 | 4-28
Last seen. svc. 259 ire Jopnonubecoos leccepp-nocdda||oabenece conn fsoopduapooce [ones eens ene
AUN aN COsraccmetese ee scoot ce eee | Coumnone| Common. Common. /Abundant./ Abundant.

103. [507] Ieterus galbula (Linn.). Baltimore Oriole.*
A rather abundant migrant and moderately common summer resident.

April 18 to September 2. C. H. Bollman in 1886 and B. W. Evermann in
1887 indicated in their lists that this species was more abundant than the

last. The reverse is the case now. <A quite regular migrant but it has
arrived on the average about a week later since 1890 than it did during
the eighties. Not nearly so common a summer resident as the last. Song
April 28. 1903. June 8, 1903 nest found hanging in an inaccessible posi-
tion, on the end of an elm limb about 80 feet from the ground. The bird
was incubating I believe (C. G. L.).

MIGRATION RECORD.

105

“NGYDTEANS 8 GAHIRErOn BOGS Ses 1884. | 1885. 1885. 1886. 1887. 1892.
|

KO DREDVOI%s 320.42 Rites Ba Wie tue | Cane Be C.H.B C.H.B B. W.E E.M.K
First ceen...........-. 4-20 | RU ee 4-20 4-20 4-28
NTH BOEM or. ahec cas rcbaiowte ci as | (ION th Gale Pat eat Pe 4-22 4-27" 5-7
(CTT Va ek eee Re Osram ee feb Se ae a ee ee 6 Nt SA Wo cee | Se apt eae
MESURE GIN Soe coe coe hoon ence cee wets 9-2 Seac\nwcewecs|orecinene ce s[ersceses seme
Abundance ......... .| Common. |Abundant. Abundant.| Common. |............ Rare

|

| *B.W.E. | *G.@.W

|

WWE RO ED reece arocee « 1893. 1899. 1900. 1901. 1902. 1903.
WhBONVEr: -S.b<. soe E. M. K N.B.M NeB aM. | We Me | Wi ae Mi. | Wis M
Rinst FOG < .-2 S445 4-24 4-26 4-18 5-6 4-29 4-28
ING tSGODI.c02 300s se 4-25 4-27 4-19 5-7 5-3 4-29
MO MUNTOM eS wats cree so saa list ntes ce eles 4-28 4-21 BID teal secant sere 4-29
RE Ries Metts eee tora tock it | RA So, BN Soy heen esr |(< cia orgavarionllsiaredatyaye's Se eerie
Abundance ........... Rare Common. |} Common. |Moder’tely Moder’tely, Common.

Common. | Common. |
104. [509] Euphagus carolinus (Mill.). Rusty Blackbird.*

Rather common migrant.

MIGRATION RECORD.

March 8 to May 16. November 15 to 21.

WCE Re anaes: ae 1885. 1885. 1886. 1901. 1902. 1903.
Observerrscccsta oeee oe CoHoB: C.H.B B.W.H. |G.Hubbard| W.L.M. | W.L.M
PiYSGSOON calc cee sn 3-14 11-15 3-14 3-17 3-16 3-8
INEXTSEON Sos oc02 5-8 3-17 1HETGE Sal pe rvinesdvedal soca ceincreeel| 3-25 3-17
MOMMEON ee eee ess yal Somes a yee ctinyall Sy acteere tn eet mn cremcersieretniall crease breiah crete, | Meee eta eine
LOE ef) ern are 4-12 TR Deer enacts ck Beni teistcievedentemion 4-19 5-16
Abundance ........... Abundant. Common. RUAMO:. elites sia teee _Tolerably | Tolerably
| Common. | Common.

106

105. [511b) Quiscalus quiscula wneus (Ridgw.). Bronzed Grackle.*

Abundant summer resident and uncommon winter resident. Follow-
ing are the numbers seen at some winter dates: 2, 12-30-84 (C. H. B.),
1-11-85 (C. H. B.); 1 taken, 1-4-’86 (G. G. W.); and 24, 1-17-1903. Of the
last flock, 15 were females, and 9 were males; there were also more
females than males in a flock of 30 seen November 30, 1902. On the other
hand the first migrants in spring are all great, splendid males in full song.
Twenty-six seen February 20, 1903. Tor a period after the beginning of
migration the females are absent. They were not seen until March 8,
1901; March 23, 1902. Grackles become abundant during the first week of
March.

A half-finished nest was found April 4+ and a nest with three young
was found May 13, 1903, in a pine, about 50 feet from the ground
(Cx Grel):

Grackles roost in great numbers in the shade-trees of Bloomington
and in early spring and in fall many Robins roost in the same places.
The calls of the Grackle, both the chuck and the metallic notes may be
heard at intervals after dark. I have heard them as late as 11 p. m. and
as early as 3 a. m. and would not be surprised to learn that they are con-
tinued throughout the night.

106. [514) Hesperiphona vespertina (Coop.). Evening Grosbeak*.

Very irregular and rare visitor. Seen only in January and April, 1887.
Mr. C. H. Bollman took a male on the University campus, January 20,
1887. Mr. G. G. Williamson saw the following numbers during April:
4 on the 27th; 2 on the 29th; and 2 on the 30th.

107. [517] Carpodacus purpureus (Gmel.). Purple Finch.

Common migrant and irregular winter resident. B. W. Evermann
classes it as a frequent winter visitor and W. S. Blatechley says it
wintered in 1882-8. It probably wintered in 1885-6, as no last date is
given in the fall migration schedule, nor any first date in that of the
spring. The females remain later than the males in spring. I have heard
its song at Marion, Ind., March 8, 1900. More often observed in sycamore
than in other trees. Most of them departed April 14. 1885 (C. H. B.).

107

MIGRATION RECORD.

WMP AES, fo os ces cee tees 1885. 1885. 1886. 1901. 1902. | 1903.
DASGYOD aS ee CHB: GAB: GG. Gav AW Me | We Me WL. M.
Marstiseen vo. <-.2<s2. 3-14 TIES Sees e. 3 ere S351 | Bg eae a 3-8
Next seen............. 3-27 Leb No ae iS | ae irae eee Ss
OTTO See ies = Aan Meet ion] Pere eee See Re Le ee Lean, Be Ree oC
Mace odie <2 2 occ. ae eee eae 4-30 4-7 4-19 54
Abundance ........... PEDIRTGR Tle pee we eos bees soe pace Common.| Common.} Common.
| *V.H.B. |
108. [521] Lowa curvirostra minor (Brehm). American Crossbill.

An exceedingly irregular species; has been found often in winter and
has been reported a summer resident.

The Red Crossbill was first reported from Monroe County, February
10, 1883, by B. W. Evermann who says it was common for some time
after that date. The same authority also says that it was common dur-
ing the winter of 1883-4. In both the spring and the fall of 1885 they were
quite common. C. H. Bollman’s record of its movements in the spring is
as follows: 8 males and females seen March 2 and 3; the arrival of the
bulk from the north took place March § and both sexes were then com-
mon; in a letter to J. M. Wheaton he reported them still present March 13;
and the last male was seen May 10 and the last female May 12. The
bulk of the species departed April 15. From uncatalogued specimens in
the collection of Indiana University the following additional dates were
obtained: March 10; a male May 14. During the year 1885 it was also
reported to have bred at Bloomington. ‘“‘Mr. Sam Hunter reports a pair
to have nested in a pine here in 1885. He says the nest was made ex-
clusively of pine burrs” (E. M. Ixindle.).

In the fall of 1885, C. H. Bollman reported the Red Crossbill October
4 and November 5, but gives no date for the last one seen, indicating that
it remained throughout the winter, and, indeed, W. S. Blatchley reports
it in his list of winter birds as a scarce resident during the winter of
1885-6. In the latter year, the first Crossbills were reported January 18.
and fifteen or twenty were seen February 6 (G. G. W.). Crossbills, prob-
ably of this species, but not exactly identified were reported February 25

108

and March 8, 1886. CC. H. Bollman saw eleven in a fir tree in Bloomington
June 24, and reported them also on July 10, 13 and 14 (B. W. E.).

~ After being reported quite often during this period of 4 years, Cross-
bills were not again recorded until 1892, when six were observed by E. M.
Kindle and A. B. Ulrey on March 1. The last date recorded for this
locality is March 3, 1893 (EK. M. K.), when a crossbill probably of this
species, was identified by note.
109. [522] Lovia leucoptera Gmel. White-winged Crossbill.

A very irregular visitor, much more rare than the last.

White-winged Crossbills were first observed here February 6, 1885.
On that date B. W. Evermann took two males from a flock of fifteen in a
yard on College Avenue, Bloomington. A female was taken February 10,
and ‘two days later two more specimens were taken near the same place.”
(A. W. Butler, in “Papers Read at the World’s Congress of Ornithology”
in Chicago, 1893-6.)

Mr. Evermann also observed this bird February 23 (List of Birds of
Carroll County, “Auk,” 1889)... C. H. Bollman gives a queried record of this
species for December 12, 1885. About five were identified by note.

A. W. Butler says: “The only instance of its occurrence in summer
in the Ohio valley is that given me by the late C. H. Bollman. He saw
eleven in a fir tree in Bloomington, Ind., June 24, 1886.” However, on
C. H. Bollman’s schedule for 1886, this date is attributed to the other
species, in the account of which I have placed it.

110. [528] <Acanthis linaria (Linn.). Redpoll.

Irregular winter visitor.

“BW. Evermann identified a single bird at Bloomington in December,
1882” (A. W. Butler). C. H. Bollman reports ‘fone seen” in his list of
1886, and “Mr. Chauncey Juday obtained specimens from a flock of twenty
at Bloomington, April 12, 1895” (A. W. Butler). W. S. Blatchley also
reports one January 30, 1883. oe
111. [529] Astragalinus tristis (Linn.). American Goldfinch.*

‘ Abundant resident. i

“oes ‘Song March 29 (W. L. M.,’02). June 12, 1902, a nest and four eggs in
ma wild Tose bush (C. G. L.). October 2, 1903, I shot a young Goldfincl

with the short wings and tail and fluffy feathers of a fledgeling, that

was unable to fly well and was still being fed by the mother.

5 The. plumage changes are very interesting. It requires about a

ee month for all the males to assume the summer plumage. None were seen

Taw ont Boe

YiBGIS O9

JT eg rw » f vi }
COU a f Coy a

i west LOGSY STS FF BINK

109

in summer dress until April 18, 1886 (B. W. E.). The record from the
first appearance of a change till the moult is completed is as follows:
March 29 (’02), two Goldfinches, one singing and in great part in summer
plumage; April 1 (’03), eight Goldfinches, four singing and with the back
and part of the breast yellow, and part of head black; April 2, four
Thistlebirds, one in perfect plumage, the others in changing phases of
attire; April 12, two, one in full dress; April 14, five, two in yellow and
black; April 19, three, two in winter plumage. One of these which was
black; April 19, three, two in winter plumage. One of the last two which
was taken was a male, the other one of the trio was in summer attire;
April 25, twenty, ten in transitional stages of plumage; April 30, an
increase in those of full plumage to the usual summer number. Probably
all of the males have completed the moult.
112. [583] Spinus pinus (Wils.). Pine Siskin.

A rather regular migrant in moderate numbers; a rare winter resident.
October 27 to May 13.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Bete eta vein nc eels PBB «| ABBE.” |, TES, | 1886, 1886.
OPSeLVER Ty csntes tenciasteekawees BaWeebie |b U. Cols) SC 2H: Bel) Ge.Ge We Grieve
HITEPSC Oise tee. ware eae eee. 2-6 3-23 LO ister Wace ee eee Cee bes cee
NGS BOON Soil eee desis’ crepes lee.| omrate tee eres Seer thal Weta me elrat sal her a aye
Wo nnnmoriterns ease ak peas eer We rentee eins Seer = selena ravens Dodabe canoe 12-4
LOTTE TES ree pee oy aaa Are ae oy [ee esa Dols es pelesee oe ee a
PN UG ATCO A see saeascorie ose ancne ose Not rare. | Common. | Common. |.:.......... Not common
*C. H.B. | “W'S. B.
| | si ies etka
ECE TRS aon Shy oR eae one ee ae ee a 1887. | S05 seal 1902. 1903.
| |
Osanyer am nicenias, ir Sree tetas eases eke [GaGe Wee SAL WeBe | Wo LaM. | Wii M0.
Bees teeter a vayoaeee |e An asisceale..» ceevases ao gla erie eo
ING RIGS OOM yas sec aera 2 as eae eens crake essere ll erareinn gala suejsle'e ealaie'an Naveoececabs ltaereis catstetse s sterol Seerae Oke meTIe
A ALO Teese peed erate ne ake sia Seis vane staleoegpie| oe Necaorw alee lie ele iaye okaa eal nls celles ee
TUBER rue eG EST oy a bigest 58) Ue | 5- 3-18
Js UNC NOE Stes oe ory Ace pico) Bo SE Da denen oeeae Bal En ACO RE Snel MBbey peace | SO bite acetate
Ee Muhse.

110

113. [5384]

114. [536]

Rare and _ irregular

winter

Passerina nivalis (Linn. ).

Calearius lapponicus (Linn. ).

visitor.

Snowflake.
Rare and irregular winter visitor (C. H. B., °86).

Lapland Longspur.
Observed February

18833

—)

(W. S. B.); taken February 10 and 12, 1883 (B. W. E.); seven seen Feb-

PURE, eS IODA 18 Bes 183)),
115. [540]

Abundant summer resident.

All were associated with Otocoris a. praticola.

Poecetes gramineus (Gmel. ).

Vesper Sparrow.*
February 19 to October 25.

Exceedingly abundant resident.

(Butler).

Nest and six eggs taken as early as February 20, 703 (C. G. L.).

MIGRATION RECORD.
NGL RABE eo eae eet 1885. | 1885 1886. | 1887. 1892. 1893.
Obsenver=2-s-2 55. | ConB COH:.B W.S.B GaiGaWis aca Dae E. M. K.
ainsi Seentrenascone CS) ie el Re ieee ee 4-8 3-24 4-2 3-30
Next scen......... | Sha IG SOE a 4-10" 3-25" 4-94 — fee eee
|
@Gommion aeons s: 7 Ee Se iit [icra oo PROS LO eee EE ere 417 ese
MitstiSe Olas. eck eee ee LOO aR crc screens, citvelllortusa ce oratevet aioll croeceicts lesa fee ee
Abundance ....... Abundant.|Very common.|............, Abundant.| Common. |} Common
*q, G. W.| *B.W.E. | *E. M. K. |
Se :
WiGRE oe eter t Paeieresirnie < | 1899 1900. 1901 1902. 1902. | 1903.
Observerwaccrst acc | N.B.M N. B. M Wie Ma Wheelie Mes Weuls.. Me | W.L. M.
Birstiseen-ncscn a2. -< oe | 2-19 4-18 3-24 PA Nee | eae Peas 3-17
|
Nextseent = ...0.0--2- Vet De DA Say atgeeiacy see tell nsetrec natin Bray) ee Bes een eN a 3-18
|

Common=o se sie Pe B95 POO sie piles Res sean ne ae BG eae ae eee 3-17
Tsastseen ....c22 sci. cse | Ben doe epee Ate SR ROSH Boe Goee aol Ecce ore eee 10-19 — serene
Abundance ..........- | Common. | Common. |Abundant.|/Abundant.|/Abundant.|Abundant.
116. [——] Passer domesticus (Linn.). European House Sparrow.*

Appeared in Bloomington in 1875

Two

males were observed trying to mate with a female Song Sparrow, March

Tut

2, 1901 (W. L. M.). During the mating season English Sparrows often
engage in such earnest fighting that one or the other of the contestants is
left dead upon the field. ‘Their pugnacious encounters are by no means
confined to that season, however. On October 16, 1902, two males were
so deeply interested in their battle that they were both easily picked up
in the hand.

Flyeatchers are found in the Sparrow family and the House Sparrow
is one of these. They have been observed catching insects on the wing,
swooping and returning to the same perch like Flycatchers. Some seem
more adept than others; one seen, made two darts in the air before
returning to the tree which was his headquarters. Other Sparrows which
have been observed at this pursuit are: Junco, Chewink, Chippy, Field
and White-throated Sparrows.

Quite a tendency to albinism is noticeable in this bird and it seems to
be of recent development. <A perfect albino was taken September 28,
1885 (C. H. B.). In the single spring of 1903, a perfect albino was cap-
tured by hand while on a nest containing four young (McCracken); a par-
tial albino with the head and flecks everywhere snowy white was taken
and three similar ones seen. Many specimens with one or two rectrices
or remiges white were observed. In two months in the summer at another
locality, three partial albinos were seen and two complete ones reported.
A peculiarity in the coloration is that the light color in the partial
albinos is pure snowy white, while the entirely albinistic specimens are
deep buffy white.

7. [542a] Passerculus sandwichensis sovanna (Wils.). Savanna Sparrow.

Common migrant and probably rare summer resident. The majority
of migration records do not show this bird in what is probably its true
position. There are several rather early spring and late fall reports, but
the greater number of dates given nearly coincide with those for the next
species as if they were inseparably connected in time of migration as
they have been, heretofore, generically united. This bird breeds farther
north and winters farther north; the fact that it winters in the lower
Wabash valley in our own State makes it seem probable that it should
be seen earlier all over the State and that it has probably been over-
looked during many seasons until its more conspicuous cousin, with the
brighter colors and startling insect-like trill, arrived. It is true that the
two birds are generally found together, but it is probable that the obscure

9

_

11

little Savanna Sparrow is present at a given point in the State from a
week to a month in advance of the Yellow-winged Sparrow every year.

A nest identified as belonging to a bird of this species by Prof. J. R.
Slonaker was found May 17,'1901. It was built in a depression in the
ground and was lined and partly arched over with dry grass. ‘On May 22,
there were five eggs. June 3, they were hatched. June 7, the nest was
empty but probably not as a result of the natural course of events.

In 1885 most of the individuals departed May 2. The Savanna Spar-
row was taken March 29, 1894, by E. M. Kindle in Brown County. ° ;

MIGRATION RECORD.
VEGETA ens PE CoS Rete a ape 1885. 1885. 1886> 1892.
OPS enverenceiscasem ie eee erate een C. H. B. C.H.B G.G. W E.M. K
HUTS tiSCON eicansciee. cece caso oceans 4-18 10-17 4-10 3-30
INiemb, SOGN ss. 0 sania oom eeaicoa on certs | ADO irmros tien Skis caicr ates 4-160" | Sees
COMMON ce. <a ce eee eee PEE | ADD oy dere tete Pais sc ssadrell bane Bee eee CE ere
Was tiS@ Gu: (oa. jasleeceruse eee rN, 5-11 11-6 4-27" le Seee ee
Abundance..............................)Wery common|Not common|Not common)...........-

*BeWreobls
ACT Degas Beare eta a SRR IRE PE be he I 1901 1902. | 1902. | 1903.
ODSCEVO PE cs rsieyas sie creie stay save ci aialnw a otclsln)iossists ohoreveisinter| = WV fe) Lace Moe) ea Viteg ase ergs Vee eBay Moab SUVE eve
IUIES TSO OTe e ete ee eee oe ene as ee See oat all Macnee neon G=25) meal ee ecome tetas 3-17
DS ASIe Ty oh 8 Goatees ah oe OP ys et eit Is Sees Di 8 SH O4” Fan eater 4 3-18
| |
Common scaeass oie c oes een se enioeae 5-10 4-3 = | 4-12
GAB UYS OOM os ose Fe seat eRe SM ore eee ae oe | en eS Ea) (ial Negeri a.
s
Abundance 2: rescue tes saa eee oe Common. | Common. | Common. | Common.
118. [546)} Coturniculus savannarum passerinus (Wils.) Grasshopper Sparrow.

Rather common summer resident (B. W. E.).
Song April 12, ’03 (W. L. M.).

June 6,

1902 (C. G. L.).

April 12 to Oct. 4.
A nest and well incubated eggs found

gl RS
MIGRATION RECORD.
== SS SS SSS OZ
Bre SIE eS IN ores es 1869. 1885. | 1885, | 1836. 1887.
1) Pig RN A RO ne I.U.Coll.| C.H.B. 8 E. Meek. B. W.E. | G.G.W.
eT SUBGGIRee 5 oon ees nae ee one alas cn SRaaes FE ies sc ne, ates 4-25 4-25
RIES eee pe Re ee Mea | 4-93 Seren i fi PIR
DP OMINGIH GL ee Roe ore eae iee boone low oncae See 4-25 8-1 ] ye aS ne ei
MARL ROG Ie oor ct son coe coe et eee, N=20h eel Sec oeoonta | A O= 88s Be Roce AO eae Soe
PAS IPH ATT COR een end cca ee eons ork ee GommMonn|.. cee. eee Ratherio|s:-0
Common. |
C.H.B
|
“Si aa eet ee ee pen a 1899, 1901. | 1902. | 1903.
| |
|
USER VON oe was oe Reon eet eee N.B.M. | W.L.M.| W.L.M.} W.L.M.
| |
TRU REGIS oo eek ee Le 5-11 ol 4-19 4-12
INGE MUIB OG EME scties toe estas see CS Santee eid 5-13 5-5 4-25 | 4-19
CUD TTET ITT RRS 2 sister re Ma REL A Oaeneere nae 5-16 | 546 Pi ak sie rlsus 4-12
TOP SSER ECS ieee ea cya oS Ea ea ae eee CE GEE | [RSC RE ama! (CRIME Rare (bes epiememeanial [Pray Nem ef =
PIV UUTL LRTI C Eine feic st REL ECS chee cise aeaone heirs oe ae Common. Common.| Common. |Abundant

119. [547] Ammodramus henslowii (Aud.). Henslow’s Sparrow.

Rare summer resident. Mr. C. G. Littell saw a nest on the ground
which contained four young almost ready to fly, June 3, 1902. Mr. Littell
made this report in 1903, after he had become better acquainted with the
bird at Winona Lake where it was collected. The accuracy of the record
is thus assured. :

120. [552] Chondestes grammacus (Say). Lark Sparrow.

Abundant summer resident. March 26 to August 26. In 1887 B. W.
Evermann classed it as rare and said it had not been seen here until in
recent years. However C. H. Bollman found it abundant in 1885. The
Lark Sparrow has probably been increasing in numbers every year here.

Song April 12, 1903. Mating May 6, 1902. Nest and four young on
ground under a cedar limb. May 30, 1903 (C. G. L.).

8—A. or Screncr, ’04.

114

MIGRATION RECORD:

Vea s es 3k he eto ceere ae eee | 1884. | 1885. | 1885. | 1886. 1887.
OF Joie) Se oe erect meses or, ¢.H.E. | C..B. | CB. | W-S. B. | G.G.W
ursiseen’:h- cc raison ares 3-26 2 eee $21 4-26
Nest seen ..0. 5.0000: So eee eee 72 US ORE ae | 4-22 4-27
COMMON ise asloedae seacise soe ew al ares esas ens Co eee Poa See BA (arica So Schacba:
WiASUIBO CM 4.85 .:s,cicramiare tt. gos one eats es See Soe eI ios Coe 8226 ose sates Jee | eee
ADUNGAN CES. ooze c cess See nso eee <sell cnc oomieemes Abundant.|/Abundant. Rare. eeeeete
| *BLW.E. |
WORT ariacre necienk hue auine ee eee neeen centoaees 1893. | 1901. 1902. | 1903.
Observer ei. sess cone scer ec easaaseneen saas ane E. M. K. W.L.M. | Wr bao | Wieicovire
IESE SOEN forsee nee eee ane ee mene: 4-17 5-6 | 4-24 | 4-12
INGE OBI: otter seac Noe sheen ee 4-19 5-7 | 4-27 4-19
CIS TUTTI TAB eaareep aoootcee sSHocccc ae in¢sacol lcrmormencanage 5-18 (beer vena | 4-19
UVES AE I) 1 Raa Renee ney mee aes AG acm ite Aero em Ebr aca lictercerel aac Bane eacerellacinaraad mere |: 25 Saepeeee
Albund ane <cisas aeseeeae aoe ae tienci Peek eeee Not common) Moderately | Common, ‘Abundant.
common. |

121. [554] Zonotrichia leucophrys (Forst.). White-crowned Sparrow.
Moderately common migrant. April 10 to May 16. October 4 to 25..
In 1885 most of them departed May 10 (C: H. B.).

MIGRATION RECORD:

MCE) vineecasnepeeseode acca noes 1885.. 1885. 1886. | 1887. 1893.
Observerssscc.nc-ece zoster [aren as By 2H. BE Wiis -oB-= ||) (Gi. Gay Wise | eave ers
MITRtIEOEN cco ncciioncce ace 5-1 | 10-4 4-13 4-30 4-19
Nexbapenicyc-01 recast onset | 52 111 4-22" 54 4-26
WoOmMMONE ences sles eye 5-4. [2s outs ; ADD TE |v crewsSs -oraleievous|feretele eamertaets
Last seen............. Se | 5-14 10-25 5-5% So || pee
Abundances sa.cceeeeemcreece Very common.|Not'common| Common.||...........- Wesonp sisdso1
*B.W.E |
| LW |
| }

UTE racing hk geet ana ae ae a 1900. | 1901. | 3902. 1903.
| i
pA ee pede t oS N.B.M. | W.L.M.) W.L.M.| W.L.M.
SHRI RAE OMe mrccnce sys niches ytaloreicts are) are sites slate a) rated BONS Te ozo 4-10 4-12
Memuncen yt cee eiret ako Marie ncs att S, 55 || 5-6 420 | 428
COMMON ne etree Lah Ae ts nes See ee Rees: Rees | Hea tel y ble | SOC eee Moree SOHO EE
Th cethict2 Sree oe eae De ey en Pa | 5-15 = an
SAMS UPIN ANC OR er bncet Meee cr ceerert na ete Pave fe nisin talacaie eioiel| aroyere cay erwiaigicG | Common. Comment Common.

a

122. [558] Zonotrichia albicollis (G@mel.). White-throated Sparrow.*

Abundant migrant. March 8, 703 (W. L. M.) to May 16. September
24 to November 22. Possibly rare winter resident. Reported January 29,
aL ese (lee dice elt)

Song heard as early as March 9, 1903 and as late as November 8,
1902. On this late date the songs were loud, clear and distinct. ‘‘They
remain with us in spring as late as they can. Often they are seen mating,
and some years, when they lingered long, they have been observed
carrying sticks, as though they had thought to begin nest-building. Some
year when they remain late, I shall not be surprised to learn that the im-
perative demands of nature have impelled some of them to make their
summer homes with us and build their nests’ (A. W. Butler). “April
30, 1902, in a brush heap, in an old orchard, I found a White-throated
Sparrow building a nest. The bottom of the nest was made of twigs, but
every time she carried any material to the nest, a Catbird would fly
down and take it away. The Catbird fought and chased the Sparrows
until they left the nest unfinished” (Gertrude Hitze).

The bulk of the species departed May 10, 1885 (C. H. B.).

MIGRATION RECORD-

ISCAS iotects aceite ee ates 1884. | 1885. | 1885. 1885. | 1886, | 1887.
ODsenvercenntauanens nok eee C.H.E. C.H.B. CHB: 5 (Caine Baer Hie Gia Greate
HimstiseeNee ccc asses acces 3-18 33-16 | 4-8 9-24 4-12 4-11
Next BOGIti cs tockinnie meee (se wmeia's cies 3-18 4-20 10-3 GENT bere ne oes
MOOMMON A caeeu eee Late reese) eemeotsiee 4-25 4-25 10-10 Ve lean sees
ISTE OTS adh Sale aie ese ie Ieee 5-14 5-15 11-8 B=6). Uecarsamneste
PA RUT CO Ais rer fncinrsesistern vais) shell erele «late (a/ele3e Abundant.|Abundant.|Abundant.|Common|]..........
SGnGeaWe

116

Veareiiees miles teste 1892 | 1900. | 1901 | 1902. 1902. | 1903. | 1903.
Obgervieres. scenes A. B.U.|N. B. M.| W. Lb. M.| W. LG. M.| W. ©. M. W.L.M.| W.L.M
Hirst Seen. tase. oes ccleaner ARV 2 | Semteeass 3-9 10-5 3-8 ieee
Nextiseen = 26 %t5020 Fee pe Ceo ae 3-14 10-12 3-9" 5 NS ee ee eee
Commons scsrcaaces | SERRA IEA a eta ccan lsaoaetepoe 3-25 10-26 3-20 =| eee
WASHSCON saree ok AH BO aed eer 5-13 5-4 11-9 5-16 11-22
Abundance......... leon. Saeee | eaten ts Common |Common Common]Abundant.|Abundant.
123. [559] Spizella monticola (Gmel.). Tree Sparrow.*

Abundant winter resident.

heard in spring:

MIGRATION RECORD.

October 12 to April 19. The song is often
March 1 and 5, 1902, and March 9 and 17, 1903.

WiGalsttcc oe. Soe ee 1885. 1885. 1901. 1902.
Observer ........---...| C.H.B. | C.H.B. | W.L.M.| W.L.M.
Wirshiseenteact =< shee alterna ssa. 11-4 Sseeaceiseee : bal ccs Busses
Nextseenice face ceoteallthao one oen ee 1) i Eo erste ea meee el on
Commnion 2ecss20-55: 3-23 5 OD. aus ee ies ae sae (Re coReee Foor
Tjaetiseen wo. o sss soaa-s) A= Gey ae | me maer ee 3-17 3-26
Abundance ........... ‘Abundant.|Abundant. | cc oneamaae Very

| Common.

| 11-28

Common.

3-17
Abundant.

124. [560]

Spizella socialis (Wils. ).
Abundant summer resident.
Song March 17, 1908; March 26, 1902.

March 16 to Novembe

r 9;

Mating March 27, 1903.

Chipping Sparrow.* Fig. 18.

Nest

found April 28, 1899 (N. B. M.); nest and four eggs May 2, 1903 (C. G. L.).
Nearly full grown young seen with-mother and being fed by her May 29,

1905.

of soft vegetable fibers or rootlets without a trace of horsehair.

There is a nest in the collection of the University which is composed

wg

a

balsa
MIGRATION RECORD.
SVQ I ores ec icroteeiteas 1884. | 1885. 1885. 1886. 1887. 1892. | 1893.
Obsorversac.c ccs eae Cab Hs Ce He Bo VC) He By OW.S.B. | &@.G@.W.| BE. M.K.| E. M.K.
|
MDa ESBeN Saracen cess oe ee eae Rae eee 3-19 | 41 3-27 3-20
Wextizeomis .:3)--) 2423 Hester Sa rlens thy coche ess hat 49 | 3-23
Comino seerinns tel esaliaicea es ce 4-3 ieee RSS cal Mig nal eee Me peenge
Mastiseen <9 s asite coe chaeeseetrces | hee sare Le fared | ae saree ON eat lee eae tee pea?
| |
AIO a NCOs simnt akicaltnere cies [Atmndt Abund’t.|;\Common|.......... Common Common
“6.6. W. |
| ey
PORT Me ethacce aomsnee | 1899. 1900. 1901. | 1902. | 1902. 1903.
| |
Observersccc renin ek NEVE le ences tie Wie Lac IVE colli cr Miccrnt’ VV Ia Wie ESV" sal
Hirst seems 5. ses. 2 << 4-12 4-8 | 8-95 BE 1Giortelhon et ecete 3-27
Nemtsee tien csacs sek. 4-15 4-12 3-27 CEVA eget eee Pak Ree 3-18
WOMENTOME sacs: wets | Reese ee 3 fF pees eee Maio neces 3-26 iaeveco sages: 3-20
TANTS COME ser eit cereaiet| Saccroae mick Mee iacko tots see an liv awes ot Rieu Sell apron Mee winds 1-9) 4 os | set Se
Abundance ........... Common.| Common. |! Common.| Common.| Common. |Abundant,
|

125. [563] Spizella pusilla (Wils.). Field Sparrow.* Fig. 19.

_ Abundant summer resident. February 26 to November 8. Possibly
rare winter resident. Reported January 17 and February 2, 1905
(Ped: B:):

Singing weakly February 26, 1902; in full song March 10, 1903. Mat-
ing March 29, 1902. Nest and 3 eggs, May 8, 1903 (C. G. L.). This nest
was on the ground at the base of a large weed. Nest and full set of eggs
May 14, 1899; hatched May 18 (N. B. M.).
is A most abundant species in weedy fields.

118

MIGRATION RECORD.

Wiear es ctiets cade rn: 1884. | 1885. | 1885. 1886. | 1887. 1893.
Obsernverisscoce-tase-te | ClHSE: | SCSHe Bi“) Coe Base BW ks |sGsG. Wis | sn oNike
Mirstiseenecntec.<0377- Sa Bie eo 3 1 me | oe eae Ree 3-15 3-24 3-30
IN@XtSGCI genset Seen hommes ie, emai alle nace ence 5-20 - >| eee kes oscale eee eee
Mammnipn dss: tesa aha clo (See is eaten? 898 > soe
RSUSCEM sect cee Sse eon leone eres | UO ee toe BASE at arena | een cnnnt iemsascssocc
A bund aN COlss o. soc--e eal aise oe ese Abundant. Abundant. Common y|een cacao Common.
Lela pein 1399. 1901. 1902, | 1902. 1903.
CLOSING Saati ataetoeetes Saas N.-B2 MM.) OW. GM.) OW). a Mes) Wir M. | Wielae Me
MOIS USEC Mes sors Niassa A ee ooo all Sa ons 3-17 2-26 | 5 Sears eee 3-1

ING XtESOON.w* - <a ee oe 5 eaoacaoe ase 3-24 ioe Ve bane ol lel Some otic 3-3
Wommonte nce. Bech c ieee eee | 4-15 3-24 3-21 : Roce eo 3-15
TURSTS CON 5c 0.5 sods See aY wees anal eae Bosh donncnanaonn| bocasaaancad | 11-5 | BOSeaB ANN
PADMA COw inc eetdeey Caco ee eee Common. | Common.| Common. | Common. |Abundant.

126. [567] Junco hyemalis (Linn.). Slate-colored Junco.*

Abundant winter resident. October 6 to May 1.

Snatches of song are often heard in March and April and it has been
heard singing in the fall; November 9 and 23, 1902. On November 23,
1902, a bright, sunshiny day, one of three Juncos was observed carrying
dry blades of grass in its beak. It always gave them up in favor of new
ones every little while and did not put many of them in the same place.
On this same day a Junco was also heard singing a quite loud and pleas-
ing song. This occurrence should probably be classed with those
phenomena which were discussed under the heading, ‘“‘“A Revival of Sex-
ual Instinct” in “The Auk’ a year or more ago. A similar thing has
been noticed in the case of the English Sparrow. One was seen nest-
building November 6, 1902.

Where there are weeds there are Juncos. But briary fence rows, and
thicketed gullies are centers of density in the Junco population.

119

MIGRATION RECORD.

WiGREAR AS oho e 1885. 1£92. 1899. 1901. | 1902. | 1902. 1903.
j {

Observer...... C.H.B. | E.M.K.|N.B.M.| W.L.M. | W.L.M.|) W.L.M.| W.L.M
SOP CM Pa be Gated [Sy med ye ee liad oars | ie en {yal peter detente
Next seen.... MOST ee ato eee ee een eee ode tia seal ceeee osce | 10-14 | P
Common...... TUT! Yas Pa Sock hetea a ip Reece Tati eee OA ed |e ee ele be whO 3G a, Polar sere act
Bast Seen. c2:: tavence cece ce 4-21 4-6 4-14 A- Di kee th Revack Aa tes | 5-1
Abundance...|Abundant.)..........] ......... Abundant.|Abundant. Abundant.| Abundant.
127. [575a] Peucexa wstivalis bachnani (Aud.). Bachman’s Sparrow.

Common migrant and not uncommon summer resident.
“April 24, 1884, Prof. W. S.
from a brush-pile in Monroe ,County.

April 6, —.

Blatchley took two Bachman’s Sparrows
That was its first record there.
It appeared regularly thereafter between April 6 (1885) and April 29 (1886).
In 1886 two sets of eggs and perhaps a half-dozen taken (Hyvermann)”
[A W. Butler]. Song April 7, 1903. Common April 12, 1903; 31 of these
birds were seen in a single high, brushy meadow. Here and in clearings
where there are many oak saplings and in the uneven pastures where
rosebushes and stunted cedars are plentiful, Bachman’s Sparrow is most

often found.

MIGRATION RECORD.

l l j
GET Sor car eae ae aae 1884. 1885. 138625 eh eel S8 ere | 19025 tae LON
’ i
7
Ohserver s+. aie02 223 W.S.B Gatab C.H.B Gc. 6. W W.L.M. | W.L.M.
First seen............. 4-24 4-6 4-29 4-27 aig oeey
INGRUM bem. cee ye vena ieee cance 4-26 5-8* | 4-28 420 | £8
CO MMIINO Re cio ec soe Roe ele ree eae pose l| eee oo as | SH CASH ae Bes a Ree Ao 4-12
Vaxst Senne sero ces tealctaseiae seal cence heel ece wean odes iphre ho ny Peete Sat, | ae ote rete
Abundances. sees eee oes ermeak Not rare. | Not rare. |............ Rare Common.
*G.G.W. |
| | f
128. [581] Melospiza cinerea melodia (Wils.). Song Sparrow.* Fig. 20.

Abundant during migration; common at other times but more so in

winter than in summer.

The Song Sparrow is not a common breeder here.

The most common songster, whose value is enhanced by his habit of

singing when most other birds are silent.

The writer has heard Song

120

Sparrows singing every month in the year. Following are dates when
their song was heard in this locality, for ten months of the year: 9-28:
10-12; 11-8; 12-14, °02; 1-21; 2-22; 3-4; 4-4; 5-1; 6-9, 03. On April 8, 1909,
one was observed singing during flight. Though not a performer of intri-
cate music, nor ostentatious either in his lay or his pretty self, to the
person to whom are familiar our country lanes as they appear in the
cool, quiet duskiness of vernal evenings, this domestic songster is the
most welcome and the most cheerful and cheering of singing birds.

May 38, 1908, nest and four young in a small, thick cedar in a sink-
hole (C. G. L.). Many nests and eggs are found during the first week in
June.

129. [583] Melospiza lincolnii (Aud.). Lincoln’s Sparrow.

Rare migrant; probably a more common and regular one, however

than can be inferred from the data at hand.

MIGRATION RECORD.

MO BT 5 saya Spent ass apcliclore Gas o Re A ee a eae ie eae ee 1885. | 1885
13 a famed Greene PE cies ees aired ee Ae panera tes | C.H.B.
RITSTISE OMe otic toe te eee ee ene mete Ee eee ee me eae 5-3 10-10
IN@X- ESE ON acts cciaetnnc os ie vice alot clects oan Naan oise dae wiere ew aul cone teen 5-5 10-11

(CLO ITVS) inna ane re RAO SO GU SEAR ers ma DeTin ee Serr ana SHO sae aane | SPOOR Dad laeeup aa use 4 5-
LOE EOC) esc on ean cnkt ore ARSC eer nelCcec ann saad ac tOe SUCBO DA aotstaer er Sbe 10-25
PASI BGO Fete wiesecis cenit wrctie ata ik ciocare Soae alse aeareis eo ala wisi Seba oreo eae ne common|Not common

130; [584] Melospiza georgiana (Lath.). Swamp Sparrow.

Common migrant. March 5 to April 29, October 2 to November 35.
“Reported by B. W. Evermann in winter, not seen by me before March
19” (W. S. B.). There is a possibility that the Swamp Sparrow is an
occasional summer resident. A nest in the University collection from
this locality is identified as belonging to this bird.

In speaking of the breeding grounds, A. W. Butler says: “There it
sings its song, but during the migrations it is songless.” P. J Hartman
and the writer saw and heard the Swamp Sparrow singing during a steady

drizzling rain March 8, 1903, the first date for the bird in that year.

MIGRATION RECORD.
pitied See ne Sener oe he Sanya eee ee ok oe kee | 1885. 1886. 1887. 1895.
UFC ia a) Ree eg oe ee a= C.H.B W.S. B. | G.G. W Butler
HEIVS DAGON soos see coe oe ine tobe cen cen bees 10-17 3-19 3-26 3-5

|
IARC o Seo Ree nS AB ONE ear DER eo ee 11 SY Nr oh el Re eee na ey (a ea Re
CTT OF oe ar eee Ss oe oa san Soe Reale Palace ares REE wetland tine choc akawe g cmenif acableeueea ee
WGA SEISGENM eo concn soon ne tae ovenlt asckis awe aes BSc oi aber cece herk ae aw es ae 4-19
PU DIRT GEIECGT iss sees fae = an a eee Senie censors cece COMDILG They le ote sen ie cae cee ae cae toe tetas
}

DAO Se RRL ae at ge See a 1902. 1902. 1903. 1903.
MUDRORVEK SAC en seca cht mee en ce coed e eterna ee [> Weel BES |e Wee re = Wis. re SP ic
GEStARGG MGR oj eee ose edo oe ote tee ate eees | 3-26 10-12 3-8 Pons ee eee
Nex USC ONT. cotes t,o ds ion Saceeioe oa ee Seated ete A ae eel Mena Saye
MUEEHEPIEOA sue Mete oe sai ne Sos acleles Aa ise on cinta Ses nace miancrewen [ls Somer Cee eee oats ns ceen\i aa clv'ee einelncte
PENT Reeth oe A hoe ey 4-24 10-26 4-29 | 10-2
PAP U NOR EG hoes cron sone kanon as we ot oiaiearet Aston kis Common. | Common. Common. | Common
131. [585] Passerella iliaca (Merr.). Fox Sparrow.*

Common to abundant migrant. February 20 to May 16. October 5 to
January 17, 1903.

Though seen several times from

November 28. Rare winter resident. In winter they
are very restricted in their range.
November 28, 1902, to March 8, 1903, none were seen outside of a portion
The ex-

ceedingly late date, May 16, 1903, is a record of six or seven Fox Spar-

ot the valley of Griffey Creek about one fourth of a mile long.

rows seen by the Nature Study Class and the writer along a creek bottom
in the extreme eastern part of the county.

“It is said to have a clear, loud, melodious voice, and to sing a sweet
song, which I have never heard, but hope to some spring, as they should
occasionally give us a foretaste of the musical treat that is wasted—
humanly speaking—on the uninhabited Hudson Bay Region’ (A. W.
Butler).
is in tone similar to that of the Chewink.

The song of the Fox Sparrow is indeed loud and melodious and
I have heard it singing every
spring that I have made observations in this locality. P. J. Hartman and
myself heard the song many times during. the spring of 1903. They
began singing March 9.

The bulk departed April 12, 1885 (C. H. B.).

MIGRATION RECORD.

l | |
Mearinsm eon epee 1884. 1885. | 1885. 1886. | 1892. | 1895.
————<__ — ——— oe — | ——— — — —- ——
. B. W. E.
Observer ..,........... CHE) |. 0) HB, |: HB|G.¢. Ww, | se MK anes

W.S. B. Se

Kirst'seen..s.:<. 25.3 S198 eileen S218 10-'0 3-14 2290) 1s
West Bean rs ttl oe | 3-97 10-14 3-16 9-97)
COMMUN OMe ea sete el ee 53) [aie WP on tsiernna Wey emaremecepr ais emigre a en) eka
Mashseem Sitar cc aoe aes or St 1153 4} <29295 3-30 4 20
PD UG AIGE eee aliens aoe eee Common. Rare | Common. | Common.|}............
Mears.c | 190] | 1902. 1902. 1903. 1903.
UDSERVER tnt steer ede! W.L.M.| W.L.M.| W.L. M. | W.L.M. | W.L. M
Firstseen...... 3-24 Sek ee Ali emantannee ee eee reel | Meee
INOXtiSeGm . mpreee an cai ee. elon eens | Boy Pela eae [sem rina [pe FS a ace
E |
Comimon..... BE So seaie ace 3-23 10-5 3-6-5 USS eae
HAREGEE Ny enna eee eee | ters ca teiaceraeys 4-16 10-28 5-16 11-22
ALD UN wee Ns cei ee een tee ee ee | Common. | Common. | Common. |Abundant.| Common.
132. [587] Pipilo erythrophthalmus (Linn.). Towhee.* Fig. 21.

Abundant migrant and summer resident; common winter resident.
There is always a noticeable period in spring when Chewinks are very
scarce. This is probably due to the departure of our winter residents
before the arrival of migrants and summer residents. A marked example
of this period of scarcity is found in the record for the spring of 1902.
Up to the fifteenth of February, males and females were common and
present in about equal numbers. From this date until the ninth of March,
no Chewinks were seen. On the latter date, and for nearly a week there-
But on the
twenty-fourth of March both sexes were equally abundant and the season

of song was at its height.

after, although males were present, no females were seen.

Thus in this spring there was a_ period
twenty-three days in length when they were absent; a period of a week
When males only were present; and finally another period of fifteen days
during which the arrival of other birds brought the numbers up to the

usnal suminer abundance. This hiatus is more or less marked in every

year’s record. That the males migrate first to the breeding ground is
also upheld by all other available data.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Year. Male. | Female. | Observer.

[Se ai AR Set Ne Ss Pa ss Thera hare bata bac 0: Rl se

ESE fel TA sd I a MELE pl Iie 0d i mt oR ed RS CI 9-99" | 3-9 W.S.B.

1 Ty SE et) ee ANS, Bs eo AUIS ee ed a BeGeia ter S18 W.L.M.
“B.W.E.

The Chewink begins singing early. The first perfect song was heard
March 1, 1903. On February 20, however, and again on March 1, two of
these birds were found rehearsing in low tones. The first was scratching
among some briars and was going over his spring song very softly. The
notes were exactly the same; the only difference was in the volume and
the tone which seemed to express contentment rather than ecstacy. The
other one, heard on the first of March, was sitting in some cedar brush
with his feathers ruffled up, his bill sunk in his breast, muttering his
seore. This whole effort was accomplished in rather a drowsy manner
and he was so oblivious to his surroundings, that he was not frightened
by the presence of a human being within three feet of him. Immediately
after this, I heard another Chewink give the song perfectly from the top
of a chestnut tree. It was a beautiful chant and seemed unusually
attractive on this rainy March morning. The same habit of rehearsal
has been observed in several other birds, among which are the Song
Sparrow, White-throated Sparrow and brown Thrasher.

Nest and three eggs found April 15, ’03. Birds hatched on June 11,
1901, had flown June 19 (W. L. H.).A very late date is given by B. W.
Evermann. “August 19, 1881, I found a Chewink’s nest containing three
fresh eggs, built at least three feet from the ground in a spice bush. Such
is not common I believe.” (Orn. and O@6I., 1881.)

133. [593] Cardinalis cardinalis (Linn.). Cardinal.* Fig. 22.

Abundant resident.

Mating February 18, 1901; March 23, 1903. Nestbuilding April 12,
1903, but, on the same date a nest was found which contained three eggs.
This was afterwards ascertained to be the full set.

124

The Cardinal is another one of those cheery birds which may be heard
singing at all times of the year. Some winter dates of singing are: 10-19;
11-9, 02 and 1-1; 2-8, 03. On February 13, 1903, I heard a Cardinal sing-
ing from the top of a cedar tree at 6 a. m., and on passing the same place
at 7 a. m. found him still at his music.

134. [595]

Common migrant.

Rose-breasted Grosbeak. *
“But few breed here” (B. W. E.). Although the
Rose-breasted Grosbeak has been reported a summer resident from locali-

Zamelodia ludoviciana (Linn. ).

ties farther south than this (St. Louis, Cincinnati), such an occurrence is

very unusual. The only record of its making its summer home at

Bloomington is that of B. W. Evermann in 1886. Song May 8, 1903.
The date, November 12, 1888, is from an uncatalogued specimen in

the Museum of Indiana University which was collected by a Mr.

‘Chambers. The males seem to arrive earlier and depart later than the

females. Neither so common nor so early a migrant now as formerly,
MIGRATION RECORD.
WiGAIS Sah ost . cee ne eee re eats 1885. 1885. 1885. 1886. 1887.
URSenviena-penciscctar coe a eee C.H.B Capone C.H.B.,\ B. W. E.. G..Ge Ww.
Hirstiseonsenuetioneecmtscccnica ee eral eae £4-30 9-11 4-23 4-28
Ne xitiS@ e Tinacmec.c tis moe re ee 4-26 5-5 9-17 yO) Ce ne
MOUTON iste tie eerie ey acer 5-6 5 6 9-18 Ba4' - 0) | beepers
Thastaseonmnc sees sane iene eee 6-16 5-15 10-10 Sah Shae
Abundances eee Abundant.|Abundant. Abundant. | Comiunon®|/ha5-5.-eesene
| =W.S. B.
Miers easier e toied nny ne Ee Ramat be Pee 1888 TOOL. 2] 1902. = est 08:
| |
ADD SERVO T Zeiss cccte ete ee eid Serene Cree EPA eeenS Chambers.| W.L.M.| W.L.M.! W.L.M
BTS t SO Ne ss iccars sins Se oe ee EE Se |e ere 5-7 5-5 | 5-7
INGORE OS Wir erccs eRe eek Se aa | ieee aoe raed eee STAR mv | EYED alt oe ea 5-8
Oven ta 12 KO) «RSE eRe ReESe Re eer ERR aera eR fr nity pec Sr [EE Ma is ens re ciate | oes et Nera | desuieumnueer
TMStSeGNs” 2.5 oc. hcek oman ae EE pt ey Ce eras bete ee eel are acta | See
PMG WIN BINGO Pseecn eee eae ee ete eae See oneae Common.| Common. | Common.

125

135. [598] Cyanospiza cyanea (Linn.). Indigo Bunting.*

Abundant summer resident. April 13 to October 17; which are the
limits of its stay in the State.

Song April 29, ’03; also heard as late as August 9, in a latitude but
little south of this. May 19, ’03, nest and one egg found in a small bush
along a road (C. G. L.). The males migrate from a few days to two weeks
in advance of the females.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Scie oson 1885. 1885. | 188. | 18982 | 1886. | 1887. | 1892.
|-C.H.B. | d
Observer...... Go. B. +) C-H.B. + C.H.B.?| BW. EB. VSB. G.G.W. E.M.K.
} | | ~W. |
First seen...) 74-25 Bae lec taeaaw. 4-13 | 422 4-27 | 5-4
| |
Next seen....) 5-2 EINE Oe) Gotoh ear peccireBE ans | 4-23 AE SD IY an:
Common...... 5-16 SNA oes Hind gia pe ee (i Cael espn is Fae
10) ic 9 ey ee ane Dt cee pe lea e s ia ok Gea eee beer enaksi hic teehee
Abundance...|Abundant./ Abundant. Abundant. Abundant. Abundant. a aepnagite vie | Sladen she
| | \

Vea ormece 1893, 1895. | 1900. 1901. | 1902. 1902. 1903. 1903.

Observer...; E. M.K.| A.W.B.| N.B.M. | W.L. M.| W. LL.M.) W. L.M.| W. L.M.| W. L. M.
First seen..) 5-6 5-2 Bae apn O-OS palate atten nell saeeeae> =o rE eel ere
ING XUSESM | Sncaraers aciauilte atop ct histo present Deleer alate seca Gea G Sina PU) eel Ieee heigl
COMMON Mleareret sare eee alae et ess 5-14 ie een Peco ner YE ela nein Seasc
TGAREBOR ILE cet ct teicid | sere as © Beer ctl ee cate abeecas (Ua ee san eae taco aoor 10-6

ADU AIL Seana ecel| bets secs Common |Common Common Common Abundant| Abundant

136. [604] Spiza americana (Gmel.). Dickcissel.

Abundant summer resident. April 28 to October 2.

Song May 5, 1903. Nest and 5 eggs in a low bush, in an old orchard,
May 15, 1901. Nest and four eggs about three feet up in a bush in a
pasture, June 2, 1902 (CaGeeks):

Both sexes arrive at the same time, and they are either mated upon
arrival or mate very soon afterwards.

126

MIGRATION RECORD.

j = ee
MCSr ti. Saco cases 1885. 1885. 1886. 1887. | 1892. 1893.

ee | ats: on pegs emmy
ODServerias-c- ese. seas CoH: B: | C.H.B. | G’aiw. | GoGeWinl Abe OE | BH. M. K.
First seen. ....2.....-: Ae Afas he aes RS bes ARS 57 [deg
NextieGeniinsstesccaes et | ile ee ie 4-29 pres Ped ee al ae ee 5-4
Common........ Sots Da Ous eae ens 5-1 [Pee

| | |
ikastiseens-.s5-0 ceo (Panaetoeoarce 10222 | eee ool nea eee eee ee ees bee eae
Abundance .........:. |Abundant. Abundant. Abundant. soe elec fke nantisuset oahesd eae nae
DC PN oS Menta ear eas ACARI Aree SMe 1895. 1899. 1901. | 1902. 1903.

a aE: ee ae, cacao
|W. eM. We Le | Wah e

Observer te tesecmGrc iat as-een eo PAC Seah NGyD Mis

ESestbeonineces ard te 5-4 ait i Bence ts 5-5
Ne@xtis@eliring< caer acess weatenoeres Sechincnapece 5-13 iets ie Sn 5-10
COLO TPIT To) eee aes eR eli Sle EO ee en mat a 5-16 5-15 is S=10 5-16
Weasel RCs | = oc s kN ee ed | ee on ee i
ADUNGANGR sf os p tte nse esemeponaces Iaoaoabdcas: | Common. | Common. |Abundant.

157. (608) = Piranga erythvomelas Vieill. Scarlet Tanager.*

Common migrant. Moderately common summer resident (B. W. E..
*S7). April 22 to September 19. Song and mating April 29, 1903.
Usually the males arrive before the females, sometimes as much as a
week in advance. They arrive at the same time, however, in some years.
B. W. E'vermann says that this species was moderately common here in
the spring of 1881. Six were seen on one morning in May. He says that

this was the farthest north it had been reported in the State up to that

time.

MIGRATION RECORD.
Nee gain oe Mee her | 1882. | 1885. 1885 1885. |. 1886

l l
Mlisanwers; cin vasc eae eee BWR S| Ca: BL tC: HB.) “C. Hi By, eee
MITSHRCOMS Om ees cee Soceee eees 5-6 44-26 ORO pein NC oEe : 4-29
MMexbeeORG soc eoacck eet an eens se ee 4-28 eOM" Ss lets 5 oa eae 4-23
CWonimons: 25) see eee Weve aces nace 5-10 5-10 Soe et ee
Last seen........ Lae tosoccees| Bee aoeeal sodeascno es Peete ots Qe 919
Aanden Gens. cr cc seen cee | ee Pore LA Abundant.|Abundant./Abundant | Common,

i WaT

Bike mirsery sc erspeania erste iecsivicie sain nite he aeidhe ca oe | 1887. 1892. | 1902, | 1903.
HOD Sei e haem ene are mn ce creer atc c tae fam sr Os We ed Mae, | W.L.M. | W.L.M.
FAS GSEOM Gs lots shal waa ets side siete Semi aee 4-28 5-4 4-23 4-28
INGGRSC OT nae cam ta teetst etd Mette aia ss ae Paes 4-29 aes Sete et 4-29
OO IMIMGD cae wears ete SoG BES es eect oe RiGee | Raa ata Sec { 4-29
GEST SERN. csc ae eto es ees ace ees EEE Gis seeseaoks | Ave kere pee
Nb un CaM Gente cen seer ese aneer rede te toasts eres ee |

Sc Rae nel arya Deh e ; Common. | Common.

138. [610} Piranga rubra (Linn, ). Summer Tanager.*

Abundant migrant and common summer resident. April 1 to Sep-
tember 28.

Mated May 4, 1903; nest and five eggs in a small apple tree near
a pond, May 19, 1902 (C. G. L.); nest and four eggs May 29, ’01.

The date, April 1, 1886, is from an unecatalogued specimen in the
museum of Indiana University, by W. A. Millis. The first migrant in
1901 was a male in variegated plumage. The males precede the females
in migration.

MIGRATION RECORD.

DGHI ena sate 1885. - | 1885. 1885. 1886. 1887. | 1892. | 1893.
| |
Observer. .... | C.1LB. | C.H.B. | C.u.B. | pi ® laa. w.| ee Aes
First seen ...... 44-22 4-26 MORAG co eetéae es 4-]* 4-27 5-1 | 5-1
Next seen ...... 4-25 Seo Pal tats oc ¢ 2s Wael Mec eka ORS ike ea
Common ....... §-3 TS pie aera Res An reper tier. | aes er etc Alepekice rey pa earnest
THRSTASC OM reece en cnicien hs fees ra kate COB iter lnisnrte eee aie eee rnnede BAe eae | ara ae ona
Abundanee..... Abundant. Abundant.| Abundant. Commons sesesc oe lie meee : Seen aaae
|
=W. A, Millis. ,
=== 2 =
NYC a a SS Weer eon 1899. | 1900. - | 1901. 1902. 1902. | 1903.
’ |
Observer .....-. Santen N: B.M. | N. BM. | W.L.M.| W.Lb.M.| W.L.M. | W. lL. M
1 }
MINS SCE ia. .cckes sae. 5-9 | 4-29 5-6 YO igebe Nl Gemae ra Soae | 4-28
Next seen............. co Nae eee 5-7 Bedi ten (ce ttn | 62
WommMoOn 6 shee ese 5-16 5-9 5-13 4-27 |istrsielanys ccantets 5-10
MANE MCG M goalies tcicresete | suasye tec tes 1: AROS areal Oo aer ara eOEne | Goce cordean Qe eral clean tees
Abundance ............ Common. | Common. | Common.| Common. | Common. | Common.
|

128

In 1894 E. M. Kindle remarked upon the absence of this bird from
Brown County while it was common in this, the adjoining county.
During the last spring (1903) the Summer Redbird was common also
in Brown County.

139. [611] Progne subis (Linn.). Purple Martin.*
Common summer resident. March 28 to September 10.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Moar saan acs 1885. | 1885. | 1886. 1887. 1892. 1893. 1895.
Observer .....| C.H.B. | 0. H.B. Peet G. GW.) PME K, | EAM. K. | A. W.B.
First seen... 323 Raat nee eer 3-28 . | 3-29 3-31 | 3-31. | 447
Next seen .... 7 bepengaid [ote een aan oe 4-9 Biss peas 4-2 Po
Comintern. Ne AG oe Me Meee [ee eee Meerremeres | ore
Last seen...; | Sagnenkecc sce 9-10 \nidoconddodallbede capone senses Sem pioetee nese [eroeseeees
Abundance... Abundant.|Abundant.| Common. |].......... | Common.| Common.)..........
Weal socne nec eee 1899. | 1900. | 1901. 1902. 1902. | 1903.

| i t
Observer srs. ccscsecree | N, B.M. | N.B.M. | Wee Mie) WM) We ls Mos Sis eMe
First seen......... SF 4-12 rE eal ed 16 eas ance nn, 3-28
Next seen... .......5 | 4-13 4-8 | 417 426 Shin Seed cosnenes 42
CommontLeccencesrass | 4-20 4-10 4-18 cl Gow ttl lonadeaar on: 4-11
Wast:seen:te.5!.ssc8e Da cen abe coe t se | Bertie sun epee nate weitere eel Perse 8
Abundance ........... | Common.| Common. Common. | Common. | Common. |Abundant.

There are only two large ponds in the region, and as the Swallows
are seen at these places for a long time before they are in any other
part of the country it is easy to record their migration.

One of the peculiarities of their migration is the arrival at the same
time of all or several of the species. On one day we can find no
Swallows at all; on the next, perhaps, all, from the Martin to the
little Bank Swallows, will be present about our ponds. Four of the
species came on the same day in 1885, and three on the same day
in 1902 and 1903. After their arrival they are augmented in numbers
at the same time, or they leave, or arrive again in full strength. ‘Thus
on four days in April, 1903—the 10th, 13th, 19th and 30th—large mixed

flocks were observed, when all or nearly all of the species had been

129

absent the day before. Their departure was similar. On April 11,
17, 27 and May 1, the less vagrant summer resident Progne was the
only Swallow remaining of the motley companies of the day before.
In other years this mode of migration has been just as marked; in
1902, two species arrived together on the fifth of April and three on
the thirteenth: and in 1885, four species, the Bank, Tree, Barn and
Cliff Swallows arrived in one fiock on the 15th of April, and were
seen together again on the next day. Tree and Cliff Swallows became
common on the 22d, the Barn Swallow a day before, and on the 25th
the Bank and Roughwinged Swallows became common.

A more detailed discussion of the migration of the Hirundinide
in 1903, will bring out another point, i. e., the relation of weather con-
ditions to the phases of the migratory movement.

From April 10, the date when three species had arrived, to May 3,
inclusive, when the last flock of migrants was seen, there were just
fifteen cloudy or rainy days, with an average temperature of 47° at 5
a. m., and ten clear days with a temperature of 44.° Swallows, some-
times, with the exception of the Purple Martin, were absent [three spec-
imens of Hirundo seen one day and two of Petrochelidon another] during
the ten days, and were very much in evidence fifteen days. South winds
prevailed during this period and migration was high among all the small
land birds, especially on the 28th and 29th; but on these dates no flocks
of swallows were seen. If a clear or partly clear period was succeeded by
a rainy, cloudy, or misty one, swallows were surely to be found.
As long as the weather remained cloudy, these birds remained, but on
the first fair day they disappeared. ‘lhe only species that arrived on a
clear day was the Tree Swallow; but after its arrival its movements
agreed with those of its cousins. There was only one cloudy day on
which the crowds of swallows were absent and eyen that day brought
an increase in the number of Martins.

A synopsis of the period follows: April 10, cloudy, 3 species; April 11,
cloudy, an increase in number of Purple Martins; April 12, fair, no Swal-
lows (Martin ignored); April 13-16, inclusive, cloudy and rainy, all species
present; April 17-18, clear, no Swallows; 19-25, inclusive, cloudy or rainy,
all species present in considerable numbers; 26-29, fair, few Swallows
seen and their number decreased during this period; April 30, cloudy,
a large flock of four kinds; May 1-2, clear, no Swallows; May 3, rainy, a

9—A. or Screncr, '04.

150

flock of eighty Bank Swallows and twelve Purple Martins. After this
date only the usual summer numbers of the breeding species were seen;
there were no more migrants. The Purple Martin which seemed to be
less affected by weather conditions after arrival than the other species,
was orthodox in its arrival which occurred on a cloudy morning after a
elear night.

There is no other record so complete; and it can not be stated whether
this relation between weather and migration is a fixed one, but in regard
to the migratory movements of Swallows in 1903, it may be said that the
relation was so close that one could predict the numbers to be found on

any day from the condition of the weather.

140. [612] Petrochelidon lunifrons (Say). Cliff Swallow.
Abundant migrant and common summer resident. April 12 to Sep-
tember 14. Nest and four eggs in University collection (C. H. B.).

MIGRATION RECORD.

Mew: ca tae ere 1884. 1985. | 1885. 1886. | 1887.
eS | !
Observer.. as ainsi S| AG Wires, je CaHLsBs CLH.B. C. EL Bs 4 GeGewe
BIrStisee Dy aa. eee eee ee | 4 18 ARIS Snil) eee rte 4-19 4-12
IN Gxbisee myc tns ets ates eel | ae fi Y CAL eal Mecererera eat 4-29 feece
GoiimOmnns: secre oe eee ae | satan wapanciaings Crain eae tara eerie watt tearie esd | ene
WastiSeemactr- ata esac cher eee Veeerene: [ose 9-14 ade oe eee | ise ieee
Abundance Secreta ice tei care acta, reed [fees Rees oe Latardicnts haiedastee Chandunie sai neta
GA team epee oo ee: 1893. | 1895. | 1901. 1902. 1903.
Obsen wen nee ee een Ce ese | EB. M.K. | A. W.B. | WLM. | W. LL.M. | Wee:
RipsteaGn —faees < hie eal ee Re ol 5-7 4-13 4-13
INiextiS EG tne te arene a Coen ae es Uipeatiae| ar oN oa ere eee lay enetey 4-14
@omimnoane tras see aes Eee $33 4406 no08| Ue Roos cas Poa havea eas) lecvdeeua Soe 4-14
astvseenm.. tac mitoses eee eee See eae a Site ances seit tilt gta eed | 2 ee
fAlpuin dancer sae: ae re nee nae re Ceci Common. Common. | Common.

141. [613] Hirundo erythrogastra Bodd. Barn Swallow.*

Abundant migrant and summer resident. April 9 to September 12.
May 12, 1903, nest about two-thirds completed on a-rafter in a loft of a
barn (C. G. 1).

131

MIGRATION RECO).

GME eis cate sce a en ardncr eters 1885. 1885. 1886. | 1837. 1892.
HSmEVETY. o: :thust oct ethene | C/H.B. | O.H.B. | G.G. Ww. | G. GW. | ae
SHUIRSIRS GON sacie’ een fe = we, aie te eels 2) Deal ops se ene maa re erly 4-18
Mosksdonig shoes oe (Ener EC ORRS apna Sore ) ay | 4-19
COLDNO Nabe pRanaeepne aereroemoeacas | GDN Al irecsiorstersio Ay 4-20 jodeassen gos 4-24
[URIS ARaYSaT Gh ERO eat ane cea (ee Sak eae 9-12 eee eet, LOA
AIGUMGANICER cee tne onc ss dent sant vee Abundant.|Abundant.| Common. fees rash Common.
AYGET 2 dretiang Serena Set ye tr ee oe ae ee ee 18 3. 1899. | 1902. 1903.
ODSEnvOtinees sic. itor oes ee wai oaeeeen aes H.M.K. | N.B.M. | W.L.M. | W.L.M.
HN ER eR Pe thse aut eee te a Re | 49 (Oe eae Seta ee a
INGSAABOB Tires Reverie, wales ove Me einsts. sratoiety eg ele gi levee sien EEO ict | Gee tee esate Saree ES gd Pe ca

AC QUAINT ots a gateiceAnte ae be acts einlccin crane, cars bisa se wi enaiine cectoren els | Fe | 4-13
NARS TSC CNG Severe en cela dienctcjons oe Soret seen eme werent) Spe Bhe ee | deals [fees stead s oa fo accresenae se piteees
PAI BTU ANG Gee oeicslsctres ache ch vaSan eee ioeaasce tence Common.| Common. Common. ea coe

142. [614] Jridoprocne bicolor (Vieill.). Tree Swallow.
Abundant migrant. April 5 to 30. A common summer resident in
1886 (C. H. B.).

MIGRATION RECORD.

OEE Acad otae acne aa cine i anno soem eerie ane ners 3 | 1885. | 1902. 1903.
\O) SELES ce peta nee acts case ters es Sai te nese eta GE Tale ats | Wig Mea Weele Me
Barnes GUIS ares vee eee Se ee bets 4-15 4-5 ES

Me Reena eA ed I Seen eit ovate acacia Berens 4-16 } 4-19 | 4-10
WONMMO Na scmhac tl cance oe rsaaretwne eae tsee cea s seas | Eee all oe eee deca | 45
IVER REGIS aug oer terres HOOT UO Ree OTUs OI oae aan tee OE aCe] (Cae aereee ari ear lint seearcaatatays | 4-30
PAU CO yeserster et etan bie chn = aioe Se ote colt wastrel aisle Very commen| Common. abundant:

143. [616] Riparia riparia (Linn.). Bank Swallow.*
Abundant migrant and common summer resident. April 6. Young
learning to fly, June 4, 1902 (C. G. I.).

MIGRATION RECORD.

1885. | 1900. 1902. 1903.

C. HB: Ne Bs Me) Wi. eM Wieslae ie

Oiennee Co ss 329 eee a A.W.B.
| 7S pgs ee

Hirsiseen osteo ee. 46 | 415 | | ae
NexUacen- ay pee ee Benet ate ore f Gace SEB A Sat) Sylva cece L| 41d
Common 32) 2162. ee ee ee a | es

Last Bee Ae a ath ae A See en | ee ene et ren Oeane at ere

Abus dineeres: c8* eee eee |e Sa oe | Common., Common. Common. ‘Abundant.

144. (617) Stelgidopteryx serripennis (Aud.). Rough-winged Swallow.

Common migrant and rather common summer resident. April 13.
B. W. Evermann found them abundant and mating at Gosport, May 8,
1886. Many nests were nearly complete.

MIGRATION RECORD.

NCE) Danae asa CoRR Rt ite et eee rR een ha ARES 1885. | 1886. | 1903.
ONSET ae An CS Cee Ds 27, ase R Berd Sea G.HB. | WE: ween
BIinstisee ngee soe Sets: steaks ate re eee ee 4-18 | 5-1 4-13
ING@XtSGeME R55: estes. sie RE ee RO oot 4-22 | 5-8 | 4-14
Opmmonisker ea een eels Sei Le pee pe ede 5-8 | 492
TRS ESCO Tite eee ten eee ae nee oe Ne RA ee goss eee |

SM ALU CLUE SLY Cl Verge cee ee ae eee Ae tattoo Or Sha eee Nite a ae Common. | Rare. Common.

145. [619] Ampelis cedrorum (Vieill.). Cedar Waxwing.

Common summer resident: irregular at other seasons of the year,
sometimes entirely absent for considerable periods, and again appearing
in large numbers for a longer or shorter time.

Nest and two eggs about six feet up in an isolated cedar, June 13,
1902 °(C2 Give):

146. [621] Lanéus borealis Vieill. Northern Shrike.

Although stated to be a rare winter visitor by C. H. Bollman in 1886,
there are no actual records for this region except those of February 8,
and 25, 1902. It was observed in Brown County, November 18, 1894
(E. M. Is.).

147.

winter (

some of the more harsh calls of the Blue Jay.

[622e ]
Uncommon summer

WW )s

resident.

Lantus ludovicianus migrans (W. Palmer. ).

March 38 to December
February 16, 1901 (V. H. B.).
Mating and attempts at song, March 15, 1903.

133

Migrant Shrike.*

ale

five young just hatched, ten feet up ina hedge (C. G. L.).

Rare in

The song resembles
May 10, 1903, nest and

Abundant migrant and summer resident.
Song April 28, 1903; mating April 29.

owner and one of a Cowbird, May 25, ’03.

MIGRATION RECORD.
SGT SR SoU ce ere 1885 1886. 1892. | 1893. 1901.
MUDSOr VET see rn ise ei tare a: Cc. H. B W.S.B A.B.U E.M.K. | W.L. M.
IGS SGenerate cc oe: 4-] 3-28 3-25 3-15 3-3
GSS AGT ieieeree SN nas i I ae a 4-17 3-17
Clr ES Be Seas caehnac 8 te | Cl aoures Re i] LAE aes] PR a ck Aaa Dei ee Aegina Bon BD
LECCE CE ata i et I sor take ee eee
PANISRETRONSUNL GOs. sea tacos wie coss tate Rare RaTGs, & \eensaeeten. | Rare Common.
—== ; = i v=
JOS RRC DR oe PE ie eS Sa 1902. 1902. | 1903. | 1903.

Lae Yes "eee — |
SIEGEL tries i, ride, Aver taennaanda pedo ves s<| Wo GoM. | Ws LeM.| W.L.M. | Wiredliavls
HOSE SOC Nn ret 2 aes otk Se se eh eonien ae oe eth eo a” soba taken: 3-11 less ahs Ae
ING STES GE pare or, Re grid nb MO ete Mee nec OR nee: ect SE ly cs eee
ADMIT OTS eootic at Sa es ited ache seer e nee . Aes ea
HG esl SSRI eee tke Te sateen eRe Se ews ee (a ae ere THES Ne iC ome ortaee 12-1
PATONG DN GOmiavctine on noe ccc epalsl sais cree ae ec aeewe | Common.} Common.| Common. | Common.
148. [624] Vireo olivaceus (Linun.). Red-eyed Vireo.* Fig. 23,

April 19 to October 2.
Nest with three eggs of the
This nest was about four

feet high, attached to a limb of a small cedar bush and thickly sur-

rounded by blackberry vines.
This far from shy bird with its persistent song is found absolutely

everywhere in the height of its migration.

one was heard singing September 20, 1903.

It sings as long as it is here:

154

MIGRATION RECORD.

WiG8r See: tasers 1885 | 1885. | 1886. | 1887. | 1892. | 1893.
Observer ........-2-++- [ CPE. B. 1}: CH: B: | pens leg.w. | BMLK. | E.M.K.
First seen............- CS pas ees, oe aa ee 4-97 5-1
IN'OXtISCON' c= ase" seek ES aa Beek ere Rei Shey eae Sere Ian a 1 eee
ReMANO. Oe As eg gs eee eed |e eee Asie ec eee | na ocesthe eee
astiseons. 2..5-i-2s-sse= |actece tease 10-2 |S ihe Sea Saiz 5-22| eee
Abundance........... Abundant. Abuadant. Abundant. WAL Common. | Common.
Moar are ie Sy TS: | 1900. | 1902. 1902. 1903 | 1903.
Observer -2 25. 2.s6e: | Ne Bah NG pbs Mo) Webra: | We Leal Wins. Me | Weel
Firstacen.......-...) 426 | 52 Pir ais need He la |
INiextiseens | then 7. 4 29 5-7 Ne Ieee pee ke | DT oo
Comm GH x. .)26,--525-2- 4-29 5-8 rot el BAe rr ee 4-29 | ere -
Hastise crises esa ae co eh once eo nese eee eR ae re eames co | 9-20
Abundance ........... | Common. | Common. Common. | Common. Abund int. Abundant.

149. [626] Vireo philadelphicus (Cass.). Philadelphia Vireo.

Rare migrant. April 28th to September 28th. The dates are earlier
and later respectively than the hitherto recorded extremes of the Phila-
delphia Vireo’s stay in Indiana. Rare summer resident (B. W. E., ’87).

MIGRATION RECORD.

RT ee eee oR CIOR En Oe Se aE EA ae ncren neh mane OSC | 1885. 1885. 190%.
ODser Vertes cess se ces Jeon ee ee eres eee GoniksBs |. C2HcsB: | W.L.M.
ITS E RC CW oi cs ae es ere Uae Ee ae at eS ARB Mlrass eee 4-28
ING@XTSe ens hee <soh= sae oe a athe oroslase ie: Que sree wire eres He Sen (Seneeeet oral faoce. s5 soc
CLS Tr 11 epee Seer eine ae ee Sa eh oR Bes ea patos Seanad Peri ersoen MBB BER a saeten Secs. 5555
Tete a A eRe a Sich Rate pee OU, Go oe Corsa A he A ane PR | = oe
Wbhundancel.2--t an she. qareero cera eae cranes eee Rare. Rare. Rare.

150. [627] Vireo gilvus (Vieill.). Warbling Vireo.*
Common summer resident. April 21 to October 10. Song April 28,
1903.

MIGRATION RECGRD.

|
WERE coaches pooccan cs | 1835. 1835. 1886. 1887. 1892. 1903.
|

Ofer eee eB. \rormve | CBB. Gg Gow, | apo. | wit
First seen. ...........- | Ps, Olen 4-25 4-28 5-7 4-28
Wext seen 5). -05 65> 2 ORE es Sera 4-27 Jepeedeacnoh, (eben onccbact 4-29
CO WIMMON as. eceesecrrs 4-28 See ysade Sapte [Shee Sey coo CN Sa ene! 4-28
MaShisetuie pose teeta ores waren ones LOS Kp ONE Wee ee Bet eel (RO Palle SR ae Rd Neg So ha
Abwodanee.:...c. <6... AbunG@rn bajesoccses.s c= Common. |-vre este sees Common.

1 t
151. [628] Vireo flavifrons Vieill. Yellow-throated Vireo.*

Common migrant.

the extreme dates are the limits of its residence in the State.

April 16 to May 13; September 1 to October 19;

Perhaps

rare summer resident; iis nest was found in Brown County, May 16,

1897 (V. H. B:).

Song April 29, 1903.

Vireos were found wherever there was undergrowth.

In the fall of 1902 Yellow-throated

MIGRATION RECORD.

Waa eerntech sleet wosa yaeamace maante | 1885. | 1885. 1886. 1887. 1896.
bcervonices 298 ok cee! C.H.B. | C.H.B Boo: | ¢.G.W. | A.W.B
INES IS OCIS las case on moe antoc aetna 4-20 9-12 4-16 4-25 4-20
INGMERGET Foo 252. ice deed cow fatten 4-22 9-15 cS hy 0 ees aaron 59 Besos Ge
ETAT 25 55c ete Dae Cfo pte CRCe BEE Reno Reread anaes! Ia Ae ernes ty hone semen) Peco Sa eT
LSS PSR Ge OOS Bene ane Pele eee 0-13 I ga ae reese eee ieee Sete Sear oe Sl aee
Ja CYT Ea Ce eee oe A Ine a@Q ammo | OOM Imo. 2t Jas toe) ea oeearsa ws lone eels
NEN yest? of tat Oe ane ee eee ee era 1901 1902. 1902. 1903. 1903.

(O) af( Se a hm Bags reece sree ee er Weel Wie OM MWe de eee
birstiROONes coos eee ce ees es 5-6 4-25 9-1 rage Heche ie
ex ona ee Re Me ht oa 4-27 10-5 | Lagt)-xwdeee
CUMING Fee ee ance cas cee Aaa cae gee | Soir PAPE Rete | 1O=1G9 Gillis kcosatiee 3 8| eee et
IBESGURAS Til ye ar Rs ak Ro rn yl [ere eee ! 11 eee 9-29
ASTI AN CC aoeenataniotye cee sense | ae nae veld sees Common. Common. | Common.| Common.

152. [629] Vireo solitarius (Wils.). Blue-headed Vireo.
Rather uncommon migrant. April 28 to May 17. September 16 to 28.

MIGRATION RECORD.

NGp Re ata paaceuansonand 1885. 1885. 1886. 1892. ° | 1895. 1903.
Obsenvierie-c. sss = sine C. H. B. CaHeB: | G.G.W. | H.M.K. | A. BOUS | AW aiieie
First seom...-......-:. 4-28 8 (eee pees aegis ee me ie
Next seen suasses soe 4-30 | QaIB Sl Racoon aise os [omaays tachaawell eeere eee 5-13
Commons sa e- aera leete ssc | meee eae abies Seer (devant o eae or | Suan eost J. goa eee
Tastiseeniz a. aseeerces 5-17 O28 ad) Sato Oo oe Exec Ronen ont aceanaeeas 5-13
Abundance ........... Common. Rares | ise ree ore seen eiianieeaea| Pe nages
| |

158. [631] Vireo noveboracensiz (Gmel.).. White-eyed Vireo. Fig. 24.

Abundant summer resident. April 17 to September 20.

Song April 28, 1903, to September 20, 1903. May 5, 1903, a nest was
nearly completed. It was found along a narrow, little-frequented road,
and was attached on one side to a cedar limb, and to a blackberry
vine on the other. It was about four feet high. On April 11, this nest
contained two Cowbird’s eggs and one of the Vireo (C. G. L.):

Abundant and vociferous in the spring migration. Every thicket is
filled with the jargon of its song.

The date of April 17, 1903, is given on the authority of a Nature Study

Class.
MIGRATION RECORD.
SV Caries cee na ronan 1885. | 1885. | 1886. | 1887. | 1892.
{
| | Sean Bl | 3
Observiera.¢.aeesse oe Pee Eee Cala B eS (CoH B Baw. Bs 1 G.Ge Wig SACs bade
I G.G. W.. | }
MINS RESTING! see ente ae oe aoeen eee 4-21 | eo eemaneene 4-25 4-25 | 5-7
Nembtiseent:.. nace seas cn 4-22 | 4-28 | 4-26
| |
COMMON ers Seo R ae eros BD oti roterar ese eens 5-8 4-30 |. eee
IPPC URS o) We tnnes SAdaC Oona e Eade sod odena cn aas | 9-2 erat Beg Weis APRs. | Sea
ADUNCANCE Pee noses s/s Nae ee Common. | Common. | Common. | Common. | See

137

| | | | ]

SUES Se ae oy eae eee ies | 1898. | 1899. | 1900. | 1903. | 1903.
CTORS a Cire ee he aa eens E.M.K. | N.B.M. | N.B.M. Wis as ii | W.L.M.
rea © ok ae eee Ei eed eee San ere
WextWeGHlat. vnc tensesr oe eee 5-6 | FS wad eens Pane (feng. 2 gia Sans Peon
COMMON? 2 oe cores ea ase esse bee sess aes eRe casters Suetoor aaa Aa29) eset eee
VUGESEM ES CoC AS, Rec serra Re A hte | See Sap cara fo Te eat (ee ee [eet sok Paes | 9-20

AtbingdamGes iu noses. 2s. Seset Wied anata ESS Paha) Re eee /Abundant.|/Abundant.

“See above.

154. [636] MWniotilta varia (Linn.). Black and White Warbler.*

Common migrant and rare summer resident. Considered a common
summer resident in 1886 by C. H. Bollmann. April 7 to October 4. Song
April 28, 1903.

In spring you will find this striped vision only on the trunks of the
larger forest trees. Although you are searching for him and feel sure of
his presence, the actual discovery is always a surprise. This little flake
of sharply contrasted colors makes its appearance so quickly that we
find it difficult to realize that it is not a piece of bark suddenly possessed
of life, but our own dear little Black and White Creeper that is before
us. In Autumn he is more democratic and is often found in lowly
thickets. Is it not because we are sated with discovery, that the thrill
of last spring is not felt when this leader of the band of wood warblers is
espied? Is it not because we have met the timid glance of the rare Cape
May, or the gaudy Magnolia through the interlacing branches, or that
here the Redstart spins his glowing pin-wheel, that the Black and White
Warbler is not again hailed as a distinguished visitor when we see him
in September clinging to the slender stem of the hazel, inspecting its sur-
face or gracefully reaching out for the slow-descending caterpillar?

Yes, we think the reason lies with the observer and not with the
observed; for we are surely not at our best when we slight our tiny
friend ever so little in the greeting. He remains always the most at-
tractive, the most dear of his woodsy clan.

MIGRATION RECORD.

a — —————
POAT i .5 cule ema Osan se bates 1885 1885. 1886 1887 1893.
Pama :
Dureurer£: 2st b oe hea | CHB. | 0.8.8. | GG |G. GW. | Beate
Farge GON te eR es eee ri pe ike (aba Nees PS ay 4-20 4-7
INGOXESCGM: =. co.cecesee osc teesk Seles Patna bee etc ee | 4-18 4-97 ||_ Saee
COITTT TORE Rees eeeseea bes EOL hesecoa ace hesepataccees se free oe eee ae
aSISSEE M0 TA Se cheese talent cred ee ee wena 9-28 9 Sets ete peters i
A uAamee. sacs a ee eens neces ee Common. | Common. | Common. he foeto tea eee
VET) oe eer Oe eae ene Seats Mention coe eee Dare 1901. | 1902. 1902. 1903.

Dyce ores a ata pe mae hart ek wee W.L.M. | W.L.M.| W.L.M. | W. i. My:
|

FES EOSBE MY . 23 ere eee cae easier use Re eee ceees 5-4 4-27 9-1 4-24
Sao etsy ai eae e ee Soe DOSS ESS eoeeetea Eaten atecsses| lpaoacem nance 9-7 4-98
TINTON eeses ee en eee ine eee eee Cee Sere eI see =e Mee essere: 4-28
IDE RS Oh eoaR Rees oSec Saoaere chacermaas saeeceaal lasooaeaa baoe | Geese 10-4 eee Weare
Aiund ances ence sdoe eee ce ene eee aces |] Common Common sGorunane

155. [637] Protonotaria citrea (Bodd.). Prothonotary Warbler.

Rare migrant. ‘Mr. Chauncey Juday reports it from Monroe County,
where a specimen was taken at Harrodsburg, April 26, 1895” (A. W.
Butler). E. M. Kindle reported it May 28, 1892. As nests and eggs of this
species have been taken in other parts of the State at an earlier date
than this, it is possible that the Prothonotary Warbler may be found
here as a rare summer resident.

156. [639] Helmitheros vermivorus (Gmel.). Worm-eating Warbler.

Common migrant and “rather common summer resident” (B. W. E.).
April 20 to August 31. Song May 4, 1902. ‘Prof. W. S. Blatchley took
a nest and six fresh eggs, and one of the Cowbird, near Bloomington,
May 12, 1886. The nest was at the base of a clump of ferns, and was
composed of the leayes of ‘Maiden Hair’ fern. The next day Prof. B. W.
Evermann took a nest from a similar location, containing five of the
owner’s eggs and two of the Cowbird” (A. W. Butler).

Common in the fall of 1903 in the undergrowth along creeks.

MIGRATION RECORD.

WiSHERS theca See eae Satan ets aa a 1885. | 1885. 1886. 1902. 1903.
|
IRCCS Ri acc aaa eg aise OPH. Bi) C.B Be) Ye Bea ow. eo Ww: os Me
ISU SOEM secre rece Me re eeon Pa eae ears 4-20) Wsoesin hae nee 5-1 4-27 4-28
INO MSCON ae Soeeaiies. create ome oe LEU ae ell Ne cree EN 5-4 Ox apr | alehepinee keto
(Goin api snap eae eRe eh ae ere it ta RSH Be Se he ina ee || SO aie Re (a 4-28
2 DEN SUAS SGN Are ioe: Blow Bie Sake San Bll cranes oe | Sater mam cte rau aakil Uicusie « acters troll acts ae ates
SAUNT GOR wetter aye i oetede rcs, ect ereee Common. | Common. | Rare Common. | Common
| j
157. [641] Helminthophila pinus (Linn.). Blue-winged Warbler.*

Abundant migrant. Rare summer resident (C. H. B.—B. W. E.).
April 19 to September 28. Song April 19, 1903.

Orchards and open woods are the favorite haunts of the Blue-winged
Yellow Warbler.

On a bright day after a rainy morning in April, 1908, warblers of this
species were observed to move from one part of the country to another
about three miles away in from six to eight hours. In the morning
they were plentiful in the orchard and clearings south of the city, while
none were to be observed anywhere north of town. In the afternoon
these conditions were reversed, they were common and singing in the
orchards north of town, while they were entirely absent in the places
where they had been seen in the morning. Their movements even for
the shortest distances were always in the same direction, they flew from

limb to limb, from tree to tree, in the same general trend, toward the

north.

MIGRATION RECORD.
MiBaTtie see 1885, 1885, 1886. 1887. | 1902. 1902. 1903.
Observer...... CAH Balle Hia Baten Weer G.G.W. | Wise Wie evi Wa

|

Isis SERN Sopa) CEE lec esup cone 4-27 4-28 | Ee ial ey Se Se 4-19
Next sceniicss | 4 e2Gee aineeaiih ees hes Gace aoes 4-29 Westie ne Pe Manne 4-28
(Oroy aa VO) 1) FoR EN Aideo cece || Sisto Tercera Sei ec tena be BI Ste Se 4-19
Last seen..... Saale. || aera ce: eect ltncttamete sor eey larcloversisteve te QEPRm oT MSs ea eneeraee
Abundance...| Rare Rare Commons s.cse verene Common. | Common. Abundant.

140

158. [642] Helminthophila chrysoptera (Linn.). Golden-winged Warbler.
Very rare migrant. April 27, 1887 (G. G. W.); 28, 1901; May 4, 1886
(GeaGeaw..}:
159. [645] Helminthophila rubricapilla (Wils.). Nashville Warbler.*
“Common in spring, abundant in fall” (C. H. B., 1886). “In Monroe
County it was rather common, April 27 to May 1, 1886 (Evermann,
Blatchley)’ [A. W. Butler]. During the last few years the Nashville
Warbler has been a more rare bird than the above quotations indicate.
One or two records in a migration has been as much as could be hoped
for concerning this species. April 24 to May 11. August 26 to October 19.

MIGRATION RECORD.

|
SFE Ve Pe ee re EM oR ert ng |IRERE! Le. el Regu Co 28 1886.

QWSSEVER s.-0 cee cee fadigctdlena vers Sens iss] Gs BBS] ChB. 9) a eee an

TOTS BETO banana ariaksoiae feo cone se are ssa Sioa 4-95 | 8-265 | 4-07 | 25-5
INOS RSG GC) bnoreaginn Gavan ees bene deat aes cede oe eee 4-26 9-22. pes

COMIN OT Sc ce ccice se ae Winns caceae oe mee Rapa eee aellitetne Papas se | oeeneeceeees | ener ocnat sooo c
AAS UROR TMG oreo eae er he ee A cee 5-11 | 10-10 | 5-1 | | eee
AIS TTL GBI CO eter eels egeaiessieccetsiere erate Ba Ee Common. Abundant. Common|32. 427 -eee
VEE Bee ene ain Go DD een eh oen Ea are ear ee | 1901. 1902. 1903. | 1903.

DWAR TOE nn ne A OCR. F | OW a |W ds NE

MinSt Seen pero eee eee et eee roore 4-29 4-24 4-29 (| siete cee
WWextiseethon crank ten cones co toa aaa saints SSE IROAE cea nee acoeor aes
Cianinitiae aes ee eS Re ee ai el ee es ey siaeas Pod Breer Berens
ISERIES Tait nee es Sea is AAO eae moe no Reno Renn nid Meera ape (Obr mtntienac toy eerkue nese 10-2

|

PAY INGA Clean teekt on setelo cans Sine ae ee Rare. | Rare. Rare. |) “Rare:

160. [646] Helminthophila celata (Say). Orange-crowned Warbler.

Very rare migrant. One record; May 4, 1885 (C. H. B.).
161. [647] Helminthophila peregrina (Wils.). Tennessee Warbler.*

“Not common in spring, abundant in fall” (C. H. B., 1886). April 26
to May 16. August 30 to October 17. “At Bloomington, both Profs.
Blatchley and Evyermann thought it less numerous than the Nashville

Warbler” (A. W. Butler). Decidedly the reverse is the case now. One

141

may observe in spring a hundred of the present species to one of the
Nashville Warbler, and in fall a thousand. The Tennessee Warblers, in
the latter season, literally fill all the trees, whether the neatly-trimmed
maples along the city streets or the magnificent oaks of the forest. The
underbrush is alive with them, they are in the weeds, in briars, and in
the stubble. Swamp and hilltop, cultivated field and forest, alike, are
animated by the hordes of Tennessee Warblers. They are everywhere.

MIGRATION RECORD.

| |
A EW cam Becoceaey Sarrictan | 1885. | 1885. 1886. | 1890. | 1900. | 1903. 1903.

| | |
Observer........... | C.H.B.| C.H.B.-| C.H.B | A.W.B/N.B.M.|W.L.M.| W.L.M.

First seen ......... 4-26 | 4-30 0 Or Sean 2 at | eC es Paes, en Pee
Nex tseens. 2-22... 4-30 | fen Seer ee | LR sa Oper | ee eee | EE al ee
Commons !.5) 2-22: “Sod leaoe Ey Oe eee Fes See see termes beg cetera EE pe
Last seen's...2.2--* / 5-14 10-7 | shicctos sews 5-10 | 5-12 5-16 | 102

Abundance........ | Rare. ‘Abundant. Rare. ‘Common Se a Aateas | Rare. Abundant.

162. [648a] Compsothlypis americana usnee Brewster. Northern Parula
Warbler.
Rare migrant.
In accordance with A. W. Butler’s precedent, birds from Monroe
County are referred to this subspecies.

MIGRATION RECORD.

“DOES AS Ree a eT IG = PORE Sen Ta re ine aN wre a aoe 1885. 1886
Ole imine iter asa ste een cn tre cei e oR aE pee eae | C.H.B | ee se Ww
PRET RURE GH aan. Sea Soe Soca a ee Sa. whee ena Mee Seance oso 4-21 4-24
sPE3 SEEGERS hey Se re gee a a ena ag NE eee | a a 4-27
RII OMe tee ee a ee BAL a Sees ort, Oe gk a ee BE os eae fc wian ee cecaviees|ooneeneerereee
CT SIEGE a Oe patios Sei te PORE ae deere anne a | vestosirty ea sas ewer rea
Abundances <<. 22-25. Fics ht Sot PENS Te an RE at Ce RE ee | Rare. | Rare.

163. [650] Dendroica tigrina (Gmel.). Cape May Warbler.
Rather rare migrant. April 22 to May 11. September 27 to October T.
In the fall of 1903, the writer observed this species and the Tennes-

142

see Warbler puncturing grapes.

They thrust their bills into the grapes

and after poking around inside a little lifted their heads and acted as if

drinking.
became worthless.

the arbor under observation.

After being punctured, the grapes, of course, shrivelled and
Searcely a grape, and not a cluster were missed in
The damage, however, was not great, as

the birds did not begin their depredations until after the owners had

harvested as much of the crop as they desired.

The males arrive and

depart earlier than the females.

MIGRATION RECORD.

l
SV GRU oe ees ce ciescioe 1885 1885. 1885. 1886 1899. 1903.
| |
Observer .....-..----. C.1.B | Ck. B. | c. a B. 1G: 2 | vB, MWe
Fixst seen ..:. -+-22 74-22 psn | 9-87 £0 |e
|
Next seen: 5-252: 2.200. ; 4-23 4-30 2] Ba 2 | he Ake eter oone Sate ee
} |
Common ..-56->2-=.-5 | EP sey ee 5s. 4 — | oo heteent eck |e
aseecen. .. ots eo ening 5-11 7 | 55 | 58 | 999
|
Abundance ..-....--- | Rare Rare. Rare: |) Rare: aston Rare
bol (Weer Sire EAS a ees = | |
164. [652] Dendroica wstiva (Gmel.). Yellow Warbler.*

Abundant summer resident.

Song April 26, 1903;
May 30, 19903.

mating April 27.

April 12 to August 24.
Nest and eggs May 4, 1902.

Nest with four, well-incubated eggs, in the top fork of a

small plum tree about 20 feet from the ground (C. G. L.).

Very common in orchards; a persistent songster.
The earliest record for the State is April 4, 1894 (KE. M. K.), from

Brown County.

MIGRATION RECORD.
NAT ne Ae OR Reet ot Pieead Fe Meio oe 185. 1885. 1886 | 1887 | 1892,

ee B. W.E.
ODPSOLRET Eon one ee eee Goo bet bs G2HeB CSHSBe G.G. W. ASBatis

| G.G. W.
LBHSR GT ene co dsouisdeuccoe uSanad| AOD eNews Sater 4-22 4-25 4-30
Nextscenciss so sseree eae theese Se ae re Ra ec } 7 a eel MEER set lari aise Ss

|
Gommon) -4e.6. aac ( Fo Seed Coit ao ere el En RPT RE! Re os
LLSEA EE Ie 3 Sea cee ee ere ee ae tes hae 8-24}
Rare

DUNG CN Os. 22 eas ees Abundant Abundant.)

143

Wese a e eee ee | 1993. | 1899. 01. 1902. 1903.
(CHUTE RES Belece daaaet Moree CURSE Gmc Be MERSIN So ce |W ae Pe NV de Mla) Wee, Tire Mie
) DISUSED De Hae aceon enema Sone 4-26 4-29 tae 4-19 4-12
INES IEE CMs. ct peel ole Nsiapecatetaicine sifltsns Force Jia Coaching Me mieae Aeease 4-23 4-24,
Mora nests fh keene > ee 426 [Glas] elena 4-27 4-27
NAR SEE Ni tie eee talon acta teal oes ciemets mice aw > se ciei sacs eeemise cits + o-all ese oe.eicvs eaillbaee wemecs we
PANS ULL. OL EIN Citra arctan nyse nee ec ee | Common. |} Common.})............; Common. |Abundant.

165. [654] Dendroica cerulescens (Gmel.). Black-throated Blue Warbler.
Rather uncommon migrant. April 30 to May 13. September 1 to
October 4.

MIGRATION RECORD.

WGN nc cticieae Be eee ee 1885 | 1885, 1886. | 1887 1902. 1903
Obrenvensicoc)cccce2s2 | CHB. | C.H.B..| GG. Ww. | GaiGaWee|) Welle Me Wiese M
First seen............. 4-30 Qe cole Abstr” Seb 9-1 4-30
INGxiRGen 20 sek nea Dem ara cae ayeee akin sas nieee | Hose Da28 i, Spits chasse as cee
Commons. 0280 o: = = ier entered at sets Prete aote Ml tee eso ben rome Sesheocaonoe
HT ae | ES Ea A petal ae Doms eer eds eres | 10-4 | 542
Abundance ...... woos] Common. PUAN Grae acta. accen | once mares oe | Rare. | Rare.

166. [655] Dendroica coronata (Linn.). Myrtle Warbler.*

Common migrant and not rare winter resident. September 24 to
May 13. First in full plumage March 25, 1903. In winter this species
seems to prefer certain restricted localities; most of the individuals that
have been seen here in winter have been found in a dense pine and cedar
grove, but in the winter of 1902-1903, some were seen at two other places—
an open forest near a pond and an old orchard.

Recorded as wintering in 1882-5; 1884-5; 1885-6; 1886-7; 1891-2; 1892-3;
1899-1900; 1900-01; 1902-3.

The record of the appearance of individuals in different stages of
plumage for a year is as follows: those seen at intervals through January,
February and part of March were in the usual winter dress. On the
tenth of March (1903) the first change was noted. A single Yellowrump

144

was found in some bushes along a street in town. The side-spots were
large and brilliant as was also the rump. The back had the sharply
defined black and gray streaking, but the head and breast were as in
winter. March 21, a specimen in winter plumage was seen; March 23,
two individuals, one in full plumage with the exception of the crown-
spdt which was somewhat obscured by dark tips to the feathers, the
other in the usual autumnal and winter garb. March 25, four Myrtle
Warblers were seen, and of these, one had the winter plumage, two had
yellow crown and rump but no side-spots. and one was brilliant in a new
and complete spring suit. March 27, one with winter colors; March 30,
one in complete and one in winter plumage; April 1, two like the last.
April 3, three specimens with all the spots showing but only dimly on the
sides and crown. After April 3 all mentioned are in full plumage unless
otherwise stated. April 5, two, one in winter dress; April 8, four, one
in winter plumage; April 11, four; April 12, twelve; April 14, three, two of
which were clothed as in winter; April 15, four; April 19, six, one looking
just as he did in Janvary, and he was the last one observed in this
plumage, although of twenty-one seen on April 28, two were still in
transition stages of plumage. Thus fifty days elapsed between the first
and last observed changes in plumage, and, half as many days passed
between the appearance of summer dress and the vanishing of winter
garb.

In the fall the first yellowrumps were seen. on October 12 (1902). Of
thirty individuals, one had the sides yellow, while all of the others had
already assumed the sombre shades of winter plumage. October 26,
fourteen of these birds were observed and one was still in nearly perfect
summer condition, the crown and sides being only slightly dusted with
darker. <All others seen during the remainder of the year were in ordi-
nary winter plumage. From these observations it may be seen that,
although about eight months are consumed in the change from winter,
through summer, back to winter plumage again, by the species as a
whole, yet it is pessible that some individuals may complete this cycle
of changes in six months.

On December 14, 1902, a Myrtle Warbler was seen flying in somewhat
wide sweeps, like a flycatcher, but, hovering, he gleaned from the trees,

fences and the ground. and not from the air.

MIGRATION RECORD.

AY COIL, Pe ie etree 188? 1884. 1885. 1885. 1885. 1887

% te Sk In a (ee eee ers Nose
Gprerver. Vicor (Sets CH) oe Be O.H. B. | Crk. B. aM
IGrst SOON was seca ca st | 2-10 3-21 41-31 £4-25 9-24 2-
AN [crcl ret ic1 Olea ete coud sone lid igen Cea Pee ee aie as 4-17 4-30 9-25
Genmous. cok cette r ee eeettieee eee ceee 5-2 5-8 OS en absleeracar wea
SSCP pees ae ot eae mae | 5-11 5-13 | 5-4
AUD UC Censor eee ir OOMUIMON 0) teem e sie Abundant./Abundart./Abundant.) Common.
MARI e sen anime eat (LBOR: 1900, 1901. 1902. 1902. 1903.

Rs | + y ; W. L. M. i / y ]
Ohsenviers comes cces tA. Ba U N.B.M. CHE W.L.M W.L.M. | W.L. M.
HVINBLEE SGM ts oacxtase tte OT Ee ek De co siete. Come BW | aoe a es 3-23 HOS Z ect Wes, eee
INGRILIES ENE Eerie Gao ee lin acutees tiinatece 3-38 LOSZG lt eheseeeeess
CoMmlonsne ae Gaal ence ees HED Oat, aes 10-12 4-12
Last seen . | 4-29 5-1 ALi pair resales ts thei | 5-8

|
Abundance ...........| Common. Common. | Common.; Common.) Common.

167. [657]
Rather common migrant.

Dendroica maculosa (Gmel.). Magnolia Warbler.*
May 5 to 24.

August 31 to October 4.

In

woods with undergrowth, you will find this warbler spying upon you from

the lower limbs of the maples and beeches, or peeping through the net-

work of leaves and branches of the thickets.

He always has the attitude

of peering. His black spectacles set off with white dots only enhance
this expression.
Females were not seen until May 8, 1885.
MIGRATION RECORD.
Gai D st cer condense aio wots 1885. 1885. 1886. 1887. 1889, 1902.
OGSGr VOM = soe cee C.H.B Cale Bey |G Gra GaGe Wee NE Bev W.L.M
PUMA TI SCCM: actaarce arin. 5-5 8-31 5-8 5-5 5-10 9-1
IN@XEROGN ci. decane ar 5-8 | 9-6 5-14 Heya epee ots alaceal lt cteacsterstensre a 9-7
|
(COMMON erehe tate ce alive carers ! (1 ead ee ces] hone eee Itorettacste\stouetetat 9-28
HES tSO CIN stcraabe sit wart. 5-24 9-19 SI EE le ot once Reel Me ae oan Se 10-4
Abundance ........... (Chyrsbesiopaigt! (Ckedentia parece ceacmenoallogosoueaaes Rare Common

10—A. or Science, 704.

146

168. [658] Dendroica cerulea (Wils.). Cerulean Warbler.
Common migrant; not common summer resident (G. G. W.—N. B. M.).
The males precede the females in migration.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Wismicece es Taka ee eee Stee, eee | 1885 | 1885, | 1886 | 1887.
AR arenes 5, AN J ch eee C.H.B. | ¢.H.B. | ae | g.6.w
JIS Aas ae ey irae ema npr Nage WM 24-28 5-9 | 4-93 4-27
MNerxibike Mis tet eet osetia nea ae ate eee 5-4 5-10 4-24 4-28
(COMTI Ore Stipes ood see Sas Heeler eee eheralllis Sece cleeeeeeral| e ove's'Ila(o.oiu 2 3 sie Sait eo ee
SGI os ee Oe ea Re Deter RCP pon 2ST Re fee Shp ge Mee Se (ph aceeenal cee eee
FAD UN Gain CO onesies isto eee SR A EE Common. Common.| Common.| Common.
GOT) ee SS ot REE, ney eI Pee test ae etl eed OOD: 1900. | 1901. 1903.
Olseavion xc cee ee heat ee ee A.B.U. | N.B.M. | W.L. M. | W. DL. M.
reise Ie ccs ene one eee ee Re OE r= | ese) ica = a bens 4-28
Next Seen. jc peacdeu aimee acer aa Bn ese ee 5-7 | Lana ecnitie see al | Gee eestec lake sien Oe Eee
ComMMO ya. 3 <o.21s solace nas ala secre nn ote ae StS a eased oh aa | Remo ae coeel | emer eee tee Ree
WiaASb (SCCM se ratte seat caters Siew Set ole wc Ae a Recionl [Sales Setien oe a] soto tahcernal| heh Rn ater | eee
FAD UT WAC OA eee choles oe eee aoe Ie ae ae ee ae ee Common. | Common. | Common.

169. (659) Dendroica pensylvanica (Linn.). Chestnut-sided Warbler.
Rather common migrant. April 21 to May 10. August 28 to September
15.
The first migrants are males.

MIGRATION RECORD.

oars ise ae kes a 1885. | 1885. | 1885. | 1886. | 1892. | 1901. | 1902. | 1903.
Observer............./.H.B.| ©. H.B.| c.4.B.|¢-@-W-|4 3.ulc.n 5. WaM.bWLee.
First seen........... | ¢421 | 24-28 8-28 | 5-4 57 | 499 | 55 | 57

IN Gai SGN canoe Sebcece | 4-28 4-30. | 8-29 Bote boop eee sieie seinen lev ete | eee
Common seine [Rew oda lestenigedaoss | fs Food ea Ney aie FS ciceer aaa Nereis | bison Sa} cee
Last seen ......... a races (elu leseeren ci aa be eae IEeoatses ie eats |

Abundance........- Common Common Common Common ........|........|-...---- Rare.
| |

147

170. [660] Dendroica castanea (Wils.). Bay-breasted Warbler.

Rather rare migrant. April 29 to May 13. September 18 to October
10. The limiting dates each extend the recorded period of its stay in
Indiana one day.

MIGRATION RECORD.

nL CES Le pa cea aa A See a 1885. 1886. | 1903. 1903.
item calatn Cae ne eS rae eBy |B YB: | wom.) WoL. M.
First seen ................ pies ge treason; Bat: 9-18 | 5-4 : a ae Perret:
Mee nee Hiroe: set sit ohias oe Sora ve sen aateate ait : OS sent -o eee Cee
COIN GTi ee ricci ea ers Nadas ce ye ia Ske 10-3 OA ean | fee SeGeaS) -R ab Stes
[Ae ou eee: Sa 2 Retiree nee Dee ee ie Peete 10-10 io eel oe E 10-3
PA TG EEG SAO OP eis oS se see eee nate Abundant. Rare. | Rare. Rare.

|

171. [661] Dendroica striata (Forst.). Black-poll Warbler.

Rather rare migrant. April 28 to May 19. September 18 to October
26.

The last date for the species in 1885, May 19, was the date of arrival
of the females. October 26, is the latest record for this State. The last
one taken in 1903 was a female.

MIGRATION RECORD.

TY ee an aS att ey eee pi re Pema | 1885. 1885. 1902. 1903.
Observers. ois cscs scwtse os cic eaceie sae otes pu ebe Geb Bre pC. HeoB = h Wis Li. Me he Wen ne Me
First seen ........ Fee pee eas | 4-28 9-18 | SOPH SIR ACE 1 fae ol :
INGXISOG Re ways sc dson sega Sot se eae eon eas | 5-13 9-19 | Ese dose weet ease ace ees
OMINOUS mine ata B oan ator se eae cone SOR OONS ees eee ONS | Lar Dn (ONS ARe a rretal I cite ott tions
MAS PSBOD te 52 eet A oc ss Se cme we OE 5-19 | 10-12 10-26 5-13
Abundance: ...2 -...08.0- pee Scie some Shee Rare. (Abundant.| Rare. Rare.

172. [662] Dendroica blackburniex (Gmel.). Blackburnian Warbler.
Rather rare migrant. April 21 to May 14. August 27 to October 10.

148

MIGRATION RECORD.

MIG AT aa tciaisin eines eee ete ees meee 1885. 1885. | 1885. | 1886.
Observer: vss cous soctae aalee ane ea ee | Cc. H.B C.H.B C.H.B B. W.E
INS LASC OM Soccer eee qaaein cae ee a eer f4-21 £5-13 8-27 4-27
INGmtis een: sce ceca nconnie eee neal tee ee 5-2 5-14 8230". 3| cence
CLOSTAS SSE) s Uae ge ton ae rae ear oe re ey seer are Sl pecan rt eR toe Mey er lia Te
LiasteSCON act cence: sere eee smac oR aeee 5-14 nlf 3) 10510! lee
JX UG EVO C rate Daas Cat era SURE Gao Gat natn SaRee | Common. | Common | Rare Rare
MME AT aase sora sass selene Sl aes eo ksee Seca eee 1892. | 1901. 1902. 1903.
Opsenviers:cte 2 stank chor She Goce was] ASB. ULS WoL. Me} OW: Le. Mo Weenie
WITSU:SCOD. +o see iceh Gel oe eee eee a ene 5-7 5-7 9-1 4-28
ING tS OOD Tesi: etars Shaks Soe ATES abe me Pe a eae ae | Eee |
COMMON sesecculat rages nace th rea eoene dee ee ee SOR ae te all Dee ee el eee | ee
TAS TSE ONG Ss 5 Reece oepcewineieladece ete eas Oa a Ree eal te ee a oe | hese
PAD UG MICO y 34 8 aciaj teens ceetiaale steer See a OAR eee Rare Rare Rare.

173. [663a] Dendroica dominica albilora Ridgw. Sycamore Warbler.*

Common migrant; not uncommon summer resident (B. W. E., ’87).°
April 12 to October 9.

Song and mating April 12, 1903.

On September 18, 1902, it seemed that every shade tree in town con-
tained five or six of these birds; sometimes they descended and fed for
a short time in the lawns. Some were also seen feeding upon ragweeds.

MIGRATION RECORD.

eee EN SNR Se SO 1985. | 1885. isss. | 1892, | 1908,
Opsengen es soe: | C.H.B. | c.H.B. | BYE | ewok. | B.wWeK
RINSE SON sree seerae se oe eee | LA eset inten earns Hee 4-14 4-21 4-16
IN@XIGEEOM Ake h nccetinen sera (Beran Seen DORs 1 (ea leaeoneageetas | 2 a
Common 3-25-27 o shee nee ee |Soacmic Sbkob leds ower obo 4-27 esac | SSne set
rastiSe GR. = 251. ccnrss Gace cnmataeeaee | 5-16 = Doman ites ca ate lowe ee
PAID UN Cae Vejen coer eee Common.| Rare. itera ase I Fe rcictarapeeheecrl | eee ieauiaee

149

Ranier te! ste arise a open, in peaars oleic Sele 1901. | 1902. | MEU lies RABE
DERGINIC TS aes eRe SOMO ees Soe eae ee W.L.M.| W.L.M.| W.L.M. | W.L.M.
TTI AEE GI i de Da REe CECE OR eae are ETERS wees 5-5 Cy sell tae Riera Fe 4-12
Nig sthincin Seve gnogne doe nee Daemacece re accoen! EEDeereacen ae 4-27 ees 4-19
MOOMYO NANTES ete ee ease ns ok oe ee eloun.s Nae clos stag bias see lei oes 423 | 928 4-28
IL ORGS EOS teen Rep eee eiter DOO ence DISCO Been NESS mre arerkd fc He anaes ee TEC Me MD (Soret Stipes Sk
JN] aTTOnG Ee [ake ager el ER CA IC SORE AE CIO OCs IA See | Common. | Common. | Common. | Common.

174. [667] Dendroica virens (Gmel.). Black-throated Green Warbler.*

Abundant migrant. April 18 to May 16. September 1 to October 17.
These dates indicate a longer stay in this county than has heretofore
been recorded for the State.

In spring this species is nearly confined to the woods, in fall it is
found everywhere.

The males arrive and depart earlier than the females.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Weciriatartn Geng ot cosk 1885. | 1885. 1885, 1886. 1887. | 1892.

| G.@. W.
ObRervEm ss 5) yee .s Cole Bee -G2He B.C, Bo CBB. | GG: Wo: E.M-K.

B.W. E:

BIrstReen. oe. vase. 44-20 5-5 od FS fee = EE) BH 25 pe a ae mateoades
INextiseen) (25 .0s5 04: 4-2e pile eto-9 9-12 4-22 BODE wee seeaeees
Comition «5.04.25 3: Pp eee oe OTB he rd UES Je, co conih so: 2 sees
WastisGen ss. .se etek 5-18 5-14 10-17 5-4 | 5-7 57
Abundance............ Abundant. Avmidunte | Abundant, CORNING) Tidy coe Rea ee earner Cie
Vio batten cckece eee Ee, Secoreaem © Seer | 1901. - 1902, .| ~~ 1902. - 1903. | 1903:
ODserpers x.sheore cota seoe cette W.L.M. | W.L Mes i= Wis. Me | Week... |= Wisirs Mis
THIS SLC gl ee ae ae earner i metas ae a iS ae CS aS ey 4 a aoe
AGEs ‘Me GM area cfs Sarna Norse oe setts oecie PRE eee SNR Bore 9-7 joo (ASQBN | [ec eee sage
Tt toe aan a ae Saas Tete ie Ts a an eae {Rael one ome
HiASUBEEN Moe mia te sce etesas eet 5-7 5-4 10-5 5-16 10-2
POTN DUCE ae ese eer en ae ee Common. | Common. | Common. Abundant.|............

150

175.

[671]
Rare migrant.

Dendroica vigorsii (Aud. ).
April 23-26.

Pine Warbler.

September (-29.

MIGRATION RECORD.
We ane este smtne- nyapacea tetas tees: 1885, 1885. 1886. 1902. 1903.
Observerct te nares oes usee sans C3HS iB: C.H.B WS: -B. |) W-.Mir |" Weal Me

INeMINSEO I, i872 sae tere eerie ae ee

COTMVOTIE fore salle erro ieee ae ene |e ene eee ots ee tet onan oe
TETSU erat ne eee on he Pe eg a (ae ae ee 9-7 9-29
Abu dan Gessao-eeeews. eee eee Rare Rare te thls seoceesaeee Rare Rare

176. [672]

Common migrant.

Palm Warbler.*
April 25 to May 18. September 22-27.
1886 but usually a common migrant” (C. H. B., ’86).

Dendroica palmarum (Gmel. ).
“Rare ip

Found in orchards and open woods.
The males appear to migrate slightly in advance of the females.

MIGRATION RECORD.
SUS) oS AOE og MORIA oy Bnet Bd oF ere Soe ae ees ASS5 ete a 1885s 1885. 1886.
|
| OL HeSB:

ODSSLWeIIee te) hte Oe oe eee eee C.H. B. CoH. B CaHe Bs W.S.B:

| GiGk We
UNS tS GOOLE. 4 oo ree hk eee ee Se ee el dees IDEDEY 9) 9-22 4 24
INiemiteSeonessce aso on Sent osm hee See 4-25 tS) eae ence Maley oo 4-26
(Gomi Onieere A a2 sone ne eo ee ae 5-3 5s eel WR Ge MRR We ie me or
IRDStSGOMenr Rete Tree acne tee gach eeoaee | 5-13 5-13 9-27 5-6
IApMM Gan Ge stuns css ace ceo eaeee aoa Common. | Common. | Not Common Rare
Weare: 1887. 1902. 1903.

QODSER VET eek ce cecsicic nd eerste oho ondacet te eee tie rateycteoran epee tbeeen|
DU tog ict S12) 0 CR Rp oe Sng ORO 10 te ones ae eee oe eee Ret an ieee
IED: tei o0 | Oe on et ree nt tee IA See GSS oe cel aoa ac Sc Oe See cL: Sc
Common
MASSES EN? Wire roctreteeae: sa sales ere MRT ose eT

ATIMM ANCE wfacteas sae teen te rare ft ae ees eee Blea ote Besser ite

Rare. Common.

151

177. [673] Dendroica discolor (Vieill.). Prairie Warbler.

Rare migrant. April 26 to May 16. Song May 12 and 16, 1903.

Has always been found in deeply-thicketed woods.

MIGRATION RECORD.
Sites alias renee tae Shere aie Panga ons Ieee cee cue ee Sake ore bce teas Gs 1883. 1900. 1903.
! |

ESE VEU cr iyercestacr nea cies ace sheie ae, Oona thee nf Fain Ge eines mente Pa C.H.B N. B. M Wie i Me
EEUBSIRS EER oy... Sei tier eae ieee a eicve te clans ies sieus ciuavotsta «. Secs 4-26 Yo 5-12
LUCSRUE ROE Goa aaaucn Beliar eeteret abo Heo Om ROE Or eee oan Renee ieee anc ee eee aise 5-16
CU ESI EEN OTR eee sete sia oa oe, lie eens PAGS eas CEG are er Tae Soe wll inteyalos Siaje, whet ss Pee RE Pic iana [steers thea eerer
SUES GTM tee er eee alcaateteees Io aretors & teres vlonerauek Gra teehee ee aera MS Aatertelads Sell emcee etic caren VR etait dee tote
PIMENTEL GCG. Seer hak Chea celts te b siaina an ta tines barr cae ce aoe Ae aan IRE Tend fee Age eea ae Rare
178. [674] Seturus aurocapillus (Linn.). Oven-bird.

Common summer resident. April 19 to October 12.

ant (C. H. B., 1886).

Formerly abund-

MIGRATION RECORD.
‘ol Se RE ee St te I na | 1885 1885. | 1886. 1901.
URC SSCT ade Ieee gs ay GH BO | Chat Bt {Cal BS | Wo Me
ET SIRS CEMA Aaa tee eC en een rae ee Fin 7 Le ak | Ree ae chr 4-22 5-7
INGRINRGE Neo as ehcp cere s aon one muted secs tee BaD) erst week ene se NS Tee eee ere eo te
(COTATI QRS ocean One AiR eee oRIa oteeeas cS ges beeen a ce deat es eae A A) aa ae A oe
bE SIU Sie ne Rene tine iy SO on in Pee Rete uesttc ee vantage | NO-Seren Reece wench lost te cece ee
ALOT TU IEY NC pipineies eects herd ie cna ae or etic eeric ge Abundant.|/Abundant.| Common. | Common.
|
|
Bncaeeoent eens REA yg alas neta a St 1902. 1902. 1903. | 1903.
|
| |
MIDAGEVETS Cie than tana Hater terns satat Wil. Ms We Ms |W. GoM.) Wb: M
its tree etm aC Bence aes ate ea ences ASO) esta lade eee: \etekd OR pa ery ose 1
ANID EFS ox ee eerie Oe Ree Rte, OS. atte lami meee eee ose om oad cgee ea rie Pie
(Ciaranartoh ives tds Reese h rh pe ahs Sinn tere a Scie ai onl eA Ror ARR | 2 ee OR [rete ae et TA oe ea
IE EISIRSTOHS geek ORGS ote RRC GH RO cael Ce IGE OEM leo Renee HOZAISS -BPatee es 8 9-20
Fa) STUNG FOL ETO eter, 4 Vt ee eee Se eh REIS pe Common.| Common.| Common.| Common.

|

179. [675) Seturus noveboracensis (Gmel.). Water-Thrush.
Common migrant. March 27 to May 5. September 14 to 18. Song
April 12, 1903.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Me aircecra ce eee 1885. | 1885. | 1886. | 1887. 1900. | 1902. 1903.
Observers so-esecee (ESB seers He Baa ret xe w. GG: W.| N.. Bo M.| Wi. LeMeiWioobe avis
Rinsbiseen) snc st 4-3 9-14 4-17 4-11 Sls Sosa 4-12
Next seen ....... fe eo lee ee 4-03°°| 4512 | 5-5 | 4 eee
Commons 2ease sae 4-5 | Faster es. eer al i ae aSance hoe soeenal ha stren Sane | -4-28
Last seen Ai | ee cea ales ieee | $5 |
Abundanee........... \bundant. Common Common tachi hese a Sas Common |Common

180. [675a | Sefurus noveboracensis notabilis (Ridgw. ). Grinnell’s Water-
Thrush.

Rare migrant. A specimen taken April 23, 1886, by G. G. Williamson
is referred to this form. Probably Grinnell’s Water-Thrush will be found
to be as numerous as the last when more specimens are obtained for
exact identification. The differences are rather slight and more relative
than absolute, and as the birds seem to vary considerably, it is no
wonder that there has been no distinction made between the two forms
in the migration records.

A specimen of this Water-Thrush taken at Indianapolis, May 14,
1875 (D. S. Jordan), shows a variation in a generic character. All parts of
definitions of the genus Seiurus and of keys referring to the tail
‘feathers are substantially as the following from Ridgway (1902): ‘Inner
webs of lateral rectrices without white terminal spot.’ The individual
under consideration has distinctly marked, white, terminal spots on the
first and second outer rectrices of the right side, and slight indications

of spots on the two opposite, outermost tail feathers.

18l. [676] Setiurus motacilla (Vieill.). Louisiana Water-Thrush.

Rather common summer resident. March to September 1.

Song April 12, 1903. May 10, 1903, nest and six eggs, among rocks
and roots above the mouth of a cave (C. G. L.). June 3, 1901, nest of
leaves, grass-lined, under an overhanging ledge (at the same place). It
contained six young (W. L. H.).

All the tangled ravines and cascaded cave outlets ring with the

striking song of the- Louisiana Water-Thrush in April and early May.

an ae eee

1535

A specimen labeled, Bloomington, March, 1885, Foster Hight, is in the

University collection.

once before (Mareh 30, °96—Sedan), but such dates are rare.

MIGRATION RECORD.

It has been recorded as early in Indiana at least

MSE, sec tule ee cae eS 1885. 1886. 1901. | 1902 | 1902. 1903.

G. G. W. |
Migserwer ctoccctanns ce: Calis pe oe We Dealer |e Wiedlie Me) Win lie Mio |> Wee Me
Pah es hisstetch # leh Petey as ieee 4-18 4-4 4-12 COSTES Fae hs erties Ge 4-5
NGM EISE CDi Sacsece cate 4-19 (FU) Sy eeheosertieerioe 4-20 4-7
WomiinOnns ser sess shes 4-25 TOPE snd eRe REN OoRREN QS ER ie nee ee ae Se aoe See es
eR G See Tite ee Cmte, eee [Pe teed x Oey RIA Rog em Ne helo Sa | i le Shilgeemee eases
AD WING AN Celso i sctensek Common. | Common. |............ Common. Common. | Common.
182. [677] Geothlypis formosa (Wils.). Kentucky Warbler.

Common summer resident.
Song May 3, 19038.

April 13 to August 26.

“They were found breeding near Bloomington, May

6, 1886 (Hvermann), where young were noted just out of the nest, June
4, 1886 (Blatchley)” [A. W. B.].
An inhabitant of dense, moist thickets.

MIGRATION RECORD.
NEGETIE Lae ae nods CORDA e CCE anc Baer tactts 1885. 1885. 1886. 1887.
ObRarwetwen tects rena Cie eer toe neo ons Calis Cais Pe a G. G. W.
JATTASI 6 GRE TROIS Sern) 8%, Geeneiaee SS. UR yrs aan Oer ieee tna eee 5-2 4-17 5-7
ING SHISC Oo eee eine nenaiond as tote tet amesarae doen [ce terse amet 5-16 ED 7 actin | el anne
(SOmTIMO eee ee ventnerrat arr ie eon cte Meisel hacia vaches ac site [eioccaisie towed la asieie wide ok [ats coq mnster
IL AGLI eae aaa s PRE OR Sa en een esos SEO TAM erate cohen lncee eee, os el omelets
PAN AMIEL ATI Crier tia stiearad ote cee ue ear rie os Common.| Common. | Common. |............
Wiealrapmases nichts aetna ae ae a ecran eartins cate enlen ee 1892. 1899. 1902. 1903.
ODECrVOricee eastern ke oe ae aeration seas AGB U) N. B. M W.L.M.| W.L.M
HIS US. COU Me ris, seam bh Sear ten a sno oa ees 5-7 4-13 4-24 4-28
ISI GET AGS Nh tS Hechee nCIGSGrabce Ol oc GIS GPy ar oR eR | Sete 4-15 4-27 5-3
OG A NOT mae areas ea sae aha iy a ee ee || 2 SoA ee GME SBE ier eee ep are 5-13
IDPH RINT 5 PRE ore ORTCORe Con Goo bn Gea ont | IO eironciny Gene niaoned peace esr h. IBSeenne arta
PAIGE C OMRIne once ee cates aka ene ne wa wero eae hehe cine Rare @ontmons| cases ence

154

183. [678] Geothlypis agilis (Wils.). Connecticut Warbler.

Rare migrant (C. EH. B., °86—B: W.E., ’?87). <Aprill-2% and Atay:
1886 (B. W. E.). May 18,1885 (C. HL. B.).

184. [679] Geothlypis philadelphia (Wils.). Mourning Warbler.

Rare migrant. Seen on the 16th, 17th, and 27th of May, 1885, by
C. H. Bollmann.

185. [681] Geothlypis trichas (Linn.). Maryland Yellow-throat.

Abundant summer resident. April 20 to October 19.

Song April 28 to September 20, 1903. May 29, 1901, five young with
pin-feathers were found in an arched nest in a bunch of dry grass.
June 12, 1908, four young about four or five days old were found in a
clump of grass about six inches above the ground (C. G. L.).

MIGRATION RECORD.

WiGRTG. cams estes 1885. | 1885. 1885. 1885. 1887. 1892. | 1893.
Observer ...... c.u.B. | CHB. | c.u.B. | BW. Eg. ¢.W./ 5. MK.) eek
Hirstiseen sesale eee: eee |e Sel | 4-28 4-25 4-25 5- 4-30
Nextseen ..... |.-.0.....5. | 421 |. 4-20 | 4-98 497 |:2,.. 2
Common peer aslo eee 5-5 | O-Oh eee ne See ane acne, |e oe eee
Last seen....... | OEMS cs le cree cre orcyenscea ete ye ste | rans) al- eee ee EeSeeeres | eee | een
Abundanee..... ‘Abundant Abundant. Abundant Abundant. ayeea wate | | ee er
MG as a. et cei Panter | 1899. | 1900. 1902. 1902. | 1903. 1903.
Observenecssne- NBM: | WiaB. Me WM) Wil. Mie Wis reise | Wiese
Winst:seenias.<. shes... 4-29 4-24 | 4-24 See A an 4-24 le Se eee
INextiseend. erent seen oer 5-5 | 4-25 Sei eiso Sees 4-98): oeee eee
Common ent cance oe ece ater eee se eee DA Teal meee akeccaises 4-28

Last seen ......... taal Monae onto eae Bean | Ree sees eS | eb Bs eee oo nk Be 9-24
Abundance. ssc sc | Geshe ee Common. Abundant,|Abundant.|Abundant. Abundant,

186. [683] Icteria virens (Linn.). Yellow-breasted Chat.

Abundant summer resident. April 24 to September 28.

Song April 28, 1903. May 17, 1903, a nest and one egg found in a
dead bush, which was, however, in a dense clump ot living bushes. The

nest was found four feet high. It contained four eggs, May 20 (C. G. L.).

155
MIGRATION RECORD.
eaten etree hee ack 1885. 1885. 1886. 1887 1892 | 1908.
‘3 |

Observer .... 0.2.0. ..+. Gree IeCL ee Br al arene Moll Gag. Weal qerags |" BEML
IESE EM. sears see | eee sheet. 4-25 4-24 4-30 5-4 4-30
INESSTHISGR Seseee eee Sears Sasser ee enapete eis 5-3 A ee Oo here enon sc Sala eis Since Teens
WonmtmOn) ssa. eee alO. ctameniee. PRO MAGNET DeSe Ras ch oatta Mal leer Lente es Dah tha Meee sein Se
NSRUASOGT A pitt stechaean SOR lig Satan oS GE oh I RELS SS CPOE ea rRIScel aces eee ani Na] Coese Beenie
Abundance .......... Abundant.}/Abundant.| Common.|]............ Common! |easskee te
Vol Ge NCR OR ER OC eae ae 1899. 1901. 1902. 1902. 1903. 1903
ODSeRv eT tet. eee SAN Be ST Cea 9th Da YE W.L.M. | W.L.M
IBTESURGGMs .cioctelese sea 4-29 5-4 OA ee ees ee LOB Ie (ell mere meena
ING RESIS seasonal meee eG tote 5-7 AT Pete eAeatee oe AZ Sete hee
@ornpano nee eae woes AO eL wale satete evn adae ai Reenter estes =O Aol arcsec aes
[ST SUISE TEL OTS a eiohe eee rea ere ere aCe | ete eared (Lie toe eae Oe Ber iter cone dena 9-24
Abundances c.ac ns: Common.| Common. Abundant.|Abundant.|Abundant. Abundant.

187. [684] Welsonia mitrata (Gmel.). Hooded Warbler.

Rare summer resident.

of this species in a bush, May

(A. W. Butler).

No females were seen in i885 until May 2:

April 20 to September 14.

27, 1886.

fall of that year were males.

MIGRATION RECORD.

“At Bloomington, Mr. G. G. Williamson found a nest with six young

‘3p

It seems to occur there regularly”

The last migrants in the

NiSGED) Hei on EGO IOI Semin Sieaeeie EDS 1885. | 1835. 1886. 1887 1902.
Dene aero OT Beal Cath Bly |G en God. We aay eM,
FUSSECEN) =. ancse 4 20 8-9 5-8 5-7

ING XURE OTs Kaeo arash: 4-21 9-11 aye’ sia tan Rebar cetcrcer af eomrags iciek:
(CRiNTNINON ee en Mcac Uae Case Saclicebee EGO cOCinr rl Shen amMOnoel Neomemeinto ord | trpr eens =scnr

NGS LES CON oan, sar oan hae tego erste a, 5-9 SS a | ecee cee sen irom none ote 91
Miwen dace ates a0. ie cease sf Rare Rare. LEW eel nc eee tee sap Rare.

156
188. [685] = Wilsonia pusilla (Wils.). Wilson’s Warbler.

Rare migrant. May 8-14. August 31 to September 18. The extreme
dates are also the limits of its stay in Indiana.

MIGRATION RECORD.

MCE 2 sao veers Me STE LEAN eared EE OE 1885, 1885. 1886

1
OPSO¥ WOTsee Seip oa ae Ee ee nk ae Oe C. H.B. CSHB B. W.E
INSU SCO Mist eat ratte tate aA Oo 5-14 | 8 31 | 5-8
Nex: BS 6 ene pede Sern pene slo ie aa See ene |
AU OLIN OVE a See sc opie eats ee aisle Spon sieie nisin Pe Cictapaetorsiard 6 A eyay ee cts | net aero aes seo
bale bS@ Clie esses esh sess pects Si he Se eee 9218 - "| sean ones
ADT Came cane meet den hee oe aa oe Pane ee eee | Rare | Rare Rare

189. [686] Wilsonia canadensis (Linn.). Canadian Warbler.
A more common migrant than either of the last two species. April

27 to May 18. August 26 to September 15.

MIGRATION RECORD.

DCE ee See oe rece ple 6 Se ck a ee ve 1885. 1885. | 1885. 1886.
Observer ........6.0 e000 nae ti Ee c.H.B. | cH.B. | c.a.B. | 17583
MMI SUSE ON canis cyt nsea so See ee 44-28 25-9 8 26 4-27
Next S6ON cco seen cee ee | 5-8 | 5-12 8-28 5-4
Cominonbaspe cee Gs ee Doe acta ho Beco e es sae | er net) (ears re 053 || See eee
Wastisee Reese = chee coae is a sae ee 5-17 5-18 9-15 5-15
Alb aCe spe eee ee DPR Common. Common.) Common. | Common.
|

190. [687] Setophaya ruticilla (Linn.). American Redstart.*

Abundant migrant and common summer resident. April 12 to October
19; the limits of its residence in the State. Scarce in 1885 and 1886
(BSW. B:):

Song April 12, 1903. Nest and three eggs June 12, 1882.

The males arrive about a week in advance of the females. In fall

Redstarts are very abundant and are found nearly everywhere.

157

MIGRATION RECORD.

Le ee | 1885. | 1885. | 1865.98 Veo E8EGas | ISR, 1892
| |
| at
Observer .....-2..2..- Ounen WODKEs, |i OsHeB. tear SSG Gow. |. A: BAW
Pirstiseen'...:.. oss. | f421 2 Se ees ae 5-12 4-299 | 4-80
Ne xtS@elicn.. sc. os see. 4-22 De LOR eset me Geta eects wie 5-26 i=) Lh pAdieall AMES SRE REE
OMUNMON 0 oe daaceveies 5-11 ES ig Loa hs ran Tata ace sae eee ae lege eraet aap nc ea ae
MReaR eae) recip ee san leek eo ok OES era | ety roca crsaes | tm crete ohare. cu lsrereiie’s "sets ere
Abundance ........... Commons Comomio nels Common: te -eee soon Seem toes le ee acrc oa
Meare Pryce sees | 1893. 1900. 1902. 1902. 1903. 1903.
WVSeGVEIrs tes d.sce E. M. K N.B.M. SVMs Were VA pe | 9VVicn rae Wile SAVY ee eiep VAC ae VV. tMbs= I=
IEMESTRSOON shee sicee 2: 5-6 5-5 Aa Dike Solalektcet hints PES De Ae Soe nates
INES" 15 KETSIN at bao da oellanne tape Ota luectetea cc occa ie consortia an anche 7S eee eee ceipciners
AU OMIMNUO Wise seis, orb sete lee eey ashe ook (amie ean Ma oes seh aisn reuieiets [Seo Gar ecto AHS) hal ats Seatac
Last seenyc, ccclences | Re eee ee Keane aa ibe testes 10-19 | ee eee 9-20
Abundance. ....... | SS Atay eee | esas a enya |\Not common pe dees eoundant: Common.
he ak ee =

191. [697] Anthus pensilvanicus (Lath.). American Pipit.* :

Common migrant (C. H. B., ’86). May 17-18—common 19, 1885
(C H. B.). April 1, 1901.

The Pipit probably occurs regularly in considerable numbers, and the
above record is imperfect on account of faulty observation.

192 [703]

Moderately common summer resident.

Mimus polyglottos (Linn.). Mockingbird.*
The Mockingbird was first noted in this locality April 29, 1882, by
B. W.

had been observed in the State at that time.

Evermann. He says that Bloomington was the farthest north it
C. H. Bollmann says it was
very rare in 1886. He obtained a set of eggs in 1884.
Song April 2, 1903.

were on the northeast pike about one fourth mile apart.

Two nests were complete April 30, 1901. They
The males were
singing about these nests both day and night. May 2, 1902, a nest and
two eggs were taken from a small thorn bush. The eggs had been broken
in some manner (W. L. H.). June 6, 1902, a nest and fresh eggs were

found about three feet up in a hedge (C. G. L.).

158

MIGRATION RECORD.

Wenge ctcencceeee | 1882 | 1885. | 1886. 1893. | 1901. 1902. | 1903.
Observer.......... BW. B, CHB ete: K ¥ BB) WL. Mel Wee
Pirstseen.:..5:-.: 4-29 | $513 52 5-15 3-24 3-31 42
Noxtiseenys-< cea cence seal eee ace 6-1 5-18 4-30 4-27 - >>| as
Common.......... | ne sens nce allasanee eats Sarat wis ne Mee dan Saal oS os ne wloes 5-10... ee
Last.seen. -........ eee reee Beeson Receees lezpace Ses eo BACT eee Seer liam aoe 3o2-
Abundance. ..... | Rare. | Rare. Rane to ot eames Common.) Common. Common.

193. [704] Galeoscoptes carolinensis (Linn.). Catbird.*

Abundant summer resident. April 2 to October 6.

Song April 9 to September 20, 1903. Nestbuilding May 3, 1903. Nest
and two eggs May 7, 1902 (G. Hitze). On May 12, 1902, five eggs were
taken from a nest; a new nest was begun on the next day; the lining
was partly made on the 14th and the nest was finished on the 16th.
There was one egg on the 17th and four on the 20th. A nest with four
fresh eggs was found June 4, 1901 (W. L. H.).

The earliest and latest individuals seen are generally found in the
woods in deep-tangled thickets; consequently Catbirds are rarely seen
at the extreme dates indicated above.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Year | 1885. 1B852° 12s 1886: 1887. 1892. 1893.

Observer 2.02... e000 cus. | cues. | ¥$3 | eew. | eax. | ox
Pirst seen. 3-5 sos se ei ane 4-20 4-16 4-25 4-22 | 4-40
Next seen........0.0.. Lanes | 4-21 4-17 AOF hor ely
Commons... 5.2.5. [ieee she pel, ed eee ey (Ree eee | 4-27 4-20
Lastseen: :es56 32255285 10-6 bey eee | Fe Sart ces AR er os AIA peer SOrPMAP Ate Se,
Abundance .......... |Abundant Abundant.| Oe Sac Seed (see aersaoees | Common. Common.

159

MERI fou 4as ota a cke 189). | 1900. 1901. 1902. | 1903. 1903.

OSEDVEI non. t oes ae | Neb. Mee oN Sos Ms) Woo) Wee | Wel | We Me
IRIKSEPSCODs cosas neo 4-28 | 4-14 pi) ie bees Ts ama Pe Ns aaa
Wextwoens. othe ape ART ig lt ey a aE a AE OR he 2
ES UO ep awe cath ech oath gare = Al ee as Sedge OO ae Tala UE
ToaSUsee atc eros | yaa Geeeecet pease ss eee See: / ered Ltr Ase ed 9-20

Aandan cess... ae | Common. ere | Common. | Common. Abundant ‘Abundant.

194. [705] ~Toxrostoma rufum (Linn.). Brown Thrasher.* Figs. 25-6.

Common summer resident. March 16 to October 12.

Song March 20, 1908. Nest begun April 4, 19038. Nest and four eggs
in a berry bush in a corner of a yard, April 20. Young out of nest May
8 (C. G. L.). Four young fiying about freely May 13. Nest with 8 eggs
as late as June 9, ’02 (G. Hitze).

One of our best songsters; most often found just on the outskirts of

town.
MIGRATION RECORD.

Were. con. 1884. | 1885. 1885. 1886. 1887. | 1892. 1893.

| W.S.B. | | EM.K
WUsenvetse aie C eH ts Oot Be |e Cre Bat Bs We. Bro} Gr. Gra We "pay | E.M.K

G.GW. baa
First seen ....| 3-23 BA FN oarce at a 3-28 | 4-12 42 [> 4-2
Next seen ....|.......... 7 Ea ean ES a eae } 4-9 4-6
Marmion co\-s Satekp, EIS ea em seh ee 4-9 4-6
Lasteeen.....|.....--. {Sees esate Ogee rer OR al es AUPE IC ae es Bee, | ese
Aipundan Gs =: |< 2ctsie's <= Common. Common.| Common. .......... Common.) Common.
MOM Toate te wines 1899. | 1900. - 1901. | 1902. 1902. 1903.
* |; W.L.M. | Ww |

(DSerViels sma c ones N.B.M. | N.B.M. | yy’ Rp’ | W-L-.M. .L.M.| W L.M.
Wrest seene.c.. 52) Sy 416 | 4-23 4-7 Smee Seer er Posey!
Next send 2.2042 sere 4-19 ronan Ae. 4-10 BDA — iE Oe aek 3-21
Commonissse ss. - -e--- BEF tired Reyes n> oan 's-oe 4-14 DP | Ree a eee | 4-3
LEG Soe ISS Gasakad Ieocamen oPeoe) OS Rae: Seca! Ae SEA RAE erase a amma TN |e ee
Abundance........... Common. Common. Common.| Common. Common. Common.

160

195. [718] Thryothorus ludovicianus (Lath.). Carolina Wren.*

Common resident. Sings at all times in the year. The Carolina Wren
became common here about 1883 (B. W. E.). “It was heard nearly every
day that winter.”

An inhabitant of dense thickets and brush-piles. Not often seen away
from these places except when singing. Ordinarily a very hard bird to
flush. Several times the writer has cornered a Carolina Wren in a
brush-pile, and walked up to the edge of it without the bird leaving.
Once, even, I walked over a brush-heap with a wren in it and the bird
lett only when the heap was torn to pieces. (March 3, ’01). Another
instance of this habit is as follows: On a cold, snowy, windy day, I was
investigating the base of a hollow tree. After rummaging around on the
inside for three or four minutes, I touched a Carolina Wren which then

flew hastily out (February 2, ’02).

196. [719] TVhryomanes bewickii (Aud.). Bewick’s Wren.*

Very common summer resident. March 6 to October 12. Bewick’s
Wren was taken in this county as early as 1876 (Ind. Univ. Mus.). It
was a common summer resident ten years later, and now is very common
and almost entirely replaces the next species (7. a@don) which is a rather
rare bird.

Song March 13, 1903; breeding March 25, 1901. Nest and eight eggs
in an old sack hung over a fence, April 14, 1903 (C. G. L.).

Most frequently found near houses; common in the city; a persistent

songster in March and April.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Wie lls sony kro cae ae 1885. | 1885. | T8865) ene Sie 1893.

Observer: cae tecene rae lous | cus. | $¢W-|¢.¢6.w. | ame
MMs tisGe nes <id eter ce emer AR Sigg, eel tice eared 3-26 4-2 3-20

Nextiscen at ono a8 eer cee gaat (inked Seoccraseoe sone 4-8 4-13. coll oonteersehehe
Common..... Sil satel oe alee
astiseents ere asese eee we Peete tes | UE ied Wenae ieee el emma ul locos cate osc
Abundance sees aae ee | Common. |Not common| Common. | Commione) |seeeeeenienee

161

= | ! |
MpaE Rood Cocsice3, te 5 alot 1899. | 1900 | 1901. | 1902. | 1903,

: Po
QPSELVENs 626s eats os peters N. B.M N.B.M. | W.L.M.| W.L.M W.L.M
MTEG SOGIe scerca cis oo saee asset ese 4-13 4-2 3-25 Caan - 3-6
IGM KEG cores a xcc- ai ecseecsicwe 4-14 4-7 3-26 ae ee 3-8
LOTT TET Rah bn a id PE ge 4-21 ABP? [EO es 5 eae biere aioe. Sim 3-21
TRS eet ee en ae Sl ae Be od tal dew aon, Dade [tics eat ea TS bl oes ee
PURE ANCO REY «sores cwiowas se aaaene Common.| Common.}| Common. | Common.) Common
197. [721.] Troglodytes aédon Vieill. House Wren.* Fig. 9.

March 9 to September 16. The House
Wren was a rare summer resident and less common than 7. bewickii in
1887 (B. W. E.).

A nest of the House Wren was found April 25, 1903, in a tin can sit-

Rather rare summer resident.

ting on a fence.
(Cc. G. L.). May 21, 1902, seven well-feathered young were found; two
days later these had flown (G. Hitze).

The dates for 1901 would probably be more correctly attributed to
T. bewickii.

The nest was just completed and contained no eggs

The song was heard that year on February 21 (V. H. B.).

MIGRATION RECORD.

SEE Reece cece sce cic ce Scere ee ic cee aaee 1885. 1885. 1886. 1887
Bete we eit He ned Siento Sus GsH-8.). | 60H. BW |". G2 G@2W., |; G. Ga.
RITA REGIE so orn ess Glvins dene Re emi fasta | a 0 ae eaaceee es eee 5-1 4-30
INGORE NO ON aan eer cne sense oom ator ees | A De N tats spn are SS | Se eos stac
SQOMINGH cess seeneaonies Sioa ogee Feil SO) {Sone eat aren Gene eeoeee chen) ncrcemradecde
MASE DEM cen wced once seiwoe ess scab ovamage|oeaaie seas oes A AL FILA SS tecemancar Inpnewe Sdooeore
J Alon WAC EX EGyepneend aodo ue COD ORO poe obec Common. Notcommon.............-- Not common
MORE: fees ence asc eaee Teeieaee cose se aeaets vane 1892. 1901 1903.
LSE in 2 Neate Ate ge fe SS ve bast.) WoL,
BATS GIRGO MC arcitaiscyaisteaicic iors Soin ain eedote ties)» enewie w.clersiels care 3-27 2-11 3-9

I ICSzLE ROBT inicedode née AEC EC Enecaen CoG ReonEouRane tauos | 3-31 2-13 4-29
Gomimmon sere ores eee cats eee nice sathlcinc es aaldweje sie sect cure Sanat: Be18: yA Vacte cewsmece ser
DaeteBGON: eases recs Sean cae dee cates sie ata Eases Pepe seat eel aaah cco cecil eelachananeeiaae
PRU RNG OR corse crac ce lars Srey Secor cloisle slow ths. w/aecstaseereviakel come Ire aaa teeelnne Common Rare

11—A. or Scrence, ’04.

162

198. [722] Olbiorchilus hiemalis (Vieill.). Winter Wren.*

Rare in winter; more common during the migrations. October 4 to
May 3. Absent during the winter 1902-3.

Most of the individuals departed April 19, 1885 (C. H. B.).

MIGRATION RECORD.

Meare ce acs 1885. 1885. | 1886. 1887. 1900. 1901. | 1903.
Observer...... CHB: C.HSBs|) G.G.W. GaGaWiro (Ne Bae Verne B. W.L.M.
Winst,seen's. 22 |- s.s acemmecieee: 1 aad esse i aceae Meouanaehabaes aces a waienis: fae SSS
INGXUSCOM! 5 .-1| Sher cee wesc | TOD |... 2. ee sep eeee eee eee | se oo eee rece a ee Heenan
Common.. .. Goh on | en crascete feces aes be SPN Re ere Poicct wes wg est a eeeeenmeoees
Last seen. .. 5-3 | avec Raterots 4-24 | 4-20 | 417 | 0353 a ene
Abundance...|Not common Common|Not common Not common| haavicotee oe epee a | Rare.

199. [725] Telmatodytes palustris (Wils.). Long-billed Marsh Wren.
Rare migrant. May 10, 1886 (C. H. B.—G. G. W.); May 13 (B. W. E.);
September 29, 1903, common.
200. [726] Certhia familiaris americana (Bonap.) Brown Creeper.*
Rare in winter, common in spring and fall (C. H. B., ’86). September
27 to May 380.
In April this bird may generally be found wherever there are Kinglets.
Most of them departed April 20, 1885 (C. H. B.).

MIGRATION RECORD.

RCT Uetineace aguanenec 1885. | 1885. 1886. | 1887. | 1888. | 1899.
| | |
Observer 2-22 ss sce. CAH Bs CaHaB: | GaGawie |) Ga Gaw-. | GeGeiWe |:
BirstiSeeni:.)...4-5- <6: 4-1 9-27 4-13 eee etic ce eicicoe | ee
Next seen.........--.. | 4-2 10-4= 1/51 Sah eaters Bers ca
Commeni-_ 5-25-15 | ye i aa eee ne ann ose Tian recor reno tore anocd| taeccc 8scDo¢
Tins BeOM cele Se oe | a ce |e | eee Meu | OOO 4-10
Abundance ............ Common. | Common. | Common.) Common. | Baan OOS | Rare.

‘
SVEN Boe a geen aaa apes 1900. | 1901. 1902. 1902. | 1903. 1892.
Observer: 262. --<.<c5- | N.B.M. Viz Hay Exras | eV culls eM ches Wi Dacia | Wes ere oe le poo Mls Bae
First seen...........| 4-8 / 3-9 3-12 11-18 iE Iya RC ane Sates
Next seen ........... | ar | ae dal ee aimee je eda AN eae oe
Commons... s2-c= SNR PR Rete! = 7! 4-13 ee daceeiewt | welsieess eee ee ants Soca:
Wastiseent..2.:...>-s ASTia uae aesstec oe 4-19 12-14 4-12 4-7
Abundance.......... Noticommon}<-:- 20.5... Common. | Common. | Common. } Common.

201. [727] Sitta carolinensis Lath. White-breasted Nuthatch.*
Common resident. Attempts at song Mareh 8, 1902; five days earlier

they were seen going in and coming out of a cavity in a tree, which they
afterwards used as a nest.
202. [728] Sitta canadensis Linn. Red-breasted Nuthatch.*

Common migrant and rare winter resident. September 20 to May 12.
“They were found wintering at Bloomington the winters of 1882-3 and
1885-6” (Blatchley). Also winters of 1884-5; 1902-3.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Meir ty hers cay. 1883 1885 1885. | 1886 1886 1887
Observer ......0..0000- lp.w.n. | CHB. oo ee | w.s.B. | 6.6.W
First seen............. 2-10 1-31 10-2 wae A Ree ARE al eam eye
i SET AEN Oa Re ieee ane 7 ana kal a pee ee Co Ri
IC DIMNTONe ca-t.c cise oe eer aera ee tae s eee Peterlee hroei|ieciomeic aiciete | AA DSSE cae Aloo rere bat
Thi OL ToS Pe AR ES, Se 5-12 11-25 4-24 12-21 5-7
Abundance .......... Rare. Rieke Gineld Genoe Common? ||oee. ster

DRAM teecician Seas Staatelse nak tem tie | iS 1 Ee | 1902, | 1902. 1903. | 1903.
| |
(ODRGU VOR ai sitc:o-site com eiststarve ak wets es a Veep sce en Wier las Vien ee WiedoewMice! WWrecla Mins |e WL. Ms
PERE RECN tet <ioi 5.) Nene ehees| Glace 2-28 10-12 | 1-4 9-20
INGE SOOM ra-ttoNE encase sins eelaciee mee os 3-10 10-25 eel LS 9-24
COMMON ease ececceowarenericneteasei| deca toes cn leeecien esta ns leraeh aestemonte oe 4-29 9-25
DIRBRIBOONT cat ccecte cates Seats cs eee 4-7 4-24 11-30 ey Ae fall ie Ana mance
ADU AM CE ra tore tists tere ones aesl|abiemee sictmiets 4 Rare. Rare. | Common.) Common.

164

203. [731] Bzolophus bicolor (Linn.). Tufted Titmouse.*
Abundant resident. -Nestbuilding April 12, 1903; May 7, 1901.
-An ubiquitous species with a great variety of calls and songs.

204. [735] Parus atricapillus Linn. Chickadee.*

Seen here only as a winter visitor. November 7 to May 15. It is
probably not a common winter resident, though so reported by C. H. Boll-
man (86). W. S. Blatchley says it was as common a winter resident,
and B. W. Evermann says it was as common a resident as P. carolinensis
in 1886. N. B. Myers says a few breed, but most of them go north. The
latter records are probably due to confusion with the next species. All
the specimens in the University collection have been examined and only
one from this locality that was labeled P. atricapillus was identified
correctly. There are, however, several unlabeled ones which come under
this species. Its true status is that of an uncommon winter visitor.

MIGRATION RECORD.

BRT sac cada ore ices | 1884.5 | 1885. | 1886. 1892. 1895. 1899. 1900.

Observer..........-. lc.H.8.| C.H.B. | W.S.B.. A. B.U.|L.Hughes| N.B.M.| N.B.M
WES GiSCOM = Geese cece (gee meee | ICRI SCE (Saeacee sac L1=7 >| anes Bales
INoktisGens<. 3 22 sass oos Seneae [ates eee cece lee teen eee: cece eee ees lessees eee eee lessees cece lense eee ees
Common............ J-cer esse: | Se2G Poe aki a ac esol see cersecles [ne ea
Past scenes: sce G.-2 a ea 4-16 5-15 ZA S alsstes ices ses 5-2 4-28

Abundance-...5.2-5) sccee sec | Common. |.......... ated EC POS ceRSOEGe Io os. Sere

205. [736] Parus carolinensis Aud. Carolina Chickadee.*

Common resident. Seen more often and in greater numbers after
March 8, 1903; February 18, 1902; April 30, 1885 (C. H. B.).

Song January 18 to November 28, 1902. Mating March 15, 1902; nest-
building April 14, 1901. May 29, 1901, four young with pin-feathers and
one egg were found in a nest about three feet from the ground in a wil-
low stub. The nest was about three inches in depth and was lined with
rabbit fur and other soft materials. The young were not yet able to sit
on a perch, June 3 (W. L. H.). :

206. [748] Regulus satrapa Licht. Golden-crowned Kinglet.*

Abundant migrant and rare winter resident. February 4 to May 7.
September 21 to November 28. “They are reported as winter residents
from Bloomington (Evermann, Blatchley). Also by G. G. Williamson.

165

Song heard April 16, 1902. This bird has a surprisingly loud, sharp
whistle, with a somewhat ventriloquial effect.

On April 6, 1902, a Golden-crowned Kinglet was observed to catch a
moth of apparently half its own size. It took several minutes time and
much trouble to finish the insect and it was dropped once but was recoy-
ered and finally disposed of.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Tear sc 1884. | 1885. 1885. | 1886. |

1887. 1892. 1893. 1895.
|

Observer....|B. W. “| C.H.B. | C.H.B. |G.G.W.iG.G.W.| E. M. K.| E. M. K.| L. Hughes.

Kirst seems. |) 2-10) occ s.< cs .<5 - 10-3 55 1 Jee bear, te | 4-4 DEA Tacs ct arate ate
INextiseeniser tae ct tcc iece ee. fee « 5 CEES ne al | oe eevee se ace eee 4-9 21m ete areretateyaieicie
COMMON se. |h o> < osc 42 10-9 ANS amaserias el ER AA ieee) ORES e CO
WARSE SOOM EF lee. one 4-19 10-25 4-13 5-7 SDA Ft rere alee cre ths 11-7

Shendaree | Rare. |Abundant|Abundant).........|......... |Common|Common.............

Vearit..a7siek 1899. | 1900. | 1901. | 1902. | 1902. | 1903. 1903.
| |
Observer.......... N.B.M/N.B.M.| W-8-M- | win.) Ww. LM.) W.L.M. | W.L.M.
First seen ........ 4-10 4-4 3-20 3-27 105 | 318 | 921
Next seen ........ 4-13 4-6 3-22 3-28 10-16 | 3-19 9-22
“DSDeITE Ts Ty ch Sp (ee 4-5 4-15 10-18 | 3-23 9-21
Pia EIOO Mises sae Fel oa co cewek 4-12 4-21 4-23 1128 ol" $4—19' oleate
PADUNG ANCA cases vallioe nesta we Se Joceees sees Abundant.|Common} Common|Abundant.|Abundant,

207. [749] Regulus calendwa (Linn.). Ruby-crowned Kinglet.*

Abundant migrant and rare winter resident. March 23 to May 18.
September 21 to October 24. ‘They have been noted, in winter, in Mon-
roe County, by Profs. Evermann and Blatchley.” (A. W. Butler.)

Song April 5, 1901; 10, 19068. Mating April 19 and 24, 1903. April 10,
1903. Heard a Ruby-crowned Kinglet singing a varied and pretty song
which was so loud that it did not seem possible that so small a bird
eould produce it. The Ruby-crown also gave a little chuck, a short
whistle, and another note like that of a Canada Nuthatch, but less com-
plaining. The last note was repeated several times. On April 19, two
Ruby-crowns were seen, one of which with crown erected and singing,
was chasing the other. Was this not mating? On the 24th two other in-

166

dividuals were seen doing the same thing, and another was heard singing.
The song reminds one of nothing more plainly, than of the softer, less
ambitious efforts of a canary. It is varied with little chirps and chuck
and chirr notes.

The bulk left May 2, 1885 (C. H. B.).

MIGRATION RECORD.

up

Wear Ae pata tamer 1885. 1885. | 1886. 1887. 1892. 1893.
Observer ......0. 0.2 c.H.B. | c.u.B. | ES | G.¢.w.) BM.K.- EM K
Hirst:seem.--eeesn 4-18 9-28 4-19 4-10 4-9 4-19
INextiseentas..sccan: 4-19 10-3 4-22 4-11 4=23'.)5 | eereeeieerees
Common tiaack: sees 4-22 IQS hs a ck Se Sree ea ON oe Eee $297 "| Sees
Last seen ........... 5-11 10-24 AOA) Ake en eee 5-18). <leocorenentae
Abundance ......... Abundant.|Abundant.| Common. |..........- Not common)............
EVER ER: duck sa ace lee ick cee Gee 1901. 1902. 1902. 1903 1903.
ODECEVIER Rai Gacs tt a ore eee W.l.M.| W.L.M.| W.l.M.| W.L.M. | W.L.M
Mira Seoncac sae tiaccice ete ae 3-29 4-6 10-2 3-23 9-21
INGE UGE ha Annn CROs ctebebannmod| (ain boteeicene 4-11 10-4 3-25 9-22
(CTI TGS ARENT CoOe One ece IB BUEN Incesainnoae 4-13 10-2 3-23 9-21
Maistiseente acs tac eto see aioe. 4-5 4-27 10-15 4-30. Sl Sees
Abundante ser loscerh eaten Common.|] Common.| Common. Abundant.|...........-
208. [751] Polioptila cerulea (Linn.). Blue-gray Gnatcatcher.* Figs. 27-8.

April 5 to September 12.

Song and mating April 12, 1903. A nest containing one egg of a
Cowbird was found April 22, 1886 (B. W. H.). This was ten days after
Three days after they arrived in 1902 Gnateatchers wexe
In

Common summer resident.

their arrival.
seen nestbuilding (April 24); the nest was half-finished on the 27th.
1903 no completed nest was found until the 27th of April, which was 20
On May 26, 1903, a nest and four well-incubated
eges were found. The nest was saddled on a limb of a small elm, about
fourteen feet from the ground (C. G. L.). W. S. Blatchley (1888), in
“The Audubon Magazine,” describes a two-story nest of the Blue-gray
A Cowbird had deposited an egg

days after their arrival.

Gnateatcher, taken near Bloomington.

167

in the nest proper and the second story was built over this egg (A. W.

Butler).
MIGRATION RECORD.
VOTES Rue deod Scan tose SoS aera ty aa 1885. 1885. 1886. 1887. 1892.

: SP reese tee it. AL
ODRenven tess eee, Seca ca tae | Cale Bs Ci Heee Bek. G. Ge We. ELM.K
HES BECOME Utes MESO Sued) ee AoDIn pichssacwe soe 4-12 4-11 4-17
INOXESEOI Sie OR cotta re A= Gs NS ene Ace fags LFelle yo Bo (eee aaa aes 4-23
WOMMVON Bonet yee denen 4-17 5 EO SELON St Ie cE Menon Iara Seema Paes e seen

|

ASEH OMe sock Sec eT sae OA mie alte eA Pose aah ee lead ikaw
Albund an Geren sans eee nec soe ta Common | Common.) Common. |.

=
Rieter Oetee ey oe sei. oe. Sete 1s BOs So et AROS. 3) |e SOR 1902. 1903
Observer 2... cee! EMR. | NBM. | WE Me Wo Lom.) Ww. M
RATB REC Mise tec nes can ele erceoarnne 4-6 4-13 4-29 4-15 4-7
Nietxt SOOM: aie ccen nsec o Reet c ptetaee 5-4 4-15 5-1 4-19 4-1]
Chrnnttiere tte en ratte cote ore Set cane nee Meera See erator tere 4-19 4-12
MASE SOOM see be oka re ee oat hoe od] Calan o Seema eo alt cos delenit lae eee ell Shays Se Se Cea ee eee
PAO TLIC INGORE cece Sete sett rete eer ait alle ave cietoesones ara Nels ace adicie ral ne chert ese Common. |} Common.
209. [755] Hylocichla mustelina (Gmel.). Wood Thrush.*

Common summer resident.
Song May 4, 1904 (F. E. L.).
A resident of the deeper woods.

its best in early May.

MIGRATION RECORD.

April 12 to October 12.
Nest and eggs May 6, 1886 (B. W. E.).

There his fine song may be heard at

AG 21) Ba Wa eg ineesioM aren meets 1885. 1885. 1886. 1887. 1892.
W.S.

Olisenverstcet eee rete eee Coiens: ¢. H.B yee B G.G. W Nee oq Uf
MATSEBEGU a aie cencire coche cee ae Catena. wae eae 4-17 4-25 5-7
WNextistetinst cc ckoce ren chee onan «BA he Ee ees Se AP te (ae rsarlarste Seed eyeysie ere aRev es
COnMMr OD ose Saniats alcjosios= eater Soiars) score DB ee Natce sacire eels AD Aem rliM re ren tartteavonl eetetaen cetes eats
Wit ROG Tie tas lotr aera eave Sate lithe aie isis saat Se EON aryl eraaiotase: cele! s)| ciajere a ctelnieoo\| aa oe aSealerore
PAT UI OT Ce ost aces vs aces dare Abundant.|Abundant.|Abundant.]............|........8.6-

|

WORT shee lor w ore oot ns eee | 1900. | 1901. 1902. 1902. | 1903.
ObRenV eI oe eee N.B.M. | W.L.M.| W.L.M.| W.L.M. | W. LL.M.
RirsbepenGct ask kos ee 5-2 5-6 (2 el eae eee | 4-12
Wextcaon 2s. ote aces ger ee Rees eS eens Apes, (ear | 417
Commons sess hone eee 5a <A e Rew tne Mati ee detec lw nasi teeth 5-5
VIASU ROOM ea ssr25..ce poses e eet loce wees sb acl llow eae dome ning | a teoee eaten 10-12 | Slee nets
VA DUNGANGCE 22262. ce ca oe celts ee ae Commions| a=. 5-682 Moderet ty Moderate Common.

210. [756] Hylocichla fuscescens (Steph.). Wilson’s Thrush.

Rather rare migrant. April 23 to May 16. September 1 to 13. Ap-
parently common in 1885 (C. H. B.) now the rarest of the Thrushes.

Most of the birds departed May 10, 1885 (C22HeeB):

MIGRATION RECORD.

MORE ease occ ars ou chensanmae ees Ss | 1885. | 1885 1883 | 1902 1903
Obepryer>.\.ce ea eten wae et eee C.H. Bs |} CHB. | C.H.B: > W. DMs Wega
Hirstiseen hi cccceccte cee eee 4-23 | Qala ase cite ete | 5-4 4-26
INGXt SEO &. 525s sscacn eeu see een eee 4-26 : DR. | se eer erat [eet NSA Sion c oo dors
Common .-soxessas-Osen-ceeer eres ae Sen MSc Ge tees BSesA ta On ea opaaonneaoAd |<. <r
Bast seen: seine. aceon sneresa canes ee ae ee Ce Cee Cocoon
VAlDTING ANCOI-c we asp t- ese at enn aoe Common. Common. | Common. Rare. Rare.

211. (757) Hylocichla alicie (Baird). Gray-cheeked Thrush.
Rather uncommon migrant. April 10 to May 17. September 2 to 25.
Formerly much more common; abundant in 1885 (C. H. B.).

' Some question has been raised about the validity of the records of
early arrival of the present species in the central states. The dates
recorded are earlier than those noted for the arrival of the species on the
southern coast of the United States. If these records are proved to be
correct, they will establish what is at least not a common phenomenon
of migration a journey from Central America, at least, across the Gulf
and half across the continent before a stop is made. The very number
of these early records from different points and by different observers
in Indiana, is almost sufficient proof of their reliability. Some of these
records are: Spearsville, April 14 and 15, 1894; April 3 to 10, 1895 (V. H.
Barnett); Laporte, April 10 to 12, 1892 (Charles Barber); Brown County,

169

April 14, 1894 (H. M. Kindle) and Bloomington, April 10, 1903 (W. L. M.).
It is claimed that the more usual and expected occurrence would be the
arrival of this species at about the time of arrival of Wilson’s and the
Olive-backed Thrushes. Further observation and especially collection of
specimens is needed to settle the question. The Gray-cheeked Thrush is
only rarely recorded as late as early October, as are also the Veery and
Swainson’s Thrushes. But a specimen is.recorded in the catalogue of
the Indiana University Museum, taken by David Starr Jordan, November

1, 1875, at Indianapolis.
MIGRATION RECORD.

WUECH Boas Sabo AD COnc reo Bee Boned eeonC Ose 1885. | 1885. 1886. 1903.
Biman yan am Mase eey a ecaote es |e Oni, Bind, Cre ae |harene (LW. Li. Me
BINS EIS OOM ecto t citauseisesisicieleielsiaye sjoiele aers/aie cyereeiss 4-22 9-2 5-1 4-10
Next seen....... eminem erties mete soe: 4-25 9-4 5-17 4-20
(COTATI: 5 Gace adap be ddooosaaKdodccocno Homes 5-3 eae | batiobnean baad lomecaecnemocee
Last seen........ Lote aria tooeceee esate menses 5-17 SOB EM etek rrreai seta elated orrecatace oe
ADIN an Covenastes sats enrsact ote rteciee oatcleer ns Abuudant.|Abundant. OY Rate cee Rather rare.

212. [758a] Hylocichla ustulatus swainsonii (Cab.). Olive-backed Thrush.

Rather rare migrant. April 28 to May 19. September 1 to October 2.
C. H. Bollmann considered this species an abundant migrant in 1885.
At present only a few are seen each year.

Most of the individuals departed May 17, 1885 (C. H. B.). Perhaps
the reduction in numbers of all the less hardy, wood-loving thrushes, in
recent years is due to the cutting away of timber in this region. There
are very few of those cool, dark, virgin forests, which are said to be the
favorite haunts of our wood thrushes, remaining in this region at present.

MIGRATION RECORD. .

RV GRTIs ace store hare neh eles ajelaystantredote ato | 1885. | 1885. 1887. 1892. 1903.
Ghnsiver htes cites. ase wae Gory Ba |e Gale B. sd. Gs Wal spar oe le Wabe a
HIV EG REGM nse cceeeatneas temas 5-2 9-1 4-28 5-9 4-29
INEXt Seen er caste mncloticrsssine ct 5-3 GEG Naw wae <auelees 5-14 4-30
Wonimontmencriestosea tee ances 5-10 SP QELB A ai[Ete Monecienslaemaccee eae Intosaearone eae
MAS TYSHON are wetic es avin steies wera sat 5-19 O=2'S5 © tleeeereitetes eee ia bi" Meal lensnaaaocnr
NUNC UTC Ge srereyereleyeicters fete weleteteieveleiete Abundant. Alb nnd anita Seccick cistes <lo)llesmicie sle.sie's'6fs Rare.

170

213. [759b] Hylocichla guttata pallasiit (Cab.). Hermit Thrush.

Common migrant March 23 to May 8. October 3 to November 21.
The extreme dates mark the limits of its stay in the State, unless it has
recently been found to winter in the lower Wabash Valley.

The most common of the Thrushes in the migratory season. Found in
second-growth and open woods.

The majority left April 25, 1885 (C. H. B.).

MIGRATION RECORD.

WEST fae tenn atten nies | 1885. | 1825. | 1886. | 1887. 1892. 1893.
Observer ............. C.H.B. | C.H.B. | W.8..B; | @. Gow..| eM ae ne
hinstiseen) naccrr ers 3-31 | 10-3 AAV ee 412 4-2 4-19
Next /Seen’o ease sees 4-1 | OSE Se WES rerlch a, sonnel laqerctene RCS 4-9 4-27
Common sans. -eeece B19 S10 FI Ome) ec ecicssees| ears Stes ate cee eee eee
Last seen.............. Aoon ceal ee OCaml eer cee Rana 4-23.) eee
Abundance........... Common. | Common. feeds peace searas ses Common.) Common.
Weare phone ees 1900. 1901. | 1902. 1903. 1903.
ObServiertec.<shstauctae teers | NoBa Me: C. H. E. | W.L.M.| W.L.M. | W.L.M.
WMTStistent Sst saceceenstcn ee | 4-9 4-29 | 3-23 tea ee Er re Cec
Next seen ........ na eansoncmanacel [chosen na cese eae Oey 3-25 4-7 | aisese arsenate
Common. Mees am cAlea case meccs 4-12 Newees -DnSo.c
Last seen........ SOO PINE AA Seon TSB ADE ACER eR omebe sine 3-27 5-3 11-21
Album danceinssonaseneeotecee nce INOtcomumon| teeters | Common. | Common. | Common.
| |

214. [761] Merula migratoria (Linn). American Robin. * Fig. 30.
Resident; abundant in all seasons except winter when it is generally
rather rare. However, on January 30, 1893, a winter day, 300 Robins
were seen by H. M. Kindle. This was probably a band of migrants, and
its occurrence then was not unusual. They become commen from the
middle of February to the middle of March. Some winters they are
entirely absent—that of 1900-01 for instance. They have been observed in
flocks here as late as April 18, 1908. There is generally a period in fall

171

when Robins are scarce, followed by a period of abundance before the
numbers dwindle down to the usual winter representation. This is
caused in aH probability by the summer residents of more northern
regions, halting here in what to them is a mild climate, after our own
summer birds have departed. A similar movement is noticeable among
the Bluebirds. The condition of mid-autumn abundance occurred Octo-
ber 22, 1902. Three days later these birds became rarer and flocks were
seen migrating at a considerable elevation by day.

Singing began very early in 1903. One was heard singing his spring
song, very low as if in rehearsal, January 16, and one burst out in
full song January 20. The next song was heard February 24. In other
years I have heard an imperfect song as early as February 23, and
the complete song March 4, 1902. They continue their songs till late
in the year. Perfect songs are heard in August, and on September
1, 1902, a Robin was heard singing with all the vigor if not the per-
fection of spring. Songs, perhaps slightly imperfect, put not very
noticeably so, have been heard as late as October 26, 1902.

They have been observed mated by February 26, 1903. The first
nest has been completed as early as March 21, 1903 (P. J. H.). Very
little mud was used in the construction of this nest. That this was
early in the season as well as in the calendar may be judged by the
fact that an inch of snow fell shortly afterwards. The first egg was
found March 29, 1903. It was in a nest in a beech tree. The nest
was within ten feet of a window in Science Hall (C. G@ L.). A full
set was not found until April 8, but on April 26 two half-grown young,
not accompanied by their parents, were observed. On May 3 two young
nearly full grown were seen. Twenty-four days (April 25 to May 17)
elapsed between the laying of the third egg and the flight of the young
in a nest watched in 1892 (G. Hitze).

One was noticed before daybreak on March 26, 1908, sitting on the
ground and singing vigorously. It was observed in the same place
the next morning.

When the country is snowbound Robins resort to peculiar methods
to obtain a livelihood; one was seen wading about in a shallow spring-
fed stream, feeding in the manner of a Sandpiper, February 9, 1902.

MIGRATION RECORD.

Wider eee vase crcl: = 1883 | 1884 | 1885. | 1886. | 1887 1892.
Observer ....20000.00: B.W.E.| CHE. | c.H.B. | &W-E | @.a.w. | ox
Birstiseeny.c ope scesr 2-10 2-9 2-14 2-13 1-16 2-1
Next seen tse, hin en coon Eee | on | = aie 2-6
Comm ones -caasetrae a Peataee See aae BAe ce 3-7 2-23 | 2-7 2-6
me] BEG ARLEN: | Geir iaer: Sain (GPa ae eee Cel SE REB EO lanaea cerememy| misMlarhs ote; eateci| [ne atc taie seas ol eee eects
Abundance........ | Atma anit: Soe oo nee Abundant. | Common. |..........-- Common.
ean scnoe scacieaceet 1893 1899 | 1900. | 1901 | 1902. | 1903
|

ODgetyer cc. te secerin E. M.K. |- N. B. M. | N.B.M = ze te W.L.M.| W.L.M
First seen............. 1-28 2-12 | 2-20 7s (IM a eee \ each
Nexiseen fava.ccs-sc cer 125 Ay: | 3-3 | DmOd Sy) i] tetas hoes wlaiarctel aleve ereeaeietere
Common 725.022 seen 2-13. |. -3=16 | 3-9 : 3-3 3-1 2-27
LTS SC) SRE Sm ae lee hen lance incor at cad Insp aanienae iran [Rubee amen er ge | score asisiaisc raced o osee Seema
Abundance <2... ss. Common.| Common.| Common.) Common. |Abundant.|Abundant.

215. [766] Sialia sialis (Linn.). Bluebird.* Figs. 31-2.

Resident; abundant in ali seasons except winter, moderately com-
mon then. Becomes abundant before the middle of March (February
22 to March 16). Seen in pairs February 22, 1884 (C. H. E.). All
records of Bluebirds for the winters 1900-01 and 1901-2 were made by
groups and show just how the birds were met. Nearly all of these
groups are twos or multiples of two, and of them equal numbers
were male and female. This is pretty good evidence that many Blue-
birds remain paired throughout the year. However, some of the sum-
mer residents mate here, and they were seen mating March 1, 1903.
Two males were singing madly and flying excitedly about a female,
the principal characteristic of whose attitude seemed to be utter indif-
ference to both of her suitors.

Singing February 10, 1903. The first nest was finished March 15,
1903; it was in a fencepost which had rotted in two just above the
ground and which swayed on its supporting wires, with every wind.
A nest with three eggs was found March 22; and one with four eggs

173

April 2. On April 4 a nest and six eggs were found in an old Wood-
pecker’s hole (C. G. L.). On April 27, four young Bluebirds 3-4 days old
were found and on the 29th seven young, fully feathered and about

four inches long, were seen flying about freely with their parents.
On November 30, 1902, Bluebirds were acting as Phoebes are often
seen to do; they used a perch near the ground from which they sud-

denly flew down, picked up an insect or other morsel of food, always

returning to the same perch.

MIGRATION RECORD.

TOE es Ge. | 1883. | 1884. 1885. 1386. | 1887.
WH SEMVEl ese teescs oe lneaatents ned Bo Week| Co Hone) | Cs. B B. W.E. | B. W. E.
HIMSTASEOM ste victeas nance eee nes 1-12 Denon Catan arch te ae 2-20 | 1-1
INGRTSEON Osan raceme cnare nears es | Seliies setae 2 Giraswe a aenee sae 2-21 13
COMMU rciecstee cen our etacte setts Ree aerae 2-22 2-28 Vy TE A i
a SHIRCOI ae concise etc nai ctor fs itis Microtee mine ico acs cies ce sian illo bios ie Steno all Nag atoms ccd Poets omeen
J Al NAG LOR eCg setae man tostice Lntaaee Abundant.| Common. |............ Common |ic.cene cs ee
PVIGMIE RE eA anttn nates ate paces sist | 1892 1900 1901 1902. * 1903.
Obsenvieriasentie.tcten dteroeem aeas A BeaWi Net al Wallis use |e-Wie dae Via f= Weslo
HITS ESA EM scenes. cc cei is os see ies nn 1-28 2-19 Pao Ke esl me aan een Ae aciogee
INIG:XDSESTIre ate anc Soe niecine ars ciets 2-6 2-22 58 Cala be aaa tS | ap aera OS ae
COTTON ce stance Sts eels ciek Geel co ee ligicrete aias ris 4 econ oioa.3 3-2 3-16 3-8
SES TASC Me opts eer Ne cece seein eecinis Aictoer ale shal] ie ace ee cr'seelete [lesialevwte ve tea wth] wane cs palin 'a fein! lies, acare@halekete,
ATMO RN GON: os sigan cters nce gisiniemee en Common.| Rare Common. |Abundant.!Abundant.

SUPPLEMENTAL LIST.

1. [51] Larus argentatus (Brinn). Herring Gull.
Very probably seen by J. J. Batchelor, April, 1902. See note under
L. philadelphia in main list.

2. [208] Rallus elegans Aud. King Rail.
Rare migrant in Brown County (BE. M. K. ’94). Will probably
be found to have the same rank in avifauna of this county.

3. [226] Himantopus mexicanus (Mill.). Black-necked Stilt.

C. H. Bollmann gives a queried record for Monroe County in his
list of 1886, and ranks it as rare. It has not otherwise been recorded
in the State.

4. [305] Tympanuchus americanus (Reich.). Prairie Hen.

Given in C. H. Bollmann’s list of 1886 as one of the birds which
had to his knowledge been found in the county but which had disap-
peared.

5. [310] Meleagris gallopavo merriami Nelson. Wild Turkey.

A rare resident as late as 1886 (C. H. B.), when a few were seen
each year (W. S. B.). In 1887 B. W. Evermann said that although
he had not observed it, it was still occasionally taken. In 1894 E. M.
Kindle wrote that ic was almost if not entirely extinct in Brown
County. The Wild Turkey is without doubt entirely extinct in this

county.

6. [315] Ectopistes migratorius (Linn.). Passenger Pigeon.

A rare migrant in 1886 (C. H. B.). B. W. Evermann in 1887 classed
it as formerly abundant but then rare. The last date at hand for
this county is April 18, 1885, when ten were seen by C. H. Bollmann.
It has been observed since that time in Brown County—March 7, 1894
_(&. M.- K.); 60 were seen April 12, 1895 (V. H. B.).

7. [882] Conurus carolinensis (Linn.). Carolina Paroquet.

Given the same position by C. H. Bollmann in his list of 1886 as
the Prairie Hen. (See above.) “Judge A. L. Roach of Indianapolis
says Parakeets were common in Monroe County in 1828 when his father’s
family moved there. The family came from western Tennessee, where the
bird was abundant and well known. He says they were still there

175

in 1836. * * * B. W. Evermann learned from the late Louis Boll-
mann that they were there in 1831. * * * W. B. Seward of Bloom-
ington said that these birds were well known to him from 1840-1850
and were in many places common” (A. W. Butler in “The Auk,” Vol.
IX, pp. 49-56). “Mr. W. B. Seward informs me of obtaining some
tive, he thinks, young Paroauets from a farmer’s boy in Owen
County (adjoining Monroe) in 1845. His impression is they were taken
from the inside of a hollow tree, on the borders of White River. This
is the farthest north we have any account of their nesting’ (Butler,
Birds of Indiana, 1897). In Brown County it was formerly abundant
along Bean Blossom Creek (H. M. K.).

8. [892] Campephilus principalis (Linn.). Ivory-billed Woodpecker.
“Hormerly common, now rare” (B. W. E. ’87). Recorded by C. H.
it was formerly found in Monroe County” (Butler).

9. [486] Corvus corax sinuatus (Wagl.). American Raven.

“Formerly common, now rare’ (B. W. E. ’87). Recorded by C. H.
Bollmann (86) along with the Prairie Hen and Parakeet as one of the
birds which had formerly been found in the county, but which was
then extinct.

ADDENDA.

80.5. [212.] Rallus virginianus (Linn.). Virginia Rail.
Uncommon migrant. Several were seen and one killed with a club in a
yard in town, April 22, 1904.

No.1, Nest and eggs of Little Green Heron in an apple tree.

.3. Four young of Little Green Heron posing for the camera,

No. 4. Cut of two young Herons, showing the tenacity with which they cling to a stick.

12—A.oF SCIENCE, ’04.

ers

No. 5. Two young Little Green Herons posing.

No. 6. Nest of Killdeer on ground.

Nest and eggs of Dove on rail tence. Nest 1s simply a shght addition to old
nest of some other bird.

Eggs of Dove on ground. No nest whatever.

ages of Dove on stump.

and ¢€

Nest

gzs of Dove in cedar.

10. Nest ande

),

Nc

No. 11. Nest and three eggs of Black-billed Cuckoo.

Yo. 12. Nest and six eggs of Downy Woodpecker in fence post.

No. 14. Nest and eggs of Kingbird in apple tree.

No. 15. Nest and six eggs of Phoebe on stone abutment of a bridge.

No. 17. Nest of Meadowlark, opened somewnat to snow eggs.

No. 18. Nest and three eggs of Chipping Sparrow, with one Cowbird egg, placed in a pear
tree.

and three eggs of Field Sparro

Nest

No. 19.

Sparrow.

a
&

on

of S

=
gos.

e

est and four

ae
20.5.)

No

No. 21. Nest and eggs of Chewink. Two of the eggs do not show on account of position
of camera.

No. 24. Nest and one egg of White-eyed Vireo, with two Cowbird eggs.

asher.

Nest and four eggs of Brown Thr

asher on ground.

Thre

Fes OF Brown

and four €

est

N

No. 26.

No. 27. Nest and four eggs of Blue-gray Gnateatcher in elm tree.

No. 28. Side view of nest of Blue-gray Gnatcatcher.

No. 29. Nest and six eggs of House Wren in sack hanging on fence. Hole in sack was
enlarged to show nest.

No. 30. Nest and eggs oy Robin on rail fence. Only one egg shows on account of position
of camera.

est and five eggs of Bluebird.

No. 31.

of Bluebird.

a
=

Youn

32

No.

192

page ours eeccee eee acecefeccnace ecee efrcccce i werpece ejaieililistetelaleis! Sao eSRR oat IRont op teeeces essce *9f0-U9p[OX UvOLLOULY “61
Toe a Brae Rare P28 OS ter eee pens 9- ma ag [ott feeeee cree Ko [teteee[eeeeeefeeeeee| eee eres yond dnwog iossery “ST
POLI ee iecoe |, Say SO CoH eer l aeuner| (MRSA eaNG p foci Se ices faekwes| eee aa eee ets ya o Mene merece noun
Ee ll ema alae seabed en eteseetc dlls nu theses oes eg focrect [reste [eeees ae MK frtteeepereees[oteeefereeer te tee oeq-sBAmRy “OT
HoeraniGnecs Alpeeetece eae tall eteee Sas | PeenenA ice |e ol hagte og foto Be lena ecwec ca salivace Petes tairrner eens proypoy “cL
Paseo FCO Ty i Q l Ne a eee ee | a . go feretctferteetfeeee cere eee eee YON, POOM “FT
le ee icles lec |operates p | 9g [reste |fecee: Seo [lest etifeec ese were e ees 1c strt a7
Geeet eee ear aleec ean sens ts g- — | 0g fof fee] Sf cece fereee[esseee| cee eeeer eee es toreAomg “ZI
Bet ace lec Maven (ac caliente ios bie | mp focecesferceeyfeee | So eeee[erees[eee |e Teeg pesutm-aeeln “TT
a8 se abel ste a Ral ao kor See tt ee | — | or [reece || eee BC ererct ene ese [eres |oaeees wow SE ie pPIVTILA “OL
Brae cece ea eee eer | pees lesbane [sve anne ; vemtefersses|[ossred QC [eveeee|eseees|osree | escreseeesJosuusiapy PapooH °G
eA ate] | een taro ho eects re] pe | nop [reecee[cceece feces eedfesse es] SC [reese deren: ‘ceoteeJapuRsIoy UBoLaUy “y
x
Sodddl lGocsael ocean] loseatc eae eres Hell aeeenes ae srrees|evsreeleceeee|soeceal] goa [oseeee|eseesleeeees|oeeee|-squpaomzoy paqse1o-eyqnoq *)
S881
Beye rene | tae eteteted [mets etal ee cotati apaeperaye| le nvevenciell [Mwai meats Marmdet tues seein cc lh oe sertselerereliverelisees| seer quay domMOg “9
apres anereearel eal heared vatatetec ||| acicicva hill eelarsate lll gee ae sretre|oceees|ereeee|eeeeeel| Qe larseesliecerfeesees[eseres|seeesaeeeseeeesuzg ys 10qSI0T *¢
pena leonealiee te « oi eesti | wars ecacal Seeeetvelllanasettell cots Res Ale Malate colins sae Real Man cal emote aarsallia anal na hie oleae [Ing s,oyeduuog -F
congener Cg oesraaecaliaas Te | oad eetcet|orece foresee tf cee She bslasies| sos Sone sal erie Dorey e beet en woot “¢
fees apa let a tarcr | ncem ecpr ll aes wed ze | ag [essees[oreeee|feeeeee Seip latipiece Vnwiieaiel| eurave!|iaiu Ast ah. ale agate) par[tq-pald °Z
By ehccte alle oeearee [meinen ae ose eee lindane AL ff ftee | Xo free fee fe tee Seay pautop, “7
mn 44 4 B eA
Bal see arr pees eee leeete|e meade |e | er lien a even
ee oe acta) eared bloeestt| (MUR Mie saghem fe) Nee eime aN ENeea ata
(Sr @ Ss . ® 5 = ° ef & mye =] | + o8
5 =| ® 3 a : S e ~ Sia est eens i 35
Psa an ict Seales Bo |) SOE eal psa aveane) ie
Boa ans g me || ap Eats teteatical i ell ater | os
~ ~_e oO n co
413 2) By bd
2 oo 2 ' ie") o
j= 10) 5 5 mm
ee se by

“AroyBuR{dxe Jos e1v pUv posn oI ‘SuNOA IO SSF YIM JSoU=U {WOUTMIOO=—d !1aJUTM—AM folva—=—az !yuR
-punqe=—e8 SUOT}BIACIGCGY 9ILT, “Egg ‘g ABP UL papszooart Useq ATWO sBYy JURIOUTIOD OY} ‘) Jopun ‘snyy ‘oyep ey) Aq
POPROTPUL ST JOVF ST SIVIA OMY IO OUO SULINP Way} Ud9eq ATUO SRY pALG BUT AA “ABPWOTBO o11QW9 ot} O} WOT}VTOI UL
parq Auv Jo uorytsod oy} puv ‘read oy} JO YooM AUK Zutsup pojoadxe oq AvUI Sparq JVTAK OOURTS & 4B [][9} 07 OUOATIL
Joy Asve oq [[IM 41 9[qGB} JO Suvow Aq ‘19dvd ayy Jo Apoq vt[} UL popsooed sJoRT OY} SOzITRUTUMS BTq") STUY,

}

* WIAViL

senna

oD
a
Pay
mm |

Akane teao O}LY P2TlB}-MO[[VMG
eee wets cese cee 9in}[n A yoRl[d

BoP aber OSU i cH AW \ AO¥yINY,

scle oele ve oe “""9A0T SULUINOTA

“@snoIn poyny
sores OT M-Gog
en ea tae coset OPT
srs seeee --gedidpurg peyyodg

1edidpuvg ueruBiyied

wee eee *1odidpurg AIBYLLOG
cintace Sinise.) eisidliela hwnd “ss07 MOTOR

S59[-MO[[OX 10}va14)

~-gedidpuvg poyempeditueg

wee srr esss* JodtdpuBg ysvoy

Se ar ‘lodidpueg [v¥10}00q
a alayee tp ete wie we Ke edtug S UOS[L MA

PNR OOO *Yooopoo “TULy
sere feign Sia RE Ia Ase 4000 UBvOlLlOuLy

eee eee cece a[NUIT[BH Bpllol iy

“Tey MOTTA TL

"BOG
Steinte bua euRiyn surdooy A
Fo ee EG uolo py WeeIy

jolsy UBOIIOW VY
ngeOG “MO1OFT ON[_ yoy)

U19}4Ig 1SBO'T

apeH% ‘Ulo}IIg UBoOllouUly
“*" 9SOOK) BPBUBY)

“es004 ont

youd Appny

*19}009 Jang

Joes e ree ee ees “+ peay-epng

“OF
“68

“LE
“OE

13—A.o¥ Screncr, ’04.

194

= — — | — —_ a= = u u
Ble ele Mk a0 Ih a a ae
Bs layout scl ingyen) Rage are
PAA ae Plea ral eC aaa tc hee Slee
es aaa
edleenoadlen aren te Reales j gel
: 12 02 eat Nase ah
osst| * | reer) ¢ | ¢ ote oG iles
Tall aataeslergeall ieee tee shod j j i
|
lee ear Hl Meree tll eres Gilmer eh lt aad aele Z ros
— —_ — — _ — — ces u
Zsiise Pee ypiohonef cesta 2 fanaa nagar bs eae es
PG ilsacthen a ioerteet anes Soul hres (rex ll Sersaell once eee
CRSgI
ae geal aes ecal 8 een aa i elie
as ah B wees = = i — i}
—]-—-) =f -— PH te | |
avaiehets GG He eteyetall patel svasealnmciacaliaceta aiere ie Aen lvade cre teucd| fate rece, ov
| Sst
I = _ = = — ah = x
—/—!—|.64] 4 j j j j
sage cea all ah 6) es [Datel AM Bel lore are SBR
ly mM oy oy
Bl aces fe en a ele
CONE ae teed RG a os een ie A (ese
B B oO 8 a .
er a o .
See 5

“AIBNIGIT

*“AIVNUBS

Sees tere
oh lbeunr
Nate? Ix
se [eetees
Silane
tase
alesis
ree an
Sil
aS)
Sa] &
S$ 3/5
fo a
Sa
44 4
2 ra =)
=i) i=}
st *

“yuep

-Isey lemuing

‘WUOpIsoY 107! Ay

"yuepl
“Soy queue ULI dg

Wy elaiphafnta) sit 1OW¥I9d poo M AuUMOG
Loyood poo M ALVA

~ AOYSYAULY, porpoge

ree OOHON) PEOTITG-HOVlg
reece OOYONL PO[[Lq-MOT[I A

[MQ AMOTIG

[MO pousoyy YBOL)
sreees eres s TA) YOROLOG
[MQ JOU M-ABG
[MO pore
[MQ potwo-yL0yg

“IMG potvo-Su0yT Uvolomy

Aoids() UBOIIOULY
YAU MOALBAG WROLLO OLY
YMUP, WOOST

oTFBT PISA
" OldUG UBpPlOY
oy MUTT possol-Yanoy uy
eo ecises YMUTT PosulM-pRosrg

*YMBTT poop Noys-poy
YMBIT POlLUy-poy
ae YAMBYSOH UvoLlouLy

|.

WWatehaihip sty eiaisveleia\p YMVIT S,4od009
pein Gk pouurys- davys
YMUTL YSie yy

“ponuryaooO—ATEA VL

_— u U
del Rae ane
—{-—|-2%
a ee ee
A oe ase ae

S881
somes teielme aes:
I a =
x —o =
sot gt | =
Dees ye i
cilia toce _

Cea alt paec lees
paetlane sent
Via t 4
i v nv
I ay | v
di Jd mf
le Bs

care Para aah
ah AHA M ‘I meaveld
| 9881

cae Nf ak eee Al [eae Sap
amit ceca ne see:
e881 | Ee
¥ || eggr |
Bao ronas
8, one] x
Geel feseel chee
mest || ~*

Eee | es ea bona
ne chic,
Ack a sre ese

chile aed eae
peal en

in Ae

Ipecac x
= | x

«|! Were ivite
lieknrant
pee IRE N aa
ele oeearan

At

ect Sinccah
1a. less y

"MOIRA OsnO
ia “ MOLIBAG 10080 A.
eae r ess ‘andssuo7y puvjdey

- exByMOUG

oe ***"*MTHSIG ould
Sore qougploy avolomy

sul "Tlodpoy
Th [11488019 posurm-oq1y A,

“"*"T]IGssol/) UBOLLOULY
sratate siete ’e inh wale qouly a[daing

“" yRoqsoly SULUOAT

a[OVLY pozuoig

oT pllquyovrg Aysny
Strate cnehate terete O[OLICQ) O10 W114 |B

YIL[MOpBoW
prllqyov[_ poesurm-poy
Paro
“HUrpoqog
“ss )* MOI) TOI ULOL
ee a ee ad AV {' ong
YAIBT] POULOT] OLATBIg
LOYOYBOAT Y YSVOT
teres rs" LOYOJBOAT HT S,[[LBIY,

““LOTOPROATT poysoto-udary)
es 1OYOU BOAT POT[]O- MOT[OR
ae. “9OMOd POON
1NYOPBOAT] POPIsS-9AI[O

+ gqamg
_ LOY} BOAT AT poysory
ares palqaury

Bath

-~SULULUIN ET peywoayye AQnY
HG Mi donne FTN cOuMIY)
Gru af Sh YMUET IFIIN
[[E -r00d-diy Ay
oe ae * LOYOI[Y] ULOGI10 N
me Perey tina poerp[eq-pey
x | seyo0dpoo Ay pepBoy-poy
10, POO M POPBO[TA U19Y4L0

"10Y 99d POO A\ POTT]O4-MOTIO

196

a -y-|- Hy <p yer pees panes eee Mi Seo e ay vase sews ee mace “QOITA pose-poyy “RFT
i iced RS i ea aan lanl pee | ieee eae fan EE ue atl
el footy foal aoe ur one ee ieee | ae Or ope asl laonon OFMYS U9YAON “OPT
easteall Rae ies hehe ae ae ene Kits tee) yc [esteafeeces foes SUTRE A BPE “CF
seioDgh sterile i A | Sel edy Pecan eos rere Meese! gy x tee “MO[[VMG pesUIM-YSnoy “pF
eee | ecevee| «rene = ae Se a pieees erJ Jive | em atic Rx | Sa (GR) Una OO w ele le visite teleturs MOT[BAAG yurg CPL
Iie ors he Meera aren Pua a veel osst | Gear vaget algae ees mean: sess} mx | gage [ccceeftcc: [setcceeeee ss worpeag wort “Ebr
pao NG| ene ee Aiea ee seals ee K mG [ocrtfee fees ux | BSC ceferees |e sere esses Orem UNeE “TPT
nomen aoc eee ee Pees | Ra at Wer Saar ol Grapes lagen ti msine ell eet oS MOLTEMS BMD “OFT
one ecapcwmelligre || oko oas | calc a ais iy a foc fes [eee oe argue ending “get
Rates lotrel | Maen goals as =e a = s : salar tonya x Jeveees “-qoSwURT, LOULLUNY “gery
pony hoecceal Meme pall | wl RAIDS ae “ TesRUty, WEBS “LET
ee] we eee C- * Sahat ae u u -§% Rise | ase eel se wee) ~s ceegjes eos | U2 7° (ECCUONGON SO ICNCaCaO | HOaCICIOSCEC ICE see evees " TOssSlOyoOuy “OCT
sia: = ‘ehextAlllessiipsliere he +e = ae = er -E Ore Staller croc tuo cae a Rx 2592 BOOT Hoi egatay Ostpuy “COT
Sess rate | eat ea taiaate sosee| gp | gg [eceeeefeeee es veeeeed yg [eeneee Sean “YRoqsory poysvoaq-osoy “FET
ri sb Es a ia me ms j se pA Ke ed rolpewi| wee ee der weds Wee ih eehtocamices: bife ane PILGPOY “EET
eel ees3| es < Fy a a " <i Sa RBs || Mower fo Oe l|foneeeccr enn ueceen DOYMOT, “ZET
Pel ge | og feseeee [eens =allssasieise Geta SN Eoe Nit x | Femelle Ree nate aioe Moaedg xo “Tey
feet C Eee ldose cll ceteevet)|losesc' sll caine Boose ooh oa eller Sec ae Mogedg dureag ge]
peahon Miata: @ 01 CEPA Al teat lee treraeilll caste ge eere[cerec|ereeeefoerse |] yc feces | ceeeelieeee [ices foresees mommedg supooury “¢zT
is = ie i a= Uu u u os — S| eo Bex ee seer x eee seees* MOTIBAG su0g VAL
o é es = — g- u -g U Ce ed ee 2 ad x x seen ee soos MOLES 8 UvUyoRg "LZ
= — -9 ee ee lee te we pew ee \ I- ee: = aes =, nae .- oe Bx . . wae “oounys P910[090-99B[G “OZ1
serene S- ae — a = aes aT a0 er 9% we eee ee eet ex 4 x ote reser ess MOIIBAG PLOT sC7 Ti
coco G- i xe ae Sy | Si | NO a ic dere ae Vee | cc moguedg sulddiqg Fzq
a pa -Z1 se tee . ere ee lee ww we {Jicreee ra 6I- as =f. CS CLO fy Roem Sark Od oy cat at BX Cs Ce cn | es" MOTIBAG COLT, "ESL
ferten Nase a myotcccfere dt lg a | —a | -g [oe ee seta fay fee fers} mommdg poyworgy-o91q 4 “221
sees CZ -F eee se eeee al see gI- -OT seen 3 eee see eee seeee oe *MOIIVdG POUMOLO-« FIG AA "121
she ee lee ewes fee wees lee cece 9c- as i — Uu = uw pie -~9% eee eee tenes RX eee ee ete ee ee eee MOIIRAG ylvry “OZL
EO Sq. havoae nl eau loess og | eBoecnat| Mnenaey ates festa ler oda | rated So | ease < MoaMudg S, MO[SUOFT “6TT
eee seen f- cs = ey =i Si -ZI ee eee ae tee se wewele x er ee ay *MOLLBAQ loddoyssery “SIL
ahaa 9- ue a an Sel aves all pe levseesiease-slilemmonlh | ie pore} wodtedg tuuBaeg “LIT
SNS Pos. fe sere Pepe Pere aS BN DD <=
o 4 Ss = 09 ie = ca 5 o o =} alc) 09 oB 5 a0
1) @ o S [=| a @ - = 9 ay Ss ies =] [| > o68
BBE a Beal Ope Nim eT esea Mase eee Uitcree ll tere'|cee | oe aie
Samer ies ees ee Stell el ais (Osh Ihntes) leat
alee 2 ; =e | = =| 8 Es
| | nines eb) fee Ee]
Bm | © ' ® ®
oul: ee ,

“penuryuoO— ATE ViL

ee

XXXXxx x X

ey
eee

Bx

"ARO poqsBotq-MOT[OK
“* YBOIGI-MOT[I A PUVB[AIV I,

“ 1O[GIV AM JULUINO

“ 1O[GIB AA JNoTy9uUN0D

| “* Lapqiw Ay AYonQuoe y
f aga 10YR\ VUBISINOT

“YSNAYT, 1098 MQ 8,JouuTAy

Hieeee sees cesses GEMM, L098 AA

Wirt tees eeeeeeeeeees DaTg-U0AG
Feseee eres sees ToT qa AQ OLR
eee co re) MUDL TB CT
AOE ONL INCL
Lo|qare Ay uo01y peworny- "HI
TTT =" LOGIT AL OLOTAROAG
* LOTGAV M UBLUANG yOBLg
ss 1OTQIB AA [L[Od-yoBlE
“LOTUIV AA PoISvoig-AR_
L9[GLU AM POPIS-InUysoyyy

- * LO[GAV AA UBOTNIAD
1O/GIVM BIPOUTRI

ee TOTGAT A OTIS AL

“AO [GAB AA ONT ET POYWOsNy~" TEL
IOTUIB AA MOTTOX

Jorssr tts TOrqIBA ABI OdBD

"LOTGIB MY BINAIBT UO Y4.LO N

1o[qiv \ oossouudy,
* L8/G1IB AY POUMO1N-95 UBC

“ LO[QALB AA O[[LAYST Ny
"LOT QIB A POSULM-UOPl[OP)

“** JOTOUIR AM POSULM-ONnTT
“""TO[GIB A FULYBO-WLO AL

“LO[GAB A ALBJIOUOYIOI
“1OTGIV MM OILY MA PUB HOVE
OOILA POfO-0F1 MA
sess s8** OOITA POpRoy-on[g
"77 OOITA PO}BOITI-MOTIOX
cs OOITA SULTQIB MA

es OOITA BIYUTOpPB[IY q

“OST
“\8L

“PSL

“S81

“C81
“181
“OST
“6LT
“BLT
*LLI
“OLT
“GLI
“PLL

“SLI

“CLL

“TLE
“OLT
“691
“891
“LOT
“99L
“GOT
“POL
“S9T

“C9T

‘T9L
“O9T
“6ST
“SGT

“LST
‘OSL
“GGT
“PST
“SST
“OSL
“TSI
“NST
“OFT

198

“soded 8 ea, Voy “If, Ul

pourezUO BBP OY} Worl UBWOSLT] pAvUOOT pUL 9ozeIg AIUOZ SeTAvY) Aq poredodd o10M XOPUT PUL seTquz OY T..

o v G a v B vw uw | eta |e oo 9) DER ete Mallee ee wre Conn Pcoae Cah Ved sa Sick eee Anh *pargonid “Giz
i v v vB B B POUCH BACT Vee ere oF i ag Tact bee Aa BE a XCM Se he te ae uIqoYyY UBOTLIOIY "FIZ
Rua Ie- me feeeces fesse | cece dere go a 1 dil feasei llonciracul| saceyad ie Gee | G0) Kia eta sere SNAG WUT “¢E1zZ
z Sie eee en I -97 Pazar hisarcae trees ix foes oll asoone|laaaue YSNAyy, PoyoBG-Oallg “ZIZ
Rake 1 G33 Beil sei ee OL x cpeecsssyeessoss Gandy Poyeeyo-ABLy “11g
adowie e{-L sreeeel Qt | -¢% Necetekes vere] ay “= GSmIGT 8, HOSTEL *O1Z
Aa ceNt ZI- ze oS Soll Pete ui Zl vrvee[feresee[eeeeee] yy vrersseoseee eres GSMIT POOM “GZ
eos SI- — — ~- =U | oe Uso fesse Sa Were Scope ra “Lat oOJwBoPVUH ABAS-ON[Y “SOT
Ce ee 1Z- -1% see eee see S[- = -83 see BX stew yO [SULLY pouMoto- Aquy “L0G
meraahe 8Z- — -1Z L- — — -} B Cie | Peaesnceied pratt ‘go[3uly PEUMOID-UdP[OX) “90
ay ae me ve oe oy me = a Es we pate Ble conto miuallocasod|aadoode “ POPUMOIYY) VULPOILA) *COZ
aw june eae lec L- ee ate x | Setieolleenitar ; Dopeyory “FOr
res pao as ite Law = u u ee = Pl EE reed ag ae Na aera ADI Ca ne 7 BsnOUrit gy ol cS
= _— = COZENS ite Maal eas alll gees ZI- — — — _ SA lla: 1 YOy@TINN poysvelqd Poy “ZZ
— == == — — — . — = U = = vay pe x SOM MUN [ACRE GEC MUS
I B v -1Z 0g- v v a ee Ale cates Pence oS | ae Mar ape acs gaat a gece Tode0ly UMOAG "(0G
eave | hAaaeod jd 62 fc ep “Olle yo pecs sreee]ossees] = Od Ay YSABIL POTLIG-3a0] “KET
ay fox a Fale SbF el erases lesbian | esta Reon e- es LY Allipost sialon dere ax fcc frre ieee "UALAA LOJULM “SGT
ftodno||csoe veeee] gq is 2s mys Ere lan ah lage shu cp|iaaeoac veel py 500 vievssesesseeesegQT Ay OSNOH “LET
GOBIOD zI- fee ae a, ae CL ar A eta scl abe fs Quo aes breees esses: Toa BS MOTMOg “OBL
au oS ley a "3 eels =a ay £2 Sa ep ereaees eter ; Jeseees a UOLM BUL[OIVD “CL
Sant ZI- : Ly i) Sie Se) Sc bh Soy |} | | x 1Slec| veeveeeee oss Jouseayy, UMOIG “FET
dade|kinea8d 9- 24 ves Eel learre et cent [One alos iiiiattene meee necro ys (van |pasadel leaner lScbcdnaded wuromotsaban Palqyey “e6T
Niece sa nayiwenge ain fea 9- Li evel opal eye | Fieetes see sesDaTGSUTHOOW “261
Je-6 Go|. Aandi |e on I aoeatc See Peeeee | gre = agro ltimncoarc nora “os utdtg uBolOWY “Tél
he 6L- _ — — || —u|—uU}! -¢ Hecate * os aTeIspey UBOLIOWULY “(6T
Wa = Ope) cog esas | gen Sie yeRenels x “ss oss sss ToTqau AA URIPVURD “ERI
ceceee 8I- =1¢ }\| ete) ay mts tL-8 ewes treeeee geal es Gee ic ee Trees sess os TOTGIB AA S MOST “Sol
G88
BX syoll fe eer rL- es ve Sua apg | chee fe eee Seep etetee| Bag [eeenen let een cise cesses gorge A PepOOH “LST
z\°e Slfueesa heresy [ese tee esse) ceo ea es ae: riya ae
Piles iecuneoe Meera re Veeder | ios he Weta | Be ole |S | mew
OMe ime Soll ron ete eee oh el el Ske eee
Bish Berger eye : Rear ei Ser eileen rercdime Nusa ee
Sime ocue ane alta, | eal eee cee ee, x | iy | 8
ce — i | : ee ied ae} o 5
\. . . ] } 09 5 oO ‘a fag
| | | sa| 8 lees Ee]
| | | on i=) | oO oO
| (ee ak arerne os: Sena?

“ponutjuopO—H Ta Vib

American Bittern, 25.
American Coot, 34.

American Crossbill, 108.
American Egret, 28.

American Golden-eye, 19.
American Goldfinch, 111.
American Goshawk, 55,
American Long-eared Owl, 65.
American Merganser, 89.
American Osprey, 64.
‘American Pipit, 191.
American Redstart, 190.
American Robin, 214.
American Rough-legged Hawk, 59.
American Scaup Duck, 17.
American Sparrow Hawk, 63.
American Woodcock, 35,

Bachman’s Sparrow, 127.

Bald Eagle, 61.

Baltimore Oriole, 103.

Bank Swallow, 143.

Barn Swallow, 141.

Barred Owl, 67.

Bartramian Sandpiper, 43.
Bay-breasted Warbler, 170.
Belted Kingfisher, 74.
Bewick’s Wren, 196.

Bittern, American, 25.
Bittern, Least, 26.

Black and White Warbler, 154.
Black-billed Cuckoo, 73.
Blackbird, Red-winged, 100.
Blackbird, Rusty, 104.
Blackburnian Warbler, 172.
Blackpoll Warbler, 171.
Black-throated Blue Warbler, 165.

Black-throated Green Warbler, 174.

Black Vulture, 50.
Bluebird, 215.

Blue Goose, 23.

Blue-gray Gnatcatcher, 208.
Blue-headed Vireo, 152.
Blue Jay, 96.

Blue-winged Warbler, 157.
Bobolink, 98.

Bob-white,'46.
Bonaparte’s Gull, 4.

INDEX.

Broad-winged Hawk, 58.
Bronzed Grackle, 105,
Brown Creeper, 200.
Brown Thrasher, 194.
Buflle-head, 20.
Bunting, Indigo, 135.

Canada Goose, 24.
Canadian Warbler, 189.
Canvas-back, 16,

Cape May Warbler, 163.
Carolina Chickadee, 205.
Carolina Wren, 195.
Catbird, 193.

Cedar Waxwing, 145.
Cerulean Warbler, 168.
Chat, Yellow-breasted, 186,
Chestnut-sided Warbler, 169,
Chickadee, 204.
Chickadee Carolina, 205.
Chimney Swift, 84.
Chipping Sparrow, 124.
Cliff Swallow, 140.
Common Crow, 97.
Common Tern, 6.
Connecticut Warbler, 183.
Cooper’s Hawk, 54.

Coot, American, 34.

Cormorant, Double-crested, 7.

Cowhbird, 99.

Crane, Whooping, 30.
Creeper, Brown, 200.

Crested Flycatcher, 87.
Crossbill, American, 108.
Crossbill, White-winged, 109.
Crow, Common, 97.

Cuckoo, Black-billed, 73.
Cuckoo, Yellow-billed, 72.

Dickcissel, 136.
Double-crested Cormorant, 7.
Dove, Mourning, 48.

Downy Woodpecker. 76.
Duck, American Scaup, 17.
Duck, Lesser Scaup, 18.
Duck, Ruddy, 22.

Duck, Wood, 14.

199

200

Eagle, Bald, 61.

Eagle, Golden, 60.
Egret, American, 28.
European Sparrow, 116.
Evening Grosbeak, 106.

Field Sparrow, 125.
Finch, Purple, 107.
Flicker, Northern, 81.
Florida Gallinule, 33.
Flycatcher, Crested, 87.
Green-crested, 92.
Least, 94.
Olive-sided, 89.
Traill’s, 93.
Yellow-bellied, 91.
Forster’s Tern, 5.
Fox Sparrow, 131.

Gallinule, Florida, 33.
Gnatcatcher, 208.

Goose, Blue, 23.

Goose, Canada, 24.
Green-crested Flycatcher, 92.
Golden-crowned Kinglet, 206.
Golden Eagle, 60.
Golden-eye, American, 19.
Golden-winged Warbler, 158.
Goldfinch, American, 111.
Goshawk, American, 55.
Grackle, Bronzed, 105.
Grasshopper Sparrow, 118.
Gray-cheeked Thrush, 211.
Great Blue Heron, 27.

Great Horned Owl, 70.
Greater Yellow-legs, 40.
Grebe, Ilorned, 1.

Grebe, Pied-billed, 2.

Green Heron, 29.
Green-winged Teal, 11.
Grinnel’s Water Thrush, 180.
Grosbeak, Evening, 106.
Grosbeak, Rose-breasted, 134.
Grouse, Ruffed, 47.

Gull, Bonaparte’s, 4.

Hairy Woodpecker, 75.
Hawk, American Rough-legged, 59.
American Sparrow, 63.
Broad-winged, 58.
Cooper’s, 54.
Marsh, 52.
Night, 83.
Pigeon, 62.
Red-shouldered, 57.
Red-tailed, 56
Sharp-shinned, 53.

Henslow’s Sparrow, 119.

Heron, Great Blue, 27.

Heron, Green, 29.

Hermit Thrush, 213.

Hooded Merganser, 9.

Hooded Warbler, 187.

Horned Grebe, 1.

Horned, Lark, 95.

House Wren, 197.

Hummingbird, Ruby-throated, 85.

Indigo Bunting, 135.

Jay, Blue, 96.
Junco, Slate-colored, 126.

Kentucky Warbler, 182.

Killdeer, 45.

Kingbird, 86.

Kingfisher, Belted, 74.

Kinglet, Golden-crowned, 206.
Ruby-crowned, 207.

Kite, Swallow-tailed, 51.

Lapland Longspur, 114.
Lark, Meadow, 101.

Lark, Prairie Horned, 95.
Lark Sparrow, 120.

Least Bittern, 26.

Least Flycatcher, 94.
Least Sandpiper, 38.
Lesser Seaup Duck, 18.
Lincoln’s Sparrow, 129.
Loggerhead Shrike, 147.
Long-billed Wren, 199.
Longspur, Lapland, 114.
Loon, 3.

Louisiana Water Thrush, 181.

Magnolia Warbler, 167.
Mallard, 10.

Marsh Hawk, 52.

Martin, Purple, 139.
Maryland Yellow Throat, 185.
Meadowlark, 101.
Merganser, American, 89,
Merganser, Hooded, 9.
Mockingbird, 192.
Mourning Dove, 48.
Mourning Warbler, 184.
Myrtle Warbler, 166.

Nashville Warbler, 159.

Night Hawk, 83.

Northern Flicker, 81.

Northern Parula Warbler, 162.
Northern Pileated Woodpecker, 78.

Northern Shrike, 146.
Nuthatch, Red-breasted, 202.
Nuthatch, White-breasted, 201.

Olive backed Thrush, 212.
Olive-sided Flycatcher, 89.
Orange-crowned Warbler, 160.
Orchard Oriole, 102.
Oriole, Baltimore, 103.
Orivle, Orchard, 102.
Owl, American Long eared, 65.
Barred, 67.
Great Horned, 70.
Saw-whet, 68.
Screech, 69.
Short-eared, 66.
Snowy. 71.
Oven-bird, 178.

Palm Warbler, 176.
Pectoral Sandpiper, 37.
Pewee, Wood, 90.
Philadelphia Vireo, 149.
Phoebe, 88.

Pied-billed Grebe, 2.
Pigeon Hawk, 62.
Pileated Woodpecker, 78.
Pine Siskin, 112.

Pine Warbler, 175.
Pintail, 13.

Pipit, American, 191.
Prairie Horned Lark, 95.
Prairie Warbler, 177.
Prothonotary Warbler, 155.
Purple Finch, 107.
Purple Martin, 139.

Rail, Yellow, 32.

Redbird, 133.

Red-bellied Woodpecker, 80.
Red-breasted Nuthatch, 207.
Red-eyed Vireo, 148.
Redhead, 15.

Red-headed Woodpecker, 79.
Redpoll, 110.
Red-shouldered Hawk, 57.
Redstart, American, 180.
Red-tailed Hawk, 56.
Red-winged Blackbird, 100.
Robin, American, 214.
Rose-breasted Grosbeak, 134.
Rough-winged Swallow, 144.
Ruby-crowned Kinglet, 207.
Ruby-throated Hummingbird, 85.
Ruddy Duck, 22.

Ruffed Grouse, 47.

Rusty Blackbird, 104.

201

Sandpiper, Bartramian, 43.
Least, 38.

Pectoral, 37.
S mipalmated, 39.
Solitary, 42,
Spotted, 44.

Savanna Sparrow, 117.

Saw-whet Owl, 68.

Scarlet Tanager, 37.

Scoter, Surf, 21.

Sereech Owl, 69.

Semipalmated Sandpiper, £9.

Sharp-shinned Hawk, 53.

Short-eared Owl, 66.

Shoveller, 12.

Shrike, Loggerhead, 147.

Shrike, Northern, 146.

Siskin, Pine, 112.

Slate-colored Junco, 126.

Snipe, Wilson’s, 36.

Snowflake, 113.

Snowy Owl, 71.

Solitary Sandpiper, 42.

Song Sparrow, 128.

Sora, 31.

Sparrow, Bachman’s, 127.
Chipping, 124.
European, 116.
Field, 125.

Fox, 131.
Grasshopper, 118.
Henslow’s, 119.
Lark, 120.
Lincoln’s, 129.
Savanna, 117.
Song, 128.

Swamp, 130.

Tree, 123.

Vesper, 115.
White-throated, 122.
Sparrow Hawk, 63.

Summer Tanager, 138.

Swallow, Barn, 141.
Bank, 143.

Cliff, 140.
Rough-winged, 144.
Tree, 142.

Swamp Sparrow, 130.

Spotted Sandpiper, 44.

Surf Scoter, 21.

Swallow-tailed Kite, 51.

Swift, Chimney, 8}.

Sycamore Warbler, 173.

Tanager, Scarlet, 137.
Tanager, Summer, 138.
Teal, Green-winged, LI.

202

Tennessee Warbler, 161.
Tern, Common, 6.
Tern, Forster’s, 5.
Thrasher, Brown, 194.
Thrush, Gray-cheeked, 211.
Hermit, 213.
Olive-backed, 212.
Wilson’s, 210.
Wood, 219.
Titmouse, Tufted, 203.
Towhee, 182.
Traill’s Flycatcher, 93.
Tree Sparrow, 123.
Tufted Titmouse, 203.
Turkey Vulture, 49.

Vesper Sparrow, 115.
Vireo, Blue-headed, 152.
Philadelphia, 149.

Red-eyed, 148.
Warbling, 150.
White-eyed, 153.
Yellow-throated, 151.
Vulture, Black, 50.
Vulture, Turkey, 49.

W arbler—
Bay-breasted, 170.
Black and White, 154.
Blackburnian, 172.
Blackpoll, 171.
Black-throated Blue, 165.
Black-throated Green, 174.
Blue-winged, 157.
Canadian, 189.
Cape May, 163.
Cerulean, 168.
Chestnut-sided, 169.
Connecticut, 183.
Golden-winged, 158.
Hooded, 187.
Kentucky, 182.
Magnolia, 167.
Mourning, 184.
Myrtle, 166.
Nashville, 159.
Northern Parula, 162.
Orange-crowned, 160.
Palm, 176.

Pine, 175.
Prairie, 177.
Prothonotary, 155.
Sycamore, 173.
Tennessee, 161.
Wilson’s, 188.
Worm-eating, 156.
Yellow, 164.
Warbling Vireo, 150.
Water Thrush, 179.
Waxwing, Cedar, 145.
White-breasted Nuthatch, 201.
White-crowned Sparrow, 121.
White-eyed Vireo, 153.
White-winged Crossbill, 109.
White-throated Sparrow, 122.
Whooping Crane, 30.
Wilson’s Snipe. 36.
Wilson’s Thrush, 210.
Wilson’s Warbler, 188.
Winter Wren, 198.
W hip-poor-will, 82.
Woodcock, American, 39.
Wood Duck, 14.
Wood Pewee, 90.
Woodpecker, Downy, 76.
Hairy, 75.
Northern Pileated, 78.
Red-bellied, 80.
Red-headed, 79.
Yellow-bellied, 77.
Wood Thrush, 209.
Wren—
Bewick’s, 196.
Carolina, 195.
House, 197.
Long-billed, 199.
Winter, 198.

Yellow-bellied Flycatcher, 91.
Yellow-bellied Woodpecker, 77.
Yellow-billed Cuckoo, 72.
Yellow-breasted Chat, 186.
Yellow-legs, Greater, 40.
Yellow-legs, 41.

Yellow Rail, 32.
Yellow-throated Vireo, 151.
Yellow Warbler, 164.

ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION IN CoNDUCTORS OF DIFFERENT
MATERIALS AND IN ELECTROLYTES.

ARTHUR L. FOLEY and CHESTER A. EVANS.

This investigation was undertaken for the purpose of determining
whether or not the character of a conductor has any effect upon the
electro-motive force generated in it when it is made to cut magnetic lines
of force.

Is the e. m. f. generated in a copper wire of given length exactly equal
to the e. m. f. generated in a silver wire of the same length when both
cut lines of force at the same rate? And is this e. m. f. equal to that
generated in a nonconducting tube of length 1, filled with an electrolyte,
when the electrolyte is made to cut lines of force at the above rate?
BHlectrolytic conduction and metallic conduction appear to be very dif-
ferent processes, why then should one expect metals and electrolytes
to give identical results from electromagnetic induction?

It is evident that many difficulties and sources of error will be
avoided if-the two conductors to be tested can be placed together and
made to cut the same field in such a manner that the resultant e. m. f.
generated is zero, provided that electromagnetic induction is independent
of the substance of the conductor. Also, the direction of the e. m. f.
must be constant if a sensitive galvanometer is to be used to detect it.

Fig. 1.

Let M (Fig. 1) be a cylindrical magnet mounted to revolve about its
axis, and let w and w' be wires in contact respectively with the middle of
the magnet and the center of the end, and connected, as shown, to a gal-

204

yanometer, G. Suppose the magnet to be revolved at a high speed. Few
lines of force cut w’, as it is parallel with the axis of the magnet. W-
is cut by the lines passing from pole to pole and if the pole strength is
sufficiently great and the magnet is revolved rapidly, the galvanometer

and therefore an induced e. m. f. If w and wt

will indicate a current
are led from the magnet as in Fig 2, it is evident that the resultant e.
m. f. generated is zero, since that generated in w opposes that generated
in w'. But suppose that w is of one metal and w' of another, if the
e. m. f. generated in each is not the same, the galyanometer, if sufficiently
sensitive, will indicate a current. The wire w' may be replaced with a
tube containing an electrolyte and the electromagnetic induction in the
electrolyte measured. To increase the sensitiveness of the apparatus

»

there may be a number of w’s and w’’s connected as shown in Fig. 3.

205

Although considerable work has been done, it has been entirely of a
preliminary character. With a magnet of pole-strength 415, making 4,000:
revolutions per minute, with 100 copper wires (w) and 100 German silver
wires (w’), the junior author of this paper found that no current was
indicated by a galvanometer whose constant was 1.1x10-°. The magnet
was rotated by an electric motor and the galvanometer was placed on a
pier in an adjoining room some thirty feet distant. Work with electro-
lytes is now in progress.

The senior author is arranging to make the apparatus more sensitive
by using an electromagnetic field and a more delicate galvyanometer.
Results will be given in a future paper.

206

INTERFERENCE FRINGES ABOUT THE PATH OF AN ELECTRIC
DISCHARGE.

ARTHUR L. FoLey and J. H. HASEMAN.

Some ten years ago the senior author of this paper, while photo-
graphing interference fringes under various conditions, noticed that
fringes were produced about the path of an electric discharge. Owing to
the press of other work further investigation of the subject was post-
poned. <A few weeks since the subject was revived and arrangements
were made to continue the investigation.

The apparatus consists of two rectangular wood boxes about twelve
feet long. the larger box about eight inches square, the smaller one about
six inches square and arranged to telescope in the larger box. Thus the
total length of the box can be made anything from twelve to twenty-four
feet. The boxes were painted dead black on the inside. The far end of
the larger box is provided with a sort of camera attachment and plate
holder. The far end of the smaller box is light tight, except for a
metal disc, which has several apertures bored through it, the aper-
tures varying in diameter from .01 cm. to .5 cm. By rotating the dise
any desired aperture can be brought into position at the center of the
end of the box. The aperture was illuminated by the blue end of the
spectrum of an electric arc. A piece of ground glass was placed against
the outside of the metal dise to insure the spreading out of the light pass-
ing through the aperture.

The needle points were placed near the center of the box, which was
made about twenty feet long. The points were charged by connecting
them to the knobs of a ten-inch plate induction machine driven by an
electric motor.

Interference fringes were produced whether the discharge was visible
or invisible, continuous or intermittent, and whether between points or
small spheres. On some of the plates taken with the needle points 1 cm.
apart and with an invisible discharge three dark bands can be seen on
either side of the dark central band connecting the two points.

Sufficient work has not been done to warrant an attempt at an ex-
planation of the results obtained, therefore further results will be reserved

until others have been obtained that may throw some light on the subject.

bo
j=)
aT

Cuscuta AMERICANA IL.

STANLEY COULTER.

In a study of the genus Cuscuta a peculiar situation in regard to
Cuscuta Americana L. arose, which may prove of interest. The history
of this species seems evident. The original plant was collected by Sir
Hans Sloane in Jamaica and is described in Hist. Jamaica, 1707, vol. 1,
p. 201. Gronovius in 1743 determined a specimen collected by John Clay-
ton to be the same as the Sloane plant, to which he definitely referred;
Plante Virginica, p. 18: 1743. Linnezus, 1753, in Sp. PI. vol. 1, p. 124,
copies the description of Gronovius verbatim and gives the form its bi-
nomial name. Linnzeus refers specifically to Pl. Virg., p. 18.

It is clear, then, that Sloane’s plant in the South Kensington Museum
should stand as the type of Cuscuta Americana L. That as a matter of
fact our present Cuscuta Americana L. is a very different plant from that
of Sir Hans Sloane will perhaps be clear from the discussion which fol-
lows. Indeed, Cuscuta Americana L. as at present understood seems to
have arisen without a type upon which to rest.

Through the courtesy of the authorities of the South Kensington
Museum I was enabled to study the Sloane plant somewhat carefully,
with the following results:

Calyx gamosepalous; tube short; lobes coriaceous in center, mem-
branous at edges; diverging at an acute angle; apex abruptly acute; large
cells (plainly made out with hand lens) irregularly scattered; membranous
part of lobes, as well as inner and outer surface of petals, thinly clothed
with velvety trichomes. Lobes of calyx one-half longer than the tube,
the tips meeting those of the reflexed lobes of the corolla. Lobes rather
spreading, at least not closely appressed to tube of the corolla.

Corolla; tube urceolate, about 2 mm. leng; lobes refiexed, obtuse, sep-
arating from each other by a narrowly acute angle, about one-half as long
as the tube. In many cases margins of petals infolded, which, however,
may be due to imperfect drying.

Stamens apparently four, about one-haif as long as lobes of the corolla,
though exserted on account of the reflexed habit of the lobes.

Styles as long as tube of corolla, widely diverging.

Stigmas decidedly globose-capitate.

208

Inflorescence in cymose clusters of various sizes; peduncles often
branched; pedicels, which are of varying length, bearing a single flower.
Peduncles very generally stronger than the stems from which they arise.
Pedicels in the majority of instances from 10 to 15 mm. long. Sloane’s
note that flowers arise from “single side of stalk’? seems well taken,
though his added statement, ‘as others of this kind are,’ needs modifica-
tion.

Stem, closely appressed to stem of host where haustoria are developed
and in such places strengthened and roughened. It also presents a large
number of free ends which branch somewhat freely, each branch being
subtended by an evident leaf-scale trom 1 to 3 mm. long. The free
branches have a twisted appearance and twine freely about each other.
The plant as a whole is straw colored.

The abundant material permitted the Cissection of the flowers, giving
the following additional characters:

Flower generally four-parted, in this differing from the majority of
American Cuscutas.

Anthers somewhat sagittate, filaments strong.

Scales large, about one-half length of filament: united at base; deeply
cleft near top, less deeply at sides, intervening arch not fringed.

Sepals narrowly elliptical, the acumination being really a cuspidation.

Petals delicate in structure with but few large cells; elliptical, obtuse;
reflexed fully one-third of their length.

Ovary lenticular, rather sharp-edged. In early anthesis styles are
about length of ovary; later they become as long as corolla and very
prominent. The styles are somewhat thick, awl-shape, and the globose
character of the stigma is apparent from the first.

This is Sloane’s Jamaica plant as I was able to make out its char
acters after an extremely careful study.

The Linnean description in Sp. Pl. (1753), p. 124, is as follows:

“C, Americana.

Cuscuta floribus pendunculatis.

Cuscuta caule aphyllo volubili repente (Gron. Fl. Virg. p. 18).

Cuscuta inter majorem et minorem media, filamentis longis et
floribus late super arbores et campos se extendens. Habitat in Virginia.”

This is a verbatim copy of Gronovius’ description of “‘Cuscuta inter

majorem et minorem media” in Flora Virginica, Pas Prima. p. 18. 1748.

209

Gronovius in turn closely followed the description of Sloane in his Hist.
Jamaica, vol. 1, p. 201 (1707), t. 128, f. 3, his added characterizations being
of very doubtful value.

Through the courtesies of the officials of the Linnwan Society I was
able to examine the Cuscute in the Linnaan collection. This collection
had evidently been examined by Dr. Engelmann in his study of the
genus and his penciled annotations were upon the various sheets. There
are three sheets, each of which is labeled C. Americana in the well known
writing of Linneus. One of these is evidently Cuscuta Gronovii Willd,
and Dr. Engelmann so regarded it, as is shown by his annotation. An-
other is probably Cuscuta umbellata H. B. Kx., at least it was so referred
by Dr. Engelmann, and whether the reference be correct or not, the plant
is certainly not the same as that upon the other two sheets. It is on the
plant upon the remaining sheet that Dr. Engelmann rests his conception
of the Cuscuta Americana of Linnaus. It might be a fair question, in
passing, as to why either of the other sheets might not have been selected
as the basis of the Linnzean C. Americana.

The plant upon the third sheet, then, is to be taken as representing
the notion of Linnaeus of the species under consideration. The specimen
upon this sheet conforms fairly to Engelmann’s description and also to
that of Choisy, 1841, although it might be said that Choisy’s figures of
C. Americana L. in Choisy’s Cuscuta, Jan. 21, 1841, No. 51, p. 186 tab. 4,
f. 4, could not have been derived from his description of the species in his
“Cuscuta enumeratio.’”?’ The most cursory comparison of the description
and drawings will make this fact plain.

The form upon this sheet, however, is not the same as Sloane’s plant.
A careful study and dissection of the plant gives the following characters:

Calyx 5-parted, polysepalous; lobes oval, acute, diverging from each
other at an acute angle, coriaceous throughout, about as long as calyx
tube. The calyx is quite large, being scarcely exceeded by the corolla.
No evidence of large cells, although. under hand lens the texture of the
sepal is seen to be coarse, simulating veining.

Corolla 5-parted. Tube at first cylindric, later somewhat urceolate
because of increase in size of ovary. Tube scarcely longer than calyx.
Lobes, oval, acute, finally reflexed about one-fourth length of tube; in
young flowers erect or spreading. Delicate in structure, no evidence of
large cells.

14—A. oF Science. 04.

210

Stamens, scarcely exserted, in the majority of cases not at all. Fila
ments strong, anthers not sagittate.

Scales about one-half the length of the petals, united at the base, arch
harrow; top of scale deeply fringed, the fimbriations often branching;
sides of scales much less deeply fringed, arches not at all. Base of scales
plainly bilobate, as is often, thougn not always the case.

Styles two, parallel, short, subequal, scarcely exserted, in the majority
of cases not at all.

Ovary somewhat globose, showing slight tendency toward triangu-
larity, evidently due to development of three seeds. Styles only about
one-half the length of ovary; stigmas globose-capitate.

Flowers from 2-4 mm. long and nearly as broad.

Inflorescence: Flowers gathered in clusters of various sizes, though
none of the clusters exceed 8 mm. in diameter. Clusters contain from 3-5,
up to 10-16 flowers. Flowering branches thickened, rugose, often
branched. Pedicels short, single flowered, the flowers in many cases seem-
ing sessile.

Scale leaves small, sub-triangular, acute, membranaceous.

Stem, where closely appressed to host-plant, strong, rugose, dark
colored, almost brown. Free stems slender smooth, often branching.
Scale leaves, more elongate and less acute than those found on flower
branches, occur on free portions of the stem.

The individual flowers have no bracts, although the floral clusters are
subtended by two or more mMembranaceous bracts from 1-2 mm. long and
perhaps two-thirds as wide.

It is very evident that the plant in the Linnzean collection is far re-
moved from the Jamaica plant of Sloane in the South Kensington Mu-
seum.

Grisebach, in Fl. of British West Indies, London, 1864, includes Ameri-
cana and makes direct reference to Sloane, t. 128, f. 4, but the description
shows that the plant he so refers is not that of Sloane. The foliowing
characters (Fl. Brit. West Ind. (1864), p. 476) mark his plant:

1. Fedicels shorter than flowers.

1. Calyx little exceeded by corolla.

3. Calyx lobes short, rounded.

4. Corolla 5-parted, lobes erect.

5. Seales small.

211

That much confusion has resulted from this uncertainty as to the type
feature of Cuscuta Americana L. is evidenced by a study of the various
large herbaria.

Thus the C. graveolens H. B. I. (Noy. Gen. et Sp. 3, p. 122, 1818) can
searcely be a synonym of C. Americana L. if the description there given is
at all accurate.

In the collections at the Kew gardens, 21809 and 21810, Dr. A. Glazier,
Brazil, chiefly from Province of Goyaz, 1896, are neither the C. Americana
of Linnzeus and Engelmann, nor yet are they Sloane’s plant. Herb.
Guatemalens, 59, Jan., 1864, Gust. Bernoulli, and Herb. Guatemalens,
1916, Bernoulli and Cairo, with Herb. Mus. Paris 3353, Region de Orizaba,
M. Bourgeau, 1865-1866, all mounted on same sheet and labeled C. Ameri-
cana are C. congesta.

Ex Plantis Guatemalensibus, quas edidit John Donnell Smith, No. 855,
C. Americana L. forma floribus majusculis, Coban, Dept. Alta Verapaz.
Altitude 4,300 feet, January, 1886. Legit H. von Tuerckheim, is neither C.
Americana nor a variety of it; the long slender, acuminate corolla lobes
evidently throwing it in quite a different section of the genus.

Such a list might be greatly extended, but enough has been indicated
to show into what inextricable confusion we have come because of this
absence of a recognized type form for this species.

Personally I am not attempting any decision in the matter; I am
simply reciting facts coming under my observation. If Sloane’s Jamaica
plant is the type of C. Americana L., then the form in the Linnzean col-
lections, so labeled by Linnzeus and reaffirmed by our last specialist in the
group can not be C. Americana, for it is not the same plant. If the form
in the Linnzean collection be taken as the type, what is the name of
Sloane’s plant? How, also can it be assumed that any other plant than
Sloane’s was in mind in view of the references of Gronovius and Linnzeus
to it specifically, references continued as late as 1797, when in Linne Sp.
Pl. Willdenow, edn. IV., vol. 1, page 702, we find at the conclusion of
the characterization, “Habitat in Virginise fructibus et at littora maris in
herbis Jamaice (v. s.)”? Gmelin, also in his Sys. Veg., 1796, vol. 1, p.
285, refers to Sloane’s plant, as does also Vitman in his Summa Plant,
1790, vol. 1, p. 340.

How the riddle shall be read in view of these facts is left to adepts
in nomenclature. It is entirely beyond my powers.

On THe NoMENCLATURE OF Funet Having Many Fruit-Forms.

J.-C. ‘ARTHUR.

( Abstract. )

The paper begins with a statement of the views of Dr. Magnus and
others, who hold that with such forms as the hetercecious rusts the act‘on
of the law of priority in the selection of specific names should extend
only to names applied to the teleutosporic form. Thus, the common grain
rust should be called Puccinia graminis Pers., and not Puccinia poculiformis
(Jacq.) Wettst.

The argument is upheld that this view practically rests upon the
inference that the genus Puccinia is a fo1m-genus based upon the teleuto-
sporic stage. A true genus, it is maintained, must of necessity embrace
all stages of development and all structural parts of every species under
it. The name of the genus, as well as that of the species must, moreover,
so far as its nomenclatorial treatment is concerned, be considered as
simply appellative, and without regard to its derivation or significance.

These ideas are elucidated with a variety of illustrations. The conclu-
sion is drawn that with clear concepts of this nature there can be no
question of the desirability of applying the law of priority to fungi with
many fruit-forms, in a manner similar to its use among phanerogams.

The proper name for the common grain rust, according to this

method, is Puccinia poculiformis (Jacq.) Wettst.

213

POLLINATION OF CAMPANULA AMERICANA AND OTHER PLANTS.

Moses N. ELRop.

Campanula Americana L. is markedly proterandrous. In the bud the
anthers are in contact with the pilose two-thirds of the style and dis-
charge their pollen introrsely before the corolla opens. As the flower bud
opens the filaments wither beyond their more persistent bases. In the
meantime the style grows rapidly in itength, so that in a few hours it
is long-exserted, declined and the pilose, pollen covered end turned up-
ward. No matter whether the flower is on an erect or inclined branch —
the pilose end always turns upward, while the other portion of the style
assumes a horizontal or slightly declined position. One or two days after
the bud has opened the hairs on the style begin to wither and drop their
charge of pollen. At the same time stigmatic papilla are exposed and
ready for cross-pollination. Nectar is secreted by a fleshy disk surround-
ing the base of the style, and is protected from rain and the predatory
incursion of many insects by the triangular bases of the five stamens.

Honey-bees and the beautiful metallic-green Agaostemon radiatus Say
ave frequent visitors. They readily gain access to the honey by lighting
on the petals of the rotate corolla and inserting the tongue between the
style and bases of the stamens. Their visits, however, do not promote
fertilization, as their movements, in approaching the flower or in collect-
ing honey, never bring them into contact with the pollinated portion of
the style nor do they ever touch the stigma.

C. Americana is cross-fertilized by a leaf-cutter bee, JMegachile brevis
Say. It differs from the honey-bee in its structure and the way in which
it approaches the honey disk. It is armed with a dense brush of hairs
on the under side of the tail, instead of having pollen baskets on the
legs; it comes to the flower on the wing, in a direct, unhesitating way,
over the upturned stigma, which it frequently touches with the hairs of
its tail; it settles on the style with its head directed away from the
stigmatic end of that organ, and never comes in contact with the corolla
except with its fore feet. While in this position collecting honey the

Nortr.—I am indebted to Mr. Ashmead, Bureau of Entomology, Department of
Agriculture, for identifying the bees named in this paper.

214

hairs of its tail are in contact with the pilose portion of the style and
become pollinated, if the flower has recently come into bloom and the
style has not yet shed its hairy coating. But this leaf-cutter is not wholly
dependent on its position while collecting honey for a supply of pollen.
On several occasions it was seen clinging to the style and transferring
pollen to its abdomen with its hind-legs, a maneuver that no other bee
seems capable of performing. With the hairs of its tail charged with
pollen it is easy to understand how cross-fertilization is effected, as it
passes from one flower to another: and so systematic are the movements
that they appear to be evolved for the purpose they fulfil. So far as
the writer has been able to discover, no other insect than WV. brevis is of
use in fertilizing the tall bellflower. Another leaf-cutter, Megachile in-

fragilis Cresson, was often seen collecting honey from Impatiens aurea

Figures. CAMPANULA AMERICANA L.
a. Triangular bases of stamens.
b. Pilose end of style covered with pollen and bee collecting honey.
e. Style denuded of hairs, bee about to brush against lobes of stigma.
d. Style denuded of hairs and bee in position on style while collecting honey.

Muhl. and pollen on Helianthus annuus L. growing nearby, but was never
seen on C. Americana.

The tall bellflower, on which the observations described were made.

grew in the back yard of a city residence, and was in bloom from July

215

to November 8, 1904, at which last date ferty-seven perfect flowers were
counted. Long betore November heavy frost had ended all insect visits
and the plant had been dependent on self-pollination for fertilization for
a month. With frost came some noticeable changes in the mechanism
of the flower. The end of the style was not so uniformly bent upward.
and the pollen-bearing hairs were much more persistent. During the
latter period self-fertilization was effected by the lobes of the stigma
bending back until the papillose extremities touched the pollinated hairs.
The same movement may have occurred earlier in the season, but if it
did it was not so obvious, and many times it would have been useless, as
the styles were denuded of their hairy appendages, and the lobes not
yet reflected more than usual.

Within the inflated limb of Pentstemon Pentstemon (L) Britton the fila-
ments are free, and clustered with the siyle under the upper lip. One
pair of the didynamous filaments is nearly free from the corolla tube,
while the other pair and the sterile filament are imbedded in the wall
of the tube below the inflation. The bases of the free filaments are
dilated, with a concavity on the inner faces in which honey is secreted.

As a result of this arrangement the throat of the corolla is so ob-
structed by the two free filaments and the style as to prevent any insect
from reaching the honey glands, without scme special adaptation to over-
come the obstruction. To secure honey the visiting insects must be armed
with a stout pair of jaws to force an opening between the filaments and
style and with a tongue 14 mm. long. These necessary equipments are
found in Anthophora abrupta Say, a small bumble-bee. Tor two seasons
this bee has been the only insect seen to enter the corolla of a large,
cultivated plant, under daily observation while in bloom. Anthophorze
never missed putting in an appearance during some part of the day, if
the weather was fair, and sometimes as many as half a dozen were seen
on the plant at the same time.

Anthophore abrupte never were: seen collecting pollen, but as they
forced their bodies into the inflated portion of the flower they were well
dusted with it on their hairy backs. This pollen was carried to the next
stigma under which they passed, where some of it was left, provided
the stigma was ready to receive it. Usually the stigmatic end of the
style is pressed against the upper lip of the corolla during the first day

of anthesis, after that period it is bent downward and is cross-fertilized

216

by coming into contact with the pollinated back of a passing Anthophora
in search of honey. There does not seem to be any provision for the self-
fertilization of P. Pentstemon.

The longer of the dimorphic pistils of Mertensia Virginica (lL) D.C. are
of the same length as the stamens and may be self-fertilized by contact
with the dehiscing anthers. The shortest of the other form do not reach
beyond the end of the narrow tube, and are fertilized by honey-bees.
Honey is secreted at the base of a tube 25 mm. long and is further pro-
tected by a pubescent ring 2 mm. above the receptacle. No insect was
found on the flowers that could reach the honey in a legitimate way, but
a big bumble-bee was seen on the corolla making slits in the tube just
above the pubescent ring. Through the opening the tongue of the bee
was inserted and the honey removed, with ease, as it passed rapidly from
one flower to another.

A ecalendine poppy. Nityiophorum aiphyllum (Mich.) Nutt., under culti-
vation came into bloom April 23, early in the forenoon. At 3:40 p. m.
the petals began closing and by sundown were completely folded over the
stamens. Although it was raining the next day the petals under obser-
vation again opened in all their golden splendor. It was not clearly eyi-
dent that the stamens of this plant were proterandrous, though the stigma
ereatly increased in size after the bud had opened. Usually the flowers
did not wither under two days. Small bees were noticed crawling on the
flowers, a single honey-vee was seen collecting pollen, and it is prob-
able cross-fertilization was the result of their movements. Flowers pro-
tected by a net from insect visitors produced capsules of the normal size,
well filled with seeds.

In July it was noticed that while the calendine poppy was producing
an abundance of seeds none could be found on the ground under the
plant. The seeds of a dehiscing capsule, which were placed in a heap
on a small stone, all disappeared by next morning. When it was recalled
that ants are known to carry small seeds into their nests they were sus-
pected of carrying them away. This inference seemed probable, as the
seeds were provided with a fleshy crest on one edge which an ant could
grasp. At last a common black ant, about 6 mm. long, was seen with a
seed in its mouth and watched until it disappeared in a round hole. Later
=. ant wes followed to another hole. The mouth to these holes was level

With the surface of the ground and not through the usual hillock of sand

of their nesting places. They were located 5 dm. from the stem of the
plant, and when opened were found to be about 6 mm. deep. One of
them was tunnelled along the edge of a rotten chip and contained seven
seeds. The crest of one of the seven seeds was withered while the
papille of the others were plump. Nothing was seen to indicate that
they had been stored for food or that the crest contained anything they
cared to eat.

ADDITIONS TO THE INDIANA FLORA.

CuHas. C. DEAM.

In addition to the species taken by myself, this list contains fourteen
species I received through an exchange with L. M. Umbach, Napersville,
Ill., and one from E. B. Williamson, Bluffton, Ind. I have a sheet of all
the plants reported in my herbarium. My species have all been verified
at the National Museum.

Panicum boreale Nash.
In the swales at Miller, Ind., June 28, 1898, by L. M. Umbach.
Panicum macrocarpa Le Conte.

Wells County, May 31, 1903; Steuben County, June 17, 1903; Dune
Park, June 16, 1900, L. M. Umbach. September 4, 1901, by Agnes
Chase.

Aristida intermedia Seribn. & Ball.

In moist sands at Miller, Ind., October 2, 1898, by IL. M. Umbach.
Elymus glaucus Buckley.

In sand at Pine, Ind., June 29, 1898, by L. M. Umbach.
Eleocharis obtusa Schultes.

Wells County, August 23, 1897; Miller, Ind., July 20, 1898, by L. M.
Umbach; Steuben County, July 3, 1904; Noble County, July 21,
1904.

CORRECTION.

Reported by Stanley Coulter in Indiana Academy 1900 page 137.
Psilocarya nitens (Vahl. ) Wood.

In sloughs at Dune Park, Ind., September 12, 1899, by L. M. Umbach.
Psilocarya scirpoides Torr.

In slonghs at Dune Park, Ind., September 2, 1898, by L. M Umbach.

Wells County, May 13, 1903.
Carex festucacea Willd.

In swales at Clarke, Ind., June 4, 1898, by L. M. Umbach
Clintonia boreale (Ait.) Raf.

Tn swamp at Miller, Ind., May 14, 1898, by L. M. Umbach.

220
Salix Bebbiana Sarg.
In marsh at Clarke, Ind., May 7, 1898, by L. M. Umbach.
Saliv amygdaloides Anders.
In marsh at Lake Station, Ind., May 12, 1900, by L. M. Umbach.
Chenopodium glaucum L.
In ballast at Miller, Ind., August 26, 1898, by L. M. Umbach
Proelichia Floridana (Nutt.) Moq.
In ballast at Aetna, Ind., July 7, 1900, by L. M. Umbach.
Silene vulgaris (Moench.) Garcke.
In ballast at Pine, Ind., June 17, 1899, by L. M. Umbach.
Fleuchera hirsuticollis (Wheelock) Rydb.
Steuben County, July 4, 1904.
Oxvalis Brittoniae Small.
Wells County, September 1, 1904; Steuben County, September 9, 1904.
Oxalis grandis Small.
Orange County, May 25, 1901; Franklin County, May 28, 1904.
Tlex Bronxensis Britton.
Wells County, June 11, 1899; Steuben County, July 4, 1904.
Hypericum boreale (Britton) Bicknell.
Wells County, in low border of lakes in Jackson Township, Septem-
ber 6, 1903.
Viola papilionacea Pursh.
Wells County, in woods, May 3, 1903.
FHlelianthemum majus (.) B.S. P.
On wooded gravelly hills in Steuben County, August 13, 1903.
Epilobium palustre L.
Wells County, August 18, 1901; Steuben County, August 138, 1903.
Bartonia ionandra Robison.
Steuben County, September 11, 1904.
Apocynum hypericifolium Ait.
Noble County, near Rome City, July 21, 1904.
Apocynum pubescens R. Br.
Kkosciusko County, July 28, 1904.
Teucrium occidentale A. Gray.
Steuben County, in swamp near Gage Lake, August 12, 1903; IKos-
ciusko County, in swamp on east side of Winona Lake, July 28,
1904.

Lycopus communis Bicknell.

Wells County, September 2, 1900; Steuben County, August 11, 1903.
Physalis heterophylla Nees.

Wells County, August 22, 1899; Steuben County, September 11, 1904.
Physalis Virginiana intermedia Rydb.

Steuben County, June 17, 1903.
Viburnum cassinoides L.

Steuben County, June 12, 1904, in clearing.
Triosteum arundinaceum Bicknell.

Wells County, May 22, 1898.
Chrysanthemum Balsamita L.

Adams County, September 20, 1903, by E. B. Williamson. Escaped.
Bidens vulgata Greene.

Wells County, September 4, 1904.
Carduus Hillii (Canby) Porter.

Steuben County, June 17, 1908. Only two specimens collected. On

wooded hillside one-half mile southeast of Gage Lake.

pes ae

ur

a)

ADDITIONS TO THE FLoRA OF Marion County, with

il
2
3
4
5.
6
7
8
9

Notes on

PLANTs HereTOFORE UNREPORTED FROM THE STATE
oF INDIANA.

BeEnJ. W. DOUGLASS.

Woodsia obtusa Torr.
Dulichium arundinaceum Britton.
Scirpus debilis Pursh.

Carex lupulina Muhl.

Carex comosa Boott.
Trillium sessile L.

Trillium erectum L.
Polygonum Virginianum L.
Allionia nyctaginea Michx.
Nymphexa advena Soland.
Nelumbo lutea Pers.

Caltha palustris L.
Delphinium trichorne Michx.
Clematis Viorna L.
Thalictrum dioicum L.
Berberis vulgaris L.
Jeffersonia diphylla Pers.
Arabis dentata T-G.

Cleome spinosa L.

Opulaster opulifolius Kuntze.
Comarum palustre L.

Rosa humilis Marsh.
Amelanchier Canadensis Medic.
Crataegus Crus-Galli L.
Robina pseudacacia L.
Meibomia nudiflora Kuntze.
Meibomia rigida Kuntze.
Lespedeza repens Bart.
Strophostyles helvola Britton.
Oxalis violaceae L.

3l.
32.
33.
34.
3b.
36.
oT.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49,
50.
51.
52.
53.
54,
55.
56.
Dis
58.
59.
60.

Linum usitatissimum La.

Ptelea trifoliata L.

Euphorbia corollata L.
Euphorbia commutata Engel.
Ilex verticillata Gray.

Vitis zstivalis Michx.
Hypericum prolificum L.
Hypericum spherocarpum Michx.
Hypericum perforatum L.
Hypericum maculatum Walt.
Hypericum mutilum L.
Triadenum Virginicum Raf.
Viola tenella Muhl.

Cubelium concolor Raf.

Aralia racemosa L.

Panax quinquefolium L.
Thaspium barbinode Nutt.
Conium maculatum L.

Cicuta maculata L.

Cornus alternifolia L.

Nyssa sylvatica Marsh.
Hypopitys hypopitys Small.
Stetronema quadriflorum Hitchce.
Diospyros Virginiana L.
Gentiana Audrewsti Griseb.
Ipomea pandurata Meyer.
Hydrophyllum Virginicum L.
Hydrophyllum Canadense L.
Mertensia Virginica D. CO.
Scutellaria cordifolia.

61. Koellia flexuosa MacM. 73. Lobelia spicata Lam.

62. Koellia Virginiana MacM. 74. Nabalus altissimus Hook.

63. Lycopus Americanus Muhl. 75. Vernonia Noveboracensis Willd.
64. Mentha spicata L. 76. Solidago Canadensis L.

65. Physalis Virginiana Mill. 77. Euthamia graminifolia Nutt.
66. Collinsia verna Nutt. 78. <Antennaria plantaginifolia Rich-
67. Mimulus ringens L. ards.

68. Afzelia macrophylla Kuntze. 79. Gnaphalium obtusifolium L.

69. Gerardia tenuifolia Vahl. 80. Dysodia papposa Hitche.

70. Houstonia cerulea L. 81. Hrechtites hieracifolia Raf.

71. Houstonia ciliolata Torr. 82. Mesadenia atriplicifolia Raf.

72. Triosteum perfoliatum L. 8&3. Senecio aureus L.

NEw STATE PLANTS.

Tradescantia brevicaulis Raf.
Short stemmed spiderwort. Growing on hillsides near Alliance,
Marion County.
Tradescantia bracteata Small.
Long bracted spiderwort. Found in similar lccalities to the last and
associated with it.
Thlaspt arvense L.
Penny Cress. On R. R. near Indianapolis. Rare.
Sisymbrium altissimum L.
On R. R. near Broad Ripple, Marion County. Rare.
Camelina microcarpa Andrz.
Waste fields near Fair Grounds at Indianapolis.
Physostegia parviflora Nutt.
Western Lion’s Heart. Along White River at Broad Ripple, Marion
County.
Solanum Torreyi A. Grey.
Dry fields, Hancock County. Spreading. Reported to me by Jacob
Schramm.
Houstonia tenuifolia Nutt.
Slender leaved Honstonia.. Dry hills in northern part of Marion County.

ADDITIONS TO THE List oF GALL-PRopucING INSECTS
CoMMON To INDIANA.

MEL T. Cook.

Two years ago the writer presented a list of forty species of gall-
producing insects common to Indiana. One year ago an additional list of
eleven species was presented to the Academy. It was at first intended
to make as complete a list as possible and then to give a more extensive
discussion of these very interesting insects and the abnormal growths
produced by them. However, a change of residence has made a change
of plans necessary.

The following is a list of species which have come to my attention

within the past year and previous to my leaving Indiana.

HEMIPTERA.

52. Pemphigus vagabundus Walsh.—Populus deltoides Marsh.
58. Hamamelistis spinosus Shimer. Hamamelis Virginiana L.

DIPTERA.

54. Cecidomyia clavula Beut. Cornus florida L.

55. Cecidomyia cerasi-servtinue O. 8. Prunus serotinae Ehrh.

HYMENOPTERA.

56. Amphibolips prunus Walsh. Quercus sp. ........
57. Cynips pisum Fitch. Quercus alba L.

58. Dryophanta radicola Ashm. Quercus alba L.

59. Neuroterus rileyi Bassett. Quercus prinus L.
60. Rhodites radicum O. 8. Rosa carolina L.

61. Rhodites dichlocerus Harris. Rosa carolina L.

62. Rhodites globulus Beut. Rosa carolina L.

ARACHNIDA.

63. Acarus serotinae Beut. Prunus serotina Ehrh.

15—A. oF SCIENCE, ’0i.

226

Nos. 52, 56 and 60 were sent to me by Mr. F. C. Senour, of New
Augusta, Indiana. The others and also specimens of No. 52 were col-
lected by me near Greencastle, Indiana.

We have now a list of sixty-three species, representing twenty-five
genera and five orders of insects, including Arachnida. The host plants
represent eleven orders, fourteen families and eighteen genera.

bo
bo
=

TyLoses IN BrostmumM AUBLETII.

KATHERINE E. GOLDEN.

The wood of Brosimum Aubletii has been given various common
names, as leopard-wood, letter-wood, and snake-wood, on account of the
mottled appearance of part of its heartwood. It is a very hard, compact
wood, dark brown in color, and has part of the heartwood beautifully
mottled with black. The mottling is due to the sclerenchymatous tyloses
which fill its trachee.

The wood is composed of a mass of fine fibres, nearly round in trans-
verse section, and arranged in fairly regular radial rows. The fibres

are flattened tangentially when adjoining either parenchyma cells or

Leopard-wood. Tang. Sect. (x 300)

traches, The trachesx are scattered promiscuously throughout the fibres,
either singly or in groups of two to four. They are finely pitted, and con-
sist of vessels and tracheides. Parenchyma occurs around the trachee,

sometimes in single rows, sometimes irregularly grouped, also in tangen-

)

22

(@ 2)

tial lines, and in regular radial rows, having blind ends, as they seem to
start and to stop anywhere. ‘The tangential rows branch, the branches
running into other rows or joining with the cells around trachez. Some-
times the tangential and radial rows are so regular that they give the
wood a cross-barred appearance.

The medullary rays consist of very narrow, long cells, the long diam-
eter running in a radial direction. They are from one to four cells wide,
the more common number being two. They are from about fifteen to
fifty cells in height, though an accurate count could not be made, due
to the presence in every ray of larger sclerenchymatous cells. One ovr

more of these sclerenchymatous cells, having fairly thick walls, occur in

Leopard-wood. Trans. Sect. (x 300)

each ray, either at the end or throughout its height. In all cases a
sclerenchyma cell occupies the place of two to four of the regular
parenchyma cells and seems to be the result of the merging of a number
of the parenchyma cells. They are seen to best advantage in the tangen-
tial section.

In a similar way the radial rows of parenchyma, though as regular
in their formation as the rays, are easily distinguished from the rays by

their greater size and sclerenchymatous walls.

229

All the elements of the wood, including even the wood fibres, have
their lumina filled with a brown to black solid coloring matter. The walls
of the elements are not impregnated with the color, and consequently
stand out distinctly, so that their peculiarities are easily observed.

The chief peculiarity of Leopard-wood is the presence of sclerenchym-
atous tyloses. Thyloses or tyioses, as they are more commonly called,
are ingrowths of parenchymatous cells into the cavity of the trachee.
When a trachea is adjoined by parenchyma, the parenchyma retains its
protoplasm after the trachea becomes empty; as the parenchyma exerts
pressure on the non-resistent walls of the trachea, the parenchyma pushes

into the cavity of the trachea through a pit or weak spot, forming a short

Leopard-wood. Trans. Sect. (x80)

tube. The tube may be the only one at that part of the trachea, or there
may be so many that there is a series of tubes lining the entire cavity.
These ingrowths may make no further progress, but the more common
method of development is the formation of a wall at the junction of the
tracheai wall, cutting off. the ingrowths. These ingrowths may then
earry on cell division, forming a mass of parenchyma filling the lumen of

the trachea. Tyloses form in many Dicotyledons as a regular phenom-

250

enon, and without the occurrence of any injury to stimulate growth. They
form in pitted trachew usually, though in some one-year old stems they
form in fibrously thickened trachez without any perforations.

The walls of the tyloses are delicate at first, but they afterwards
thicken somewhat, and their cellulose walls become lignified like the rest
of the wood parenchyma.

In Leopard-wood the tyloses have their walls so strongly thickened
that the cells resemble the stone cells in pears. Nearly all the tracheze

are filled with them. rarely is there found a portion of a trachea without

Leopard-wood. Tang. Sect. (x80)

them. The stone cells are irregular in shape, and are packed closely
together, usually one being sufficient to fill the lumen transversely, though
sometimes two and three are wedged together across the lumen. The
walls vary considerably in thickness, some having their lumina entirely
obliterated, while in close proximity to them may be others with fairly
large lumina. In all of them the thickening of the walls is in well-defined
layers, the layers sometimes separating from each other. All the walls
are provided with fine canals, radiating from the central lumen, some-

times branched, and in all, the canals of adjoining cells corresponding.

231

The tyloses give the wood a characteristic appearance under the mi-
croscope. This can be seen in the photographs, though much of the
beauty is lost with the loss of color.

Boulger (1) in his valuable work on wood mentions the sclerenchym-
atous tyloses of the Leopard-wood, and in describing the gross structure
of the wood, states that the sapwood is yellow, and that the tree has
heartwood squaring twenty inches, though only six inches show the
characteristic mottling. This would seem to indicate that even if all the
heartwood had tyloses form, not all become sclerenchymatous.

Leopard-wood. Rad. Sect. (x80)

The wood is used in this country in the manufacture of musical in-
struments,-and only the mottled wood is prized. Pieces of the mottled
were all that I was able to obtain, so I had no way of determining any-
thing in regard to the tyloses in the sapweod or unmottled heartwood.

The formation of tyloses through the activity of the parenchyma, can
be readily understood, but nothing is known as to the cause of this activ-
ity in some woods, while in other woods tyloses are never formed. Then
again in most woods investigated nothing definite as to time of formation

is known. DeBary (2) states that in Robinia pseudacacia tyloses form in

232

the autumn in the wood formed the previous spring, and that this is true,
also, of other woods, but nothing definite as to their occurrence or absence
is known. Further investigation is necessary to determine the facts rel-
ative to tyloses other than their structure and seemingly haphazard

occurrence.

1. Boulger, G.8. Wood, 1902.
2. DeBary, A. Comparative Anatomy, 1884.

Some EXPERIMENTS WITH A SIMPLE JOLLY BALANCE.

Lynn B. MoMULLEN.

In presenting a paper of this kind before the Academy of Science I
think it is well to point out that the research work of the high school
teacher must be “re’search work indeed—must be research work back-
ward instead of forward. If I might be allowed to read you a parable
I should remind you that some fifty, or perhaps sixty, years ago our grand-
fathers came to Indiana to do research work of a bread-winning charac-
ter. But those grandparents had brothers, who, through necessity or
lack of years, were compelled to stay at home and take care of the real
little folks. I take it that the same thing is true of the members of this
Academy. Some, usually those of the colleges, are able to do research
work. Others, particularly those of the high schoois, must expend their
energies in the perfecting of details.

Those of us that remember our college course in Physics hold the old
Jolly balance, with which we wrestled, in much awe. Certainly no piece
of apparatus could be more perverse. The spring being stationary at the
top and entirely free at the bottom would take its time in coming to rest
and its distance from the meter stick gave parallax an excellent oppor-
tunity to do its worst. Further, as the spring stretched the table must
be moved, and the table was usually stuck. It is easy to see now that
the conversion of the Jolly balance from a rogue to a useful citizen de-
pended upon some device for stretching the spring “up” from a stationary
bottom instead of “down” from a stationary top. It is the purpose of this
paper to explain one such device and to present data showing the accuracy
that may be obtained by using it.

The base of the balance is a Sapolio box 6x9x12-in. mounted on level-
ing screws and weighted with a brick. To the front of the box is screwed
an upright standard four feet long. This standard is made by nailing to
the face of a piece of poplar 44x2-in. two strips 44xl4-in. leaving a groove
between them 1-in. wide and \4-in. deep in which a meter stick may slide
freely. To the upper end of the meter stick is fastened a string which
runs over a pulley at the top of the standard. The other end of this
string is tied to the end of a large horizontal screw which runs through
the side of the box with sufficient friction to hold the meter stick in any

desired position. From the top of the meter stick at right angles to it

234

projects an arm two inches long to the end of which the spring is at-
tached. From the lower end of the spring is suspended an indicator of
the form shown in figure I, with the usual pans below. The shelf shown
in figure I upon which the point of the indicator rests when not in use
is made of sheet brass and is fastened to the column one foot from the
lower end. Tacked to one of the side strips immediately below this shelf
so that it projects over the meter stick slightly is a small metal plate

Pointer

bearing a horizontal scratch. The distance from the top of the meter
stick to this scratch can be read with considerable accuracy to the tenth
part of a millimeter. Below this shelf slides a table upon which vessels
of water, etc., can be placed. To use the apparatus the spring must first
be calibrated. Incidentally, Hooke’s law may be verified. To do this a
reading of the distance from the top of the stick to the scratch is taken
when the spring is so adjusted that the pointer barely swings clear of
the shelf, no load being in the pans. A load of one gram is then added
and the spring is stretched,—by raising the meter stick with the before
mentioned cord and screw—until the pointer clears the platform again.
The distance from the top of the meter stick to the scratch is again read.
The difference between the two readings gives the elongation for a load

of one gram. For ordinary work this elongation should be about five

235

centimeters. With such a spring it is seen that a load of .002 grams will
cause an elongation of .1 of a millimeter.

The following tables of data and results obtained by using this simple
Jolly balance are self explanatory. They are given not because of any
hew principle contained in them, but because of the extreme accuracy
shown—accuracy seemingly out of all proportion to the care with which

the apparatus was constructed.

HooKE’s LAW AND THE MODULUS OF THE SPRING.

No Load Reading with

Load. Reading. Load. Elongation. E/L.
gs 54.96 cm. 60.14 cm. 5.18 cm. 5.18
2 54.96 65.33 10.37 5.18(5)
3 54.96 70.51 15.55 5.18(3)
+ 54.96 75.66 20.70 5.17(5)
5 55.00 80.90 25.90 5.18(0)
Modulus — L/E= 193. Mean 5.180

DENSITY OF A STEEL Bicycle BALt.

No Load. Load. Elongation.
54.97 cm. 83.95 cm. 28.98 cm.
54.97 83.93 28.96
55.00 83.97 28.97

Mean elongation = 28.97.

Mass = elongation X modulus = 5.591 g.
Diameter by micrometer screw caliper = 1.1115 cm.
Volume .7189 cc.

Density = M/V = 7.78 g. per ce.

PRINCIPLE OF ARCHIMEDES.

Ball in Air. Ball in Water. Decrease.
82.98 cm. 79.32 cm. 3.66 cm.
82.99 79.30 3.69
83.00 79.34 3.66

Mean decrease in elongation = 3.67

Loss of weight in water .708 g.

Volume of ball from preceding experiment .718 cc.
Volume of water displaced by the ball .718 cc.
Weight of water displaced by the ball .718 g.

256

The weight of the water displaced by the ball differs from the loss of

weight by 1.4 %.
stead of steel.

The accuracy may be increased by using aluminum in-

SPECIFIC GRAVITY OF AN IRREGULAR SOLID.

No Load.
54.07 cm.
54.07
54.08

Aluminum in Air. Aluminum in Water.

88.36 cm. 75.70 cm.
88.38 75.69
88.38 73.69

Elongation in air 34.31 cm.
Elongation in water 21.62 cm.
Decrease in water 12.69 cm.
Specific gravity of aluminum 2.70.

SpEecIFIC GRAVITY OF SOLIDS LIGHTER THAN WATER.

Paraffin and Aluminum

No Load. Paraffin in Air. in Water.
54.01 67.23 13-39
54.01 67.25 73.37
54.00 67.24 73.38

Elongation due to paraffin in air 13.23 cm.
Elongation due to both in water 19.37 cm.
Elongation due to aluminum in water 21.61 cm.
Elongation due to paraffin in water —2.25 cm.
Loss by paraffin in water 15.48 cm.

Specific gravity of paraffin = .854.

SPECIFIC GRAVITY OF LIQUIDS.

No Load in Ether. Aluminum in Ether.

54.26 cm. 79.01 em.
54.26 79.00
54.27 79.00

Elongation due to aluminum in air 34.31 cm.

Elongation due to aluminum in ether 24.74 cm.

Decrease in ether 9.57 cm.

Decrease in water 12.69 cm.

Specific gravity of ether .754.

Besides these, two other experiments can be performed in a very satis-

factory manner, namely, ‘‘The Surface Tension of Water’’ and ‘‘The
Distribution of Magnetism in a Bar Magnet.”’

237

NEWTONIAN IDEA OF THE CALCULUS.

ARTHUR S. HaTHAWAayY.

The history of the calculus shows that even a mathematical theory
cannot escape the effects of environment. Sir Isaac Newton was for
Inany years the sole possessor of a knowledge of the calculus, and
used it with a power which few have been able to equal since his time;
yet he has had practically no infiuence on its present form of de-
velopment. This was due to Newton’s dislike for controversy, so that
instead of contending for his ideas, he let them appear only in con-
cise and general form, or even not at all. With the exception of his
first two papers on optics, ‘all of his works were published only after
the most persistent solicitations of his friends, and against his own
wishes.” The criticism which would have aroused an ambitious man to
a vigorous defense, had the opposite effect on his disposition. “I was
so persecuted,’ he wrote, “with discussions arising out of my theory of
light, that I blamed my own imprudence for parting with so substantial
a blessing as my quiet to run after a shadow.”

Newton was well versed in the method of fluxions, and the in-
verse method, that is in differentiation and integration, by the year
1666. In 1669 he circulated a manuscript on the subject among his
friends, but refused their solicitations to have it published, and it was
not until 1693 that it was communicated to the scientific world by
Wallis, in the second volume of his works. During this interval of a
quarter of a century, Newton had changed his ideas in important
respects, through extensive use of the calculus. He had developed his
Theory of Light, discovered the Binomial Theorem, determined the Law
of Gravitation, and the Principles of Dynamics, and made important in-
vestigations in all departments of mathematical and physical science.

Although the Principia, which appeared in 1687, contained no direct
information on the calculus, yet its fundamental ideas and principles
were involved in every detail of the work. The development of the
Principia is due to the caleulus, but Newton undertook the laborious
task of translating everything into the e!ementary geometrical methods
of the time and omitted many results which he had obtained by the
calculus, because he could not so interpret them. Many things have

been discovered since his time that were afterwards found in his papers

238

and correspondence, and he left many undemonstrated theorems, whose
proofs baffled succeeding mathematicians for 50, 100, and even 200 years.

The Quadrature of Curves, published in 1704, and the Principia, ace
the proper sources for Newton’s matured ideas on the calculus, and not
his earlier manuscript, published by Wallis. The earlier paper adopts
the infinitesimal method of neglecting small quantities which is now
associated with Leibnitz’s calculus, not, however, with the latter’s dis-
regard of logic, but in connection with the idea of a limit which is the
modern foundation of that method.

Newton states in the Quadrature of Curves that “in mathematics the
minutest errors are not to be neglected.” Also,

“T consider mathematical quantities in this place, not as consisting
of very small parts, but as described by continuous motion. Lines are
described and thereby generated, not by the apposition of parts, but
by the continued motion of points; superficies by the motion of lines;
solids by the motion of superficies: angles by the rotation of sides; por-
tions of time by continual flux: and so on in other quantities. These
geneses really take place in the nature of things and are daily seen in
the motion of bodies.”

He then goes on to define fluxions, or as we would now e¢all them,
differentials:

“Fluxions are aS near as we please, as the increments of fluents, gen-
erated in times which are the same an:l as small as possible, and to
speak accurately, they are in the prime ratio of nascent increments;
yet they can be expressed by any lines whatever which are proportional
to them.”

Newton immediately illustrates this definition by the abscissa and
ordinate of a curve, whose differentials are shown to be any correspond-
ing increments of abscissa and ordinate along the tangent line. This,
and numerous similar illustrations in the Principia, show that Newton
meant by the ultimate ratio of vanishing quantities, the limit of the
ratio of any finite proportionals to the vanishing quantities. See, for ex-
ample, Prine. Bk. 1, Lemma 1, Art. 12, “Ultimate Ratio of Vanishing
Quantities.”” Also, Lemmas 7, 8, 9. Newton did not consider the modern
question as to whether or not this ratio was definite, and the answer to
that question is not pertinent to his definition. In other words, differen-
tials can exist when such ratio is indeterminate. Translated into its

exact modern equivalent, his definition is:

239

Corresponding differentials are, as near as we please, proportionals to correspond-
ing and indefinitely small increments of variables, and to speak accurately, they are
corresponding limits of such proportionals.

The power and generality of this definition can only be understood
after a careful study of its consequences. It applies whatever the num-
ber of independent variables. It is the mathematical foundation of
Newton’s conception of the state of change of variables, in which cor-
responding differentials are made to signify corresponding increments.
In other words, corresponding increments of @ state of change of variables
are as near as we please, proportionals to corresponding and indefinitely
small increments of the variables.

As an illustration of the method, consider z—vy, and as usual, let
Ax, AY, 2, Genote any corresponding increments of zx, y, z. Then,
Az=xAytyAr+ Ax. Ay

Let N be a variable number which becomes indefinitely large in any
way whatever (as V=1, 2, 3, 4, and so on indefinitely). Conceive /\x, /\y,
to diminish as N increases, so that their proportionals, V/\v7, N/\y, remain
finite and approach limits designated by dz, dy (Ax=dx/N+8/N?,
Ay=dy/N-+5/N?, for example). Then if dz denote the limit of the re-
maining proportional V/\ 2, the equation from which it is to be determined
is NAz=xNAyt+yNAr+ NAc. Ay, which gives, by the theorems of
limit, dz=«xdy + ydzx.

Here, the ratio dz/dx is absolutely indeterminate, since it depends upon
the values chosen for dv, dy.

Leibnitz rediscovered the caleulus in 1676, and immediately published
his methods and spread them over Europe. His right to the title of inde-
pendent discoverer was disputed by the friends of Newton, because when
Leibnitz was just turning his attention to mathematics in 1673, he visited
London and consulted, some manuscripts of Newton. Leibnitz’s defense is
that he did not see the manuscript on the calculus, and his notes taken at
the time, and afterwards discovered, contain only references to Newton’s
papers on optics. It is fortunate in respect to notation that we have
received the calculus from the hands of Leibnitz rather than Newton; but
the history of the calculus, from Leibnitz on, revolves about objections to
his infinitesimal methods. In order to avoid those methods, Lagrange
recast the calculus into practically its present form. He regarded the
differentials of the independent variables as their small actual increments,
and the differential of a dependent variable as that part of its increment
which is of first degree when it is expanded in ascending powers of the

240

independent increments. In his method, the principle quantities were the
differential coefficients, and if z were a function of x, y, he wrote

where dz/dx was a whole symbol for the coefficient of dx in dz, and not the
quotient of dz by dv; and similarly for dz/dy.

This idea was not received with favor, partly because it made the cal-
culus depend upon expansions in series, whereas, one important feature of
the calculus was the determination of such expansions.

At present, we have a derivative calculus, with a differential notation,
in which differentials have significance only in quotient forms; in fact the
derivative is Lagrange’s differential coefficient, and the two terms are used
interchangeably. The student is taught that the quotient form is an in-
separable symbol, but the notation, and the calculus itself, eventually
require their separation. The explanations which have been devised for
such separation of inseparable symbols are sometimes remarkable. The
method of rates is simply to define the derivative dy/dx as the rate at which
y is changing, and dy, dr, as any quantities whose ratio is dy/dv. This is
not the same as Newton’s method, who makes dy the amount which y
changes in its state of change when « changes by dv, and thence dy/dz is
the change of y per unit change of x. It does matter whether we make dif-
ferentials the prime quantities, and thence deduce the significance of their
ratios, or whether we make the ratios the prime quantities, and thence
deduce differentials. For, two variables can have differentials, with no
ratio that is definite, i. e., independent of the values of the differentials
themselves.

In a calculus in which the derivative is the prime quantity, the differ-
ential notation creates numerous artificial difficulties which would be elim-
inated by a proper derivative notation; but this would limit the scope of
the calculus and alter many of its time-honored developments. Nor is it
necessary to make a change of notation, because the present notation is
made completely significant by Newton’s definition.

When we consider the weight that attaches to the name of Newton, it
would seem that his views on the calculus were worthy of being considered,
even today. When we add that he is the original inventor, and that his
fundamental idea of the differential is the very one that is needed to give
the differential calculus an intelligent and rigorous mathematical basis, it

is certainly time that he came into his own.

241

CoNDITIONS FOR THE DEFORMATION OF SuRFACES REFERRED TO A
ConJUGATE SysTEM oF LINEs.

BURKE SMITH.

When a surface is subjected to a series of deformations, each form that
it assumes during the deformation may be thought of as a separate, dis-
tinct surface. We may thus regard a deformation of a surface as a
continuous system of surfaces, each representing some form into which
the original surface may be deformed. Im this paper we consider the
problem of determining those surfaces which may be deformed so that a
conjugate system of lines will still remain a conjugate system after the
deformation is carried out.

We shall suppose that the equations of the surfaces that we consider
are given in the form,

x= f, (4, »), y= f, (4, v), Z — f, (4, ”),

and that the first and second fundamental magnitudes are E, F, G and’
D, D’, D’’, respectively.

If S, represents the form that S, takes when deformed so that a conju--
gate system remains a conjugate system, then S, is applicable on S,. But
the necessary and sufficient condition that two surfaces should be appli-
cable on each other is that they shall have the same lineal element and the
same total curvature.

If the parametric lines, “=const., v —const., on S, and S, form a
conjugate system, then D’=—o for both S, and §8,. Since S, and S, must
have the same lineal element and the same curvature, we have from the

relation, —

oy ECE

that D, = 4D, and D,’”=2D,” where the subscripts refer to S, and S,
respectively, and 4 is a function of « and». To determine 4 we make use
of the fact that Codazzi’s equations must be satisfied for both §, and 8,.
Bianchi* has thus shown that 4 must satisfy the equations,
Ores ee dee cae
Tisler) eeetanl er aie
** Vorlesungen tiber Differential-Geometrie,”’ p. 336.

16— A. or Scignog, 704.

(1)
& =-{T} (4-9)
where aa and { e \" are the symbols of Christoffel formed with
respect to the Gauss sphere. Since now sie = a we have from (1),

ou Ov Ov Ou
as the condition of integrability,

ie al [6 f12Q9:7

7
Ckaes |

Having given the surface Si, then to every value of 7 which satisfies (1)

| (eta \es (
a) “|e U2 s elias, ele

falas ay = Ty
ee Of, NE2
and (2) there corresponds a surface Se of the desired type.

There are three possible cases that may occur under (2). Suppose,

first, that the surface Si is such that

OND Vy eal yee Oyen ce (12) "
(1) 7s lie eee VIDS, Pe Saeee \

In this case the condition of integrability (2) is satisfied for every value of
2, and since equations (1) are of the first order, there are in this case 90!
surfaces Ss which are applicable on S: and such that their parametric lines
form a conjugate system. We thus have in this case a continuous system
of surfaces, and the above equations are the necessary and sufficient condi-
tion that a surface may belong to such a system.

Suppose, next, that Si is such that

SEN (12) AfAgy * Day 12% (12 5 flan

ba eee le SO rie weary C2 |
(II) or,

Cai dO? = veel slo nie O fol Diy’ sey (12a

BEL sf a ef Fa es Gl emcee ws k=

In this case ? vanishes or is undefined, and the condition of integrability
is not satisfied. Consequently there exists no surface S: in this case.
Suppose, finally, that

D>) -4 (OTSA) 7 (fF 1139) 4

dv l 2 J eal a alge ee)
(IIT)

OSes 5. ir lz lees

fae leks 16 sak Fetal bf jet Ba}

We have in this case one, and only one, value for 22. If the surface S,
is such that in addition to (III) being satisfied, (1) are also satisfied, then

243

there is one, and only one, surface S, which represents the result of deform-
ing S, so that a conjugate system remains a conjugate system after the
deformation.

There are two cases which may occur under (III). Suppose that

P< (1D) 7 aaa 7
Ey oy 2s ee

Then 7—-+1 and the surface Se is such that its second fundamental
magnitudes D2 and D2” are either equal to the corresponding magnitudes
Di and Di’ of Si or they are the negatives of Di and Dy’.

But from the equations (*)

dz __ iD = PENT es)
on eg—f?2 Ou du J
Ox x 14 [ OX +. f) Xx)
Ov eg — f? OW ane!

Where e, f, g are the fundamental magnitudes of the Gauss’ sphere, it
is seen that a change in the sign of D and D” corresponds to a change of
sign in the co-ordinates x, y, z of the surface, and therefore the surface S2
is either identical with Si or it issymmetrical to Si: with respect to a plane
or to the origin of co-ordinates.

Suppose next that

j DNA j h
(II») ie 12) Nhe: f12)

{
Jv 12 f Ou ea

In this case there is a anique value of 22 -1. Si may therefore be de-
formed so that after the deformation is carried out the lines “=—const.,
v=const., form a conjugate system, although they do not form a conju-
gate system at any time during the deformation. Now, by a theorem of
Dini, (**) from relation (III) no surface So exists, the spherical images of
whose asymptotic lines are the same as the spherical images of a conjugate
system of lines on Si. But from the definition of associate surfaces, there
is then no surface to which Si is associated, and thus we have the result
that when (III];) is true for any surface Si referred to a conjugate system,
there exists no surface Sc to which Si is associated.

(*) Bianchi, 1. c. p. 134.
(**) Bianchi, 1. ¢. p. 125.

245
A FamIty oF WARPED SURFACES.
C. A. WALDO.

Derivation of the general equation of all warped surfaces having two

distinct rectilinear directrices and its application to a few special cases.

Fig. 1.

Let the surface be defined by the three directrices

= Ole Male i910)
Vi —— sO han rsce == Ol
PCy 2) Opes (i)

The curve f (x’y’) = O lies in the plane z = O, the X and Y axes are
parallel to the rectilinear directrices; the Z axis includes the common per-
p2ndicular to the rectilinear directrices, unless otherwise specified.

In the diagram Fig. 1, let X’ X” be one straight line directrix at the
distance q above the plane z = o, Y’ Y”’ the other at p above z=o0. Their
horizontal projections will be the X and Y axes of reference.

246

Let (x, y, z) be any point P on the warped surface, and EK’ E’ B’”
the rectilinear element containing it.

het Opi x4 ON = OR = q) OO p:

Then by similarities and projections the following equations exist:

x’ a2 HW’ By noe | ALG) E’2 = p zs eS p x

x aa 1 D464 1B os 1D ALL Po al p—z ’ = p—z
Similarly, yy = AY
q—z

Substituting these values of x’ y’ in f (x’ y’) — o, there results the cor-
responding functional equation,
f [FE eee } 9,
p—z’ q—z
which is the equation in Cartesian co-ordinates X, Y axes general, Z

axis perpendicular to X and Y of the warped surfaces as defined above

and includes every warped surface with two distinct rectilinear directrices.
For its application it requires that a section of the surface should be
known parallel to the right-line directrices and not including either of
them. This general surface is referred directly to the orthogonal pro-
jections of two warped lines in space upon a plane parallel to both,
and to their common perpendicular. The angle at which the lines
intersect is implicitly contained in the equation of the surface. The
form of the equation of the surface does not change, therefore, when
the surface itself is deformed by changing the angle in space of the
right line directrices, provided the form of the equation of the plane
curve directrix remains unchanged.

It is also at once evident that the miethod derives immediately the
Cartesian equation of the warped surface determined by the fact that
an element cuts a curved directrix, a linear directrix and is parallel to a
given plane. This is equivalent to saying that one of our parameters
p. q. remains finite while the other becomes indefinitely great.

For simplicity suppose the three axes always at right angles to each

other unless otherwise specified.

THE HYPERBOLIC PARABOLOID.

(a)? Let f(s) =x — yy? = ©:

cTebverrig E sd eee rl a ee eee
(p—z’ q—z! p—z * q=z
Let p=1, q =—1

Then x + xz—y-+yz=o0.

247

Rotate the xy axes through 7/4, then the zx axes in the same way, and
there results the well known equation,

(b) elhetii Gey) xy —— C0;

a ate Weg fa Da I aya DO SY.
=F A fe > PSs

Let p = 1 and q become indefinitely great,
Then xy = c (]l-=z).
Rotate the zy axes through 7/4, let c = 1 and
1—z=4Z,
Then x? — y? — 2Z.
Compare this operation and result with the next.

THE HYPERBOLOID OF ONE SHEET.

ett (xy 2) x4 y/ — «0

as above ee Lee
p—z q—z
let p=1,q =—1

Then xy = c (1 — 2?).
Rotate xy axes through 7/4, let ¢c = 1/2.
Then x? — y2 + z? — 1.

A Cupic SURFACE WITH PARABOLIC SECTIONS,
Metin tx sy) y4—— x "0:
2 2 a
Thon ft | 2* ay) ey. Des

(Da te | (Cae han
a. Let p=landq—-—1. Then
y? (l—z) = x (1 4+ z)?, one of the cubical warped surfaces.
b. Letip= 1, q =o, then y2 (i — z) >x.
Go Letiq 1, pi oo, then y* = x (1 —.z)*.

BIQUADRATIC SURFACE WITH HYPERBOLIC SECTIONS.
Let £ (x4 y7) =x? — y2 — cc =0
(“px ay | pox q? y?
(bain GF |) SS | Se — e —
(p—z’q—z) (p—z)? (q—z)?
areubet py — lvqt=_—i.¢: = 1
Then x? (1 + z)2 — y? (1 — z)? = (1 — 2)?

C=O

248

by Letipi— aly gq) 00,

Then x? — y? (1 — z)? = (1 — z)?
Oh Meno == Co, 0) =) G1

Then x? (1 — z)? — y? = (1 — z)?

BIQUADRATIC SURFACE WITH ELLIPTICAL SECTIONS.
het f(x y7) — x2 + 77 — ¢ =0
( “px ay. =) p? x? ge ty?
TI f = wis
Sa (p—z qi 4 (= 2)2 a (q—z)?
ae oleh. p.— ql — 1s cal
Then x? (1 -+ x)? + y? (1 — z)? = (1 — 2)?

c=0O

Here the volume between rectilinear directrices is exactly that of a
sphere of radius one.

baa wletip —aqyaec —s

2 2
Tl es y ae
len r = a5 a Zz? 1
aq | l q J
j F 2 aq
Circular sections are at z = 0 and z = :
lta
2 aq Bas
Thesplanes? 70,2 1g), Zz) — Tea Z —= aq divide every transversal

harmonically. In particular every element is divided harmonically by the
circular sections and the rectilinear directrices.
c. Combining the last two surfaces and letting p — aq,

Solve for sections parallel to the xy plane and of the same eccen-
tricity:

which gives

crac 2) andsz7— sass) for similar conic sections.
m—a m-+a
It is then easily seen that the four planes,

Z=—q,

aes aq (m—1)
m—a

LAG,

7, — 2a (m+)

ae oes roar ne

divide any transversal harmonically.

249

d. In the most general form with elliptic sections:
het, 19 == 1c, C=—'1.
Then x? + (1 — z)*? y?= (1 —z)?, the equation of Wallis’s Coneo-

Cuneus, or the ship carpenter’s wedge. :

e. Assume case a. The central section at z=oisacircle. Deform
the surface by rotating one directrix about the Z axis any angle less than
7/2. The section z = o will now be an ellipse referred to its equi conju-
gate diameters. The form of the equation of this section will not change;
also the form of the equation of the deformed surface will be invariant.

ORDER OF THE RESULTING WARPED SURFACES.

Let fn (x y) represent a homogenous algebraic expression involving x
and y and of the nth degree.
In the fundamental demonstration,
Poet f(a ya) ht (er ya) ——1C) —. Os
If x and y are both present, the corresponding warped surface is of
the 2d order.
If x or y is absent, the resulting surface is a plane.
2: Let £ (&” y”) =e (x y) — fi (« y) — c= 0.
x? and y” both present, 4th order.
x? or y? absent, other terms present, 3d order.
x? and y? both absent, xy present, x and y present or one or both
absent, 2d order.
So nett (xy) tel (ey) foie y)) = fi Gey) —« =.
x? and y? both present, 6th order.
x? or y® absent, other terms present, 5th order.
x? and terms involving x? absent; or, y® and terms involving y? ab-
sent, 4th order,
x? and y® both absent, other terms present, 4th order.
x®, y*, and xy” and terms involving y? absent, other terms present;
or, x, y, and x%y and terms involving x? absent, other terms
present, 3d order.

To deduce the general law of order of the resulting scrolls, construct
Fig. 2. Within the squares are present all the powers and combinations
that can occur in a complete equation in x, y, of the 5th degree. The
numbers at the intersections of the lines show the order of the resulting
scroll provided at least two terms remain in our original f(x’, y’) =o, one

250

of which lies in a square two sides of which converge in the angle in ques-
tion, or one of the two terms lies in a square bounded above and to the
right by one of the lines converging at the angle, the other in a square

bounded above and to the left by the other line making the angle. Thus
below one of the points marked 5 is found the term x*y*. This term joined
with any or all others lying between the lines converging at that particu-
lar 5, will yield a scroll of the 5th order.

So also we will have a scroll of the 5th order if we select x*y? on one
side and x® on the other side of the space bounded by the lines converging
at the same point 5.

At the middle point of the whole of Fig. 2 is a vertex marked 4. The
following groups can be arranged for the equation of the curvilinear
directrix, but in every case the resulting scroll will be of the 4th order.

1. x?y2 and c present, xy present or absent,

2. xy? and c present, and other terms present besides x y,

251

3. x%y and xy? present, other terms present or absent,

4. xy and y? present, other terms present or absent (or xy’ and x”),

5. x? andy? present, other terms of lower degree present or absent.

1 and 2 are built from 4th degree terms and the resulting equation
is only the 4th.

3, has two 3d degree terms present, scroll 4th.

4, one term 3d degree, other 2d, scroll 4th.

5, built from second degree terms, scroll 4th.

Fig. 3, shows at once the order of the resulting scroll when the equa-
tion of the curvilinear directrix is marked by the presence or absence of

certain specified terms.

252

DOUBLE GENERATION.

The law of double generation is simply stated. Two straight lines are
chosen parallel to the plane of the curvilinear directrix, the three giving
rise to a scroll of a certain equation. Suppose two other straight lines can
now be found parallel to the plane of the curvilinear directrix and inter-
secting the first two rectilinear directrices. Suppose the use of the second
pair of lines gives exactly the same equation as the first two, then the sur-

face is one of double generation. For example, x’ y’=c. Substitute wuss

for x’ making p = 1 and rae for y’ making q = — 1. There results

xy =
= = c; now make p=—landq=+1. The same equa-
(1 + z)(1—z)

tion results. In fact these are the two generations of the hyperboloid of
one sheet.

It then becomes at once apparent that all scrolls are doubly generated
whose curvilinear directrix has for its equation a function of the product
term (xy), the plane of the curvilinear directrix being parallel to the recti-
linear directrices. Thus the first of the five 4th scrolls order mentioned
above, viz.: the one having xy? and c, and perhaps x y terms in the
equation of the curvilinear directrix is a scoll of double generation.

It is not at once evident that the property discussed above is €0-
extensive with all the doubly generated warped surfaces in the family
under discussion. Such surfaces may also depend upon other properties

not yet discovered.

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.

It is evident that the validity of the demonstration does not require
the axis of Z to be the common perpendicular between the two recti-
linear directrices. If the Z axis connects the two directrices in ques-
tion and passes through the middle point of their common perpendicu-
lar, it follows at once that the demonstration proceeds as before by
parallel instead of orthogonal projection.

If we conceive the three axes of reference, under the restrictions just
given, to be oblique to each other, we find the resulting equations are still
in their simplest forms. In the surfaces of the second order the axes
would then be conjugate axes. In surfaces of higher order the axes

of reference would play the part of conjugate axes.

253

It will frequently happen that the equation of a scroll will be sought
whose three directrices are given as above, viz., two rectilinear and one
plane curvilinear directrix, but the latter in some plane not parallel to
the two former lines.

In this case additional means should be given for writing the equa-
tion of the surface under the new conditions. It will then be easy to
find a section parallel to the two right-line directrices and the problem
then is solved by the process discussed in this paper.

A modification of the method here discussed finds the equation of a
scroll given by two rectilinear directrices and a plane section of the
surface, the section being oblique to a piane parallel to the two given

straight lines

[ee
ge ee | a ;

5." nO ae eee 9 ET 5 A ee
a ae =
Sie -f a fhe.

me Le a =,
* “4 _
i
- .
7 2

t

tN
Or

An Investigation oF N—-Rays.

R. R. RAMSEY and W. 2. HASEMAN.

This paper is an account of an attempt of the authors to repeat the
experiments of R. Blondlot in which he has discovered that there is an
invisible radiation given off from an Auer (Welsbach) burner, Nernst lamp
and other sources.

Blondlot was investigating the polarization of X-rays (Comptes Rendus,
Feb. 28, 1903) and using a feeble spark gap as a detector. He thought
he had discovered that the X-rays were polarized in certain planes. In
a few days (Comptes Rendus, March 23, 1903) he was convinced that
the effects were due to other rays than X-rays. In May of the same
year (Comptes Rendus, May 11, 1903) an article by Blondlot appeared,
entitled, “Rays from an Auer Burner.” An ordinary Welsbach burner
(Auer burner) was surrounded with an iron chimney in which a window
was cut and closed with an alumitum sheet .1 mm. thick. The radiation
from this window was allowed to fall ou the little spark gap and the
intensity of the light from the spark was seen to increase. By means
of a quartz lens Blondlot was able to detect four different wave lengths.
The intensity of the spark gap is found to have four maximums as it is
moved to and fro along the principal axis of the lens.

A week later (Comptes Rendus, May 25, 1903) Blondlot published
an article in which he gave a list of various sources of N-rays and
several means of detecting them, the chief ways being the little spark
gap; a sheet of silver heated to a very dull redness by a little gas
flame; a small phosphorescent screen which has been feebly excited by
sunlight or other source.

The intensity or brilliancy of these detectors was found to increase
when the radiation fails upon them. In this article Blondlot calls the
new rays N-rays, from the town of Nancy, his home.

In a short time afterward Blondlot published an article in which he
found that a Nernst lamp with an aluminum window is a-good source.
He also found that certain substances store up N-rays when they are
exposed to N-rays and give off the rays afterward. Among those that
store up the rays are quartz, stones and brick. Wood, aluminum, paper,

256

dry or wet, and paraffin do not store up the rays. He found that one
of the essential conditions of a substance that stores up the rays is
dryness. It is found that bricks exposed to sunlight become a source
for hours afterward.

While experimenting along this line Blondlot discovered an unex-
pected effect. While viewing a strip of white paper which was feebly
illuminated, a brick which had been exposed to sunlight was brought
near the eye and the outline of the paper became more distinct. The
intensity diminished when the brick was removed. <A clock face which
seemed a grey patch on the wall became clearly outlined and the hands
visible when a brick was brought near the eye. Water intercepts the
radiation, in fact, Blondlot used dampened paper as screens in his work.
Salt water transmits the rays. An ox eye was transparent and became
a secondary source. Hyposulphite of soda in solid or solution is found
to be a powerful accumulator. Blondlot has found that compressed glass.
wood, ete., emit N-rays and cause the phosphorescent screen to become
more luminous. <A bent cane near the head caused a clock to become
more visible. Unbending the cane caused the clock to disappear. Tem-
pered objects, such as files. knife blades, hammered brass, had the same
effect, as also did a knife blade from an ancient tomb. The rays are
emitted from nearly every strained object. In fact F. E. Hackett (Roy.
Dublin Soc. Trans. 8, 10, pp. 127-138, Sept. 1904), the only English speak-
ing person who is sure he has observed the effect, recommends the use
of cork or wood under pressure as a source.

In the early part of the present year Blondlot finds that he has been
dealing with two distinct kinds of radiation. N-rays cause the calcium
sulphide screen to become more luminous, while the second radiation,
or N,-rays cause the normal intensity to decrease. N-rays cause the
normal intensity from the screen to increase, while N,-rays cause the
tangential radiation of the screen to become more luminous.

Photographs have been published which show a greater effect on
the plate under the influence of the N-rays than that without. For these
photographs, in every case, the light from the little spark gap is used.
A. Charpentier has found that the human body is a source of N-rays,
the intensity being greater near the nerve centers. The spinal column
can be traced by means of the screen. Certain parts of the brain give off
the rays abundantly. The intensity beiug greatly augmented when the

brain is active. Charpentier can see himself think. To refute those who

257

say the phenomenon is one of heat Charpentier has placed frogs on ice
and lowered their temperature below that of the screen and shown that
the cold frog is still a source.

Charpentier describes experiments in which N-rays are conducted
along wire. Two phosphorescent screens are attached on the ends of
a wire, length in one case 300 cm. N radiation is allowed to fall on
one screen and the screen on the other end is seen to become more
luminous. The N-rays are found by Charpentier to have the property of
increasing the intensity of certain odors: ammonia, acetic acid, ete.

E. Meyer has found that plants emit N-rays. Certain substances
while going into solution become sources. The electrolyte of a Le Clanche
cell has been found to be a strong source after the cell has been short-
circuited.

One curious fact about N-rays is that up to very recently at least,
every successful experimenter has been a Frenchman.

Numerous short articles have appeared explaining the phenomena
as one of heat or as one due to psychical phenomena.

Although we so far, like many others, have not been successful, we
thought an account of our attempts was worthy of mention.

It was evident after a number of preliminary trials that the eye
could not be relied upon to detect the variation in a feebly iuminous
source of light. The rays are produced by a Welsbach burner shut up in
an iron pipe about 50 cm. long, 10 cm. in diameter with walls 1 em. thick.
The pipe is pierced by a window about 5 em. long and 2 em. in width

Fie.?

and closed by some black paper, and a sheet of aluminum 16 mm. thick.
The general arrangement of the apparatus is that shown in Fig. I. The
17—A. oy» Sciexce, ’04.

258

rays are supposed to pass through the window W and fall on some feebly
luminous object such as a heated platinum wire or a calcium sulphide
screen at S. Both the platinum wire and the sulphide screen were
used and when viewed by the eye threugh ground glass at various
angles and positions relative to the source nothing definite was noticed.
The feebly luminous spot at times apparently brightened, then moved
around in a circle and went through a series of displacements. This
proved that nothing definite can be arrived at by viewing directly with
the eye.

The most reliable method of recording the action of a feebly luminous
source is photography. With this method, direct and indirect vision is
eliminated, as well as the error due to the increased sensitiveness of the
eye after being in the dark for some time. A number of photographs
were taken, on Seed’s regular “gilt edge’ plates, with the light from a
heated platinum wire, a luminous calcium sulphide screen, and a feeble

spark.

THE PLATINUM WIRE.

The platinum wire was a very thin strip cut from a piece of foil
03 mm. thick, so that in no place was the wire more than .05 mm.
broad. Only one place along it was allowed to be heated and the ap-
proximate breadth of this place was .08 mm. The wire was heated by
a current approximately .9 amperes from three or five Edison-Lalande
batteries. In some of the latter experiments a storage battery was used.
The relative position of the different parts of the apparatus is shown
ray Dates OT

f1¢.Z1.

B is a cardboard box in which is p'aced the platinum wire. The

platinum wire is soldered to two copper wires which are fastened to a

259

wooden block by two binding posts in order to make connection with the
battery. The photographic plate was so mounted back of a block of
wood about 25 em. long, 14 cm. wide and 4 cm. thick with a hole 2%
em. in diameter that it could be slid past the opening and a number of

exposures made upon one plate.

PLATE -£,

The first two photographs taken with the apparatus just described
with the time of exposure and current as indicated. There is very little
if any difference between those marked N and the others. Those marked
N are exposures without a lead screen inserted between the source and

the platinum wire.

CALCIUM SULPHIDE.

The calcium sulphide is the luminous sulphide as prepared by E. H.
Sargent & Company, Chemists, of Chicago. The sulphide was spread on
a cardboard with mucilage and excited by sunlight. <A tin can was
placed around the iron pipe and aluminum window placed in the tin
can. With this arrangement some of the external heating effects were

eliminated.

Photographs III and LV were taken with the sulphide screen parallel
to the aluminum window so that the rays must fall on the back side of
the sereen while their effect was photographed from the front side.
Photograph III was taken with the sensitive plate about 4 cm. from
the screen while IV was less than 1 ¢m. and in no case was the sulphide
screen more than 25 em. from the source. In III the exposures were
alternated so that 2, 4, 6 and S were exposed to all radiations that
might come from a Welsbach burner and pass through an aluminum

window, while 1, 3, 5 and 7 were taken when a lead screen was placed

aL

ky
IK
x
~
Q

262

between the source and sulphide screen. In the photographs it is seen
that there is a gradual decay in the luminous intensity of the screen,
and if there is any radiation coming from the burner, in no ease is it
sufficently intense to overcome the decay or even make the rate notice-
ably different.

Photograph IV was taken by exposing one-half of the luminous
sereen to the radiations while at the same time the other half, which
was screened from them by lead, was exposed. The arrangement is

similar to that shown in Fig. III.

FIG.

S is a large lead plate 1 mm. thick with a circular opening in the
center, on the back of which is fastened the sulphide screen. In the
line A D across the opening is a lead strip projecting 2 or 3 mm. foward.
A BC D is a small lead plate on the back side of the larger one, covering
one-half of the opening. With this arrangement sixteen exposures were

taken on one plate and a direct comparison can be made. In the sixteenth

Ficg.D.

there is not much difference between the half marked N and the half not

marked at all.

i~e—we

263

Photograph V is taken with the aid of convex lenses, focussing the

light from the sulphide screen on the plate; by means of a lead plate,

cP LALEM a

one-half of the luminous screen was screened from the source in such
a manner as is shown in Fig. IV. A black strip of paper is pasted across

the center of the screen to mark the halves of the luminous sulphide.

264

Photograph VI is a trial plate to investigate the effect of various times
of exposures. The exposures marked N are seen to be slightly darker
on the negative. This seems to indicate that there is a slight effect
from the radiations of the Welsbach burner. Photographs VII and VII1

are to show whether or not VI is due to a radiation. VII shows similar
results to VI and is taken under similar conditions. It was thought
that it might be due to heat, and to prove this a lead plate was placed
against the tin can, where it became heated. Exposure VIII is made with
the radiation cut off by the lead plate suspended between the source and
sulphide screen and shows similar results to VI and VII. The exposures

marked N are the denser on the negative, not because of a radiation
falling on the corresponding side of the screen, but because of heat or
of initial conditions of luminosity. The arrangement of apparatus for
these three photographs is shown in Fig. V.

Vis Ga. vias

FEEBLE SPARK.

The apparatus used was as described in Blondlot’s work. The results
were negative and only two photographs taken, both of which are given
in plate IX and X. The intensity of the spark was that given by a

9av7
406

b

spark between two rounded ends of platinum wire % mm. diameter sepa-
rated a small fraction of a mm. The potential at the spark gap was not

PLATE. X.

great enough to spark a distance of 4mm. While working with this

apparatus a phenomenon occurred which shows how easily constant errors
may influence the result. The lead screen used to intercept the radia-

tion was suspended by cords to the top of the iron lamp chimney so as

268

to be easily and noiselessly swung in and out of the path of the radia-
tion from the window. It was noticed that when the lead was interposed
the intensity of the spark gap as seen through the ground glass di-
minished considerably and increased again when taken away. This was
what we were looking for. Of course we thought that after weeks of
vain effort we were to be rewarded. After changing our apparatus a
little the results were just the reverse oi what we expected. We also
noticed the character of the sound of the vibrator of the induction coil
changed in unison with the intensity. <A little investigation showed that
a slight pressure anywhere on the table would produce the same effect.
It seemed that the vibrator was vibrating about a point of nearly un-
stable equilibrium. <A slight change of level of the table caused the
vibration to be different and thus cause a different intensity of the
spark. The weight of the screen as it was swung to and fro was enough
to change the level of the table, which was an ordinary wooden one set
solidly on a concrete basement floor.

A three-glower 220 volt Nernst lamp was substituted for the Wels-
bach lamp. The results were the same as before.

Our results are all negative. After experimenting for some months
and appreciating the difficulties and the various psychial phenomena
that may enter we are tempted to believe, as some others do, that
the various French physicists have been misled. On the other hand,
when we consider that the experimenters on this phenomenon have
world-wide reputation, we can not think that such men as Blondlot,
Charpentier, or Becquenl would rush into print on a subject of which
they were not absolutely certain, especialy on one that has been called
in question by noted physicists.

It is our intention to remodel our apparatus in certain respects and

continue the investigation.

BIBLIOGRAPHY N-Rays.
R. Blondlot.

New Light.
March 26, 1903.
Journal de Physique, Vol. II, p. 339. 1903.
Rays from an Auer Burner.
C. R. 186; pp. 1120-1123, May 11, 1903.
Journal de Physique, Vol. II, p. 481. 1903.

Comptes Rendus 136, pp. 735-738,

Blondlot’s N-rays.
C. R. 1386, pp. 1227-1229, May 25, 19038.
Journal de Physique, Vol. II, p. 549. 1903.
N-rays in Solar Radition.
C. R. 186, pp. 1421-1422, June 15, 1903.
Journal de Physique, Vol. II, p. 551. 1903.
Action of N-rays.
C. R. 187, pp. 166-169, July 20, 1903.
New Effect of N-rays.
C. R. 187, pp. 684-686, Nov. 2, 1903.
Storage of N-rays by Certain Bodies.
C. R. 187, pp. 729-731, Nov. 9,-1903.
Effect of N-rays on the Eye.
C. R. 137, pp. 831-833, Nov. 23, 1903.
Emission of N-rays by Constrained Bodies.
C. R. 137, pp. 962-964, Dee. 7, 1903.
Dispersion and Wave-length of N-rays.
C.-R. 138, pp. 125-129, Jan. 18, 1904.
Action of N-rays Recorded by Photography.
C. R. 138, pp. 453-456, Feb. 22, 1904.
New Kind of N-rays.
C. R. 138, pp. 545-547, Feb. 29, 1904.
Peculiarities of the Action of N-rays.
C. R. 188, pp. 547-548, Feb. 29, 1904.
Blondlot’s N-rays.
Electrician 52, p. 880, March 11, 1904.
Difference in the Action of Heat and of N-rays on Phosphorescence.
C. R. 138, p. 665, March 14, 1904.
Action of N-rays.
C. R. 188, pp. 1894-13895, June 6, 1904.
Photographie Registration of N-ray Effects.
C. R. 138, pp. 1675-1676, June 17, 1904.
Heavy Eminations.
C. R. 138, pp. 1473-1476, June 13; pp. 1676-1679, and C. R. 139,
pp. 22-23, July 4, 1904.
New Method for Observing N-rays.
C. R. 139, pp. 114-115, July 11, 1904.

270

A. Charpentier.
Emission of N-rays by the Human Body.
C. R. 137, pp. 1049-1051, Dee. 14, 1908.
N-rays of Physiological Origin.
C. R. 1387, pp. 1277-1280, Dec. 28, 1903.
Physiological Radiations.
C. R. 138, pp. 45-46, Jan. 4, 1904.
Transmission of Physiological Radiation Through Wires.
C. R. 188, pp. 194-196, Jan. 25, 1904.
Physiological Action of N-rays.
C. R. 188, pp. 270-272, Feb. 1, 1904.
Tranmission of N-rays.
C. R. 138, pp. 414-416, Feb. 15, 1904.
Action of the N-rays on the Olfactory Organs, and Emission of N-rays
by Oderiferous Substances.
C. R. 138, pp. 584-586, Feb. 29, 1904.
Action of the N-rays on the Auditory Sensitiveness.
C. R. 138, p. 648, March 7, 1904.
Physiological Action of Blondlot’s N,-rays.
C. R. 138, pp. 648-649, March 7, 1904.
Generation, Through the Nerves, of the Action of N-rays Applied at
Any Point of the Body.
C. R. 188, pp. 715-717, March 14, 1904.
Selective Physiological Action on Phosphorescent Screens.
C. R. 138, pp. 771-774, March 21, 1904.
Physiological Action on Phosphorescence.
C. R. 188, pp. 919-920, April 11, 1904.
Nervous Oscillations and Their Propagation Studied by the N-rays
Hmitted by the Nerves.
C. R. 138, pp. 1121-1123, May 9, 1904.
Relation Between Organs of Perception and the Physical Agents Act-
ing Upon Them.
C. R. 138, pp. 1282-1283, May 24, 1904.
Emission of N-rays After Death.
C. R. 138, pp. 1351-1352, May 30, 1904. é
Resonance Method for Determining the Frequency of Nervous Oscilla-
tions.
C. R. 188, pp. 1723-1725, June 27, 1904.

M.

271

Stationary Waves Observed in the Neighborhood of the Human Body.
C. R. 139, pp. 155-157, July 11, 1904.
Charpentier and E. Meyer.
Emission of N,-rays in Certain Inhibitory Phenomena.
C. R. 188, pp. 520-521, Ireb. 22, 1904.
Emission of N-rays in Inhibitory Phenomena.
C. R. 138, pp. 832-833, March 28, 1904.
Meyer.
Emission of N-rays by Vegetables.
C. R. 188, pp. 101-102, Jan. 11, 1904.
Emission of N-rays by Plants.
C. R. 188, pp. 272-273, Feb. 1, 1904.
Lambert and EH. Meyer.
Action of N-rays on Biological Phenomena.
C. R. 188, pp. 1284-1285, May 24, 1904.
Bichat.
Transmission of N-rays.
C. R. 138, pp. 329-331, Feb. 8, 1904.
Transparency of N-rays.
C. R. 1388, pp. 548-550, Feb. 29, 1904.
Particular Cases of Emission of N-rays.
C. R..138, pp. 550-551, Feb. 29, 1904.
New Observations with a Phosphorescent Screen.
C. R. 138, pp. 1254-1257, May 24, 1904.
Phenomenon Analogous to Phosphorescence Produced by N-rays.
C. R. 138, pp. 1816-1318, May 30, 1904.
Emission of N-rays by Crystalline Bodies.
C. R. 138, pp. 1396-1397, June 6, 1904.
Perpendicular Emission of N- and N,-rays.
C. R. 188, pp. 1395-1396, June 6, 1904.
Variations of Luminosity of Phosphorescent Sulphide Under Action of
N-rays.
C. R. 189, pp. 254-256, July 25, 1904.
Jégon.
N-rays Emitted by a Current in a Wire.
C. R. 188, p. 491, Feb. 22, 1904.

. Bagard.

Natural Rotary Power of Certain Substances for N-rays.
C. R. 138, pp. G86-6G88, March 14, 1904.

27

G.

J.

F.

2

Sagnac.
Wave-length of N-rays Determined by Diffraction.
C. R. 137, pp. 1435-1487, June 15, 1963.

. M. de Lepinay.

Production of N-rays by Sonorous Vibrations.
C. R. 138, pp. 17-719, Jan. 11, 1904.
Objective Action of N-rays.
C. R. 138, pp. 798-799, March 28, 1904.

. Colson.

Application of Blondlot Rays to Chemistry.
C. R. 188, pp. 902-904, April 11, 1904, and
C. R. 188, pp. 1423-1425, June 6, 1904.

Origin of the Blondlot Rays Emitted During Chemical Reaction.
C. R. 138, pp. 1098-1099, May 2, 1904.

. Ballet.

Emission of N- in Certain Pathological Conditions.
C. R. 138, pp. 524-526, Feb. 22, 1904.

Meyer.

Penetrating Power and Storage ot N,-rays.
C. R. 188, pp. 896-897, April 11, 1904.

Action of Anaesthetics on the Sources of N-rays.
C. R. 138, pp. 1335-1337, May 30, 1904.

Action of Sources of N-rays on Pure Water.
C. R. 138, pp. 1491-1492, June 13, 1904.

The Human Body and Blondlot’s Heavy Emanation.
Cc. R. 139, pp. 320-322, July 25, 1904.

. L. Mereanton and C. Radzikowski.

Action of N-rays on the Isolated Nerve Trunk.
C. R. 1389, pp. 1541-1542, June 13, 1904.

. Gutton.

Influence of Colors of Luminous Sources on Their Sensibility to N-rays.
C. R. 188, pp. 1592-1593, June 20, 1904.

. Rothe.

Photographic Method for Studying the Action of N-rays on Phosphor-
escence.
C. R. 138, pp. 1589-1591, June 20, 1904.
P. Le Roux.
Apparent Variations in the Luminosity of a Phosphorescent Screen
When Examined in a Dark Room.
C. R. 188, pp. 1413-1415, June 6, 1904.

A.

A.

Broea.
N-rays and the Brain.
C. R. 188, pp. 1161-1163, May 9, 1904.
Broca and A. Zimmern.
Study of the Spinal Chord by Means of N-rays.
C. R. 138, pp. 1239-1241, May 16, 1904.

. Becquerel and A. Broca.

Radiation from Nerve Centers Under Anesthetics.
GC. R. 138, pp. 1280-1282, May 24, 1904.

. Becquerel.

N-rays and Anaesthetics.
GC. R. 188, pp. 1159-1161, May 9, 1904.
Part Played by N-rays in Alteration of Visibility.
C. R. 138, pp. 1204-1206, May 16, 1904.
Simultaneous Emissions of N-rays and N,-rays.
C. R. 138, pp. 1332-1335, May 30, 1904.
Anaesthesia of Metals.
C. R. 138, pp. 1415-1418, June 6, 1904.
Contributions to the Study of the N-and N,-rays.
C. R. 138, pp. 1486-1489, June 13, 1904.
Action of a Magnetic Field on the N- and N,-rays.
C. R. 138, pp. 1586-1589, June 20, 1904.
Nature of the N- and N,-rays and Radio-activity of the Bodies Emit-
ting these Rays.
C. R. 189, pp. 264-267, July 25, 1904.
Refraction of the N-and N,-rays.
C. R. 139, pp. 267-270, July 25, 1904.
Comparison of Effects of 3- and N- and of a- and Ni-rays on Phos-
phorescent Screen.
C. R. 139, pp. 40-42, July 4, 1904.

O. Lummer.
Blondlot’s N-rays.
Deutsche Phys. Gesell, Verh. 5, 23, pp. 416-417, Dec. 15, 1903.
Contribution Toward the Explanation of Blondlot’s N-rays.
Phys. Zeitschr. 5, pp. 176-178, March 1, 1904.
H. Zahn.

Blondlot’s N-rays.
Phys. Teischr. 4, pp. 868-870, Dec. 15, 1903.

18—A. oF Screncr, ’04.

274

H. Baumhauer.
Observations with a Blende Screen.
Phys. Zeitschr. 5, p. 289, June 1, 1904.
H. Guilleminot.
Present State of the N-ray Question.
Archives d’ El Medicale 12, pp. 373-382, May 25, and pp. 407-410,
June 10, 1904.
E. Salvioni.
Blondlot’s Rays.
Accad. Lincii Atti 13, pp. 610-616, June 4, and pp. 703-706, June 19,
1904.
A, A. Campbell Swinton.
Blondlot’s N-ray Experiments.
Nature 69, p. 272, Jan. 21, 1904.
Blondlot’s N-rays.
Nature 69, p. 412, March 3, 1904.
S. G. Brown.
Blondlot’s N-rays.
Nature 69, p. 296, Jan. 28, 1904.
J. B. Whitehead.
Various Radiations.
Elect. World and Eng. 48, p. 310, Feb. 138, 1904.
J. B. Burke.
Blondlot’s N-rays.
Nature 69, p. 365, Feb. 18, 1904, and Nature 70, p. 198, June 30, 1904.
W. A. D. Rudge.
N-rays.
Nature 69, pp. 486-487, March 24, 1904.
J. G. McKendrick and W. Colquhoun.
Blondlot’s N-rays.
Nature 69, p. 534, April 7, 1904.
F. E. Hackett.
Photometry of N-rays.
Roy. Dublin Soc. Tans. 8, 10, pp. 127-138, Sept., 1904.
R. W. Wood.
The N-rays.
Nature 70, p. 530, Sept. 29, 1904.

=I
Or

THe ApaAcHE MEDICINE CEREMONIES PERFORMED OVER THE
DAUGHTER OF C 30.

ALBERT B. REAGAN.

C 30’s daughter, near Fort Apache, Arizona, was very sick, so the
chief medicine men of the clan, having used every other remedy known
to their profession, decided to use the Gunelpieya Disk performances
(described 1n the Indiana Academy of Science for 1903) and the Medicine
Ghost Dance as a remedy to make her well. This remedy is the last
medical resort known to the Apache Indians. They believe that it will
either cure the patient or, if he dies, will prepare him for the Happy Hunt-
ing Ground. It belongs to the faith cure side of the Apache medical
practice. The Gunelpieya Disk performances are day-time ceremonies,
the Medicine Ghost Dance is always performed at night. The former
always immediately precedes the latter.

Having decided what to do, the medicine men set about to do it at
once.

In a sheltered sunny spot they made a canvas enclosure about thirty
feet in diameter. The enclosed area being then leveled, they drew a
medicine disk in it some sixteen feet in diameter. This disk they dec-
orated in concentric rings with several symbols of their gods; the sun,
rainbows, deer, bird, and gods or Gunelpieya, represented by the figures
of men. These they drew on the ground in various colors, the coloring
material being prepared as follows: The black from groundup charcoal;
the red from pulverized red sandstone; the yellowish-white from crushed
limestone; and the green from groundup leaves.

The disk being completed the Gunelpieya cermonies began. The
oldest grandmother present, in this case, Chinda by name, came into the
canyas enclosure, walked to the center of.the disk with cattail flag pollen,
sprinkled each of the symbolic figures of the disk with cattail flag pollen,
the sacred meal of the Apaches, called by them ‘“Hottendin.’ She then
took a cup partly filled with water and, beginning with the outer rainbow
circle, the outer figure of the disk thus drawn, she walked around on
each concentric cirele, both space and bow, from the rim of the disk to
its center, stooping before each sacred object to gather a pinch of dust

276

from it. This dust she put in the cup which she carried in her hand.
Having completed her dust gathering, she prayed for a moment to the
four great gods that are holding up the four corners of the earth; then
set the cup down in the center of the disk and took her departure.

As soon as grandma commenced to take her leave, the sick girl entered
the enclosure and, as she was too weak to walk, they carried her around
each concentric circle from the outer rim of the disk to its center, placing
her on the sun drawing with her face turned toward the evening sun. At
this moment the musicians, who had seated themselves within the canvas
enclosure in the space between the canvas and the disk, began to chant
in the minor key:

/

‘“‘Kaws’ ah tun’-nee yah’ osh’ kah’

7,

Kaws’ ah tun’-nee yah’ osh kah’

4 /

Kaws’ ah tun’-nee yah’ osh kah’
Kaws’ ah tun’-nee yah’ osh kee’ yah’.
Yah’ dethith’-be’-zhe’

Pair-ris’ kee-kay’ ed-dee-teen’

Tsot’ un-tzhon’-nee

Bair’ in-dah’ klee’-dal-ash’

Yah’ ed-dee-teen’ 00’ bair’ tzhon’-nee

Nod/-o0-tash’ yo’ e’ hay’ nay’.’”’
y ny; "

Just as the monotonous music had attracted the attention of all, a
ghost dancer, called by the Indians “Cheden,” came from a nearby thicket
and danced into the enclosure. He was nude with the exception of danc-
ing skirt, moccasins and hat, the latter being a square-shouldered ghost
hat. This hat had for a support piece a Low-shaped withe which passed,
yoke fashion, from the crown of the head to beneath the chin, where the
ends of the yoke were tied together with a sinew to keep the hat in place.
This withe had a muslin mask stretched over it loosely. To this yoke at
the top was fastened a transyerse-bar of yucca wood from which several
upright pieces projected on which there were peculiarly carved cross
pieces and zigzag red lines, indicating lightning. To make the ghost figure
more grotesque, the dancer’s body was painted in various colors. A
ghost god decorated his breast and the red bolt lightning his arms. He
held a butcher knife in one hand and a lightning painted wand in the
other. On entering he danced around within the enclosure for a consider-
able time. He then walked around the circle from the east, turning con-

217

tinually to the right and edging in toward the center of the disk till he
reached the patient, approaching her from the rear. He then laid down
his knife and wand and dipped his hands in the muddy water in the cup.
He then rubbed the sick one’s back with the muddied hands. When he
had done this he lifted his hands skyward and sent the “sick” away by

The Medicine Dancer. A Pose in the Medicine Dance.

blowing a hissing breath through them. In like manner he placed his
hands on the woman’s head, on her breast and on her arms. Having
eompleted his task and sent “sick”? away, he galloped off into obscurity.

When the-“Cheden’’ had gone, chief medicine man Brigham Young
went and took the muddy cup and rubbed the woman in the same manner
as the “Cheden” had done before him, except that he daubed her almost
all over with the mud, praying continually as he did so. When he had
completed his daubing, they carried the sick woman from the enclosure.

Then each one who cared took some of the dust of the gods, that is,
gathered a pinch of dust from each of the symbolic figures. This being
done, the disk was obliterated. The Gunelpieya ceremonies were thus
brought to a close. The next scenes were those of the ghost dance.

At about ten o’clock that night a huge bonfire was kindled in a level
open area, around which practically all the Indians of the tribe gathered.
Two drummers seated themselves on their blankets a little to the west
of the big fire and began to beat the Indian “ttomtoms,” drums made by
stretching a rawhide over the open face of a pot. As soon as the dull
drum beats were heard all who desired ito sing joined the drummers and

began to chant:

To’-kwah tzhoo’-nah nahd’-o-tash’

To’-kwah tzhoo’-nah nahd’-o-tash’

To’-kwah tzhoo’-nah nahd’-o-tash’

To’-kwah tzhoo’-nah nahd’-o-toosh’-she ah’ i’ a’ nah’ ah’
To’-kwah tzhoo’-nah nahd’-o-toosh’-she ah’ i’ a’ nah’ 7’.

After the singing had been going on for probably haif an hour, the sick
girl was carried to the place of meeting and placed on a blanket to the
east of the fire. On this she reclined for almost an hour waiting for those
who were to perform over her. At last they came, the ghost dancers.
There were five of them, four medicine dancers and a clown. The former
were “Chedens” and were all attired like the ‘Cheden” above described
with the exception that the hats of two ef them had the lath crest pieces
arranged in fan shape so as to resemble the spread tail of a turkey, which
it was intended to represent. The clown was attired, painted and daubed
similarly to the ghost dancers, the crest of his hat, however, was neither
square shouldered nor fan-shaped; but instead the lath extended out as
horns from each side, a small cross cresting the hat. Besides the differ-
ence in the hat, he also had a belt of pine twigs around his waist and a
bunch of fir twigs at his back that, in several respects, made him look
like Christian in ‘Pilgrims’ Progress” as he started out with his load of
sins on his back. The ghost dancers carried lightning painted wands in
each hand; the clown carried a thunder stick in one hand and a three-
pronged stick in the other. The thunder stick was a piece of lath sus-
pended on a string. The string being twisted, the whirling of the lath
gave a sound “all the same thunder,” to use the Indian expression. The
three-pronged stick resembled the trident of the fabled Neptune. The

279

clown thus attired and equipped looked much like the pictures of Satan,
whom he was intended to represent, except that he was wingless.

These medicine actors approached the congregated people from the
southwest, encircled them in a great circle, made circle after circle, each
time edging in toward the great fire. As they thus approached they kept

Medicine Man, C 4.

putting their heads near to the ground as if smelling for something, then
gobbling and struting like a turkey and waving their hands and wands
like a flying bird fiops its wings.

At last they entered the sick one’s presence and acting as though
surprised, they danced backwards and forwards for several yards to the
music of the chant:

‘‘Kahs’-ah-tun’ nee yah’ ash kah’
Kahs’-ah-tun’ nee yah’ ash kah’
Kahs’-ah-tun’ nee yah’ ash kah’
Kahs’-ah-tun’ nee yah’ ash kee’ yah’.”’

280

Then they approached again only to niake a retrograde movement as
before. This they did several times in succession. Then they approached
and strutted around the little spot that the girl occupied, the clown going
through every grimace known to his fraternity. After encircling the
patient once, they pranced for a moment while ‘‘grandma” sprinkled the
sacred meal upon them, blowing her breath in blessing on each one as she
sprinkled him. This completed scene one of this act and the men of the
gods cantered off into the darkness to go through their religious incanta-
tions to drive away the evil spirits, ‘‘sick.”’

The ghost dancers returned and formed in column facing the west, the
sick one being changed on her blanket so that she faced them. They
danced up to her feet and then retrograded in a backward movement to
the spot where they had first formed the column, gobbling and strutting
and waying their arms in imitation of a flying turkey. This they repeated
seven times. Then the formost dancer, as he made pose after pose often
imitating the actions of a mother quail when protecting her brood, left
the column and danced to the feet of the dying girl. He reached her
presence, strutted around her, laid the crossed wands on her, blew his
breath on them, danced backwards for about twelve feet with medicine
wands still crossed, parted the wands by a sweeping vigorous movement
of the hands in opposite directions, thus sending the evil spirits not into
the swine, but to the four winds. He returned to the patient, placed the
wands on her breast, then danced backwards and scattered the evil ones
as before. He then placed the crossed wands upon her head, and lastly
upon her back, each time performing as above described. His work being
completed, he galloped off into obscurity to appear in the next scene.

The other medicine dancers in succession went through practically the
same performance as the first ‘‘Cheden”’ did. Then the clown came.
His performing, in addition to his tumbling and rolling around in the dirt,
‘was about the same as that of those who preceded him, except that he
did not strut and gobble like a turkey. His acting completed part one of
this scene.

There were three other parts to this scene all of which were similar
to the one just described with the exception that the position taken by the
actors was different. In part two the sick one faced the southwest, the
dancing column the northeast; in part three she faced the northwest, the
column the southeast; and in part four she faced the northeast, the

281

column the southwest. Part four completed this scene and the medicine
actors passed out beyond the circle of lignut.

The next ten scenes were similar to the scene just described, except
that when lookers-on went to sleep the Satanic majesty woke them up
with his trident and made them dance, there being twenty-seven sleepy
ones dancing at one time.

Just as day began to dawn the twelfth and last scene began. The

Chief Brigham Young, of the Apaches.

medicine dancers appeared, were sprinkled with the sacred dust, and
began to perform over the sick one as in tbe previous ten scenes with the
exception that they used medicine hoops instead of wands. These hoops
were two and one-half feet in diameter, were five in number, were made
of willow, and were painted so that the five represented the rainbow in
color which they were intended to represent. sesides being painted.
each hoop had five eagle feathers suspended from it.

282

When this scene began the young and middle-aged lookers-on took
one more drink of Indian whiskey (they had been drinking it all night),
formed around the central fire in a great circle, and danced around from
left to right, the women in one half of the circle, the men in the other.
The old women danced backward and forward on either side of the fire

Grandma Irrigating.

within the outer dancing circle; and old grandma, Brigham Young, med-
icine man © 4, and Loco Jim sprinkled the sacred dust and prayed in-
cessantly to the gods. The dancing became more and more vigorous.
Every one joined in it. The sound of the peculiar drum, now being beat
with greater accent, the loud chanting and the deafening shouts of the
dancers filled all the surrounding country with ear-grating sounds. The
excitement reached a high tension. The sick one made one supreme
effort to rise and join in the dance; but she had not sufficient strength.
They lifted her to a standing position, they sprinkled her with the sacred

283

dust, they rubbed her back with scorched fir twigs, they supported her
in a dancing position. She made one more heroic effort to dance and be-
come well. Greater and greater grew the excitement. Loco Jim prayed

louder, the shrieks and shouts of the dancers became deafening. The
crisis came. In the excitement the sick one forgot her ailments. She
danced. She took a medicine god in each hand. She lifted them high
above her head. She leaped. She crow-hopped. She posed. She strutted
round and round the great fire like a turkey. She called the gods by
name. She shrieked, swooned and died.

Words can not describe the scene that followed. Men, yes, Indian
men, wept, the women wailed with the hideous coyote yelping wail so
characteristic of the Apaches. They all pulled their hair out by handfuls,
they rent their apparel and destroyed their property at hand. Then all
made a rush to see the corpse. ‘hey trampled over each other, and it
was with difficulty that they were kept irom crowding one another into
the great fire. They carried her to the nearest wigwam; stripped, washed
and dressed her; beaded her with all the beads of her clan; put wristlets
upon wristlets on her wrists; rolled her in her best blanket; took her and
her medicine accouterments to the mountain side and buried them beneath
a pinyon tree. Then they returned.and cestroyed everything which be-
longed to her, both animate and inanimate, together with her father’s
“tepee,” that the things that were hers on earth might be with her in
spirit in the land of bliss. Then for thirty days the women wailed and
mourned for her at morning, noon and night. Thus were the ceremonies

performed over the medicine girl brought to a close.

Tae Be Sram eee anne: =

meek saw ey sees: Bu) ecg Ee

Ewe a oe PA PHAR EMS: re: pies eres
TE tpt = a4 Syne ee er ei ee: hes:

bo
192)
Or

THe ApAcHE MEDICINE GAME.

ALBERT B. REAGAN.

The medicine game is usually played for the benefit of the sick. A
medicine man plays to drive “sick” away; an Indian, as the representative
of “sick,” plays against him. If the representative of the good spirits
wins, it is believed that the sick one will get well; if the representative
of evil gains the victory, he will die. The medicine man so plays the
game that if he believes the patient will die he loses, and if he believes he
will get well he wins; he must keep up his reputation as a medicine man.
The game is also occasionally played to pass the time away. When played
for that purpose four persons usually play, two playing as partners.

In many respects this game resembles the “‘Setdilth Game,’ described
in the Indiana Academy of Science for 1903. The tally counts are 40 in
humber, as in that game; but pebbles instead of cobble stones are used.
Furthermore, instead of being picked up on the spot, as the cobble stones
are, each family carries a “set” with them wherever they go. Like the
Setdilth tallies, when used in playing they are arranged in a circle; but
in groups of fives instead of tens. A wide space on opposite sides of the
circle, designated ‘‘water,’’ separates the four west groups from the four
east groups. As in the Setdilth game a center or bouncing rock is used.
Also as in that game bouncing sticks are used, but the number is four
instead of three. The sticks also are very different. The Setdilth sticks
are about a foot in length, are the halves of green willows, and are thick
and heavy. The Medicine sticks are two feet in length, are dry, seasoned
material, are usually yucca lath, and are light and thin. Besides being
variously carved, three of them have cone face each painted red; the
other face unpainted, or painted white. The other stick has one face
painted black, the other green. As in the Setdilth game these sticks are
struck endwise on the bouncing rock, and are then let fall as chance
may direct. In this game, as in the Setdilth game, small sticks are
placed between the last rock tally and the next pebble in the direction
the player is moving his tally stick to mark the number of points he has
gained. Unlike the Setdilth game, 41 points instead of 40 constitute a
game-count; the players begin at the south wide space and in order to get

286

a game they must cross this same space on the return to at least one
count on the other side.* Below are the rules of the game.

RULES FOR PLAYING,

1. The opponents in the game face each other, both start from the
south wide space, and move their counting sticks around the stone circle
in opposite directions, each playing as his turn comes.

2. Should the counts of two opponents be such that their counting
sticks would occupy the same space, the one who played last takes up his
opponent’s counting stick and throws it back to the starting point. Its
owner must begin the game anew, as all the points he has previously
made are lost.

3. Should the counts of any player be such as to place his counting
stick in either of the wide spaces, designated ‘‘water,’ he looses all the
points he has made, his counting stick is thrown back to the starting
place, and he must begin again.

Rules for counting the points, decided by the face of the sticks that are
up after they have fallen (the faces according to color will be designated
white, black, green, or red).

1. Two white plus one red plus one black, two points.

2. Three red plus one black and all the sticks straight and parallel.
5 points.

3. Three white plus one green, 10 points.
4. Three red plus one green, 13 points.
5. Three white plus one black, 13 points.
6. Three red plus one black, 20 points.

“|

Three red, one crossing the other two, plus one black, 26 points.

8. Three white plus one black laying ecross the others, 39 points.

9. Three red, one crossing the other two, plus one black crossing two
red ones (in this game each cross counts 18 points), 52 points.

10. One hundred and sixty-four continuous points or four game-counts
constitute a game.

*The winner of the game-count keeps on playing, retaining the extra points he has
gained; his opponents begin anew. They, however, do not lose any game-counts pre
viously gained in the game.

287

ALL Saints Day at Jemez, NEw MExico.

ALBERT B. REAGAN.

As the Jemez Indians are Catholics, they observe All Saints Day as
other Catholics do, but after their own fashion. Whether mass is held
in the Jemez church on that day or not, at daybreak the sexton com-
mences to pound the two bells in the belfry of the church alternately with
a hammer. This pounding he continues till sun up. The Indians then
commence coming one by one to give gifts as prayers for the good of all
saints. Some of these gift-carriers have baskets of grain, some baskets
of fruit, others baskets of baked bread. On entering the church, each
gift-carrier proceeds to the altar, and, having made the cross and said the
appropriate Catholic prayer, he places his gift upon the altar and leaves
the church at once. On going out of the church he pulls the two bell ropes
as often as he chooses, causing the clapperless bells to pound each other
into a dull monotonous choppy ringing, thus declaring to the village and
to his God that he has deposited his gift. This gift depositing is carried
on throughout the entire day. The proceeds, thus obtained, are given to

the priest.

THE Moccasin GAME.

ALBERT B. REAGAN.

The Moceasin game is an Apache nocturnal game. It is played by
the men only. The players and spectators gather in a circle around a
fire, which serves both for warmth and light. The players divide them-
selves into two groups, one of these groups occupies the west, the other
the east part of the circle, which now assumes the form of an ellipse.
Then the sides begin to bet. One side puts up a saddle that it will win
the game. The other puts up a horse. So the betting goes on till the
members of each side have staked on the game practically all they have.
Then the game begins. It is on the same principle as the ‘‘chuck luck”
game of the English walnut hulls and the pea, except that it is more
complicated. It is a straight game of guess.

There are two ways of playing this game. In the one (that used by
El Sa Say’s band) each side has seven round holes dug in the earth to
the depth of about six inches. These holes are filled with leaves or fine
bark; and the ground in the immediate vicinity is covered with the same
material till the holes are practically hid from view, and instead of a pea
a round pebble about the size of an egg is used. In the other style of
playing, mounds of earth and variously arranged ridges are used instead
of holes; the pebble being used as in the first case. Should mounds of
earth be used, linnear marks are made on them to show the possible
places that the ball (pebble) may be hid.

In playing the game, if it is the first one of the season, the sides draw
by lot to see which will get the pebble, that is, which will get to play
first. At all other times the winner in the previous game gets to play first.

The lots having been cast, a member of the lucky side, while he and
his game ground are obscured from yiew with a blanket, puts the mystic*
pebble in the bottom of one of the holes; or, in case mounds or ridges of
earth are being used, buries it in the dirt beneath one of the linear
lines. Then he carefully covers and smoothes everything all over so that
the location of the pebble can not be detected at all. This being done, a

*So called “mystic’’ because each set of players pray over their respective stick and
pebble that they will have power to favor them in the game.

19—A. or Science, ’04,

290

member of the opposing clan with divining stick (a small club-like stick)
in hand goes over to the other’s game ground, so to speak; and, after mak-
ing six false motions with his stick while he argues and jokes with his
opponents to see if he can decide from their actions where the valuable
pebble is, he strikes the hole or spot, in case a mound or ridge of earth
is used, with vigorous force in which he bas decided the stone is. Then
there is a lull, a death silence, while he removes the leaves or earth, etc.,
to see if he has won. If the pebble is not in that place of deposit the
players who occupy that ground have won the tally and immediately
begin the song of triumph.

Yah e yi,

Yah e yi,

Ain-nee ah,

Ain-nee ah,

Hay hay ah hay ah ah ah a.

The player with the mystic stick goes back to his clan, and the hold-
ers of the pebble hide it again. Then another one from the opposing
side tries his luck in finding it; but usually with no better success. In
this way the game continues for hours. At last a member of the losing
side locates the mystic stone, and, amid the shouts and song of triumph
of his clan, he takes it to his side of the great ellipse. The other side then
begins to guess. This sort of performance is kept up till one side receives
the number of tallies previously decided upon to constitute a game. That
side consequently wins the game and sweeps in the stakes.

RULES FOR PLAYING THE GAME.

1. If in the preliminary or false motion movement the pebble is un-
covered, it counts one tally for the side which has the pebble, that is, for
the side which has buried it.

2. If the pebble is located at the final stroke, not the preliminary
strokes, of the mystic stick, it counts one tally for the side which has the
stick, and that side takes the pebble to its own game field. The other
side then begins to guess.

3. If the pebble is not located in the final stroke, nor the preliminary
strokes of the mystic stick, it counts one tally for the side which has hid
it. And that side retains it and hides it again.

291

4. There is always one less false motion of the mystic stick than
there are possible places for the pebble to be hid; for example, in case
there are seven holes in any one of which the stone may be hid, six pre-
liminary strokes of the mystic stick are always made.

5. There are always two tally keepers, one representing each oppos-
ing party. At the beginning of the game each of these has a number of

|

66 bo
© 260
$680
q Oo

0
\

Sp

600c0 0 ON000

oe

Map showing the various arrangements of the moccasin game field of the dirt type,
used in playing one game at the camp of Chief R6 the night of February 24, 1902.

The broken lines indicate the false or preliminary motions.

K shows lines where the pebble should be hid.

S shows the final stroke. Itis represented by a continuous line.

In 1 and 11 the pebble was uncovered inthe preliminary motion. In 3,6,8 and 10 it was
passed over in the preliminary strokes, but not uncovered. In 2,4,5 and 7 the pebble
was uncovered in the final stroke. And in 9 it was missed both in the preliminary and
final strokes. 2,4,5 and 7 are the only ones which counted points for the searchers for
the pebble. In each of these four cases they got the pebble and took it to their own
game field.

292

bear grass blades, “Indian shoe strings,” corresponding to the number
of tallies decided upon to constitute the game. When a side loses, the
tally keeper of that side gives a blade of grass to his opponent tally
keeper. When all the “Indian shoe strings” have passed to the possession
of any one side, that side has won the game. It is sun up by that time
and all go home, one half paupers. the other half as rich as the Indian
generally gets.

Words used in the moccasin game:

Ako. There (used when making a false motion as if to grab the ball).

Don-dee. It is well.

IKxod-da. It is ready. the ball is hid.

Tah-al. It is finished.

Oa-kog-go. That is all.

Ah-ko. Here, it is here.

Doh selayz

Yah-lan-nee. Good-bye, you have lost, you are left, ete.

Ken-not-tah-hah. The moccasin game (so called because originally the

pebble was hid in a moccasin).*

*Taken from the Apaches, their manners, customs, ete., furnished to the Bureau of
American Ethnology by the writer.

THE “ MaTAcHINA” DaANcE.

ALBERT B. REAGAN.

The “matachina” is a peculiar religious ceremonial dance of the Pueblo
Indians of New Mexico. It is a religious rite performed in celebration of
the birth of Christ. This dance was acted out at the annual feast of the
patron saint, Guadalupe, at Canyon de los Jemez, New Mexico, November
12, 1901.

After mass was given at the holy church cf Saint Guadalupe, the
dancers, some thirty in number, lined up in two rows with the chief of
ceremonies at the front and between the rows. All were masked. The
chiet of ceremonies wore a mask that resembled the head of a donkey
very much: and each of the dancers wore a cloth mask. Each of them
also wore a circular cap from which there floated to the breeze variously
colored ribbons,

When all the performers were in their proper places, the chief of
ceremonies began to writhe and to wriggie his body in a laborious man-
ner. This performance was to indicate that with the birth of Christ a
furious battle was waged againt sin. As soon as the chief began to per-
form, the gaudily-attired dancers commenced to move their limbs in a
lively manner to the strains of an accordian. They pranced about much
in the same way that a baboon trips about in a cage. This spectacular
and, at times, grotesque acting was kept up till the sun set. Then the
simple-hearted Indians set out for their homes feeling that they had done
their duty, that they had been forgiven for their transgressions and that
they would begin a new year with unsullied records.

THE “ PENITENTIES.”’

ALBERT B. REAGAN.

At the conquest of New Mexico by the Spaniards, the Pueblo Indians
were converted to Christianity. From the first they were very attentive
to the teachings of the Catholic priest, but they could not grasp the new
creed in its entirety. They were handicapped by the fact that they were
not able to read or write. The Bible could not be used as an instrument
for their instruction. They had to depend upon the words of the priest
only. As a result Christianity, as practiced by the Pueblo Indians today,
is greatly “distorted.”

The “padres” taught penitence. The Pueblos began in easy stages,
but soon corrupted the religion; and now many of the Indians undergo
excruciating torture annually to atone for the sins of their respective
village. In June of each year there are invariably a number of young
Indian men who volunteer their flesh for the elevation of their people.
In each yillage several are selected who lead a procession, composed of
nearly every inhabitant of the village. One of these “‘penitenties,’’ as the
Mexicans call them, as late as even the eighties, carried a massive cross
in representation of Christ’s carrying the cross to the crucifixtion. This
one seldom returned alive. In this performance of the ‘‘penitenties,” the
Indians who are not acting as ‘‘penitenties’” arm themselves with cactus;

and each in turn, pricks the ‘‘penitenties.”” The more cruel the nature of
the torture, the more nearly have the people of the village been forgiven
by the Supreme Being for their sins duriag the year. The flesh bruising
part of the ceremony being finished, the suffering subjects, bleeding from
head to foot, are carried back to the church, where prolonged and weird
ceremonies are conducted. This human offering is followed by the
“Matachina Dance,’ described in a previous paper—a curious ceremony
performed in celebration of the birth of Christ.

THe CuirF DWELLERS oF ARIZONA.

ALBERT B. REAGAN.

The cliff dwellers of Arizona were small of stature, the adult male
not being over fifty-two inches in height. Their skulls are brachycephalie
(or broader across than lengthwise), like those of the Zunyis, Aztecs and
Peruvians. Their skulis have also a little extra bone in the back part of
the head, a peculiarity of the Incas, and known as the Inca bone. This
bone seems to indicate a close relationship between this mysterious race
in Arizona and the semi-civilized races of South America.

The cliff dwellers lived in narrow canyons that afforded water for
cooking and drinking purposes, and for irrigating their fields. At the
sides of the canyons, under the projecting cliff, they built their adobe
houses, so that the cliff protected them both from rain and storm, and
from the attacks of an enemy, except at the front:

Besides the cliff home that the cliff dwellers lived in in time of peace,
they had caves, natural caves in the rocks, into which they retreated
when hard pressed by an enemy. The large cliff cave on the East Fork
of White River just east of Fort Apache is an example. At this place
a continuous cave, composed of chiseled-cut narrow passages, corridors
and rooms, runs back along a fissure some 200 feet beneath the surface,
it is said, for a distance of four and a half miles.

In case the cliff dwellers could find no cave, they changed their place
of habitation, in time of great danger, to the lofty heights above the
canyon floor; and there built a village on some projecting ledge. Such
a village stands out against the almost perpendicular walls of the Sierra
Anches mountains more than a mile in altitude above the floor of Cherry
Creek canyon below.

Their dwellings, except of course the caves, were adobe structures.
They were built under and against a cliff; and resembled the old Pueblo
style of house very much. The second story was set back a little on the
floor of the first; and the third story set back a little on the floor of the
second; and so on till the “step-front like’’ house was finished. In each
house there was but one door, a hole in the roof of the highest room.
From the ground to the top of the first story, and from story to story lad-

296

ders extended, over which one had to climb to gain entrance to the house.
In time of trouble and always at night these ladders were most likely
earried to the roof and placed within. The house itself was a fortress.

These dwellers of the cliffs were an agricultural race. They farmed
in the little “flats” adjacent to their places of abode, as the remains of
their irrigating ditches show, as well as tbeir grain bins. Some of these
grain bins were visited by the writer; and were found partly filled with
eorn cobs and barley heads, from which the barley kernels had been
removed by vermin. The barley heads, thus found, seem to indicate that
this people knew nothing of the art of threshing grain even with a flail;
but in harvesting it they headed it, and stored it away in the head. Then,
when they desired to use any of the grain, they threshed it by a hand-
rubbing process.

In religion it can at best be stated that the cliff dwellers were sun
worshipers, as is shown by the drawings on the vases and urns which
they used in their exercises of worship. One of these vases, found by
the writer in a Canyon Creek cliff house in Arizona, was jug shaped,
except that it did not possess a neck. Around the circular opening at
the top were drawn the rays of the sun in red and black. Many more
of their vases have similar drawings on them. Further evidence con-
cerning what their religion consisted of, ‘s thus far wanting.

Who these cliff dwellers were, where they came from and what be-
came of them, is a matter of conjecture; and will probably remain so.

297
Tue Rosesup INDIAN CELEBRATION.

ALBERT B. REAGAN.

The Rosebud Indians, like all other Indians, love to feast and make
a great display. Feast days are their great days. At the present time
but one feast is allowed them each year, that of the 4th of July. This
year (1904) the Rosebud Sioux celebrated at two different places, at Cut
Meat and at Butte Creek. The author attended the celebration at the
latter place. Below are his observations:

Medicine Lodge and War Bonnets.

The morning of the 3d of July the Butte Creek Indians went into
camp on the previously prepared celebration ground. This was a circular
flat a mile in diameter with an artificial grove and circular arbor in its
center. No building of any kind was on it. Nothing only a trader’s

298

stand. Towards evening of that day other Indians began to arrive. A
wagon train, carrying the United States fiag as a banner, was reported
approaching from the south by the Butte Creek Agency wagon road. At
once the braves in war paint and feathers made a mimic raid on horse
back upon the train, treating it as an immigrant train. The would-be

immigrants, on seeing the painted savages charging furiously towards

Eating Puppy Soup.

them from a slight rise of ground, hurriedly unhitched their horses, put
them and their families in the rear and made a breastwork of their
wagons. Then they waited the onslaught. This came almost imme-
diately. Guns were fired in all directions, and the blood curdling war-
whoop filled the air. In fact it looked so much like a real battle that
many of the Indian women were scared. For some minutes the sham
battle raged, then the wagon train surrendered. The wagons were again
hitched to, and the train was taken into camp by the captors.

Nothing further of interest happened till dawn the next morning.

Then there was an elaborate parade, followed by religious services con-

299

ducted by the Reverend Dallis Shaw (Indian). As these services were
closing, a giving away scene commenced. Each Indian who desired
walked to the center of a congregated circular area, told the people how
good he was and exploited the good deeds of his ancestors. Then he
walked around the circle handing dollar upon dollar to his friends or
“dishing” out groceries to them. This he varied in a few cases by leading

The Parade.

a horse into the circle and turning it loose to be taken by anyone who
wished it. Breakfast followed this’ scene. It consisted, for the most
part, of puppy soup and dog stew. It was eaten at the medicine lodge.
After breakfast came the Indian brass band parade, then the Omaha
Dance in the grove. In this dance several Indians chanted in the
minor key, a squaw or two sang soprano, and an Indian beat the
drum. The dancers were all men, were painted, daubed and decked
with feathers. Each one wore a war-bonnet. And when dancing
each crowhopped around somewhat like a baboon trips about in a Gage.

300

While these were acting, the giving away performance, which always
accompanies this dance, was going on. The principal things which were
being given away were horses. A buxom young squaw would ride a
horse into the center of the arbor, and whoever desired the horse would
take its halter-rope and lead it away. ‘This performance continued till
the United States officials put a stop to it. The remainder of the day
was spent in feasting.

The remaining celebration exercises, consisting principally of horse
racing and feasting, lasted three more days. Then Uncle Sam’s men de-
clared the ceremonies at an end, and the Indians returned to their re-
spective homes.

301

Notes Upon Some LitttE KNown MEMBERS OF THE INDIANA
FLORA.

(PAPER NUMBER TWO.)

CHAS. PIPER SMITH.

A year ago I gave some notes from my studies in systematic botany,
for the summer of 1903, in a paper under the above heading. Certain
facts gleaned from my studies the past season, seem to justify me in
offering a continuation of that paper. A review of Dr. Coulter’s cata-
logue of the State flora and of all of the subsequent “Additions to the
flora ——,” etc., in the Academy’s ‘Proceedings,’ indicates that a few
of my recent takes are not reported from the State. Two or three are,
however, undoubtedly migrants, though evidently here to stay.

Specimens verifying most of these records have been placed in the
herbarium of Mr. Harley H. Bartlett. These are now with him at Har-
vard University and have been critically examined and compared at the
Gray Herbarium. Almost all are also represented in my collection of
plant seeds. In accordance with Mr. Bartlett’s request, I include a few
records which are strictly his own. In reality his name should appear
with mine as joint author of this paper.

Avena fatua L. (Marion County. )

A half dozen specimens of this well-marked oat were found by Mr.
Bartlett and myself along the ‘‘Monon,” at the State Fair Grounds,
Indianapolis, in July, 1908. About the same number of plants was
noted there by myself in August, 1904. An introduction from Eu-
rope, it is abundant in California and is not reported east of
Minnesota by Britton and Brown.*

Uniola latifolia Michx. (Madison County.)

A small patch found along White River near Anderson. Jefferson

County is the only station report by Dr. Coulter.
Bromus tectorum L. (Tippecanoe and Madison Counties. )

This grass has been recently admitted to the State flora.t It is abun-

dant where found at Lafayette and Anderson.
Bromus brizeformis Fisch. and Mey. (Laporte County. )

Found commonly along the Michigan Central R. R. from near Michi-

gan City, Indiana, to New Buffalo, Berrien County, Mich. Said

by Britton and Brown to be “sparingly introduced into Pennsyl-
yania; also from Montana to California. Native of Northern Eu-
rope and Asia.”

Carex folliculata L. (Laporte County. )

Common in a small tamarack swamp northeast of Michigan City.
Carex intumescens Rudge was also taken in a wet wood south
of Michigan City.

Carex monile Tuckerman. (Madison County. )

Taken in a small bog along the Lig Four Route, southwest of Ander-

son. Reported only from Gibson County in State catalogue.
Carex trichocarpa Muhl. (Madison County. )

An abundant rank-growing sedge in boggy places along White River,
above and below Anderson.

Carex hystricina Muhl. (Madison County. )

Reported only from extreme northern counties. Taken in a low wet
place south of Anderson. Noted as searce.

Carex aquatilis Wahl. (Laporte and Marion Counties. )

Taken by Mr. Bartlett near Indianapolis; by myself south of Michi-
gan City.

Carex costellata Britton. (Laporte and Marion Counties. )

Also taken near Indianapolis by Mr. Bartlett and near Michigan City
by the writer.

Carex lanuginosa Michx. (Madison and Delaware Counties.)

Taken by me near both Anderson and Muncie. In the State catalogue
Jefferson County is the only definite station given, but the species
has been later reported from Kosciusko County by H. W. Clark,§
and is probably well distributed over the State.

Carex gracillima Schwein. (Madison County. )

Taken near Alexandria. Not common,

Carex Davisii Schwein. and Torr. (Marion County. )

Taken by Mr. Bartlett at Indianapolis. Scarce. Steuben County
seems to be the only other station cn record.

Carex grisea Wahl. (Marion County. )

Taken by H. H. Bartlett near Indianapolis in 1903.

Carex inirabilis perlonga Fernald. (Madison and Delaware Counties. )

Taken near Anderson and Muncie by the writer.

Carex alata ferruginea Fernald. (Marion County. )

Taken near Indianapolis by Mr. Bartlett.

303

Juncoides campestre bulbosa Wood. (Marion County.)

Taken by Mr. Bartlett near Indianapolis.

Lilium umbellatum Pursh. (Starke County.) .

Taken by me in “swampy meadows.” This plant is reported in two
different places in the Academy’s Proceedings for 1901 (pp. 164
and 301). I note it here because of the environment in which I
found it.

Atriplex patula L. (Marion County. )

Very common in waste places in Indianapolis, especially along Cen-
tral Avenue. Recognized in 1903 and omitted from my last paper
through mistake. Reported from Steuben County by Bradner; but
omitted from the State catalogue (see p. 607 of same) because of
lack of verifying material.

Atriplex hastata L. (Madison County.)

Taken at Anderson. First reported from Wells County by C. C.
Deam.

Tragopogon pratensis L. (Madison County.)

Common along the C., C., C. & St. L., near the Quartz Works, Ander-
son. Taken both in bloom and in fruit.

Antennaria fallax Greene. (Marion County. )

Taken by Mr. Bartlett at Indianapolis, river-bluffs opposite Fairview

Park.

Mr. Bartlett’s work at the Gray Herbarium has led us to change our
view concerning one of my records of 1903. An annotation in the herb-
arium copy of Britton & Brown's “Illustrated Flora,” to the effect that
the characters and figuring of Carer Baileyi Britton do not hold good
as regards the material in the herbarium, led Mr. Bartlett to compare
the specimens, determined by us as Baileyi, with the herbarium material.
AS our specimens agree with the typical Carer lurida Wahl. (of which
Baileyi is there regarded as a sub-species), in spite of Britton’s key, etc.,
I feel it advisable to cancel my records of Carex Baileyi.

* Tllustrated Flora of the Northern States and Canada; I, 173.

+ Flowering Plants and Ferns of Indiana, State Geol. Report; 1899, 643.
t Additions to the Flora of Indiana; Proc. Ind. Acad. Sei.; 1900, 137.

2 Flora of Eagle Lake and Vicinity; Proc. Ind. Acad. Sei.; 1901, 162.

; nm , = is. oh "a ont aa
a ? eee au Pt aria
. =. :
7 re
& ea Gers ; :
* or — ~ - -
ee a =
- = 4
S 5 4
2 = lente
be « Es Sie
ec “gas oe - Z +8 a 4
ae My =
: ok La) * Ae ? asthe
as - = [<=> --
- ’ = aa
- _ os c — ~-
= , =
.
+
Fi ae
af s
bs t
. '
-
= 2
: c =
_ 2
:
= ka)
‘
‘
<. =

305
PHYSIOLOGICAL APPARATUS.

FRANK MARION ANDREWS.

INTRODUCTION.

It is frequently the case that much of the apparatus required to carry
on work properly in Plant Physiology is so expensive that for any one
laboratory to possess all that is needed is quite out of the question. This
has led me to plan and have constructed a few very desirable pieces,
concerning which this paper makes mention. I am aware of the fact
that no lack of contrivances have been made to illustrate some of the
principles here set forth. However, for simplicity of construction and
perfect adaptation to the purposes for which they were intended, they will
certainly be found superior in many ways and useful by any one inter-
ested or engaged in physiological work where such apparatus would be
involved. It has therefore occurred to me to describe the various pieces
of apparatus as concisely as possible and present them, together with the
illustrations, in the following brief account:

I. HEATING STAGE FOR THE MICROSCOPE.

This piece of apparatus consists of a rectangular sheet of copper, 60
em. long, 8 cm. wide and 2 mm. thick. Figure 1 shows a view of the
lower side. It will be seen from this view that the copper does not rest
directly on the stage of the microscope but is held away from it a dis-
tance of 1 cm. This is accomplished by a strong frame of wood B,

Tn

Fig. 1.

7 cm. square and 8 mm. in height. Between the wood and the copper,
as an extra preventive against the conduction of heat in long continued
experiments, a layer of asbestos 2 mm. thick is interposed at C. The

20—A. oF SCIENCE, ’04.

306

frame of wcod and asbestos is fastened firmly to ithe copper A by copper
screws, which, however. must not reach through the wood B. In the
center of the wood and asbestos squares is a circular opening D, 12 mm. in
diameter, to allow the light reflected through the stage of the microscope
to pass through the slide. Through the side of the wood frame away from
the pillar of the microscope, as the heating stage lies in the proper posi-
tion on the stage of the microscope for observation, are two holes for
centigrade thermometers, E and E*. The temperature at E may be a
little less than at E*, and if this is the case, then an average of the tem-
peratures shown by the thermometers at E and E' should be reckoned.
It should be ascertained before the experiment that the two thermom-
eters read the same at the same temperature. As they project directly
in front during correct observation, the temperature ef both is easily seen
while experimenting. Since it is not always possible or conyenient to
carry on experiments with the ccpper plate cf the heating stage directed
to the right as would necessariiy be the case with the thermometers on
the side shown in Figure 1, another arrangement was resorted to. On the
side of the wood frame opposite E and E!' are two similar holes for
thermometers, F and F’, which allows observation while the copper plate
of the heating stage is turned to the left or the reverse position to the
one in which E and E’ could be used. It will be seen from the lower
view of the heating stage shown in Figure 1 that the bulbs of the ther-
mometers rest against the copper plate inside the asbestos square C, and
in this way the heat is readily conveyed to them. One thermometer only
might be used, but the use of two is more accurate and therefore advisa-
ble. <A third position for the heating stage is possible and for various
reasons sometimes advisable, in which the copper plate A is directed
away from the observer instead of from the left or right. Or it may be
turned about on the stage of the microscope through an angle of some-
what more than 186° and still be capable of perfect use at every point.
It is held to the stage of the microscope by means of iron clamps, the
upper screw of which is provided on its lower end with a small wooden
block covered with asbestos. This is necessary since a careless disregard
or misuse of subtances that are not peor conductors of heat may readily
result in injury to the microscope. Heat may be supplied by a gas or
aleohol lamp or other source placed under A at G and the flame increased

or moved toward C as is desired.

307

Il. TEMPERATURE Box.
This temperature box is made of galvanized iron. It is 25 cm. long,
9 em. wide and 38 cm. deep, all inside measures. It is held to the stage
of the microscope by means of a curved iron clamp hooked over the edge
of the box at A. Near the lower side B is a rectangular slit 4 cm. wide
and 4 mm. high, extending entirely across the box for the reception of a
slide carrying the object for observation. By noticing Fig. 2 it will be

Fig. 2.

seen that the slit, B, is elevated about 2 mm. above the bottom of the box
as at C, thus allowing the hot or cold water used to flow under and all
around the space occupied by the slide. By this means the temperature
may be increased or decreased as desired, in B to the most perfect state
of efficiency possible in such a simple contrivance. At D is a cylindrical
tube 38 cm. high and 2.5 ¢m. in diameter for the reception of the objective.
In Fig. 2 both the tube D and the side of the box toward the observer
are cut partly away to show the interior. The top is provided with a
lid. By means of a proper mixture of salt and ice it is possible to reduce
the temperature in the slit B, as shown by the thermometers kept con-
stantly in the spaces E and E’, to zero centigrade or below. If, however,
a high temperature is desired, this may be accomplished by placing a
flame under the end of the box F which projects over the stage of the
microscope. Or one may arrange a vessel, somewhat higher than the
box on the stage of the microscope, and by placing a lamp under this
vessel, which is nearly filled with water, easily heat it to any desired
temperature as shown by a thermometer. This heated water could then
be siphoned into the box A and out again, and in this way the desired
temperature in B obtained. The inflow and outflow to A can easily be
regulated and made uniform by opening or closing pinch-cocks fastened
on the rubber tube. Injury to the microscope is prevented by a sheet of
asbestos placed on the stage. This temperature box can be turned either
to the right or left or turned and used in any angle of 180° or less.

Ill. CENTRIFUGE.

This consists of a wooden frame 60 cm. long, 55 cm. wide, and vary-
ing in height from 30 cm. at the lowest point at A to 60 cm. at B. Fig.

3 gives a view of the apparatus as seen in vertical median longitudinal

section. This apparatus in part resembles the centrifuge figured by Det-
mer, but is larger and possesses many improvements over his apparatus
(Detmer Pflanzenphysiologie Zweite Auflage, 1895, p. 384). The machinery
consists of a brass shaft 70 ecm. long, in two sections C and D, which at
E may be connected or disconnected by tightening or loosening the clamp
E* by screws F FE‘. In this way part or all of the machinery may be
run at one time, which is often desirable. The ends of the shaft are held
by a support G near E, and on D is a cone-pulley H by means of which
it may be driven by other power if so desired, or from which power may
be taken for other purposes if the cone-pulley I on C is in use. On the
end of the shaft D is a bevel-gear arrangement so that motion is trans-
mitted at right angles to D in the shaft in J which carries the disk L.
By exchanging the position of M and N a faster motion of L may be ob-
tained, with no increase in the speed of D. Again by using a still larger
cog at N and a smaller cog at M, any speed desired may be had. By a
vice versa arrangement of cogs a very slow rotation of L is effected.

It is of course to be understood that by varying the size of the cogs M

309

and N, the distance of J from N must also yary in two obvious directions.
This is done by the screw O (Figs. 3 and 4), which holds the support of
the shaft carrying L. The shaft carrying the disk is enclosed for the
sake of firmness in a sheath J. It is fastened to a disk of iron P. (Figs.
3 and 4), and this is held to the wooden disk of pine L, which is 20 cm.
in diameter and 2 cm. thick, by means of screws. Larger disks of wood
can, by means of these screws, be substituted for L and therefore the
centrifugal force considerably increased aside from the ways of increas-
ing the speed by the cone-pulley and bevel-gear arrangement above re-
ferred to. The centrifugal force brought to bear on the objects under
investigation may also be increased by being placed near the periphery of
the disk L, or decreased by moving them nearer the center of L. The disk
of wood must in all cases be first boiled thoroughly in paraffine to pre-
vent swelling. The disk of wood L is covered by a circular sheet of
cork Q. This serves for the attachment of seedlings and plant parts to
be centrifuged, and to it also are fastened several layers of wet filter
paper for keeping the seeds moist. A glass crystallizing disk R, which will
exactly fit L, is placed over it and darkened by being painted thickly on
the inside with black paint. Riis held to lL. by clamps. In order to water
the seedlings when the machine is run for a long time, a hole is bored
exactly in the center of the crystallizing disk R as at S, and even while
the disk is revolving water may be forced in against the filter paper on
the sheet of cork @, and in this way be carried by absorption to all the
seeds on the disk Q. Fig. 38 shows the disk ready to rotate in a _ hori-
zontal direction. Fig. 4 shows the end view of the frame at A and

P

Fig. 4.

indicates how the disk may be rotated not only horizontally but vertically
as well, or at any angle between the two by changing the position of the
shaft in J by loosening and moving the clamp at T. This machine is

also strong enough to carry any small flower pots with growing seedlings,

310

at any angle and at rapid speeds by using clamps to hold them in posi-
tion.

As stated by Detmer, seedlings of the proper size when fastened on
Q and rotated rapidly curve outwards. I have noticed a curving against
the direction of motion in seedlings sub/ected by a stronger centrifugal
machine than this exerting 4,400 gravities.

At U (Fig. 3) is another similarly arranged disk in case it is desired
to run two at once at different angles. Here, however, the power is trans-
mitted by a belt and cone pulleys, by means of which different speeds may
be obtained. U may also be inclined at an angle by loosening or
tightening V. At X, X' and Y the shaft is supported in journals. At W
is a water wheel 50 cm. in diameter, and by using a very strong stream of
water Z, a very high speed and ample power for the experiments here
mentioned may be developed. Naturally the speed and power can be
easily controlled by the force of the stream of water. By means of the

cone-pulleys the machine may be driven by motor or other power.

TV. APPARATUS FOR GROWING PLANTS IN DIFFERENT COLORED LIGHTS.

This consists of a wooden box made perfectly tight to prevent the
light from entering except at H, Fig. 6. It is 40 cm. long, 25 cm. wide and
25 cm. deep. Of course it is often advisable to use larger sizes of boxes,
but the one here mentioned will serve as an illustration. The inside

of the box is painted black and is provided with a base for holding

Fig. 5.

flower pots in any position. Each side of the box is provided with a door
A, Fig. 5, which by means of the clamps B and B' may be removed so
that the plant inside may be adjusted in the desired position, as regards
the light entering at C or D, and measurements taken. The ends of the
box are in the form of caps E (Fig. 5) which lap over the end at F so
tightly that no light can enter.

Fig. 6 shows an end view of one of the caps E. In this figure

there will be noticed a circular opening H, 15 cm. in diameter in the

ol ba

center of the cap. Around H is a three-sided wooden frame I, on whose

inner edge is a groove J, deep enough to receive one pane of glass. The

Fig. 6.

pane of glass used is 20 ¢m. square and must have exactly parallel sur-
faces. Light of any desired color may enter the box at H by putting
in the groove J a glass plate which has been colored in the following
way. To a 10 per cent. solution of gelatin add about .25 of a gram of
the ordinary “Diamond Dye” of the color desired, while the gelatin is
still hot and in solution. Stir well for a few minutes. Now place one of
the glass plates in a perfectly horizontal position in a cool place and pour
onto it a thin layer of the colored liquid gelatin. Let stand till the gelatin
is solid. In this way colored plates of rcd, orange, green, blue or any
other color or shade of color may be obtained. These colors have the
additional advantage of being permanent. The screws K and K’ hold
the plates in the correct position in J. By having a number of colored
plates any color in the box may be obtained by putting the plate of the

desired color in J.

V. PHOTOMETER.

A simple form of photometer is shown in Fig. 7. It consists of a
wooden base A, 110 cm. long and 25 em. wide, on which stands a rectangu-

lar box B, 81 cm. long, 17.5 cm. wide, and 22 em. high. This box B is

312

raised 1 cm. from A by a block of wood under each of the four corners

as at C to allow the to-and-fro motion of the pointer D. The longitudinal
opening under G and the base of D give ventilation. The figures on the
side of B are accurately placed on the original apparatus and show the
intensity of light in Hefner meter units. At E' is a mirror and at F a
circular opening to a mirror inside. The interior view is shown in Fig.
8. Here A is the wooden base, C the wooden block supporting the box
B. L and L’ are strings by means of which the Hefner-Altneck amyl-
acetate lamp is regulated in distances from the membrane K. This mem-
brane consists simply of a cireular piece of filter paper covering an open-
ing in the center of the end of the box 7.5 cm. in diameter. In the center
of the filter paper is a circular spot about three em. in diameter, as in the
ordinary Bunsen photometer. Each mirror E E* is 5 cm. long and 4 em.

wide and is inclined at an angle of about 45° to the filter paper membrane

Wit
UUM

by means of the galvanized iron frame which supports it. The V-shaped
top G is also composed of galvanized iron. This apparatus will show the
intensity of light from 2 to 90 Hefner meter units. When it is desired
to test the intensity of light between two and ninety Hefner units, draw
the pointer D, opposite which inside the box the Hefner-Altneck amyl-
acetate lamp is placed, by the string L towards the filter paper mem-
brane. When the circular spot of paraffine on the filter paper almost dis-
appears, then the light cast on the filter paper screen by the amyl-acetate
lamp, and that in the room for example outside are equal. Noticing now
the position of the pointer D, we notice that it points to or near some
figure on the outside of the box. The number it points to indicates the
intensity of light in Hefner meter units.

(SI

313

VI. RHEOSTAT.

This piece of apparatus (Fig. 9) is 85 em. long, 30 cm. high, and 15 cm.
wide. It has a wooden frame A, over which the wire B is tightly
stretched, the two sides being connected by the wire Q. The voltage, which,
as here used, was a constant one, enters at M through the binding posts
E E’, and from this it passes through the wire B in the direction indicated
by the arrow. The wire used was iron number 20 and in all 100 meters

NUT

were used in making this machine to obtain if needed a high resistance so
that by means of shunting any strength of current may be obtained. Ifan
insulated wire F is connected with one post on an electric slide as at G,
and the other post of this electric slide is joined to another insulated wire
I, about the center of which is interpolated a milli-ampere meter J; then
by shunting with the free end K of the wire I to the non-insulated wires
B, an electric current if sufficiently strong will pass through a specimen
laid on the slide at L under the microscope P. If at first the current at
B is not strong enough, the free end of the wire K can be moved from B
in the direction of the arrow till a current of the desired strength is ob-
tained. The strength of the current will be registered by the meter J.
In the experiment I tried, with 110 volts entering at E E*, a current of .7
of a milli-ampere was sufficient to cause the movement in the protoplasm
in HElodea cells to cease. It began again in 20 minutes. The lamps

514.

may be used in the circuit in series to increase the resistance. Fig. 10°
gives a view of a median vertical longitudinal section of the slide. It con-
sists simply of a thick glass slide A, on which is a heavy layer of tin-foil
5B B’, and on this a plate of copper C C’, through which the binding posts
G and H are screwed. This not only fastens B B' and C C! together, but
fastens them to the glass slide A. ‘The specimen is laid at L with its
ends touching the ends of the tin-foil B B', on which the cover glass rests

at OO'.

LD ae

ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF MAR-
ION COUNTY, 223.

Additions to the Indiana flora, 219.

Additions to the list of gall-producing in-
sects, 225.

All Saints Day at Jemez, N. M., 287.

Amphispores of the grass and sedge rusts, 64.

Andrews, F. M , 305.

Annual meeting, Program of the, 28.

Annual meeting, The twentieth, 32.

Apache medicine ceremonies, The, 275.

Apache medicine game, The, 285.

Apparatus, Physiological, 305.

Arthur, J. C., 64, 212.

BIRDS OF INDIANA UNIVERSITY
CAMPUS, ECOLOGICAL NOTES, 65.

Birds, their nests and eggs, An act for the
protection of, 7.

By-laws, 15.

CALCULUS, NEWTONIAN IDEA OF
THE, 237.

Cliff dwellers of Arizona, The, 295.

Committees, 1904-1905, 10.

Constitution, 13.

Contents, Table of, 4.

Cook, M. T., 225.

Correspondents, List of foreign, 22.

Coulter, Stanley, 51, 207.

Cuscuta Americana L., 207.

DEAM, C. C., 219.

Deformation of surfaces, Conditions for
the, 241.

Delta of the Mississippi River, Notes on
the, 47.

Douglass, B. W.., 223.

Dust, Cause and effect of city, 33.

ECOLOGICAL NOTES ON THE BIRDS
OF INDIANA UNIVERSITY, ETC., 65.
Electro-magnetic induction in conductors,

etc., 203.

Elrod, M.N., 213.
Esker in Tippecanoe County, An, 45.
Evans, C. A., 203.

FLORA, ADDITIONS TO THE INDI-
ANA, 219.

Flora, Notes upon some little known mem-
bers, etc., 301.

Flora of Marion County, Additions to the,
223.

Foley, A. L., 203, 206.

Fungi, On the nomenclature of, 212.

GALL-PRODUCING INSECTS, ADDI-
TIONS TO THE LIST OF, 225.
Golden, Katherine E., 227.

HASEMAN, J. H., 206.
Haseman, W. P., 255.
Hathaway, A.S., 237.
Hessler, Robert, 33.

INTERFERENCE FRINGES ABOUT THE
PATH OF AN ELECTRIC, ETC., 206.

JOLLY BALANCE, SOME EXPERI-
MENTS WITH THE, 233.

McATEE, W. L., 65.

McBeth, Wm. A., 45, 47.

McMullen, L. B., 233.

Matachina dance, The, 293.

Meeting of 1904, The spring, 32.
Meeting, Program of the annual, 28.
Meeting, The twentieth annual, 32.
Members, 16.

Memorial, 12.

Moccasin game, The, 289.

NEWTONIAN IDEA OF THE CALCU-
LUS, THE, 237.

Nomenclature of fungi, On the, 212.

N-rays, An investigation of, 255.

—315—

316

OF FICERS, 1901-1905, 9, 11.

PAPERS TO BE READ, LIST OF, 29.

Penitenties, 1 he, 294.

Physiological apparatus, 305.

Poisonous plants of Indiana, The, 51.

Pollination of campanula, 213.

Publication of reports and papers, An act
to provide for, 5.

RAMSEY, R. R., 255.
Reagan, A. B., 275, 285, 287, 289, 293, 294, 295,
297.

Rosebud Indian celebration, The, 297.
Rusts, Amphispores of the grass and sedge,
64.

SMITH, BURKE, 241.
Smith, C. P., 301.

TYLOSES IN BROSIMUM AUBLETII, 227.

WALDO, C. A., 245.
Warped surfaces, A family of, 245.

Proceedings of the

_ Indiana Academy of
Science
1905

atiY 2
uae ai?

LR

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

Indiana Academy of Science

1900.

LIBRARY
NEW YORK
ie ae BOTANICAL
GARDEN.
BE TOR Sars +-e Be Ge MARTING
ASSOCIATE EDITORS:
C. A. WALDO, LYNN B. MCMULLEN,

STANLEY COULTER.

INDIANAPOLIS, IND.
1906.

Wm B BurForD, PRINTER

RSM 1906.

EXxecuTivE DEPARTMENT,
March 5, 1906.

Received by the Governor, examined and referred to the Auditor of State
for verification of the financial statement.

THE STATE OF INDIANA,

OFFICE OF AUDITOR OF STATE,
INDIANAPOLIS, April 19, 1906.
The within report, so far as the same relates to moneys drawn from the State

Treasury, has been examined and found correct.
WARREN BIGLER,
Auditor of Slate.

Aprit 20, 1906.

Returned by the Auditor of State, with above certificate, and transmitted to
Secretary of State for publication, upon the order of the Board of Commissioners
of Public Printing and Binding.

FRED L. GEMMER,

Private Secretary.

Filed in the office of the Secretary of State of the State of Indiana, April
20, 1906.
KRED A. SIMS,

Secretury of State.

Received the within report and delivered to the printer April 20, 1906.

HARRY SLOUGH,
Clerk Printing Bureau,

ABIL, Ob CONTENTS:

PAGE.
An act to provide for the publication of the reports and papers of the
IndianayAcademynoriSciencel. <. ase -masccr a cee eee sere ieee
An act for the protection of birds, their nests and eggs
Officers, 1905-1906 .......
Committees, 1905-1906.

Principal officers since organization

Ce er CCI eC hr iLiRC hte Ci

Constitwtionty ise sae i ee aR Sa ee sees ane oe REE eee
OW es aall OSS d= Peet: VO) Gh fo) ee ore een Re er nena eS ites eae eer rn RAIS A-d.cr0 O-0 ¢
Program of the Twenty-first Annual Meeting .................. ...++-
Report of the Twenty-first Annual Meeting of the Indiana Academy

OLA SCICN COs sre ile See oe Os Sa eT Eos eens Le eee
Reportot thie;spring Meeting Of 1G05r seers ieee eee
Papers presented at the Twenty-first Annual Meeting

Index

LIBRARY
NEW YORK
BOTANICA!

GARDEN.

AN ACT TO PROVIDE FOR THE PUBLICATION OF THE REPORTS
AND PAPERS OF THE INDIANA ACADEMY OF SCIENCE.

[Approved March 11, 1895.]

WHEREAS, The Indiana Academy of Science, a chartered
scientific association, has embodied in its constitution a Soe
provision that it will, upon the request of the Governor, or of the several
departments of the State government, through the Governor, and through
its council as an advisory body, assist in the direction and execution
of any investigation within its province, without pecuniary gain to the
Academy, provided only that the necessary expenses of such investigation
are borne by the State; and,

WHEREAS, The reports of the meetings of said Academy, with the
several papers read before it, have very great educational, industrial
and economic value, and should be preserved in permanent form; and

WHEREAS, The Constitution of the State makes it the duty of the
General Assembly to encourage by all suitable means intellectual, scien-
tific and agricultural improvement; therefore,

SEcTION 1. Be it enacted by the General Assembly of the PuBIRGCeY
State of Indiana, That hereafter the annual reports of the the Reports of

the Indiana

Academy of
with the report for the year 1894, including all papers of Science.

meetings of the Indiana Academy of Science, beginning

scientific or economic value, presented at such meetings, after they shall

have been edited and prepared for publication as hereinafter provided,

shall be published by and under the direction of the Commissioners

of Public Printing and Binding.

Src. 2. Said reports shall be edited and prepared for

publication without expense to the State, by a corps of oe.

editors to be selected and appointed by the Indiana Acad-

emy of Science, who shall not, by reason of such services, have any

claim against the State for compensation. The form, style of binding,
rm paper, typography and manner and extent of illustration of

Number of
DH such reports, shall be determined by the editors, subject printed

i to the approval of the Commissioners of Public Printing Reports.

L@ and Stationery. Not less than 1,500 nor more than 3,000 copies of each
= ee

<—
_

6

of said reports shall be published, the size of the edition within said
limits to be determined by the concurrent action of the editors and the
Commissioners of Public Printing and Stationery: Provided, That not
to exceed six hundred dollars ($600) shall be expended for
such publication in any one year, and not to extend beyond ~
1896: Provided, That no sums shall be deemed to be appropriated for
the year 1894.

Proviso.

Src. 3. All except three hundred copies of each volume

Disposition of said reports shall be placed in the custody of the State

of Reports. ; y
Librarian, who shall furnish one copy thereof to each pub-

lic library in the State, one copy to each university, college or normal
school in the State, one copy to each high school in the State having
a library, which shall make application therefor, and one copy to such
other institutions, societies or persons as may be designated by the
Academy through its editors or its council. The remaining three hundred
copies shall be turned over to the Academy to be disposed of as it
may determine. In order to provide for the preservation of the same
it shall be the duty of the Custodian of the State House to provide
and place at the disposal of the Academy one of the unoccupied rooms
of the State House, to be designated as the office of the Indiana Academy
of Science, wherein said copies of said reports belongins to the Academy,
together with the original manuscripts, drawings, etc., thereof can be
safely kept, and he shall also equip the same with the necessary shelving
and furniture.

Sec. 4. An emergency is hereby declared to exist for
Emergency. = the immediate taking effect of this act, and it shall there-
fore take effect and be in force from and after its passage.

AN ACT FOR THE PROTECTION OF BIRDS, THEIR NESTS
AND EGGS.

{Indiana Acts 1905.)

Section 602. It shall be unlawful for any person to

kill, trap or possess any wild bird, or to purchase or offer Er ae:
the same for sale, or to destroy the nests or the eggs of any wild bird
except as otherwise provided in this section. But this section shall not
apply to the following named game birds: The Anatidze, commonly
called swans, geese, brant, river and sea duck; the Rallidze, commonly
known as rails, coots, mudhens, and gallinules; the Limicolzee, commonly
known as shore birds, plovers, surf birds, snipe, woodcock, sandpipers,
tattlers and curlews; nor to English or European house sparrows, crows,
hawks, or other birds of prey. Nor shall this section apply to any per-
son taking birds or their nests or eggs for scientific purposes under per-
mit, as provided in the next section. Any person violating the provisions
of this section shall, upon conviction, be fined not less than ten doliars
nor more than fifty dollars.

Sec. 603. Permits may be granted by the Commissioner of Fisheries
and Game to any properly accredited person, permitting the holder there-
of to collect birds, their nests or eggs for strictly scientific purposes. In
order to obtain such permit the applicant for the same must present to
said Commissioner written testimonials from two well-known scientific
men certifying to the good character and fitness of said applicant to be en-
trusted with such privilege, and pay to said Commissioner one dollar there-
for, and file with him a properly executed bond in the sum of two hundred
dollars, payable to the State of Indiana, conditioned that he will obey the
terms of such permit, and signed by at least two responsible citizens of
the State as sureties. ‘The bond may be forfeited and the permit revoked
upon proof to the satisfaction of such Commissioner that the holder of
such permit has killed any bird or taken the nests or eggs of any bird
for any other purpose than that named in this section.

OFFICERS—1905-1906.

PRESIDENT,
ROBERT HESSLER.

VICE-PRESIDENT,
D. M. MOTTIER.

SECRETARY,
LYNN B. McMULLEN.

ASSISTANT SECRETARY,
J. H. RANSOM.

PRESS SECRETARY,
CHARLES R. CLARK.

TREASURER,
WILLIAM A. McBETH.

EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE.

ROBERT HESSLER, HaRVEY W. WILEY, J. C. ARTHUR,
D. M. Mortisr, M. B. THomas, J. L. CAMPBELL,*
Lynn B. McMULLEN, D. W. DENNIs, ORR Eaves
J. H. Ransom, C. H. EIGENMANN, T. C. MENDENHALL,
CHARLES R. CLARK, C. A. WALDO, JOHN C. BRANNER,
WicuramM A. McBeETH, THOMAS GRAY, Jae Ds JOHN.
JOHN S. WRIGHT, STANLEY COULTER, JOHN M. COULTER,
Cart L. MEES, Amos W. BUTLER, Davip S. JORDAN.
WILLIS S. BLATCHLEY, W. A. NOYES,
CURATORS.

IB OTAINGY 055 tee ere he pe ccyn ernie Take ee eR UI ae ero potene ay eke J. C. ARTHUR

ICGH@EEY O10 Give So cere sen eer oe eee eae C. H. EIGENMANN.

HERPETOLOGY )

MAMMALOGY See Poet Ei nlS SOterd PeiGOmsceaie: Amos W. BUTLER.

ORNITHOLOGY 3)

BENETOMOLOGN iy sencoeee cain ce dior ele minete teens W. S. BLATCHLEY.

“Deceased.

COMMITTEES, 1905-1906.

PROGRAM.
Lynn B. McMULLEN, Jobe NAWOR: W. J. MOENKHAUS.
MEMBERSHIP.
J. H. Ransom, W. A. McBETH.
NOMINATIONS.
G. W. BENTON, W. J. MoENKHAUS, W.S. BLATCHLEY.
AUDITING.
THOMAS GRAY, A. J. BIGNEY.
STATE LIBRARY.
G. W. BENTON, C. H. EIGENMANN, A. W. BUTLER,
W.S. BLATCHLEY, J. C. ARTHUR.

LEGISLATION FOR THE RESTRICTION OF WEEDS.
M. B. THOMAS, D. M. MorriEr, C. C. DEAM.

PROPAGATION AND PROTECTION OF GAME AND FISH.

C. H. EIGENMANN, A. W. BUTLER, GLENN CULBERTSON.

EDITOR.
E. G. Martin, Purdue University, Lafayette.

DIRECTORS OF BIOLOGICAL SURVEY.

M. B. THOMAS,
J. C. ARTHUR.

C. H. EIGENMANN,

CHARLES R. DRYER,
STANLEY COULTER,

RELATIONS OF THE ACADEMY TO THE STATE.

C. A. WALDO, WILLIAM WATSON WOOLLEN, R. W. McBrRIpDgE,
G. W. BENTON.

DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROCEEDINGS.

THOMAS GRAY, L. J. RETTGER, JOHN S. WRIGHT,
DoONALDSON BODINE, D. W. DENNIS.

10

“mOmUBYS

“URGOW “VM
UIPEoW “VM
TWISGOW “VM
UIMAOW “V “A

T184098 ‘Lb Lf

T4098 iL “Lf

‘TIPAOOS TL “L£

‘TIPA00§ LL

‘[TOA009 “T £
‘MOUTBYS “dq A
“TOUUBYS “dq “M
‘dM
MOUUBYS “dq “M
“OPTRM
‘OPTBM °
‘surTyuor *
‘suUTyUOL *
aq:
‘a:
“suruet’ “d “O
‘SUIyUIr ‘qd ‘O

“SUT YU (?

“‘SULYUO(?

“HIRIO “A SopTEYO
Pr naan
yoqay “VD

yoqay “W'S
"** TOJMO “AA '004)
“"* UWoJMO “AA ‘004)
"** TOJMEd “MM ‘004)
"** MOJO” “AM ‘004)
"* TOJUeT “AA ‘Oax)

Freee ees osUBRy ‘H “{p

rorssess MmosURY “Hf

outpog
“++ -ouIpog

oZgTNYpS "VW
ee eae ae
ee Sena eoRe

“"“ulosuey “EL

woSspTVUo(y

uwOSp[Buog

ac |

sae ‘OUST ate \i
AVUSIG “ff “WV
“os KoUSTIG ate ‘W

‘y

UWBULIONT “AA “AA
J WBUTION “AA A
| eyynog AoyTWeIS

"| repyng
|* “ reyqng
repyng

UTD IW gq uud'T
USTIOPL. IN “@ wUAryT
“"V[STIM “SG uyOr
QUSTIM “S Tyo
““QUSIIM “§ UyOL
QUSTIIM Ҥ TYyOL
“QU SITAA “S TOL

“QU SII AA “S UyOr

UST “Ss TOL

"SUSI “S
“QUSTIM “SO ulor

“QUSTIM S
ror acti opIEM,
‘* TopJUg
* ropugd

uyor

uyor
eae)
"AA Ssouty
“A soury
"AA Soury
"AA soury
"MA souly
"AA. Soury
"M soury
“AA Soul!

“*Toyyng
“ ropyugd
"* ropyngd

“UHM OSVaAUT,

“AUVLAUOUS SSHUg

“RUVLAYOUS ~

“AMV LAMOAS

“** TOTSSOFT J10qQ Oy
“-"qYSTIM “S YOR
Ht g99nT “TT “C
SOTO “SAA
AOTIM “M AOATR ET

SvULOULL, “G “IW
CR stam “MA ‘Cd
“uaRUUesig “HO
-ODTeAA TWO
| “kVID) SBUIOTY,

\'* tegq~mog AoTUBIG
cones ropa ‘MCW
eros soon “WOM
| eee Saqauabne PO) o(p
|“ Tjeqdueg TL
COE key ‘a ‘0
‘TIRYyopus{ “O iL
| reuuRlg “OQ Tyo Lr
mor ‘Gd ‘df
““Teqynog “ uyor

uBplof "SG plavcq,

“INGUGISHYd

**9061-06T
"S06 1-F06T
“$06 1-S06T
S06 1-GO06T

G6061-LO6T
"1061-0061
**0061-668T

8-681
oe A xateilt

“9-681
») Sar6sr
"*F-S681
eee 68-6681
opie G- 1681
Se I-0681
"06-6881
al 6-8881
= ter /AsteIll
pat abe 1-988T

“9-G88T

‘HONGHIOS HO AWHAVOV VNVIGNI HHL HO SHHOIWHO

ids

CONSEITULION,

ARTICLE I.

Section 1. This association shall be called the Indiana Academy
of Science.

Sec. 2. The objects of this Academy shall be scientific research
and the diffusion of knowledge concerning the various departments of
science; to promote intercourse between men engaged in scientific work,
especially in Indiana; to assist by investigation and discussion in devel-
oping and making known the material, educational and other resources
and riches of the State; to arrange and prepare for publication such
reports of investigation and discussions as may further the aims and
objects of the Academy as set forth in these articles.

Whereas, The State has undertaken the publication of such proceed-
ings, the Academy will, upon request of the Governor, or of one of the
several departments of the State, through the Governor, act through
its council as an advisory body in the direction and execution of any
investigation within its province as stated. The necessary expenses in-
curred in the prosecution of such investigation are to be borne by the
State; no pecuniary gain is to come to the Academy for its advice or
direction of such investigation.

The regular proceedings of the Academy as published by the State
shall become a public document.

ARTICLE It.

Section 1. Members of this Academy shall be honorary fell-ws.
fellows, non-resident members or active members.

Sec. 2. Any person engaged in any department of scientific work.
or in original research in any department of science, shall be eligible
to active membership. Active members may be annual or life members.
Annual members may be elected at any meeting of the Academy; they
shall sign the constitution, pay an admission fee of two dollars, and

12

thereafter an annual fee of one dollar. Any person who shall at one
time contribute fifty dollars to the funds of this Academy may be elected
a life member of the Academy, free of assessment. Non-resident mem-
bers may be elected from those who have been active members but who
have removed from the State. In any case, a three-fourths vote of the
members present shall elect to membership. Applications for member-
ship in any of the foregoing classes shall be referred to a committee on
application for membership, who shall consider such application and re-
port to the Academy before the election.

Sec. 3. The members who are actively engaged in scientific work,
who have recognized standing as scientific men, and who have been
members of the Academy at least one year, may be recommended for
nomination for election as fellows by three fellows or members person-
ally acquainted with their work and character. Of members so nomi-
nated a number not exceeding five in one year may, on recommendation.
of the Executive Committee, be elected as fellows. At the meeting at
which this is adopted, the members of the Executive Committee for 1894
and fifteen others shall be elected fellows, and those now honorary mem-
bers shall become honorary fellows. Honorary fellows may be elected on
account of special prominence in science, on the written recommendation
of two members of the Academy. In any case a three-fourths vote of
the members present shall elect.

ARTICLE III.

SecTIoN 1. The officers of this Academy shall be chosen by ballot
at the annual meeting, and shall hold office one year. They shall consist
of a President, Vice-President, Secretary, Assistant Secretary, Press Sec-
retary and Treasurer, who shall perform the duties usually pertaining to
their respective offices, and in addition, with the ex-Presidents of the
Academy, shall constitute an Executive Committee. The President shall,
at each annual meeting, appoint two members to be a committee, which
shall prepare the programs and have charge of the arrangements for all
meetings for one year.

Sec. 2. The annual meeting of this Academy shall be held in the
city of Indianapolis within the week following Christmas of each year,
unless otherwise ordered by the Executive Committee. There shall also
be a summer meeting at such time and place as may be decided upon

13

by the Executive Committee. Other meetings may be called ae the dis-
cretion of the Executive Committee. The past Presidents, together with
the officers and Executive Committee, shall constitute the Council of the
Academy, and represent it in the transaction of any necessary business
not especially provided for in this constitution, in the interim between
general meetings.

Sec. 3. This constitution may be altered or amended at any annual
meeting by a three-fourths majority of the attending members of at
least one year’s standing. No question of amendment shall be decided
on the day of its presentation.

BY-LAWS.

1. On motion, any special department of science shall be assigned
to a curator, whose duty it shall be, with the assistance of the other
members interested in the same department, to endeavor to advance
knowledge in that particular department. Each curator shall report at
such time and place as the Academy shall direct. These reports shall
include a brief summary of the progress of the department during the
year preceding the presentation of the report.

2. The President shall deliver a public address on the morning of
one of the days of the meeting at the expiration of his term of office.

3. The Press Secretary shall attend to the securing of proper news-
paper reports of the meetings and assist the Secretary.

4. No special meeting of the Academy shall be held without a notice
ot the same having been sent to the address of each member at least
fifteer days before such meeting.

5. No bill against the Academy shall be paid without an order
signed by the President and countersigned by the Secretary.

6. Members who shall allow their dues to remain unpaid for two
years, having been annually notified of their arrearage by the Treasurer,
shall have their names stricken from the roll.

7. Ten members shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of
business.

14

MEMBERS.

FELLOWS.

Ree IS tAT Gyo oe cecenele eee PSO Be eres peteans ocr Bloomington.
ranks Me Andrews oacemscetcee IS Ue Sa eeus ronda Bloomington.
JC aA Glia eee eereee OS ieee carseat: Lafayette.
George W. Benton.............. ibso eee otcmeeee cc ae Indianapolis.
Noe) eI BOATS \ Ae ee An EOE Strict ean One er rin eee Moore’s Hill.
IAC AW 2S DUG ES ecto sees aa ie STAs aeaweetoie Gara West Lafayette.
Katherine Golden Bitting....... Ne ie ates Renee ares Lafayette.
DonaldsonsS odine yee. scree oe: WSO rare: Syren keane Crawfordsville.
Weass blatchiley eee ccm ie ae LOUD nae omar: Indianapolis.
Hisar Cir. aoe cers ee ee eel OOO a top a re k er ie Irvington.
Severance Burrage .............. 1 O8 meets oe ee Lafayette.
AG Wrest tl Ciera scene L Eat Pe SALOU OE eens eee ee Indianapolis.
Joule Camp belile*sis is... ee BOSE Seen orice Crawfordsville.
Mel St Cooke tesccn LOO Deere oe rege .. Santiago, Cuba.
Jonn=Ms "Coulter. t..9.. utes ce SOD: Sac eke tas Chicago, Ill.
Stanley Coulters ssi wl... SOSH eee aes Lafayette.
Glenn Culbertson ........... SOO Meee tek et Hanover.
ID) WES ODINIG! Pris ea ene Be LOO Ee nye eke Richmond.
Geel d Dia uel geet arenas oie LSS sera cece Terre Haute.
Ceti hig enmann heenaiss ee SOBER Ee areea Bloomington.
Percy NorionsiivanS =. ace eel OO lee eines, _ West Lafayette.
AML Oley tix te eG aes hes pees TSO Mice tes eee Bloomington.
IME MG Olden we areee ne eee SOO Se ere Lafayette.
WHT MEG OSSi is: catalase BOR ese eas eee Lafayette.
(RhoniasnG rayon seoceccs. ae 1893. .. Terre Haute.
Aveo sta thaWwayon ncicsier en ere SOD = ateeee ee ee ernes nantes
We Ke Plast te es aistepeonsr cae ies QOD 5-5 Bixee eae Lafayette.
Robertvblesslen AAsss a ee cee ltce haa Sane aera Logansport.
He CAS EaStOnp, yotason. skeet ISOS Reese Aches Lafayette.
Hawin S:.Johonnatt: 2.2.2. +206. TOOL eet sake erro Terre Haute.
A GhureWendricks ne ona nee ISOS. aA rane ha eee Terre Haute.
Robert) He iyoOns-m.4 sass eens BOG Wass canoe Bloomington.

SOE React Ata aei ee Terre Haute.

WReAVicietinesee ne teen

“Date of election.
*Deceased.

Vig tint Mars ters7s yiness. cate en. foe lho R is eames Base Bloomington.
OAPI ENC CSR arent Alen ies 1 o}S Fa Sree ae are tee Terre Haute.

J As Millerees 3.5.2 BIPAT 2 hese. 6 ISO Sateen ee Bloomington.
Wid MMoenkkhauss Vhs. 2525.45. 110) Ree aes or ee Bloomington.
JosephsMioores seats: ck es SOG tS, eek ckse Richmond.

DS Min Miottteract 2+ ceraeen see os BOS Meena nee en Bloomington.
GER TAN By LOT scraps crete wel seu oeianet OOS reese wie as eee Greencastle.

WEP ACHINOV ESE Eig st totes = sor caceelaie SOS rete oe: Washington, D. C.
pte CEVA SOM nig co a ocaim ap ieee GOD Reyes asks eo ches Lafayette.

ead eeti ser eanen sethen cies eo ocie LiUShS [ieee Sterne tee amr Terre Haute.

aA DESH OVE ens aia ieee pau ee nee eho fata Ase eer ee Terre Haute.
FAexaSmiitibiees en acer st hoe Ee Mtb 5 ae . Chicago, Ill.

Aes tL DS NOK NO) ONE eae ee cer Rig can oe cn oer SOR wie oct arcs Lafayette.

DOSE PhS walls je hese bier cto bake) cress SOR Ree oes ake Swarthmore, Pa.
eT BES SS 190) a fee heer oo pas eee aio fs Sa ae am Crawfordsville.

Ales sc NV UCLONS Sa hires tele s.<- «0 BOS foes eden a, Lafayette.

AME a Wie DStGL. tava cei nein le sos = SOA esas be ase Champaign, Ill.
Jacob Westlund ...... OS (00 PPE ee esa ee Lafayette.

EDREVV Re Nate iye enero peace mien ces IRs 5g ec NR ee: Washington, D. C.
PORES WELshibss jet welnee Leas < ERO Riek Sper ee Sais Indianapolis.

enrmer i. “ASI OY fics 2 iesies) tie.

M. A. Brannon
Teo seb ranneriacr is oe
D. H. Campbell

see eee

Ape Walmer (Dutt ses.

B. W. Everman......
Charles H. Gilbert....
@r-W Greenies ce

CPOWe Elareidt: xa r

“Date of election.

Jiu) ea) apjalieletaveue 01¢. 8 s/e\6, ee a 0 a) = =

NON-RESIDENT MEMBERS.

¥, 5:12. Charleston, SC.
Grand Forks, N. D.
5355 Ae ORO O UC CBD A OnoOnr .- stanford University, Cal.
Stanford University, Cal.
Worcester, Mass.
Washington, D. C.
Stanford University,
Columbia, Mo.
Tbs) RED Oe e oS ees Syracuse, N. Y.
New York City.
Stockton, Cal.
Stanford University,

Se ee Cal.

SEU Ka)pileimiee) (<a lvmre je 9 s%< 6) a0) 0 (61's) 6:8

Cal.
Cal.

Stanford University,
Tufts College, Mass.

16

1D: I MacbDouraleeadetncn: te ce eee Bronx Park, New York City.
30: Mend emhall e522 ai. oes sak foe ee eee Worcester, Mass.

Alfred (Springer twee hace Sees aces oe Cincinnati, Ohio.

la Mie Wnderwoodivic seks: tos ceo e aaee ee ee New York City.

Robert Bi Warder sevice sac. eae Washington, D. C.

Bret W ALK pea ke ss ee eee ek eee Clemson College, 8S. C.

ACTIVE MEMBERS.

GEOree Abbot more ce coe ee ne aes en Oe Indianapolis.
corre CAshtmaAnTor. Aas ase oes ee es Frankfort.

Wd ward VAT esi eesrss sce oes ele Seen eee nee Lafayette.

15M aa BY Wiig moines ore tn aah eye Nee PALS wif ete nee Urbana, Il.
Frank Tarkington Baker.......................Mmdianapolis.
Mid ward. Hugh Obatpeson 05. ino ee eee eee Indianapolis.
WialtersD) SBaker see ses bane at Sheree Se Indianapolis.
Tali y Savile Le By 2 eet eae ree ee eee AE Soe Franklin.
larry iis DArnareysemecce Ase cote cet ek eee Indianapolis.
Victor Hugo-Barnetinic22-. 32cm ee Indianapolis.
JEW 2 BC ed GR te oo eee Bloomington.
Harry Eldridge. Bishop a... Sasi oe eas eee Indianapolis.
IbeSteneblack eke seen Be Pie Ses evar re oem Bloomington.
William N: Blanchard sax. .3.08 secktoni ss See ieee Greencastle.
Bd wane Ms Blakers i akecs es oon ee oe Lafayette.

Whee wey Bennetiner. ccs Are ee eee ae ae Valparaiso.
Charles;S DORE. von. ee eee sess cacao ee RO ree Richmond.
Fired esis BLOC ee tans eee ORS a on ane AE Delphi.

BME IB TUCCoveetore Tene oes Re ee Weston, Oregon.
hewis Clintons Carsons. 2.2 aha noe ee Bloomington.
Hermanas Chamber ain eset eee ee Indianapolis.

t Ope ak Ol oF: Wals) Ley hewn ieee Meee AE were oper titer Bicknell.
OttotO “Clayton =e saosin eee ee Geneva.

EG wad W.-C lames Cree ee ee ee a Chicago, III.
EV Clem sake en Oe eee Bloomington.
George Clements ............ oP ee ec eee Crawfordsville.
ChaclesiClickener ws tact cece eee Silverwood, R. D. No. 1.
Charles A. Cottey. s ens ae ee Petersburg.

WilbervAs Cogshall so: tot eee ena eee Bloomington.

ikvaser Oh. Com eraitecteetes cs 25 ko ceo oa00 be wee Terre Haute.
Walia ASP GPa OO fo ieoe ncn cots cna a ewe’ Columbus.

See REET AUREL dace aire Ee ALG. Kalen o's aica als Crawfordsville.
PRU BOBG Es ACE OW? 2h Cos Bee ata wie caciSpptel oe naiy ale dial ale Sl Charleston, Ill.
i SN DOr oh 250 hegre i ne Ra ae ee Franklin.
Edward Roscoe Camings: 2.2... 5.065. - ane ness Bloomington.
Alida: Me Cunning annie. )6 5.7 sie<s aeons cease Alexandria.
Oren AO iis DiaTEtGI A) fore hints once cs. caee oe wake Laporte.

ELAS i gol avd GNOM ate taiae teeta cat price rte ea niet Baltimore, Md.
Ohariog Cx Wenminrs Soot ds ds Tas co able ans Bluffton.
Martha Doane iiyeres pena anchors sect orahe lias Sete. Siaia ake Sele Westfield.

igs esse] DOUG tte cs Bo he ag eee Se ee a eee nae aes Syracuse.
OHGAHIY WV. DOO RIAA I. oo.c oe netems BS eee Indianapolis.
Herman Be DOrmerk es se sies ccieie a Ree pees Lafayette.

Le Rp iatsied D100 (ss lke tS ee Ae Be el re ae ree Indianapolis.
ANH NUTS HSL PUTIATAA Te yore: <i eevee ies cele cere vae, avec) ctate hen Logansport.
eer herk A PRIME tl of oes bg ce Scan Ase Cwew Se Fee Logansport.
HG. pernardt.... sen PPSNG tke eave thd tiaceuaee cae Indianapolis.
ranks. cM OTed Baserasccies cueaeereis traced Peni Indianapolis.
UNG SE EGOS rts wartnte Pat tee ac ngs: omeee ditgen Oe ae Columbus.
Sel Cr Vas eo assis as hen dice eos Sans Evansville.

A jg 512 1 Seat Oe 5 cha i Ay os Logansport.
ERE Gr CMCERIB SAoRaN ti. ae cece Yeats ios mnt Big Rapids, Mich.
Bios ISN Or sn. geist eleak eicaw baie oh ctee one 6 Se se oe Urmeyville.
Vel AGNI SKOTA perry aie t is siavels. c(t Sareine Seis oe witae oe Richmond.

Wie GL GhHerneremetecieanisc vscuceie oeieclne ee as Indianapolis.
JN alee Oyvibel Gene sone A ores va Be ee caer aetna New Albany.
ona Gr abelee cecpuiaas ae <a corked eles oisjeveer en acers Montpelier.
INBATOW. Ws MreI DIO ane Serko 2s cat erein's' naeen oa Logansport.
Whrarlesy Wi. Gareetiiiepecn sec harrciccit ccoven erste te conte. Pittsburg, Pa.
VO Dertie Gs Grilles teehee 8 iat tovayche sacterciet choirs = Terre Haute.
Wilmer JacObiGiatwien ei 5 oe eelgies Semitic we Anderson.
Werngn GOWN) et ecneee te close a toaatekanides es Rochester.
Wraltercreiahing Senteceraei oieia not octets cies aie alevere¢ Washington, D. C.
ra al gl a Gn ih PA Ae rr Odon.

AVELCUOTHE CNG TICK Games tiniere oon alorsicveraosis Gack cess Indianapolis.
wonn fF. EIGGhering ton Sacer 5s oss kei: noose kee Logansport.
Mary A. Hickman...... Sen eas eae aaa es oa Greencastle.

2—A. OF SCIENCE.

Bi

lod

18

John ECE ip dont pet* Breet cet oe eer Indianapolis.
Wrank Wy. Eig iis see) eee ae ese ee Terre Haute.

5. Della ilanGs cee SINUS os Ge ae: Madison.

John J: Haldebeandtie 2enie sis eo ne ee Logansport.
GB. Homan =. 5 Mee Ree a5 nn en eee Logansport.

Ji DEO Maman: Gite Pee ere eae eee eeS Oo Lafayette.
Altes D7 Holes: 2s3B eee eerie aoa tian aie Richmond.
iucis MM: bbardoccres enor, ovr) eses ae South Bend.
JohniNeseurtiyes. nese aac St asain .... Indianapolis.
Cy Be ACKBOU A, 1 ape cls nee nS Aas he Greencastle.
Dennis Emerson Jackson... .. Sr Caen eee Bloomington.
AlexcEOUNSOUM. -. eee RRR Ae re ee ceo Ft. Wayne.
Ee St Ch) GUC ee tek ee oats ee pete Kokomo.
Wimtcdes JONES cde ner eric ee ec ci eee West Lafayette.
Chancey Juday <2 2252.8 Ruthie emia eres Boulder, Colo.
OPTS Kelsor cosa Pa oe Se eA Oa en Terre Haute.
Norton Ay Kent +222: 218 SS are Srecetbhenaes Crawfordsville.
Prank“): Keri. ge essen oo ok oe ee ea Yo Lbe:
Charles "1 Ka pyar crt veka 7 oh rue Ne oe kiee -- Urbana, i:
Henry. bane teens face NA OPS SEA c Lebanon.
Wallram. 1 Da wreneos se eee 4 (soo S98 eas ae es Richmond.
Vive Wockwoods scene SES DRA ete Indianapolis.
Robert Wesley McBride.............. ........ Indianapolis.
ivoussean. MeClellamys Seat o.) seaeicee faaee Indianapolis.
Richard C. McClaskey...... pag Sta Poa Terre Haute.
INSZE eS MCIN dO Ones Se oaaeec dake ceca ERE Bloomington.
ayn Mic Millen: Aa sree ae oor acne ieee ie Indianapolis.
BdiwardiG.: Mahinges sos aarne caer oe oo ae West Lafayette.
Jamessh. Manchesteres. a4. nen see sae nee Vincennes.
Wilfred H. Manwaring ........ Seat eee ites Bloomington.
BG Martin, = Se eee as cee eine ee Lafayette.
ThomasshiGwardeMasone Sie ats ae ee Hodgenyille, Ky.
@larkiMiick =2= 2 eter oe Peet ee uh, es Berkley, Cal.
IW. .Ge Midd letont.iciv bes sot ee eee aes Richmond.

Ga Rudolph=Mallerss aah yaeee nea eyes Indianapolis.
Por Monte Omeny- ce ts ce eee eect eS South Bend.
Richard Bishop Moores: s-e.. 224 -2ceeer fon ee Indianapolis.

WaltertP: “Moreanyss eee see eee Terre Haute.

19

erp NEn GeO ees sees te toate a gets te eaten: Terre Haute.
Oharles MisNe wiles. , .2s sires wos oe 5 i oth Irvington.

John iNewilin® 4... SN RH a cc batetans sone eral West Lafayette.
WOMneMesNEWSOME = sac ceteris cosa veo ah ayehnctc ot Stanford University, Cal.
R. W. Noble ee SUSUR a sie Hah mss a eee A ee smear Oyo LL),
Andrew ileveher iO mle a5 saci. aici foci s <isvvicle ye oleic Bloomington.

IDs i\et ON At ates AROU a Goo an oan Oars Franklin.

RST lige Byte pie Samrat § Os. oe Aalersicn faa er alnnee ae <3 Bloomington.
VOM OR pI CO eer ais ecko oysters makes ee ere tonto erenn, 6s Indianapolis.
TRH EY al BS 2a Sees ee A iain Seer cao oii co ome Greenwood.
DAMESPACSELIC Cai: Matera Ai tao scoreless eceiel one eer ae Ft. Wayne.

IM rainikat Ase eTOSLOM:.. ser teiere oe ers terc iors oe eiere aren ete rae Indianapolis.

PACE eee rr Cope eet smiles oie ara oc eade cheseyersie = 5 elas Fayetteville, Ark.
“AS CUE td SYR Ric VS) 2h, ni ane ee ene mM eee Soe ar eerie Bloomington.

A Rhya eave eaitil tithe rete ys 55) soto ete, orateratoe ice seielaletave wid cases Danville.

WVU ere Sid anf DW eas, ein eRe Se CN ton Richmond.
IDET HEV A AMG Re Ree ocelo eis. £ ecacnmislaisy cfevielsee ota Mora, Wash.
PETE eve yVMOLGS ae tnrt inet ices op a ton Salereiics tetas Emporia, Kansas.
Colles hi foipl eye sas cece shoe ates ok see oxtaesios 4 eWeCorab,, Lowa.
Georee Lin KODCEIS: coatsaces pn sh wrea nee shae ese Muncie.

TD RRAR RENO UNEOCK mei aee cece watjeciectersinieieciolalaveln cies so Bloomington.
JohnslesSchnatbless cise oc cesar ween in eisienaerals Lafayette.

BiG / Nef SIG) OY I I aN eS Nie ae aie a ee a re ree .... Et. Wayne.

WWaIIE SC Obie aeteee oe Aes capes eit oes. ciateie bie wists yelenseroate’s Terre Haute.
ClrainlesaWianees MANN OM yrcier cee oie wne eae ee Bloomington.
HOMME We SHE PWerd: srseers chrle oats weinetotedelte ...Terre Haute.
ClaaderSie bem sarah gs ee i adeiaes sh erecdiel sins cetereneke Indianapolis.
we Ga onl ery se aia cia cise e edema ea nhl Indianapolis.
emer LOMA OE citpeelcig Aeros tral eae ut ee wie nia staid Sun ates Madison, Wis.
HSSV GS eAiln ais Sina tlie tererereer es coe eretoe Sere eee ees Bloomington.

Oa BA OENO Sachi ap eee wera ae Opa mene ee Se eee Welands stantorde@ale
TpGtibaebl SPCALS we alee eee an ee eevee SO cred es tw Elkhart.

See Vrs S UO Gar drys seid mee Reem tach siotencie ey «acess .Indianapolis.
Charles: P Stegmiaier =: 202. i65.fo oc eee eee: .Greensburg.
Wie Mi ark SSW EGG ob Oc 6 Mikel nice anes + whcsewier ees + Burlington, Vt.
Williamebres Greeters rs that ee oo Tes tiv ciass Indianapolis.

Ga rane entire Pea Wehner ge ats ha aay oat Riles, waa wrars Ft. Wayne.

MUBEEGS Wiest NORIDSOD) ae Tate Sooo ewe oes owed Owensville.

20

Sev) | PROM pPsOn ee Ge oa Oe ee ee aT Richmond.
CeEEWUnderwoodizen wrcrak Sonee ree ee Indianapolis.
oe) Uy gead Da 2216 las, (2) Ue an ae oe Se ye at Oxford, Ohio.
Damioled POV OL cic eave oa marehie ooh eee Goshen.
AB UL Cy Se Cas Sa Oe eR wae antes North Manchester.
Wie bee Vials GORder was ee bacco nae ne een rere Worthington.
Arthur @.a ViedtChitsacsciccutstrcs Semone ee ees Rockport.
ED aS SS VOOTNCCS aes chee etre ote ener Cee Ft. Wayne.
Jee BN OLIS Mevaride srw eee. s slocaa oe ete Duluth, Minn.
arses WV ULC varia ese e mlciaraie eeiekce eee ee Indianapolis.
hewis Clinton yWiard’.y2: esc asiere acca sees Huntington.
BD) ATO RTC eerare cvs atel stacy toro eueiaes ores oe tN Indianapolis.
BUCS olGOMAIGrs,.1..22 es een bh neon oa tee ee West Lafayette.
HreduG@ saw bibc omnes orice Delphi.
\yiGbbbieyon Wl, \Adan RSs noo eeocuen boon coc Pie rtalcuoucrens South Bend.
FATDSTGeN Te WNAAMICK. OL ty, Aetce aly siaveireuvastsairerteneees Lafayette.
INGISESWallliam sina aneiae sis tecton arora Terre Haute.
Guy Wes tewalsone. ccoe sence ioe eee eee Lafayette.
WalliamimWatsonmyWoollent semeesecne ncn uct Indianapolis.
Herbert, MiltonsywWoolenis cee seese moenoeees Indianapolis.
Je WOOISGy ve trees oases oat eae ne Indianapolis.
NENG YN OUSO rts me aise eilatoehts einteloie eat as ae ENS Palo Alto, Cal.
CharleseZelemy-se murine voce on eee Bloomington.
MeMOW SHAR areGantas te eon ae ee EE 52
Nonresident memibers}as. seco ce one eee ice 20
Active members..... 166
POta acess ee ee ree 238

Norer.—lor list of Foreign Correspondents, see Proceedings of 1904.

21

LIST OF PAPERS APPEARING ON THE PROGRAM OF THE
TWENTY-FIRST ANNUAL MEETING,

Held in Shortridge High School, December 1, 1905,

*President’s Address—A Consideration of Certain Investigations Needed in

Par COLOR ences rcetcts sitet ate erey toe eisai emerer aie aie ciate mPOn06 CODERS Oc John §. Wright
GENERAL.

*]. Some Scientific Aspects of Tea Drinking, dm.............. 0.2.20. eee eee Frank B. Wade
Hise M vos Fabry to bn heh be (hin aacrsnesead dacueOr Gs COSE Tee RISE SO RAP SIeM noise ene Albert B. Reagan
BRAC MUMMAN OR adLOaAc tivatyenl Om macksetr mis sene cate cace canine Motes vince cries Ryland Ratliff

SAP e adit C1oGks My rcucmeccines sence comaieitssnts ne ceisonae es aiencesee: OlLapke. Ramsey:

Sy helseet ent as HUG loMy ces cece satel eae cee ote on cen ences Benj. W. Douglass
6.2-ehe Molecular Horcesin.Gelatine, Oms.ccisc-.-. cesses ccaclccsec cee nnes Arthur L. Foley

*7. The Chronic Il] Health of Darwin, Huxley, Spencer and George Eliot,

Diriies (HOSUNDE Leelee terior iene a eae eae ae ee eek eee Robert Hessler

Sem heaV ood al peLmaustry slimes cre ook eee ei en fea cis cee sonia M. D. Renkenberger
(Ese Se pacsirie Cael By eyo} cal | Ori Revere bese ener Seite ace Mirani mare emits eines Ses William Watson Woollen

10. Thorium and its Disintegration Products, 20m...................2 -... Richard D. Moore

*11. An Account of a Buzzard’s Nest with Photographs of the Young up te
the Seventy-fourth Day, When They Left the Nest, 10m .............. D. W. Dennis
*12. The Solar Eclipse of 1905, 20m. (lantern) ........... Nees oe pee ate As John A. Miller

PHYSICS, CHEMISTRY, GEOLOGY AND MATHEMATICS.

“13. Irrelevant Factors in the Bitangentals of Plane Algebraic Curves, 10m.
Ulysses 8S. Hanna

*14, On the Weathering of the Subcarboniferous Limestone in the Non-

Glaciated Area of Southern Indiana, 10m................ 000. eee ee E. R. Cummings
*15. Aetion of Calcium Chloride Solution on Glass, 5m .......... cc cee cece ee eee P.N. Evans
16. The Age of the Red-Beds of Oklahoma Territory and the ‘‘Panhandle’’ of
Texaswast ot the staked. Plains; 10m. ecessicess sccm csseismertoccn ecferis J. W. Beede
ae vethousot Collecting Hossils m0mlsem. scsi aus eeeniooe cies neces OR Wc beeGe
*18,. Equivalent-Weight-Determination Apparatus, 5m...............-.-. James H. Ransom
19. Result of Heating a Mixture of Manganese Dioxide and Ammonium
Nitrate, | 0m sce nerseasae 3 TTA OB OOD SO SAS TOR OER OBE BeCe Ee James H. Ransom
Fe SUMTER INYO AcallySIB sul OTe cetcteiersanre elevate = cicisrsicus Gates. cielo sicorcle ie veic leisy sfasasere rete James H. Ransom
21. Comparison of the Faunas of the Salem Limestone at Ellettsville, Big
Creek and Romona,10m.......... Dut fein ee fas Loan Hic a co i hd cee a A.W. Thompson
*22. Effect of Radium on Electrolytic Conductivity, 5m ....................5. Ryland Ratliff

23. Summary of Glacial Literature Relating to Glacial Deposits, 10m... Albert B. Reagan
24. Some Geological Studies on Northwestern Washington and Adjacent
IBTAGES MLE TIT LO LY il OMlaefaclecieakinesiat tn esis cae hoe te cols ose sie cayaie sos Albert B. Reagan
*25. A Simple Method of Measuring Electrolytic Resistance, 5m .......... Rolla R. Ramsey
“26. Some Peculiarities of Electric Sparks Across Short Spark-Gaps, 10m. Rolla R. Ramsey
*27. Gas Burners and Standards of Candle Power, 5m..Rolla R. Ramsey and Hiromitsu Oi
28. Determination of the Latitude of Flower Observatory, 10m.............. W. EE. Howard
29. Eleetromagnetic Induction in Various Conductors and Electrolytes,
Bre Die ok Onan ste oe -srascrce ever Pe arr was eisai crore Er essievei cic aire Seven cuiecombeS ouals sje co: eyeyelet@ Arthur L. Foley

66.

On the Use of a Copper, Aluminum, Manganese Alloy as a Core in the
Rutherford-Marconi Magnetic Detector, 10m ...................000- Arthur L. Foley
The Back Electro-Motive Force of the Electric Arc, 10m.,
Arthur L. Foley and Hiromitsu Oi
The Effect of Dragging a Conductor Lengthwise Through a Magnetic

Hioldiofellorce OM. sce eis. Goeeneworene Teepe eo eee Arthur L. Foley
Interference and Diffraction Fringes Produced by
Fluid Streams (lantern), 15m.................. Arthur L. Foley and J. H. Haseman

Geology of the Public Highways of Monroe County, Indiana, 10m..Charles W.Shannon
Studies of the Preglacial Drainage of the Northern United States, 10m....H. M. Clem
New Derivatives of Salicylic Acid, 10m...................... R. E. Lyons and C. E. May
The Use of Sodium Peroxide in the Determination of

Sulphur, Selenium and Tellurium in Organic Com-

DO UNOS SOM caret ce ete coe oe peor enn eee eee R. E. Lyons and C. C. Carpenter
Concerning the Synthesis of Aromatic Selenozines, 5m...R. E. Lyons and F. Shetterly

BOTANY AND ZOOLOGY.

Preliminary Notes on an Almost Extinct Native Disease—Trembles or

Malksicknens, lOm es Scoeecceac cook aces es eee eee eee Robert Hessler
Notes on the International Botanical Congress of 1905,15m ............... J.C. Arthur
Methods Employed in Uredineal Culture Work, 15m ................... Frank D. Kern
The Embryology of Melilotus Alba, 10m. (abstract) ....... Late, atape ete Eanes OES W.J. Young
OxydaseuniVihest Grains, l0mi easetc case rece eee eee eee Katherine Golden Bitting
UytasennuWiheatGralns, omic cisee ao aa one Katherine Golden Bitting
NotesionyLndian Bird ssl Orns ses oe ee ee Pe ee eee Amos W. Butler

Notes Upon Some Little Known Members of the iaiiaeies Flora, 10m.,
Charles Piper Smith

The Eyes of the Blind Lizard Amphisbaena Punctata, 10m................. Ferd Payne
Reversals of Polarity in a Fresh Water PJamarian, 10m.......... .... Mary T. Harman
The Fishes of the Rio Guatemala, Based on Collections Made in Janu-

ALY and Rebruany.7 104 LOitis ene ey ee eee ee ann ee gee Newton Miller

The Direction of Differentiation in a Regenerating Appendage, 10m ...Charles Zeleny
The Regeneration of a Centema-like Organ in Place of the Momentary
Eye of the Blind Crayfish, 1(m. (abstract) .............-.......... ...Charles Zeleny
The Habitat and Life History of the Cuban Blind Fishes (lantern), 15m.,
C. H. Eigenmann
The Origin and Dispersion of South American Fresh Water Fishes

(lantern), 30m . nee Sat Boe Sete eee OO geese eee C. H. Eigenmann
Portraits of Indvina: Wishes: Gantcra): 10m Pe a On AE i ake hehe s Pah A Lester F. Black
A New Species of Campostoma Fern from Indiana, 10m. (abstract)...John Haseman
Northerneindrana Mammals, 10m... essassos scacacck sa cmtics oe ancronees Walter Lewis Hahn

Notes on Some New or Little Known Members of the Indiana Flora, 17m ,
Guy West Wilson

Rusts of Hamilton and Marion Counties, indiana, 10m............... Guy West Wilson
The Phy comycetes of Indiana. damnes sess ceasrat en oe tere een ce eee Guy West Wilson
A Travertine Deposit in Tippecanoe County, Indiana, 3m........... Guy West Wilson
Additions to indiana BP lora.oN Osa OM rae eee arte ie oan ieee Charles C. Deam
Animals and Reptiles of the Rosebud Indian Reservation, South

Dakotay 1l0ms. <2 ccnaeess sen pe ge eee -noa\sc 1-2. ADOT, Dane ean
The Birds of the Rosebud Indian F ecorentic Hs Seats Dakote: 10m . ..Albert S. Reagan
The Productior and Control of Infertility by Inbreeding, 15m ...... W.J. Moenkhaus
Some New Physiological Apparatus, 10m .................-. -.. ...... D. E. Jackson
High School Bactertology,.20m.-22-tacce os sees ees es ee Wilfred H. Manwaring
Metchnikoff’s Theory of Prolonging Life, 15m ......................---- Rudolph Miller

A New Method of Showing the Grain of Wood, dm............ ..... Benj. W. Douglass

*69.
*70.
“08

pr
#73.

"74,
*75.
*76.

77.
=f (oF
79:

*80.

8L.

82.

#83.
84,
#85,

22

ae)
AMLINEtrutioM Gis BOVLewsal awaits anc-cert tecce acc deetciten so otks ce ckeen F.M. Andrews
Some) Monstrositses 1 ern inal OMe. sce ines cece cces@atoesacece ccs F. M. Andrems
A Natural Proof that the Root Tip Alone is Sensitive to the Gravita-

GLOMUSULIN UL Sere erect eee malaika iaeereens othe mete ten eeaiias Uomo. oe: F. M. Andrews
PISSMOUCSHUEN ONE Peete nets a aes co icat mck ts ois See nrs aemloi oe Sakae ees F.M. Andrews
Effect of Alkaloids on Vegetable Protoplasm,5m..................0e000- F. M. Andrews
AnOccurrence.of Kirtland’ s Warbler, dM). ccase.c-cvecesen veces oc seae ces Loren C. Petry
INKtLihyI Nes ashore OAS aoe croak ee reine ce era ternce de corey Sheard tenn See AS A.J. Bigney
AtNew Horm: ofeMircrotomoementlomlOm ncccte sss” cock oesmeiweavdeeca nokacecex E.G. Martin
Oxygen Absorption in Heart Tissue—A Preliminary Communication, 10m.E. G. Martin
The Present Status of the Chromosome Controversy, l5m........... ---- D. M. Mottier
The Blooming of Cercis Canadensis in September,5m.................... D. M. Mottier
A Peculiar Monstrosity in a Seedling of a Zea Mays, 5m.............. ....D. M. Mottier
Spore-Like Bodies in Oscillaria sp., l0m...........-. .2eccececcec ces Severance Burrage
ho Oaks oferndrande lomiecus waancee coe mos. ae teed ns Sew ck metic Stanley Coulter
LUA Del DG EL EAS POST CMTS iia et SA os SS A ao a ee ere beeen Oh ee Uae an oe Will Scott
Notes on the Crayfish of Wells County, Indiana, 5m .................. E. B. Williamson
WNoteontheRecurrence Of brood! Vir ekenncic cece oki onc costes tee Walter L. Hahn

*Papers marked with an asterisk appear in the following pages.

Rawat ee a

; ay Rar eat es

a 25

PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS.

A CONSIDERATION OF CERTAIN NEEDED INVES-
TIGATIONS IN PHARMACOLOGY.

By JouHN S. WRIGHT.

(Abstract.)

Under this title the term pharmacology is not used in its restricted
sense, meaning pharmaco-dynamics only, but is employed to embrace the
botany, chemistry and physiological action of drugs. The suggestions
for needed investigations are the result of a critical study of the records
of about four hundred drugs used in medicine at present.

In order to arrive at some general conclusions concerning existing
knowledge of the commonly used organic drugs, those studied were re-
viewed, marked and classified in eight groups based on the extent to
which they have been investigated, botanically, chemically and physiolog-
ically, as follows:

CLASSES BASED ON THE EXTENT OF CHEMICAL KNOWLEDGE.

1. Drugs whose chemical constituents and active principles are regarded
as well known—276, or approximately 70 per cent.

no

Drugs whose chemical constituents and active principles are but par-
tially determined—100, or approximately 25 per cent.

3. Drugs whose chemical constituents and active principles are undeter-

mined-—25, or approximately 6 per cent.

CLASSES BASED ON THE EXTENT OF KNOWLEDGE OF PHYSIOLOGIOAL ACTION,

4. Drugs whose physiological action is well known, or which have been
subjects of systematic investigations—175, or approximately 438
per cent.

5. Drugs whose physiological action is partially understood, chiefly
through careful clinical reports—140, or approximately 35
per cent.

6. Drugs used empirically or employed for “reputed” action, no satis-

factory records of scientific experiments or chemical investiga-

tions—S82, or approximately 20 per cent.

=]

Drugs employed primarily for purposes other than definite physio-
logical effects, such as flayors, colors, etc. (some not used inter-

nally at present)—9, or approximately 2 per cent.

8. Drugs of obscure or unknown origin—2, or approximately 3 per cent.

These groups or classes are not marked by hard and fast boundary
lines, and perhaps no two students would agree wholly to any single
Classification, as the personal equation enters largely into the work. A
drug which one might regard as sufficiently known chemically and physi-
ologically to be classed as ‘well known,” another would rank as “partially
determined,” and similar differences of opinion will arise respecting other
points involved, so that the classification given above is not offered as an
exact record of the knowledge of the representative drugs, but rather as
the author’s estimation of that knowledge, and as said at the outset, it is
given as a basis or reason for the proposal of certain lines of botanical,
chemical and physiological investigation.

Lest there be misconception regarding the use of little-known drugs
by physicians, it should be remembered that 70 per cent. of all drugs
reviewed have been investigated chemically; that 48 per cent. have been
subjected to systematic physiological experiments, and that the physio-
logical action of 35 per cent. more is partially understood. Thus it seems
that from 70 to 78 per cent. are employed on the basis of demonstrated
value. Furthermore, it should be remembered that the 70 to 78 per cent.
in number constitutes a very large percentage of the volume of Grugs
prescribed. While no statistics are available, in the opinion of the author
it is over 90 per cent. of the total quantity used.

The Proceedings of the Indiana Academy of Science are primarily
intended to disseminate information of special service in the development
of the State and its resources. As space is limited, it is necessary to re-
strict further report of this address to the tables below showing the state
of knowledge of drug plants of Indiana.

to
~]

Inprana PLaNts YIELDING DRUGS.

In order that the student may have a wider range in selecting a sub-
ject for study this list has been enlarged to include introduced and eulti-
vated species, also a few plants foreign to our soil, but which may be
cultivated in gardens for supplying laboratory material. The native
species and the introduced and cultivated species are unmarked; those
of the last class are indicated by an asterisk (*).

Chemical constituents, active principles and physiological action re-
garded as well known:

Allium sativum Linn. Garlic, bulb.

*Althaea officianalis Linn. Marshmallow, root.

Anthemis nobilis Linn. Roman chamomile, inflorescence.

Apocyhnum cannabinum Linn. Black Indian hemp, root.

Arctostaphylos Uva Ursi (Linn.) Sprengel. Uva Ursi, leaves.

Ariszema triphylium (Linn.) Torr. Indian turnip, tuber.

Artemisia Absinthium Linn. Wormwood, leaves and inflorescence.

*Atropa Belladonna Linn. Belladonna, leaves and root.

Carum Carvi Linn. Caraway seed, fruit.

*Carum Petroselinum Benth. Parsley, root and fruit.

Cercis Canadensis Linn. Judas tree, bark.

Chenopodium anthelminticum Linn. American wormseed, seed.

Chimaphila umbellata (Linn.) Nutt. Pipsissewa, herb.

*Claviceps purpurea (I*ries) Tulasne. Ergot, sclerotium.

Cochlearia Armoracia Linn. Horseradish, root.

Conium maculatum Linn. Conium, fruit.

Convallaria majalis Linn. Lilly of the Valley, rhizome and rootlets.

Coptis trifolia (Linn.) Salisb. Gold thread, herb.

Delphinium consolida Linn. Larkspur, seed.

*Digitalis purpurea Linn. Digitalis, leaves, flowers and seed.

*Dryopteris Filix-mas Schott and D. Marginalis, Gray. Male fern,
rhizome.

Epigea repens Linn. Gravel plant, herb.

Euonymus atropurpureus Jacq. Wahoo, bark.

Gaultheria procumbens Linn. Wintergreen, leaves and inflorescence.

*Gentiana lutea Linn. Gentian, root.

Geranium maculatum Linn. Cranesbill, rhizome.

Humulus Lupulus Linn. Hops, inflorescence.

*Hyoscyamus niger Linn. Henbane, leaves and inflorescence.

Juniperus communis Linn. Juniper berries, fruit.

Lactuca Canadensis Linn. Wild lettuce, leaves and inflorescence.

Lobelia inflata Linn. Lobelia, herb and seed.

Menispermum Canadensis Linn. Yellow parilla, rhizome and roots.

Mentha piperita Linn. Peppermint, leaves and inflorescence.

Monarda fistulosa Linn. Wild bergamot, leaves and inflorescence.

Phytelacca decandra Linn. Poke root and berries.

Podophyllum veltatum Linn. Mandrake, rhizome and roots.

Prunus serotina Hhrh. Cherry, bark.

Quercus alba Linn. White oak, bark.

*Ricinus communis Linn. Castor bean, seed and leaves.

Rubus villosus Aiton R. Canadensis, Linn. and R. trivalis, Michx.
Blackberry, root bark.

*Salvia officinalis Linn. Sage, herb.

Sanguinaria Canadensis Linn. Blood root, rhizome.

Sassafras variifolium (Salisbury) O. Kuntze. Sassafras bark, root,
bark.

Satureja hortensis Linn. Summer savory, herb.

Taraxacum officinale Weber. Dandelion, root.

Thuja occidentalis Linn. Arbor vitae, leaves.

Thymus vulgaris Linn. Thyme.

Tsuga Canadensis (Linn.) Carr. Hemlock, bark.

Ustilago Maydis Leveille. Ustilago, entire fungous plant.

*Valeriana officinalis Linn. Valerian, rhizome and rootlets.

*Veratrum album Linn. White hellebore, rhizome and rootlets.

Veratrum viride Aiton. Veratrum, rhizome and rootlets.

Chemical constitutents but partially determined; physiological action
fairly well known:

*Cactus grandiflorus Linn. Cactus grandiflorus, branches.
Cannabis sativa Linn. var. Americana. American hemp, inflorescence.
Spigelia Marylandica Linn. Pink root, rhizome and rootlets.

Chemical constituents regarded as well known; physiological action
not systematically investigated or well understood:

Acorus Calamus Linn. Calamus, rhizome.
Asculus Hippocastanum Linn. Horse chestnut, bark and seed.

Agropyrum repens (Linn.) Beauv. Couch grass, rhizome.

Aralia racemosa Linn. Spikenard, root.

Arctium Lappa Linn. and some other species of Arctium, Burdock,
root and seed.

Asarum Canadense Linn. Canada snake root, rhizome.

Asclepias incarnata Linn. White Indian hemp, root.

Beberis vulgaris Linn. Barberry, bark.

Castanea dentata (Marsh) Sudworth. Chestnut, leaves.

Caulophllum thalictroides (Linn.) Michx. Blue cohosh, rhizome and
rootlets.

Ceanothus Americanus Linn. Jersey tea, leaves.

Chelidonium majus Linn. Garden celandine.

Cornus circinata L. Heritier. Green osier, bark.

Cornus florida Linn. Dogwood, bark.

Cypripedium pubescens Swartz and C. parviflorum Salisbury, Ladies’
Slipper, rhizome and rootlets.

Epilobium angustifolium Linn. Willow herb, herb.

Eupatorium perfoliatum Linn. Boneset, leaves and inflorescence.

Eupatorium purpureum Linn. Queen of the meadow, rhizome and
rootlets.

Galium Aparine Linn. Cleavers, herb.

Helianthus annuus Linn. Sunflower seed.

Hepatica triloba Chaix. Liverwort, herb.

Inula Helenium Linn. Elecampane, rhizome and rootlets.

Heuchera Americana Linn. Alum root, rhizome.

*Kalmia angustifolia Linn. Sheep laurel, leaves.

Liriodendron Tulipifera Linn. Tulip tree, younger bark.

Marrubium vulgare Linn. Horehound, herb.

Matricaria Chamomilla Linn. German chamomile, flowers.

Melissa officinalis Linn. Lemon. baln, herb.

Penthorum sedoides Linn. Virginia stonecrop, leaves and inflorescence.

Phoradendron flavescens (Pursh.) Nutt. Mistletoe, leaves and branches.

Phytolaceca decandra Linn. Poke berries.

Polygonatum biflorum (Walt.) Ell. Solomon’s seal, rhizome.

Polygonum hydropiper Linn. P. hydropiperoides Mich. and P. punc-
tatum Ell. Water pepper, herb.

Populus Balsamifera candicans (Ait.) Gray. Baim Gilead, buds.

Ptelea trifoliata Linn. Wafer ash, root bark.

50

Rhus glabra Linn. Sumach berries.

Rhus radicans Linn. Poison oak, leaves.

Rumex crispus Linn and some other species of Rumex. Yellow dock,
root.

Salix alba Linn. White willow, bark.

Salix nigra Marsh. Black willow, buds and bark.

Sambucus Canadensis Linn. Elder flowers.

Saponaria officinalis Linn. Soapwort, herb.

Scrophularia nodosa:var. Marylandica A. Gray. Figwort, herb.

Solanum Dulcamara Linn. Bittersweet, twigs.

Symphtum officinale Linn. Comfrey, root.

Trifolium pratense Linn. Clover (red), tops.

Viola Tricolor Linn. Pansy, herb.

Xanthoxylum Americanum Miller. Prickly ash, bark.

Zea Mays Linn. Cornsilk.

Chemical constituents but partially determined: physiological action

not systematically investigated or well understood:

Ailanthus glandulosa Desf. Ailanthus, bark.

Aletris farinosa Linn. Unicorn root, rhizome.

Borago officinalis Linn. Borage, herb.

*Cactus Grandiflorus Linn. Cactus grandiflorus, succulent branches.

Castalia odorata (Dryander) Woods and Wood. White pond lily,
rhizome.

Cimicifuga racemosa (Linn.) Nutt. Black cohosh, rhizome and root-
lets.

Citrullus vulgaris Schrader. Water melon seed.

Dioscorea villosa Linn. Wild yam, rhizome.

Erigeron Canadensis Linn. Flebane, leaves and inflorescence.

Fraxinus Americana Linn. American White ash, bark.

Hamamelis Virginiana Linn. Witch hazel, leaves and bark.

Iris versicolor Linn. Blue fiag, rhizome.

Juglans cinerea Linn. Butternut-root, bark.

Juglans nigra Linn. Black walnut, leaves.

Larix laricina (Duroi) Koch. Tamarac, bark deprived of corky layer.

Leonurus Cardiaca Linn. Motherwort, herb.

Liquidambar Styraciflua Linn. Sweet gum, inner bark.

31

Lycopersicum esculentum Miller. Tomato, herb.

Lycopus Virginicus Linn. Bugleweed, herb.

Nepeta Cataria Linn. Catnep, herb.

Q#snonthera biennis Linn. Evening primrose, herb.

*(inanthe Phellandrium Lam. Water fennel, seed and fruit.

*Peeonia officinalis Linn. Peony, rhizome.

Panax quinquefolium Linn. Ginseng, root.

Populus tremuloides Michx. and P. alba, Linn. White poplar, bark.

Prunus Persicaria (Linn.) Seibold and Zuccarina. Peach leaves.

*Ricinus communis Linn. Castor leaves.

Salix nigra, Marsh. Black willow, buds.

Solanum Carolinense Linn. Horse-nettle, berries and root.

Solidago Canadensis Linn. Solidago Canadensis, leaves and_ in-
florescence.

Urtica dioica Linn. Nettle root.

Verbascum Thapsus Linn. Mullein leaves.

Viburnum Prunifolium Linn. Black haw, bark.

Chemical constituents regarded well known; physiological action
uninvestigated:

Achillea Millefolium Linn. Yarrow, leaves and inflorescence.
Agropyrum graveolens Linn. Celery seed.

Asclepias Syriaca Linn. Silkweed, root.

Asparagus officinalis Linn. Asparagus, root.

*Carthamnus tinctorius Willd. American saffron, flowers.
Chrysanthemum Parthenium (Linn.) Pers. Feyerfew, herb.
Dicentra Canadensis D. C. Turkey corn, tubers.
Equisetum hyemale Linn. Equisetum hyemale, herb.
Hydrangea arborescens Linn. Hydrangea, roots.

Hypericum perforatum Linn. Jobhnswort, herb.

Mitchella repens Linn. Squaw: vine, herb.

Sabbatia angularis (Linn.) Pursh. Centaury, herb.

Solidago odora Aiton. Golden rod, leaves and inflorescence.

Chemical constituents but partialiy determined; physiological action
uninvestigated:

Adiantum pedatum Linn. Maiden hair fern, frond.
Agrimonia Eupatoria Walt. Agrimony, herb.

Ampelopsis quinquefolia Michx. American ivy, bark and small twigs.
Aralia nudicaulis Linn. American sarsaparilla, root.

Avena sativa Linn. Avena sativa, heads.

Calendula officinalis Linn. Calendula flowers and calendula herb.
Capsella Bursa-Pastoris Moench. Shepherd’s purse, herb.
Celastrus scandens Linn. False bittersweet, bark.

Chelone glabra Linn. Balmony, herb.

Collinsonia Canadensis Linn. Stoneroot, rhizome.
Epiphegus Virginiana (Linn.) Bart. Beech drops, herb.
Gnaphalium obtusifolium Linn. Life everlasting, herb.
Juglans nigra Linn. Black walnut hulls, epicarp.
Lacinaria spicata (Linn.) Kuntze. Button snake root, tuber.
Nepeta Glechoma Benth. Ground ivy, herb.

Ostrya Virginiana (Mill) Willd. Ironwood, heart wood.
Pimpinella Saxifraga Linn. Saxifrage, root.

Plantago major Linn. Plantain leaves.

Polymnia Uvedalia Linn. Bearsfoot, root.

Scutellaria lateriflora Linn. Scullcap, herb.

Spirea tomentosa Linn. Hard hack, leaves, ete.
Symplocarpus foetidus Nutt. Skunk cabbage, root stock.
Trillium erectum Linn. Bethroot, rhizome.

Viola pedata Linn. Violet herb, leaves, ete.

Chemical constituents undertermined; physiological action not sys-
tematically investigated or well understood:

Trifolium repens Linn. White clover, inflorescence.

Xanthoxylum Americanum Miller. Prickly ash, berries.

Chemical constituents undetermined; physiological action uninvesti-
gated:

/Hsculus glabra Willd. Buckeye, bark.

Aralia hispida Vent. Dwarf alder, root.

Betonica officinalis Linn. Wood betony, herb.

Cratzegus Oxycantha Linn. Hawthorn, “berries.”
Gentiana ochroleuca Freel. Sampson snakeroot, root.
Gentiana quinquefolia Linn. Five-fiowered gentian, herb.
Impatiens aurera Muhl. and I. biflora, Welt., herb.

Ligustrum vulgare Linn. Privet, leaves.

Nymphaea advena Soland. Yellow pond lily, root.

Polemonium reptans Linn. Abscess root, root.

Polytrichum juniperinum Hedwig.

Hairecap moss, entire plant.

Rubus strigosus Michx. Raspberry, leaves.

Senecio aureus Linn. Life root, entire plant.

Sorghum saccharatum (Linn.) Persoon. Broom corn, seed.

Stylosanthes bifiora (Linn.) B. S. P.

Stylosanthes, herb.

Verbena hastata Linn. Vervain, herb.

3—A. OF SCIENCE,

as)

Some Screntiric Aspects oF Tea DRINKING.

FRANK B. WADE.

An ancient beverage, and one now in more universal use than any
other, not even excepting beer, tea has many claims as a wholesome and
harmless adjunct to our meals.

Our English cousins, headed by that greatest tea merchant and good
sportsman, Sir Thomas Lipton, seem to have come to a better appvrecia-
tion of “‘the cup that cheers but not inebriates” than we in America have
arrived at. You remember that, in Pickwick Papers, Sam Weller fells
us that they drank tea until they ‘swelled wisibly.” Our English friends
at one time would even have compelled us to take to their favorite
beverage had not a party of well-meaning, but rather hasty, Yankees
dumped the first consignment of raw material into Boston harbor. Since
then we seem to have retained a rather illogical prejudice against an
excellent beverage.

Among its many virtues, not the least is that it supplies, in a harim-
less form, an adequate amount of water to the system. Physicians are
agreed that most of us habitually take too little liquid. Many functional
disturbances arising from this lack of water might be removed by acquir-
ing the habit of tea drinking. Another advantage to be derived from the
use of tea is in thereby obtaining water which is free from pathogenic
bacteria and which is partly softened by boiling. The sterilization of
the water and the remoyal of its “temporary hardness” are unmistakably
advantageous in places where there is any suspicion as to the purity of
the drinking water or where it is excessively hard.

To persons of sedentary life, with digestive powers not of the strong-
est, the simple physical advantage of the heat-content of the cup of tea is
probably of material aid in facilitating natural digestion. It also acts as
a mild stimulant, on account of the presence of the alkaloid theine. Any

reasonable use of tea is unlikely to cause serious reaction from this
stimulant, and the benefits upon digestion, of the cheerful state of mind

produced by it probably more than compensate for any drain produced by
it upon the nervous system. In case of personal idiosyncrasy toward tea
it should, of course, not be used.

56 :

The chief objection to the use of tea seems to me to arise not from
the theine content of the infusion, but from its tannic acid content when
not rightly prepared. As ordinarily prepared by estimable old ladies the
infusion of tea contains smail amounts of more or less volatile oil, a
small per cent. of theine, some coloring matter, and loads of tannic acid.
Last year my landlady happened to be both estimable and orthodox and
prepared my tea in the regulation fashion. In order to convince her of
the error of her ways I carried over a test tube of lead acetate solution
and, calling her attention to my cup of tea, I precipitated a heavy mass
of bulky lead tannate in my cup, much to her surprise. On being in-
formed that the result was due to the presence of tannic acid in the tea
she exclaimed, ““‘Why! I didn’t think my grocer would do such a thing!’
I think she never quite forgave that grocer even although I explained to
her that the tannic acid grew in the tea plant and that she herself
extracted it by long steeping. I had to get a tea ball and make my own
infusion at the table to get well-made tea. It is true they called me
“Miss” Wade after that, but I knew that the orthodox tea was fit only
to tan hides, and I had too much respect for my interior to continue
its use.

A short time ago a friend and I visited a celebrated local Chinese
tea shop in order to test the quality of the tea. While the genial pro-
prietor, Mr. Moy Kee, slumbered peacefully in his reclining chair my
friend and I spied out the land in the rear of the curtain partition. Upon
a lighted gas stove a blue granite ware tea kettle was boiling merrily.
The proper amout of tea was put in a vessel, the boiling water poured
over it and almost immediately poured off into the china teapot in which
it was served to us. I do not, myself, particularly like the flavor of
Chinese teas, but this tea was well made and very free from astringency.
We noticed upon the menu cards two interesting names of teas—‘‘Before
the Rain,” and “After the Rain.” I was ata loss to understand the der-
ivation of these names until next day at dinner, when, in discussing
her method of making tea with my new landlady she told me that her
method was just like Moy Kee’s and that she found it very economical,
as you could get an excellent second cup of tea from the grounds by re-
extracting them. I knew then that my first cup of tea had been “Before
the Rain” and my second cup “After the Rain.”

In order to show strikingly the difference in the tannic acid content
between tea prepared after the Chinese fashion of quick extraction by

37

boiling water and tea prepared by long steeping I secured ten samples of
tea in the open market and extracted 4 grams of each in #3 liter of
water by both methods. (See table and photographs.) In the quick ex-
traction process the half liter of boiling water was poured over the 4
grams of tea, allowed to remain 1 minute and then the infusion was
quickly strained into a clean flask. In the slow steeping process the half
liter of boiling water was poured over the 4 grams of tea and kept at
boiling temperature for about 5 minutes, then strained into a clean flask.
To each of the twenty infusions excess of lead acetate solution contain-
ing a few drops of acetic acid was added. In the ten flasks containing
quickly extracted tea scarcely any precipitate was found, while in the
ten flasks containing the same kinds of tea extracted by the longer
method very voluminous preciptates formed without exception. In other
words the tea made by the orthodox method of long steeping contained
vastly greater amounts of astringent material of the nature of tannic acid
than the other.

Many people habitually drink tea of this description and, having be-
come accustomed to it, do not like tea unless it is “strong enough to float
a flat iron.” That they enjoy a fair measure of health is only another
tribute to the enormous resistive powers of the cells of the stomach lining.
That many people are unable to drink tea of this type, and so do not drink
any, is, I believe, due to its tannic acid content, not to its content of
theine.

While most teas contain a slightly larger per cent. of theine than
coffee does of its alkaloid (caffeine), yet, when we consider the weight
per cup of dry material employed in making the two beverages, we see
at once that the alkaloid content of the cup of tea is really considerably
“smaller than that of the cup of coffee. A teaspoonful of tea is liberal
for one cup. The ordinary amount of coffee per cup is a tablespoonful.
The coffee is denser than the tea, so the relative weights of coffee and
tea per cup are about in the proportion of 5 for the coffee to 1 for the tea.
Three per cent. is a fair average for the theine in tea and 1 per cent. for
the caffeine in coffee, so the amount of alkaloid in the cup of coffee is
really greater than in the cup of tea, even if all the alkaloid is extracted
in each case. In reality the theine is not as completely extracted by a
one-minute exposure to boiling water as the caffeine is by the longer ex-
traction which coffee always receives. So the well made cup of tea is in
truth only a delicately flavored and colored cup of hot water.

3&

I think I may then conclude that tea, made by the method of quick
extraction with boiling water, affords a wholesome source of fluid to the
body while at the same time it gives, on account of its aromatic flavor
and slightly stimulating properties, a pleasure to its users which makes
it worthy of a far more extended use among us than it has yet reached.

TABLE I.
|
No. Name. Price. Taste. | Color.
1S inp tone NO. leer ce $0 60 | Mild and pleasant................ Black.
=Da | NiO. 1s ONCE WSOM saoes cohen alla esbetnetes| Woceiteloee . anteooeaican oc hacen eee
Silclmperigl.cccees ose ee 60 | Slightly aromatic, mild .......... Green.
4 | Gunpowder.............. 80 | Very aromatic, strong ............ Green.
5 | Needle Japan..;:......-. 80: |" Blatsastringentzces. so-che ss peeen | ab lacke
Gel FOolone theo ace €0)| Slicht’aromas..-..-.-. .:.c+ eases Black.
Wa) VounevHoyseneeeacoen nse 80: |cAromatic;mildcn.cs-. eee eee Green.
3c) Muaxed!iteatncase <a awoke a aces ATOMAtLC, INTC. steses.-e cores scores Black and Green.
Ov “HOTMOSE se naeeaors ces: 90 | Slightly aromatic, mild ......... Black.
|
10

Uncolored Japan........ 80 | Aromatic, slightly astringent.... Green.

*No.2 flask broke. Not shown in photograph.

Numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, reading from left to right.
Upper row in each picture shows result of long boiling.

Numbers 6 to 10, reading from right to left.

40

Tue Rapitum Cuock.

By R. R. RAMSEY.

R. J. Stutt (Phil. Mag. 6, 588, 1903) has devised a very simple hitle
device to show that a radium preparation takes on a positive charge due
to the B-rays. This consists of a radium preparation enclosed in a thin
walled glass tube. The tube is suspended in a vacuum tube by means
of a quartz rod. To the lower end of the tube a gold leaf is suspended,
forming an electroscope. The B-rays cause the tube to become positively
charged, the L-rays being absorbed by the glass, the leaves diverge, and
if the gold leaf is allowed to touch an earthed plate the charge is taken
off and the process of charging begins over again with a regularity which
stggests perpetual motion. The term radium clock has been suggested by
some one as a name for the device. It was the original intention to ex-
hibit one here today.

The only successful one which I have been able to make is the one I
had when the title was sent in. Since the period of this one is about 48
hours, I have concluded your faith would be tried as much with the
exhibit as without. However, the tube is on the table. It was my hope
to be able to make one in a neat, short tube with a quick period which
could be used in front of a lantern. To accomplish this 50 mg. of 10,000
activity radium was placed in the tube. The quartz was discarded and
the tube set upon a block of hard rubber in the bottom of a test tube,
with the gold leaf hanging alongside of the radium tube. When ex-
hibited to a vacuum of lower pressure than my first tube, the gold leaf
refused to move. The tube was prepared again with a quartz rod be-
tween the tube und the hard rubber. ‘This also failed to work. Since
the gold foil hung alongside the radium the B-rays were partially ab-
sorbed by the gold, thus neutralized the charge. At the last moment I
was forced to come back to the original form. This has failed to work,
probably due to dirt on the quartz rod. The essentials for success are
plenty of high activity radium, thin glass, containing tube hermetically

sealed, perfect insulation and a good mercury pump.

41

Tue Use or Peat as FuEt.

By BENJAMIN W. DOUGLASS.

Peat is that product of vegetable decay which we find composing the
soil of most of the swamps of temperate zones. We may expect to find
it any place where bog conditions exist. Europe, Asia and America con-
tain extensive bogs and it is estimated that the total area covered by peat
is many times greater than the total area of all known coal fields.

The peat bogs which occupy over 15 per cent. of the area of Ireland
have for centuries been the main source of fuel in that island. In fact
the term “peat” has become so intimately connected with Ireland that
popular fancy has imagined it to be characteristically and exclusively
an Irish product. As a matter of fact, a most incomplete survey indicates
that the peat fields of America exceed not only those of Ireland, but are
larger by nearly a hundred times than the combined bogs of all Europe.
Thousands of square miles of peat of the finest quality exist throughout
the Northern States and Canada. New England has whole counties of it.
The Great Dismal Swamp of Virginia is one continuous peat bed. New
York, Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, and the Great Northwest contain deposits
of peat, the value of which is as yet almost unsuspected. In the bogs
where it occurs it is a closely matted, felt-like substance, very fibrous
and usually very wet.

Just as coal and wood exist in many varieties, we find similar varia-
tions in peat. In general all peat may be classed under one of two
varieties: The black peats, which are composed of the bodies of grasses,
sedges, and other large plants, and the brown peats, formed from sphag-
num and other mosses. It is the latter variety which forms the immense
beds of North America, and for the purposes of this paper it wiil be
understood that we refer only to this brown form.

In its pure state peat contains only such inorganic matter as was
present in the bodies of the plants from which it was formed. Impure
peat may contain other inorganic matter, as sand, clay, silt which has
been washed in from adjacent hills, or deposited by the overflow of
streams, as the location of the swamp would indicate.

42

The use of peat as a fuel by no means limits its range of useful appli-
cation; ardent experimenters have found many ways of utilizing this
humble stuff.

Where thorough drainage is possible, peat lands have proven ex-
cellent for agricultural purposes, though in most cases requiring the
addition of considerable quantities of potash. As a fertilizer peat has
been demonstrated to possess decided value and is so used extensively
today. From the more fibrous peats an excellent paper is prepared, large
works in Germany being devoted to its manufacture. As a disinfectant

A typical Peat bog.

and deodorizer, powdered peat has been sold, under an assumed name,
for some years, and most excellent results have been obtained from it.
Indeed the range of possible use of this remarkable substance seems
almost limitless. It has been used as a substitute for charcoal in the
manufacture of fireworks, coarse heavy cloth has been prepared from it,
a recent patent claims its successful use as a substitute for papier-mache,
a serviceable cement has been made from its ashes, and within the past
year the agriculturists at an Indiana college have suggested the possible
value of peat as a stock food.

While the work of demonstrating these possibilities was necessarily
very great it has not been so extensive as the experiments which have
been made along the line of developing its use as a fuel.

43

Crude peat, cut from the bogs with spades and piled in the open to
dry, has fed the fires of peasantry in Europe for centuries. Extremely
light and spongy in character, burning slowly, with only a moderate
amount of heat and considerable smoke, it made a very poor fuel

The crude process of Peat mining as practiced in many European countries.

indeed. Its great bulk, its friable character and the readiness with which
it absorbed water, made the problem of transporting it almost insur-
mountable, even had there been a market for so crude a fuel.

As the European forests were destroyed or protected from further
destruction by the governments, wood as a fuel became scarce and the
price of coal arose accordingly.

44

As early as 1821 we find that German inventors had directed their
attention to the problem of compressing peat. It no doubt seemed a sim-
ple problem to those first experimenters, as it has to most of the in-
vestigators of more recent times, but it was nearly three-quarters of a

Block of Peat from the surface of a bog, showing the Sphagnum Moss.
(Naturai size.)

century before any practical process of briquetting peat was devised.

Early inventors, not unlike some later ones, thought that peat could be

condensed and dried by simple pressure. Hundreds of thousands of

dollars were spent in demonstrating the fallacy of this theory, a fallacy

that is self-evident when once the character of the material is fairly

understood.

45

As it comes from the bog, peat contains from 75 to 80 per cent.
water. The fibrous character of the substance prevents the remoyal of
this water by direct pressure and also accounts for the difficulty experi-
enced in drying the crude material by exposure to the air. Not only is
the moisture held between the fibres of the peat but it is contained in
the capillary spaces running through the fibres, and any successful
Erocess of fuel making must contemplate the destruction of the fibrous
nature of the material.

At present, investigators are working on two general processes for
the conversion of peat into a marketable fuel. The older of these meth-
ods may be called the wet process and consists in breaking and grinding
the wet peat until it loses its fibrous structure and becomes almost like
ciay in its plasticity. It is then moulded into blocks of convenient size
and allowed to dry spontaneously. In drying, the briquettes shrink to
about one-third their original size and become very dense and hard, and
when thoroughly dry contain only from 5 to 10 per cent. moisture. Crude
peat, that is, peat as it comes from the bog, can not be dried below about
20 per cent. moisture, owing to its fibrous nature.

Peat prepared in this general manner has long been a commercial
article in many European countries. Germany, Holland and Russia use
large quantities of it, and I am told that more than two million tons are
marketed yearly in Sweden.

Considering the progress which this industry has made in Hurope
it is surprising that America is only beginning to utilize the vast stores
of this fuel with which she is so richly supplied.

In the natural transformation of peat into coal (for coal is but an ad-
vanced condition of marsh mud) three fundamental changes take place:
the peat is dried, compressed and carbonized. It was an attempt to im-
itate this natural process which led to the discovery of another way of
making peat briquettes. In this “dry process,” as it is called, the peat is
first artificially dried and pulverized in machines constructed for that
purpose. This dry peat powder is then compressed under heavy pressure
into a hard and dense briquette. While this process produces a briquette
of excellent quality, no compressor has as yet been patented which is a
commercial success. The past few years have seen many dry peat-press-
ing machines offered on the market, all of which have failed either from

actual inability to do the work or from too great cost of operation.

46

Compared with coal, briquettes made by either of the above proc-
esses have many advantages to offer. Calorimetric tests show that con-
densed peat possesses a fuel value equal to the best coal, and practice
proves that this fuel is available under ordinary conditions of burning.
The best of coal contains slate, shale, iron and other clinker-producing
elements. Clinkers inhibit the supply of oxygen (air) and the carbon,
unable to burn, goes up the chimney in the form of smoke. On the other
hand, the very nature of its origin prevents the possibilty of clinker forma-
tion in a peat fire. The ashes of the new fuel, fine and soft as cigar ashes,
fall through the grate bars and allow a constant supply of fresh air to
pass through the fire, thus securing perfect combustion and practically
no smoke.

It has been urged against peat that it contained a high percentage of
ash-producing constituents. A marketable peat will contain from two to
ten per cent. of ash, pure coal from two to eight per cent. These are
the figures of the laboratory. As a matter of fact the average per cent.
of ash from a coal fire is from 20 to 35 per cent. and in it is contained
not only ashes and clinkers but also quantities of unburned coal—the
result of choked grate bars.

The almost universal absence of sulphur in peat renders it a far more
wholesome fuel than any of the soft coals. Indeed so mild is the smoke
produced from peat that it has been used in emergencies as a substitute
for tobacco.

In specific gravity, this condensed fuel will vary from about 1.10
to 1.65. In other words a ton of it will occupy about the same space as
a ton of hard coal.

While peat briquettes are not absolutely waterproof, they are rela-
tively so, for when once the fibre of the material is destroyed and it has
been allowed to dry, no amount of soaking will reduce it to its original
condition.

Recently some attempt has been made to combine peat with various
other substances. For one reason or another all of these mixed fuels
have failed. One of the most notable of these combinations uses a certain
proportion of crude petroleum. Asa result a pile of such fuel is constantly
liable to spontaneous combustion.

Mixtures of peat and anthracite dust have failed, owing to the neces-
sity of using an expensive “binder” to give the briquettes solidity. Aside

47

from their high cost, binders in fuel of this type have failed for two
reasons. The organic binders (as starch) burn more rapidly than the
fuel proper, and as a result much unburned matter falls through the grate
bars. On the other hand inorganic binders add so materially to the
resulting ash as to render their use impractical.

The most successful process of briquetting peat will be found to be
the one which is the least complicated, for simplicity will tend not only
to economical production but to practical operation as well.

In conclusion it is not too much to predict that the peat fuel in-
dustry in America will rival in magnitude the coal industry of today. It
is difficult 10 conceive of the importance which this industry must have in
the development of our great Northwest, but it is there, in a region
destitute of coal, though rich in every other respect, that we must expect
to find the first und most extensive use of peat fuel.

48 :

Tue Curonic Itt HeEattH or Darwin, HuXxLey, SPENCER, AND
FEORGE ELtior.

By RoBeRT HESSLER.

(Abstract.)

This paper was an inquiry into the chronic ili health of the individ-
uals mentioned in the title, based on a study of their life and letters, and
was illustrated by charts and diagrams. The paper was in line with
former ones read before the Academy, and showed how the influence of
city dust cropped out in the biographies of men and women.

The ability to live in a dusty city atmosphere differs greatly. Some
individuals are scarcely influenced by city dust, others are very suscepti-
ble and complain or suffer constantly. The list of disease and symptom
hames used, especially by Huxley, is suggestive of dust infection—the
symptoms subsiding on going away from the city and out into a good
atmosphere. The symptom names were shown in groups and their sig-
nificance pointed out. In a general way, living in a good atmosphere
meant health, while living in a polluted one meant ill health. Seeming
exceptions should be studied in the light of the experience of living indi-
viduals, susceptible to tne same influences. In a city the season of the
year and the direction and force of the wind have to be considered as
factors. The evil influence of the East Wind is frequently referred to; an
east wind means the blowing over of the dust and smoke from the heart
of the city. City dust may be brought to a country resident, as in a lot
of books from a city library; and where the books are read while in a
reclining position the evil influence of the dust may be quite marked.
A visit to a hall or room crowded with a mass of humanity may be fol-
lowed by an attack of ill health. Where the symptoms are more or less
continuous, nervous manifestations may predominate.

As a rule biographies dwell only lightly on the subject of health and
disease and references may be quite vague; the Life and Letters of
Huxley are an exception, and are worthy of a close study, especially by
those who are influenced by city dust.

THe Woop Pup Inpustry.

By M. D. RENKENBERGER.

Wood pulp and the wood pulp industry have come to their present
importance within the last twenty-five years. An increased use of paper,
of which wood pulp forms a large per cent., appears not only in news-
papers and all kinds of common papers but in the manufacture of many
useful and ornamental articles. This increased use of wood pulp in the
paper industry, together with the fact that the particular kinds of timber
used for pulp exist in limited amounts, makes it not only wise but abso-
lutely imperative that the matter of raising trees for pulp wood be con-
sidered. Unless, indeed, some substitute is found for wood pulp, this
matter must be taken up seriously in the States, and that within a very
few years.

The wood pulp industry first appeared as such in the census of 1870.
Since then the growth has been rapid and steady, the increase in the
value of raw material, for example, in 1980 being more than 59 per cent.
over the value of material consumed in 1890. The growth of our export
trade in paper and pulp stock has been steady and healthful, amounting
in 1900 to a total of $6,674,296, an increase of nearly 500 per cent. during
the decade. The grades exported are largely wood papers (especially
news), while the usual imports are of the higher grades of book and fancy
papers and specialties. The per capita production of paper has increased
from 8.1 pounds in 1860 to 56.9 pounds in 1900, the per capita value of
which is now over $1.66. One author claims that more wood is con-
sumed in the form of pulp by the great paper making establishments than
is used by the combined railway systems of our country.

The raw material for pulp comes chiefly from the spruce and poplar
of northern United States and Canada. At the enormous rate at which
this one industry is using up existing timber, to say nothing of the vast
drain made upon the virgin forests for lumber, fuel, etc., there will soon
come a time when either inferior grades will have to be used or a sub-
stitute be found. As yet few attempts have been made to raise trees for

pulp wood and as the consumption of wood for this purpose is enormous,

4—A. ortSCIENCR.

50

and as the virgin supply is limited, the writer sees no reason, in view of
the steadily raising price of pulp wood, why the growing of trees for pulp
can not be made a profitable business in forest culture.

HISTORICAL.

From the earliest Egyptian papyrus to the paper of today the predom-
inant characteristic is that it consists of the enduring portion of vegetable
growth known as cellulose or pure fiber. All parts of plants have been
usec for this purpose and a list of raw material used for paper would in-
clude linen and cotton rags, jute, hemp, esparto grass, wood pulp, clay,
straw, peat, cornstalks, and a half dozen others.

The discovery that wood could be converted into its component fibers
and freed from lignin, gums, etec., became the basis of modern paper mak-
ing and brought the wood pulp industry into prominence in a largely
forested country. The German process for making ‘‘ground wood” was
introduced into this country about the middle of the nineteenth century,
the soda process from England a century earlier, and the sulphite process
is an American invention of about 1867, and owing to its cheapness in
producing a strong cellulose fibre from spruce, its use has increased more
rapidly than that of the soda process. The first wood pulp made in this
country sold at 8 cents per pound; today the price of “ground wood” pulp
is about 1 cent per pound. The scarcity of rags and the cheapness and
abundance of the pulp supply in the great forests of spruce and other
woods caused the new material to be generally adopted. At first aspen
and basswood were preferred for paper making, but as the supply of these
woods was quite insufficient for the demand, coniferous wood was tried,
and spruce soon came into the first rank for the purpose. This wide-
spread demand, which has steadily increased, has been one of the chief
causes of the destruction of large areas of forests—forests, too, in which
no steps were taken toward reproduction either natural or artificial. In
North America during the three years ending in 1894, 200,000 acres of
forests had been denuded to satisfy the demands of 210 paper factories.

USES OF Woop-PULP.

The principal use to which wood pulp has been put is in the manu-
facture of the coarser kinds of printing, writing, and wrapping papers.
The use of the German process for making a ground wood fiber has
steadily increased, to a great extent superseding the use of rags, entirely

51

so in the manufacture of news and wall papers, very largely so in the
manufacture of book and wrapping papers and to a considerable propor-
tion in writing and other grades. In fact fifty per cent. of our paper is
manufactured from wood pulp.

Wood pulp is used for many other purposes besides paper making,
sometimes usefully, at other times with doubtful advantage. Such are:
the use of compressed pulp bricks for construction purposes; its use in
textiles such as silk and cotton; in panelings and interior house decora-
tions; in celluloid, surgical bandages, car wheels, pulleys, paper boxes,
pails, barrels, ete.; for filters in breweries and sugar factories; for fuel,
et«. As compared with paper making, however, these other uses of wood
pulp are only of subordinate importance and perhaps hardly consume one
per cent. of all the wood pulp thrown onto the market.

Raw MATERIAL AND PREPARATION.

The raw material of wood pulp is spruce, poplar, and in smaller
quantities various other woods such as balsam, hemlock, birch, according
to the location of the industry, the process employed, and the kind of
paper in which the material is to be used. The variety as to the kinds
of trees that have been used with varying success at various times and
places is extensive; such are soft pine (hard pine containing too much
resin), fir, spruce, balsam, hemlock, birch, large-toothed aspen, cotton-
wood, Carolina poplar, buckeye, basswood, box elder, quaking asp, beech,
bamboo, linn, willow, soft maple, catalpa and perhaps others—in fact
any tree can be used, it is merely a question of relative’ value and rela-
tive expense. The kinds of timber most largely used in pulp manufac-
ture are soft, easily worked, light both in weight and color, possessed of
long fibers, not fading easily, and containing little resin or other infiltra-
tions. It will be seen that spruce among conifers and poplar among broad-
leaved trees possess the requisite qualities in a remarkable degree. In the
United States spruce forms 76 per cent. of all wood for both mechanical
pulp and chemical fiber. Poplar being softer (and used most for soda
fiber) forms 12.9 per cent. of all woods consumed in making different
kinds of pulp. Other unspecified woods for pv!n or fiber make up the
remaining 114.1 per cent.

In the preparation of pulp, the wood should be worked up green and
the bark and defective parts must first be taken off. There are two
principal methods of reducing wood to pulp—the mechanical and the

Or

2
_

chemical. These two methods give different results as regards paper
manufacture, the product of the mechanical method, termed ‘‘paper pulp”
being more granular, whilst that of the chemical method, termed ‘“‘cellu-
lose,” is more fibrous, and hence stronger. In making the mechanical
pulp, the wood is cut into suitable lengths for grinding, the bark removed,
and the blocks held by hydraulic pressure against the edge of a rapidly
revolving sandstone and by attrition reduced to a mushy consistency.
The fiber as thus ground is passed through filterers of various fineness.
The fibrous mass is now brought to another machine, where the water is
pressed out, and it is cut into slabs, baled, and shipped to regular paper
mills without drying. The pulp so made is the basis of all lower grades
of paper. As already noted, the pulp industry has become an integral part
of the paper business, over half of the ground wood produced being made
into paper on the spot.

By the chemical process, which is more recent and more costly, but
which produces a much longer fiber, the finely ground wood fragments
are placed in large boiling tanks or digestors, lined inside with lead or
other acid-resisting material. Chemical pulp or “cellulose” is of two
kinds, depending upon the use of caustic soda (alkali) or calcium sulphite
(acid) to macerate the wood. It should be remembered that all chemical
processes of wood pulp manufacture are based upon the underlying
principle that the middle lamella and infiltrated material which sur-
rounds and holds together the individual fibers of wood is soluble and
produces a chemical reaction with certain aqueous solutions, notably that
of the bisulphite of lime. The problem is to apply the macerating liquid
under conditions which will completely and quickly eliminate the infil-
trated substances without unnecessarily weakening the fiber, and for this
purpose the solution must be applied at a high but carefully governed
temperature and under a mechanical pressure that will force the chemical
solution into every pore of the woody structure, thus permitting it to
attack the non-cellulose matter in which the fiber is embedded and by
which it is permeated. The matrix thus loosened and dissolved is re-
moved by washing with water.

Where sulphite of lime is used, the wood fragments are boiled in sul-
phurous acid from 24 to 60 hours under a pressure of about three atmos-
pheres. The soft, crumbling, reddish-yellow pieces are then pounded,
washed, filtered, and pressed into sheets about the thickness of paste-
board.

53

When soda is used, the woods employed are usually softer, of mel-
lower fiber, and without much strength. The process is similar to that of
sulphite, except that in place of sulphurous acid a solution of caustic soda
is used in the digestors. ‘There are various other methods by which at-
tempts have been made to separate the wood fibers, most interesting of
which perhaps is Kellner’s electrical process, in which the wood, boiling
in a solution, commonly salt, is subjected to electrical discharges. ‘The
value of this process has not been ascertained, however. Of all the
chemical methods in use the sulphite method is by far the cheapest and
most satisfactory.

CHARACTERISTICS AND ADVANTAGES OF WOOD-FIBERED PAPER.

Ground wood with an admixture of from 10-25 per cent. of the
chemical fiber is used for newspaper stock, wrapping paper, and for many
of the lower grades of book, magazine and writing papers. For the very
best grades of paper, whether for printing or writing, an admixture
of sulphite with rag pulp is necessary. For permanent records the author
is of the opinion that only rag pulp, and that of the best quality, should
be used. It is true that in from 15 to 20 years the “wood pulp” books,
papers, etc., will be greatly deteriorated and that for permanence some
other substance must be used. A writer in a recent number of the “Out-
look” suggests that publishing houses should print a special edition of
each publication on a special quality of durable paper, suitably resistant
both to chemical and mechanical wear and tear and thus preserve them
for posterity. Whether or not the people of our country are careless in
this matter, the fact remains that papers made from wood pulp and
especially mechanical fiber, are perishable, and that within a very short
time. Notwithstanding the great desirability for permanent copies of all
our good publications, the larger majority of printed matter will continue
to be discarded after the first reading—newspapers entirely so and
Magazines and even books to a large degree at least at the end of six
months or a year. It is quite probable that the same prodigality would
exist if our papers were made of the scarcer rag pulp, but wood pulp is
not only cheaper than pulp made from rags, but it takes impressions
better, wears out type less and decreases the possibility of spreading
contagious diseases.

FuTURE NEEDS AND POSSIBILITIES OF THE WOOD-PULP INDUSTRY.

Having given a more or less incomplete account of the production,
uses, supply. and present status of wood pulp let us now notice what this
enormous industry means to our limited forested areas. Some idea of
the rapid destruction of our spruce forests for pulp purposes can be got
from the following: “A prominent New York newspaper uses 150 tons
of paper daily. To produce this amount of paper 225 cords of spruce
wood are consumed. It requires 14 cords of wood to produce one ton of
paper pulp. As the spruce ordinarily occurs in our northern mountains
it averages about 5 cords to the acre.’ This means that every day, for
this one newspaper alone, 45 acres of our mountain spruce are being
consumed. Of course in the best spruce stands, such as those of Saxony
and Bavaria, where large quantities of spruce are raised for pulp, it
grows in dense, pure stands and yields many times as much as the average
acre in this country, at the lowest about 20 cords. Even at that a single
edition of a metropolitan Sunday paper would use up more than 10 acres
of the very best spruce stand.

And again, from the Scientific American of November 14, 1905: “It
has been estimated that nine novels had a total sale of 1,600,000 ccpies.
This means 2,000,000 pounds of paper. The average spruce three yields
a little less than half a cord of wood, which is equivalent to 500 pounds
of paper. In other words, these nine novels swept away 4,000 trees.
Is it any wonder that those interested in forestry look with anxiety upon
the paper mill?”

Paradoxical as it may seem however, in those countries that are
growing pulp timbers, the paper pulp manufacturer is the most powerful
ally of the forester in that he uses the thinnings of the forest which
begin while the forest is still young and continue throughout its whole
existence.

The situation of the pulp manufacturer is well given by one of our
most active foresters, John Gifford, who says: “The pulp manufacturer’s
plant represents the investment of perhaps a million dollars, while the
plant of the lumberman is worth only about ten or twenty thousand dol-
lars. The lumberman owns the land not for the land’s sake, nor for the
amount and quality of timber the land is capable of producing, but for
the crop which covers it. He buys it, uses it, and then abandons it.

He pays taxes on it only during the process of reduction. The pulp

55

man on the other hand, is tied to the soil. His heavy investment makes
him fearful as to future supplies. For this reason, with commendable
foresight, some of the pulp men are buying the land with the timber, and
are beginning to work the woods in such a way that future supplies may
‘be assured.” It is foolish to suppose that our natural forests under pres-
ent management and weak attempts at planting will furnish a supply of
pulp wood for the future use of the people. Extensive correspondence
with paper pulp manufacturers in several States, including Minnesota,
Wisconsin, Michigan, New York, Ontario, Pennsylvania, and Indiana,
reveals the fact that all agree that the supply of our best pulp timber
must shortly give out, but few consider the matter seriously enough to
suggest any definite plans or directions for the present. At this date,
however, the author is informed that the United States Forest Service has
begun the investigation of the wood pulp industry, but have not yet pro-
ceeded sufficiently far to warrant a report on the subject. Our own State,
too, according to the statement of the secretary of the State Forestry
Board, intends to demonstrate on the Forest Reservation in Clark County
that growing timber for pulp industries would be a profitable thing on the
cheap lands of the State. Indeed, land fitted for agricultural purposes
could not profitably be used for any branch of forest culture. Such waste
lands as could be profitably utilized in growing pulp wood exist in thou-
sands of acres all over our country. There are the numerous burnt-over
slash lands of our pine States; the arid wastes of many of our South-
western States; the unused agricultural lands of the New England States,
and the innumerable other tracts of unused, low-lying, light-soiled areas
throughout the valleys of the Missouri, Ohio and Mississippi rivers. As
nurse trees, in shelter belts, sand fixers, windbreaks, ete., trees which
make good pulp might also be grown.

In view of the facts: (1) that the demand for pulp timber has in-
creased wonderfully in the last few years, (2) that the price of raw mate-
rial, according to a well known authority, has increased 150 per cent.
within the last seven years, (8) that the native supply is limited and can
not last many years, (4) that the importable supply is inadequate in those
countries from which we could ship it profitably, and in countries such
as Canada, blessed with a great abundance of pulp timber, the prohibitive
tariff is so high (over $4.00 per cord) that we can not possibly afford to
have it brought in, (5) there is only a small probability that an abundant
and successful substitute can be found for the use of wood pulp in papers;

56

—in view of the above facts and of the abundance of unused land in our
country, the author is encouraged to believe that the time will soon come
when the growing of pulp timbers will be one of our recognized indus-
tries, and therefore has some hope of results from the application of the

following suggestions.

SUGGESTIONS, RECOMMENDATIONS, ESTIMATES, ETC.

Of the trees used for paper pulp, spruce, hemlock, and poplar are the
most. widely used and collectively furnish perhaps 90 per cent. of all
wood used either for ground wood or chemical fiber. Spruce is used
mostly for “ground wood” and sulphite pulp, forming as ground wood
aimost the entire substance in newspapers, and as sulphite fiber from
10 to 25 per cent. of the stock in the better grades of printing and writing
papers. Spruce now brings from $9 to $11 per cord, and as it is rapidly
becoming a substitute for pine, its value will rise. It is recommended
that spruce be planted either in pure stands or mixed with poplar or
hemlock on the numerous burnt-over, non-agricultural lands in our north-
central States. According to a paper manufacturer of competent author-
ity, the virgin spruce forests of northern New York which were cut over
from 20 to 30 years ago are now affording spruce trees from 12 to 20
inches in diameter and are being used for paper pulp with good results.

Hemlock, and especially the western hemlock, makes a good sul-
phite pulp, and, as the spruce supply fails, is steadily taking its place
not only as a lumber substitute, but, on account of its high cellulose con-
tent, in the wood pulp industry also. References to figures and state-
ments in well known publications will substantiate the statement that
the growing of spruce and hemlock for pulp wood on the available tracts
would be a profitable industry.

In this country the poplars furnish 12.9 per cent. of all woods used
for pulp of all kinds, being chiefly used for soda fiber mixed with from
10-20 per cent. of stronger pulp. Poplar pulp forms the chief material for
such papers as the Ladies’ Home Journal and Youth’s Companion. Sulphite
pulp alone would make too harsh a paper, while soda pulp alone would
make too weak a paper. Mixed together in the proper proportions, how-
ever, a paper characterized first by strength, second by softness and
delicacy is produced. The use of poplar for pulp is rapidly spreading in
the east-central States, great quantities being shipped in from the Caro-
linas and adjoining States. A forester of one State has recently said:

57

“Tf I could replace the maples in the State forest by poplars today I
would do it gladly. It would be worth thousands of dollars to the State.”
Considering the rapid growth and ease of propagation of the Populus
family, there seems ample excuse for estimating its probable success on
the cheap lands of our own State. In fact the author feels confident that
such trees as aspen, cottonwood, and its subvariety, Carolina poplar, can
not only be grown at a reasonable profit, but will make productive the
capital locked up in our low-priced, non-agricultural lands. The practica-
bility of planting depends upon the possibility of protecting the tand
and the return to be expected. The question of protection from insects,
stock, fire, etc., must be answered with respect to the individual case.
For the land which can be protected there remain to be considered the

cost of planting, the rate of growth, and the probable returns.

ESTIMATES OF COST AND RETURNS PER ACRE FOR COTTONWOOD.

The estimate following is intended to cover the cost and returns for
one acre of planted cottonwood on the cheap unused lands of Indiana.
Other members of the Populus family, such as aspen, may be planted on
waste areas with practically the same cost and yield. As cottonwood
does not form sufficient shade to keep out weeds and grasses, the Federal
Forest Service advises that the understory should consist of box elder,
hackberry, white elm, osage orange, or such shrubs as wild plum, choke
cherry, wild currants and gooseberries.

The cottonwood seedlings, preferably yearlings, or better, cuttings,
can be obtained cheaply from nurserymen or may be collected by the
planter from the sandbars along streams. The seedlings or cuttings
should be planted where they are to remain permanently. Planting is a
very simple operation. It may be advantageously performed by a man
and a boy working together. The man, by driving a spade into the
ground, makes a slit, into which the boy slips a tree behind the spade;
the man then withdraws the spade, trampling the soil about the tree as
he advances to plant the next one.

Cottonwood plantations should be protected for at least five years
from grazing animals, and five or six plowed furrows free from weeds
should be maintained around the grove to keep out fire. If the under-
growth recommended by the Forestry Service is not planted, cultivation
for two or three years will be necessary.

58

For the sake of definiteness, it is assumed that at the end of 20
years the stand will be sold on the stump for pulp wood. Indiana waste
land suitable for such purposes is classed as worth perhaps $12 per acre,
although the author is informed that many tracts in Greene, Monroe,
Brown, Lawrence, Owen and southern Putnam and Park counties can
be bought for less than $12 per acre. For purposes of taxation, the
forestry law of 1899 appraises such land at $1 per acre, making the taxes
practically nil. It will require 680 seedlings to plant the acre at a dis-
tance of 8 by 8 feet. The cost of these is estimated at $2. After the land
is cleared, at the end of 26 years, the value doubtless will be as great as
at the beginning, but the value of the land is not taken into consideration.
Should $12 be added to the $120 which it is estimated could be secured
for the timber product, it would simply increase by that amount the
profits of the transaction. The statement following shows the items and

amount of the investment for one acre:

Expenses on 1 acre for 20 years—

Gost -Of Seen eS. ee Sere esis rare are a eet s eae DRO
Gost-of iransplanting-ab-o4-50 per OU08 -— <2 oe 3 06
Vialire Ole san sy ka crac i chore ihc lenenen te see iare eetea deer ier nee are dete 12 00
DAK CS UA be ple) apelin pe OO tere ner teeta wise ter meee 36
Cultivation for 2 Uy Catsiccc ys oes sew eis os crtes erences sere 2 40*

OLE sea Sass he Oe eo LOG

At the age of 20 years the average cottonwood is 14 inches in diam-
eter with a height of 50 feet. Studies made by the Forestry Bureau on
cottonwood as a planted forest have shown that the yield in average
cases has been at least 30 cords per acre in 20 years. Other practical
foresters would harvest the crop in 10 or 12 years, thus securing less
cords per acre, but owing to the shorter period of investment a higher
annual per cent. on money invested. Under the 20-year plan, the 30 cords
would sell on the stump at not iess than $4 per cord, bringing $120.
Deducting from this sum the amount at 8 per cent. compound interest,
$35.87, there remains $84.13 as a return on the investment over and above
that received from a 3 per cent. compound interest loan. This is equiva-
lent to a return of $4.20 per year from the time of planting to the time

* This expense may be eliminated if cover is planted as recym mended above.

59

of cutting, a very satisfactory return considering the fact that it is
secured from land which is practically useless for any other purpose, and
which without a timber crop would be a source of constant expense for
taxes. The pulp wood crop not only gives a fair margin over and above
ordinary investments but it makes productive the capital locked up in the
land.

In this estimate the cost is the record of actual facts; the assessed
valuation, such as could be obtained under the present forestry law of
Indiana; the rate of interest, the average per cent. that money returns
to its owner above taxes; the rate of growth, the average of planted cot-
tonwood in the Mississippi Valley and the price less than that which has
already been received where fair access was haa to market.

Since the estimate is based upon present conditions, it more nearly
applies to a plantation established 20 years ago, and to be marketed now,
than to one established now and to be marketed 20 years in the future.
Wood prices, according to B. E. Fernow in the Forestry Quarterly, vol.
III, No. 1, have steadily risen and are now rising much faster than in the
period before 1890. This same authority says further that the rate of in-
crease in wood prices in general will be at least at the rate of 2 to 3 per
cent. per annum for the next 20 years. This means that the return on the
investment would be proportionately greater.

Besides the financial advantages from raising pulp trees, the general
advantageous influences incident to forested areas would be more largely
secured and our State would be more diligently doing her share towards
the proper reforestation of areas which should naturally be in forest.
The progress is encouraging, investigations are being made and many
others are being planned. Both pulp men and foresters are taking an
increased interest in the matter, and in many other ways the indications
are that the industry of growing pulp wood will eventually occupy a
prominent place among the profitable employments in the States and
Provinces bordering our Great Lakes.

At this point the author wishes to express his indebtedness to the
botanical department of Wabash College for substantial aid in collecting
statistics and in numerous other ways materially assisting in the prepara-
tion of this report.

Crawfordsville, Dec. 1, 1905.

i el

pi teat:

*
As

ake
ame

re Ss

hee hs ee

on ;
mag ci Ws She araal

cf: We Tere pe ae o F

wry

as

yy ti . sey
r Ai rie ae hie .
; S i i
Ene. = ts Sg ES Is
a a SMe den Sth
AE 2 ais)
z : 5
. > i er
oes axe
i
rT c
‘
‘ a : .
- Per Atte
= we oe a
f: le
= aoe z
a
-
se Kass
=f.
of t
ve ;
r ;

Be har $ hatuel te

ve fr

‘s -
io” "
a] *
wa
<3
4358 yaee
.
ate
ort
ee ;
y,

koe lk pare ¥ eae ee bic’ Eee = epee
Ad ie a Gene pene: a
tie
: ane SETA e sot mel AS HX.

61

Notes AND PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE DEVELOPMENT OF A BUZZARD.

By D. W. DENNIS AND W. C. PETRY.

Throughout southwestern Ohio and southeastern Indiana the turkey
buzzard, Cathartes aura, is a common bird, but the nests are seldom
found. Accordingly we were glad to learn in April, 1905, that during
each of the preceding four summers a pair of these birds had nested
only a few miles away. We expected that the nest would be again used,
and on the 22d of April visited the place; we found that two eggs had
been laid and that incubation was in progress. The bird on the nest
hissed when approached, and would not leave the nest until forcibly dis-
turbed; she then ran out and flew away, but soared about overhead until
we went away, when she almost immediately returned to the nest.

This nesting site is about four miles east of New Paris, Ohio; it is
near a small creek and in a very hilly country. It is at least a half mile
from any house or highway, on the edge of a rather open woodland. The
nest itself was in a hollow sycamore log (Fig. 1) nearly five feet in diam-
eter at the butt; the cavity extends back about eight feet, where it has
a diameter of about two feet, and there it terminates abruptly. This
cavity contained a quantity of dirt and rotten wood, but nothing from
which to make a nest had been carried in. A hollow had been scratched
in the debris at the extreme end of the cavity and the eggs laid in it.
They were rather conical in shape, a little larger than a hen’s eggs, and
were white, splotched with brown.

On May 17th both eggs hatched. The young birds were very helpiess;
they could not stand in an upright position for about three weeks. That
part of the head and neck usually bare in buzzards and a line down the
center of the throat and breast were bare. The bill was very large and
its tip was sharply hooked. After the young were hatched the old birds
were never seen about the nest, though they were frequently seen “ooz-
ing” around overhead.

We were unable to learn when the young were fed. On May 27th we
went with a party of students to examine and photograph the birds and

62

nest. After photographing the nesting place (Fig. 1) the camera was
placed in the end of the log and a flash light of the young birds in the
nest was secured (Fig. 2). The birds were then removed from the nest,
photographed at closer range a number of times (Fig. 8), and replaced
in the nest. They offered no resistance whatever and seemed little if at
all frightened.

On June 3d and June 9th other photographs (Figs. 4 and 5) were
taken. The birds had by this time become larger and much more active
than before; on the latter date when they were placed in the end of the
log they at once hurried to the darkest corner. Also on this latter date
they first attempted to defend themselves by vomiting up a portion of
their food. It may be easily guessed that this is a very efficient means of
defense.

On June 18th, when we next visited the nest, we found but one bird
in it. The tenant of the farm afterward told us that several days before
he had noticed that one of the birds was dead and had removed it from
the nest. The remaining one was in no way injured and we were unable
to learn what had killed the other. We removed and photographed the
living one (Fig. 6). At this time, 32 days after hatching, the black pri-
maries and tail feathers were beginning to appear but were not conspicu-
ous enough to show in the photograph.

By July ist the black primaries had become very noticeable, as
shown by Fig. 7. When the bird had been pulled to the end of the log
with a stick, it was usually seized by the tips of the wings and carried
out to the front of the camera, which had previously been set up in a
suitable place. When it had been set down it would always stretch its
wings to their full extent before folding them. Figure 8, taken when the
wings were thus extended, shows well the black feathers in the hack.
wings and tail.

Figs. 9 and 10, taken July 9th, and July 15th, respectively, show the
gradual change from white to black. By the latter date the back had
become almost entirely black, but the breast and belly were still pure
white. The bill had become more slender and more sharply hooked. The
bird would now strike vigorously with its bill at anything that dis-
turbed it.

Fig. 11 was taken July 23d. This was 67 days after hatching; the
wings and back were entirely black and there were many black feathers

65

on the breast and belly. The head was bare with the exception of short
down on the back part. The bill was still of a dark color, though chang-
ing toward reddish.

On July 30th, when we returned, the bird was in the stump at the
butt end of the log; it was easily caught and placed in a position favor-
able for photographing, when suddenly it sprang off the log and flew
away; its flight was difficult and at no time more than 20 feet above the
~ ground; after flying about 100 yards it alighted on a fence; we at once
followed it with tbe camera, hoping to get close enough to get a good pic-
ture, but whenever we approached within about 50 feet it would again
fly. We finally secured a picture (Fig. 12) at about 40 feet distance. At
this time, 74 days after hatching, the bird was almost entirely black, and
fully as large as an adult bird; a little of the white down still remained
on the sides, about the neck and legs and on the under sides of the wings;
from a distance one would have been unable to distinguish it from an
adult.

66

. | | 69

OBSERVATIONS OF THE TOTAL SoutaR Eciipse oF Auvaust 30TH,
1905.

By Joun A. MILLER, INDIANA UNIVERSITY.

Early in the year 1905 the Observatory of Madrid published detailed
information regarding the eclipse that was to occur on August 350th of
that year. Among other things this “Memoria” contained the results of
a long series of observations of the prevailing meteorological conditions
of many stations well distributed along the path of totality in Spain.
The state of the sky in the immediate vicinity of the sun had been ob-
served daily from 12:30 to 1:30 p. m. (the time at which the eclipse oc-
curred) from the 15th of August till the 15th of September. The results
of these observations, as well as the data gathered by the regularly estab-
lished meteorological stations, touching the mean relative humidity, mean
temperature, the velocity and direction of the prevailing winds, etc., had
been tabulated. From these data it appeared that the probability of clear
weather in the eastern half of the belt was exceptionally large, and
indications for good eclipse weather were perhaps best in the regions near
Ateca, Almazin and Daroca. The eastern half of the belt of totality in
Spain held about 50 eclipse stations, established by astronomers from
every nation of Europe, from the United States, and Mexico. The Lick
Observatory expedition was located near Ateca; the United States Naval
Observatory at Daroca. The observers from IWirkwood Observatory,
Indiana University, Bloomington, Indiana, chose Almazin, Spain a
small town northeast of Madrid in the Province of Soria. The approx-
imate position of this station is longitude—13 m. 56 sec. W. of Greenwich,
latitude—41° 10’.

The party consisted of Professor W. A. Cogshall, of Indiana Univer-
sity; Messrs E. C. Slipher, I. A. Cruli, and C. J. Bulleit, students of the
university: Professor A. F. Kuersteiner, Mrs. Miller, and myself. We
were assisted in the manipulation of our instruments on the day of the
eclipse by Mr. and Mrs. Charles W. Thompson of California, and Senores
Louis Nebot, Francisco Jodra, Victor Jiemenez, and Esteban Milla, of
Almazan.

-~I
bo

The obscrvations planned were: (1) Photographs of the corona; (2) a
photographie scarch for intra-mercurial planets; (8) a photograph of the
spectrum of each of the flashes, and a photograph of the spectrum otf the
corona during totality.

For photographing the corona we used four different cameras. The
first was a ‘‘tintype” lens kindly loaned us by Mi. Spratt of Bloomington.
It has an aperture of two and one-half inches and a focal Jength of eight

inches. Three plates were exposed in this camera and on them we hoped

Fig. I. The Polar Axis Carrying the Short Focus Cameras.

to get long, faint coronal streamers. The second was a portrait lens of
the Petzval pattern, of five inches aperture and focal length twenty-eight
inches. This is an exceedingly good lens and gives superb definition over
a small area and is very rapid. In this camera we exposed five plates,
varying the exposure from two to 84 seconds, hoping to get detail of the
outer corona and in the longer exposures to detect the presence of faint.
streamers. The lens of the third camera is the visual objective of the old
telescope used by the late Professor Kirkwood and others for many col-

lege generations. Its diameter is three and one-half inches and its focal

73

length fifty inches. In this camera we exposed four plates. These three
cameras, together with a spectrescope, were mounted on a wooden polar
axis that was built at the camp.

The objective of the fourth camera has a diameter of nine inches and
a focal length of 60 feet. This lens Was constructed by Mr. O. L. Petit-
didier. The front lens is of the ordinary crown glass, and the back lens
of a boro-silicate flint. Quoting Petitdidier from a letter to the writer:
“rom the point of view of constants they (the pieces of glass) leave
nothing to be desired, as the proportional dispersion is practically the
same in all parts of the spectrum, so that we should have a perfect
achromatic.’ When the samples of the boro-silicate came, however, it
was found that it had a decidedly yellow tinge. It was found also that
its composition was unstable, and that it oxidized very rapidly in the
presence of moisture. After a conference with Mr. Petitdidier, however,
we decided to have our lens made of the boro-silicate flint, and to seal it
in an air-tight box as soon as it was finished, and to open the box only
a few days before the eclipse. Petitdidier had much difficulty in polishing
the lens, owing to the fact that it oxidized so rapidly. He found after
much experimenting, a solution that would remove the oxidation without
affecting the surface. Jt was with some misgiving that we shipped the
lens, but we found on opening it that it had not tarnished in two months,
and the surface on the day of the eclipse was as perfect as the day the
lens was finished. The air was very humid on the days following the
eclipse, and the boro-silicate flint had begun to tarnish slightly when the
lens was packed for shipment home.

This camera was mounted horizontally and fed with a coelostat. A
light-tight tube, the outer and inner walls of which were of white canvas
and building paper respectively, and which were separated four inches,
led from the objective to a dark room in which the plates were exposed.
Neither the plates nor the lens was in contact with the tube. The entire
instrument was covered with an A tent of white canvas. The plate-
holders containing the plates were fastened to a large hexagon, which
the operator could revolve at will upon an axis which was parallel to the
earth’s axis. It was provided with a stop which enabled the operator to
bring the plates for the successive exposures quickly and accurately into
position. All the slides had been drawn from the plate holders before
totality began. The hexagon as well as most of the mechanical parts of

74

the coelostat, were designed and constructed by Professor Cogshall.
Six exposures were made in this camera, of duration one-half second, two
seconds, forty seconds, one minute, fifteen seconds, and one-half second.
The plates used were Seed’s 27, gilt edge, heavily backed.

If there be intra-mercurial planets, and if they, as do all other bodies
of the solar system, move in the plane of the equator of the body around
which they are revolving, and, if they are from the sun about the distance

Fig. Il. General view of the camp. Intra-Mercurial cameras to the left. the sixty-foot
camera in the center and short focus cameras to the right.

required by Bode’s Law, the major axis of their apparent paths as seen
from the earth on the day of the eclipse should have subtended an angle
of 23° and the minor axis about 3°. We decided to photograph this region
in duplicate. For this purpose we used six cameras of 136 inches focal
length, four of which had an aperture of 84 inches and were made by
Petitdidier, and two of which had an aperture of 3 inches. These were
built by the Alvan Clark and Sons Corporation. These lenses were cor-
rected for the minimum focus “# 4750, which is well within the region
for which the Seed 27 plates, which we used, are most sensitive. AJ

m3)

the cameras were mounted on the same polar axis. They wete mounted
in pairs, each pair covering in duplicate six and one-half degrees, so
that the three pairs covered in duplicate a region along the sun’s equator
twenty degrees long and six degrees wide. By a series of experiments
we had found that a plate exposed in one of these cameras for three

minutes and forty-five seconds, at a time when the sky was as dark as

Fig. Il]. The coelostat and nine-inch lense of the sixty-foot camera.

it was estimated it would be at the time of totality though fogged some-
what by the skylight would show more and fainter stars than if exposed
for a shorter time. We had made exposures varying from one to four
minutes in the vicinity of Regulus when it was near the meridian begin-
ning when Polaris was just visible to the unaided eye. We decided to
expose the plates for the intra-mercurial planet for thrve minutes and
twenty seconds.

76 ! p , ;

The weather on the day of the eclipse was disappointing. For two
hours before totality the entire sky was covered by light, though un-
broken, clouds. At the time of totality, however, the clouds in the im-
mediate vicinity of the sun appeared to break away, and the inner corona
shone through light, drifting clouds. No clear sky was visible, however,
within several degrees of the sun, neither Mercury nor Regulus could be
seen from this station. During the morning a moderate wind prevailed,
the general direction being W. N. W. The first contact was, neglecting
seconds, at 11:41. The weather conditions during the eclipse, as observed

and recorded by Mr. Thompson were as follows:

Local M. Time. Temperature. aa of

McAleer ee ence nee, Hirsticontacteslmeocaasertoneeee Very slight wind.
TOO eee oa an ee eed |, Le) 18o5 ees N.W. Very slight wind.
1 DAS ees ee Ser einaho Mano on csadonads 18.2 N.W. Very slight wind.
1 L-D8 {eae eesinrtannertcs Goncooeae 17.1 W.byS. Wind dying away.
NDAD) scenes seat aac Mie mem acai 16.1 No wind.
1 ONG aanonantom sarin ibalcucocha toned Totality — began. No wind.

1 Rs Reeeeeses WarmtsernnceColataeac Totality ends. No wind.

LOG set ceive cope otentesvecisob ie tactcleeicte 15.0 Ss. W. Very slight wind.

1 Geena Daaic doasctecobbcsecauene 15.0 W.

nS scdodGnac acc secu aor aonpanaroaads 15.5 Ww.

1245 os secs Sas cpeesoancm erst seesk = 16.0 W.N.W. Wind increasing.

2:00 ee eecac ec aasctee co pasecasmien celee 16.5 W.N.W. Brisk wind.

0) Leap as casero Sobcronoane SC ace uaoIgaoE 17.2 W.by N. Brisk winds.

Ds Dileereayaisverstcin seek cae eee mateioeeeeeer Kclipse ends.

Considering the weather conditions, our plates are very satisfactory.
The shortest exposure, showing the prominences, suffered very little.
The very bright group on the eastern edge of the sun is particularly well
defined, and the negatives made of it with the long-focus camera hold a
wealth of detail. The longer short exposures with the long-focus as well
as the short-focus cameras show considerable coronz detail, while the
longest exposures have that part of the corona uncovered by the clouds
much overexposed, while the clouds made it impossible to register any
extended streamers. All the plates lack the definiteness that would have

77

resulted from good seeing. The longest extension of the corona that we
obtained was about three-fourths the sun’s diameter.

The exposures of one-half second with the 60-foot lens showed the
prominences overexposed, while the exposure of two seconds was too
short to register more than a suggestion of the inner corona. The ex-
posures given in the 50-inch camera, viz., 24 seconds, 29 seconds, 184 sec-
onds, and 25 seconds, were about right, and the results obtained with this

Manuel, The Carpenter.

lens are more satisfactory than any others with the short-focus lenses.
The exposures given in the portrait lens, viz., 2, 24, 29, 84, and 16 sec-
onds, were too long. All plates exposed except the fourth in the portrait
lens, which was a lantern slide, were Seed 27, and all were heavily
backed to prevent halation. Of the small cameras the negatives of por-
trait lens, suffered most, because the part of the corona that we hoped
they might contain was covered by the clouds. The negatives made with
the fifty-inch camera are particularly good and hold a wealth of complex
detail. An examination of these negatives shows that the coronal strue:

78 os

ture is more complex than in 1900. In particular that the polar streamers
instead of being radial, are bent and interlaced, and in every case long
coronal streamers are above the prominences.

The plates exposed for the intra-mercurial planets are heavily fogged,
as one would expect from a sky covered with bright clouds, but not so
badly as to obscure faint star-images. I believe that a plate of the sen-
sitiveness of the Seed’s 27, which we used, can be exposed three minutes

Fig. IV. The Intra-Mercurial PlanetiCameras.

without serious fog at a time of a total solar eclipse. Our sky was so
cloudy that it is unreasonable to expect star-images on these plates.
We examined two of them hurriedly (the ones on which Regulus should
have appeared), but found no star-images. The photograph of the corona
on one of the intra-mercurial plates showed longer extension than on any
other plate we exposed—due perhaps to the shifting of the clouds during
the long exposure.

The corona impressed me as being brighter than in 1900. The effect

on the clouds of the light from the eclipsed sun was peculiarly striking,
and from a spectator’s point of view was very beautiful.

79

The indescribable deep blue of the great clouds, bordered with what
any one but an eclipse observer would call a silver lining, was totally
unlike anything I have ever seen, and was strikingly beautiful.

The expedition is under many obligations. The Indiana University,
The Indianapolis News and the Reader Magazine bore the expenses of the
expedition. While the authorities of the university and the managers of
the News gave kindly counsel and aid, Professor Cogshall, conjointly with
the writer, worked incessantly for the success of the undertaking from the
beginning to the end. Messrs. Slipher, Crull and Bulleit. were with us
three weeks before the eclipse occurred and rendered daily and indispens-
able assistance; while the entire staff of observers contributed materially
to the success of our plans. The Spanish government admitted our in-
struments free of duty, the alcalde (mayor) of Almazéin rendered timely
and efficient aid in the selection of the site for our camp, and in the pro-
tection of our instruments. Benj. H. Ridgely, American Consul-General
at Barcelona, manifested in every way a kindly and. intelligent interest
in the work of the expedition.

Corona of August 29, 1905, exposure,in the Kirkwood 50-inch camera, magnified.

81

Treevevint Factors In BrraANGENTIALS OF PLANE ALGEBRAIC
CURVES.

By U. S. Hanna.

Three years agoI presented a paper to the mathematical section of the
Academy dealing with the proof of a formula used by Mr. Heal in an ar-
ticle published in the Annals of Mathematics, vol. VI, page 64. This
formula was used by Heal in freeing a bitangential of the plane quintic,
which he had developed in a previous paper in the Annals, vol. V, page 33,
from an irrelevant factor, the square of the hessian of the quintic. Since
then I have continued the study of the subject and wish to present an in-
teresting result in the light of Heal’s work.

Taking the general equation in the symbolic notation

(a1 X1 ++ a2 X2 —— a3 x3)" = ax” = bx®9 = C7 —=--- = O,7..... (1)
for the n-ic and deriving the first polar, with respect to the n-ic, of any
point y, we have
(a1 X1 + ag X2 + as Xs)""! (a1 yi + ae ye + as ys) = ax™ 1 ay —0,....(2)

Any point on the line through the points x and y may be represented
by 4x + y, where 4 and have a fixed ratio for any particular point. If
x be a point on the n-ic and y be a point on the tangent to the n-ic at the
point x, then we have equations (1) and (2) satisfied by the points x and
y respectively, and equation (2), as an equation in y, represents the tan-
gent to the n-ic at x. If, in addition to these conditions, the point

2x + my lie on the n-ic, we must have from (1)
n
[Paxtuy | = (Aax + pay)" = 0,

from which, by virtue of (1) and (2), we get

2 Se ») axr 2 ay? ,n-2 + n(n - (n 2) Axh-3 ay? ,n-3 Le ote 2 sis +-
naxay™ | Ayn -3 + ay" po == (0) ane (3)

Equation (3) is an (n-2)-ic in 2 and » which gives the positions of the
remaining n-2 intersections of the tangent to the n-ic at x with the n-ic
itself. In order that this tangent be a bitangent the discriminant of equa-
tion (3) must vanish. This discriminant is a function of x and y, and if y

6—A. OF SCIENCE.

82

can be expressed in terms of x, then the discriminant becomes a bitan-
gential of the n-ic. It has been shown by Jacobi and Clebsch that this is
always possible.

We shall write equation (3) as

Ap 22-2 + (n — 2) Ay AB3 pp + (n — “ & =a) Ao An-4 2 4 «-.

(n — 2) An-3 uns + An-2 nes =O, ... (4)

where we have

n (n — 1) UGE 1)
Ao = = ae ax" 2 ay2, Ar = ee agt B gy, 2---:
mG) =e 4
— E Se T42.
“= GEHG+2) =

If equation (4) is a quadratic, that is, if the n-ic is a quartic, the dis-
criminant of (4) is
4
—_— A? (Ao Ae — Ai?) = O,
and after y is expressed in terms of x there is no irrelevant factor.
If the n-ic be the quintic, the discriminant of (4) is

27 2 3h a——
Se - 4 Hs) = O,;

where we put H — Ao Ao— A? and G= A? A;—3 Ao Ai Ao + 2 A}, and the
y can easily be expressed in terms of x for the functions G and H, but the

result contains the square of the hessian of the quintic as an irrelevant
factor. This factor can be discarded without difficulty by putting

G?+4H3= Aj | (Ao As SAS IAG) =A AA An (a &s— ap |,

and then expressing y in terms of x for each parenthesis separately.
If the n-ic be the sextic, the discriminant of (4) is

*o° (3 — 2732) = O,

where I — Ao Ay —4 A Ai, Az + 3A2 and A? J = Ao HI — G? — 4H*.

There is no difficulty in expressing y in terms of x for the function I,
and therefore, by multiplying and dividing the discriminant by A§, we
can immediately write a bitangential of the sextic by substituting the re-
sults obtained for the quartic and quintic in

256 {

6 T 7 ~j ' ) ps
Alz | Ao T3 — 27 (Ao HI — G? — 4H*) j == (0):

83

But this bitangential of the sextic contains the sixth power of the
hessian of the sextic as an irrelevant factor. In order to free it from this
factor, we put

J = (Ao Az — A?) As — (Ao As — Ai Az) As + (Ai As — A?) Ag,
and then express y in terms of x for the function J. The work involved
in this last step is very long and tedious. These results can be used in
developing a bitangential of the septic, but two additional functions
will have to be developed, the work in which is almost beyond the range
of possibility.

SES

Paha 5 als Bt ; Be on ae

HRY aa

; 85

On THE WEATHERING OF THE SUBCARBONIFEROUS LIMESTONES OF
SOUTHERN INDIANA.

By E. R. Cumines.

The subearboniferous (Mississippian) limestones of southern Indiana
comprise three formations known in the ascending order as the Harrods-
burg, Salem (Bedford) and Mitchell limestones, and having a combined
thickness of at least 350 feet. These rocks are in the main very pure car-
bonate of lime. Some shaly layers are to be found in the Harrodsburg
and Mitchell limestones which may contain very little lime; and the
Harrodsburg is rather lower in the per cent. of lime carbonate than the
other two formations. Analyses of the Salem limestone show from 97.9
per cent. to 98.4 per cent. CaCo,, with the baiance consisting of magne-
sium carbonate, and oxides of iron and aluminum, with traces of silica
and other substances. Analyses of Mitchell limestone show from 96.65
per cent. CaCo, to 99.04 per cent., with the balance consisting of mag-
nesium carbonate, iron, aluminum, and silica as in the Salem limestone.
Satisfactory analyses of the Harrodsburg limestone are not at hand. Of
these limestones the Salem is the most constant in composition and is on
the average the highest in per cent. of CaCo,.

In texture the three limestones vary widely. The Harrodsburg is
rather thin bedded, coarse-grained, fossiliferous, in some cases decidedly
crystalline in structure, and contains geodes abundantly, in the lower por-
tion especially, and bands and knots of chert. There are layers and
lenses of shale. The Salem limestone, on the contrary, is, as is well
known, almost without bedding planes. It is a massive, odlitic or gran-
ular-crystalline, close-grained rock frequently cross-laminated and quite
free from geodes and chert. Its fossils are usually minute, foraminifera
and small ostracods predominating. The Mitchell limestone is in the
main thin-bedded, hard, fine-grained, sometimes almost lithographic, with
frequent alternations of shaly layers. It is in general unfossiliferous.
Bands and knots of chert are very common, but geodes are infrequent.

All these limestones are conspicuously jointed. The Mitchell shows
the cleanest and most numerous joint planes; but the best examples of

86

deeply opened joints are to be found in the Salem. The joints run
nearly east and west and north and south. In other words, one set runs
with the dip, and the other with the strike. The dip joints are the most
conspicuous.

The weathering of these limestones does not differ in essential fea-
tures from that of limestones in general, except as it is influenced by
local conditions of temperature, rainfall and drainage, and by the ex-
ceptional purity of the rocks. It is to be expected that a nearly pure
carbonate of lime, in a region of rather copious rainfall and mild climate
would weather almost entirely by solution and other chemical processes,
rather than by mechanical processes. The limestones in question exbibit
the effects of solution on such an extensive scale as to warrant calling
particular attention to them; and it is for this reason that the present
paper has been prepared. To this end attention has been called to the
composition, texture and structure of these rocks, even at the expense
of repeating descriptions already many times recorded in the literature
of Indiana geology. It is only by understanding the intrinsic nature of
a rock that we can correctly appreciate and explain its metamorphism,
whether it be in the zone of weathering or in the deeper zones.

The chief agent of weathering in the present case is meteoric water
charged with CO, and with organic acids (humic acids). The normal
annual rainfall in the region under consideration is 42 inches (somewhat
more in the southern counties), rather evenly distributed throughout the
year. The largest average precipitation has been in the month of July,
while the minimum has been in the fall months—September, October,
November. The mean annual temperature is 52° F. The topography of
the limestone region excepting its eastern and western borders is undu-
lating, and of rather mild relief. Rolling uplands in which the larger
streams are rather deeply intrenched are the characteristic features. The
conditions are therefore such as to admit of a comparatively copicus
entrance of water into the rock and free egress at lower levels into the
main streams. Such conditions favor solution. Solution has also been
favored in the past by the heavily forested condition of the region before
its settlement by the white race.

The water which finds its way to lower levels in the rock than can
be tapped by the local drainage is frequently returned to the surface
along joint planes in the deep valleys on the western border of the region.
A notable instance of this is the French Lick Valley, which must derive

87

its mineral waters, now rendered famous by extensive exploitation, from
the uplands of the Mitchell limestone, some fifteen or twenty miles to
the eastward. These waters, which reach the deeper zones of flow, are
always strongly impregnated with mineral salts. Much of the mineral
water of the French Lick Valley comes from a depth of 400 to 500 feet.
Owing to the depth to which it descends and distance which it travels,
the water has been brought into intimate contact through a consider-
able interval of time with these eminently soluble limestones and its
highly mineralized condition is an evidence of the vast amount of ma-
terial removed from them, most of which, however, has undoubtedly been
derived from a comparatively superficial zone.

The most conspicuous effects of solution are those produced at or
near the surface of the rock, and it is these that the photographs pre-
sented herewith illustrate. In quarry openings where the rock has
been taken down along a joint plane, so as to expose the wall of one
of these avenues of ground-water, the effects of solution are shown in
greatest perfection of detail. The dip joints are often greatly enlarged,
their walls pitted and honeycombed, and traversed by arborescent sys-
tems of small openings through which the carbonated waters have eaten
their way; and the once solid rock is reduced to a crumbling earthy sub-
stance stained and rusted with iron. Where two joints (dip and strike)
intersect, the enlargement is apt to be greatest, giving origin to funnels,
narrowing gradually downward, and showing in a beautiful way the
method of formation of sinkholes, which are only such funnels of solu-
tion grown large.

Where the surface of the limestone has been denuded of soil, for
quarrying purposes, it is found to be corroded to a remarkable extent.
Every dip joint now becomes a ragged furrow, and between joints the
rock rises in hummocky ridges, the hog-backs of quarrymen. Points and
knobs and mushroom-like projections meet the eye at every turn—hbe-
wildering in variety and impossible to describe. The hog-backs frequently
stand as high as a man’s head, and their flanks are scarred and scored by
the all pervasive attack of the dissolving water.

Except where the activities of man or nature have removed it, a
blanket of red soil overlies and hides this marvelous complex of cor-
roded rock. The red soil or clay is the minute remnant of the original
rock, left after the lime carbonate has been carried away in solution by
the water. It is the insoluble residue. So complete has been the removal

88

of the lime that this residual soil requires the addition of lime to render
it fertile. A handful of soil may be treated with acid without giving an
appreciable effervescence, even though the soil be taken from within an
inch of the limestone. Analysis of this clay reveals about 67 per cent. to
80 per cent. silica, 8 per cent. to 14 per cent. aluminum, 6 per cent. or 7
per cent. iron oxide (Fe.O,), and very small percents of lime, magnesia,
soda and potash, etc. The iron is responsible for the intensely red
color of the clay. The process which has produced this soil is the solution -
of the limestone with oxidation of the iron which exists in minute quan-
tities in the original rock as a protoxide. The surface of the limestone
beneath the soil, besides being rough and ragged as explained above, is
usually minutely roughened, though sometimes fairly smooth, especially
in the Mitchell limestone. In some cases, especially in the Salem lime-
stone, the rock in contact with the overlying soil is rotted and discolored
beyond recognition and shows a graded passage from sound unmodified
rock below to soil above. Where layers of shaly rock occur, as in the
Mitchell, they are often so rotted that while they retain much of their
original appearance and stratification, they may be removed with pick
and shovel as easily as any clay. Sometimes a layer of limestone over-
lying a layer of shale is left as an isolated chain of boulders in the gen-
eral mass of residual soil. The deepest accumulation of residual soil
seen by the writer is in the cut on the Illinois Central Railroad in the
northwest edge of Bloomington, where it is 30 feet deep. Usually
it is not more than five or six feet deep. Over the Mitchell and Harrods-
burg limestones the soil contains chert, and, in the latter rock, geodes
in abundance, because of the relative insolubility of these substances.
Where blocks of Salem limestone are exposed at the surface to the
rain they become deeply furrowed by the solvent action of the rain-
water running over their flanks. The faces of old ledges, long exposed to
the weather, are scarred and seamed by this action and extensively
honeycombed, owing to the unequal solubility of the rock. In these holes
and pockets on the rock surface small plants find lodgment and by the
mechanical action of their roots and the chemical action of the pro-
ducts of their decay, greatly aid the process of disintegration.

The effects thus far described are seen to best advantage in the
exposures of the Salem limestone. The Mitchell shows to a pre-eminent
degree the deeper-seated effects of solution in the formation of caverns
and underground streams. Everywhere the surface of the country occu-

89

pied by the Mitchell limestone is dotted over with sinkholes, and the hill-
sides along the larger streams abound in springs and entrances of caves.
Some of the caves, such as Marengo and Wyandotte, have attained wide
fame. The Mitchell is, as indicated above, conspicuously jointed but fine
grained. _ the groundwater is compelled to traverse the joints rather than
the pores of the rock, and it is this, in the writer’s opinion, that has caused
the more extensive development of caves in the Mitchell than in the Salem
limestone, since the two must be about equally soluble. It is the con-
centration of solution along joinis and bedding planes that gives rise to
caves. The Mitchell has both an elaborate system of joints and numerous
relatively impervious layers to serve as cave floors. Neither of these
conditions would avail, however, withcut the third condition, adequate
drainage, which has been supplied by the intrenching of the main streams
as explained above.

No. 1. Hunter Quarry, Bloomington, Ind., showing fresh quarry face to right and
weathered joint face to left. Salem limestone.

No. 2. Old Quarry, one mile west of Stinesville, showing weathered joint face.
Salem limestone.

91

No. 3. Honeycombing and etching out of cross-bedded limestone. Old Quarry
one mile west of Stinesville.

No. 4, Honeycombing of Salem limestone and lodgment of plants in solution
holes, Oliver Quarry, Clear Creek,

92

No. 5.

Weathered blocks of Salem limestone fallen from cliff on Clear Creek, Ind.
Oliver Quarry.

No.6, Detail of a portion of No.5, showing honeycombing,

No. 7. Large cavities formed by solution. Salem limestone, Big Creek, near
Stinesville, Ind.

No, 8. Large cavity formed by solution and frost action. Harrodsburg limestone,
near Stinesville, Ind.

No. 9. Old Quarry on Big Creek west of Stinesville, Ind., showing joints enlarged
by solution. Salem limestone.

No. 10. Hunter Quarry near Bloomington, Ind., showing joints enlarged by
solution. Salem limestone,

No. 11.

Old Quarry one mile west of Stinesville, showing joint enlarged by
solution. Salem limestone.

No. 12. Joint enlarged by solution and filled with residual soil, near
West Baden, Ind. Mitchell limestone.

ble}
Cr

96

No. 13. Cut on the C., 1. & L. R. R. in northwest edge of Bloomington, showing
jointing of Mitchell limestone.

No. 14. Exposure of Salem limestone on Big Creek near Stinesville, showing
jointing.

No. 15.. Sinkhole. Whitehall pike west of Bloomington,,Ind., in the Mitchell
limestone.

No. 16. Entrance to Donaldson Cave, Mitchell, Ind., in Mitchell limestone.

7—A. OF SCIENCE.

No. 17. Corroded surface of Salem limestone. Quarry near Stinesville.

No. 18. Corroded surface of Salem limestone.

Oliver Quarry, Clear Creek.

99

No. 19. Corroded surface of Salem limestone. Quarry near Sanders, Ind.

>

ERR «ries

No 20. Corroded surface of Salem limestone. Quarry near Sanders, Ind.

100

No. 21. Pinnacles formed by solution. Top of Harrodsburg limestone in R. R.
eut on Clear Creek.

No. 22. Block of Salem limestone furrowed by rainwater

101

ACTION OF CALCIUM CHLORIDE SOLUTION ON GLASS.

By P. N. EVANS.

In the course of some recent experiments on boiler corrosion the
author had occasion to place various dilute solutions in contact with iron
wire in glass bottles and heat them in an autoclave containing water up
to 200 pounds steam pressure, which corresponds to about 200 degrees
Centigrade. The heating was continued for periods ranging from ctbree
to seven hours.

The solutions were all about fifteenth-equivalent-normal in strength,
and included the following substances, separately: sodium nitrate, am-
monium nitrate, calcium nitrate, nitric acid, sodium chloride, calcium
chloride, magnesium chloride. In each case 250 ce. of the solution was
heated in a 500-cubic-centimeter bottle.

In most cases the bottles were appreciably attacked by the solu-
tions, so that the glass stoppers could not be removed and the bottles
were noticeably etched inside, sometimes with the formation of scaly
matter on the bottles and in the enclosed water.

The effect was very much the most pronounced in the case of the
ealcium chloride. The solution was heated for 6 hours in a bottle of clear
glass of good quality, weighing empty about 275 grams. On opening the
autoclave the bottle was found to have been eaten through near the bot-
tom and the rest largely covered with a gelatinous layer which hardened
in a few days to an opaque coating. The piece of iron wire in the solu-
tion throughout the heating had gained very slightly in weight and in
tensile strength. Also, about 90 grams of loose scaly material was found,
and the solution, which had been perfectly neutral, had become strongly
alkaline. Apparently fully half of the glass had been acted upon, so
that this very dilute calcium chloride solution, containing less than 1.5
grams of calcium chloride, had in about 6 hours chemically attacked
over 100 grams of glass.

In seeking an explanation of the results, the various constituents of
a calcium chloride solution may be considered. These include, according
to generally accepted modern theories, water, calcium chloride moiecules,

102

perhaps some hydrated calcium chloride molecules, calcium ions, chlorine
ions, calcium hydroxide molecules, hydrochloric acid molecules, hydrogen
ions, hydroxyl ions.

Of these ingredients water can hardly be the active agent, or equally
marked results would have been obtained in the other cases; of the
other chemical substances present, all but calcium chloride molecules—
anhydrous and hydrated—were present in approximately equal quantities
in other solutions tested without corresponding results. The action, then,
must be considered catalytic, on account of the quantities involved, and
induced by calcium chloride molecules, anhydrous or hydrated, and is
apparently the hydrolysis of the silicates of the glass, with the forma-

tion of more or less hydrated silica and free bases.

1038

DETERMINATION OF EQUIVALENT WEIGHTS OF METALS.

JAMES H. RANSOM.

Some years ago I presented to the State Science Teachers’ Association
a description of an apparatus for determining the equivalent weights of
the metals. The object was to devise an apparatus so simple and inex-
pensive that it might be used in every high school. That apparatus,
which consists only of a flask and stopper, gives fairly accurate results,
and where more complicated apparatus is not available it may well be
used instead of giving up the determination of at least one of these most
important chemical constants.

In colleges, however, where a greater variety of apparatus is avail-
able, it has seemed desirable to use apparatus which necessitates more
care in its adjustment. It is desirable because the student becomes
interested in working with complicated pieces, and on that account recalls
more vividly the thought back of the method. Also I have found that
with the apparatus about to be described the students of average ability
obtain results more nearly in agreement with one another and with the
theory.

The pieces of apparatus needed are two litre flasks, a two-hole rubber
stopper, separating funnel, test-tube, pinch-cock, glass tubing and rubber
connection. The accompanying sketch shows the apparatus when ready
for use.

A weighed quantity (.6 to 1.0 grm.) of pure zine is put into a test-
tube and this put into one of the litre flasks. The flask is filled with
water which has been slightly warmed to expel the dissolved air. The
stopper, carrying the separating funnel with the tube long enough to
reach to the bottom of the test-tube, and also carrying a tube bent to
a right angle and reaching nearly to the bottom of the flask, is ad-
justed in the flask so that the tube of the funnel will enter the test-
tube and reach nearly to the zine. When pressing the stopper into
place the exit tube should be closed with the pinch-cock and the funnel
stop-cock opened so that water will fill the tube of the funnel up to the
stop-cock or above. Now by allowing water to flow from the funnel

104

into the flask the exit tube may also be filled with water. When this
has been accomplished the apparatus is tested for leaks by closing the

stop-cock and opening the pinch-cock. Should there be a leak, water
will siphon out. No water should remain in the bulb of the funnel.
When the apparatus is tight an accurately measured yolume (15 to
20 ce) of concentrated hydrochiorie acid (dilute acid can be used with
magnesium) is put into the separating funnel; the exit tube is put into
the second flask which has previously had its sides dampened with water.
About one half of the acid is now allowed to flow into the tube con-
taining the zinc. A rapid evolution of hydrogen occurs which drives

water over into the second flask. When the action slows down more
acid is run in, care being taken that at the end the surface of the acid
is just at the stop-cock. When all the metal has dissolved (it may take
one-half hour) the surfaces of the liquids in the two flasks are brought
to a level by raising or lowering one of them, and while level the pinch-
cock on the exit tube is closed. The stopper is now withdrawn from
the generating flask and the temperature of the water in it is taken.
Also the reading of the barometer is noted. The volume of ihe water
in the receiving flask is carefully measured and from its volume the
volume of the acid used is deducted. The remainder is the volume of
hydrogen produced during the action. This is corrected to standard
conditions, and from the corrected volume and the weight of zinc used

105

the weight of zinc necessary to produce 11.2 litres of hydrogen is eal-
culated. (11.2 litres of hydrogen weigh one gram).

The accuracy of the method was tested by Mr. Isimerline, a soph-
omore student in chemistry, who made three determinations each of
three metals. The average of the closely agreeing results is as follows:
aluminum, 9.02 (theory 9.08); magnesium, 12.08 (theory 12.18); zine, 32.55
(theory 382.7). In a class of 70 freshmen who had worked in the lab-
oratory only 18 hours, and using horn-pan balances, the average of 37
results picked at random was 31.9.

The apparatus apparently gives good results even in the hands of in-
experienced men.

107

STUDIES IN CATALYSIS.
By James H. Ransom.

In 1902 there was presented to this Academy by Mr. E. G. Mahin,
working in my laboratory, a paper dealing with the action of heat on
mixtures of manganese dioxide and potassium chlorate. In this paper
it was shown that the nature of the reaction as wel! as the temperature
of decomposition depended on the purity of the oxide, in that the purer
and drier the material the higher the temperature of rapid decomposition
and the smaller the amount of chlorine and chlorine oxides. The study of
this action has been continued by the writer, and some new data accumu-
lated.

Instead of using the purified commercial article, manganese dioxide
was prepared in the laboratory by heating chemically pure manganous
nitrate to a high temperature as leng as decomposition occurred, and
then washing out all soluble material. After this treatment the residue
was dried for some hours at a high temperature in vacuo. It was then
preserved in glass-stoppered bottles in a desiccator. Prepared in this
way the oxide is not hygroscopic.

One to two grams of potassium chlorate, free from chlorides, was
mixed with about the same weight of the manganese dioxide and the
mixture heated in an air-bath, the temperature being controlled with a
gas regulator. With the purified material there was observed little or
no decomposition at 170° (as Mahin found), and only at 245° to 260°
was the action at all perceptible. At 800° to 310° the action completed
itself in a few minutes. It was observed that while little oxygen was
evolved below 245° the residue gave a test for chlorides, though the
tests made before heating gave wholly negative results. Some of the
experiments showed less loss in weight during heating than that corre-
sponding to the chloride found by titration against standard silver nitrate.
Occasionally, however, the loss was even greater than that calculated
so that it was felt that great reliance could not be placed in the difference
in weight, especially as the tubes were often heated continuously for some
days. The evidence of decomposition rests, therefore. on the formation
of chloride.

After these facts were established twenty experiments were per-
formed to find the amount of chloride produced at different tempera-

108

tures; and to determine, if possible, the lowest temperature at which any
chloride would be formed. The temperatures varied in the different
experiments between 90° and 200°, and the time of heating from one
hour to 21 days. Chlorides were found in each of the 20 experiments,
and the amount varied somewhat regularly with the increase of temper-
ature and the time of heating. At 90°-93°, the lowest temperature used,
the amount of chloride formed in 14 days was .22 per cent. of that theo-

retically possible.
In order to show whether the pure chlorate would decompose at all

under these conditions some of it was heated in the same manner as
that described above. The heating was continued for nine days at 106°-
109°. But not a trace of a chloride was produced.

It is interesting to note that decomposition begins 200° below that
at which it is sufficiently rapid to be easily observed. But this is in
line with the modern idea that the velocity of an action is a function
of the temperature. And this observation has its parallel in the fact
that 200° below its ignition point hydrogen combines with oxygen in
quantities sufficient to be determined.

It has been found also that mixtures of manganese dioxide and
potassium perchlorate produce oxygen at a temperature much lower than
that necessary to decompose the perchlorate alone. The amount of
oxygen is quite appreciable at 310°, but does not become rapid at 360°—
a temperature below that at which the perchlorate begins to evolve
oxygen.

In order to compare the action of other catalytic agents at low tem-
peratures mixtures of potassium chlorate and platinum black were
heated at two temperatures: one sample for 6 days at 145°-150°, the
other for 7 days at 95°-100°. Both tubes lost in weight and both gave
evidence of considerable amounts of chloride produced. I hope soon to
get results at higher temperatures. But at these temperatures manganese
dioxide and platinum black are almost identical in their effect on the
decomposition of potassium chlorate.

In the near future the study of the action of other oxides at low tem-
peratures will be undertaken in order to get comparative results.

At the beginning of the investigation on catalysis it was believed
that many of the actions would prove to be of a purely chemical nature.
At the present time there is no evidence that such is the case; but
rather that we are dealing with cases of true contact action.

109
Errect oF Rapium on ELgctTroLytic Conpuctivity.

By RYLAND RATLIFF.

The material used was one-tenth of a gram of “Curie” radium
chloride of 10,000 strength placed at the disposal of the writer through
the kindness of Dr. Foley and the other Indiana University authorities.

A number of the usual experiments were first performed to test the
quality of the material. These included photographing the fiuorescent
action of the radium upon small diamonds and Wilhemite. In these
and kindred experiments good results were obtained.

Two attempts were made to obtain a photograph of the spectrum by
means of the Rowland concaye and Brashear mounting. In the first
exposure of 90 hours the radium chloride was placed directly in front of
the slit which was made unusually wide (probably too wide). A second
exposure of 162 hours was made by placing the radium slightly to one
side of the slit and the fluorescing Wilhemite directly in front of it. In
this trial the slit was made narrower but was considerably wider than in
ordinary spectrum work. Neither exposure yielded any effect other than
a slight fogging of the plate. The remainder of the work was devoted
to the problem, as above stated, of determining the effect upon elec-
trolytiec conductivity.

The apparatus employed is represented diagrammatically in Fig. 1.

Glass tubes I and II filled with the electrolytic solution are intro-
duced into the two arms of the Wheatstone bridge BD and CD. The
copper disks d, and d, are placed as nearly as possible the same distance
apart as d, and dy. Then when resistances R and R, are made the same
the bridge will of course be balanced approximately. R and R, were
usually made of from 800 to 1,200 ohms each. With the bridge balanced
the radium is placed as near as practicable to I or II and the direction
and amount of deflection in each case is noted.

Theoretically the back E. M. F. should be the same in each tube,
but it was found to be impossible to get it so in practice for any con-
siderable time. Hence the greatest difficulty in the way of definite posi-
tive conclusive results is due to the drift of the needle. A Rowland D’Ar-
sonval galvanometer with a sensitiveness of one megohm was em-
ployed in the major part of the work.

110

The tubes were first filled with an almost saturated solution of Cu
So, On working for two days with this electrolyte trying many different
adjustments it was found that the back or electrolytic E. M. F. was so
variable that no reliable results could be secured. The only thing deter-
mined positively was that lengthening the distance between the disks
in I caused a deflection E, and lengthening that in II produced a defiec-
tion W.

On filling the tubes with pure distilled water the results were some-
what more definite. With the disks 14 cm. apart the following data

A

Figure ya

Dimensions of essential parts of apparatus of Figure 1.
(1) Glass tubes, I and II.
Length of each, 10 cm.
Internal diameter of each, 17 mm.
(2) Copper dises, d1, d2, d3, and d4.
Diameter of each, 16 mm.
Thiekness of each, 1 mm.

tals.

were obtained: (1) On closing circuit, deflection (W) was first 388, then
setiled at 22, on standing at 22 several seconds, radium placed nearest
II gave deflection (E) to 343. On removal deflection was W.

Since an E deflection indicates a decrease in the resistance of IT
the first results secured seemed fairly definite. To make sure the move-
ments were not due to the Ww. M. I. of the electrolyte, weights were
placed on the keys by which the battery and galvanometer circuits were
both kept closed for a considerable time until the needle had ceased to
drift. Four additional readings were taken, the five sets of readings
being as follows: in all the lists of readings deflections indicating a
decrease of resistance by the presence of the radium are marked +,
those indicating an increase are marked —:

TABLE I,
| :

Reading on | Reading on |

Reading. addition of Deflection. removal of Deflection.
radium. radium.

(1) 22 84.5 412.5 Ww ees
(2) 23 42 +19 41.7 +8
(3) 41.4 41.7 | + .3 | 41 65 +- .05
(4) 41.65 41.65 0 41.65 0

(5) 41.2 41.7 + .6 41.7 0)

Two drops of H.S O, were added to the water with which ‘the tubes
were now filled. This of course greatly increased the conductivity. It
also made it much more difficult to balance the bridge. In securing the
data given in table II the radium was placed alternately upon the two
tubes, N and §8.

TaBLeE II.
= = = = == = ! = = = | |
Reading at . : z
beginning. Radium on N Result. ‘Radium on 8. Result.
38.5 33.5 0 23.85 + 135
34.1 =) OF 34.5 | 4

112

The results only of the readings will be given in the succeeding ists.
The tubes were now enclosed in pasteboard boxes to prevent effects
due to light and heat. Each box had a hole just large enough for the
insertion of the radium.

TaBLeE III.
Radium added. Radium removed.
+7 0)
28.10 + .165
+ .10 +. 13
— .13 = EY
—--06 + .05
+ 6 — .l

It was observed that with a given adjustment the drift of the needle
was often tolerably constant, and, for a considerable period in the same
direction. Sufficient additional resistance was now introduced at R, to
cause the needle to drift in the opposite direction so that the influence

of the radium would be exerted against the drift.

TaBLE LY.
Radium added. Radium removed.
= Seat
—1.8 S218
+ .4 aD
en 0
+3, —3,

A solution of AgNO, was next used as the electrolyte. The Ag and
Cu made a battery to such a degree that no consistent results could be
obtained. A considerable amount of Ag was deposited on the Cu elec-
trodes. Evidently a very dilute solution would be more likely to give
results. The most satisfactory solution used was made by diluting 3 ee.
of the Cu SO, solution used at first to 100 ce.

In Table V the radium was placed alternately upon N and S and

readings taken every two minutes.

TABLE V.

Radium on §. Radium on N.
ZAR — .8
aeIEg ao
— 1 eal
316 == 9)

TaBLE VI.

Radium on 8. Radium on N.
+ .85 — .6
+1.6 —1.15
+ .10 — 75
1. 55 — 25
= Se + .5
+ (2 — .715
1 95 =" .85
+ .6 Sait
+ .15 = Uh
+ 5 0
eee =
+ .2 — 15
AS )
a5 0
4+ .35 — 2
+ .10 1)
+ .06 + .02
+ .65 + .05
-- 15 Se OT
abs —.1
+ 15 is
+ .16 0
+ .4 1)
Seb 0
+ .07
ae
ae

m0)

oe
0

vel

Several of the lists, especially Table VI, show the effect of the drift
of the needle. .

A number of efforts were made to overcome this difficulty, none of
which were entirely successful.

One entire day was spent trying to get data for a curve which would
show the influence of this ever present but very variable factor. In the
first four readings of Table VII the drift was taken every five or six
minutes and the succeeding readings were with the fadium, readings

every minute.

8—A. or SCIENCE.

114

TaBLe VII.
Time. Deflection. Amount of deflection.
6 min. 40.25 to 40.8 S817
5 min. 40.8 to 41.3 via
6 min. -41.3 to 4l — .3
5 min. 41 to 41.3 Sears
Radium on 8.
Deflection. Result. Radium on N. Result.
(41.3 to 41.6 ses (41.9 to 41.9 0
1. 441.6 to 41.75 ae aa, 2 141.9 to 42.1 Bie
[ 41.75 to 41.9 Baga (42.1 to 42.1 0
(42.1 to 42.5 el (42.82 to 42.8 + 02
3. {42.5 to 42.75 4+. 95 4. { 42.8 to 42.75 ts
| 42.75 to 42.82 VE0T | 42.75 to 42.68 ae
(42.68 to 42.29 1 99 (483 to 43.1 af
5. 142.9 to 43 Sia 6. 443.1 to 43.8 a
(43 to 43 0 (43.3 to 43.3 0

If the average drift was really no greater than that obtained when
special effort was made to determine its amount it was not sufficient to
balance the considerable excess of positive readings.

Summary: Of the total number of readings, 61 per cent. indicated
positive results, 26 per cent. were negative, and 13 per cent. were zero,
i. e., gave no deflection. Of the total amount of the deflections (omitting
the rather questionably large ones in Table I), 82 per cent. were positive
and 18 per -cent. negative. Including those of Table I, 90 per cent. were

positive.

1D

A Srvexte Metuop oF MEAsuRING ELECTROLYTIC RESISTANCE.
By R. R. Ramsey.

In measuring the resistance of electrolytes the back e. m. f. or
polarization of the cell is always a troublesome source of error. The
potential of the terminals of an electrolytic cell is never the same unless
the temperature, concentration, and purity are absolutely the same at
both electrodes. To avoid this error various methods have been used,
such as the alternating current and telephone method.

While working with electrolytic cells it occurred to me that the
ever-present and troublesome e. m. f. might be utilized in a very simple

manner for resistance measurement. This method consists of placing the

Figure 1.

cell in series with a resistance box and mirror galvanometer and taking
readings of the galvanometer deflection with several resistances in the
box. From these readings the cell resistance can be determined by

solving for Re in the two equations,

E
eee + Rg + Re
and
Ka #

SaHERS + Rg + Re
Reg, the galyanometer resistance being known. <A _ preferable method
is to plot box resistance as a basis and the reciprocals of galvanometer
deflection as ordinates. ‘The intercept on the X axis being Re + Rg,
from which Re can be found.

The specific resistance can be found from the resistance and the
dimensions of the cell which can be determined by filling with mercury

or water.

116

The cell was made as in Fig. I, the electrodes being made of ead-

mium amalgam. “By placing the two ends in water baths the two ends

can be kept at a constant small difference of temperature, thus keeping
the e. m. f. constant.

The following data and curve (Fig. II) are for a
cell filled with 10 per cent. solution of cadmium sulphate.

1§100 390005980 $00. 0000
DATS - 225 =/7250,
hen ptniot eel wesc. eerie ate oir 99 cm.
CrossiseCtiONstesns =n tote eae savaciaes 2d SQ ners
ia
Box Resistance. Galv. Def. Def.
QO ohms. 5.99 . 166
5000 4.68 213
9000 390 256

From curve Re + Rg = 17470 ohms.
Rg = 225.

17470 X .277

Sp. Resistance p = 99 — = 48.3 ohms.

Some PECULIARITIES OF EvectRiIc SpARKS Across SHORT
SPARK (GAPS.

By RR. Rh: RAMSEY.

Bloudlot, in his work on N-rays, used a very feeble spark gap. In
our attempts to repeat Bloudlot’s work Mr. W. P. Haseman and I found
some very interesting phenomena which affected the sparking distance
and consequently the intensity of the spark. The fact that we were not
able to repeat Bloudlot’s experiments has led me to make some further
investigation.

T. J. Bowlker (Phil. Mag., 8, p. 487, 1904), has worked with long
spark-gaps, 1 cm. to 10 em. in length, and has obtained some very curious
results.

The work here described was with a spark gap between platinum
wires .45 mm. in diameter and never more than } mm. apart.

The spark-gap was provided with a micrometer so as to make length
anything desirable. The gap was connected to the secondary coil of a
1-inch induction coil. The current in the primary coil was cut down by
means of resistance until the sparking distance was very small. The
gap was opened to the point where the sparking just ceased and the
effects of various objects were tried. When one’s hand or finger was
brought within 1 cm. of the gap the sparks appeared. This was attrib-
uted to heat. A lighted match had the same effect as did one’s breath
or a current of hot air. <A rod of glass or of brass which had been in
the same room caused the effect. Any object brought near the gap
caused an increase of the number of sparks.

A No. 20 copper wire 15 em. long caused an increase when brought
near the gap or when it was allowed to touch one of the electrodes a
short distance from the gap. The effect was more noticeable when the
Wire was in contact with the negative terminal. Touching the electrode
five centimeters from the wire had no effect. The effect was more marked
when the wire was at right angles to the gap than when placed parailel

to the gap.

pr ano (ath

Le B-

<a =

119

Gas BURNERS AND STANDARDS OF CANDLE-POWER.

By R, R. RaMSEY AND HIROMITSU OT.

It seems to be taken by common consent that 16-candle-power gas
means that the candle-power of the lamp burning the particular gas
should be 16 candle-power when the rate of consumption is 5 cubic feet
per hour at 1-inch water pressure. The kind of burner used is move or
less an open question. The fishtail burner is specified by some of the
older authorities. The common practice of gas companies seems to be
to use an Argand or circular burner with a chimney. The question
“What is the candle-power of the gas?’ is one of considerable moment at
the present time. Dr. Foley, of the Department of Physics, Indiana
University, has been employed by the city of Bloomington during the last
two years to make monthly reports of the gas supplied to the city. As
a result of these measurements suit has been brought to annul the fran-
chise of the gas company. Indianapolis has its gas troubles. Almost
every city seems to have more or less trouble with gas. The fact that
the burner used on the Bloomington gas company photometer gave higher
values than a standard fishtail burner and that commercial Argand
burners gave results consistent with the fishtail burner, suggested the
experiments which were carried out by Mr. Oi. The work consisted in
changing the air supply and the number of openings in the commercial
-Argand gas burners and comparing the candle-power to the candle-power
given by the standard fishtail. The Argand burner used had 36 openings
in a cirele of 2.2 cni. diameter and used a chimney 5 em. in diameter.
The one used by the gas company had 24 holes in a circle % the diameter
ot the commercial burner, and used a chimney 3% the diameter of
the commercial chimney. The air supply in the burner was largely
through the center, while the commercial was supplied about equally
inside and outside the cylindrical flame. The supply of gas was regu-
lated by regulating the pressure of the gas by an automatic regulator.
The results will be given by means of curves where candle-power is
plotted against the consumption in cubic feet. Since the quality of the
gas was variable a curve for the standard fishtail was taken for each set
of observations. Fig. I gives the curves for three burners with the actual
values shown by points. The points in triangles [(, are for the standard

120
fishtail tip. Points in squares[=Jare for a slotted lava tip or bat-wing
burner. Points in circle © are for Argand burner No. 1.

In Fig. If are the mean values reduced to a standard basis, namely,

15.6 cubic feet gas, the mean values of the gas throughout the experi-

AE

12

10

Ve SE ey ae ; eo Lipspor mens

. fh : "f. SeLLES OF MECHaNics 4 ENgipe

ments as shown by the standard fishtail burner. Burner No. I was a
commercial burner, with the air supply almost all cut off from the out-
side of the cylindrical flame. Burner No. Il was a commercial, with the

holes closed with copper plugs, or 18 holes open. Burner No. III had one-

third the holes closed, or 24 holes open. Burner No. [VY waa 24 holes and
almost all the outside air cut off. No. V was a combination of Nos. I
and III. From the curve we see that with 13.6 candle-power gas (stand-
ard tip) No. II gives 14.2 candle-power, No. III gives 15.6, No. I gives

16 candle-power, and No. IV gives 16.4 candle-power.

If by simply manipulating the burner 13.6 candle-power gas can be

raised to 16.4 candle-power, or 20 per cent., it is high time that some
definite and authoritative action is taken to define the standards for gas

measurement.

PretLimiInary Notes oN AN Aumost Extinct Native DISEASE.
TREMBLES OR MILK—SICKNESS.

By RoBERT HESSLER.

(Abstract. )

The paper gave a detailed account of a five-year search for the cause
of the above named affection—known as “trembles” in animals, or as
“milk-sickness’ when transmitted to man by the milk of an affected
animal or on eating the flesh.

The disease was formerly common and severe, but today cases are
seldom seen. Five years ago a number of cattle were affected and died,
a farmer’s family also suffered after using the milk of a cow whose calf
died of the trembles; the family recovered.

In the fall of 1905 two horses grazing in an infected area became
sick; one died, the other recovered under active medicinal treatment.
From the blood of the latter pure cultures of a fungus were obtained.
(Cultures in tubes were exhibited.)

On the first examination, October 10, 1905, the blood contained spore-
like bodies in abundance and small yeast-like bodies enclosed in poly-
nuclear leucocytes; the former rapidly decreased and disappeared in a
few days, while the yeast-like bodies increased and later on diminished
and disappeared by the time the horse recovered (November 19).

Drawings of the organisms in the blood and of cultures in hanging
drops were shown. The pathogeny is now being worked out; the occurrence
of the fungus in nature (in certain wet shaded ravines) will be investi-
gated in the future.

123

Notes oN THE INTERNATIONAL BoTANICAL CoNGRESS OF 1905.

By J. C. ARTHUR.

International botanical congresses have been held at different times
during the last half century. They have originated under various
auspices, and for various purposes, but until the one held in Vienna
during the last summer none had had direct connection with a preceding
congress. Heretofore at each such gathering papers have been read,
suggestions made, and resolutions passed, but no mandatory power was
exercised. For want of a stable and self-perpetuating organization based
upon a system of representation having the approval of botanists in
general, it has been impossible to make rules for guidance in any line of
botanical activity which any large number of botanists would accept as
authoritative.

At the congress held in Paris in 1900 steps were taken to make the
organization a permanent one, the proper officers and committees were ap-
pointed, and the adjournment was taken to meet again in Vienna in
1905. There are many ways in which a properly constituted body speak-
ing with authority could be of inestimable service in directing the activity
of the botanical world. But in one matter there has been for a long
time a practically unanimous opinion. It is believed that only by means
of such an organization can order be brought out of the present state of
confusion, annoyance, and endless discord that exists in regard to the
“hispid question’ of nomenclature. For a long time modern botanical
nomenclature was guided by the dictum of the De Candolles, repre-
senting the French people, and the Hookers, and in America Asa Gray,
representing the English people. But as knowledge and the numbers of
workers increased the subject became too great to be dominated by
individuals, and control passed to the great centers of activity, Berlin
for the Germans, Kew for the English, Geneva for the French, and
what has been denominated the Neo-American school, with its center in
New York, for most Americans; although a few strong individual workers
still are able to be heard in opposition to all of these. The convenience
of a uniform set of names for plants, and the inconvenience of repeated

124

changes and lack of recognized authority, are too great to let this con-
fused state of affairs continue indefinitely. The hackneyed theme of
nomenclature was therefore a prominent incentive for the establishment
of an international society, and in the arrangement of its first deliberate
program received large attention.

The meeting at Vienna began on Sunday, June 11, 1905, with the
opening exercises of the exhibition held in connection with the congress.
This was a large exhibition and very attractive and interesting, both to
botanists and the general public. It contained extensive displays of
apparatus, books, charts, colored plates, special herbarium sets, dried and
living fungi and algae, pure cultures of various kinds illustrating par-
ticular kinds of investigations, historical matter, such as manuscripts,
portraits and the working outfit of early botanists, and numerous other
classes of objects, too many to be even enumerated. Each morning of
the following week a demonstration in some line of work made a valuable
feature in itself. Probably no single botanical display has ever equalled
this one in the variety and value of its objects or in sustained interest.

The formal opening of the congress took place on Monday morning in
the great hall of the university with much ceremony and pomp. In the
afternoon the nomenclature section of the congress was organized in the
lecture room at the botanical garden. Every morning and afternoon
during the remainder of the week the congress listened to scientific papers
by eminent scholars of Europe and America, and every afternoon for five
days the nomenclature section met promptly and worked late in a most
methodical, businesslike manner, trying to solve some of its problems.

The social events of the week were a notable part of the congress.
They opened with a reception on Sunday evening; and every evening
following had receptions, parties at the opera or in the park or at the
Rathskeller in bewildering profusion. Many short excursions to places
of scientific interest were also arranged for the latter part of some of
the afternoons. The visiting ladies, presumably not deeply engrossed
by the scientific side of the congress, were taken out for drives and to
visit art galleries, etc., in the forenoon, attended teas and listened to
music in the afternoon, and joined the men in the evening. Among the
social features must be classed the long excursions arranged by the
congress, a number preceding, and others following the week of the
sessions, each occupying from a few days to a month or more.

125

All the events and exercises of the congress, unless we except the
nomenclature section, bore a close resemblance to the large gatherings
of scientific bodies which are now common on both sides of the Atlantic.
The deliberations over nomenclature partook much more of the nature of
a business organization. Kach participant was the accredited representa-
tive of one or more botanical establishments or societies, or was a govern-
ment representative, and was entitled to a corresponding number of
votes. Each participant had before him a quarto pamphlet of one hun-
dred and sixty pages, printed in four columns. This had been prepared
by a commission appointed at the Paris congress of 1900. In one
column were the rules of nomenclature adopted at the Paris congress of
1867, which have been the only general rules for guidance in the naming
of plants botanists have so far had, which by the growth of the science
greatly needed revision, if indeed they did not require complete re-
writing. In another column were the modifications or additions suggested
by various societies and individuals since the appointment of the com-
mission. The third column contained various comments, and the fourth
column embodied the recommendations of the commission. This guiding
document was wholly in French, and the official language of the congress
was also French. On each side of the presiding officer sat a vice-presi-
dent, one repeating motions and remarks in English, and the other in
German, whenever deemed necessary, that all might fully understand
the proceedings and vote effectively. No language was barred in dis-
cussion, but practically only French, German and English were heard,
and these in nearly equal proportion.

Great earnestness was manifested: this with the lively debate, rapid
passage of motions, and the strain of listening to three intermixed
languages made it a memorable occasion to the hundred or more par-
ticipants. But the interest was deeper than the surface or the day. The
most influential workers in systematic botany, with the exception of
Englishmen, who stand strangely aloof from participation in any organ-
ized efforts, were lending their best endeavors to effect a substantial ad-
vance in nomenclatorial practice. From the American standpoint the
results were not all that were hoped for, action being particularly con-
servative. But there has been a distinct advance, and of such a nature
that the evolution of a substantial system is confidently assured through
the future activity of the society.

126

The first action of the organized body was to exclude cryptogams,
mosses and liverworts from present consideration and place these
groups in the hands of a special committee for a future report. A com-
mittee was also appointed to consider the nomenclature of fossil plants.
In the main the rules of 1867 were approved, and the working of the
law of priority strengthened. What to Americans seem like undue con-
cessions to the old order of things were the decisions to exempt from
the rule some 400 generic names now in use, and to disqualify specific
names which duplicate the generic mame, as Linaria Linaria, ete. It
was voted by a moderate majority that beginning with 1908 descriptions
must be in Latin to constitute publication, except in works whose publi-
cation was begun before that date and not fully completed. It is believed
by American botanists that the greatest shortcoming of the congress was
the failure to recognize the value of generic types, which constitute an
advance in systematic methods that is certain to find favor as soon
as well understood.

The proceedings of the congress will appear in due course of time in
two printed volumes, the first containing the decisions regarding nomen-
clature, and the second the scientific papers read.

If one were to name the most important achievement of this con-
gress, it would undoubtedly be the promotion of fraternity among active
botanists in such a manner as to lead to effective organization. Over
600 members of the congress were registered, of which fully two-thirds
may be denominated professional botanists, and half of these were men
whose names are known to everyone familiar with current botanical
literature. It was a more truly representative gathering than ever before
discussed botanical problems of world-wide interest. Those in attendance
considered the meeting highly successful, and this spirit’ of good-will
toward the movement for a permanent authoritative organization is one
of the bright auguries for the advancement of botanical science in many
ways. The next meeting of the congress will be at Brussels in 1910, and
the meeting following that may confidently be expected to be held in
America.

MetHops EMPLOYED IN UREDINEAL CULTURE WoRK.
By Frank D. KERN.

The first researches which proved a positive relationship between
the different fruit-forms of the Uredinales not only played an important
roie in the classification of these fungi, but invested a further study
with much interest. <A flowering plant which would produce even two
separate and distinct sorts of fruit would indeed be a curiosity, and yet
these parasites exhibit from one to four kinds of fruiting bodies, and many
of them, seemingly to vary their existence, possess the power of living
upon two entirely unlike hosts. Further attempts at classification, as
well as all economic efforts to control the pests have demonstrated a
necessity for a more intimate knowledge of the life-history of these
parasitic plants. The connection between the different stages in a life
cycle is best shown by means of cultures, and the scientific importance
of these inoculation experiments can not be overestimated.

Among the immediate advantages to be gained is the connecting of
unattached aecia with their iater stages, and to ascertain the range of
hosts. Some rusts are doubtless restricted to single species of hosts,
both for their aecial and telial forms, but since cultures have shown
that some heteroecious species may have their aecial hosts belonging even
to different families of plants, it is evident that exact relationships can
be established only by morphological characters and field observations,
affirmed by artificial cultures. In the autoecious species it is sometimes
impossible to tell how many spore forms there may be. Such a specimen
can not be placed in its proper species on account of the close resem-
blance of some isolated spore forms. Cultures offer a ready solution
to this problem.

Although the various processes in the cultivation of the rusts are
comparatively simple, so little has ever been said regarding the apparatus
and methods employed that a more detailed account does not seem out
of place.

The spring months are the period when most of the work must be
done, as this is the normal germinating period for the resting spores, and

128

is also the active growing season for the host plants. Any sort of spores
can be employed for the experiments and the methods vary accordingly.
A smaller portion of the work, with urediniospores and teliospores which
germinate at once, may be carried on through the summer months and
early autumn.

The best success has been attained through the sowing of teliospores
which give rise to pycnia and aecia in turn. All grass and sedge rusts
furnish telial material, and since they are, with a single exception, known
to be heteroecious, any collection affords culture material. Teliospores
are usually resting spores and normally retain their viability through the
winter. Coijlections made in the fall and kept in a warm, dry room
during the winter usually fail to germinate. The freezing temperature of
the outdoor atmosphere does not seem to be detrimental, and some plan
to prevent the specimens from thoroughly drying is a necessity. Cloth
packets are to be preferred to paper, as they do not take up moisture so
rapidly and allow a better circulation of air. These packets may be
hung out of doors, or an unheated shed without a floor seems to furnish
good conditions. The material put up in this manner may be sprayed
occasionally in the fall and winter, but an effort must be made to keep
them in a uniform condition. Collections made in the early spring after
they have wintered over in the field usually show vigorous germination.
Late spring collections are of less value, as the most vigorous are liable
to have grown in the field. Spores collected as early as July and August
have been brought to germination and have been sown with suceess,
but October and November collections survive through the winter better.
In the spring the packets are brought into a warm room some little time
before conditions outside are favorable for growth, and after a few days
of warmth and moisture some of the spores will show signs of growth.
The packets may be sprayed and thrown together in heaps. but they must
be spread out and aired and caution taken to prevent molds from
starting. The material in germinating condition is carefully separated
from that not yet ready to germinate.

If negative results are to be given any weight the spores must be
tested just before a sowing is made to ascertain if they are in ger-
minating condition. Teliospores of Pucciniaceous species are tested by
means of a hanging drop culture. In a space of twenty-four hours viable

spores push out germinating tubes which are readily made out with the

129

microscope under the ordinary high power. Melampsoraceous species
are best tested in a moist chamber, such as a Petri dish, without being
removed from the host. Growth can be detected by the unaided eye, or
with a hand lens, by means of the light yellow sporidia which cover the
sori, making them appear pulverulent instead of waxy. Teliospores of such
species as the Coleosporiums germinate as soon as mature, which is in
the fall of the year. They are sown when fresh and if suspended over a
slide in a moist chamber, the sporidia drop upon it, and their germination
can in turn be observed with the aid of the microscope.

For indoor experiments, small but vigorous growing potted plants are
used as trial hosts. Since the pots must be handled, it is desirable to

select plants with as small roots as possible and still have them maintain
their vigor. The tops are placed under bell-jars when the spores are
sown, and in order to have them cover more readily all extra foliage is
carefully pruned away. A few young and vigorous leaves are all that is
required. 4

The manner of applying the spores to the plants differs slightly ac-
cording to the kind of spores. If they are aeciospores the leaves bearing
the aecia are suspended over the portions to be infected, in such a manner
that as the spores fall from the cups they will light upon the desired
area. In all cases the host plant is first sprayed, the parts which will not
wet being rubbed with the fingers until water will adhere. The spores do
not need to be placed in water, in fact they should not be. Teliospores
readily begin the germination process in water but seldom form their
sporidia there. A moist surface and a saturated atmosphere are necessary
factors for the germination of all kinds of spores. Urediniospores and
teliospores are removed with a knife or scalpel blade, care being taken
to apply the edge to the sorus in such a manner as to loosen the spore
by breaking the pedicle, leaving the cell-wall uninjured. If certain areas

to which the spores are applied be marked by pieces of thread the watch,
which must be maintained for the first sign of infection, will be greatly

facilitated.

To secure reliable results, it must be positively made out that a
plant is free from infection when a sowing is made. Wild or native
plants brought in from the field or garden should remain in the green-
house a period of eight or ten days so as to preclude a possibility of out-
side infection.

9—A. oF SCIENCE,

130

After the application of the spores the whole plant is covered with a
bell-jar and set in a shaded place for a period of three days. The bell-
jar prevents rapid evaporation, thereby securing the necessary condition
of moisture during the germination time of the spores. A certain amount
of warmth is desirable, but during the whole period the plants should be
screened from the direct rays of the sun. The bell-jars are temporarily
removed each day to allow a change of air and are sprayed on the inside
with an atomizer before being replaced. After the second day the plants
can be sprayed, but previous to this there is danger of washing away the
spores before there has been an opportunity for infection. On the third
day the bell-jar is removed and the plant changed to a location where
there is more light, in order that growth may be more normal and ob-
servation made easier.

A. label, bearing the date of the sowing and the name of the species
of rust, is a very valuable aid to the observer of results. If the infection
is a successful one the first signs are usually noticeable in five to ten days,
although some species require fifteen days or even longer. Ordinary
Puccinia and Uromyces species, such as the grass and sedge rusts, usually
develop pycnia in six or eight days, the aecia following about an equal
length of time. Some species, having only teliospores, show signs of in-
fection in four or five days by means of yellow spots, requiring twelve to
fourteen days to develop spores. Uredinia sometimes do not follow the
sowing of aeciospores for a period of fifteen days or more, while they will
reproduce themselves in five or six. The Gymnosporangiums show pyenia
in a few days and the mycelium may keep on producing pycnia for a con-
siderable period, but a month or two passes before the aecia appear.
Many of the species which produce their aecia on the evergreens germi-
nate their teliospores in the fall, but there will be no visible sign until the
aecia develop the next spring, as the pycnia are very inconspicuous.

The procedure throughout is a simple one. No sterilization is neces-
sary, only care and cleanliness. The bell-jars are ready for use a second
time after a thorough washing. All organic matter should be removed so
as to avoid the starting of molds. No bits of rusted material can be left
on the pots or shelves near the plants without the liability of a stray in-
fection. As soon as a developing spore form becomes mature it should
be removed for the herbarium or separated from the plants not yet show-
ing infection. In all cases where it is the object to test the range of a

151

species it is always wise to carry a controlled experiment with as nearly
similar conditions as possible. A success in one case and a failure in the
other can then usually be relied on as representing the actual state of
affairs. If a plant fails to show any results within the reasonable time it
is best not to use it again until a sufficient number of days of grace
have passed, as there is always a possibility of a belated infection.

It will be seen that care in execution and accuracy of observation are
the main features in this work, costly apparatus not being required, and
it is hoped that this brief_.description of the operations may be of service
to those interested in this modern method of studying and classifying this
group of fungi.

135

Tue EmpryoLtocy oF Meuinotus ALBA.

By W. J. YOUNG.

In the space assigned to this paper it will be possible to give but a
brief outline of the development and nutrition of the flower, embryo sac
and embryo, trusting to the plates to make clear the points not sufficiently
explained in the text.

In the flower of Melilotus alba, the common white sweet clover,
there are two factors which interfere with the orderly successive develop-
ment of the floral organs; the one is mechanical and is due to the crowd-
ing of the flowers on the side of a stem axis, the other is physiological
and ecological and depends upon the relative use of parts at different
times in the development of the flower; the one interferes with the
simultaneous appearance of the parts of the same cycle, the other with
the acropetal succession.

Melilotus forms an exception to most of Leguminosae so far ex-
amined, since the megaspore mother cell develops into the embryo sac
without first undergoing tetrad division. The development of tie latter
differs from typical cases only in details. When the eight-celled stage is
reached, the embryo sac elongates rapidly toward the chalaza at the same
time curving strongly, and the three antipodal cells disappear. The egg
cell occupies a position lateral to the synergids. The polar nuclei lie
close together near the egg apparatus. Their fusion takes place just
prior to fertilization, before the pollen tube reaches the ovule.

After fertilization the primary endosperm nucleus undergoes several
divisions before the egg cell begins to divide. The latter then undergoes
two transverse divisions, resulting in a terminal cell which develops into
the embryo and two other cells which give rise to a conspicuous suspensor.
The embryo follows in the main the Capsella type of development, but
with two important differences, viz., much later differentiation of the
dermatogen, plerome, and periblem, and the absence of a hypophysis
derived from the terminal cell of the suspensor.

Lack of space prevents more than the merest glance at the facts
observed regarding the nutrition of the embryo sac and embryo. In its

154

earliest stages, the embryo sac grows at the expense of the tissue of the
nucellus. As it becomes mature it is surrounded by a definite layer of
active looking cells, derived from the inner integument, forming a nutri-
tive jacket. This stage is characterized by the storage of reserve food
to supply the rapid growth which follows fertilization. Starch is de-
posited in the placenta and very abundantly in the micropylar region of
both integuments. The funiculus contains no starch, since it is the path
by which food material enters the ovule and it is important that it should
not be blocked by a store of reserve food.

After fertilization the nutritive jacket becomes even more strongly
developed, especially in the chalazal region on the side of the sac nearest
the funiculus. The cells of the inner layer have a characteristic appear-
ance. They are rounded and turgid, their protoplasm is vacuolated and
forms a thick layer lining the inner ends of the cells. They give evi-
dence of great activity which would seem to justify the conclusion that
they are the cells most concerned at this time in the nutrition of the
embryo sac. Later there appears in this region a thick mass of endo-
sperm which, acting as an haustorium, rapidly digests and absorbs all
tissue with which it comes in contact, and the nutritive jacket is natu-
rally the first part destroyed. The location of the starch-bearing and non-
starch-bearing areas at this stage seems to justify the following conclu-
sions: Food material enters the ovule in solution and is partly stored up
and partly passed on to the chalazal region of the embryo sac. Moreover
the stored-up food supply is drawn upon by the nutritive jacket in the
chalazal region. Starch does not appear in the embryo until just before
the cotyledons appear, when a small quantity is found in the base of the
embryo and also in the suspensor. In later stages there is a scanty sup-
ply of starch in the periblem.

In the latest stages examined starch was found in varying quantities
in all parts of the tissue outside the embryo sac. The ovule, which might
now be called the seed, was surrounded by a thick membrane of col-
umnar cells extending even across the funiculus. Inside this columnar
layer in the region of the funiculus is a flattened, fan-shaped mass of
tracheid-like cells of irregular form having reticulate markings on their
walls. These absorb food material through the funiculus and pass it on
to the surrounding tissues, and especially through a vascular bundle, the
raphe, to the chalazal region of the embryo sac. Surrounding the tracheid-

135

like cells in the later stages are large cells sepurated by intercellular
spaces, which contain, besides starch, rather large granules which give
the test for proteids.

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION.

The following conclusions result from the above observations:

1. The order of appearance of the primordia of the floral organs is
sepals, stamens, carpel, petals, although the last three may appear
simultaneously.

2. The energy of the plant is directed at first to the development
ot the stamens and carpel at the expense of the petals.

3. The archesporium becomes differentiated at a rather late stage.

4. The tapetum divides but a limited number of times.

5. The megaspore mother cell gives rise to the embryo sae directly.

6. The early development of the embryo sac is typical.

The antipodals disappear at a very early stage.

8. The embryo sac increases much in size before fertilization and
replaces all the tissue within the integuments.

9. The egg cell is placed laterally to the synergids. The latter have
striated tips.

10. The polar nuclei do not fuse until just before fertilization. The
latter is a rapid process.

11. The ovule is at first anatropous, later campylotropous.

12. The fertilized egg does not divide until there are several endo-
sperm nuclei in the embryo sac.

13. In the three-celled proembryo the terminal cell gives rise to the
entire embryo and the second cell to the mass of the suspensor.

14. The early stages in the development of the embryo are of the
Capsella type. The dermatogen, however, appears at a later stage.

15. There is no hypophysis.

16. The embryo sac is nourished by means of a nutritive jacket de-
rived from the inner integument.

17. The food material which enters the ovule through the funiculus
is partly deposited in the surrounding tissues and partly passed on to
the chalazal region of the embryo sac.

18. A mass of endosperm in the chalazal region of the embryo sac
acts as an haustorium in the later stages and digests the surrounding
tissue.

136

19. After the formation of the seed coat nutritive material passes
from the parenchyma of the funiculus by diffusion through the columnar
cells of the seed coat into the tracheid-like cells, which partly distribute it
to the surrounding tissue and partly pass it on through a vascular bundle
to the chalazal region of the embryo sac.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.
1. Coulter, J. M. and Chamberlain, C. J., Morphology of Angiosperms,
1908.
Goebel, Outlines of Classification and Special Morphology; English

bo

translation, 1887.

3. Gray, Structural Botany, 1880.

4. Guignard, Recherches d’embryogénie végétaie comparée. I. Legumin-
euses. Ann. Sci. Nat. (Bot.). VI, 12:5-166, 1881. Review in Jour-
nal Microscopical Society, 1882, Part II, 644, and Bot. Cent.
12:86, 1882.

Ikeda, T., Studies in the Physiological Functions of Antipodals and
Related Phenomena of Fertilization in Liliaceae I. Tricyrtis hirta.
Bull. Coll. Agric., Imp. Univ. Tokyo. 5:41-72, 1902. Ref. in
Chamberlain, Morphology of Angiosperms 111, 1903.

6. Kirkwood, J. HE. and Gies, W. J., Chemical Studies of the Cocoanut.
Bull. Tor. Bot. Club 79: 1902.

Wylie. Bot. Gaz. 37: 1904.

8. Zimmerman Botanical Microtechnique, 1901.

on

|

EXPLANATION OF FIGURES.

1. Stem tip (a) showing origin of flowers (f) in axils of bracts (B)
X 125.

2. Stem tip, later stage, showing origin of flowers and the primordia of
the floral organs; (f) flower, (B) bract, (S) sepal, (St) stamen,
(c) carpel. X 125.

3. Single flower at a slightly later stage when the petal (P) appears.
Xe;

4. Still later stage, indexed as above. The stamens and carpel are en-
larging while the petals remain small. X 125.

5. Later stage, the cavity of the ovary appearing; (M) microsporangium.
X 125.

18.
19.

137

Still later, the ovules (O) have appeared. X 125.

Transverse section of a bud at about the time the embryo sac begins
to enlarge; (S) calyx, (P) petals, (St)) stamens, (c) carpel, (Pl)
placenta, (V) vascular bundle. X 75.

Longitudinal section of carpel, same stage as Fig. 9. The micro-
tome section included about the area between the lines a’b’. X 345.

Section of carpel along the line ab, Fig. 8. The folding together of
the sides is nearly completed. X 345.

Young flower showing nearly simultaneous appearance of petals,
stamens and carpel. X 125.

Young ovule, sporagenous tissue not yet differentiated. X 1460.

Archesporial cell. X 1460.

Spore mother cell and tapetum. X 1460.

Embryo sac, two-cell stage. X 1460.

Embryo sac, four-cell stage. X 1460.

Embryo sac, eight-cell stage. Cells of egg apparatus cut from the
remainder of the sac. <Antipodals beginning to degenerate.
X 1460.

Young egg apparatus before differentiation of egg. X 1460.

Mature embryo sac. The egg cell lies back of the synergids. Polar
nuclei fusing. X 1460.

Same stage as Fig. 19 but showing the position of the egg lateral to
the synergids. X 1460.

Embryo sac immediately after fertilization. Neither the egg cell
nor the primary endosperm nucleus has divided. (S) synergid.
X 610.

First division of primary endosperm nucleus. Egg cell still un-
divided. X 1460.

First division of primary endosperm nucleus. Telephase. X 1460.

Proembryo of two cells. X 610.

Proembryo of three cells; (s) synergid. X 610.

Same stage as Fig. 25 showing er ‘osperm with radiating character
of the protoplasm surrounding nuclei. X 610.

Embryo of two cells. X 610.

Embryo of eight cells. X 610.

Embryo composed of two layers of cells. X 610.

Embryo at a little later stage when the dermatogen begins to be
distinguished. X 610.

a '
138

31. Embryo just before appearance of cotyledons. X 610.

32. Embryo after appearance of cotlyedons; (Ple) plerome, (Per) periblem.
Dn 13

33. Base of embryo of about the same stage as Fig. 32 showing plerome,
periblem and relation of embryo to suspensor. X 610.

34. Young ovule of anatropous type. X 125.

35. Ovule at time of fertilization, campylotropous type; (N. J.) nutritive
jacket. xX 125.

36. Ovule a short time after fertilization, showing the curvature of the
embryo sac and the extensive development of the nutritive jacket.
Xe 125:

37. Later stage, embryo sac much curved, with mass of endosperm in
chalazal region. X 75.

38. Nutritive jacket. same stage as Fig. 35. X 610.

39. Nutritive jacket, same stage as Fig. 36, micropylar region. X 610.

40. Nutritive jacket, same stage as Fig. 36, chalazal region. X 610.

41. Mass of endosperm serving as an haustorium in chalazal region of
embryo sac. Same stage as Fig. 37. X 610.

42. Section in region of the funiculus in the plane of the mass of
tracheid-like cells; (T) tracheid-like cells, (V) raphe, (c) columnar
cells of seed coat. The section is in the plane indicated by the
line a’b’; Fig. 48. X 345.

43. Same as Fig. 42 but slightly earlier and in a plane perpendicular to
it as indicated by the line ab, (T) tracheid-like cells, (C) columnar
cells of seed coat, (C’) columnar cells of funiculus, (E) paren-
chyma of funiculus in path of food supply. X 610.

44-50. Distribution of starch in ovule. Amount of starch is indicated by
the thickness of stippling.

44. At about the megaspore stage. 345.

45. At the time when the embryo sac begins to enlarge. X 345.

46. At the time of fertilization. XN 125.

47. Soon after fertilization. X 125.

48. At a considerably later stage. X 125.

49. In embryo just before formation of cotyledons. X 75.

50. In ovule and embryo at a much later stage; (C) columnar cells of
seed coat, (VY) raphe, (T) tracheid-like cells, (P) reserve proteid.
X 75.

139

140

9,
He

141

Vy

LUYy)
ah,

ee,
(2, ZZ
CL;

Z

SRR
SO
Se UN Ye)

MAD I

143

OXYDASE IN WHEAT GRAINS.
By KATHERINE GOLDEN BITTING.

In many seeds the embryo is provided with a store of reserve food
formed by the parent plant before the separation of the seed. In the dor-
mant seeds the enzymes are usually in minute quantities as they are not
needed, but when the food is needed during the germinative process, the.
enzymes are more strongly developed, the embryo dveloping. itself, and
also developing enzymes to provide food in suitable form.

A series of experiments were conducted to determine the enzymes
present in dormant wheat seed, and its parts, and also in the germinated
seed. The material for the experiments was obtained from a flour mill,
and consisted of whole wheat flour, ordinary white flour, bran, shorts,.
and the unground grain.

Water extracts were made, GO grams of flour being used with 100
cubic centimeters of distilled water, with the whole flour, and the white
flour, 150 cubic centimeters of water with the shorts, and 240 cubic
centimeters of water with the bran. The amount of water was varied.
in order to make them of as nearly as possible equal moisture, the shorts
and the bran requiring more than the others. The mixtures were allowed
to stand for 12 hours, and were then filtered. Powdered thymol was
used to prevent decomposition. Glycerine extracts were also made, but.
were so much weaker in their action than the water extracts, that they
were abandoned.

To determine the changes in enzymic action due to the germinative
process, wheat was germinated for different periods, the grain being
placed on moist paper under a bell jar, and kept at room temperature.
At the end of the given period the grain was pounded in a mortar, then
the enzymes were extracted for three days with water to which chloro-
form was added, after which the extracts were filtered. The periods of
germination were three, five, six, and ten days respectively. Fifty
grams of wheat grains were used in each case, and for the extraction
200 cubic centimeters of distilled water.

144

The extracts were slightly acid from the ungerminated grain, as
shown by litmus, and more strongly acid from the germinated grains.

In obtaining the extracts from the various parts of the grain, the re-
sulting liquids showed differences in color. The extract from the white
flour was colorless, while that from the whole wheat was a straw color,
that from the bran was slightly darker, and from the shorts darker still,
so that one could recognize the extracts from their colors. The extracts
from the germinated wheat grain were a pronounced brown color, the
eolors varying in depth with the time of germination up to six days, the
six days being the darkest, beyond that no differences were appreciable.
This was uniform in all the extracts made, so that like the extracts from
the parts of the grain, the extracts from the germinated grains could be
separated from one another by the degree of discoloration. Then again,
sections of the wheat seeds, of the water lily petiole, and of the castor
bean stem showed similar degrees of discoloration when placed in the
solutions.

To test the oxidation, 5 cubic centimeters of each of the extracts from
the different parts of the grain were taken and a few drops of guaiae
tincture added, after which they were allowed to stand for some hours.
In all there was a blue discoloration, but varying in degree. The white
flour extracts showed a faint blue color, the whole wheat extract had a
deeper tint of blue, while the bran and shorts extracts showed a decided
blue color.

In testing the extracts from the germinated grain, 25 cubic centi-
meters of each were taken and precipitated with 85 cubic centimeters of
96 per cent. alcohol, then allowed to stand 36 hours, after which the pre-
cipitate was filtered off. The precipitate was dried on the filter at 35
degrees C., then redissolved in 25 cubic centimeters of distilled water.
These solutions were then tested with the guaiac tincture, and all gave
a decided blue color throughout the whole liquid.

The solutions were then tested with hydroquinone and pyrocatechin,
polyphenols which are readily oxidized. At the same time for control
purposes, equal quantities of the solutions but without the addition of the
phenols, and also equal quantities of distilled water plus the phenols,
respectively, were kept under similar conditions. The results are shown in
the following table:

Extract. Phenol. Time. Color.
Ungerminated............ Hydroquinon.......... 12 hours...... Light reddish brown.
Germinated 3 days ....... Hydroquinon .......... Ihours.. ss: Reddish brown.
Germinated 6 days....... Hydroquinon.......... 12 hours..... Deep reddish brown.
Ungerminated............ Pyrocatechin .......... 12 hours...... Reddish brown.
Germinated 3 days....... Pyrocatechin =... ....- 12 hours...... Deep reddish brown.
Germinated 6 days ....... Pyrocatechin .......... 12 hours...... Deeper reddish brown.
UUMPOrM NT BbOMe coe sescse sowie. Cae cee iens Sone eee 12 hours...... Pale straw.
GoLminated o GRY so 2-450 ones otee reek wes ee eee aloe ee 12 hours...... Deeper shade.
Gormingted Gid aye .c. csc |'soe ew cceties cikcies epic sate 12 hours...... Still deeper shade.
Dissolved in water ....... Hydroquinon.......... 12 hours...... Colorless.

Dissolved in water ....... Pyrocatechin .......... 12 hours...... Colorless.

The discoloration became apparent in the solutions with pyrocatechin
in about 15 minutes, while the same extent of discoloration was not ap-
parent in the solutions with hydroquinon for an hour. The table gives the
results at the end of twelve hours, but the solutions were kept for a week.
The longer they stood, the darker they became, the hydroquinon being of
a wine red color, while the pyrocatechin solutions were of a brown color.
At the end ot four days, the six days extract with pyrocatechin was al-
most black. The experiments were carried on at room temperature. The
solutions remained clear, no precipitates forming.

TEMPERATURE TESTS.

To determine the temperature at which the enzyme was destroyed,
the three extracts were heated to 60 degrees C. The tubes containing the
extracts were placed in the steam sterilizer, a corresponding amount of
water being placed in another tube in which was placed a thermometer.
The extracts were kept in the sterilizer for one minute after the ther-
mometer registered 60 degrees C.

Another set was tested but the temperature raised to 100 degrees C.
Pyrocatechin was used with the enzyme, as, in the other tests, it gave a
more rapid response than the hydroquinon.

60 Degrees C.—A slight darkening was apparent in twenty minutes.
The longer they were kept, the darker they became, until at the end of
four days they had a rich, deep brown color. They also showed the varia-

10—A. oF SCIENCE.

146

tions as to the ungerminated extracts being the lightest, the six days
germination extract being the darkest, the three days germination extract
being a shade between the two.

100 Degrees C.—These solutions were a little slower in responding, |
the discoloration not being apparent for 80 minutes, but showed similar.
discolorations to those extracts raised to only 60 degrees C. At the end of
four days they were slightly lighter in shade than the corresponding
extracts at 60 degrees C.

100 Degrees C.—To avoid any chance of error, the same quantities of
the extracts were again taken, but heated over the direct flame of a
Bunsen burner until the solutions boiled vigorously. They were then
cooled rapidly in the snow, after which the pyrocatechin was added. At
the same time two tubes of distilled water were boiled over the flame,
and also had the pyrocatechin added, one being cooled before the addition,
the other being quite warm.

The extracts plus the pyrocatechin behaved exactly the same as the
extracts heated in the steam sterilizer. The solutions of distilled water
plus the pyrocatechin remained clear and colorless.

100 Degrees C.—In the first set of experiments with the extracts from
the various parts of the flour, the white flour extract gave the weakest
color reaction, seeming to indicate either weakest or smallest quantity of
enzyme. An equal quantity to that used in the other experiments was
boiled over the direct flame for two minutes. Another quantity was taken
but not boiled, both had pyrocatechin added to them. The boiling caused
a white precipitate to form.

The discoloration was slow in appearing, it being fully three hours
before there was a certainty in regard to it. Then it had a reddish
appearance, like apple must when exposed to the air. In twenty-four
hours there was a decided red color, but the boiled solution was slightly
darker than the unboiled. The unboiled solution also formed a precipi-
tate, both precipitates showing the coloration of the liquids. At the end
of three days the color remained the peculiar red, but darker, the boiled
one being considerably darker.

There was next tried some white flour extract and some six days
germination extract, these two extracts being at the extremes of the dis-
colorations, the former showing the lightest, the latter the darkest in the
extracts, and in their action on the phenols. The extracts were placed in
the autoclay, and kept until the indicator registered a pressure of ten

147

pounds, the temperature being 112 degrees C. It required thirty minutes
to reach this pressure. The solutions were taken out as quickly as pos-
sible and cooled in the snow at once, after which pyrocatechin was added
to each. The white flour extract had a white precipitate formed by the
heat action, but this was an unpurified extract. The six days germination
extract remained clear. A slight reddening appeared in the white flour,
and a slight darkening in the other. (‘They were compared with extracts
without the pyrocatechin.) This became more marked, the longer the
extract stood. At the end of seven days the discoloration was quite
marked.

The action of the oxydases is a very interesting and practical sub-
ject, as their action explains many puzzling phenomena, which were
formerly classed as oxidations, but the cause and conditions of which
were unknown. The composition of the oxydases is unknown, and con-
sequently it is impossible to determine the number of oxydases—if there
be numbers of them—except by the differences in reactions and condi-
tions. .From considering oxidation as a purely physiological process, as
exemplified by respiration, and which only took place through vital proc-
esses, one has to consider oxidation from the opposite extreme.*

The most common manifestations of the action of oxydases are the
discolorations of beets, carrots, apples, and many plant tissues and juices,
besides the browning of wines and other liquids. The juice of the plant
Rhus vernicifera from which lac varnish is made contains an oxydase
which is, perhaps, the most widely known. Many of these have been in-
vestigated, and have been found to have certain points in common, though
differing in others. They are all susceptible to the reaction of the me-
dium, and also the temperatures at which they are rendered inactive vary
within certain limits. The browning of wines is prevented by a tempera-
ture between 70 and 80 degrees C. or by Pasteurization at 60 to 62 de-
grees.j A large number of oxydizing enzymes which are found in differ-
ent plants and animals are mentioned by Oppenheimer?, the most resistive
of which succumb to boiling temperature.

The enzyme which exists in the wheat grain, both in the quiescent
and germinated grains, from the differences in degree of discoloration of
extracts, and also action on phenols, exists in least amount in the white

*Pozzi-Escot, M. E. Les Diastases at Leures Applications, 1900.
+Lafar, F. Technical Mycology, p. 401, 1898.
tOppenheimer, C. Ferments and their Actions, 1901.

148

flour, and greatest amount in the shorts, that is, the endosperm has least,
and the embryo most. This accounts for the discoloration of flour con-
taining the embryo. The enzyme must be increased in amount or in-
tensity during the process of germination, and up to six days germination,
the extracts become darker, and the action on phenols also gives the
same degrees of difference. The enzyme is more resistive to heat than
those already noted. Bertrand and Bourquelot* say the oxydase extracted
from Russula foetens Pers. is so resistive to heat that it has to be boiled
some time before being destroyed.

Boutrouxy bas separated an oxydase from dough by soaking dough
with twice its weight of water for half an hour, extracting by means
of a press, then clearing by filtering through a Chamberlain filter. The
extract was at first clear, then a precipitate formed, after which it turned
brown, becoming black in the course of some weeks. His oxydase, how-
ever, lost its activity at 100 degrees C.

That the oxydase extracted by Boutroux is identical with the present
one extracted from the various flours and grain is very probable. The
difference in its resistance to heat may be due to a different kind of
wheat, or to influences of environment.

Whether it be necessary to have a diastase present, as is claimed by
Raciborskiz, it is impossible to determine, for the methods of separating
the oxydases will also cause the separation of diastase and other fer-
ments, and there is no known method of separating the majority of
enzymes from one another.

*Green,J.H. The Soluble Ferments and Fermentation, 1901.

+ Boutroux, L. LePain et la Panification, 1897.
tRaciborski. Ber. der deut. bot. Ges. XVI. 119, 1898.

149

CyTasE IN WHEAT GRAINS.
By KATHERINE GOLDEN BITTING.

The presence of cytase was tested on sections of the wheat grain,
the petiole of the water lily, Nymphae odorata, and the stem of the castor
bean, Ricinus communis. The cells of the endosperm of the grain were
so full of starch granules that the changes in the walls were difficult to
see. In the other sections there is considerable collenchyma developed,
which is very clear and distinct, and any changes in its structure are
easily followed. The extracts from the ungerminated grain, and from
three to six days germinations were the ones which gave the most satis-
factory results.

The first tests were made using hollow chambers in slides, so that
the changes might be followed under the microscope. These proved un-
satisfactory as the section went to the bottom of the chamber and only
the low powers could be used. Preparation dishes were then used, 5
cubie centimeters of the extract being used and chloroform for an anti-
septic, with the sections immersed. <A control was also kept, using dis-
tilled water instead of an extract. After three days the following changes
were noted:

Water Lily Extract, ungerminated seeds—

Collenchyma. Thickened walls much swollen, middle lamella distinct,

like a bright thread through thickening.

Parenchyma. Walls swollen, middle lamella distinct, intercellular

spaces nearly obliterated.

Xylem. No change.

Water Lily Extract, three days germination—

Collenchyma. Thickened walls nearly fill cavity of cells, cavities

showing as narrow canals.

Parenchyma. Walls swollen.

Xylem. No change.

Water Lily Extract, six days germination—
Collenchyma. Structureless mass, separate cells indistinguishable.
Parenchyma. Cells entirely separated, middle lamella gone.

The sections were so badly disorganized in this last that they could
not be transferred to a slide. The observations were made on the
remnants.

The castor bean is more resistive to the action of the cytase than is
the water lily. The tissues of the castor bean showed practically the
same effects as those of the water lily, but not quite so advanced.

The endosperm of the wheat sections was more susceptible to the
action of the cytase than were the other sections. In the three days
germination extract, parts of the endosperm had dropped out, so the
sections could not be disturbed, while in the six days extract, only rem-
nants were left adliering te the aleurone layer. The aleurone layer and
the outer coats were unaffected. The middle lamella of the cells was
attacked first, as was shown by the cells separating whole from one
another.

Sections were tested in the extracts from the flours, but were acted
on more slowly than those outlined, the white flour extract giving in nine
days, results equal to those obtained from the ungerminated extract in
three days.

The sections were made from alcoholic material, so that there was no
protoplasmic action. Chloroform was used to prevent bacterial growth.

Seeds which had germinated for varying numbers of days were sec-
tioned. In these, action was not so far advanced as in the sections placed
in the extracts. For instance, seeds germinated for six days, when
embedded in paraffin, and cut on the microtome, parts of the endosperm

still remained as a granular mass.

151

“MOTOR SABP DAT,

A

‘8

‘UOIjoR SABP BAIN], ‘2
‘OSBIAL) YJIM pojvea} BuUIAqoUdT[O,)

*[BULION

T

152 : :

Sections of wheat grain treated with cytase.

1. Section before treatment.

2. Section after treatment.

153

3. Section before treatment, showing outer coats and aleurone layer.

4. Section after treatment, showing outer coats and aleurone layer.

Notes Upon Some Littite-Known MEMBERS OF THE
INDIANA FLoRA.

(PAPER NUMBER THREE. )
By CHARLES PIPER SMITH.

Since offering my second paper under the above heading, my friend,
Mr. Harley H. Bartlett, has been able to come to definite conclusion
concerning certain of our Indiana collections not worked upon in time for
inclusion in my last report. As before, his decisions are the result of
eareful study and comparison at the Gray Herbarium, where he has
received the assistance of Mr. Fernald and Dr. Robinson whenever occa-
sion demanded. Through the kindness of Dr. Schneck, Mr. Bartlett has
had the pleasure of examining that gentleman’s specimens of the genus
Juncus, and I comply with my friend’s request to note certain facts
gleaned from his study of this interesting collection.

Specimens verifying these records are in the herbarium of Mr. Bart-
lett, except in the cases where it is specifically stated that no specimens
were preserved.

Sorghum Halepense (L.) Willd. (Marion County.)

Occasional about Indianapolis. Included in the State Catalogue,* but

no definite station noted. Taken August 20, 1904, by Mr. Bartlett.

Cyperus rivularis Kunth. (Marion County. )

Taken along Fall Creek, August 20, 1908, by Mr. Bartlett. In sandy
soil; rare.

Carex pallescens L. (Madison County. )

A sedge so named by Mr. Bartlett was taken by me August 10, 1904,
at a springy place by the File Works, Anderson. As this species
is not recorded from Indiana, additional material is desired, since
the material preserved is limited to the fruiting heads and perigynia
in my seed collection.

Carex cephaloidea Dewey. (Tippecanoe County. )

Mature fruit of a sedge was obtained by me June 7, 1904, along the
“Monon,” just south of Lafayette. The characters of the whole
plant were noted and later the material was referred to this species,

*“Flowering Plants and Ferns of Indiana inState Geol. Report, 1899; 626.

156

by use of Britton and Brown’s Flora. Specimens were not pre-
served, but the material placed in my seed collection has been
worked upon by Mr. Bartlett, who reports that as far as can be
determined from the fruiting heads and perigynia alone, my deter-
mination is correct. Only three or four tussocks of this sedge were
noted, and the plant may owe its presence there to railroad intro-
duction. The species has not been reported from the State.
Carex cephalophora Muhl. (Marion, Madison and Delaware Counties. )

Taken by me in these counties in 1904. Kosciusko and Vigo seem to

be the only other counties from which this species is recorded.
Carex festucacea Willd. (Pulaski County. )

Mature fruit, etc., so determined by me was taken one mile south of
Ripley post-office. Mr. Bartlett reports that this determination
also seems to be correct. The sedge was abundant along ditches
by the roadside, and ought to be common elsewhere in the State,
although as yet unrecorded.

Juncus tenuis anthelatus Wiegand. (Posey County. )

Plants so determined by Mr. Bartlett were sent to him by Dr. Schneck,
by whom they were collected June 7, 1881.

Juncus monostichus Bartlett.* (Madison County. )

This species was described from material collected by the writer Au-
gust 6, 1904, south of Anderson. Using Britton and Brown’s Flora,
IT could not identify the plant, but thought that it might be J. se-
cundus Beauy. or J. dichotomus Ell. I turned the material over to
Mr. Bartlett, who found it most nearly related to J. Greenei Oakes
& Tuckerman, as shown by its seed characters. Since the original
description was published, Mr. Bartlett has found that capsules of
the type contain at least as many as thirty seeds, which means a
greater productiveness than at first supposed. (C. P. Smith No. 140,
in Herb. Bartlett and Gray Herb.)

Juncus dichotomus Ell. (Posey County.)

Of the Schneck Junci, the only Wabash Valley plant labeled J. dicho-
tomus proved to be immature J. tenuis, so this species should be
dropped from the State Catalogue (p. 675).

Juncus brachycarpus Engelm. (Wabash County, II.)

In Dr. Schneck’s collection, from Mt. Carmel, Ill. Should be looked

for on the Indiana side of the river.

*Rhodora, 8: 50, 1904.

157

Nasturtium sessiliflorum Nutt. (Tippecanoe and Marion Counties. )

Reported in State Catalogue (p. 767) as ‘“‘occurring only in the south-
western counties.” I found it abundant over several acres of the
Wabash bottom-land south of Lafayette, June 2, 1903. Mr. Dorner
and I found also a few stray plants along the stream in “Happy
Hollow,” West Lafayette, later in the same month and year. The
plants were all matured and through blooming at these dates.
Mr. Bartlett took the species July 30, 1904, near Indianapolis, the
flowering period being then about over.

Cardamine parviflora Pursh. (Clark County. )

Found on the “Knobs” of the State Forest Reservation, May 26, 1904.
Plants on exposed knob-tops and slopes were simple or nearly so
and from one to three inches high. In more shaded spots, lower
down, were much-branched plants three to ten inches high. (C. P.
Smith No. 118, in Herb. Bartlett.)

Cardamine flexuosa With. (Tippecanoe and Marion Counties. )

Not in the State Catalogue, but may have been reported at the last
meeting of the Academy, of which the “Proceedings”? have not yet
reached me. Taken near Lafayette by Miss Gates, Mr. Dorner,
and myself, in May 1903. Taken about the same time, near Indi-
anapolis, by Mr. Bartlett. In looking through a collection made
several years ago, near Indianapolis, Mr. Bartlett noted one sheet
of this plant labeled ‘‘Sisymbrium officinale.”

Agrimonia pumila Muhl. (Marion County. )

Taken by Mr. Bartlett August 14, 1904, near Indianapolis. This adds
to my Clark County record of 1903.* Mr. Bartlett thinks that this
so-called species is a mere depauperate form of A. microcarpa
Wallr. I at first considered my Clark County plant to be a form of
A. mollis (T. & G.) Britton, with which I found it growing.

Lupinus perennis occidentalis Wats. (Laporte County. )

This is the form about Michigan City. Taken June 18, 1904; deter-
mined by Mr. Bartlett, and verified by Dr. B. L. Robinson. The
typical L. perennis L. was taken by me between Mishawaka and
South Bend, June 17, 1904 (No. 126). The variety blooms a little
later than the type. (C. P. Smith No. 130, in Herb. Bartlett.)

*Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci., 1903; 134.

158

Oxalis cymosa Small, (Marion County.)

This is the common “sour-grass” about Indianapolis. O. stricta L. is

also present, but is rather rare.
Gaura parviflora Dougl. (Marion County.)

Just before leaving Indianapolis, September, 1904, I ran across what
is believed to be this species along Harding Street between the
Terre Haute divisions of the Big Four and the Vandalia Lines.
The plant was abundant and conspicuous. It was in fruit and it
took some search to get even a belated sprig with a few flowers:
but such was obtained and referred to Britton and Brown’s Flora,
the identification seeming to be unquestionable. Specimens were
not preserved, except the mature fruit which is now in my seed
collection. This species is native from Nebraska and Oregon to
Mexico, and belongs to the list of western plants brought eastward
by the railroads. Its abundance at this place indicated that it
would hold its own if not soon exterminated by building and
street improvement.

Sanicula trifoliata Bicknell. (Marion County. )

Taken by Mr. Bartlett July 4, 1903. Reported from Indiana by Brit-
ton and Brown, but not included in the State Catalogue. Mr. Bart-
lett comments, “This plant grows on river bluffs and wooded hill-
sides, whereas 8S. Canadensis is generally found in wooded bottom-
land. The two species appear to intergrade somewhat with one
another, but never, so far as observed, with S. Marylandica.”

Apocynum cannabinum glaberrimum DC. (Marion County. )

Confined to gravel shores along White River. Taken August 24,
1903, by Mr. Bartlett.

Ruellia ciliosa Pursh. (Madison County. )

Specimens taken along White River, at Anderson, August 6, 1904,
have all the leaves verticileate in threes. Such variation from
strictly opposite leaves is very rare in the Acanthaceae. (C. P.
Smith No. 141, in Herb. Bartlett.)

Galium Claytoni Michx. (Marion County.)
Taken July 10, 1904, by Mr. Bartlett, near Indianapolis.
Vernonia Drummondii Schuttlw. (Marion County. )
Taken at Mallott Park, August 14, 1904, by Mr. Bartlett. This is a

State record and eastward extension of range.

Tue DrrRectTioN OF DIFFERENTIATION IN A REGENERATING
APPENDAGE.

By CHARLES ZELENY.

(Abstract. )

When an appendage possessing the power of regeneration is removed
a proliferation of new cells takes place at the cut surface. At first the
structures of the new appendage can not be recognized in this cell mass,
but gradually the various parts appear. The problem presented for solu-
tion is the determination of the manner of this differentiation. Do all
the parts of the new appendage appear simultaneously? If not, is the
progression of the differentiation from the. tip inward, from the base
outward, or from the middle toward both ends? Or finally, is the method
more complex than any one of these?

The antennule of the common brook sow-bug (Asellus) was chosen as
a suitable object for the study of the problem because the structural
differences in its various segments are unusually great. A study of the
early stages of the regeneration shows that the first segmental partitions
-appear at the base. These are followed very soon by others at the tip,
and from this time on the new segments appear near the middle of the
organ. ‘The region of new growth is then located in one of the middle
segments. Differentiation therefore proceeds from both base and tip
toward the middle of the appendage.

An examination of the growing antennule of young animals shows

the same method of development.

e

160

THE REGENERATION OF AN ANTENNA-LIKE ORGAN IN PLACE OF THE
VeESTIGIAL Eyre oF THE BLIND CRAYFISH.

By CHARLES ZELENY.

(Abstract. )

The right eye stalk was removed in nine specimens of the blind
crayfish. A year after the operation three were alive. Two of these
showed no regeneration, but the third had developed an antenna-like
organ in place of the removed one. The new organ consists of a slender
feeler-like process covered with hairs and has the appearance of a func-
tional tactile organ. ‘The terminal third is unsegmented but the basal
two-thirds is divided into segments.

The result is of interest because it furnishes the only instance as
far as I know of the development of an apparently functional organ in
place of a removed non-functional one.

161

CAMPOSTOMA BREVIS.

By J. D. HaSEMAN.

July 29, 1904, a class from the Indiana University Biological Station
took a trip to the Wabash River to a point three miles above Wabash,
Indiana. On examining the material I found, among many specimens of
Campostoma, that seven were different from the common species,
anomalum.

Later, I took a similar specimen from Deed’s Creek, which is a small
tributary to Tippecanoe River, three miles north of Winona Lake.

Type; a specimen 7.5 cm. long to base of caudal. No. JT 1 Uke
Wabash River.

Cotype; a specimen 9.25 cm. long to base of caudal. No. Is. Wis
Wabash River.

Cotype; a specimen 8.1 em. long to base of caudal. No. [aus
Wabash River.

Cotypes; 2 specimens 6.5 cm. long to base of caudal. No. Ur,

Wabash River.

Cotype; a specimen 7.8 em. long to base of caudal. No. —— I. U.,
Wabash River.

Cotype; a specimen 7 cm. long to base of caudal. No.
Deed’s Creek.

D. 8; A. 7; scales 7-53-6; 22 scales before the dorsal; lateral line com-

Hes Ws

plete (50 or 51 pores) equidistant from the dorsal and ventrals; depth
equals the length of the head and is contained 4.25 times in length of
body; eye 4-5 in head; a large anal papilla; a breast plate between ven-
trals; a dark band in middle of dorsal and a faint one in anal; the alimen-
tary canal is about 24 times the length of body.

The scales are more readily deciduous in anomalum than in the new
species, and anomalum is a little darker and has a darker peritoneum
than “brevis.’”’ The alimentary canal of the new species is not half as
long as that of anomalum and almost twice the diameter.

11—A. OF SCIENCE.

162

COMPARISON OF BREVIS AND ANOMALUM.

Campostoma | Campostoma
brevis. anomalum.

Length of body to base of caudal .... ¢2 mm. | 81.5 mm.
Length of head .......... PPE pth 19 mm. | 19) mink
PIAMEGEE Ol OVC. oe wba ee see taser 4.5mm. 4.5mm.
beng th-ofspectoral: .i.-is cee -on mers 14.5 mm. | 16 mm.
Ihenethvoh ventral ase racine deci oer 11.5 mm. | 12 mm.
Meng thvotiana lity mcwas, eee eyes 13° mm. | 13) mm
hen thr of dorsally ce ce ose ones 15.5 mm. | 15.5 mm.
Length of snout........... Mihiale ae 7 mim, | (6 waves.
Raystint dOrsallca.ict. ey eects soca see as 8. | 8.
Tate epiale 00) tee ata a oe etree bemricom oF ids ie
Scales along lateral line ............. 56 scales and 52 53 scales and 51

pores. The 93) pores.

mm. specimen

and all others

have 53 scales. |
Back of eye to origin of anal......... 47 mm. | 47 mm.
Greatest depthotebodyaeene eae 18 mm. | 20 mm.
Diameter of alimentary canal........ 15to2mm. | ‘mime
Length of alimentary canal .......... 150 mm. | 360 mm.*
Folds on or about alimentary canal ..; About 11 longi-) About 20 circu-

tudinal folds. lar folds.

“In a72 mm. specimen I got the entire intestines in a continuous string, which was
530 mm. long.

The chief differences between this species and anomalum are the
length, character and arrangement of the alimentary canal. It may be
named brevis in allusion to its comparatively short alimentary Uract.
The intestines of anomalum are always dark and break quite easily, while
those of the new species are white and not so fragile. The intestines of
anomalum contain principally mud, while those of the new species contain
practically no mud; they are also more solid and wrapped up in fatty
tissue. The alimentary canal of anomalum wraps around the air bladder

many times, while the alimentary canal of brevis does not go around the

163

air bladder more than one to two times; and the other folds are not spiral
but longitudinal. The eyes are not quite as dark (in two fresh specimens I
observed a reddish tinge in upper edge of the eye). Compared with
anomalum, the tail of the new species is a little stouter and its mouth
is a little larger and more terminal, and the abdomen is not so thick. It
has no dark vertebral line; no distinct opercular spot; and the lateral
line is more distinct and passes over and under the eyes. But as before
stated, the main difference is in the alimentary canal.

Anomalum is certainly a mud-eater, while the diet of brevis is not
altogether confined to mud; some had grassy substances in their ali-
mentary canals. The difference is not a sexual difference. I examined
several males and femaies of anomalum, and all of them had the peculiar
arrangement of the alimentary canal of the typical anomalum. Number
8095 of Indiana University Museum is identical with the new species.
It was taken in Tennessee by S. E. Meek, and was not examinec

internally.

165

Notes oN Some New or Lirrite-KNnown MEMBERS OF THE
InpDIANA FLORA.

By Guy WEST WILSON.

In preparing the present paper all notices of species of general and
well known distribution in the State have been omitted and only those
of more particular interest included. These plants naturally fall into three
groups: first, those which have not previously been recorded as members
of our flora; second, those which have been recognized as members of
our fiora since the publication of Dr. Coulter’s Catalogue; third, those
which are recognized in that catalogue, but known only from a limited
region of the State or from a, very few localities.

The nomenclature adopted is that of Britton’s Manual. Synonyms
are given only in case of species which bear a different name in Gray’s
Manual from that employed here, or which bave been previously reported
from the State under another name. 'The twenty-seven species which are
recorded for the first time as members of the Indiana flora are marked
with an asterisk (*).

1. Lycopodium porophilum Lloyd & Underwood. Rock Club-moss.

The only reference in any paper on the Indiana flora to this species
is by Dr. Coulter in the Proceedings of the Academy for 1901 (p. 301),
where the distinguishing characters of this species and its range are
quoted from Britton’s Manual with the following remark: ‘‘The familiarity
of Dr. Underwood with the Pteridophytes of the State places this refer-
ence beyond question.’ There is a specimen of this species in the Her-
barium of DePauw University, which was collected by Dr. MacDougal
and originally labeled L. selago. The specimen was collected at Fern,
Putnam County, where the plant grows sparingly on sandstone cliffs in

company with L. lucidulum. ‘This is the type locality of this species.

2. Canadensis Marsh Taxus. American Yew.

“Found only in Putham County, associated with T'suga canadensis,”
according to the State Catalogue (p. 618). A specimen in the herbarium
of the Eli Lily Company, collected by Walter H. Evans, extends its range
to the southern part of Montgomery County.

166

3. Echinodorus cordifolius (L.) Griesb. Upright Bur-head.

“Reported only from the southern part of the State and probably not
extending far northward, as the species is southern in its mass distribu-
tion.” (State Catalogue, p. 624+.) The only citation given is Vigo County.
This species occurs in abundance in a wet river bottom in Tippecanoe |

County, where it was collected in midsummer.

*4. 9 Panicum capillare gatlingeri Nash.
Hamilton County. with the typical form. Probably of wider distribu-

tion in the State.

5. Chaetochloa verticillata (L.) Seribn. (Ixophorus v.) Fox-tail Grass.
In waste places about dwellings, Tippecanoe County. Previously

reported only from Marion County. (State Catalogue, p. 630.)

6. Aristida oligantha Michx.

Common along the Monon Railroad in Putnam County, growing in
sandy soil. “Found in the counties bordering on the Ohio and lower
Wabash rivers.” (State Catalogue, p. 633.) Probably a railroad migrant,

but now well established.

*7. Bromus purgans L.

Putnam County, in thickets. In his elaboration of the Gramineae for
Britton’s Manual Nash has included this species with B. ciliatus, from
which it is easily distinguished by having the flowering glumes pubescent
throughout, remarking that ‘the form known as var. purgans * * *
may be distinct.” Later he has separated the two species in Small’s
Flora of the Southern States. Probably of general distribution in the
State.

*8. Bromus erectus Huds. Upright Brome-grass.
Tippecanoe County. This is the determination by the Bureau of Plant
Industry of a specimen sent by Mr. Fisher of the Experiment Station dur-

ing the present season.

9. Bromus tectorum L. Downy Brome-grass.

Putnam County, common along railroads and in waste places. Pre-
viously reported from Lake, Madison and Tippecanoe counties. (Proc.
Ind. Acad. Sei. 1900: 137; 1904: 301.)

*10. Lolium temulentum L. Darnel.
Tippecanoe County. Streets of Lafayette, apparently introduced with

grass seeds.

167

11. Hordeum pusilum Nutt. Little Barley.

Putnam County, common in waste places about towns. Previously
reported from Tippecanoe County by Dorner. (Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci.
1903: 118.)

12. Cyperus rivwaris Kunth. Shining Cyperus.
Putnam County, along streams. Previously reported ‘only from the
northern part of the State * * * Round Lake (Deam.).” (State Cata-

logue, p. 649.)

13. Kyllinga pumila Michx.

Putnam and Tippecanoe counties. Vigo County is the most northern
locality from which this species is recorded in the State Catalogue. (p.
651.)

*14. Scripus cyperinus eriophorum (Michx.) Britton.
Hamilton County, in swamps.

15. Eriophorum polystachyon L. Tall Cotton-grass.

“Occurring in very wet grounds in Putnam County, upon the authority
of Dr. MacDougal. So far as has come to my knowiedge, the only record
for the State.” (State Catalogue, p. 655.) The specimen in the herbarium
of DePauw University which should verify this citation is Seripus cyper-
inus. The species is to be retained as a member of our flora, however.

as it has been collected in Lake County by E. J. Hill.

16. Carex lupuliformis Sartwell.
Hamilton County. Previously reported only from the lake region of

northern Indiana. (State Catalogue, p. 658.)

17. Curex retrorsa Schwein.
Hamilton County. Previously reported only from the southwestern
part of the State. (State Catalogue, p. 658.)

*18. Carex typhnoides Schwein. Cat-tail Sedge.

Hamilton and Tippecanoe counties in swamps. A beautiful sedge
which has probably been confused with C. squarrosa, as the present
species is not given in Gray’s Manual. The material from the two loeal-
ities shows quite a wide range in the size of the spikes, the latter being
short enough to suggest a large head of C. squarrosa, while the former are

long enough to suggest a small cat-tail flag.

168

*19. Curex prasina Wahl. Drooping Sedge.
Putnam County, in wet woods and along streams.

*20. Carex amphibola Steud. Narrow-leaved Sedge.
Hamilton and Putnam counties, in dry soil.

21. Tradescantia brevicaulis Raf. Low Spiderwort.

Putnam County, on the brow of dry hills. Previously reported from
Tippecanoe County by Dorner. (Proce. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1908: 118.) These
citations materially extend the range of this species, which is given by

3ritton as Illinois, Kentucky and Missouri.

*22. Tradescantia refleca Raf. Reflexed Spiderwort.

Tippecanoe County, along the Wabash Railroad east of Lafayette,
where it is well established. Probably a railroad migrant, as its mass
distribution is western. This species is easily distinguished from its rela-

tives by its bluish, glaucous vegetation.

23. Juncus bufonius L. Toad Rush.

Hamilton, Putnam and Tippecanoe counties, common in wet places
along streets and highways. Previously reported only from the northern
part of the State. (Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1900: 188.)

*24. Juncus dudleyi Wiegand. Dudley’s Rush.
Hamilton County, in wet places. With the habit of J. tenuis, from
which it is readly distinguished by the yellowish, cartilaginous margins

of its leaf sheaths, the latter species having whitish, membranous margins.

*25. Juncus secundus Beauy. Second Rush.
Putnam County, very rare in dry pastures. The mass distribution is
east of the Allegheny Mountains, and its occurrence inland by no means

frequent.

26. Hemerocallis fulva L. Day Lily.
Tippecanoe County, along small streams. No locality in the northern

half of the State is given for this species in the State Catalogue. (p. 679.)

27. Populus grandidentata Michx. Great-toothed Aspen.

Clay, Hamilton and Putnam counties. The former citation is based
on a specimen in the herbarium of DePauw University which was col-
lected by Dr. MacDougal, while the other two are from personal collec-
tions. According to the State Catalogue (p. 701) this tree has been re-

ported only from the lower Wabash Valley.

169

28. Huimulus lupulus L. Hop.

This species is given in the State Catalogue as an escape from cultiva-
tion, which is doubtless true of some of the stations of this plant within
the State. In other localities it is evidently a native. Among these is a
region of very low bottom land near White River in Hamilton County,
where wild hops of a good quality are by no means rare. Some of the
older residents of the county say that in the days when the greater part of
this region was still unsettled that annual trips were made to the swamps
of this region for the purpose of gathering the family supply of hops.
This region furnished the hop vines which are still growing at some of

the older homesteads.

*29. Humulus japonica Sieb. & Zucc. Japanese Hop.
Tippecanoe County, about dumps in Lafayette, where it produces seeds
freely.

30. Asarum acuminatum (Ashe) Bicknell.

Putnam County, with A. canadensis and of about equal abundance.
First recorded as a member of our flora by Mr. Dorner, who collected it
in Tippecanoe County. (Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 19038: 118.)

31. Chenopodium murale L. Nettle-leaved Goosefoot.

Hamilton County. This weed has been introduced into the country
districts in the packing of grocery boxes. It is also quite Common in
waste places about towns. Previously reported from Tippecanoe County
by Mr. Stewart. (Proe. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1901: 283.)

32. Atriplex patula L. Spreading Orachne.

Hamilton, Marion and Tippecanoe counties. In the first two counties
this is a common weed along country roads while it is very common in
waste places about Indianapolis and Lafayette. According to Britton’s
Manual this species is confined principally to the eastern states. Pre-
viously reported from Marion and Steuben counties. (Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci.
1904: 303.)

*33. Atriplex hortense L. Garden Orachne.
Hamilton County, growing in waste places about towns.

34. Allonia nyctaginea Michx. Wild Four-o-Clock.
Tippecanoe County. Well established along the Wabash Railroad
both east and west of Lafayette. Previously reported from Hamilton,

170

Putnam and Marion counties. In all the localities which have come under
my observation this is truly a railroad weed. (State Catalogue, p. 733,
Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1904: 223.)

35. Fumaria officinalis L. Fumitory.
Putnam County. Previously reported only from the eastern part of

the State. (State Catalogue, p. 763.)

*36. Lepidium campestre (.) R. Br. Field Cress.
Putham County, roadsides.

37. Sisymbrium altissimum L. Tumbling Mustard.

Hamilton, Putnam and Tippecanoe counties. The first notice of this
species in Indiana occurs in the Proceedings of the Academy for 1901
(p. 300) where it is reported by Dr. Hessler as “growing along the State
Line Railroad east of Lake Cicott, Cass County,” and by H. W. Clark
from Marshall County. In the Proceedings for 1903 (p. 134) Mr. Smith
reports that a single specimen was taken along the Monon Railroad near
the State Fair Grounds at Indianapolis. These records point to a wide
distribution over the State as a railroad weed. This is one of the most
important migrants which has entered our State in recent years, as it is
one of the worst weeds of the grain fields of the northwest. So important
indeed is this weed that it has received considerable attention both in
experiment station and government publications. The station in Tippe-
canoe County indicates that the species has probably been brought in with

grain, as it is found along the switch by one of the elevators.

38. Barbarea stricta Andrz.

This species is admitted to the State Catalogue on the authority of
Dr. MacDougal, who reported it from Putnam County, but on account of
range probabilities “it is somewhat doubtfully included.” (State Cata-
logue, p. 766.) This species is quite abundant along a small stream in the

central part of Putnam County.

39. Boripa sinuata (Nutt.) A. S. Hitchcock.

This species is also admitted to the State Catalogue tentatively on
the authority of a specimen collected in Putnam County by Dr. Mac-
Dougal. (State Catalogue, p. 766.) This species is well established at a
single station on the Big Four Railroad west of Greencastle where it has

been able to maintain itself for the past fifteen years.

40. Curdamine pennsylvanica Muhl. Smooth Bitter Cress.

Previously reported by C. C. Deam from Wells County. (Proc. Ind.
Acad. Sei. 1900: 139.) This species is probably of general occurrence
throughout the State, but has been confused with ©. hirsuta, from which
it differs in the entire absence-of pubescence. The reference to the latter
species from Hamilton and Putnam counties in the State Catalogue (p.
768) should be transferred to the species under consideration as all the
material in the herbarium of DePauw University and in my own collection
from these localities belongs here. I have been unable to find a single

specimen of C. hirsuta in either county.

*41. Coringia orientalis (L.) Dumort. Hare’s Ear. Treacle Mustard
Putnam and Tippecanoe counties, along the Monon Railroad.

*42, Heuchera hirsuticaulis (Wheelock) Rydb. Hirsute Heuchera.

Putnam County, in dry woods and thickets. This species is intermedi-
ate between #. villosa and H. americana, from the former of which it is
easily distinguished by the shallow, rounded lobes of its leaves, and from
the latter by its hirsute scape. Previously reported from Steuben County.
(Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1904: 220.)

43. Ribes gracile Michx. Missouri Gooseberry.
Hamilton and Marion counties. This species is by no means common
in this portion of the State. Previously reported from Vigo, Tippecanoe

and Kosciusko counties. (State Catalogue, p. 778.)

44. Ribes rubrum L. Red Currant.
Putnam County, sparingly escaped from cultivation.

45. Fragaria americana (Porter) Britton. American Strawberry.
Putnam County, in hilly woods. Previously reported from Wells
County by Mr. Deam. (Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1900: 140.)

*46. Potentilla sulphurea Lam. Rough-fruited Cinquefoil.

Putnam County, streets of Greencastle and adjoining pastures, ap-
parently introduced in lawn grass seed and now well established in a
limited area.

*47. Rosa arkansana Porter. Arkansas Rose.
Putnam County. This western rose is established at a number of
points along the embankment of the Big Four Railroad east of Green-

castle.

172

*48. Pyrus communis L. Scrub Pear.

Hamilton and Putnam counties, in red clay soil. Within the course of
a few years abandoned fields in the hill counties are covered with a
growth of blackberries, hickory and pears. Fruiting trees are not un-

common.

*49, Amygdalis persica L. Peach.
Putnam County. A number of bearing trees are to be found about the
dumps and in the woods where seeds have been thrown.

50. Babtisia tinctoria (L.) R. Br. Wild Indigo.

Tippecanoe County. A single plant of this species was found late in
the fall at the brow of a hill in company with Andropogon and Lithosper-
mum. The only locality given in the State Catalogue is Steuben County.
(p. 799.)

51. Geranium pusilum Burm. f. Small-flowered Cranes-bill.

In the Proceedings of the Academy for 1908 (p. 118) Mr. Dorner says:
“In the summer of 1902, this was found growing among the grass on the
Experiment Station grounds. This one collection, however, without any
additional observations is hardly enough to admit it to the State flora.’
The station in question appears to be well established and spreading,

exterminating the grass.

*52. Oxalis corniculata L. Yellow Procumbent Wood-sorrel.

Putnam County, along the Big Four Railroad west of Greencastle.
Britton gives the range of this species as “in ballast about eastern sea-
ports, and frequently growing on the ground in greenhouses * * #*
tecently found in Ontario.” ‘The plant is also found in the warm regions

of both hemispheres.

53. Hypercum maculatum Walt. Spotted St. John’s-wort
Hamilton County. Previously reported from Steuben and Marion
counties. (State Catalogue, p. 839; Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1903: 1384.)

54. Sarothra gentionoides L. Pine-weed.
Fulton County. Material collected by Dr. Underwood is in the her-

barium of DePauw University.

*55. Viola palmata sororia (Willd.) Pollard.
Putnam County, in rich woods.

173

*56. Viola papilionacea domestica (Bicknell) Pollard. Field Violet.
Putnam County, in cultivated fields. Not common.

57. Passiflora lutea L. Yellow Passion Flower.

Putnam County, on the embankment of the Big Four Railroad west of
Greencastle. The most northern record for the State. (State Catalogue,
p. 846.)

58. Onagra biennis grandiflora (Ait.) Lindl. (Oenothera b. g.)

Putnam County, along the Big Four Railroad. The only previous
mention of this species in the State is found on page 179 of the Proceed-
ings of the Academy for 1901, where it is recorded that ‘‘a patch, prob-
ably of recent introduction, of var. grandiflora was found in moist ground
near Warsaw.”

59. Anogra albicaulus (Pursh.) Britton. Prairie Evening Primrose.

Tippecanoe County. The State Catalogue (p. 852) classes this species
as “an exceptional form occasionally occurring in the southern counties.
Its northern limit in the State seems to be Hamilton County.” This showy
flower was collected at two stations in the vicinity of Lafayette the past
summer. It was rather abundant in a meadow east of the city and several
plants were found along the Belt Railroad about a mile distant.

60. Circaea lutetiana L. Enchanter’s Nightshade.

The texts with one accord speak of the plants of this genus as white
flowered. This, however, is inaccurate, as the present species shows a
marked variation in this respect. While the flowers are typically white
there are all the intermediate shades up to a bright pink. The first part
of the flower to change its color is the outside of the sepals, then the en-
tire sepal, and last of all the petals. Dr. Coulter tells me that he has seen
this form rather frequently in this State and in New York during the past
summer. I have collected the red flowered form in a single locality in
Hamilton County.

61. Anagallis arvensis L. Poor Man’s Weatherglass.

Putnam County. A specimen of this species collected in Putnam
County by Miss Amelia Ellis is in the herbarium of DePauw University.
The most northern record given in the State Catalogue is Monroe County.
(P. 873.)

174

62. Obolaria virginica L. Pennywort.
Putnam County, on a wooded hillside. The most northern locality

previously reported in the State is Vigo County. (State Catalogue, p. 879.)

63. Gonobolus leavis Michx. (Ampelinus alibidus (Nuit) Briit.; Ensleniaa. )
Climbing Milkweed,

Hamilton and Tippecanoe counties. “Confined to the southern coun-
ties, its northern record being Vigo County.” (State Catalogue, p. S84.)
Each of these stations is of interest, as they very materially extend the
range of this species in the State. The Hamilton County locality was in
an abandoned roadway which had in latter years become a fence row.
The soil is red clay and the locality about a mile from the river. The
plant maintained itself for a number of years and began to spread to the
adjacent fields. It was at last eradicated by the landowner. The vineis
abundant in the bottoms of the Wabash River near Lafayette, where it
is a bad weed in cornfields. This species is probably of wider distribu-
tion in the State than the recorded localities would indicate, as it is very
easily overlooked on account of the superficial resemblance of its leaves to

those of Ipomoea pandurata with which it grows.

64. Macrocalyx nyctalea (L.) Kuntze.
Tippecanoe County. A clump of this plant was found near the bank
of the Wabash River near Lafayette. Previously recorded only from Vigo

and Iknox counties. (State Catalogue, p. 893.)*

*65. Stachys ambigua (A. Gr.) Britton. (S. hyssipifolius ambigua Gray. )

Putnam and Tippecanoe counties, in swamps and along streams.

66. Melissa oficinalis L. Bee Balm.
Hamilton County.

*67. Ruellia strepens micrantha (Engelm. & Gray) Britton. (R. s. cleistan-
tha A. Gray.)
Hamilton and Marion counties. This is the commonest form of this

species in the central part of the State.

68. Lonicera sempervirens L. Honeysuckle.
Tippecanoe County, on dry hillsides. Not previously reported ‘‘north
of Wayne County.” (State Catalogue, p. 944.)

*Since found common about Lafayette. June, 1906.

175

69. Tragopogon porrifolius L. Oyster Plant.
Putnam County, in waste places about Greencastle. Previously re-
ported from Wells County by Deam. (Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1900: 142.)

*70. Silphium terebinthinaceum pinnatifidum (Ell.) A. Gr.
Hamilton County. The citation of the species (State Catalogue, p.

982), is incorrect, as the specimens have laciniate radical leaves.

71. Helianthus petiolaris Nutt.
Tippecanoe County, along the Big Four Railroad west of Lafayette.
Previously reported from Lake County. (Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1900: 141.)

72. Synosma suaveolens (Li.) Raf.

Hamilton County. The material first collected of this species was
defective, and so determined as Coleosanthus grandiflorus and reported
to Dr. Coulter. Later collections of material made a correct determina-
tion possible. The latter species should, therefore, be stricken out of the
doubtful list of Indiana plants. (State Catalogue, p. 6O8.)

73. Centauria cyanus L. Blue Bottle.

Tippecanoe County, in cultivated ground and about dumps.

*74. Centauria solstitialis L. Yellow Star Thistle.

Dearborn County. This plant was sent to the experiment station
under date of October 16, 1905, by Lute Helm of Moores Hill, who re-
ported it as a weed in alfalfa fields. It is an old world plant which is
sparingly naturalized in the Southern States. It can be readily distin-
guished from ©. calcitrapa by its yellow flowers. This species is not in-
cluded in Britton’s Manual.

LAFAYETTE, IND., November, 1905.

Live

Rust or Hamitton anp Marton Countres, INprana.

By Guy WEST WILSON.

The present catalogue of Uredinales is based chiefly upon a collection
of thirty-eight species made in the southern part of Hamilton and the
northern part of Marion counties between the 3d of August and the 2d of
September of the present season. The hosts number forty-four, of which
Aster paniculatus and Avena sativa were the most prolific, the former
harboring three and the latter two species. Previously but two species,
Gymnoconia interstitialis and Dicaeoma canaliculata, had been collected
in this region. The former did not reappear in this collection, thus making
the total number of species to date thirty-nine. This, however, can be
regarded merely as a preliminary catalogue, as the collecting season was
too short and the time which could be devoted to the work too limited to
make an exhaustive collection. A number of other species have been
observed in previous years, but as no specimens were collected they are
not included in the present list. Careful collecting in this region would
probably double the number of species and would certainly greatly ex-
tend the list of hosts for those already collected, as the host plants of
forty-five other Indiana rusts as well as some thirty-five additional hosts
of those here enumerated occur in this region.

Of the species catalogued, twelve may be classed as injurious, as their
hosts are cultivated plants. A few other species occur upon plants which
are cultivated elsewhere, and in such localities would be properly classed
as injurious, while in the present instance they might even be considered
beneficial species. Among the injurious species first place belongs to the
grain rusts (Dicaeoma poculiforme and D.. rhamni), which often seriously
reduce the yield of small grains. Of scarcely less importance is the black-
berry rust (Gymnoconia interstitialis), which was disastrously abundant
in this region a half dozen years ago. So great was its ravages that a
considerable acreage of blackberries which were cultivated for market had
to be removed. The rust was not seen this season and was not abundant
last, so the fruitgrowers are again putting out blackberries.* The Carolina
poplar, which is used as a shade tree in towns, is sometimes seriously

*Abundant on wild sps.of Rubus in May, 1906.

12—A. oF SCIENCE.

178

affected by a rust (Mélampsora meduse). The clover rust (Caeomurus
trifolii) was found sparingly on alsike clover and abundantly on red
clover, causing some damage to the crop in places. The asparagus rust
(Dicaeoma asparagi), so far as it was observed, occurs only upon wild
plants, and as this vegetable is not cultivated extensively in the infested
region it has little economic importance save as a menace to the occa-
sional asparagus beds in the vicinity. The corn rust (Dicaeoma sorghi)
was very abundant this season, but is not credited with any serious dam-
age.

The tive remaining species are to be regarded as injurious or not ac-
cording to the host which they infest. The most important of these is
the bean rust (Caeomurus phaseoli), which was collected on corm beans
and seen abundantly on dwarf beans, which it damaged to a considerable
extent. This rust also occurs abundantly on a wild bean (Straphostyles
helvola) which is a serious pest in low river bottoms. The various wild
sunflowers as well as the common species (Helianthus annwis) are often
seriously affected by a rust (Dicaeoma helianthi). By the middle of Au-
gust the plants of the common sunflower in some sections of Indianapolis
were almost defoliated,. and such leaves as did remain were rendered
unsightly by this rust. Had only that multitude of sunflowers which
abound in the river bottoms and about the dumps of the city been in-
fected, this rust would deserve a place among the beneficial species. All
the wild species of aster are used for ornament, especially in country gar-
dens, hence the three aster rusts (Coleosporium solidaginis, Dicaeoma
asteris and D. caracisasteris) assume the role of injurious species. This
is especially true of the last species, which often sadly disfigures its host.

A number of species occur upon weeds of greater or less importance
and so are to be considered beneficial, inasmuch as they assist in keeping
these pests in check. Of these the rust of the wild morning-glory
(Dicaeoma convolvuli) and of the bind weed (Dicaeoma polygoni-con-
volvuli) are probably the most important, as their hosts are among the
worst of the rust-bearing weeds of the region. The rust of the cocklebur
and horse weed (Dicaeoma xranthii) also deserves mention. The iron weed
rust (Coleosporium vernonie) is common and often entirely covers the
lower surface of the leaves of its host to the serious injury of the latter.

At the time this collection was made conditions favored the detailed

study of the rust flora of a limited area, to wit, section 5, range 4 east,

179

township 17 north. This section has an area of about seven hundred acres
and is bounded on three sides and crossed from north to south by public
highways. The land is gently rolling with a sandy loam soil and a red
clay subsoil. In the northwest quarter is what was once a jake but is now
a flourishing cornfield, on the western border of which a few small bogs
remain unditched. This region is drained by a ditch which is partly open,
and which crosses the low black lands of the southeastern quarter of the
section. Of the forty or fifty acres of timber land scarcely an acre can be
said to be in a state of nature, while the greater portion of this area is
closely pastured and part of it is in process of clearing. The present pop-
ulation is sixty-six and is entirely agricultural. The staple crops are corn,
wheat, oats, timothy and clover. Some fruit and a few vegetables are
grown for market, but usually for home consumption only. The or-
namentals are those usually found about country homes. The farms
are kept as free from weeds as in the average Indiana neighborhood.
Such a region is scarcely an inviting collecting ground and would often be
passed by as unworthy of attention, yet it yielded thirty-six species of
rusts on forty-three hosts. These are marked with an asterisk (*) in the
catalogue.

The nomenclature of host plants is that of Britton’s Manual, while
the rusts are named in accordance with the usually accepted nomenclature.
Synonyms are given for hosts when they have a different name in Gray’s
Manual and for the rusts when the last published notice of these was
under a different name from that used in this catalogue. Reference to
previous publication in the Proceedings of the Academy are by year and
page. <A set of specimens of this collection has been deposited in the her-
barium of Dr. Arthur, who has kindly verified all determinations.

Order UREDINIALES.

Family COLEOSPORIACEAE.

1. COLEOSPORIUM SOLIDAGINIS (Schw.) Thuem.
*On Aster ericoides L. Hamilton.
*On Aster paniculatus Lam. Hamilton.
*On Solidago canadensis L. Hamilton, Marion.

2 COLEOSPORIUM VERNONLE B. and C.
*On Vernonia fasiculatus Michx. Hamilton.

180

Family MELAMPSORACEAE.
3. PUCCINIASTRUM AGRIMONIAE (DC.) Diet.
*On Agrimonia mollis (T. & G.) Britt. (A. parviflora Ait.) Ham-
ilton.
4. MELAMPSORA BIGELOWI Thuem. (M. farniosa (Pers.) Schreet. )
On Salix cordata Muhl. Hamilton.
*On Salix fluviatilis Nutt. (S. longifolia Muhl.) Hamilton, Ma-
rion.
5. MELAMPSORA MEDUSAE Thuem.
*On Populus deltoides Marsh. (P. monilifera Muhl.) Hamilton,
Marion.
Family PUCCINIACEAE.,
6. GYMNOCONIA INTERSTITIALIS (Schi.) Lagh. (Puccia interstitialis Schl. )
Tranzschel. )
*On all species of Rubus. Hamilton. 1894 : 157.
7. CAEOMURUS CALADII (Schw.) Kuntze.
On Arisaema dracontium (L.) Schott. Hamilton.
*On Arisaema triphyllum (L.) Torr. Hamilton.
8. CAEOMURUS EUPHORBL4 (Schw.) Kuntze.
On Euphorbia dentata Michx. Hamilton, Marion.
*On Euphorbia humistrata Engelm. Hamilton.
*On Euphorbia maculata L. Hamilton.
*On Euphorbia nutans Lag. (2. hypericifolia Gr.) Hamilton, Ma-
rion.
9. CAEOMURUS HEDYSARI-PANICULATI (Schw.) Arth.
*On Meibomia sessilifolia (Torr. ) Kuntze.? (Desmodium s.). Ham-
ilton.
*On Meibomia viridiflora (L.) Kuntze. (Desmodium v.) Hamilton,
Marion.
10. CAEOMURUS HOWEI (Pk.) Kuntze.
*On Asclepias syriaca L. (A. cornuti Dec.) Hamilton, Marion.
11. CAEOMURUS JUNCI (Schw.) Kuntze.
*On Jancus tenuis Willd. Hamilton, Marion.
12. CAEOMURUS PERIGYNIUS (Halst.) Kuntze.
*On Carex utriculata Boot. Hamilton.
13. CAEOMURUS PHASEOLI ( Pers.) Arth.
*On Phaseolus vulgaris L. Hamilton.
On Strophostyles helvola (L.) Britt. (Phaseolus diversifolius Pers.)
Marion.

14.

15.

16.

Lye

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

27.

28.

29.

CAEOMURUS POLYGONI ( Pers.) Kuntze.

*On Polygonum aviculare L. Hamilton.
CAEOMURUS TRIFOLII (Hedw.) Gray

*On Trifolium hybridum L. Hamilton.

*On Trifolium pratense L. Hamilton, Marion.
DICAEOMA ANGUSTATUM (Pk.) Kuntze.

*On Scripus atrovirens Muhl. Hamilton.
DICAEOMA ASPARAGI (DC.) Kuntze.

On Asparagus officinale L. Hamilton.

DICAEOMA ASTERIS (Duby) Kuntze.

*On Aster paniculatus Lam. Hamilton.

181

DICAEOMA CANALICULATA (Schw.) Kuntze. (Puccinia indusiata D. & H.)

*On Cyperus strigosus L. Hamilton. 1894 : 157.
DICAEOMA CARACIS-ASTERIS Ath.
*On Aster paniculatus Lam. Hamilton.
DICAEOMA CARAOIS-SOLIDAGINIS Arth.
*On Carex conoidea Schkuhr. Hamilton.
DICAEOMA CIRCAEAE ( Pers.) Kuntze.
*On Circaea lutetiana L. Hamilton.
DICAEOMA CONVOLVULI ( Pers.) Kuntze.
On Convolvulus sepium L. Hamilton, Marion.
DICAEOMA DAYI (Clint.) Kuntze. .
*On Sterionema ciliatum (L.) Raf. Hamilton.
DICAEOMA EMACULATUM (Schw.) Kuntze.
*On Panicum capillare L. Hamilton.
DICAEOMA HELIANTHI (Schw.) Kuntze.
On Helianthus annuus L. Hamilton, Marion.
On Helianthus tuberosus L. Marion.
*On Helianthus sp. Hamilton.
DICAEOMA LATERIPES (B. and R,) Kuntze.
On Ruellia stripens L. Hamilton.
DICAEOMA MENTHAE (Pers.) Gray.
*On Agastache nepetioides (L.) Kuntze. (Lophanthus n.)
ton.
*On Blephia hirsuta (Pursh.) Torr. Hamilton.
On Mentha canadensis L. Hamilton.
On Monarda fistulosa L. Hamilton.
DICcAEOMA MUHLENBERGIAE (A. & H.) Arth.
*On Muhlenbergia diffusa Schreb. Hamilton.

Hamil-

182

30. DICAEOMA POCULIFORME (Jacq.) Kuntze.
*On Agrostis alba L. Hamilton.
*On Avena sativa L. Hamilton.
*On Triticum vulgare L. Hamilton.
31. DICAEOMA PODOPHYLLI (Sciiw.) Kuntze.
*On Podophyllum peltatum L. Hamilton.
32. DICAEOMA POLOGONI-AMPHIBII ( Pers.) Arth.
*On Polygonum emersum (Michx.) Britt. (P. muhlenbergii Wats.)
Hamilton.
33. DICAEOMA POLYGONI-CONVOLVULI (Hedw.) Arth.
*On Polygonum convolvulus L. Hamilton, Marion.
34. DICAEOMA*PUNCTATUM (Str.) Arth.
*On Galium concinctum T. & G. Hamilton.
*On Galium trifidum L. Hamilton.
On Galium tinctorium L. Hamilton.
35. DICAEOMA RHAMNI (Gmel.) Kuntze.
*On Avena sativa L. Hamilton.
86. DICAEOMA SORGHI (Schiv.) Kuntze.
*On Zea mays L. Hamilton, Marion.
37. DICAEOMA TARAXACT (Plowr.) NWuntze.
“On Taraxacum taraxacum (L.) Karst. (7. officinale Weber.) Ham-
ilton, Marion.
38. DICAEOMA XANTHII (Schw.) Kuntze.
*On Ambrosia trifida L. Hamilton.
On Xanthium canadense Mill. Hamilton, Marion.
39. GYMNOSPORANGIUM GLOBOSUM Far.
*On Crataegus punctata Jacq. Hamilton.
LAFAYETTE, IND., November, 1908.

A TRAVERTINE Deposit IN TiIpPECANOE County, INDIANA.

By Guy WEST WILSON.

On the west bank of the Wabash River, near the Indiana Soldiers’
Home, a steep bluff skirts the stream. <A short distance below the **Tecum-
seh Trail’ the slope has been greatly modified by the action of the seep
water which trickles down the bank and makes a small marsh near the
level of the river. This region of a few square rods extent is the lodging
place of the leaves and twigs from the forest trees above, thus materially
impeding the flow of the small amount of seep water, which is highly
charged with carbonate of lime, causing it to make a deposit. As this
mass has been undistrubed for a number of years a considerable amount
of travertine has been formed. The surface, and consequently the more
recent, portion of the mass is quite soft. crumbling easily in the hand,
while the deeper and older portion is hard enough to resist a sharp blow
with a small hammer.

An examination of fragments of this travertine shows that at the
present time our own flora is being preserved in fossil form. The deposit
of lime is rapid enough to preserve the leaves and twigs of neighboring
trees and of the herbaceous plants of the immediate vicinity. The former
are principally oaks and maples whose leaves can be recognized both by
their form and by the arrangement of their principal veins. The latter
are chiefly grasses and sedges, although fragments of a few other swamp
plants also occur. In the more moist portions of the region a sterile moss
grows in abundance and is quickly encrusted with lime, forming a large
bulk of the travertine at this point, and resembling certain of the chain
corals (Halysitidae). Some of the moss noticed were growing at the tip
while completely encrusted at the base.

A large area of this portion of the formation is covered by a luxuriant
growth of one of the thalose liverworts, Conocephalus conicus Dumort. As
the substratum upon which this plant grows is less compact than in other
portions of the deposit its fossil remains, which are the most interesting

of all those which were noticed, are not so perfect as might have been the

184

case had the plant grown on a firmer substratum. Those found were
merely fragments of the tips of the thallus and were thin casts without
the markings which are characteristic of the upper surface, and without
the rhizoids of the under surface. There was, indeed, nothing to dis-
tinguish the casts from those which might have been formed by any mem-
ber of the group, except the fact that they agreed in size and form with the
unmixed colony of this species which grows immediately above them.

LAFAYETTE, IND., November, 1905.

185

Appitions To Inprtana Fora, No. 2.

By CuHas. C. DEAmM.

The species herein listed have been identified by competent authority,
and mostly by the Department of Agriculture, Washington, D. C.
Botrychium obliquum Muhl.

Wells County, September 13, 1896; Steuben County, August 21, 1904.
Dryopteris filix-mas (L.) Schott.

Wells County, July 20, 1902, This species was included in Coulter’s

list, but no locality was cited.
Dryopteris bootti (Tackerm. ) Underwood.

Wells County, July 23, 1905.
Panicum gattingert Nash.

Franklin County, August 23, 1903.
Panicum philadelphicum Trin.

Steuben County, August 11, 1903.
Panicum minimum (Engelm.) St.

Steuben County, August 12, 1903.
Eatonia pubescens Scrib. and Mer.

Orange County, May 25,°1901.
Elymus robustum Scrib. and Sml.

Wells County, September 1, 1904; Franklin County, August 23, 1903.
Juncus dudleyi Wiegand.

Steuben County, June 16, 1903.

Juncoides campestris multiflora Celak.

Orange County, May 25, 1901.
Tradescantia refleca Raf.

Steuben County, June 16, 1903.
Salix fragilis L.

Steuben County, August 13, 1903.
Salix fragilis X alba Wimmer.

Wells County, May 7, 1899.
Roripa sylvestris (.) Bess.

Fountain County, June 5, 1905.

186

Sophia intermedia Rydb.
Lawrence County, May 26, 1901.
Cassia medsgeri Shafer.
Wells County, August 27, 1905.
Meibomia illinoensis (A. Gray) Kuntze.
Steuben County, August 11, 1903.
Ptelea mesochora Greene.
Noble County, August 9, 1905.
Viola crassula Greene.
Steuben County, May 28, 1905.
Lactuca virosa Li.
Steuben County, August 12, 1903; Wells County, September 6, 1903;
Allen County, August 22, 1904.
Lactuca spicata integrifolia (A. Gray) Britton.
Wells County, September 17, 1905; Blackford County, September 3,
1905.
Euthania hirtella Greene.
Wells County, August 27, 1905; Steuben County, September 9, 1903;
Kosciusko County, August 24. 1905; Blackford County, September
3, 1905.
Mariana Mariana (.) Hill.
Wells County, July 10, 1905. This is a migrant, being found in a ecul-
tivated field.

_—
P
Ct |

Some Mownstrositres IN TRILLIUM.*

By FrRanNK Marion ANDREWS.

The genus Trillium occasionally shows interesting variations, not only
in the form, but especially in the number of the parts of the foliar and
fioral parts. These changes in form and phyllody are especially conspicu-
ous about this region in the species Trillium sessile and Trillium recurva-
tum. Of these some notable variations have been observed. Two speci-
mens were found growing within a meter of one another, one being Tril-
lium sessile and the other Trillium recurvatum. In both of these speci-
mens no trace of the usual stamens or pistil were present. <All parts of
the flowers were completely transformed into floral leaves, which in Tril-
lium recurvatum were considerably larger, with the exception of the
central ones, than the usual parts. of normal flowers growing near them.
In Trillium recurvatuim the number of these leaves in the flowers without
reproductive organs was twenty-three (23) and in the Trillium sessile
fourteen (14). No gradation from petals to stamens was observed in these
specimens, such as is sometimes seen in the Nymphaceae. The number of
sepals and floral leaves, the venation and other features were normal in
both of the specimens above named.

A third interesting variation was seen in another specimen of the
Trillium sessile in which the usual parts were present, but varied in

number. To enumerate

there were four floral leaves, somewhat smaller
than in normal specimens, three small sepals, four large partly greenish
petals, three small stamens and four styles. This change in the size and
especially the number of very close successive whorls of the foliar and
floral leaves was ail the more striking inasmuch as the individual members
of the whorls were very uniform in number and size. This particular
plant was considerably smaller than normal specimens.

Some other specimens of Trillium sessile and recurvatum showed a
sepal and petal either partly, or in some instances wholly, grown together.
In these cases the sepal half, which could be distinguished by its position,

was much greener than the other or petal part, which was partly white.

*See also Bott. Gaz., vol. 16, pp. 163 and 231, and vol. 19, pp. 137 and 460.

188

Trillium erectum also deviated somewhat from the usual appearance,
without a multiplication of parts but apparently merely a partial substitu-
tion. For example, one specimen had the usual floral leaves, three sepals,
five petals, four stamens and two styles. In all other respects these plants
were normal. Some flowers of the other species have shown a tendency
to unite two or more of the parts. Some slight deviations in Trillium
nivale have been observed in the way of a union of the floral parts.

It would be an interesting point to determine whether or not the plant
arising from a rhizome showing such changes as here mentioned would
appear afterward. Accordingly experiments of this nature are in progress.

189

A NaturaL Proor Tuat THE Root Tre ALONE Is SENSITIVE TO
THE GRAVITATION STIMULUS.

, By FRANK Marion ANDREWS.

Pfeffer* and Czapek* have demonstrated that it is the root tip only
that is sensitive to the stimulus of gravitation. In order to accomplish
this end they resorted to the following method. Glass tubes of such a
diameter as would just fit over the end of the root tip were made by draw-
ing out thick-walled glass tubes. The tubes thus obtained were bent into
an L shape, had a total length of about three (8) mm., and weighed about
thirty (30) milligrams. They were closed at one end and left open at the
other; each limb of the L-shaped tube made in this way had a length of
1.5 mm. The inside diameter of the tube depended on the size of the root
for which it was intended. It was necessary in all cases to have this
glass tube fit the root Joosely. It was connected to a piece of cork and
the germinated seedling also fastened to the same cork in such a way
that the root tip projected into the glass cap about to the bend. The
whole being rotated in a klinostat for some hours the root, freed of the
stimulus of gravity, grew into the above mentioned glass cap and finally
assumed its L-shaped form. When removed from the klinostat and placed
with the curved tip of the root vertical and the rest of the root horizontal
no geotropic curvature took place, which shows that since the tip of the
root was constrained from bending, the sensitiveness of geotropic stimulus
must be located there, else it would have bent at a point outside the glass
tube. I have accidentally found a natural proof of this admirable and con-
clusive discovery of Pfeffer and Czapek. In some germinating corn I
observed one instance in which the root of the embryo had not freed
itself in the usual way, but instead, the scutellum was broken about mid-
way and carried down by the root on its tip as a mass of tissue. The
outer coats were not broken, and these adhering about the scutellum on
one side in the usual way made the mass so strong that the root could not
grow out of it—at least it did not do so. This mass of tissue when re-
moved weighed fifteen (15) milligrams. The root had turned and grown

*Jahr f. wiss. Bot., 1895, Bd. 27, p. 243, and 1900, Bd. 35, p. 318.

190

in this mass toward the back of the scutellum at a right angle a short
distance from the tip; upon removing all the mass from the root tip, which
could be done quite easily, this curving was plainly evident. The root was
fixed in a moist atmosphere on a sheet of cork, with the curved part in a
vertical position and the rest of the root in a horizontal position, but no
geotropic curvature took place. During the time the root was kept in this
position it grew almost as rapidly as the control specimens which were
used to estimate the growth. While this accidental occurrence of a cap-
like mass of tissue on the root-tip showed and verified the same effect
on geotropic curvature, as was proved by using the glass caps, neverthe-
less it eliminated all the dangers of traumatic effects, to which the glass-
cap method might render these parts liable in the absence of skillful

manipulation, upon which experimentation is being conducted.

191

PLASMODESMEN.

By FRANK MARION ANDREWS.

It has been shown by W. Gardiner,’ Strasburger,* Kohl,? and others
that plasmodesmen are not confined to the pits in the cell walls but that
they may also penetrate the cell walls themselves at other places. Excel-
lent names for the plasmodesmen penetrating the cell wall in the places
above mentioned have been chosen by I<ohl.*| Those which pass through
the pit membrane he calls aggregated and these which pass through the
unpitted membrane solitary. Strasburger’? has recommended for all these
protoplasmic connections the term plasmodesmen. It has also been shown
that the plasmodesmen arise independently of cell division, for in the
dermatogen of a phanerogam, in which only anticlinal and radial walis
are formed these plasmodesmen are present in the walls between the der-
matogen and the next inner layer of cells.

The plasmodesmen arise, according to Strasburger, secondarily in a
very early stage in the formation of the membranes, before the beginning
of their secondary thickening. Pfeffer’ states—according to reports—that
a subsequent formation of very thin plama connections is just as possible,
as the larger fusion of protoplasts, which is made possible by dissolution
of adequate parts of the cell wall.

I have investigated the occurrence of plasmodesmen to some extent
in the endosperm of Phoenix dactylifera, and find both the solitary and
aggregate forms present in large numbers.

Vig. 1 represents a cross-section of a cell of the endosperm of this
plant before treating with any reagent. The pits are large and numerous
and are generally somewhat enlarged where the ends come together with
the corresponding ones of contiguous cells. The walls are rather thick
and hard. Fig. 2 is a longitudinal section of the endosperm of Phoenix

*Gardiner W. Arbeiten des Botanischen Institutes in Wurzburg 1888, Bd. 3, p. 52.

*Strasburger Ueber Plasmaverbindungen pflanzlicher Zellen Jahr fiir wis. Bot. 1901,

Band 36, p. 493.

*Kohl-Ber. d. Deutsch botan. Gesellsch. 1900, p. 364.

*Kohl-Ber. d. Deutsch botan. Gesellsch. 1900, p. 364.

*Strasburger-Ueber Plasmaverbindungen pflanzlicher Zellen Jahr fiir wis. Bot. 1901,

Band 36, p. 503.
°Pfeffer-Pflanzenphysiologie zweite Auf. 1904, Bd. IT, p. 219.

192

dactylifera in which the wall has been greatly swollen and the plasmodes-
men stained to make them more plainly visible. In this case I treated
the specimens according to Gardiner’s method first by allowing them to lie

for a while in iodine and potassium iodide and then adding chloriodide of

zinc and allowing it to act for twelve hours. The sections were then
carefully washed in water. The walls were found to be strongly swollen
to at least twenty-five times their original thickness where the pits oc-

curred. In only a few instances were any of the aggregate plasmodesmen

Fig. 2.

found broken where they entered the pit of the cell. Sometimes this
occurred, especially in the solitary plasmodesmen, and a small filament
could be seen as in Fig. 2. Attempts were made to bring these plas-
modesmen more plainly to view by the use of Hoffman’s blue, but this did

not succeed very well. I found after considerable experimentation that

193

a solution of clove oil eosin stained them densely and then made them
plainly visible. The solution I used was made by adding a small quantity
of eosin to the pure clove oil. This stains very quickly and must therefore
only be allowed to act a few seconds. The aggregate plasmodesmen did
not show themselves in this specimen to be perfectly smooth threads of
protoplasm but were coarsely granular or appeared considerably thickened
at irregular intervals. (Fig. 2.) The solitary plasmodesmen, however,
were more uniform. This appearance of the plasmodesmen was only to be
seen to good advantage under very high magnification. The plasmodes-

Fig. 3.

men shown in Fig. 2, for example, were magnified 2,250 times. The en-
larged ends of the pits above referred to are better shown here than in
Vig. 1.

The plasmodesmen in the cortex of Aesculus flava were also examined.

To do this I removed the outer layers down to the green tissue, and the
thin sections obtained there were treated in the same way as those of the
endosperm of Phoenix dactylifera, except that instead of using chloriodide
of zine, sulphuric acid was employed for swelling. Clove oil eosin was
also used here with good results. Hoffman’s blue was also more effective
than in the first case mentioned. The plasmodesmen of both kinds were
made visible here, although the solitary ones were, as usual, more difficult
to distinguish than the aggregate ones. Some experiments in demonstrat-
ing the plasmodesmen in moss leaves were also performed. This was done
by plasmolysis. The leaves of Funaria hygrometrica, and often whole

13—A. OF SCIENCE.

194

plantlets as well, were placed in a 17 per cent. solution of cane sugar and
left for a few minutes. This was sufficient to bring about a plasmolysis
in all the cells and make the plasmodesmen evident when stained. This
is shown in Fig. 3. The fine strands of protoplasm ran from the proto-
plasts to pits in the wall and from there through the wall to the opposite
protoplasts. If the protoplasts were contracted too much by plasmolysis
they were broken and the fragments could often be seen (Fig. 3).

When moss-cells were plasmolized in the way above mentioned they
were fixed in a 1 per cent. solution of chromic-acetic acid, then washed
in water and the walls swollen in the usual way.

The walls must be swollen considerably in Funaria hygrometrica to
locate exactly the passage of the plasmodesmen. Although the proto-
plasmic fibers running from the contracted protoplasts were visible even
directly after plasmolyzing they were made much more evident by stain-
ing with clove oil or Hoffman’s blue.

The importance of plasmodesmen uniting the various protoplasts of
a plant is evident in several ways. Experiments have been made to show?
that stimuli may be transmitted through them. Even certain nutrient sub-
stances* may pass through them in mass or by diffusion, and Miehe® has
even observed that nuclei may under certain conditions pass from one ¢ell
to another by means of the pores of the plasmodesmen.

1Townsend, Jahr. f. wiss. Bot. 1897, Bd. 30, p. 484.
*Pfeffer, Pflanzenphysiologie zweite Auf. Bd. II, p. 225.
*Miehe, Flora, p. 115.

195

Tue Errect of ALKALOIDS AND OTHER VEGETABLE POISONS ON
PROTOPLASM.

By FRANK MARION ANDREWS.

It has not yet been satisfactorily determined whether the protoplasm
of plants is affected by alkaloids and other vegetable poisons,* and accord-
ingly I have begun an investigation of this subject. I was enabled to
begin this work at the Marine Biological Station at Wood’s Hole, Mass.,
during a part of the summer of 1905, through the courtesy of the Carnegie
Institution of Washington, D. C., which kindly placed at my disposal one
of the rooms which it controls at that place. Naturally only a beginning
could be made in this work which I am pursuing further now, but the re-
sults thus far obtained are not without interest.

Many alkaloids are only slightly soluble in cold water, as for example,
strychnine, of which only about one part in seven thousand (7,000) is
soluble in water. The salts of the alkaloids are, however, much more sol-
uble in cold water, both fresh and sea water.

My first experiments were carried out with strychnine sulphate on
volvox. This was found in great abundance in a pond some distance from
the station. When the volvox was put in a solution of strychnine sul-
phate containing .125 gr. in 875 ce. of fresh water the movement of the
plant was at first accelerated, but it was killed by this solution in one
hour. The color of the vegetative cells became lighter and when colonies
were present these were a little darkened. I then placed a drop of water
on the slide and to this I added some crystals of the strychnine sulphate.
The volyox individuals at first swam to these dissolving crystals, but
coming too near entered a place where the concentration was fatal in five
minutes. When put in a solution containing .01 gr. of strychnine sulphate
in 100 ce. of water volvox was killed in one hour and thirty minutes.
When placed in a solution containing .01 gr. of strychnine sulphate in
1,000 ce. of water volvox was killed in one hour and forty-five minutes.
At the expiration of twenty-four hours the volvox individuals were per-
fectly discolored and disorganized. Distilled water does not affect volvox
outside of the effects of nutrition, if properly prepared.

* Pfeffer Pflanzenphysiologie zweite Auf. 1904, Bd. II, p. 333,

196

Other fresh-water forms such as Oscillaria, Chrococcus, Cosmarium,
Closterium, Desmids and Diatoms were not killed in a solution of strych-
nine sulphate containing one gr. in 1,000,000 cc. of water. The movement
of the protoplasm even did not stop. I have not yet determined the exact
lethal concentration of strychnine sulphate for these forms.

Marine forms of the Cyanophyceae (as Oscillaria and Rivularia); also
Diatomes; Chlorophyceae, as Cladophora and Enteromorpha; Brown Algae,
as Ectocarpus; and Red sea weeds, as Polysiphonia and others were not
killed in a solution of strychnine sulphate having one part in 100,000 of
water. Nor was the movement of the protoplasm stopped by this concen-
tration. A solution of the same having one part in 10,000 also had no
effect.

A solution of the same haying one part in 1,000 also had no effect.
A solution of the same having one part in 250 killed all the plants in
twenty-four hours, but the animals which happened to be present were
killed in seven hours.

There are only a few animals that can bear transferring from salt to
fresh water and vice versa. One of these is the form Artemia salina,
which may bear such treatment, but in so doing it assumes a somewhat
different size and shape. Asa rule animals that are transferred from salt
to fresh water or yice versa, show at first accelerated movements, but
these become rapidly slower and slower, death ensuing in most instances
in a few seconds.

All the marine forms experimented with were killed in two hours by
a solution of strychnine sulphate containing .5 of a grain in 100 cc. of
water.

The above mentioned marine forms were killed in a solution of co-
caine containing .5 of a gram in 25 cc. of water, in two and one-fourth
hours.

A Specimen oF Kirtianp’s WARBLER, SECURED May 13, 1905.

By D. W. DENNIS AND LOREN C. PETRY.

This specimen was secured May 15, 1905, rather late in the afternoon,
probably 5:30 p. m. The place was the northern end of a thicket on the
farm of W. W. Wirkpatrick, about five miles east of New Paris, Ohio.

This part of the thicket is composed principally of second growth,
with no trees more than 25 or 30 feet in height. The particular place
where the specimen was secured is near the edge of the thicket within a
few feet of an open field.

At no time while the bird was seen did it go more than from eight to
ten feet from the ground. It flitted about the branches of the bushes in
the usual manner of warblers, and after going over one, would fly directly
to the next, and in a similar manner, go over it.

A teetering motion of the tail was constantly kept up, and was very
noticeable. In fact, it was this that first attracted our attention. While
moving about the branches, the tail was almost constantly moving up and
down. This mction was not a motion of the body, as in the sandpipers,
but of the tail alone.

The bird was not shy, and permitted us to approach within 20 or 25
feet, without flying or showing any alarm. At this distance it was easily
possible to see the black spots upon the yellow underparts, without a glass.

The specimen taken was a female, and is preserved in the private col-
lection of D. W. Dennis. Not more than 25 specimens of this bird have

been seen; its biography is nearly a blank,

coe ieee . i aa

et ee

fe AR. if zis tenn are et

“ake. sits ees #3 bg ee ea
Sea) ee Ga ees

SAfets ‘Tess Ts Bs tits
sy Saseny: ‘Sit. saute
pnts ind % ce at Sere ;

A >* te za wae za
= = ¥
6s Hiss Uae, Geb Sees
> : ‘s
G2 Sactorin ohh So thie
coe —
Ci POWaay See eee, ee
ry et tres ites BCsS
eis 7 z HIE Sts 71ty
fyi, is raf Fi spark
art = 252 14). as - £6 ’
td a ¢3a3s- RA ar osl; = —e yeaye re Wied
ica, apt re YT Sozckity sets Vy, Sets 2 lt apees Ste © ith =e
= ei Sl ireztti Zar iver. saline Fe mites atresia
7 s “eS
r 6 4 ike mute s =I?
o eS PESTO ge ime; 2yn hey Se 7 - <i ,
hex Ss i: ey <a eres
=
°
5 “

199

NITRIFYING BAcTERIA.
By A. J. BIGNEY.

Everybody is searching for the wealth of the world. The scientist,
however, is the one who usually makes the actual discoveries. He may not
reap much of the result himself, but the world is richer and better for his
having lived in it.

The past few years has seen much wealth added to Indiana through
the labors of her scientific men. New sources of income will be found and
new applications made as time passes on.

To the most casual observer it is certainly true that southern Indiana,
in particular, has too much abandoned land. Waste fields are to be seen
on every hand in many communities, and in some localities most of the
land has been turned over to the free action of the elements and to the
rabbits. As the population increases this land will be needed. The people
are not much concerned now, because there is an abundance of land in
the country. If their farms become too poor they will sell out and move
into other localities or into other States. The time is coming when there
will not be the inducements in other places, so the farmers will be com-
pelled to earn a livelihood on the old farm. Even now it would be less
expensive and much more satisfactory, especially to their good ladies, to
remain on the old farm and transform their worn-out land into a veritable
garden. The Germans are doing this very thing now on the hill lands
about some of our rivers. This shows that it can be done when our people
are willing to devote themselves to the task and not be too anxious to
become rich too quickly and with as little labor as possible. When this
waste land is put under a high state of cultivation, it will make the coun-
try more beautiful and will thus be an incentive to the agricultural classes.
Who does not feel encouraged when travelers compliment a people on their
beautiful country ? 7

The Department of Agriculture of our Government is accomplishing
wonders in developing new plans for work through their laboratories at
Washington and in the experiment stations. The farmers are being

stimulated to take an interest in scientific farming and the work is being

200

ride more practical and more interesting and also more popular. When
they see that no line of work really needs more knowledge and skill it
will be a strong inducement to our young people to think of spending
their time in developing our country along agricultural lines.

The great need that may be seen in many parts of southern Indiana
is the formation of a proper vegetable mould. This means that there
must be a greater amount of proteid substance in it. This further means
that nitrogen is the element most needed and the one most difficult to
secure. Since about four-fifths of the air is composed of nitrogen it would
seem that we should not lack for this substance. This source of wealth
had remained hidden for centuries. Not until recently did we learn of
the part that the leguminous plants play in this problem. Now we know
that this class of plants is the one that can make use of the nitrogen of
the air for the manufacture of proteid substances of plants.

Fewer than ten years have elapsed since the noted German scientists
Nobbe and Hiltner suggested that pure cultures of soil bacteria might be
used to inoculate new soils. German experiments continued to be made,
but they were quite unsatisfactory.

In 1901 the Department of Agriculture of the United States began
investigations in its laboratory of plant physiology to find an artificial
medium in which bacteria would grow and still preserve its power or even
to intensify its qualities. Furthermore the bacteria must have the power
to penetrate the roots of the plants, because it is impossible to fix nitrogen
unless they are stimulated by the activities of the plant itself. The result
of this investigation was a liquid culture. This culture is put up in three
packages, Nos. 1, 2, and 3. No. 1 consists chiefly of sugar with a little
potassium phosphate and magnesium sulphate: No. 2 consists of cotton
laden with bacteria. No. 3 contains ammonium phosphate. No. 1 is
dissolved in one gallon of water and the bacteria placed in it. This must
be kept in a warm place, the temperature of which is between 70 and 80
degrees. At the end of twenty-four hours No. 3 is added and kept twenty-
four hours more under similar conditions. The water by this time will be
quite milky. Examination with the microscope reveals myriads of bac-
teria in active state.

The seed is now thoroughly moistened with the water and spread
out to dry as quickly as possible. This liquid culture will retain its
qualities for about forty-eight hours. The inoculated seed may be kept

201

however for several weeks, or even for months, before sowing and still
retain all its power of growth.

It has been demonstrated that each legume has its own particular
kind of bacteria, hence the Department of Agriculture always desires
to know what seed is intended to be used.

These cultures were completed by the spring of 1904 and sent out to
12,000 farmers in every State in the Union and in many of the foreign
countries including New Zealand, South Africa and Australia. This gave
every variety of climate and soil for making the test and also all
classes of farmers for trying the experiment, whether particularly
adapted to such work or not. Of course all did not report the result, but
the reports that were sent in showed an increase of 79 per cent. in the
production. The rate of increase for the different legumes was as follows:
Alfalfa, 73 per cent.; red clover, 92 per cent.; garden peas, 87 per cent.;
common bean. SU per cent.; cow pea, 85 per cent.; soy bean, 51 per cent.;
hairy vetch, 75 per cent., and crimson clover, 88 per cent. This certainly
indicates a remarkable result and plainly shows that there is something
in this method of increasing the fertility of the soil.

My own experiments extend over only the past season. I ordered my
supplies in November, 1904, and they were sent to me February 1, 1905.
I inoculated four and one-fourth bushels of red clover secd with two sup-
plies of bacteria. I sowed the seed on 25 acres of land, most of which was
in wheat. For comparison I sowed a strip that was not inoculated. The
sowing occurred between April 4 and 10. Anxiously I watched the grow-
ing seed. AS soon as the nodules began to form I could notice more
nodules on the inoculated plants than on the uninoculated ones. This
increase has continued throughout the season. In comparing the stand of
clover with neighboring fields it is plainly seen that it is better, the plants
more vigorous and healthful.

My experiments have not been as successful as I anticipated, yet I
feel that it has been very encouraging and that it can be of service to the
farmers in southeast Indiana. Many farmers already in various parts of
the country have succeeded in getting a stand of clover or alfalfa where
it had previously been impossible to get it to grow.

It might also be stated in this connection that soil which has been
growing clover becomes inoculated, and this soil can be sprinkled over
another field and it will become inoculated. When the soil is once inocu-

202

lated it remains rich in these germs and thus insures the perpetuity of the
power of gathering nitrogen from the air. It may take a number of years
to make the people see the advantage of this inoculation, but when it is
shown that there is an actual increase in the production, the farmers will
not be slow to take up with the method. I expect to continue my experi-
ments, and already have supplies engaged for another season.

November 29, 1905.

203

A New Form or MicrotromMe KNIFE.

By E. G. Martin.

The writer has been much impressed, both as student and teacher,
with the great waste of energy and time involved in keeping microtome
knives in satisfactory condition for use. In every biological laboratory the
eare of these knives is recognized as constituting a serious drain upon the
student’s time. In most undergraduate laboratories there is also apt to
be more or less disposition to use poorly sharpened knives, rather than
take the trouble to put them in satisfactory condition, with the inevitable

MicrotToMe Knire.—In this drawing the two blades are shown clamped together in
position for use, but without the cutting blade inserted. When the set-screw is loos-
ened the front blade falls forward far enough to allow of the insertion of the cutting
blade.

consequence of inferior sections. In order to insure that the student shall
always be provided with a satisfactory cutting edge, and at the same time
to avoid the expenditure of time necessary when the usual form of knife
is used, the writer devised the instrument herein described for use in the
biological laboratories of Purdue University.

The apparatus makes use of the patent safety razor blades which are
now on the market at a moderate price. The form for which this instru-
ment is adapted is the one which first appeared on the market. The

2.04 ; : ‘ eran

device consists essentially of a stout blade split lengthwise in a plane
passing through the cutting edge, and haying the two parts hinged to-
gether at the side away fram the cutting edge. By means of a setscrew
the two parts of the blade may be firmly pressed together and held so.
The thin blade, which is to be used as the actual cutting edge, is placed
in position between the two parts of the supporting blade with its edge
slightly projecting, and is firmly clamped there by tightening the set-
screw. The instrument is then ready for use. For the details of struc-
ture the reader is referred to the accompanying drawing.

The device is adapted for microtomes, either of the Minot form or the
Bausch & Lomb sliding form. In the author’s-hands it has cut as good
sections with either instrument as he has ever gotten with the best knives
of the old form. The capacity of the knife is limited by the shortness of
the blade, but for practically all student work it will be found ample.
The instrument possesses the great advantage that each student cau pro-
vide his own cutting edge, the cost being trifling, and thus the confusion

of having a number using the same knife is avoided.

; . 205

Tue PRESENT STATUS OF THE CHROMOSOME CONTROVERSY.

By D. M. Mor;rrieEr.

(Abstract. )

Cytologists are now agreed that the first mitosis in the spore mother-
cells of higher plants is a “reducing” or qualitative division, the chromo-
somes being bivalent, and that the second mitosis is equational. Two
views, however, are held concerning the manner in which the bivalent
chromosomes are formed. Gregoire and his associates; Allen, and Stras-
burger and his students, maintain that the double chromatin thread ap-
pearing after synapsis is not the result of a longitudinal splitting of a
single spirem, but the approximation of two spirems, one presumably
paternal and the other maternal. On the other hand, Farmer and Moore
and others, among whom is the writer, assert that the double spirem is
due to a longitudinal splitting, which, as the spirem shortens and thickens,
becomes indistinguishable except in certain cases. Parallel portions of the
spirem, or a part of the same, now approximate, forming loops, the paral-
lel sides of which are twisted upon each other. This looping or approxima-
tion of parallel portions of the spirem is accompanied by a second contrac-
tion resembling a partial synapsis. The result is that near the center of
the nucleus there is formed a closely entangled or balled up mass of the
spirem from which extend somewhat radially the loops or approximated
parts of the spirem having a straighter course. Each parallel part of a
loop is, for example, a chromosome, the two forming a bivalent chromo-
some. The spirem now segments transversely, and in case the parallel
sides of the loops or the otherwise approximated parts of the spirem ad-
here at one end, as is very frequently true, the spirem may be said to
segment into pieces equal to the length of two chromosomes. These two
chromosomes, each of which is split lengthwise, now come to lie side by
side, or to form rings, loops, X’s, Y’s, ete. (Lilium, Podophyllum.) The
longitudinal splitting of the daughter segments observed during the
meta, or anaphase, is, according to this view, the original longitudinal

fission of the early prophase.

206

Assuming the individuality of the chromosomes, and that one-half
is paternal and one-half maternal, Gregoire, Allen, Strasburger and others
claim that the double spirem, developing in the prophase of the first
mitosis, consists of the paternal and maternal spirems which have been
brought together side by side during synapsis. But according to the view
of Farmer and Moore and the writer, the double spirem is produced by a
longitudinal splitting, and that it is composed of paternal and maternal
chromosomes united end to end.

207

Tue BLoomina of Cercis CANADENSIS IN SEPTEMBER.

By D. M. MorrTier.

(Abstract.)

A small tree of Cercis Canadensis, or common red bud, growing on
the campus of Indiana University was observed bearing many perfect
blossoms upon three or four of its larger branches, September 20. The
flowers were perfectly normal both as to structure and color. They re-
mained on the tree for about the same length of time as in the spring.
No fruits were formed however,

bo
So
19 2)

A PercuLiIaAR MONSTROSITY IN THE SEEDLING OF Zea Mays.

By D. M. MotTriEr.

(Abstract.)

A seedling of Zea Mays was exhibited, which consisted of two per-
fectly developed shoots about eight centimeters long and two primary
roots. Each primary root bore several secondary roots, and secondary
roots had also put in an appearance at the lower nodes of each shoot.
The double members arose just above and below the first node of the
embryo, and apparently by the respective bifurcation of the shoot and
primary root.

209

B. Tue Leespura Swampe.*

By WILL Scott.

Northern Indiana is dotted with lakes and swamps. This land surface
is the result of the uneven deposits of the ice sheet and the modification

of these by the processes of erosion, sedimentation and plant deposition.

I ¥
l IRIS
|

4 $
|

iO

jo Ruus

WwW
ie

pe)
ia OPEW FIELD
ROSE
LARCH

MAP OF
LEESBURG SWAMR

LOCATION imi Sof
Leesburg Wosuscole Ind

SCALE: IMM = 1 thasy
BOUNDARY OF SWAMP. —m—

—

ILLOW 8 MAPLE Wir,

OAKFOREST

Since the swamp illustrates so well the process through which present
conditions came to exist, it was thought worth while to select a typical
one, study its flora, physiography and plant depositions, and from these

“Trees of northern United States, by Apgar, was used for the identification of trees.

Gray’s Manual of Botany (sixth edition) was used for the identification of flowering plants
other than trees.

14—A. OF SCIENCE,

SSUTUTRT FH FLO
amy yo yvd & se@M pus sdueas

SBM TOIYM OYC] ISA OY} FO WW10730q BY} Jo WorZL0d ¥ St play porBayy[no uodo ou,

SUIUSAI9} UT UB pue Ssyovrvure, Aq peystnsurystp oq Avut pure va
quosaid ayj 03 Avq JO JOS B ST puNodsodoJF oY], “SOUTBIOUL qsay

UB OB] PALI] OY} ST 10} M99 4JO] OL,

‘dYB] puooes
oy} Jo uoTONAYZsSep oy} Aq posodxe
‘(ASBaYANOS SUTYOOT) CULVAS 94} JO MOTA [BLOUIF) “} “Blif

Lo

Tt

things, if possible, determine former conditions and project those yet to be
introduced.

The Leesburg swamp was selected. It is located in Kosciusko County,
Indiana, one and one-fourth miles south of Leesburg on the east side of the
C., G., C. & St. L. R. R. It has an area of 62 acres.

The work was carried on under the general direction of Dr. C. H.
Higenmann, director of the Indiana University Biological Station, and
under the immediate direction of Dr. O. W. Caldwell. I wish also to ac-
knowledge the assistance rendered by Mr. W. D. Curtis in collecting, and
Mr. A. M. Mahaffey for most of the accompanying photographs.

Fig. 2. Sphagnum.

In this investigation Schimper’s' division of ecological into climatic
factors and edaphic factors was assumed and the edaphic factors only
considered.

One of the main purposes has been to test the theories and factors
proposed by Warming? and Cowles.’
oe: *Schimper, A. F. W.: Pflanzengeographie auf physiologischer. Grundlage, Jena

*Warming, E.: Plantsamfund. Copenhagen, 1895.
*Cowles, H.C.: The Physiographie Ecology of Chicago and Vicinity. Bot. Gaz., 1901.

(‘»

IUOWDUNLA DPUN UAC) )

‘udloy UOUBUUT,

VW

213

The theory of Warming is that all plant societies are determined
primarily by the water content of the soil. Cowles accepts the proposition
of Warming, but thinks it insufficient because of the fact that there is a
wide variation in plant societies which grow in soils having the same
water content. His most important conclusion is that plant societies are
intimately associated with the physiography of a region and as the topog-
raphic forms change from one form to another the plant societies are also

modified.
PHYSIOGRAPHY.

The evidence indicates that this swamp has been a lake cra part of a
lake which at consecutive periods has occupied three distinct levels.

The First Lake—A level plain whose elevation is about eight feet
above the level ef the swamp extends around the swamp and along its
marshy outlet to the Tippecanoe River. Below the outlet two moraines
approach the river from each side and show indications of being cut by
water at their ends. It seems probable that these and possibly other
moraines were continuous immediately after the glacial recession, while
the Tippecanoe drainage basin was being established. This would have
caused a large irregular area, including the area described, to be under
water.

’ The Second Lake.—When these larger moraines were cut in two this
lake was lowered to the level of a morainc, extending across its outlet and
nearly parallel to the Tippecanoe River. The outline of this lake can be
pretty accurately traced by the dark peaty soil and the sedges which still
erow in what was the shallower part of it.

The Third Lake.—-The erosion of the outlet tended to lower the water-
level of the lake while constant deposition of plants that grew and died
around the margin tended to bring the lake floor nearer the surface.
These processes eventually resulted in limiting the lake to the much deeper
“kettlehole” in the northern part of the area described. The kettlehole
is the region occupied by the present swamp.

The outlet of this lake was not through a narrow moraine, as had been
the outlet of the lake at higher levels, but through a channel ane mi? .

length, whose slope was very slight.
By a series of excavations on the west side of the swamp
determined that the slope of the sand undev the peat for the firs)

two feet, beginning at the peat margin was one in ten; that is. fo,

= 1 foot.

Spaces

Cinnamon ferns with scale.

Fig. 4.

215

advance of ten feet toward the center of the swamp there was an increase
of one foot in the depth of the peat. If this slope continues to the center,
a depth of 117 feet would be attained. The evidence cited does not prove
that the slope is so uniform nor that the depth mentioned did exist, but
approximately such a depth is probable.

Here was a lake of considerable depth surrounded by a very level
plain (the older lake bottom), with an outlet over a mile in length, and
with shores of slight slope. What was the cause of its extinction?

Fig. 6. Drosera intermedia.

Description of the Swamp Proper (Fig..1).—The drainage lines of the
swamp begin at the northwest corner and extend around near the mar-
gins to the southeast corner. The central part is slightly elevated above
the remainder.

These facts indicate that the plants are more vigorous in the center
than near the margins. This elevated portion has in its center a U-
shaped area of tamaracks (Larix Americana), with the open end of the
U pointing northward. Most of this northern opening has been due to
artificial disturbance. The primary drainage-lines are on the east and

216

“yoRavlmeyyz petadAod-Uaqol] WL “Si

south. On these sides the slopes are more abrupt. This has a very
marked effect upon the flora.

The flora may be divided into four regions: (1) The tamarack area,
(2) the west and north slope, (8) the south slope, (4) the east slope.

The tamarack area has many individual plants but few species. The
tamaracks are very dense except in the southwest part. Mingled with
these are poison sumachs (Rhus venenata), dwarf birch (Betula Americana)
and huckleberry (Gaylussacia resinosa). The ground is covered with
sphagnum, much of which is arranged in its characteristic hassocks.
(Fig. 2.) Growing from among these hassocks and probably assisting
in forming them are ferns (Osmunda cinnamomea), Figs. 3 and 4. Near
the margin this fern is replaced by the Royal fern (O. regalis). Mingled
with the sphagnum are pitcher plants (Sarracenia purpurea) (Fig. 5) and
Drosera (Fig. 6). D. intermedia being the most abundant in the southern
partion and D. rotundifolia in the northern part. As the dryer marginal
regions are approached sphagnum is replaced by such mosses as Poly-
trichium, Leucobryum and Dicranum. In the slightly shaded portion two
species of orchids were found (Calapogon pulchilla, and Cypripedium
spectabile).

In the eastern part the boles of the tamaracks were covered with
Parmelia, but in the southern and western part these were replaced with
Cetraria aleurites and Usnea barbata of such vigorous growth that they
often cover the branches to their tips and envelope the chlorophyl tissue
(Fig. 7). Coincident with this is the death of the tamarack, but whether
there is a cause and effect relation between these phenomena and, if such
a relation exists, which is cause and which effect has not been determined.

Under this growth excavations showed that there was a great depth
of pure peat. Many of the plants composing this peat were well pre-
served. It was possible to identify some of them as being of the same
species as some of the living forms now growing above this accumulated
debris.

The West Side.—At the south end of the west side, is a rail fence.
Along this fence has crept in maples (Aces rubrum), poplars (Populus
tremuloides), and a few elms (Ulmus Americana). This fence, as all
artificial things seem to do, disturbed the natural sequence of plants. As
a result of this disturbance, just north of it occurs a great variety of
plant life, which, as one passes to the north, is differentiated into three

well defined zones (Fig. 8). The inner is dominated by the poison sumach

218

‘OPIS ISOM 9 ]} UO SoUOZ 991Y9 OT, “8 “BIA

219

(Rhus venenata), the second by blue flag (Iris versicolor) and the third by
sedges. The Rhus belt contains a very little sphagnum, a few pitcher
plants, and some droseras. ‘These are plainly remnants of a condition
similar to that which maintains at present in the tamarack area. Besides
these there are sedges (Eriophorum Virginianum), swamp bellflower (Cam-
panula aparionoides), and a few mints (Mentha Canadensis, and Lycopus
sinuatus).

The Iris Zone.—The blue flag (Iris versicolor) gives the color to this
zone, but there are nearly as many individuals of marsh shield fern
(Asplenium thelypteris) and bonset (EHupatorium perfoliatum) as of Ivis.
These were the predominant plants, but there appeared a smaller number
of goldenrods (Solidago Canadensis), meadow sweet (Spirea salicifolia),
trow-weed (Vernonia Noveboracenous), horse-mint (Monardo fistulosa)
agrimony (Agrimonia pariflora), and vervain (Verbena hastata). The
mints and composites seem to be the most prominent among the fore-
runners of mesophytic life. Outside this was a fragment of a sedge belt.
This contained coarse sedges and grasses (Scirpus atrovirens 8. microcar-
pus, S. cyperinus, Panicum Crus-galli) and a few composites.

The north side (Fig. 9) is like the west except that there is no sedge
zone, the Iris of the east end is replaced by calamus (Acorus calamus),
and the Rhus almost disappears as the eastern extremity is approached.
Two species, however, should be noted. On the inside of the Rhus zone
two individuals of thistle (Cnicus lanceolatus) were found. These are,
as it were, the extreme advance guards of xerophytic conditions. About
the center of this zone, several individuals of Sagittaria (Sagittaria vari-
abilis) in a healthy condition were found. So far as I am able to dis-
cover, this plant is never introduced except in water. This means that
this plant has been able to survive the changing conditions from lake
margin to Rhus belt by gradual adaptations. These plants were much
smaller and contained less chlorophyl than plants of the same species
growing in water at the same latitude.

The South Side-—The south side contains one of the primary drain-
age lines. Along this an open ditch has Teen dug. The willows (Salix
nigra, S. alba, S. discolor, 8. tristis, £ ‘ucida, S. cordata) follow the ditch
throughout its entire length. Near the cast end the roses (Rosa Carolina)
form a belt reaching from the deciduous forest trees on the south to the
tamaracks on the north. North of the ditch they follow the ditch to its
western extremity, but the zone becomes narrower. Toward the west a

220

‘1gnos Bu Yoo ‘apis yOu oy, “6 SM

221

zone of Iris occurs on each side of the willows. Wherever Rosa occurs
Spirea abounds. Spirea tomentosa on the east side and Spirea salicifolia
on the south side. Along the damper parts of this area grow Polygonum
sagittatum, P. parvifolium, P. hydropiperoides, Epilobum strictum, Plant-
ago pusilla, Galium trifida, Panthorum sedoides, and Alisma plantago.
There is a fine carpet of false purslane (Ludwigia palustris) over the entire
area.

The ditch itself contains water only in times of flood. Notwithstand-
ing this it is almost covered with floating forms of liverworts (Riccia
finitans, Ricciocarpus natans). Yellow wated lilies (Nuphur adyvena)}
grow in it for more than half its length.

At the west end, there is a sort of bay that has recently been fairly
well drained. ‘This has resulted in the introduction of a great variety
of species. Most of those found further east along this side persist.
In addition occur: Eupatorium perfoliatum, purpureum, Helianthus an-
nuus, Solidago Canadensis, Bidens chrysanthenroides, Pycnantheum lan-
ceolatum, Mentha Canadensis, Lycopus sinuatus, Virginicus, Potentilla
argentea, P. parviflora, and Verbena hastata. It is a fine example of con-
fusion of species during a change of conditions.

The East Slope (Fig. 10)—On the east side there is a row of willows
near the margin. Inside this there is a broad zone of roses (Rosa Caro-
lina), in which is mingled poplars (Populus tremuloides), swamp oaks

(Quercus tinctoria), and elms (Ulmus Americana).

GENERAL REMARKS AND CONCLUSIONS.

First.—On account of the great depth of the peat and the slope of
the underlying sand we may conclude that this swamp was a lake which
has been filled with vegetation, and that the process still continues.

Second.—That in recent years the growth has been most rapid in the
center of the swamp, thus elevating it and forcing the drainage lines to
the margins. This was made possible through the inhibition of the proc-
esses of decay so often noted in sphagnum swamps.

Third.The fact, that there are no peaty remains on the level plain
surrounding the present swamp, indicates that the first lake was a very
ephemeral one. When a topographic form exists for a short time its
effect upon the flora is so slight that an interruption may be caused in the
usual succession of plant life. An excellent illustration of this fact has
been observed in connection with these studies in the case of Little Eagle

z

The east side, looking south.

Fig. 10.

223

Lake, Kosciusko County, Indiana. Here the lake level has been lowered
so rapidly that a meadow is developing without the usual intervening
marginal swamp life.

Fourth.—Two additional comparative notes should be added. At
the west end of Turkey Lake is a kettlehole which exhibits the early
stages of the process. In parts the lake has been filled to the surface
with plant remains. In some places the advance into deeper water is
being made along the surface, so that a shelf of plant life exists with

Fig. 11. Kettlehole north of Eagle Lake.

very little beneath it except vegetable debris and water. The plant
which contributes most to this is swamp loosestrife (Decodon verticil-
latus). It is soon assisted by sedges.and willows, so that the zone which
contains Decodon only is very narrow.

North of Eagle Lake is another kettlehole (Fig. 11), which exhibits
the latter part of the process. The circular fiat basin filled with peat
and surrounded by moraines indicates clearly its origin. The water
content of the soil would indicate mesophytic conditions. However the
central part of this area is occupied by tamaracks. This affirms the prop-
osition of Cowles that the change in topography may outstrip the co-ordi-

nate modifications of plant societies.

224

Many more comparative studies will be required before each step in
the process can be described in detail. All the conditions necessary for
the formation of a tamarack swamp can not now be stated, although two
are apparent (1) a relatively deep lake; (2) the destruction of this lake by
plant deposition, for this alone can produce the proper substratum for
the introduction of the tamarack.

A list of the orders of plants and the species in each found in the
Leesburg Swamp:

1. NYMPH2ACE 2.

Nuphar advena.

2. SARRACENIACEA.

Sarracenia purpurea.

3. GERANIACE.

Impatiens biflora.

4, TLIcInez.

Ilex monticola.

5. SAPINDACEE.

Acer rubrum.

6. ANACARDIAGE 2.

Rhus venenata.

“I

ROSACE.
Spirea salicifolia, S. tomentosa, Rosa Carolina, Polentille Canadensis, P.
argentea, Rubus hispidus, Agrimonia parviflora, Prunus Americana,
Pyrus coronaria.

8. CRASSULACE As.

Penthorum sedoides.

9. DROSERACEZ.

Drosera rotundifolia, D. intermedia.

10. ONAGRACEZ:.

Epilobium strictum.

11. CORNACEZ:.
Cornus Canadensis, C. florida, C. sericea, C. stolonifera, C. paniculata,

Nyssa sylvatica.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

bo
bo
Or

CAPRIGOLIACEA.

Viburnum prunifolium, Sambucus Canadensis.

RUBIACE.
Galium trifida, Cephalanthus occidentalis.

COMPOSITAE.
Vernonia noveboracensis, Helianthus annuus, Solidago Canadensis, Bidens
chrysanthemoides, Eupatorium perfoliatum, FE. purpuream, Cnicus

lanceolatum.

LOBELIACE 2.
Lobelia cardinalis.

CAMPANULACE 2.

Campanula aparinoides.

ERICACE 2.

Gaylussacia resinosa, Vaccinium macrocarpum.

VERBENACE 2.

Verbena hastatu.

LABIAT 2.
Scutellaria gulriculata, Monarda fistulosa, Pycnanthemum Virginiana,

Mentha Canadensis, Lycopus Americana, L. virginicus.

PLANTAGINACE 2.
Plantago elongata.

POLYGONACEZ.
Polygonum sagittatum, P. hydropiperoides, P. arifulium

LAURACE.

Sassafras officinale.

UTRICACE,
Ulmus Americana.

JUGLANDACE.

Carya alba, C. microcarpa

CULPULIFER#.
Quercus alba, Q. macrocarpa, Q. bicolor, Q. rubra, Q. tinctoriu, Q. palus-

tris, Q. imbricaria, Q. ilicifolia, Betula pumila, Corylus Americana.

15—A. or SCIENCE,

26. SALICACEA.
Salex amygdaloides, S. alba, S. discolor, S. nigra, S. tristis, S. rostrata,
S. lucida, S. cordata, S. humilis, S. longifolia, Populus tremuloides,

P. grandidentata.

27. CONIFER.

Larix americana.

28. IRmDACEA.
Tris versicolor.
29. ARACEA,

Acorus calamus.

30. ALISMACE Al.

Alisma plantago, Sagittaria variabilis.

81. CYPERACEA.

Scirpus atrovirens, S. microcarpus, S. cyperinus, Eriophorum Virginianum.

82. GRAMINA.

Panicus Crus- Galli.

227

Nove oN THE RecuRRENCE OF Broop V oF Trpicen! SepreNDECIM
IN PortTER County, Inprana, Durine 1905.

By WALTER L. HAHN.

In the Proceedings of this Academy for 1898 (p. 225-6), F. M. Webster,
writing of the three broods of Cicada septendecim found in Indiana says:
“Brood V covers only the area over which Brood XXII did not occur and
does not, so far as I was able to learn, overlap that brood. It covers a
small portion of Laporte County and the greater portion of Porter and

Lake counties, and will reappear next in 1905. That his prediction was

fulfilled the past summer, I am able to testify, for although I was not in

:

this region during ‘‘cicada time” the evidences of their work were still
abundant in the latter part of August, when I visited southern Porter
County.

I am unable to define the limits of the brood, but saw the indications
of its presence about Boone Grove and south of that village in the vicin-
ity of Aylesworth switch, to within about a mile of the Kankakee River.

The effect of their work was most noticeable on the red oak trees,
whose leaves were everywhere withered and brown to such a degree as
to be easily seen at the distance of a mile or more. However, other trees
had also been stung and were less noticeable only because their leaves
had fallen and new ones had been put forth. The dried bodies and wings
of the insects were everywhere abundant in the woods, so that there
could be no doubt as to what had dene this work, even had I not had the
testimony of farmers living in the vicinity.

1Tibicen, Latreille, Fani. Nat., p. 426, 1825.

VonPr as Boe -ve¥ e
ns ue

phar ger ee

v ae = a <
Me ae So Rds, Fi

INDEX.

ACT PROTECTING BIRD§, 7.

Act providing for Proceedings, 5.

Alkaloids and Other Vegetable Poisons on
Protoplasm, 195.

Andrews, Frank Marion, 187, 189, 191, 195.

Arthur, J. C., 128.

BACTERIA, NITRIFYING, 199.

Bigney, A. J., 199.

Bitangentials of Plane Algebraic Curves,
Irrelevant Factors in, 81.

Bitting, Katherine Golden, 143, 149.

Blind Crayfish, Antenna-like Organ in
Place of Vestigial Eye, 160.

Buzzard, The Development of, 61.

By-Laws, 13.

CALCIUM CHLORIDE SOLUTION ON
GLASS, 101.

Campostoma, Brevis, 161.

Catalysis, Studies in, 107.

Cercis Canadensis, Blooming of in Sep-
tember, 207.

Chromosome Controversy, Status of, 205.

Committees, 9.

Constitution, 11.

Cumings, EB. R., 85.

Cytase in Wheat Grains, 14S.

DEAM, CHARLES C., 185.
Dennis, D. W.., 61, 197.
Douglass, Benj. W., 41.

ELECTRIC SPARKS ACROSS SHORT
SPARK GAPS, 117.

Electrolytic Resistance. A Simple Method
of Measuring, 115.

Equivalent Weights of Metals, Determina-
tion of, 103.

Evans, P. N., 101.

GAS BURNERS AND STANDARDS OF
CANDLE POWER, 119.

HAHN, WALTER L., 227.

Hanna, U. S.., 81.

Haseman, J. D., 161.

Hessler, Robert, 48, 122.

ILL HEALTH OF DARWIN, HUXLEY,
SPENCER AND GEORGE ELIOT, 48.
Indiana Flora, Additions to, 185.

. Indiana Flora, Little-Known Members

of, 155.

Indiana Flora, New or Little-Known Mem-
bers, 165.

International Botanical Congress of 1905,
123.

KERN, FRANK D., 127.
Kirtland’s Warbler, 197.
LEESBURG SWAMP, 209.

_ MARTIN, E. G., 203.
Melilotus Alba, The Embryology of, 133.
Members, Fellows, 14, Non-resident, 15,

Active, 16.
Microtome Knife, New Form of, 203.
Miller, John A., 71.
Mottier, D. M., 205, 207, 208.

OFFICERS, PRESENT, 8, PAST, 10.
Oi, Hiromitsu, 119.
Oxydase in Wheat Grains, 143.

PEAT AS FUEL, THE USE OP, 41.

Petry, Loren C., 197.

Petry, W. C,, 61.

Pharmacology, Needed Investigations
in, 25.

Plasmodesmen, 191.

President’s Address, 25.

Program, 21.

RADIUM CLOCK, THE, 40.

Radium, its Effect on Electrolytic Con-
ductivity, 109.

Ramsey, R. R., 40, 115, 117, 119.

Ransom, James H., 103, 107.

Ratliff, Ryland, 109.

Recurrence of Brood V, 227.

Regenerating Appendage, Direction of Dif-
ferentiation in a, 159.

Renkenberger, M. D., 49.

Root Tip Sensitive to Gravitation Stimu-
lus, 189.

—229—

230

Rust of Hamilton and Marion Counties,
Indiana, 177.

SCOTT, WILL, 209.
Smith, Charles Piper, 155.
Solar Eclipse, 1905, 71.

TEA DRINKING, SOME SCIENTIFIC
ASPECTS OF, 35.

Travertine Deposit in Tippecanoe County,
Indiana, 183.

Trembles, or Milk Sickness, 122.

Trillium, Some Monstrosities in, 187.

UREDINEAL CULTURE WORK, METH-
ODS EMPLOYED IN, 127.

WADE, FRANK B., 35.
Weathering of Subcarboniferous
stones of Southern Indiana, 85.
Wilson, Guy West, 165, 177, 183.

Wood Pulp Industry, 49.
Wright, John S., 25.

YOUNG, W. J., 133.

ZEA MAYS, PECULIAR MONSTROS-
ITY IN THE SEEDLING OF, 208.
Zeleny, Charles, 159, 160.

Lime-

PROCEEDINGS

of the

Indiana Academy
of Science

1906

LIBRARY
NEW YORK
BOTANICAL

GARDEN.

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

Indiana Academy of Science

1906

PBETOHS- Qos te pists. AR TRUE GL. FOLEY

INDIANAPOLIS, IND.

x.

ANAPOLIS
1907

Wm. B. Burrot

f

NOV 27 1908

EXECUTIVE DEPARTMENT,
May 7, 1907.

Received by the Governor, examined and referred to the Auditor of
State for verification of the financial statement.

THE STATE OF INDIANA,

e

OFFICE. OF AUDITOR OF STATE,
INDIANAPOLIS, May 18, 1907. \
The within report, so far as the same relates to moneys drawn from
the State Treasury, has been examined and found correct.
J. O. BILLHEIMER,
Auditor of State.

May 18, 1907.
Returned by the Auditor of State, with above certificate, and trans-
mitted to Secretary of State for publication, upon the order of the Board
of Commissioners of Public Printing and Binding.
FRED L. GEMMER,
Secretary to the Governor.

Filed in the office of the Secretary o1 State of the State of Indiana.
May 18, 1907.
FRED A. SIMS,
Secretary of State.

Received the within report and delivered to the printer May 18, 1907.

HARRY SLOUGH,
Clerk Printing Bureau.

(3)

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE.

An act to provide forthe publication of the reports and papers of the Indiana

Academy ol Scelences sis oo sss oe eth Y Ges Stes ee 5
An act for the protection of birds, their nests and eggs.................- 7
Officers) 1906219076 oes cs eee OE ae ee 8
Committees:+1906—1907 = se eae ate ee oe ce en ee 9
Principal. officers since organization... 4.. os. 2.2.4.6 oe ee 10
Conghitibian S60 o..o2 la ere oe oy ea eas Seen > ee ee 11
By = La Wa ese Deas Soci a ae eee a neo 13
Members: Mellowsss sac sneteete oe nare © eters a ee ers oe 14
Members) non=reside@ntrce aso pars eases 2c Ses Sepa eae le eee eee 15
Members sachiveane nak cae sar ain ee Ree Cee 16
Program of the Twenty-second Annual Meeting................-...---:- 20

Report of the Twenty-second Annual Meeting of the Indiana Academy of

SCTE TICS ee ta epee Sor ee ee, Sait tae eee ane eto ee 22
Report. of the: Spring Meeting of 1906-2 2222) Bouse ae ee 22
Pavers presented at the Twenty-second Annual Meeting..............--. 23
Sats (39: cle ewe RP Rana ae? 5 ast Se. Ani Sent tte eral Pein netics Rens ELA Sees

.

AN ACE TO PROVIDE FOR THE PUBLICATION OF THE REPORTS
AND PAPERS OF THE INDIANA ACADEMY OF SCIENCE.

[Approved March 11, 1895.]

WuereaAs, The Indiana Academy of Science, a chartered eS
scientific association. has embodied in its constitution a
provision that it will, upon the request of the Governor, or of the several
departments of the State government, through the Governor, and through
its council as an advisory body, assist in the direction and execution of
any investigation within its province, without pecuniary gain to the
Academy, provided only that the necessary expenses of such investigation
are borne by the State; and,

WuHereas, The reports of the meetings of said Academy, with the
several papers read before it, have very great educational, industrial and
economic value, and should be preserved in permanent form; and

WuHereEas, The Constitution of the State makes it the duty of the
General Assembly to encourage by all suitable means intellectual, scien-
tific and agricultural improvement; therefore,

Section 1. Be it enacted by the General Assembly of the Pehiaalmaok
State of Indiana, That hereafter the annual reports of the the Reports of

the Indiana

Academy of
the report for the year 1854, including all papers of scientific Science.

meetings of the Indiana Academy of Science, beginning with

or economic value, presented at such meetings, after they shall have been
edited and prepared for publication as hereinafter provided, shall be pub-
lished by and under the direction of the Commissioners of Public Printing
and Binding.

Sec. 2. Said reports shall be edited and prepared for
publication without expense to the State, by a corps of Editing
editors to be selected and appointed by the Indiana Acad- pve
emy of Science, who shall not, by reason of such services, have any claim
against the State for compensation. The form, style of binding, paper,
typography and manner and extent of illustration of such re-

: Number of

ports, shall be determined by the editors, subject to the ap- printed
proval of the Commissioners of Public Printing and Station- Reports.

ery. Not less than 1,500 nor more than 3,000 copies of each of said

(5)

6

reports shall be published, the size of the edition within said limits to
be determined by the concurrent action of the editors and the Commis-
sioners of Public Printing and Stationery: Provided, ‘ihat not to ex-
ceed six hundred dollars (S600) shall be expended for such
EES publication in any one year, and not to extend beyond 1896:
Previded, Vhat no sums shall be deemed to be appropriated for the year
1894.
Sec. 5. All except three hundred copies of each volume
Peete of said reports shall be placed in the custody of the State
eae Librarian, who shall furnish one copy thereof to each pub-
lic library in the State, one copy to each university, college or normal
school in the State, one copy to each high school in the State having a
library, which shall make application therefor, and one copy to such other
institutions, societies or persons as may be designated by the Academy
through its editors or its council. The remaining three hundred copies
shall be turned over to the Academy to be disposed of as it may determine.
In order to provide for the preservation of the same it shall be the duty
of the Custodian of the State House to provide and place at the disposal
of the Academy one of the uneccupied rooms of the State House, to be
designated as the office of the Indiana Academy of Science, wherein said
copies of said reports belonging te the Academy, together with the original
manuscripts, drawings, ete., thereof can be safely kept, and he shall also
equip the same with the necessary shelving and furniture.
Sec. 4. An emergency is hereby declared to exist for
Emergency.

the immediate taking effect of this act, and it shall therefore

take effect and be in force from and after its passage.

est

AN ACI FOR THK PROTHCTION OF BIRDS, THEIR NESTS
AND EGGS.

[Indiana Acts 1905.]

Secrion 602. It shall be unlawful for any person to
kill, trap or possess any wild bird, or to purchase or offer Bards.
the same for sale, or to destroy the nests or the eggs of any wild bird
except as otherwise provided in this section. But this section shall not
apply to the following named game birds: The Anatidie, commonly called
swans, geese, brant, river and sea duck: the Rallidze, commonly known
as rails, coots, mudhens, and gallinules; the Limicolze, commonly known as
shore birds, plovers, surf birds, snipe, woodcock, sandpipers, tattlers and
curlews; nor to English or Huropean house sparrows, crows, hawks, or
other birds of prey. Nor shall this section apply to any person taking
birds or their nests or eggs for scientific purposes under permit, as pro-
vided in the next section. Any person violating the provisions of this
section shall, upon conviction, be fined not less than ten dollars nor more
than fifty dollars.

See. 603. Permits may be granted by the Commissioner of Fisheries
and Game to any properly accredited person. permitting the holder there-
of to collect birds, their nests or eggs for strictly scientific purposes. In
order to obtain such permit the applicant for the same must present to
said Commissioner written testimonials from two well-known scientific
nen certifying to the good character and fitness of said applicant to be
entrusted with such privilege, and pay to said Board one dollar therefor,
and file with him a properly executed bond in the sum of two hundred
dollars, payable to the State of Indiana, conditioned that he will obey the
terms of such permit, and signed by at least two responsible citizens of
the State as sureties. The bond may be forfeited and the permit revoked
upon proof to the satisfaction of such Commissioner that the holder of
such permit has killed any bird or taken the nests or eggs of any bird

for any other purpose than that named in this section.

Jndtana Academy of Science.

OFFICERS, 1906-1907.

PRESIDENT

Davin M. Morrierr.

Vicr-PRESIDENT

GLENN CULBERTSON.

SECRETARY

Lynn B. McMuULLEN.

ASSISTANT SECRETARY
J. H. Ransom.

PRESS SECRETARY

G. A. ABBOTT.

TREASURER

Wiuuiam A. McBETH.

EXEcutivE CoMMITTEE

D. M. Mortimr, Caru L. MEEs, THOMAS GRAY,
GLENN CULBERTSON, WILLIS 8S. BLATCHLEY, STANLEY COULTER,
Lynn B. McMutLien, Harvey W. WILEy, Amos W. BUTLER,
J. H. Ransom, M. B. THomas, W. A. NoyvEs,

G. A. ABBOTT, D. W. DENNIS, J. C. ARTHUR,
WiuuiamM A. McBrru, C. H. EIGENMANN, © REA.
RosBertT HESSLER, C. A. WaALpo, Joun M. CouutTEr.

JoHn 8. WRIGHT,

PO TIAINIVEL Eh Ge he ae bore et et aie A I EEE eg Nad vee coset nics J. C. ARTHUR.
VGPEEHIY. OLOGY. ok acs oe See cre eee Pe hee aceon rane C. H. EIGENMANN.
HERPETOLOGY
MAMMALOGY

ORNITHOLOGY
TUNTOMOROG Mike cocci de Serres Bs Ste aE” MAE ee Roane) atte ts W. S. BLATCHLEY.

COMMITTEES, 1906-1907.

PROGRAM,
R. F. Lyons, DoNALDSON BoDINE, A. J. BIGNEY.
MEMBERSHIP,
R. B. Moors, O. L. KEtso.
NoMINATIONS,
J. W. BEEDE, W. A. McBeETH, W. F. M. Goss
AUDITING,
D. A. Rorurock, Jp eaNAGY HOR:

Sratre LIBRARY,

W. S. BLATCHLEY, A. W. ButuLeEr, G. W. Benton,
J. S. WRIGHT, L. B. McMuu.en.

RESTRICTION OF WEEDS AND DISEASES,

D. M MortiEr, W.S. BuatcH.Ley, M. B. THomas,
G. E. HorrMan, W. H. MANWaARING.

Epiror,

ArrHur L. Foury, Indiana University, Bloomington.

Drrectors OF BIOLOGICAL SURVEY,

STANLEY COULTER, CHARLES R. Dryer, M. B. THomas,
C. H. E1igeENMANN, J. C. ARTHUR.

RELATIONS OF THE ACADEMY TO THE STATE,

R. W. McBripg, WILLIAM WATSON WOOLLEN, _ C. A. Watpo,
G. W. BENTON.

DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROCEEDINGS,

L. B. McMutten, L. J. RETTGER, JoHN 8S. WRIGHT,
A. L. Fouey, : J. P. Nayior.

10

Suave! eels

UPGIN “VM | °° Hoqqdy “vp wosury “Hf | UTM. WW ‘g uudT | ION}IOW “WC
YIOGOW “VM |*° WARIO “WW sepeyD | ULOSUBY “FT “f | UoT[NI, IN “| UUATT | °° “Lo[ssopy Jaoqoyy
TVPG VM | °°. HOodqdV VD) | wmosuvy “Hf TOTTN AN “qq uUA'T SIAM “Sg uyor
TIIOGOW “WV AN |: MvaKoFoKOl\yn Over Grp) ioe 2 0 Sc ulosuByYy “FT ‘¢ MIU TaD AN aa te LLUT Olt hen suena Soo 7T
WPCIN VM |] HOqqY “VD |" eulpogd wospleuod VSIA “S uyor | Px quedicitst S M
‘]JOAONG “yf ‘uoJUO “AA “O0r) |’ ‘ouLpog, UOSpyeUO(T VSI ‘Guyor | Aol “A AoAreyzy
]JOAO0Q “J, “f' | >> swoORTIEg “AA “084 | > °°" * OZ4[NYOS “VW “OT VSIA “J uyor |'" °° seumoyy, “| IW
‘TJOAODG “Eff | °° ‘UOJMOR “MM *094) OZ4[NYOS “VW “OH | QYSITAA “GQ uyor |** °°” stuueq] “AA ‘Cd
*]JOAONG “ff | °° “UOJUN “AA *094) AZ4INYIS “VY “OL fe VYUSLIMA "SQ uUYyOr? | UUBUIUODIST “EY
TONOOSES {ah AMOMMTO SH AN O04) ASUSIEL: (Ws) ATOR AN Sl HOR | “OPIUM °V
STO UNUM Qi sebimer ANea Selco casey eaters oie canta Sedpealial (cit oe) Aousig, “( “VW | WSL “S uyor |: * +: ABALN) SBUTOY J,
SUL OUUUUE UT ee eT a NA ane yom eihaat ence ahshtasik' aCe ela NA Aousig (“VW | YSU “SQ UYyOr Loypnoy AodpueyS
sCDO CLUE. ieee Tuna NAW i tece hme n CA eu aceton antic fis yA sami tase Aousig ‘f “V | VYSLIMA “SQ uyor Lope, “MA OV
TOUNBUS! GAN | poe te Rar Ora at ont ‘ UBULION “AA “A at aetna Hoy oicyne ee tava lwo oak sokon oA “VAN
TROD) [LEANN Ee) Poul link Ba a tae Nae not a fee LenS, Pe “MM souly SUNUAIN “6 sf
“OpTeM W ve) LER AV aM Et oe Noe re ROM oe aia Uahiawkal fa’. a etve ca atualsaseico ce ee stama hen oA “Lop SAK soulry hs an ‘qpoqduresy T t
‘suL[ua ur ‘O OC 0 DPICTLO fh ONO> Duipe o>: cb Uti aka sce ey cro) energie bros Meh usr nage lier “roping ANE SOU A ease Avy oe)
‘sulyuor eT ‘O PURM SNe Nels chalks pia nieSioMeale hel ots iiaiat'| ituutet omtaimaiee i Cue Tartecemeteli6) vile sie verte \bete lopyng NN souly 7 “ ]]eyUopuo 209) a
UIAUOP gO |i fete renee ‘dopNg “Ai souy |** aouuRagy “Q UYOL
‘subyuor Pip ‘0 PO PREY OLG O° Ge bkO SP ODI sOMta Bi beat hi Ch cece GCC Stein cathe find |- + -reygng “\\ SouLy “uyor vaneca L
‘SUINUOP “TO | ct tee ees |: “-qoyNg_ “AA soury |** -deynog “WwW uyor
‘guiquap gq (Q joc tpi | gaping + Ay soury wepIof “g PAT
MAUOASVAY J, AUVLAUOAS SSaU “AUVLAUOAG WLSSy “UV LEMOAG ‘INGAISHU J

‘HONGIOS HO ANHAVOV VNVICNI HHL AO SHMOIAAO

Z061—-9061
9061-SO6T
CO6I-FO6L
PO6I—-E06T
€O061—GOGL
GO6I-LO6I
LO6L—-OO06L
0061-6681
6O8T-S868T
S6OSI-LOS8T
LO8I—-9681
9681—-C68T
COSI-POsl
POST—GOSI

E681-COST

GOST-L68T
[681-0681
O6SIT-6S881
6SSI-SSST
SSSIT-LSST
L881—-988T
OSSI—-GssI

11

CONSTITUTION.

ARTICLE I.

Section 1. ‘This association shall be called the Indiana Academy of
Science,

Sec. 2. The objects of this Academy shall be scientific research and
the diffusion of knowledge concerning the various departments of science ,
to promote intercourse between men engaged in scientific work, especially
in Indiana: to assist by investigation and discussion in developing and
making known the material, educational and other resources and riches
of the State; to arrange and prepare for publication such reports of inves-
tigation and discussions as may further the aims and objects of the Acad-
emy as set forth in these articles.

Whereas, The State has undertaken the publication of such proceed-
ings, the Academy will, upon request of the Governor, or of one of the
several departments of the State, through the Governor, act through its
council as an advisory body in the direction and execution of any investi-
gation within its province as stated. The necessary expenses incurred in
the. prosecution of such investigation are to be borne by the State; no
pecuniary gain is to come to the Academy for its advice or direction of
such investigation.

The regular proceedings of the Academy as published by the State shall
become a public document.

ARTICLE II.

Section 1. Members of this Academy shall be honorary fellows, fel-
lows, non-resident members or active members.

Sec. 2. Any person engaged in any department of scientific work, or
in original research in any department of science, shall be eligible to active
membership. Active members may be annual or life members. Annual
members may be elected at any meeting of the Academy; they shall sign
the constitution, pay an admission fee of two dollars, and thereafter an
annual fee of one dollar. Any person who shall at one time contribute

12

fifty dollars to the funds of this Academy may be elected a life member of
the Academy, free of assessment. Non-resident members may be elected
from those who have been active members but who have removed from the
State. In any case, a three-fourths vote of the members present shall elect
to membership. Applications for membership in any of the foregoing
classes shall be referred to a committee on application for membership,
who shall consider such application and report to the Academy before the
election.

Sec. 3. The members who are actively engaged in scientific work,
who have recognized standing as scientific men, and who have been. mem-
bers of the Academy at least one year. may be recommended for nomina-
tion tor election as fellows by three fellows or members personally ac-
quainted with their work and character. Of members so nominated a
number not exceeding five in one year may, on recommendation of the
Pxecutive Committee, be elected as fellows. At the meeting at which this
is adopted, the members of the Executive Committee for 1894 and fifteen
others shall be elected fellows, and those now honorary members shall be-
come honorary fellows. Honorary fellows may be elected on account of
special prominence in science, on the written recommendation of two mem-
bers of the Academy. In any case a three-fourths vote of the members

present shall elect.

ARTICLE III.

Secrion 1. ‘The officers of this Academy shall be chosen by ballot at
the annual meeting, and shall hoid office one year. ‘They shall consist of a
President, Vice-President, Secretary, Assistant Secretary, Press Secretary
and Treasurer, who shall perferm the duties usually pertaining to their
respective offices, und in addition, with the ex-Presidents of the Academy,
shall constitute an Executive Committee. The President shall, at each
annual meeting, appoint two members to be a committee, which shall pre-
pare the programs and have charge of the arrangements for all meetings
for one year.

Sec. 2. The annual meeting of this Academy shall be held in the city
of Indianapolis within the week following Christmas of each year, unless
otherwise ordered by the Executive Committee. There snoall also be a sum-
mer meeting at such time and place as may be decided upon by the Execu-
tive Committee. Other meetings may be called at the discretion of the Ex-

13

ecutive Committee. The past Presidents, together with the officers and Ex-
ecutive Committee, shall constitute the Council of the Academy, and repre-
sent it in the transaction of any necessary business not especially provided
for in this constitution, in the interim between general meetings.

Sec. 38. This constitution may be altered or amended at any annual
meeting by a three-fourths majority of the attending members of at least
one year’s standing. No question of amendment shall be decided on the
day of its presentation.

BY-LAWS.

1. On motion, any special department of science shall be assigned to
a curator, whose duty it shall be, with the assistance of the other members
interested in the same department, to endeavor to advance knowledge in
that particular department. Each curator shall report at such time and
place as the Academy shall direct. These reports shall include a brief
summary of the progress of the department during the year preceding the
presentation of the report.

2. The President shall deliver a public address on the morning of
one of the days of the meeting at the expiration of his term of office.

3. The Press Secretary shall attend to the securing of proper news-
paper reports of the meetings and assist the Secretary.

4. No special meeting of the Academy shall be held without a notice
of the same haying been sent to the address of each member at least fifteen
days before such meeting.

5. No bill against the Academy shall be paid without an order signed
by the President and countersigned by the Secretary.

6. Members who shall allow their dues to remain unpaid for two
years, having been annually notified of their arrearage by the Treasurer,
shall have their names stricken from the roll.

7. ‘Ten members shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of
business.

14

MEMBERS.

FELLOWS.

ONS eps TER OER geared eens Maen ares eps = git toa ogee ane Bloomington.
ANA CACTUS eee oer eee ca 1898 eo Se ee AEE Lafayette.
ite PBCOAGR raya ae tose ken eee RO GGA ec eee ctee Bloomington
GeorgeuW.. Benton. +-< en en ete LSOG 2a hw re Indianapolis.
Ar SME: pine a paar et ee ASO MS ren Eee eee Moore’s Hill.
Katherine Golden Bitting......... 1S 95 Seen ce aoe Lafayette.
Wonaldsonsbodines = 5 see SOO Sai sree ae Crawfordsville.
WS: blatehley stork. eee LEE ewer eer ia Indianapolis.
Jalal Paes Danbbo\eies pays ate oe get we eee Boos OOO eg ins eee Irvington.
Severanee Burrage. ais. 55... 2. ESOS 5 tite See Lafayette.
AE VAC BUULeRs Boe ot. 4 SUPE ae. SOS Reeser tse ae Indianapolis.
WieAcCocshale, eur ghee kee LG0G3 <7 Bae Bloomington.
MELA COOK fh Gash: Pie eae LOD Ss «st seett RE Santiago, Cuba.
Jon Mi Coultente .2 4527 hell Reyna alee apace Chicago, Il.
Suanleys Coulter! fete oer ae en = ESOS Se te eae Se Lafayette
Glenn’ GulbextsOnrs 15 se ae SOOT eaisseom erm ari Hanover.
BPR a@amimas 4 seca ROGET Set. Reis. eee Bloomington.
DX W... Delain i fies s okie Shen te LSD Si Sete eae Richmond.
CEU VOT ters sei. nese ernst ep tay ESO (Gest. eee Terre Haute.
GSH: Bipenmanns 255 oa yee te oe LOSS hae ees Bloomington.
Perey: Norton Bivansy- 222, ooe. NOOR cee eee West Lafayette.
ACM SEO neck Ae ee a ate eee ISO. SaeKe eS Bloomington.
MEG Oldenas tee ares eg 3o ene ae SOO Reo ee Lafayette.
Wishes Mis G Oss.2 55.0 Muetisee ste fs PROSE 5 a pei eee Urbana, IIl.
MhomacyG ray ater, 4 aye ASQ Seats eh eee Terre Haute.
Ae See Ea ED ANG ARVs ce-cs t ceatrnee ce os seks RSW ens aeearsitones nis 5 Terre Haute.
W eck HERRUGE Sot A 1 See OW Docent Pen cote Lafayette.
Wobertelesslerss7 .eane stern Sees Ults\2)! Meeennee a cease Le Logansport.
LSeAL SELUStOIe le 8< 103% eee eres SOBs oi tone ens Aree Lafayette.
BG wits OhOnM atten a. 12s ro OO eee eres Terre Haute.
Robert Hise Unions ec tetera ceoe [S96 2e nares oe Bloomington.

OO A eieaenee ete eee Terre Haute.

IWevA-McBebther wan. cs nee:

“Date of election.

15

Ris SI RESUGES asters st te et ss Sar or sh ee ee Bloomington.
re MOGR a: Siva xecslatcidts Saute EBON rs nicte aie Seen Terre Haute.

Pee PINE Gre. 2 i. 0 5 5,4 Sak Sees wees DOU eer shat lacs colees Bloomington.
Wicd. MOCIKDEUS 2.28555 sklee gan s ROOM ech refer rn ts Bloomington.

Ae NOL GIES, > ones 8 3 acdat Ae ROIS gee eek eh Bloomington.
Pemba IOI or toca a oe ACO Es grantee Mer saa Greencastle.

NR EIN OVER te St. 1s vrs fio SS oie iat! bs flere ang SP Washington, D. C.
rotlanky, Ramsey ioc sist 2A les DOB Forte tain oi rah, Bloomington.

‘Leet el 22s) 101 Rees dae pe hee OOD S Gite ks ee Lafayette.

eI RCUUREE? © Oocec roosts Senses oo SOO! ae sees 45. Op Terre Haute.
wack Ronnocle.c. oieG 2 ae. ee COLE is Sian aati Bloomington.
Per CONGLS neo Sen ot oes PROSE Ras 5. sec cesee Terre Haute.
Palen MOM eo ph oe eens oS me yah hs PaO ate ee Chicago, II.
WWWiples SLOMGL ce cen cee en ex sae ee SOB eae. tee rac: Lafayette.
JOSE] OL Das 02 Teli ale a pe Ihe hs Seale eeepc ae Swarthmore, Pa.
in Tiel i Be EY crs | Eoin er Ae 1fo}o S eae dere Crawfordsville.
CAGE ALCO tettiecrse Rio cae tec re PSO Stree ee Lafayette.

ey Ms WiebSterS. -- 1 ace mes te ons SOAR ye toca Cae Champaign, III.
Paco WestluIndy </-22.. wnt. e+ oS TOOA erp eters oe Lafayette.

HV 3s WIE eS or. ates oa op tae a cee int Bf Na eC Oe Washington, D. C.
soba) Wrights. <seu.e osc sass TASTE 0 Ae ie Rie ene ces Ea Indianapolis.

“Date of election.

NON-RESIDENT MEMBERS.

eee wNNON . £7 net ae es PIE eee Tee Charleston, 8. C.
Masse rani Olea <r tsps eas coc cael oe ke ee Grand Forks, N. D.
Hee Mistatitlen Mae <2 ia he eee ere ee eee Stanford University, Cal.
os TRAUB 0 675) Ns pean Mga Sy Cae ee ee Mare Stanford University, Cal.
PACE NV LUNG Too) Ut pay Naw yds os tay orate abn yc £5 Worcester, Mass.
yea Wes PW OROQNA I: <1 2 ug neta ei ks hoo ane a Petes Pte Washington, D. C.
Grenicethe Gl BELb ss acti ae ns rig aes ake ae Hels od Stanford University, Cal.
RO RRO GIN x hice etn mente a one NE 2 oe ea 2 Columbia, Mo.

BCC So Se 3 EVES es ee en ie a Re ape hag eee eee Syracuse, N. Y.
ORG RELAY nat 15 eae eS Ce Pe te Se ONS SE sc New York City.
Pimentel deliberate: ee, ene een et Iya bk Stockton, Cal.
A ard Kora ahs Span eee ai aI) NE eas ee ea Stanford University, Cal.

HN Fo yf (Sin EI yarieenee eee eects ord hoc ge ee pe Stanford University, Cal.

16

Ja Wingsleysc cst. oe et ce ae eee ee ee . Tufts College, Mass.

ID. Mac Doupalls cc on. tae one eistet an eee Bronx Park, New York City
‘ESC Mendenhallsan cca site peed eee peas Worcester, Mass.

IAT Rr HSE lite Giese gs 5c, <7 eee ca aes gee Cincinnati, Ohio.

Li My Uinderwoodkc.. 8 hts tee ane eee eh aerate New York City.

Robertdb -WaEders vin. ata eS eens ae aa Washington, D. C.

Hine st Wa licon st etre akon 58 a0 ce ae a ee ae Clemson College, 8. C.

ACTIVE MEMBERS.

George “A bbObh-7. 2 aeons eee wea Indianapolis.
Bdwardshuch: Banges. a4 caine otis Se ee Indianapolis.
Walter DiiBa kerr et a2ke on acts ier naeceee a, Indianapolis.
Harry idridse: Bishops «sg 2 Se ae a Indianapolis.
Williant<N> Blan charts \ os oles co aes eet eee Greencastle.
Lester- Black 235. Saas ee eee Ce ee dae

eetie Bennettn. co cee 2 ee eee ee ae Valparaiso.
CharlesiS! Bond ony oo- 4 g..nocus een pe Ree Richmond.
Bred Bre@zG ons c0 tach, oo ck te toes: ee eae ee Remington.
Es Mi BUG G re sen regis Saat secaeny Se ease nt Witenes fee One Terre Haute.
Lewis) Clintons Gsarsome a. = a ie eee lee Detroit, Mich.
Herman: 5s Chamberlain sce ace teen ek ees Ses Indianapolis.
Pe Js Chanisler a3 55a ietie Nie ak pereeay acs ase tns Bicknell.
@ttojO> Clayton... $2.4 scenes ecg eek ee oe Geneva.
Foward ow). (Olan kmk 20. caue sed eee renee te Chicago, II.
ia Mi Clem re Sais ir 2h: cr gear eee ieee mS oe Monroeville.
Gharles'Clickeneraalt ss) so <a as eee Pe te Silverwood, R. D. No. 1
OharlessA Colley 2 =~ th oh. tien Seca eget Aaa Y Petersburg.
MikyasestO=Gox. 25h c oro acetate Terre Haute.
Williamy@liftordiCox ears caer tr 7.5 ee erates etre: Columbus.

Jo ASG re orale ae ook ee Be car at Ber ere ieee ae Crawfordsville
WESGEie: Crowielces scores 7 eortine oh oy aegis Reha eek Franklin.
Lerenza br. Wantelaas << Shee scence aoe Laporte.

SC Davissonsasss rac wie eae eran oe eee Bloomington.
Charles! CMD ean? son So cet See ee Pee Bluffton.
Mengt han Doan oo oie a5 oe aie 2 twat eens aah en oi Westfield.

JaR. Dolan ase ec ages at ae a ee oe Syracuse.

Ts erragigis BY? DOO eee oe eto aie OIE oa oleae
Fase UU enem cya: pale sh. hee as Pe nn ea Ais cs
PAIUINU Ta ea Trias eM te tee nn erst han ee ere Sc f El
PLETE DE Te Ae) UTATIe eee neers ere ee Ry Set sas coe
PRS West Or MOUNT Sie 5 ieee See tae ecard Bnet sts pia es
VRS NSE TO lce cae eortccee ET OS Ea Pe rs ie Pale
Setie) Gre PiVAOE <4. Fe aeee oe oe ae ele erers
VAs cies race ey Ee ver: eee bee ue Se ecen tee corks ea cert) S ee
AWVATUD Tre tANee ENTS ed Pa og oe, Sets anc ea ego ina GR dN cabs
Wael eiletehers face piece ec Rate iahysin 5 5
PROS TLR LLIN bap spore eee ah a he ee Seer BT ee Mos
Jonnie Gabel ees ea pee ao te es acc eer eke e
ATIGTE We Wiee Goll bleep heat ts ee peter tne eee ae
bats Ob (GHW al 00 ry Pe eae aR

ranks Gooks Greenery: eves ios hots once wet ete eee oe
Wall Perel erbah eee ee caah <8: ices tae hte tehe aes
eT NS 5 Ea 5 aR A a
WaCtOreTenancks hrc apiucsts ck. | bamtise ey pa icine cones
hibme ses HeGNETMETOW sc. exo CoE. ie ee
(Oe DEL iste. pean beet ert peso seme met ay Ae
Pio eG OM cy Sk REN, Sh at RE ows Rotation.
REE AING Eee RUNES Deeg oe ed nero, oA wt oh
Seeellaghial ands ress omer eset. Sexo wes k he Sean
Uiclousy de] 8 RKG FA ongsiake Ritee nae che, Sher an wias CocacaeeNCe Smee er cae a ae
(G1 Eh od BOTS DOR ONO coy Wet erkea wheiyen Aint Nemes pene Cit ae a ee
ANI So DING & Ko} (Se ae ew och ey 0 oat aaa een
Taremis! Meni b panera mana ate tcp ys hc nis een Ne
cisahean DIOR GE UY cs ae 8 ator ge be acess est eae
Aa eR ACKSO LIN Aaa Rae rents ae er SE oe
Wim. J. Jones, Jr...... Mb ere 8 aia the ie ee
Ble mING ROM sae ara ree ere Re Tar eet ia en tt
LPH oir eet De] AS ae ct pees Gene Ne pr ne
UG] [elspa beet oO Gy cP oe een AOR arr aae Se eee
RE Wae MICS DUG iecea ae tree einer hey eek oe ccd

2—A. OF SCIENCE,

Lafayette.
Indianapolis.
Logansport.
Logansport.
Vincennes.
Columbus.
Evansville.
Logansport.
Richmond.
Indianapolis.

Jeffersonville.

Montpelier.
Logansport.
Lafayette.

Pittsburg, Pa.

Terre Haute.
Rochester.
New Albany
Mitchell.

St. Louis.
Logansport.
Bloomington.
Indianapolis.
Terre Haute.
Madison.
Logansport.
Logansport.
Richmond.
South Bend.
Indianapolis.

Greencastle.

West Lafayette.

Terre Haute.
Lafayette.
Urbana, Il.
Indianapolis.

Terre Haute.

17

18

Nib; Meindoors sec so cet a.m ete rig. oe tame are Lyons.

Tyyarnigs es Me Marl lenis icons cectcste hey eee nn eee erate Indianapolis.
Hickwercds(s:- Mia bane x0 onc igen ete eee acne West Lafayette.
James Ju. Memnehester.<-o:. <.o: onete ce 2 oo eis Pee Vincennes.
‘Waltredsi Manwariay.-<.<- 5. Bj has aie gone aes Bloomington.
Walliam ideariMasones «oan etter ee eet ire aoe Borden.

Clarke sMigi Ss aio tse ree cet ae oe eae eee Berkley, Cal.

G= Rudolph Millers. 32 sce sock cc eee ae ee Indianapolis.
Richard Bishop Moore: 2252 sc. + ses haesse Cece Indianapolis.
Bred Matebler’. 2 cit. fete i ae. see eee Terre Haute.
Charles 40 3Newiitia so ok sek os ae ee ee Irvington.
Jabn-l. INGWSOUE.. 2.2 c22os.- oes Beem Ske ee eee Stanford University, Cal.
TD OWCG. A St RAP Oe te ak ae LO ates Dba ae Franklin.

RRGHO Jes eirCes 5 ata ee cheeses Ane eee eae Indianapolis.
Ral hos Rolie ws seers cts toe ee one ae fae ee ramets Greenwood.
amesrAcs Pricer: <5 sakes. eee eee en nee ene Ft. Wayne.
ACME ee PU AUG etic? cea eae bee eo eee ES Fayetteville, Ark.
AlbertiB:. REaeam.c 1% 2.1. tose esata. ee Ree Mora, Wash.
Allen JeeRe y Old se s¢ races cesar neta eRe meer Emporia, Kansas.
GilesshisRipleyexcvetc ana isis eae Dee GI ae Decorah, Iowa.
Georpedi, “RODCEISs 12 tas ty oes Remeron Muncie.

RAG SCH OZe) Aah. sce ee aes Wists oe epee Se Ft. Wayne.
WilliScotifzces accent ot oat oo oc aa oe eae Bloomington.
Wharles Wim Sbanngis oe Pesce aes eae Bloomington.
Bred: Siler ys 4 ca leo e ee ae ae Indianapolis.
Jane Slonakerss ace, 2k as ee Oe a ee ee oe Madison, Wis.
AUDERG SUEUR 8c BOD Sn eee hee Soe aye Sete Lafayette.
BssievAlmiatomit bea aes oe aces em enone pee Bloomington.

Gx PiperiSmith ss >2 soccer ee ee Dek a eae Pacific Grove, Cal.
Jen Stoddard .3 S52. cen ta at eee es Indianapolis.
AlbertawW DH OMmpsO Merete ena aan eae eee Owensville.

Wis Be VanGorder. +. vssias ce Ole oe aS Rie Worthington.

EIEN Soe VO OT NEES eres reece Pet ays oe heres ee ore k ted eee ae Ft. Wayne.
Pranic WAGG ssc oat oe Sas waste oes ke ee Indianapolis
Panicle Des Weir s. 2: -covces toe a re ee A cae Indianapolis.
Guy Westh WiEGi ys os. oc S ace aera ae ee Bronx Park, N. Y.
William “Watson Woollen: </57" S32 aeons te Indianapolis.

Herbert Milton Woolen... . °: seta as see ee Indianapolis.

19

dite IMOUIRE Yeon MSs ras hatensbe talc beer iia « « .... Indianapolis.
Wm. J. Young RRS ERE Gites oda ee Hyattsville, Md.
GVO US Ue tryna eee ek ete S Sten eerie ccce Nees Goes Terre Haute.
OUTER SEREAE EN a SRO eo Sieger ON a a Bloomington.
HEMOWAER Noe Ron intents tacrs See slg oe ee 53
Non-resident -Mempers. vesjs..ccms ones ooh ew 20
INCLEVETIMEMIDCIS a tae oes tee sie sve etree aoe alOR

Nore.—For list of Foreign Correspondents, see Proceedings of 1904.

=8!
*).
~108
ite
*12.
*13.

PROGRAM

OF THE

TWENTY-SECOND ANNUAL MEETING,
INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA.

Held in Shortridge High School Building, November 30 and December |, 1906.

*President’s Address—The Evolution of Medicine in Indiana ....................02 000 ee eeee Robert Hessler
GENERAL.
AMstate. Natural Park. sbi. cceise eet eee eee ee iron Re Ree eee Fred J. Breeze
Some Results from the Study of Life Insurance Problems, 10m........................ C. H. Beckett
The Sex Ratio in the Fruit Fly and its Control by Selection, 10m.................... W. J. Moenkhaus
An Outline of the Course in the Experimental Engineering Laboratory of Purdue. Univer-

Sity el Omeriae eter cae Nee ee Pr tay Da tHe ratte Maer eth Ee Se sn oS 5 2 W. O. Teague
RheWWnited iS tatessGeologicalisurveys..ceactes-eae cee eee ee H. M. Wilson, Chief Geographer
Drainage Area of the East Fork of White River, 10m....................-.---.20s0e-- G. W. Shannon
Steps in the Development of a Smokeless City............. Joa ba RO a Fae eRe CER W. F. M. Gess
Experimental Studies of Reinforced Concrete, 7m...............0..00seseeeseseese Deeg Wi heat
Reclamation Possibilities of the Great Plains, 30m......................................0. W. Beede
Howathe Body, sRights Diseases oma. cape en a toc ee ae ae ne Rees W. H. Manwaring
The State Production and Control of Vaccines and Antitoxines, 15m.................. L. W. Famulener
Recurrence of Uroglena in the Lafayette City Water Supply, 5m...................... Severance Burrage
Laboratory Tests on certain Liquid Dentifrices and Mouth-washes, 15m.............. Severance Burrage
A Critical Study of Methods of Sweeping Rooms and Wards in Hospitals, 10m......... Severance Burrage

*14,

_*The program committee suggests that papers 6 to 9 inclusive be heard at the Friday evening meeting and
that the Academy invite its friends.

*15,
16.
Als
*18.
19.
20.

* *
bo bw
Noe

x #
SO b

bt bw bw b& bt

*
bo
oo

*
tw
5S

Gra

ae Go

MATHEMATICS.
On the Reduction of Partial Differential Equations of the Fourth Order, 10m........... Charles Haseman
The Determination of a Certain Family of Surfaces, 10m.............................. Wm. H. Bates
ConcerminesDifferentialnvariants ll Omer seer cieeiae peect tee eee eee ee eee D. A. Rothrock
Conjugate Functions and Canonical Transformations, 10m............................. D. A. Rothrock
On the Formula for the Area of a Curve in Polar Coordinantes, 10m.................... Jacob Westlund
A Group of Scrolls Connected with a Steam Locomotive, 10m.........................-- C. A. Waldo
CHEMISTRY.

Notes sonsipalte Lime, Ont ey a dca ate ne erere ee aria eae ene Oa Aa cS eee F. B. Wade
SurarandSourness, A Oimby-peecee cor cen saat he es ee Seca re SN Sceeia eee Ue coe P. N. Evans
AuSimpleyMethodsof Measuring si ydrolysiswel Omieerreas:irck tii eicie octet ie itn ee ee G. A. Abbott
The Ionization of the Successive Hydrogens of Ouhaprosinone Acids 10m2= cree G. A. Abbott
Thiocarbonylsalicylamide and Derivatives, 5m................. _..R. E. Lyons and Elizabeth Shirley
Some:Complex:Ureids)\5im. saan see ot aioe See omens ee teasers R. E. Lyons and James Currie
A Volumetie Method for the Estimation of Selenic Acid, 5m ........... R. E. Lyons and C. G. Carpenter
The Solubility of Uranium X in Ammonium Carbonate and the Variations in the Activity of

pomes Uranium! Compounds 10 me sce elasticities ele R. B. Moore and Herman Schlundt

The Separation of Iron and Manganese by means of Pyridine, 5m............ R. B. Moore and Ivy Miller

PHYSICS
30. The Hail Effect in “Hensler” Alloy, 10m...... Re Ee), et MN Ber ee eR to ho D. H. Weir
*31. The Distribution of Stress in a Riveted Joint, l5m.................. 0. cece ee ee ee eee Albert Smith
Dare COCMICIenITO pH Aan SION (Ole BrIGKy LOM Syst are) -\n Saisie Vertis siei-,s<.aiola Geico Se yao eaieeans C. VY. Seastone
33. Measurement of Water by Means of a Vertical Jet, 5m................. 0. cece eee ee eee C. V. Seastone
*34. Mathematical Principles Applied in Earthwork Construction, 10m........................... J. Garman
- 35. Strength of Materials Under Combined Stresses, 5m.............0.- 2000 e eee ences E. L. Hancock
36. Lines on a Pseudosphere and Syntractrix of Revolution, 5m.......................0.... E. L. Hancock
37. Elastic Changes in Steel due to Overstrain, 10m... 0... 2.6.2. eee ec ete ewe cesesece E. L. Hancock
Dome Waterprooing | Mixtures! fore COMCLeLe;, OM. a aacie-cs wleview ae es cle cle nivale ciegueiesist asics abc W. K. Hatt
*39. Contributions to Knowledge of Vehicle Woods, 10m...................0. 0. cece eee eeeeees W. K. Hatt
SUN RD. CM CK aL LT eee ee ena hae ne Sr age oh on eae Bey sere ee Be G. P. Hetherington
*39b. On Certain Demonstration Apparatus for Alternating Currents, 10m...................... C. P. Mathews
BOTANY.

*40. Notes upon the Rate of Tree Growth in Glacial Soils of Northern Indiana, 15m........... Stanley Coulter
41. The Michillinda (Michigan) Sand Dunes and their Flora, 10m..................... Bere Stanley Coulter.
*42. A List of Algae, 10m...... TEI ey Ie Ye TAIT ES Sale sees En a eG ee Frank M. Andrews
FAS Se Oe MONSHONIMCS ner LAN ta.> MONT as tac atae cyt cor ret ence Ses eked See ele cae mere tise Frank M. Andrews
PA Pea DEA ath M Ee IStSe EaIVELOVOELS WLLCCrse 0 ODN ff nose wc uche cea eee oa rao nice akira siete ete fe J. C. Arthur
2455 Parasitic Plant: Diseases: Reported for Indiana, 10m: =. 22. <2. 225.2 e oe cee cleo ne - Frank D. Kern
*46. Notes on Occurrence of Sclerotinia fructigena, 10m.....................-022200200000-- Frank D. Kern
SeeesduiiOnsowghe inGianaytlorauNOs aoollecs «sos tovacten soho «ce bi an Wa ei ig os ee ewe Chas. C. Deam
TS ame HeRELYINENOMNCELES Of uediatian LOG cytes 2 = Aeron. Pettitte e <i cine nine och cia ci mture ant Donald Reddick
49 Comparison of Primary and Secondary Structures of Some Woods, 15m........ Katherine Golden Bitting
ZOOLOGY.

Omen hem Gum nas LOM nase retainers mnie ier spain von ate, Soaks RANE easels cin Scinse ad + cishetere « Albert B. Reagan
51. The Mammals and Reptiles of the Rosebud Indian Agency, 10m....... Hk See yooh hehe Albert B. Reagan
jee AcGrow oOsh Meany Henny tOM . LUCIAN Ay) OMe a/c sess. « xin ace Satajagers| olayanayass Rieter paiavehsln ayele Soares Fred J. Breeze

53. Fauna of the Grand Summit Section of Kansas and Remarks on the Development of Derbya
Multistriata,) Meek and) Hayden, slbmi pemastal.: wets suts seks clea oeboditeaek ates ates F. C. Greene
54. The Mammalian Remains of the Donaldson Cave, 10m...................0...0.0000000- Walter L. Hahn
REIS (Glee NOLtMWestern In Cian LOM mai. iesticne aaa e a ensjacerctars aise sie Teiet aM loIon oe lelaiaa o ermere Henry Link
PUNO Les One Nn Gianay birds pl OI. yan cras ne ee ateis cise tris aie re ere ae eee eee aoe A. W. Butler
57. Some Internal Factors Controlling the Rate of Regeneration, 10m...................... Charles Zeleny
*58. The Reactions of the Blind Fish, Amblyopsis spelaens, to Light, 10m...................... Ferd Payne
*59. Observations on the Formation and Enlargement of the Tube of the Marine Annelid, Chaet-
GDLELOS <vaniO ed shies LONI es mS eet ee nr, Se BO Puce SA Raa ok et eee H. E. Enders
*60. Notes on the Artificial Fertilization of the Eggs of the common Clam, Venus mercenaria, 5m. .H. E. Enders
*61. Some Observations on Ferment-activity in Unfertilized and Fertilized Eggs of Sea Urchins
ANC ShAC PENS ol pits wedevas 2 nts eee sta seiicy en ble Maids Gf pla Meat iale ociae aes O. P. Terry
boa Bigot seressnresin aM sna Oni metter ee Petes. te ees ee ya ey ae. aoe he) Sy ee G. E. Hoffman
Bouse he pense onSiEnt ii pidera mount nt. gi ticseaie career rin esata ccsen el Alexander Petrunkevitch
GEOLOGY.
*63. Evidence of a Local Uncomformity of Considerable Extent in the Pennsylvanian Rocks of
OTGNETHE IT Anya ON Mee Megan eye MDE ini cl git, wraly. oes gvoretverecleneers A. W. Thompson
64. Summary of Glacial Literature Relating to Glacial Deposit, 10m.......................4 Albert B. Reagan

*Papers marked with a star were read.

THE TWENTY-SECOND ANNUAL MEETING OF THE
INDIANA ACADEMY OF SCIENCE.

The twenty-second annual meeting of the Indiana Academy of Science
was held in Indianapolis, Thursday, Friday and Saturday, November 29,
30, and December 1, 1906.

Thursday, at 6 p. m., twenty members of the Academy dined together
at the Claypool Hotel. Following the dinner the Executive Committee
met in regular session at the hotel headquarters.

President Robert Hessler called the Academy to order at 9:30 Friday
morning, in the teachers’ assembly room at Shortridge High School. The
transaction of business and the reading of papers occupied the attention
of the Academy until 11 a. m., when Dr. Hessler read his paper entitled:
“The Evolution of Medicine in Indiana.”

Following this address came an adjournment until 2 p. m., when other
papers came up for reading and discussion. At night papers of general
interest were read and the friends of the Academy were invited to be
present. On Saturday morning all unsettled business was cared for and
the remainder of the papers were heard, when the Academy adjourned.

THE SPRING MEETING OF 1906.

The spring meeting of 1906 was held in New Harmony, Indiana, May
25 and 26.

The party reached New Harmony Friday afternoon, and in the even-
ing-was entertained at a meeting planned by the residents. Frank Owen
Fitton presided at this meeting, and talks were made by Miss Carrie Pel-

’

ham, on “The Community Life of New Harmony,” and the Rev. William
DuHamel on “The Scientific History of New Harmony.’

Saturday was spent in exploring the town and its surroundings.

PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS.

Tue Evouution oF MEDICINE IN INDIANA.

Rospert HeEsster, A. M., M. D.

On looking over the addresses of our past Presidents, I observe that
they have usually dwelt upon subjects in which they were especially in-
terested, and I feel it but natural that I should do likewise.

In addressing you I am not unmindful of the fact that the people as
a whole are behind you, are in a measure represented by you as leaders
in scientific thought, and that a discourse should be shaped accordingly.
All that I should like to say would require much time; what I can say
in the brief time allotted must be suggestive rather than a full and exact
statement of scientific facts and deductions.

The subject is a vast one, but I shall consider it briefly from three
standpoints: First, the evolution of the medical student and the coming
of the medical man into our State; second, the evolution of diseases and
the coming in of new diseases, or, rather, the introduction of old diseases
into a new locality; and lastly, the changes in methods of the treatment
of diseases.

Art precedes science everywhere. Plants were used and cultivated
before there was a science of botany ; many of the processes underlying
chemistry were known before there was a science of chemistry. Likewise
the sick were treated before there was a science of medicine. There are
not wanting those who deny that there is a science of medicine and who
assert that it is simply an art based on many sciences—on anatomy, bac-
teriology, chemistry, and so on through the alphabet, but the prevailing
view is that there is a science of medicine. Whichever view we adopt
must lead to the conclusion that the greater a man’s knowledge of science,
the better a practitioner he will likely be, other things being equal.

24

What is the reason, I have been asked, so few of the Indiana physicians
are. members of the Indiana Academy of Science? If physicians are scien-
tific men, why are so few members of the Academy? My usual reply is
that our physicians are so busy fighting disease and giving relief to the
sick that they have no time—such a reply satisfies many and places the
doctors in a good light. But such a reply does not quite fit in case of the
question: Why are so many doctors not members of a progressive medical
society? Or, Why do so few contribute to the scientific medical literature
of the State? Perhaps a brief review of the evolution of medicine in In-
diana will enable us to draw some just conclusions.

As sciences do not spring up suddenly. but are a matter of slow growth,
so likewise the accumulated stock of knowledge is not suddenly transferred
to a new country; it takes a long time to bring it in, and our State is no
exception.

THE PRIMITIVE MEDICINE Man: The primitive medicine man was the
first to differentiate from the race; when all hunted and fished, he alone
stood apart and in the course of time separated more and more. As knowl-
edge was brought together, there was a further differentiation, sciences
crystallized out and pursued independent courses—but in their application
are always of benefit to man. Where the early medicine man held all
the knowledge of his race or tribe, in the course of time there arose a
number of learned men. The man who studied the stars in time developed
into an astrologer and later on into an astronomer, just as the herbalist
developed in time into a pharmacist er botanist. (The diagram is intended
to show this relationship in a general way. The survival of old time be-
liefs and methods of treating diseases being represented by a line parallel
to the development of the race, we need only think of the use of charms
and amulets, of faith-cures. the administration of nauseous drugs, and so

on, to gain an idea of how much still survives.)

INDIAN MEpICINE Man: ‘The native Indian medicine man belonged to
a race stiil in the childhood of civilization. a race in the hunting and fishing
stage, and his beliefs and methods of treating disease were on a level with
such a stage; moreover at the time the white man first came in, the Indians
had few diseases to contend with. Contrary to the popular belief, the
modern physician can learn nothing from the Indian medicine man, though
the life of the Indian can teach hin many things pertaining to the value
of simple food, pure water and air, with out-of-door exercise.

bo
ON

Sen
> pera
L SSE)
& Cs . oe a
oe a s ES
Ss ‘4 < e »
& 2° i HI AS
or o Pace oe
a o> Ww a ©
Ps ~ xX TO
245 xb > a c
o> oe Rages «| —
: = 2 Pew ©
> «o> BOOS he
<< a S oO
0 > ss <
Ny rag Q >
> gOS)
Ss @ = es >
oO Stal Ow) CA ~
ae ~ Oe ES
@ =
ee ~ ex a:
y
- go eS
~ ia
ar 9
ee > oe
ra ae YY
“SO <~ ~
\ ay i) (2)

—Specialization in Medicine —eye, throat, stomach

nerves, etc,
——Separation of the Surgeon (Barber’s pole a survival
early times.)

of

—Separation of Sanitarian.

——Separation of Bacteriologist.

uo s90malsS

—Separation of Physiologist

SjSol MOU
auloIpay YoIyM

Separation of Aratomist.

— Differentiation of Alchemist, developing into the Chem-
St

—Dif of Herbahst, from whom developed the Pharmacist
and Botanist

ultimately developing into the

—Dif of the Astrologer,
Astronomer.

—Dit of Chief (survival of behef in the King’s Touch for
scrofula and of.the belief in the Divine Right of

Kings. )
—Dif of the Pnest. (Survival of Faith Cures and the power
of prayer in arresting epidemics. )

Differentiation of the Primitive Medicine Man. (Survival
today of primitive beliefs, in charms, amulets, incantation,

nauseous drugs, etc.)

All men alike.

26

EARLY INDIANA PHYSICIANS: When the pioneer came to our territory
he left his old diseases behind, but in the course of time they followed
him, and he had to make the best of it. Until a country is sufficiently
settled to support an educated physician, none comes in. Men were in-
fluenced then by the same motives that influence them today. No well
educated physician today thinks of settling in the backwoods; but as soon
as a settlement 1s made and a village arises, some venturesome spirit is
apt to come in. As a matter of fact the first Indiana physicians were mea
connected with the United States army posts along the Wabash river, little
over 2 century ago; unfortunately they left no records of their observations.

Physicians proper began to come in during the first decade of the past
century, but there are scarcely any medical records prior to the year 1820.
The early physicians led a strenuous life; there were no roads and the
sick were scattered over a large area: it was a horseback and saddlebag
life. Few had time or inclination to write—to the few who did write we
owe all our knowledge of those days. Medical books then were few and
costly; a man with one book in each branch of medicine was indeed a
rarity. Medical journals were equally rare, and the fact that some of
the early Indiana physicians took the London Lancet speaks volumes for
their learning and ambition.

The educated physician soon had apprentices; that is, farmers’ sons,
who learned the rudiments of the profession and then began their own
work; few went to a medical school. Wor a long time there were only two

medical, schools this side of the Alleghanies—at Lexington, Ky., and at

Cincinnati—and to attend these meant a long trip over roads at times
almost impassable. At first there were simple medical laws, but these
were abolished, and after 1848 the field was open to all. Just as bad

money drives out the good. so bad physicians drove out the good, or pre-

vented good ones rrom coming in, and for a long time medical affairs went
backward. But we inust not forget that Indiana retrograded generally
during this time. In 1850 Indiana was the eighth State in point of number
lower than all the

of inhabitants, but ranked twenty-third in illiteracy
slave states but three. The term ‘Hoosier’ was a term of reproach, from
which our physicians did not escape, and sharp criticism was passed on
some of our civil war surgeons.

The early Indiana physicians had few kinds of diseases to contend
with, but these few made up in number of enses for the lack of kind.
Malaria ravaged frightfully and dominated all diseases. The standard

27

treatment for malaria, as for most other diseases, was bleeding, purging
and vomiting, and the use of calomel, whisky and bark, the latter in time
displaced by quinine.

In the course of time the pains and aches of civilization came in. I
have heard old settlers speak of them as ‘“new-fangled diseases,” and
there came also a revulsion against old methods of treatment. In the
absence of restraining medical laws, a host of practitioners soon appeared ;
some of these becume quite skillful, but one is reminded of the story of
the man who eapressed his admiration at the skill of the oculist who had
just operated on him; the oculist admitted that he was skilled, adding,
“But L£ spoiled haif a bushel of eves in learning to perform that operation.”

Gradually the “isms” and “pathies’” of medicine appeared, most of
them a protest against some of the absurdities of the old practitioners.
There are no “isms” nor “pathies” among the sciences on which medicine
rests—anatomy, baclericlogy, chemistry, and so on, are free from then:
but when it comes to therapeutics or treatment, one-half of the doctors
think the other half wrong. However a number of established facts are

gradually accumulating and in the course of time there will be a science
of therapeutics, in which serum therapy will, no doubt, bold a prominent
place, and many of the drugs of today only a minor one.

With the advance of civilization a number of well defined diseases
tend to diminish, but with a massing of humanity a host of ills tend to
increase. There are any number of affections that scarcely rise to the
dignity of a disease. Prescribing becomes largely a prescribing for symp-
toms, and many of the sick do their own prescribing ; some go to a physician
only as a last resort. Many are unwilling to pay the physician for the
time it takes to investigate, and so the physician himself simply prescribes
for the symptoms. Some physicians are so busy doing this that they have
no time for study or to attend the meetings of their medical society, much
less attend and take part in the deliberations of any scientific society. The
bane of the scientific physician is the busy practitioner who flits from one
patient to another, never studying any case in detail nor taking time for
study, or manifesting any interest in the progress of medicine. The number
of men who have contributed to the annual Transactions of the Indiana
State Medical Society is remarkably small; where a few make frequent

contributions, many make none at all.

Mepicar. ScHoonts: For a long time our State had no school for the

education of physicians and the more ambitious students of medicine had

28

to go elsewhere. More than fifty years ago the doctors of Indiana were
discussing the advisability of establishing a medical college; there were
arguinents pro and con. Sole believed that if we could not have a good
school, we had best have none. Since then many medical colleges have
come into existence and continued for variable periods of time. Some
“went under” early, others experienced the hardships of existence as
private institutions. ‘The struggle is still going on. Indiana is behind the
times; she is still without a medical school controlled by the State. Every
civilized country sooner or later is con:pelled to assume control of medical
education.

The art of medicine has made progress in Indiana, but the science
lags behind; so far, our State has made little real addition to the science
of medicine.

Although at the time of the passage of the common school law, only
about fifty years ago, the term Hoosier was one of reproach, the advent of
the schooimaster and State education soon changed that, and today we
take pride in being called Hoosiers—it is becoming a term of honor rather
than of reproach. We have wholly outgrown our former reputation, and
Indiana literary productions are Known the world over.

The old medical schools did their work well; it was a practical work;
but until the State takes charge of medical education and sets a good
standard, little advance in medical science is to be expected.

Art precedes science everywhere. Our own physicians have been so
busy applying the knowledge already extant that they have not had time
to make original observations. and few have published their observations.
But the time will come when our physicians will add to the scientific litera-
ture of medicine—the rise of general education and of literature in our
State foreshadows it.

THE ADVENT OF DISEASES.

The coming in of new diseases can perhaps be best understood in the
light of the analogy of the coming in of new weeds. Weeds and diseases
can be compared in many ways, but after a time analogies fail and each
must be studied separately. Pointing out analogies often leads men to

think, and in this tight they are justifiable.

Harty Boranists AND HAarRLY WEEDS—HARLY PHYSICIANS AND HARLY

DISEASES: Of the prevalence of the early weeds of our State we know

29

but little; there were no competent observers. A farmer might fight weeds
all his life and yet know but little about them, about their characteristics
and properties, or their classification, and he is very apt to confound species.
A farmer usually simply learns to do certain things, only a few inquire
into the reason why or into the nature of the thing itself; we call these
few progressive farmers.

The erratic Rafinesque was perhaps the first botanist who visited our
State, but he left no records of Indiana plants. The first botanist to make
a local list was Dr. A. Clapp, of New Albany, in the early thirties; at that
time inany European weeds had already wandered in. Since then a num-
ber of local lists have been made, some of them by physicians who botan-
ized as a recreation. The first State Catalogue was that of Coulter, Barnes
and Arthur, published in 188!. The complete State Catalogue of Stanley
Coulter did not appear until 1900; since then a number of additional lists
have appeared in the Proceedings of our Academy. New plants are con-
stantly arriving, brought in from other States and countries; of these new
arrivals many are weeds and of these some remain and become common.
Where at first there were but few observers of new arrivals, now there are
many, and new weeds are soon recognized and reported.

If it requires a botanist (even though only an amateur who submits to
the superior knowledge of the expert) to distinguish between weeds, it
must be evident that an educated physician is required to distinguish be-
‘tween diseases and to record the arrival of new ones. A man may fight
disease or diseases all his life without knowing anything about Das Wesen
der Krankheit; indeed, it is painful to admit that the best physicians have
to fight diseases about whose real nature they know but little; like the
farmer and his weeds, they can simply fight them in the way they have
been taught or have learned how. Unfortunately the routinism of some
physicians is on a plane little above that of the farmer’s method; they are
satisfied to live on without making any effort to find out and we do not
look for any advance in learning from them.

The advent of the educated physician has already been referred to, so
I shail proceed to give a few analogies between weeds and diseases. My
remarks, as already mentioned, will be suggestive rather than exact scien-
tific statements, mere outlines without dates. Of the many introduced
diseases I can inention but a few. Animals and plants also have diseases
but I shall refer only to disease in human beings.

30

ANALOGLIES OF WEEDS AND DISEASES.

THE Days or Few WEEDS AND OF LirrLe DISEASE: The first settlers
cultivated only small patches of ground, often only a “truck patch”; there
were few kinds of weeds and these were natives and easily destroyed.
The Kagweed (Ambrosia artemisizfolia) was probably the chief among
them.

Of the diseases of the native Indians at the time the white man first
came among them, we know nothing, but we do know that their life was
not conducive to the evolution and propagation and dissemination of dis-
eases, and we cau assume that, in all probability, they were practically
free from disease. Men who live in isolation, and in proportion as they
do live in isolation, are almost free from the common pus formers, the
Staphylococci and Streptococci, with an absence of many of the common
ailments of life dependent more or less on them.

‘Thg early settlers wére a hardy set of men and women; they had left
their weak and feeble behind, and they led a happy life, especially in the
northern part of the State where the Indians were not savage or warlike,
owing mainly to the influence of the French pioneers. There were few
weeds and likewise few diseases; they had left both behind. But they
found at least one native disease, namely milk sickness, or in other words.
they found the cause of it, and when this got into the body, through the
use of infected milk or the flesh of cattle with the trembles, a reaction
came on, and this reaction was called Milk Sickness—a disease about

which there has been much discussion.

THe Days oF Dog FENNEL AND JIMSON WEED—OF MALARIA AND Ty-
PHOoID Fever: The Dog fennel came in early, from Europe. Jimson is a
corruption of Jamestown, the early colonial settlement in Virginia. Both
weeds flourish in neglected places, on farms, in villages and in towns;
they disappear with the advance of progress and civilization. On clean
but

farms and in clean villages and towns we see no Dog fennel today
there are still Dog fennel towns in Indiana.

Malaria and Typhoid fever may appropriately be compared and con-
trasted with these two weeds; both were brought in by the white man.

Pr

Malaria came first and was known as “The Fever.” When typhoid fever
came in it was called “Continued Fever,’ to distinguish it from malaria
also known as “Periodical Fever.’ Until the decade 1840-1850, physicians

the world over were not able to clearly differentiate typhoid fever, it was

OL

long coufused with typhus fever; very recently another disease has been
differentiated, known as paratyphoid. Thus finer and finer distinctions are
being made. In this connection I might refer to the analogous case of
the plants Scrophularia nodosa, Scrophularia Marylandica, and Scroph-
ularia leporella. and how the latter, a native Indiana plant, was for a long
time confounded with the other, just as that in turn had been confused
with the European form—a botanist will readily understand this simple
allusion.

Malaria and typhoid fever both flourish under simple and primitive
conditions, that is, under a neglect of sanitation. Malaria flourishes
where the Anopheles mosquito breeds and is transferred from one indi-
vidual to another by its bite. The drainage of wet places and the use of.
quinine are the chief factors that account for the subsidence of malaria
and its present rarity. Typhoid fever differs markedly from malaria!
fever in that one attack protects the individual. The weak are killed off
and those who survive are immune (second attacks of the disease being
rare) and this fact has an important bearing. Typhoid fever is chiefly a
water-borne disease, especially well water. Where wells and closets are
close together or where the subsoil is porous, diffusion takes place. In a
family where typhoid fever occurred there may be no further difficulty
from the use of the well water, but any stranger or visitor using it may
fall a victim. Im cities dependent on wells there may be much typhoid
fever, while on the other hand a city with a good municipal water supply,
especially where the water is properly filtered, may have little of it. Cities
dependent on a river supply without previous filtration may fare very well
so long as the water is clear, but with the muddying of the river after a
rain and with a resort of the citizens to the old wells, there may be a
constant recurrence of the disease. In this connection we must not forget
that many of our rivers are today nothing but open sewers full of infec-
tious germs.

Malaria has disappeared from the cities (the Anopheles mosquito does
not live in cities) but it still flourishes in backward, undrained, communi-
ties—communities that are still in the Dog fennel days. On the other
hand, typhoid fever is all too common in some of our cities and towns—
another indication of the survival of Dog fennel days.

Not so very long ago the chief diagnostic character for distinguishing
between the two diseases was the fever, that is the elevation of tempera-
ture, but every now and then so-called atypical cases occurred which left

32

the diagnosis a matter of doubt. ‘Today the scientific physician takes a
few drops of blood from the finger of the patient, one drop he examines
for the malarial parasite, the other is used for making the serum test for
typhoid fever. In the one disease a few large doses of quinine usually
cures outright; in the case of typhoid fever little medicine is given, little
being required; with good nursing, proper diet, and an abundance of pure
water and pure air, the patient is apt to recover. Although formerly no
exact diagnosis was possible, yet the treatment of cases was simple; qui-
nine, whisky, calomel and opium were standard remedies. Little atten-
tion was given to hygienic measures, the sickroom was often tightly closed,
with the exclusion of fresh air, and as a consequence there was bronchial
irritation, often bronchitis. Typhoid fever is not the fatal disease it was
considered to be in the early days, and the nurse has largely taken the
place of the doctor in the treatment.

In the early days of Indiana, bleeding was in order in the treatment
of malaria, but this practice soon declined. Although the proper remedy
is quinine, yet for a long time it was given in insufficient dosage. Just as
too little water can be put on a fire, and fail to put it out, so too little

quinine can be given to cure a patient—and if you wait too long the fire
(or the disease) may become very destructive. It was customary to “pre-
pare the patient for the quinine.” Some died before the preparation was
completed. The discovery of the Plasmodium malaria, the active cause
of the disease, was a great advance in medicine. But to look for the
parasite is not universal today; some physicians find it easier to prescribe
before they are sure of the diagnosis—Dog fennel days still survive.

THE Days OF COMMON EUROPEAN WEEDS: The white man in his wan-
derings over the world has brought together a miscellaneous collection of
weeds, and these follow him wherever he goes. ‘Today most of our com-
mon Indiana weeds are immigrants from Europe, where they have resisted
destruction for ages. The Amaranths and Chenopodiums when cut down
will sprout anew; pulled up by the roots they take fresh hold while lying
prostrate on the ground; if but a single plant ripen seed, the surrounding
country will soon be restocked.

The white man in his wanderings has likewise collected a miscellan-
eous lot of diseases, and these, like his weeds, follow hIm wherever he
goes. A list of their names may be found in the daily mortality statistics

in the newspapers or in the advertisements of patent medicines.

a "ee

33

Man fights his common diseases by resorting to the use of medicines,
especially patent medicines; he has not yet learned that diseases, like
weeds, may be eradicated, or that prevention is easier than cure. An in-
telligent farming community is apt to make a combined attack on weeds,
and the less seed scattered about the fewer weeds there will be. Perhaps
after a time we will go after diseases as the good farmer goes after his
weeds; indeed, we have already reached the stage where we keep a look-
out for such formidable diseases as the plague, cholera, typhus fever and
several others; we do not allow them to land. But we are so accustomed
to some diseases that have already landed and that have gotten a foothold
among us, that we seem to have forgotten that we could get rid of them
if we only tried.

Among the diseases once common in civilized Europe but now becom-
ing more and more rare, may be mentioned leprosy, cholera, plague, typhus
fever, miliary fever, scurvy, smallpox, malaria, typhoid fever, and others.
Some countries are even beginning to show a reduction in the number of
deaths from tuberculosis, and some cities regard the presence of much
typhoid fever as a municipal disgrace. Man’s control over the spread of

diseases is becoming more and more marked.

THe ANALOGY OF WEEDS AND DISEASES CARRIED FURTHER: A botanist
‘an take his manual and check off plants, especially weeds, that are spread-
ing or migrating, and confidently look forward to the time when they will
appear in his own locality. ‘Those who are on the lookout for new weeds
are rewarded every now and then by finding new arrivals. The date of
many arrivals is known. New weeds are introduced in impure garden
seed, or in the packing of crates or boxes; some travel by rail, others by
water. Some come to stay for but a single season; they may find the en-
vironment unfavorable, early or late frosts may be detrimental; some live
for a few years and then die out; a few, however, may find conditions
favorable and ilourish to such an extent that they may be seen everywhere,
and a man who did not know of their introduction might be led to con-
clude that they always grew in the locality. The list of naturalized weeds
in our State is today quite large.

The date of the first appearance of some of our diseases is likewise
known, but unless a disease has some marked or striking characteristic, it
is apt to be overlooked. Influenza and cholera were readily identified when
they arrived in our State and the date of their arrival is duly recorded,

3—A. OF SCIENCE.

34

but tuberculosis and typhcid fever came in so quietly and unobtrusively
that no notice was at first taken of them, at least we have no records of
their first appearance. People ordinarily do not reason about these things,
but the early Indiana doctors realized that a change was going on and
long ago the Indiana State Medical Society had appointed a committee
to look into the matter. (In this connection I may say that only last week
I reported to the Cass County Medical Society a case of tropical sprue, or
psilosis, brought into the State by a missionary returned from Korea. New
cases are, however, not apt to arise from it.)

Although there is an analogy between weeds and diseases, the former
growing in the earth. the latter on or in the body, yet diseases are not en-
tities that can be handled and examined. But in the childhood of the race
disease was held to be a thing that had gotten into the body, had taken
possession of it, and the early medicine man tried to drive it out by the
use of all sorts of noises and nauseous drugs, even by torture. ‘The Chi-
nese and Korean medicine men of today are quite expert in thrusting long
needles into the body of the sick; it is really wonderful how little dam-
age they do—they have learned how to avoid the vital spots or organs. In
some other countries the sick are filled up with all sorts of nauseous drugs,
and the physicians are quite skilled in knowing what to give so that the
patient may not die from the effect of the supposed remedy.

A specific disease is now regarded in the light of a reaction of the
organism, of the body, toward some foreign cause, the reaction depending
on the kind of cause. ‘The reaction may be so definite that the disease
may be diagnosed from the symptoms alone, without examining into the
nature of the cause, though diagnoses based on a recognition of the cause
are of course more exact than when based on symptoms.

The classification of diseases a hundred years ago, at the time when
our State was first being settled, was by classes, orders, genera and species,
just as in the case of botany and zoology. Many systems of classification
have appeared, each one supposed to be an improvement over preceding
ones, and physicians are just now working upon a new system which they
believe will stand the test of time. Old systems were based on symptoms,
the new is based on the recognition of the cause of the disease. Thus
Osler’s recent treatise takes up first the diseases due to animal parasites—
those due, in order, to protozoa, parasitic infusoria, to flukes, cestodes,
nematodes, and so on—followed by the specific infectious diseases, from
typhoid and typhus fever running down to tuberculosis and leprosy, in-

30

cluding some whose causes have not been definitely identified, analogy ad-
mitting their inclusion. ‘The reactions or intoxications due to the ingestion
of chemical substances, such as alcohol, morphia and lead, follow, with a
mention of sunstroke—and then all at once there is a classification riot.
For want of something better, a number of diseases are described under
the head of “Constitutional Diseases.” Then follow a host of affections
and diseases that for convenience are grouped under their respective
organs, beginning with the diseases of the mouth and running down the
alimentary tract, followed by the affections of the other organic systems—
the respiratory, the nervous, etc. One-third of the book is thus definite,
based on a scientific system, the rest is simply based on convenience of ref-
erence. Although we have here real progress, yet how much still remains
to be done.

Some of you may recall the story of the amateur botanist who com-
plained to Linneus of the poverty of Sweden in material for study, and
how Linneus placed his hand over a tuft of moss and said, ‘Here is study
for a life-time.” ‘To study diseases we need not go to unexplored Africa,
where so many new and strange diseases are being found; our common
every-day ailments and affections and diseases are worthy of the deepest
study, much is still to be learned about them. Not all is known about
common everyday coughs and colds, about rheumatic and neuralgic aches
and pains, about anemia and fever, dyspepsia and nervousness.

The old physicians diagnosed diseases almost wholly from or by their
symptoms, and they were close observers, with sharpened senses like those
of the Indian. The modern physician relies to a great extent on so-called
laboratory methods, and the influence of the college and university labora-
tories is being felt. Rough and ready methods are more and more being
replaced by refined ones. But we must not undervalue the importance of
simple observations, without the use of instruments, nor should we neglect
the training of the sense organs.

Scientific classifications are for scientific minds, but we must not for-
get that “Nature makes transitions and naturalists make divisions.” Hair
splitting in medical classifications, or nosology, is not unknown. As a mat-
ter of fact each group of specialists has its own system and nomenclature,
and when the average all-round physician takes up one of the special
treatises he requires the aid of a medical dictionary.

Popularly we can classify the diseases of our State, including those
we have had in the past and not excluding those still to come, according

36

to the way in which they are transmitted from one individual to another.
It is perhaps needless to say that diseases are carried from one individual
to another, from host to host, much after the fashion of weeds carried
from one field to another. The seed of a weed may gain access to a field
by being blown in by the wind, or it may have been brought in by an ani-
mal, especially by birds; many weeds have been brought in by impure
garden seeds. Cheat or chess among wheat means that the seed was
present; it does not mean the transformation of one species into another,
nor does it mean a spontaneous generation.

The railways are important factors in the distribution of weeds, as
they are of diseases. Before the days of railways new diseases traveled
slowly, cholera and influenza required a long time to encircle the globe in
their early migrations; today diseases may spread rapidly. In a thinly
settled country, weeds and diseases spread slowly, while the massing of
people in cities, especialiy in the absence of sanitation, favors dissemina-
tion.

Diseases due to specific causes can be grouped in various ways, like
weeds; whether native or foreign: whether coming to stay, or to disappear
after a short time; whether spreading rapidly and then dying out, or
spreading slowly but surely and permanently, etc. Looked at in this light
we might regard Milk Sickness as a native disease which is disappearing ;
Cholera as a disease which has come in repeatedly but on account of un-
favorable conditions never gained a permanent foothold; Malaria as
spreading rapidly and iasting for a long time and then aeclining; Tuber-
culosis as coming in and spreading slowly but surely and not yet having
reached its maximum among us. Measles, scarlet fever, smallpox, whoop-

ing cough, ete., need only be referred to.

CLASSIFICATION OF DISEASES ACCORDING TO THEIR MODES OF TRANSMIS-
SION: In a general way we may Classify diseases according to how they

are carried from one individual to another thus:

1. By direct contact—from one host to another.

2. Transmited through insects. (Notably malaria.)

3. Diseases conveyed by or through food.

4. Water-borne diseases.

5. Air and dust-borne diseases and affections (notably tuberculosis
and pneumonia, with a host of other respiratory affections and a variety

of aches and pains and functional disturbances.)

37

Out of the many diseases and affections that come under one or the
other of the above groups, I desire to make mention of only two, namely,
malaria, already referred to, and tuberculosis—one a decreasing, the other
an increasing disease.

Matarta: Malaria was the Grendel of the early Indianians. Today
we can scarcely realize what the disease meant to the early settlers; in
some localities it ravaged frightfully. Thus in the early history of our cap-
ital city we read that the forest was cleared in 1820 and lots laid out and in
the spring of 1821 the immigrants rushed in to the number of six hundred
or more. In the latter part of July malaria appeared, and, I quote from
Drake, “Before the epidemic closed in October, nearly every person had
been more or less indisposed, and seventy-two, or about an eighth of the
population, had died.” In some localities the disease was so severe that
farming lands could not be solid, and for a long time immigration to our
State was retarded; people went through to Illinois, to the prairies.

In an account of the diseases prevailing in Indiana in 1872, by Dr.
Sutton, it was noted that the summer was dry. and in comparing reports
from differevt counties of the State it was found that malaria had been
more prevalent than usual in some of the rolling southern counties and in
places along streams and rocky creeks, while, on the other hand, it was
less common than usual in the northern counties where before it had been
very common (but where drainage had made some of the worst places sa-
lubrious). At that time the view that decaying vegetation and moisture
had a causative influence was universaily believed, yet that theory did not
explain the conditions. ‘loday, in the light of the role the mosquito plays
in the transmission of malaria, we can readily account for the facts.

In the rolling southern counties many of the small streams are fed by
springs which flow a small volume at all times, but in dry seasons not’
sufficiently to create a current in the rocky creeks; hence many pools
formed, and these pools served for breeding places for mosquitoes. Or-
dinarily even a small continuous current of water will prevent the devel-
opment of mosquito eggs, and we must keep in mind the presence of fish
and insects which feed on the mosquito larva, but which die off in times
of low water, on account of its stagnacy. In the wet northern counties
the drought meant a drying out of the breeding places of the mosquitoes,
with a consequent reduction of the number of insects and of cases of ma-
laria. The same reasoning holds for the increase of malaria along the

larger streams; in ordinary stages of water there may be no stagnant pools

38

or isolated bayous, but such form in time of drought, resulting in a de-
struction of the minnows and the deyelopment of countless numbers of

mosquitoes.

MosqulitoEs: Mosquitoes occurred in immense numbers in the early
days, when breeding places were plentiful. They were common along the
canals, and an English traveler on the Wabash canal, in 1851, writes of
them: “After tea, we all began a most murderous attack upon the mos-
quitoes that swarmed on the windows and inside our berths, in expecta-
tion of feasting upon us as soon as we should go to bed. But those on
which we made war, were soon replaced by others; and the more we killed,
the more they seemed to come to be killed, like Mrs. Bond’s ducks; it was
as though they would defy us to exterminate the race. At last, we gave up
the task as hopeless, and resigned ourselves, as well as we could, to pass a
sleepless night.” He adds: “What with turning about on account of the
heat and trying to catch the mosquitoes, who bit us dreadfully, we did not
get much rest; and we rose the next morning unrefreshed.”

Canals were a factor in the mosquito-malaria problem. In some of the
older States it was noticed that malaria followed the canals, that the dis-
ease appeared where it had formerly been unknown; in other places it
markedly increased its prevalence; some towns were almost depopulated.
When Indiana undertook te build canals the malaria question was not over-
looked; there was opposition. ‘The reservoirs were considered especially
obnoxious, and in places. notably in Clay County, the people began to de-
stroy them; State troops had to be called out to protect the embankments ;
the Legislature even appointed a committee to inquire into the matter and
report. This conimission, and medical men generally, tried to minimize
the supposed evil influence; in the light of the then prevalent decaying-

’ vegetation theory they could not see how canals or reservoirs could in-
crease the disease. Today we can readily see that the popular belief rested
on good foundation; the reservoirs and the small ponds made on account
of the embankments at gulleys or ravines, formed breeding places for mos-
quitoes. The larger ponds in the course of time became inhabited by fish
and thereby lost their mosquitoes. but in the smaller ponds with a period-
ical drying out, fish could not live.

It was noticed that canal-boat men suffered less from the disease than
the people along the banks, and this at first sight seems difficult to explain.
But the explanation is simple; it is analogous to the explanation of why
railway conductors and porters seem healthy in spite of their exposure to

39

infective dust from the coaches, especially the smoking cars. On our rail-
ways today, men who are constantly suffering from the evil effects of in-
haling a polluted atmosphere, manifested by colds and coughs, and ca-
tarrhs, by weeping eyes and noses, and are inclined to be sickly and de-
mand frequent vacations, such men are not long retained in these posi-
tions by the railway managers—-the weeding out process goes on all the
time. Similarly a canal-boat man who was readily attacked by malaria
and who lost much time on account of it, was not long retained in the po-
sition; those who retained their positions were the more resistent ones.

Facts are sometimes explainable by different theories. In the following
story, taken from Drake, the substitution of “mosquitoes” for “whisky,”
as the apparent cause, more satisfactorily accounts for the facts or condi-
tions. It should be remembered that the Anopheles mosquitoes are night-
biters, that ordinarily they fly low, and do not frequent rooms or houses in
which tobacco is smoked.

A few miles to the east of Fort Wayne there was a densely wooded
swamp, known as the Maumee or Black Swamp, which extended on into
Ohio. This swamp seems to have been salnbrious; it was free from ma-
laria, and families who settled in it “enjoyed uninterrupted autumnal
health for three or fout years,” until malaria was brought in by other set-
tlers. In 1838 excavations were made in the eastern end of this wet section
- for a canal. “The laborers, four or five hundred in number, were chiefly
irish, who generally lodged in teniporary shanties, while some occupied
bowers formed out of the green limbs of trees. * * * One contractor
kept a liquor store, and sold whisky to all whom he employed, which was
drank freely * * * the mortality (from malaria) among them was
very great. Another lodged his operatives on straw beds, in the upper
room of a large frame house, made them retire early, kept them from the
use of whisky, and nearly all escaped the disease.”

In this connection it may be said that in the malaria prophylaxis of
Italy, screens on houses, and an avoidance of the mosquitoes outside of the
houses, are of the greatest importance. In our own country the use of
screens in windows and doors is a most important factor in the diminu-
tion of many ailments and diseases that formerly prevailed during the time
of mosquitoes and fiies, cholera infantum not the least among them.

The belief in the injuriousness of night air, still so prevalent among
us, is readily traced to the days of the night-biting Anopheles mosquitoes
filled with the germs of malaria. These mosquitoes do not live in cities, or

40)

at most only in the outskirts. and city night air is really better than that
of the day time, because there is less dust in it.

The widespread use of quinine today is also traceable to the days of
much malaria. Then it was given in almost every case of sickness, a sort
of panacea, and this practice is simply kept up, not only by the people but
by many doctors. Today quinine really has a very limited use. The so-

called “False malaria” of our cities has no relationship to malaria proper ;
it is simply a reaction due to bad air. and not to the plasmodium malaria.

In the early days, when there was but little quinine, and that high
priced, many of the native barks and herbs were used, notably the Dog-
wood, Yellow Poplar, Wild Cherry, Thoroughwort and American Centaury.
They were steeped in whisky and formed “bitters;” bitters still survive
and some are widely advertised in the newspapers; as a rule their value is
nil. A number of other things concerning malaria might be mentioned,
but I must desist and will close this account with a few remarks on Adap-
tation and Immunity.

We know that plants and animals are adapted to their surroundings
and that few can bear any marked change of environment; wet soil and
dry soil plants can not exchange places. nor can tropical animals exchange
places with those of the frigid zones. But many of our cultivated plants
and animals have been shifted about so much that they are able to flour-
ish under a variety of surroundings, just as the white man flourishes be- -
cause he has had such a varied experience in the past. Now there is also
an adaptation in the case of diseases. Where a disease has long been in
4 country or locality, there is a mutual adaptation between the disease and
the people, or in other words, between the parasite and the host. If a dis-
ease is so viruient that it kills off all the people, then the disease in turm
is killed off, or dies out, for want of material. If on the other hand, a dis-
ease is not strong enough to attack at least some members of a community,
then it is apt to be mild and to pick out and live only on the weak and
feeble or aged or the very yoimg, the robust adults escaping. But where a
disease gets among a people who have never had it then it may be very
destructive, many may perish and few survive, but the survivors may re-
people the territory with a stock less susceptible, and we can see how, in
the course of ages, with a killing off or weeding out of the susceptible, a
strain may be produced that is able to live in the presence of the disease.

Examined in this light we get some clew to the original home of ma-
laria. ‘The negro of Africa is quite immune against malaria; there is an

41

MALARIA IN INDIANA.

Primevai conditions.

Ground covered by forest or herbage, retention of moisture

or rain.
Streams running, clear, full of fish.
Coming in of the settlers.

Destruction of the forest, periodical drying up of the small

streams.

Destruction of fish, increase of mosquitoes.

Advent of malaria.

Absence of physicians and remedies—antiperiodics.

Settling up of the country, malarial parasite more readily
transferred.

Canal reservoirs and railway embankment ponds as factors.
Drainage of wet places, fewer mosquitoes.

Free use of quinine.

Isolation of the sick and:use of screens.

Subsidence of malaria.

No malaria in large cities, little in suburbs.

Continuance of malaria in backward comuiunities.

42

adaptation. The disease producing agent, the plasmodium, is there, and
has been found in the blood of the people without apparently doing much
harm, but when a white man gets into the country he may succumb very
quickly. There may be even a marked difference in white men in their sus-
ceptibility to malaria, or other diseases, doubtless depending on the ex-
posure of the ancestors in former times. The susceptibility of our native
Indians is one of the chief arguments against the indigenous origin of
malaria.

Malaria in Indiana has about run its course, as it has in older civilized
countries; its mortality today is slight—our dog fennel days of malaria

are about over.

TUBERCULOSIS: If malaria was the Grendel of early Indiana, tuber-
culsis occupies that position in our State today. While there has been a
steady decrease in mortality from malaria, there has been a steady in-
erease in mortality from tuberculosis, and we have not yet reached the
maximum. Tuberculosis is an air-borne disease, or, more strictly speaking.
a dust-borne disease, and conditions in our State were never so bad as
today. Although the mortality statistics of tuberculosis are a fair index of
bad air conditions, they do not tell the whole truth; the deaths from a
number of other affections must be included, notably those from pneu-
monia.

Tuberculosis is the slow protest of nature against bad air conditions,
pheumonia is the sudden outcry. The approach of tuberculosis is heralded
by many and repeated warnings—clinicians speak of a pre-tubercular stage,
a stage of coughs and colds, of pains and aches. Pneumonia strikes sud-
denly, without warning. The stranger within the gates of the city has no
time to flee; and to remain in the crowded city is too often synonymous
with death. In the country where air conditions are good, pneumonia is
neither frequent nor very fatal, and under good air conditions tuberculosis
does not thrive at all; indeed, the city victim on going out into good air is
apt to recover, if he goes in time. The ancient Greeks knew the value of
good air, the ponderous volumes of the physicians of a hundred years ago
testify to its value, a value which we are now but rediscovering—we do
not yet fully appreciate it.

We as a matter of course look upon tuberculosis as the great enemy
of the human race—but after all it may be a friend in disguise! Few may
be able to look at it in that light, but some arguments may be made in sup-
port of such a statement.

43

The old herbalists believed that the Creator made no plant in vain;
they believed that every plant had its uses, if we could only find it out.
Looked at in this light the lowly plants that produce disease may have
some use; the cholera bacillus teaches our cities to clean up, and in pro-
portion as they clean up they escape the ravages of the disease. The ty-
phoid bacillus teaches us to look after the purity of our water supply, and
cities and individuals who heed the lesson escape the disease. Perhaps
the tubercle bacillus may teach us to clean up our cities and our homes
and meeting places; it may teach us the use of pure air. But if tubercu-
losis is a friend of the race, it needs watching as fire needs watching; like
it, it may be an exceedingiy bad master.

We must look at the-pre-tubercular stage in the light of a warning
to get out of the dusty and smoky city; the aches and pains and the coughs
and colds may subside very promptly in good air. If the individual re-
mains in the city the disease sets in in earnest, to attack the lungs, and
then it generates hope, and the victim wants to be up and about. And
he should héed the additional warning before it is too late; he should not
lie about the house or the dusty city; he should go out into “God’s green
country” and into the sunshine and pure air.

When a man has an acute alimentary tract affection, not to say dis-
ease, nature takes away his appetite and makes him gloomy; he lies about
and refuses food, thus imitating the lower animals; if he persists in eat-
ing she sends a violent pain and he will probably desist. Nature wants no
food and no work to do with an impaired alimentary tract; she wants
rest, just as a broken bone wants rest to repair the damage. Men who heed
the warnings of nature, the little aches and pains that tell them to do
this and avoid that, are apt to live longest; the chronic invalid who takes
care of himself may live on to old age, while the so-called strong or robust
man who never has an ache or a pain, no warnings from nature, may go to
pieces all at once and prematurely.

The aches and pains of the pre-tubercular stage of consumption should
be heeded, and the hope generated by the disease itself should be acted
upon; nature is showing the way. The elimination of the imprudent, and
of those not adapted to their surroundings. has been going on for countless
ages. Diseases have killed off our weak, and the process still continues.
Our Indians scarcely came within the range of disease elimination; their
life was not conducive to the propagation of diseases, certainly not of tu-

berculosis. When the white man brought in tuberculosis the Indian was

44

scarcely attacked so long as he lived under old time conditions, an active
out-door life; but when he tried to live under white man’s conditions, in a
fixed home, he promptly began to fail and is still failing—just as the negro
fails when he crowds into the cities, and as the Italian fails who comes to
our cities from the pure air of his mountain home. We may say the Ital-
ian is degenerate, that he has no stamina, but that does not explain his
susceptibility, no more than to say the Chinaman is degenerate because he
can live under filth conditions that the white man can not bear. The Jews
coming from the old European cities, where their ancestors have for a long
time lived in the ghettos and under extremely unsanitary conditions, are
quite resistent to attacks of tuberculosis; they are simply the survival of
the fittest ; the Jew whose ancestry goes back to the open country, to a pure
air life, can not hold up alongside the other, for his ancestors have not un-
dergone the elimination process.

Tuberculosis is a protest against bad air conditions. We ought to be
the healthiest and strongest people on the face of the earth; land is abun-
dant and fertile, we have no years of famine, men are not tied down as in
the old world; the poor food of Europe and the long hours of toil are un-
known among us; at least there is no valid reason why long hours should
be required. In spite of these conditions tuberculosis is on the increase
among us, whereas in some European cities there is a decrease. Why
should this be so?

if we write out statements of conditions, one line for clean European
cities and another line for American city conditions, and make an equation
by canceling conditions that equal each other, we have left the polluted
air condition or factor; it offsets all our advantages.

Many individuals can thrive in the air of our cities today. others fail;
thousands fail every year. Many contract the disease in the city and go to
the country to die; many die from city diseases, other than tuberculosis
and pneumonia, traceable to bad air conditions.

Shall we let bad air conditions go on, or even get worse, as they seem
to be doing, and shall we let countless thousands die in the unceasing pro-
cess of adaptation to environment, or shall we attempt to modify the ab-
normal! environinent and allow these thousands to live? We are told that
tuberculosis is a curable disease, and that it is a preventable disease. It
is an introduced disease which we have allowed to flourish unhindered. It

is a disease that flourishes only under certain surroundings. We can make

TUBERCULOSIS IN INDIANA.

Primevai conditions.

Ground covered by vegetation—no dust. Indian had no name
for dust.

Outdoor life not conducive to the propagation of tuberculosis.
Coming in of the white man, minus his weak, feeble and sick.

Clearing of the ground, formation of dust; Indian applied name
of ashes to it.

Building of cabins and houses, formation of house dust.
Coming in of the feeble and sick; cared for in houses.
Advent of tuberculosis——Tubercle bacillus.

Tuberculosis picking out the weak and those living indoors.

Settling up of the country, building of roads—formation of
road dust.

Villages as factors, increased facilities for distributing the
disease.

The village store, farmers crowded about the stove in winter,
a factor.

Schools, churches, meeting halls, factors in polluted air.

Development of the tobacco chewing habit, an important factor
—Sspitting.

Development of town conditions, shops and trades, confine-
ment of men indoors.

Coming of the railroads and filthy cars and plush seats.
Development of city conditions—city dust.

Smoke from coal; paved streets and sidewalk dust.
Street cars as factors, crowding and bad air.
Tenements and flats, poor ventilation and little. sunlight.

The trailing dress an important factor, filth dragged into the
home.

Advent of the city slums, increase of poverty and neglect.

GBlunting of sensibilities by the use of alcohol, opiates and ano-
dynes.

Continued increase of tuberculosis.

46

these surroundings unfavorable for the disease; but it takes a combined
effort, the individual is powerless.

Malaria is disappearing because the conditions favorable for its exist-
ence are disappearing; the opposite is true of tuberculosis. Moreover,
quinine both prevents and cures malaria, and pure air prevents and cures
tuberculosis. Whisky and calomel were popular prescriptions for ma-
laria, neither cured; whisky and cod liver oil are popular prescriptions
for tuberculosis today, yet neither cure, neither singly nor combined.

The administration of whisky, or of alcohol in any form, may be fol-
lowed by a sense of well-being in tuberculosis, and in dust infection gen-
erally, and that is the reason why alcoholic preparations are so popular
and so widely advertised as cures. But the sense of well-being is a false
sense of security; to benumb the body and reduce the pain, the pain by
which nature warns us, is poor treatment. As a matter of fact, alcohol is
still one of the great eliminators of the human race; if we are wise we will
avoid using it.

Over fifty years ago one of the pioneer physicians of Eastern Indiana
wrote of the changes he had observed in his community and in the State;
he said: ‘“Phthisis, pneumonia and bronchitis are believed to be on the
increase. Whether this is due, in any degree, to improved modes of living,
such as tight houses, the general use of stoves, a less constant exercise in
the open air, etc., it would be interesting to know.” Today we know. Fifty
years ago conditions in Indiana were quite primitive compared with con-
ditions seen in our cities today, and yet the gradual increase of dust dis-
eases was being noticed. (Tuberculosis in Indiana, page 45.)

(The chart of the evolution of different kinds of dust will explain it-
self.) (Dust chart, page 47.)

Tuberculosis, known also as phthisis and consumption, is among us;
it came in with other diseases; it came in like some of the weeds of the
fields. How soon will we make any attempt to get rid of it?

Our State Board of Health has been and is an important agent in dif-
fusing a knowledge of diseases and of disease prevention among our people,
and the recent establishment of laboratories for identifying diseases and
for testing the purity of foods and drinks is of the greatest importance.

Physicians have been the prime movers in the establishment of these
evidences of Civilization, but it has been a long fight.

I am glad to see several papers on the program of our Academy this
year that bear on the subject of sanitation; there have been some in the

47

*SO]}10 OBIV] Ul Ve ond ON

*s}s][eloads osvesip sey pues 4voIg Jo ‘solresuadsip pue syeqidsoy jo ode oy],

“11e AYOUIS pues Asnp ‘s}USMEa} PEpMOIO ‘so110}0Ry OF1v'T

*Joooye Jo asn vad
*91q99} pue pose 94} 10} SoMOFT
‘SOSBASIP OUIOG-IIe Jo JustUdOTaAep pldeyy
“sdoys ul 91490} 94} Jo JueuAO|duI

*"UISI}ISeIVA JO JUsUIdO[sAep 1978914)
‘3018 pue pase ‘yeoM 9Y} JO udHey IVA
*SOSBOSI(T OSNOF{ JO WIFIO

"HOG pue peasy 9[qQ9a,7 94} JO 4oo]dou jo oy

“48N(] SSe1([ SUIpIeI],

“4snq 90Inf¢ ODDBqOT,

*arnjidg WYIA poxtul ysnq yyeMepig
*AQaIVA Ul ysnq 410,08 7
*qsnq 490119 paaeg

‘ayyqidg IA ysnq doyg
‘ysnq doyg

“qEnq] 409149 OETA

“qsnq peroy Jo yyeq ArjUNOD
“ysnq esnoy

*sjuay, Ul YSN

*jsnq] jeuMIUY o1som10
"ue 0} ONp ysnqj jo saoey,
“qsnq] eA, [EUW PTL
“gsNT UOT[O Fuel

“4snq 4aseqy

*48nq] OIUBOTOA

*ysnqy o1mmso7

‘“LSNG AO NOILONTOAW AHL

“ADVLG TVIMLSOGNT

‘ADVLG LAVUOIGNV]T

"ADVLG TVHOLTNOUDY

"ADVLG IVUOLSV

(exe woM ITV)
“aDVLG DNIHSI GNV ONILNOY

‘NV 40 GONGSay

48

past, and I hope to see.more in the future; perhaps they could be grouped
under a separate head, that of Sanitary Science.

Our Academy has a committee on “Legislation for the Restriction of
Weeds.” The popular conception of a weed is, a plant growing in the gar-
den or field or meadow, of a plant out of place and more or less resisting
destruction at the hands of man. That some plants grow on and in the
human body, and in animals as well, is not so well known. The thought
has suggested itself: Perhaps the scope of this committee could be en-
larged by taking account of the minute weeds of the body. I would like
to see the title of this committee read “Legislation for the Restriction of
Weeds and Diseases.”*

STATH HOSPITAL FOR TUBERCULOSIS.

In conclusion I desire to make a few remarks concerning the establish-
ment of a State institution for the treatment of tuberculosis.

Modern medicine concerns itself more and more with disease preven-
tion, in the individual and in the community. To give relief from disease
and affliction has always been the aim and the practice of the physician,
but so long as the active causes of diseases and the modes of their trans-
mission were unknown, little could be done in disease prevention. The
good Samaritan still has a place, but the physician who today is only a
Samaritan in binding up wounds and who makes no effort to prevent the
infliction of wounds, or who treats diseases and makes no effort to prevent
the propagation of diseases—such a physician does not fully represent
modern medicine.

Modern medicine knows much about disease prevention, if the knowl-
edge were only applied. Intelligence counts for much. The intelligent of
a community often avoid much sickness, whereas the ignorant suffer; some
of the latter are kept in a state of poverty on account of their lack of
knowledge of diseases and disease prevention. As people become better
educated in sanitary science and in hygiene, they will require more of their
physicians. The high school graduate who has studied the human body in
health and in disease is not apt to be a purchaser of quack medicines, or to

consult an ignorant physician. much less one who has to herald his ae-

“On the day following this suggestion, the chairman of the above committee made a
motion to enlarge this committee by adding two men who #re physicians and changing the
title as suggested; the motion was carried without a dissenting voice.

49

complishments in advertisements in the newspapers. Much is to be ex-
pected from the teaching of sanitary science in our schools.

Since it was discovered that tuberculosis is a curable disease, a num-
ber of countries and States have established institutions where such sick
ean be treated. Germany leads in this work. Some of the institutions are
tent colonies in the forests. Out-of-door life, plain food and drink, pure
air, little or no medicine, that is all that is required. The nostrums ad-
vertised in the newspapers are of no value. Nature simply needs a chance
to correct the difficulty. When the disease has once fully taken hold, little
is to be expected from any form of treatment, and only too often the real
nature of the disease is not recognized until it is too late. It is possible
to recognize the early stages of tuberculosis, and that is the time for be-
ginning treatment; beginning in the pre-tubercular stage is still better.
With fiames bursting from every window, we do not look for the firemen
to save the building, but we rather expect it of. them when they arrive at
the stage of much smoke and a tiny flame.

There are at least 25,000 individuals afflicted with tuberculosis in our
State today, and 5,000 die annually in Indiana from this disease; in addi-
tion many die from pneumonia and other respiratory diseases, and of af-
fections dependent on a polluted atmosphere. Shall we imitate Germany
and a number of our sister States and attempt to save these lives, or shall
we let disease elimination go on unhindered? Sooner or later the process
of elimination will reach our own families, it may reach us individually.

But, you may say, it will require an immense institution to take care
of so many sick. So it would if all were to be admitted, but we can at
once exclude those who are mortally ill and who can not recover, and if we
also exclude those who are able to pay for treatment at a private institu-
tion, the number would be considerably reduced. We need scarcely con-
sider the argument that if the State allows its citizens to get sick from
preventable disease, it should also take care of those sick.

As a matter of fact many institutions, even State institutions, can not
take care of more than a hundred, or at most a few hundred of the acutely
sick. What then, you say, is the use of attempting to save the few and let
the many perish? That is one way of looking at it. But if we look ata
State Hospital as being a school for missionaries in the cause of pure air
and right living, we get a different conception of the problem. It is not a

question of saving a few out of the many lives now going to waste and

4—A. OF SCIENCE.

50

leaving behind a trial of desolution, but it is a question of trying to bring
about a change, in arresting the increase of the disease in our State. Every
man and every woman who returns from such an institution would be a
missionary in the cause of pure air and right living—and we need such

missionaries more than do the heathen.

d1

A Strate Natura, Park.

=

FRED J. BREEZE.

Primeval Indiana has passed away. The great forest-covered plains
are now bare, and divided into cultivated fields. The wild animals, like
the bison, bear and deer, have gone with the forests; while numerous
species of birds and other small animals have also disappeared. Our
streams have lost their purity and wild beauty; some have been fouled
with sewage, while others have been dredged and straightened into arti-
ficial drainage channels. Thousands of marshes and hundreds of lakes
have been drained, and cultivation of the soil has destroyed thousands of
the smaller forms of plant life.

Not all of these changes are desirable, neither are they all necessary,
yet the destruction of natural features will continue; and it seems that
the time is not far away when Indiana will be nothing but a vast expanse
of farms and cities, and man, having humanized everything, will be sur-
rounded by a surfeit of artificial features, the only fauna and flora being
the domestic animals and plants.

Some intelligent work ought to be done to stop the useless destruction
of the wild forms of nature. Many natural conditions still existing ought
to be preserved, and others now gone but still redeemable ought to be re-
stored before it is too late. Every farm has some little corner of ground
which is not tillable and this should be given over to nature. Here, trees,
shrubs and flowers may grow in freedom, and birds and small ground ani
mals find safe retreat. Every county should have a small reserve or na-
tural park. Such an area could well serve as a small forest reservation,
as well as a place where a rich plant and animal life could safely exist.

But to maintain an area in which natural or primitive conditions
could exist on a sufficiently large scale we need a natural park under the
control of the State. It shouid be several square miles in area, and should
be in the northern part of the State, so that it might include a lake within
its limits. Its size and shape should make it possible not only to have a
lake, but a stream basin drained by the lake. Into this park should be
placed the wild animals that formerly lived in this State. Here animals

52

and plants could live under perfectly natural conditions. The park could
serve for many scientific purposes. In it the Department of Fisheries and
Game could carry on experiments in fish and game culture. After a few
years it would be the best possible place for a Biological Station. It would
also be just the place for the field meetings of the Academy of Science. It
is not necessary at this time to go into details concerning its character.
management, and purposes, but only to suggest a few of these things.
Such a reserve would be a little part of the “Indiana of Nature” pre-
served for the pleasure and profit of the people for all time to come. If
the members of the Academy become convineed of its value and will co-
operate to educate public opinion toward this end, a State Natural Park

ean be secured within the next decade.

D3

Tue Drarnace AREA oF THE East Fork or Waite RIVER.

CHARLES W. SHANNON.

“very river appears to consist of a main trunk, fed from a variety
of branches, each running in a valley proportioned to its size, and all of
them together forming a system of valleys, communicating with one an-
other, and having such a nice adjustment to their declivities that none of
them join the principal valley either at too high or too low a level, a cir-
cumstance which would be infinitely improbable if each of these valleys
were not the work of the streams flowing through them.’’*

Streams are among the most important agencies which give form and
expression to the surface of the land. ‘The study of streams, therefore,
involves to a great extent the consideration of the nature and origin of

many topographic forms—hills and mountains, plains and valleys—and

the changes they pass through.

Every person is familiar with the manner in which the rainwater
that falls is gathered into rills, rivulets and brooks, which unite to form
larger rivers. Every one is aware, also, that streams are turbid after
heavy rain. Yet comparatively few people have thought of the work and
change upon the surface of the land which is done by even the smallest of
the rills and all along the course of the river; nor have they thought that
the smallest rill down the hill slope or along the roadside is adding to the
work of the large streains, or adding to the extent of the drainage area of
the stream.

The drainage area of a stream is the land area which is drained by
the main stream and all its tributaries—and the tributaries of the tribu-
taries.

The drainage area of the East Fork of White River is composed of the
western central and southern part of Indiana, including the greater part
of twenty-five of the ninety-two counties of the State, and a total of about
7,000 square miles, or a little less than one-fifth of the total area of In-
diana. This area is mapped out in full on the accompanying map, with
the exception of a few counties lying to the north of the area shown.

*Tllustrations of the Huttionian Theory of the Earth; by John Playfair.

o4

The geological conditions of the country greatly influence the course
and action of streams. The heavy curved line across the map represents
the southern limit of the ice sheet. Thus this drainage area is partly in
the glaciated and partly in the unglaciated portion of the State. It is in
the unglaciated region that we have the most picturesque scenery. The
entire area, subjected to the processes of weathering and stream erosion
for millions of years, was maturely dissected into a complex network of
valleys, ridges and isolated hills. Over this surface the ice-sheet passed
several times, extending as far as the boundary shown. Its effect was to
smooth off the hills, fill up the valleys and to leave the surface covered
over with a great mass of loose, foreign material from the northern re-
gions. Since glacial times the streams have to some extent removed the
loose material from some of the old valleys and are forming a system of
new drainage in the surface of the drift. Geologically speaking, this glacial
accumulation is of very recent origin and the streams seem to have made
only a small beginning in the work they will be able to perform.

An accurate topographic map of the drainage area would show the
contrast in the physical features of the glaciated and unglaciated portions
better than any other description or illustration that could be given to a
person who had not been over the area to investigate the contrast. In the
glaciated area the contour lines would run in large regular curves and
far apart, showing the smoothness and regularity of the surface. South
of the drift limit the lines would be very close together, with a very wind-
ing course and sharp curves, showing a region of deep, narrow valleys, ir-
regular divides and abrupt cliffs.

In attempting to work out the geographic history of an area whose
drainage has been arrested by the invasion of an ice-sheet, we find that
the story of the life resolves itself into four fundamental parts. First:
What are the topographic characteristics of the area during the pre-
glacial history. Second: What changes took place during the glacial
history. Third: What has happened since the disappearance of the ice-
sheet; its post-glacial history. Fourth: What was the effect produced
by the above events on the unglaciated parts of the area.

It is doubtful if the entire glacial area in Indiana was covered by
the ice-sheet at any one time. At its extreme limit the ice deposited but
little drift; and as a rule there is not a well-defined ridge of drift along
the glacial boundary, though some drift is to be seen—as in Chestnut
Ridge, in Jackson County, and a similar ridge in southern Morgan County.

=

59

From the east border of the river, a few miles below Columbus, northeast-
ward to Whitewater valley, in southern Fayette County, there is a well-
defined ridging of drift standing twenty to forty feet above the border
tracts. Upon crossing Whitewater, the border leads southeastward and is
not so well defined as west of the river, though there is usually a ridge
about twenty feet high.

From the north line of Jackson County, following the boundary around
to the west and south, it is in many places hard to trace as a well-defined
line. The ice-sheet must have been very thin, since the topography shows
little, if any, modification. In many places, however, heavy beds of gravel
and till lie against the hill slopes to the north and east. Many large
granite bowlders are also piled up along the hillsides and scattered along
the streams. In this area in the counties of Hendricks, Rush, Johnson,
Shelby, Henry, Decatur and Randolph. there is a form of moraine known
as “bowlder belts,’ long, narrow, curving strips of country, thickly cov-
ered with large bowlders. Low, winding ridges of sand and gravel parallei
to the ice movement mark the course of a sub-glacial drainage through
Madison, Hancock, Shelby and Bartholomew counties. The longest glacial
drainage channel in the State extends from Grant County to White River,
in Bartholomew, but it is not now occupied by any one continuous stream.
Most of the streams in the glacial area are known as sand and gravel
streams and afford great quantities of sand of economic importance and
an abundance of gravel suitable for road material and ballast. In several
of the counties are overwash aprons in which the sand and gravel are
spread out over broad areas.

The thickness of the drift over the State varies greatly, the greatest
thickness in the State being about 500 feet. While in this area the drift
would be from 50 to 100 feet, there is on the higher points but a thin coat-
ing, but the filled valleys make a higher average. It is the glaciated part
of the area that is of importance from an agricultural standpoint. The
glacial drift is a very productive and permanent soil, and can not be sur-
passed in the production of the cereals, while the bluffs, knobs and hills
of the driftless area are proving to be favorable for the growing of fruits.

The rocks of the State are all sedimentary, and in the area here dis-
cussed were laid down upon the bed of a shallow sea receding to the south-
west. Thus the strata dip gently to the southwest, at the rate of about 20
to 40 feet to the mile.

In the State there are six different geological periods represented—the

56

Pleistocene (no rock outcrop), the Coal Measures, the lower Carboniferous
or Mississippian, the Devonian, the Silurian, and the Ordivician or lower
Silurian. All of these are found in the territory of this drainage area;
and of the twenty-five or more formations as subdivisions of the above-
named periods there are at least eighteen of these found as surface out-
crops in this area. These formations may be listed as follows: Merom
Sandstone-——A massive coarse-grained sandstone lying unconformably on
the coal measures. It furnishes glass-sand and some building stone.
Mansfield Sandstone, the basal member of the coal measures, is a medium
to coarse-grained stone. It is quarried for building purposes and for whet-
stones and grindstones. Coal.—tThis area is just in the edge of the Indiana
coal field. The coal is, therefore, very thin-bedded and is mined only by

r

drifting. Shales—The shales of the coal measures are in many places

from 25 to 40 feet in thickness, and are of value in the manufacture of
cement, paving brick and sewer tile. Associated with these shales in
Martin, Greene, Lawrence and Orange counties are considerable deposits
or iron ore; there are also beds of fireclay underlying the coal. Huron.
This consists of a series of thin bedded limestones separated from each
other by shales and sandstones. J/itchell Limestone consists of massive
compact layers of dark blue and gray limestone with interbedded impure
fossiliferous limestone, shales and chert. Salem Oolitic Limestone—The

massive fine-grained stone so well known as a building and ornamental

stone. Harrodsburg Limestone—A very fossiliferous limestone, and also
contains great numbers of geodes and chert in the lower members. Knob-
stone—A series of shales and sandstones reaching a thickness of more
than 500 feet. This formation has its western outcrop in the eastern half
of Monroe and Lawrence and extends to the east as the surface stone for
many miles. To the present time but little use has been made of this
group, but it is growing to be of economic importance. New Albany Shale.
—A persistent underlying brown to black shale at the top of the Devonian
System. Jt is rich in bitumen and when kindled will burn. The lamin-
ated structure and joints are shown in the illustration. Hamilton Group.
The Sellersburg and Silver Creek limestones. The former is a white to
gray limestone, rather thin bedded but persistent, stretching from the Falls
of the Ohio, north through Clark, Scott, Jefferson, Jennings and Decatur
counties. The Silver Creek lies beneath the Sellersburg. It ranges in
thickness from 15 to 16 feet in the Silver Creek region to 5 or 6 feet in the

vicinity of Lexington, in Scott County, and disappears altogether as a per-

57

sistent formation in the northern part of the same county. Niagara
Group.—Tlhe member of the group found in this region, is a soft, massive,
buff, sub-crystalline to a bluish-green, shaly, limestone, with a character-
istic bed of bluish-green shale several feet thick at the base of the forma-
tion. Pleistocene——The area deeply covered with glacial drift and having
no rock outcrop.

Triassic to Tertiary, Inclusive—‘The only deposits of these ages
known (with the possible exception of the Merom Sandstone) are some
gravels found on certain high ridges in Martin and Perry counties, and
possibly elsewhere. ‘These are outside the drift area, and above any known
stream deposits of gravel. Taken in connection with the uniformity of
elevation reached by the highest hills, in the Mansfield sandstone area,
the Knobstone area and the Silurian area in the southern part of the
State, it has been suggested by Mr. Frank Leverett of the United States
Geological Survey, that at least southern Indiana was reduced to base
level in Tertiary times. In that case the present and pre-glacial topog-
raphy of Indiana would date from some time in the Tertiary. This Ter-
tiary erosion might also account for the absence of cretaceous deposits, if
any such were ever laid down in the State. Until more study shall have
been given these gravels and their interpretation, the matter of this para-
graph must be considered more as a suggestion than as a demonstrated
fact.”* (See Report State Geologist 1872, p. 188; 1897, p. 22.

The highest point in the State is in the southern part of Randolph
County, which at the highest level is about 1.285 feet above sea level. It
is on this height of land that both the East and West forks of White River
have their source. The C., C., C. & St. L. R. R. (Peoria Div.) passes along
this divide between the head waters of these streams. The West Fork
increases in volume and velocity more rapidly than the Hast Fork, which
reaches its destination by a very winding course. Its length is greatly in-
creased and its slope decreased by its numerous meanders, but it is still a
moderately swift stream. After reaching the unglaciated area the direc-
tion of the stream is greatly influenced by the joint planes in the geological
formations. The main streams of these forks grow farther apart until
they reach Shelby and Marion counties, where they approach each other,

Nore.—For description, composition, structure, extent, uses, etc., of the various for-
mations named above, see Thompson, 17th Ann. Rep., pp. 30-40; Hopkins, 20th Ann. Rep.,
1895, pp. 188-323; Kindle, 29th Ann. Rep., pp. 329-368; Hopkins and Siebenthal 2Ilst Ann.
Rep., 1896, pp. 291-427; Blatchley 22d Ann. Rep., 1897, pp. 1-23; Ashley 23d Ann. Rep., 1898;

Siebenthal 25th Ann. Rept., 1900, pp. 330-39 ; 30th Ann. Rep., 1905; E.R. Cumings,in Pro.
Ind. Academy of Science, 1905, pp. 85-100.

58

then again turn from one another until, in the western part of Lawrence
and Martin counties, they come nearer and at the southwestern corner of
Daviess County. are united in one stream at an elevation of about 425 feet.
Both forks are fed by numerous tributaries, which produce an intricate
drainage system. In many places the heads of these tributaries approach
each other very closely and have in some cases resorted to piracy. It is ob-
vious from the varying character of the valleys and the terraces which bor-
der them, that both forks suffered many disturbances during the glacial
period. As has been stated, we know that valleys have been excavated by the
streams flowing through them, and it is also true that the terraces beauti-
fying their sides are in most cases due to the same agencies—that is, ter-
races owe their origin to the processes of corrosion, or of deposition, or to
both. Many of the terraces are due principally to the re-excavation of pre-
glacial valleys. In much of the unglaciated area there are marks of sey-
eral well-defined drainage levels. The region ranges in elevation from 150
to 3800 feet; the streams cut down rapidly from the upland, then run off
with a slight gradient through deep valleys with rather flat and compara-
tively wide bottoms and very steep sides, with stepped and sloping terraces
with gracefully bending curves which add much to the attractiveness of the
valieys. The upper terraces are formed by the streams cutting down through
the formations of the original table-lands. The lower terraces are com-
posed of mixed materials of the higher levels. The best examples of these
terraces are in the Salt Creek and Clear Creek valleys, and in the prin-
cipal valley of the main East Fork and its adjacent side valleys. Some
of these terraces are shown in the illustrations.

This entire drainage area affords much for interesting study and ex-
ploration, but, as stated above, it is in the unglaciated portion that is
found the most picturesque scenery. ‘The diversified physical features pro-
duced by the processes of erosion and the weathering of the various geo-
logical formations give a region of rugged and beautiful scenery. Some
of the characteristic and marked scenic points are described below.

“Weed Patch Hill,’ in Brown County, is a high ridge in the Knob-
stone, forming the divide between two of the main branches of Salt Creek.
At its highest point it is a little more than 1,000 feet in elevation. One of
the illustrations gives a view looking northwest from this elevation and
gives an idea of the Knob topography. “Guinea Hills” is a ridge rising to
a considerable elevation, extending in a northeast and southwest direction
through the southwest part of Scott and the northwest part of Clark coun-

59

ties. These hills form the divide between the tributaries of the Muscata-
tuck, one of the chief branches of the Hast Fork, and the headwaters of
Silver Creek, which flows south into the Ohio. It is interesting here to
note that water falling on the high bluffs of the Ohio near Hanover,
and to the north within one ‘mile of the river, does not there flow into the
Ohio, but finds its way into the Muscatatuck and the Hast Fork, and after
covering a distance of more than 300 miles flows into the Ohio at the south-
western corner of Indiana. The “Haystacks” are conical shaped hills
which, seen from a distance, have the appearance of haystacks; these are
plentiful in the central part of Lawrence County. “Rock Houses” are
large openings between and under large rock masses due to undercutting
and the breaking off and tilting of the rocks. ‘‘Honeycombs” are rock sur-
faces in which the softer parts have been weathered out, giving a porous,
honeycombed appearance. These are found in the region of the Oolitic
Limestone and the Mansfield Sandstone. One of the most interesting spots
to visit is the “Pinnacle,” near the town of Shoals, the county seat of Mar-
tin County. Here a high ridge of Mansfield Sandstone, one hundred ninety-
six feet above the level of the stream, terminates abruptly within a few
yards of White River. Large masses of rock that have broken off, lie
around the foot of the ridge in every position. From this point one ob-
tains a good view of the character of the topography of this region. To
the northwest of this ridge the formations have been cut through by dis-
integrating forces, and there has been left standing at some distance from
the head of the tavine a tall mass of sandstone, which has received the
name of “Jug Rock,’ from the fancied resemblance to an old-fashioned jug.
On the upper side it is forty-five feet high and on the down-hill side, seventy
feet high; it is capped with a flat projected layer of harder sandstone. At
the south of the deep-wooded ravine is the “Glen,” an under-cut sandstone
eliff with an intermittent cascade. Across a valley to the north is “House
Rock,” a large sandstone cave, the entrance to which is about thirty-five
feet high, and the main room, with an opening in the top, is very much
higher. It is formed principally by the tilting of large rock masses. The
sandstone in front of the cave is weathered into an elaborate fretwork.
Other points of interest as one goes down along the river are the “Acoustic
Rock,” “Buzzard’s Roost,’ “Hanging Rock,” “Kitchen-middings,” ‘Shell-
bank,” and the ‘“Hindostan Falls.”

In Washington, Lawrence, Orange and Monroe counties the subter-
ranean drainage has an important place. The ground water working along

60

the point planes and on the more soluble parts of the limestones has pro-
duced a great variety of sink-holes, caves and “lost rivers.” The sink-
holes are basin shaped depressions many feet deep, and often hundreds of
feet in diameter, with an opening at the bottom which leads into some un-
derground channel; in some cases the openings have become filled and the
water is held in the basin. In many places a stream runs into these holes,
then by underground passages for a great distance, and again comes to the
surface in the form of springs. Valleys, sometimes two to four miles in
length, are drained through underground channels. This gives rise to a
confusing system of hills and valleys, though a well-defined drainage may
be worked out which in itself is usually made up of sink-holes. There are
many pure water springs in this region and also many springs of mineral
waters. The best known of these are the French Lick and West Baden
Springs, Trinity and Indian Springs. Lost River, a main branch of the
East Fork, through Orange and Martin counties, has many “lost” tribu-
taries in Orange County. The numerous caves and the mineral springs
are described in the State Geologist’s Reports for the years 1896 and
1901-02.

The greater or less degree of uniformity in the volume of the river in
the course of a year is one of its chief physical features and depends very
much on the manner in which the water supply is obtained. The streams
of this area depend for their increase wholly upon the rains, which, oc-
curring frequently and at no fixed periods, and discharging only compara-
tively small amounts of water at a time, except in periods of the heavy
rainfall of several days’ duration, preserve a moderate degree of uni-
formity in the volume of the streams. This uniformity is aided by the
fact that under normal conditions only about one-third of the rainfall finds
its way directly over the surface to the streams, the remaining two-thirds
sinking into the ground and finding its way to springs, reservoirs, or gradu-
ally oozing through at a lower level until the soil becomes drained of its
surplus moisture, a process which continues for weeks and helps to keep
up the volume of the stream. But, on the other hand, man has done a great
deal to destroy the uniformity of the volume. By the removal of the
forests, the cultivation of the soil, and the use of ditches for drainage, a
greater part of the water is at once thrown into the stream and greater
fluctuations occur. Owing to the streams being hemmed in by lofty, ab-
rupt cliffs, which resist the free passage of the swollen streams, and the
velocity being checked by winding courses, greater floods occur from the
same amount of rainfall than formerly.

View upper half of the Pinnacle, Shoals, Ind. Distance from top to water
level 196 feet.

x ene reat

Soe a
fee
Hanging Rock, an arenas sandstone cliff, southwest Lacy, Marchi
County,

(61)

ew Albany Black Shale.

Showing laminated structure and joints in the N
Scott County.

Rectangular Blocking in the Huron Limestone. Greene County.
(62)

Jug Rock, a column of sandstone capped with a harder layer of sandstone.
(See description.)

House Rock, a cave formed by the tilting of large blocks of sandstone, north of
Shoals, Martin County.

(63)

View in Salt Creek Valley, showing high terraces in background, southeast
Stobo, Monroe County.

Recent terraces in Salt Creek Valley southeast of Stobo, Monroe County.

(64)

oh alan ©

Salt Creek Valley near Harrodsburg, Monroe County.

White River Valley. looking north from the Pinnacle. Shoals, Ind,

5 -A. OF SCIENCE. (65)

Gaullies in the clay and shale of the Knobstone, eastern Monroe County.

Recent gullies in clay and shale, eastern Monroe County.

(66)

Showing east side of Citv Waterworks Reservoir, Bloomington. The
water is supplied by springs from the underground drainage of sink-
hole region in Mitchell limestone.

= eo

Boating along Public Highways during Spring Flood, 1906, in River
Valley near Shoals.

(67)

The Glen, an undereut sandstone cliff with an intermittent cascade, Shoals, Mar-
tin County.

(68)

‘ Lo ey Anes <

View looking northeast from Weedpatch Hill, showing Knobstone
topography.

Many gravelly and rock bottom streams are used as public roads. This
view in southern Martin County.

(69

View on Clear Creek along Monon Railroad between Bloomington and Harrodsburg.
(70)

~l
bt

Sreps IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF A SMOKELESS OITY.

W. F. M. Goss.

1. Whe Presence of Smoke in those cities of our country which are
within easy reach of its soft coal mines is becoming more serious every
year. People are beginning to understand that this smoke which, in earlier
days, was welcomed as evidence of a city’s growth, and of its industrial
prosperity, is, in fact, a source of heavy expense to all of its citizens. The
annual smoke bill of such a city as Indianapolis is, in fact, enormous!
This arises, not from the loss of fuel or heat in the form of smoke, for
that is so small as to be almost negligible, but in the damage which is
wrought by its presence, upon the architectural embellishment of the city.
upon the fixtures and furnishings of its homes, and upon the apparel of its
citizens. Loss also occurs through the extensive use of artificial light
which the presence of smoke euforces, and because of its effect upon the
welfare of those from whom it shuts out the sunlight and takes away the
purity of the atmosphere.

Thus far urban communities have sought to protect themselves through
prohibitive legislation, with the result that while flagrant abuses have
sometimes been abated, the atmosphere of the city as a whole has not ma-
terially improved. It is doubtful if such legislation, unsupported by cor-
rective measures which are broadly co-operative, can ever be made an ef-
fective instrument in the abolition of smoke. The problem is one of many
complications and its solution can only be reached through action based
upon a full understanding of difficulties to be overcome.

2. The Sources of Smoke in cities may be separated into five different
eroups, each of which will require different treatment. They are as fol-
lows: .

1. Large furnace fires such as are employed in metallurgical
processes.
2. Large boiler plants, by which is meant all plants in excess of
500 horse-power.
3. Small boiler plants and small industrial fires.
4. Domestic fires.
5. Locomotive fires.

~l
bo

Accepting this classification as a convenient one for the purpose in
hand, we may inquire as to the process by which the smoke now being
delivered by each of the several groups is to be eliminated.

3. Large Fires Such as Are Employed in Metallurgical Processes.
Except in a few cities, of which Pittsburg is the best type, the proportion
of the total smoke delivered from such fires is small. In the city of Indi-
anapolis, for example, it is exceedingly small. Moreover, the managements
of industries using such iires are, in m:uny cases, finding increased efficiency
in operation by the installation of gas producers which receive the coal and
deliver highly heated gas for use in the furnaces. The gas producer makes
smokeless the process of converting coal into heat. As its use under a wide
range. of conditions will result in economy in operation, no injury would
be done by the prohibition of smoke from all fires which might properly
be served by producer gas, provided a reasonable period is allowed be-
tween the passage of the prohibitive ordinance and its going into effect.
Fires of this group which can not be thus treated in such cities as In-
dianapolis will be so few that their effect will be negligible.

4. Large Boiler Picnts. The suppression of smoke from fires of this
class by the adoption of a suitable automatic stoker, will effect an economy
in operation, hence owners will not seriously object if they are required,
after suitable notice, to so equip their plants. An ordinance requiring all
boiler plants of more than 500 horse-power to be thus equipped within three
years of the date of its passage would not be unreasonable.

5. Nmall Boiler Plants and Small Industrial Fires. Referring first
to boiler plants, it should be noted that the fires of this group are or-
dinarily prolific sources of smoke. Boilers of 100 horse-power or less are
all over the modern city. Generally speaking, no economy can result from
the application of automatic stokers to these small boiler plants and hence
owners can not be influenced to add to their fixed charges in the expecta-
tion of securing a money return. The requirement that such furnaces em-
ploy anthracite coal, coke, or other smokeless fuel, would in all cases work
serious hardship and in many cases it would be prohibitive. The wisest
and most effective course to follow with reference to such fires Is to pro-
vide a satisfactory substitute, then abolish them. So far as such plants are
now employed in the production of power, they can be rendered unneces-
sary through the cheaper and more effective distribution of electrical
power. So far as steam from such boilers may at present be used for heat-

ing they can be rendered of no effect through the supply of heat from a

73

central station. There are, however, in every large city Many minor in-
dustrial establishments, such as dye works, bleacheries and laundries, re-
quiring steam at high pressure, and for these a general system of supply
from a central plant must be provided. That this may be the more readily
accomplished, sach industries should be encouraged to group themselves
within a prescribed area to better accommodate themselves to some reason-
able plan of steam distribution. 'o properly supplant the fires of numer-
ous small boilers now in service, it will be required, therefore, that stations
be established throughout the business portion of the city, capable of de-
livering electric current for power and lights, steam or hot water for
heating, and a limited amount of high pressure steam for industrial uses;
these central plants to be of sufficient size to justify the use of stokers
which will make them smokeless. When by municipal co-operation these
shall have been provided, under conditions which will safeguard the inter-
ests of all consumers with reference to costs, then it will be in order to
prohibit, after a series of years, the use of soft coal under all boilers of the
city, except in connection with automatic stokers.

Small industrial fires other than those under boilers should be sus-
tained by gas drawn from sources hereinafter referred to.

6. Domestic Fires. While individual domestic fires are not the
source of heavy volumes of smoke, their number in any city is large, and
their effect in the aggregate as a source of smoke is as pronounced as that
of any other single group of fires. So long as soft coal can be had more
cheaply than anthracite coal, just so long will there be a desire on the
part of the consumers to employ it in domestic service. Domestic fires
being small, it is impracticable to apply to them effectively the principles
of smokeless firing. A necessary step. therefore, in the development of a
smokeless city is a complete prohibition of the use of soft coal for domestic
purposes. As a preliminary step, two things are essential. Wirst, a sup-
ply of low-priced gas for use in cooking; and second, the distribution from
a central station of large capacity of steam or hot water for domestic heat-
ing.

There are no real problems in the supply of gas for cooking except
such as may grow out of existing franchises. At prices now prevailing.
this form of fuel is much used in cooking and generally is less expensive
for that purpose than solid fuels. Add to this the fact that the cost of
gas to the producer is reduced as the quantity sold is increased, and an

abundant supply at a cost sufficiently Jow to permit all people in a city to

74

use it for cooking, becomes not only possible, but attractive as a means of
economy.

The establishment of ceutralized heating plants of sufficient size to
justify the maintenance of smokeless iires therein, and in such number as
to serve an entire city, constitutes a problem presenting no serious en-
gineering difficulties. Such a system would need to be developed under
sufficient municipal control to insure satisfactory service to all portions
of the city and to guarantee to the consumers of heat a cost not greater
than is required to insure a fair return upon the investment made. Enough
has already been accomplished in heating from central stations to insure
the practicability of such a scheme. While the loss of heat in transmis-
sion is necessarily large, this loss is more than neutralized by the use of
low grade coal in the central station, in the place of high grade fuel now
employed in domestic heating, so that, basing an estimate on the heat de-
livered, the cost should not be greater than under present conditions of
domestic heating. Attention should be called to the fact, however, that
such 2 system would be easily practicable even at some advance in cost,
for freedom from smoke and the convenience of a supply of heat from out-
side sources are matters for which people will be willing to pay.

7. Locomotive Fires. These, in railroad centers such as Indianapolis,
are prolific sources of smoke. Moreover, if soft coal is permitted to be
used in fire-boxes the delivery of snioke from locomotive stacks can not be
prevented. As a consequence. prohibitive legislation in various American
cities has thus far had but little effect in reducing the amount of smoke
delivered from locomotive fires. It is not the fault of the railway man-
agement; it is due to the difficulties which are inherent in the case. There
are, in fact, but two ways out of the difficulty, and the acceptance of either
solution wiil involve railway companies in heavy expenditures and will
entitle them to concessions or direct aid from municipalities. The first and
simplest is to be found in the requirement of all steam locomotives oper-
ating within the smoke limits of a city.to be supplied with smokeless fuel,
that is, with anthracite coal or with coke; the second solution is to be
found in the prohibition of the use of steam locomotives and in the sub-
stitution of electric locomotives within the smoke limits of the city.

The development of either of these plans will involve the establishment
of locomotive terminals upon every road outside of the smoke limits of the
city. by the use of such terminals the road locomotive of an approach-
ing train can be stopped before reaching the city, its place being taken

75

either by a steam locomotive using coke or anthracite coal for its fuel, or
by an electric locomotive which will serve to carry the train on to the city,
and afterward out of the station and across the city to another terminal
where it will stop, its place at the head of the train being taken by another
road locomotive having its usual supply of soft coal. Such a plan has
been put into effect in New York City, and has been settled upon for Wasb-
ington, D. C., where the commissioners of the District of Columbia, on No-
vember 17th, took final action on an order to prohibit the use of any ex-
cept electric locomotives in drawing trains into the new Union Station.
Wxcepting in very large cities, however, the cost of electric transmission
will be prohibitive. It will be far cheaper for railway companies, and
quite as satisfactory to the urban communities, to admit steam locomotives,
provided they are supplied with a fuel which prevents smoke.

It is evident that procedure under this outline with reference to loco-
motive fires must necessarily involve plans extending through a series of
years. An equitable scheme of co-operation between the railroads and
the city must be devised, plans must be made and adopted, and time must
be given for financing and executing them.

In the working out of the general plan described by this brief outline
for the elimination of smoke, many difficulties are to be met and antag-
onistic interests to be harmonized, but there is nothing which, from an en-
gineering point of view, is impracticable, or which can not, as a business
matter, be reduced to a satisfactory procedure. A city, to be made smoke-
less by the measures suggested, would first seek to fix limits defining the
area to be controlled. Within this area would be developed a series of
power and heating plants which would be spaced upon a system of squares
in the business portions, at intervals of a mile or a mile and a half, and in
the residence portion at intervals of two miles. From these several stations
would go out currents of electricity for all power and light needed by the
city. From certain of them steam at high pressure for industrial purposes
would be distributed over the limited areas and from all of them would go
out steam or hot water for heating. By a suitable grouping of equipment
within these stations, those in the residence portions would be made to
serve as heating plants alone and hence would be out of service during a
considerable portion of the year. Eecause of their size and the perfection
of equipment, all would be operated by smokeless fires. All small fires,
which at the present time serve for heating and power in individual build-
ings, would cease to exist, and large fires under boilers of great industries

76

and in furnaces of metallurgical establishments, would be made smokeless
by means which would enhance their economy in operation. Railroad
trains passing through the controlled area would be drawn by smokeless
locomotives, and above and around the city a clear atmosphere would con-
tribute to the cleanliness of ali things and to the comfort and peace of
mind of all its people.

77

EXPERIMENTAL STUDIES IN REINFORCED CONCRETE.

We Ke EArr:

It was the comfortable assurance of that urbane Roman poet, Horace,
that he had built himself a monument more lasting than brass in the intel-
lectual life of mankind. At the time that he was writing these lines the
Roman engineers were constructing those concrete aqueducts and domes
that have served mankind on the physical side during the time that Horace
had been a source of perpetual delight to the students of classical writ-
ings. Which product will endure the longer is an open question. One
thing is certain, while many persons of exquisite taste may prefer Horace
to our modern writers, all well-informed persons conclude that the en-
gineer of today has surpassed the Roman engineer in the quality and use
of concrete.

The number of recent failures of reinforced concrete buildings, at-
tended with the loss of life of workmen, does not constitute an argument
against the advance of the practice of this new art, but calls attention to
the need of correct theory in design and expert supervision in construction.
Steel for buildings is made under highly technical methods, and a searching
inspection by trained men, whereas concrete for buildings may be formed
by ignorant and unskilled workmen, and may be supervised by foremen
who are mostly inexperienced in the art of proportioning and mixing the
ingredients. Defective material, either of cement, sand or stone, dishonest
skimping of cement and poor inspection, incorrect proportioning, and a too
early removal of the wooden forms from the floors molded in cold weather,
or heavily laden with stored cement and other materials, are sufficient
causes to explain these failures. An increasing number of these may be ex-
pected as time goes on and untrained men who have learned their busi-
ness in other lines of construction, take up the work of building reinforced
concrete structures. The resulting loss of life will no doubt call attention
to the necessity of regulating by proper building laws this new construe-
tion, which has spread so rapidly over the country from sea to sea. In
1902, when the first published results of experimentations appeared in this

country from the Laboratory for Testing Materials of Purdue University,

78 :

one had to go far to observe instances of reinforced concrete. Last sum-
mer in Seattle the writer saw no other type of building in process of con-
struction. At Atlantic City in 1902, when the experiments referred to were
placed before the American Society for Testing Materials, there was no
instance of the use of reinforced concrete in sight. Last summer, at the
meeting of the Society, one viewed the stately and beautiful Marlborough-
Blenheim hotel entirely constructed of reinforced concrete; the replace-
ment of the steel pier by reinforced concrete piles and girders; and the
construction of a new recreation pier of this type of construction. The
growth has been truly marvelous. Not only has the extent of its use in
bridges and buildings increased, but the variety of its application is extra-
ordinary. In a list of constructions in which it is successfully and eco-
nomically used may be included: Retaining walls, dams, tanks, conduits,
chimneys, arches, culverts, foundations, floors for buildings, railroad gird-
ers, highway bridges, pipes, railway ties, piles, stairs and roofs.

At the present time the underlying mechanical principles and the con-
stants of design are fairly well determined, and we wait upon the archi-
tects to express the truth of these principles in a beautiful structure.
While this type of construction associates itself with the broad and simple
wall spaces and low buildings of the Spanish Mission style, with surface
ornaments of tiling and Mosaic, it also lends itself to important modern
civic buildings. The stateliness of beauty of the Marlborough-Blenheim
Hotel at Atlantic City has been mentioned. The Ingalls Building, Cincin-
nati, and the new Terniinul Station at Atlanta, Ga., are other examples.

Without stopping to discuss the properties of waterproofness, fire-
proofness, durability, etc., or the multitude of topics of interest and im-
portance that crowd one’s mind in connection with reinforced concrete, at-
tention will be simply called to the mechanical principles underlying the
construction.

Concrete, like stone, is weak in tension, but strong in compression at a
ratio of 1 to 10. Consequently when under flexure, as in a beam, the con-
crete is not used economically ; for it breaks on the lower side in tension
before the compressional strength is utilized. A beam may be, however,
strengthened, or reinforced, by the insertion of a steel rod in the lower
side of the beam. These rods are usually bent up near the ends of the
beam so as to also reinforce the beam against the diagonal tensional
stresses that occur at the ends, due to the combination of shear and direct

stress.

fee

Before the rod can come into operation during a flexure of the beam,
there must be the necessary adhesion between the concrete and the rod to
transfer the stress to the rod, and bring the latter into action. This ad-
hesion yaries from 300 pounds to 500 pounds per square inch of the sur-
face of the rod, and under favorable conditions is sufficient to develop the
strength of the steel in the concrete. The adhesion seems to be more of a
mechanical action than chemical, and is due to the entrance of the fine
cement into the microscopic pits on the surface of the smooth rods. Many
designers use artificially deformed bars, such as corrugated bars and
twisted steel bars, to increase this adhesion.

In this way a beam is reinforced so that both the concrete in compres-
sion and the steei in tension may be worked to their full value. Any one
who has seen a plain concrete beam broken in a testing machine, and then
has witnessed a test of a reinforced concrete beam, will be first of all
struck by the apparently greatly increased flexibility of the reinforced con-
crete beam, which deflects ten times as much as the plain beam before
showing any visible cracks, and when the load is removed the elasticity of
the steel draws the beam back nearly to its original shape. It is probable,
however, that this process of bending the reinforced concrete beam early
develops very minute ilaws in the conerete which are invisible to the
naked eye, so that it is not safe to count upon a tensile strength of the
concrete in computing the total resisting strength of the beam. Designers
compute the resisting moment of the beam as based upon the compressional
stresses in the concrete and the tensional stress in the steel alone.

The original tests at Purdue University were arranged to determine:

1. The increased strength added by a given amount of steel inserted in
a plain concrete beam.

2. The law connecting the strength of the beam with the amount of
steel.

3. The law connecting the strength of the beam with the position of
the rods in the beam.

4. The value of gravel in reinforced concrete.

To determine these relations a series of concrete beams was made of
first-class materials with rich mortar. In other words, the beams were
earefully made with a combination of one part cement to two parts of
sand and four parts of broken stone. The concrete was probably superior
to that made in the ordinary process of construction. This was proper be-
cause the theoretical laws were being verified, and for that purpose it was

80

necessary to have uniform materials of good quality. The elements of the
strength of the materials entering into the beams were determined first
of all; namely, the conipressive and tensional strength of the concrete, to-
gether with the modulus of-elasticity of the concrete, both in tension and
compression; the adhesion between the cement and the steel; the elastic
limit of the steel; a mechanical analysis made of the materials. Since
the beams were long in span compared to their height, and, therefore, the
shearing stresses were not important. rods of smooth steel were used.
Having determined all the elements entering into the strength of the
beam, and then the tested strength of the beam itself, it next became neces-
sary to formulate a mechanical analysis of the combination of steel and
concrete in flexure, and, with the experience of the tests of the beams in
hand, to derive equations for design and calculation. The truth of these
equations and the validity of the process of the analysis could then be
checked by reference to the tested strength of the beams. These equations
were derived and have been used very largely by engineers throughout the
country in designing reinforced concrete structures.

Engineers as a rule have found it necessary to review their knowl-
edge of mechanics in dealing with reinforced concrete, not that there is
any new principle involved. but the number of factors in the equations of
flexure is greater, and an account must be taken of the relative moduli
of elasticity of the two materials, steel and concrete. Furthermore, the
lack of perfect elasticity of the concrete leads to an assumption of some
other than a rectilinear relation between stress and strain.

Again the neutral axis of the cross section must be determined. Its
location is not simply fixed by the center of gravity of the cross section,
but is controlled by the amount of steel present, the relative moduli of
elasticity of the steel and concrete, and by the position of the steel. The
writer’s equations have followed the usual assumptions of flexure, with the
following special assuinptions :

1. That the modulus of elasticity of concrete in tension and com-
pression is the same.

2. That there is a parabolic relation between stress and strain in the
concrete.

5. That in the earlier stages of the loading of the beam the concrete
earries stress in tension, but later, at higher loads, this tensile strength
may be disregarded.

The equations are somewhat cumbersome, but have been reduced to

81

diagrammatic form in the Transactions of The American Railway Engineer-
ing and Maintenance of Way Association, Vol. VY, 1894, pages 626 and 627.
Empirical equations of simple form are presented in The Engineering Re-
view of Purdue University, Vol. I, 1905.

In calculating the strength of the reinforced concrete beam sufficiently
approximate results can be obtained by omitting consideration of the tensile
stresses in the concrete, and supposing a rectilinear relation between stress
and strain. The moment of flexure is then most simply expressed as the
total force in the steel multiplied by the distance to the centroid of the
compressive stresses. This latter distance is expressed with sufficient ac-
curacy as a fraction of the depth of the beam, this fraction having been
determined by experimental measurement on the tested beams.

Care in all cases must be taken to compute the maximum compressive
stress arising in the concrete under the conditions of the problem, and also
the amount of diagonal tension at the ends of the beams must be computed
and provided for by stirrups, or by bending up some of the rods at the ends.

To conclude this brief consideration of reinforced concrete, a conserva-
tive estimate would include the following principles:

1. Concrete is durable and fireproof when made of the proper aggre-
gate.

2. The strength of combination of steel and concrete may be calcu-
lated with a sufficiently close degree of accuracy.

38. Shapely and beautiful structures may be built of this material.
It is particularly adapted for mill buildings because of the absence of vibra-
tions which are induced in the ordinary type of mill buildings by the
rapidly revolving sjachinery.

4. The cost of a properly designed reinforced concrete building, where
wooden forms are used to advantage, need not exceed more than 5 or 10
per cent. of the cost of mill buildings of the ordinary type with brick walls
and wooden beams of the so-called slow-burning construction, provided that

the concrete may be laid as at present by unskilled labor.

6—A. OF SCIENCE.

THe Newer HyGIENE.

WILFRED H. MANWARING.

Instruction in the nature of infectious diseases, especially in the means
of transmitting these diseases from one person to another, is required by
law in all our public schools. This law is of great value; for it is only
through the intelligent co-operation of a well-informed public that hy-
gienic and sanitary measures designed to control and stamp out infectious
diseases can be successful. A wide diffusion of this knowledge will go far
to make tuberculosis a thing of the past, and diphtheria and smallpox un-
known.

In obedience to the legal requirement, there are taught, in our public
schools, certain elementary facts regarding the nature of pathogenic bac-
teria, and certain facts regarding the ways in which these bacteria are trans-
mitted from one person to another. These facts in themselves are of in-
estimable value, but they are insufficient.

The presence of bacteria within or upon the human body, the trans-
mission of disease-germs from the sick to the well, is but one of the factors
tending to cause disease. To acquire a disease it is usually necessary, not
only to acquire the germs of that disease, but there must be a lowering of
bodily resistance as well.

Every fourth person in this room is carrying daily in his throat or
mouth virulent pneumococci. Yet he does not acquire pneumonia. And
why? Because there is an efficient defense against this disease in the
healthy human body. Some day this defense will be lowered and pneu-
monia develop. Most soldiers in the Philippines carry in their intestinal
canals virulent germs of dysentery; and with no ill effects, till intoxication
or dietary excesses lower the intestinal resistance. We daily inhale germs
of tuberculosis. Some day, when our resistance is low, we will acquire the
disease.

A knowledge of the body’s fighting power against bacteria, a knowledge
of the ways in which that power can be increased or decreased by heredi-
tary influences and by modes of life, is therefore of hygienic importance.
It should form part of the curriculum of every public school.

83

The body tights disease in many ways. It will be sufficient for hy-
gienic purposes to teach but three of these ways: (i) the method of anti-
toxines; (ii) the method of antiseptics and (iii) the method of phagocyto-
sis.

There ar many diseases in which the symptoms are caused, not by the
bacteria themselves. but by the poisons the bacteria manufacture. Thus,
in tetanus, or lockjaw, the bacteria grow, perhaps unnoticed, at the bottom
of the Fourth-of-July wound on the hand or foot; but the chemical poisons
they manufacture, carried by the blood to the brain and spinal cord, cause
the spasms and convulsions that characterize the disease. In diphtheria
the bacteria rarely enter the body, but grow in grayish-white masses on
the moist surfaces of the mouth and throat. The chemical poisons they
manutacture, absorbed by the tissues, cause the paralysis and heart failure
that characterize the disease.

The body has the power of forming substances that neutralize these
poisons. To these neutralizing substances the name antitoxine has been
given.

This fact is of hygienic importance for two reasons: First, because it
is sometimes possible to assist the body in its efforts to form antitoxines,
by introducing into it antitoxines artificially prepared ; and, second, because
the body’s power to form these substances is modified by mode of life.

A horse that has been repeatedly injected with the poisons manufac-
tured by the germs of diphtheria, grown on artificial culture media, de-
velops enormous amounts of diphtheria antitoxine. A few drops of the
serum of this horse renders harmless large quantities of diphtheria poison.
Through the use of diphtheria antitoxine in practical medicine, the mortal-
ity from diphtheria has been reduced from the 24 per cent. to 40 per cent.
it was, twenty years ago, to the less than 1 per cent. it now is, in well-
treated cases. Overwork, insufficient clothing, improper food, alcoholic ex-
cesses, lack of sleep, and other factors, so lower the antitoxine-forming
power of the body as to greatly increase the dangers from infection.

The second way of hygienic significance in which the body fights dis-
ease, is by the formation of chemical substances that, although they have no
influence on the chemical poisons manufactured by bacteria, have an even
more important property, that of killing the bacteria themselves.

The presence of antiseptic, or bacteria-killing substances in the blood
and tissue juices is easily shown. One has but to mix bacteria with serum

84

:
and test trom time to time, by simply cultural methods,* whether or not the
bacteria are alive. Thus, in one experiment, there were mixed with human
serum typhoid fever germs in such numbers, that every drop of the serum
contained 50,000 bacteria. wo minutes later but 20,000 of these were
alive; at the end of ten minutes, but S00; and in twenty-five minutes, they
were all dead.

Not only can serum kill bacteria, but most of the secretions of the
healthy human body are bacteria-killing as well. Gastric juice, Vaginal
secretion and nasal secretion, kill bacteria in enormous numbers. The hy-
gienic significance of this is evident from the fact that these bacteria-killing
substances. also, are moditied by modes of life. Dietary excesses may so
lower the bacteria-kiiling properties of gastric juice, and unsanitary condi-
tions so lessen that of the tissue juices that susceptibility to infectious dis-
eases is greatly increased.

The third way of hygienic in:portance in which the body fights disease,
is by phagocytosis. In the body there are millions of white blood cor-
puscles, each having the power of independent motion and as one of its
functions the faculty of eating and destroying disease germs.

It is found that the bacteria-eating power of white corpuscles is largely
dependent upon certain chemical substancesy present in the blood and
tissue juices. Without these chemical substances the eating of certain
pathogenic bacteria does not take place. With them, it is very active. It is
further found that these chemical substances are influenced by modes of
life. That they may be increased or decreased under different hygienic
conditions. Phagocytosis. therefore, has also a place in popular hygienic
knowledge.

One of the unfortunate results of the spread of knowledge of patho-
genic micro-organisms is the formation of an unreasoning popular fear of
disease germs. It is thought that a wide understanding of facts regarding
bodily resistance will tend to replace this unfortunate germ-fear by a
rational faith in the body’s marvelous powers. That it may turn the tide
of hygienic endeavor, from an exclusive fight against bacteria to a com-
bined fight wgdainst bacteria and for bodily resistance.

* See Popular Science Monthly, Vol. 66, pp. 474-!77.
7 Opsonins.

85

ConcERNING DIFFERENTIAL INVARIANTS.

Davin A. RovTHrRocK.

During the last forty years wonderful progress has been made in many
fields of higher mathematics. One distinct line of investigation has had to
do with a microscopic examination of the fundamental axioms of the ele-
mentary mathematics, of conditions of convergence, of the sufficient condi-
tions in the calculus of variations, and so on. Another essential advance
has been made by unifying many separate and apparently distinct fields of
mathematics under one common law. Among many adyances in this latter
line of work, none are more important than the work of Sophus Lie, a Nor-
wegian, who lived from 1842 to 1899.

Lie received his doctorate from the University of Christiania in 1865,
earing no more for mathematical work than for literary or philological
work. In fact, he had thought of becoming an engineer; but receiving an
appointment to a docentship in the university, he turned his attention to
the study of advanced mathematics. The real mathematical genius of
Lie was aroused by a course of lectures on substitutions by Professor Sy-
low. Lie’s creative period seems to have extended from 1868 to about 1874,
during which time he came into possession of the essential features of his
epoch-making Theory of Continuous Groups. The remainder of his life
was devoted to the elaboration of his early conceptions, and to the appli-
cations of his theories. A general development of the higher number sys-
tems, a classification of ordinary and partial differential equations, with
methods of their solutions, invariants and covariants, many problems of
physies and astronomy, are all treated from the standpoint of the con-
tinuous group. Below is sketched a brief outline of the continuous group
theory of Lie, as applied to differential invariants, and the calculation of an
important differential invariant is indicated.

1. Point Transformation. Let x, y be the Cartesian coérdinates of any
point in the plane, and let x1, yi be any point other than x, y. Then

= O60) Ap AO)

86

is said to be a point transformation, carrying point x, y into point x, yi.
Here it is assumed that inversely

X= Da yA) Ye ay)

carries the point from x1, yi back to x, y. A point transformation may be
looked upon either as a transference of axes from one system to another,
not necessarlly the same kind of system, or it may be considered as an
actual transference of one point into another position in the plane, the
axes of reference remaining unchanged.
2. Group of Transformations. A point transformation containing one

or more parameters

9] =O (6S 5 Ey, D515, asa)

Nil 85 (OA VLE Al OG Op. on eal)

such that for ac, bo, Co,....Ko, the point x, y transforms into itself, is said
to constitute a group of transformations when a succession of two such
operations may be replaced by one of the same species. That is, if

Ke = O(a, Bi Di, C1 @ )= 416 (XY Baer) (Ks is Goes eS) sce kx |
==10 (x, Y, Ao, b., Coy «+. k,),
Fie We ye ays Dass 5 Ka)

where aa = t1'(a, bye. kan, bi, 6.2. - ky); bie == ts (a, (by a KL) ee eee
KI ONC Ly aedee Day eters ke) seville abn ERIM Lo pmaeten <<),

are the transformations of an r-parameter group, the parameters a, b, c,
... kK being 7 in number and independent. A similar definition may be
given to a group in one, three, four, or n variables*.

3. The Infinitesimal Transformations. An infinitesimal transformation
is defined analytically by

Ox — & (xy) ot, Oy = 7) sy.) Ot:

Such a transformation attaches to any point x, y an infinitesimal motion
whose projections on the x —, and y — axes are respectively, cot and 7t,
and whose distance is )/ £272 dt. Lie shows such infinitesimal trans-
formations to belong to a single-parameter group.

x= OK ya) ny— LCi a)

This may be easily seen by letting a. be the value of a which leaves x, y
fixed; then
x= ri) (xe Wo Ao da), Vis —— ol (x, y; ao a da)

*See Lie —Scheffers, Differential-gleichungen, pp. 24-25.

87

give to the point x, y an infinitesimal motion. Expanding in powers of da,
we have*

x1 = 4 (x, y, an) {SE cae | ie ae
d
yi = Vi (ey, Pies Ss: ae
d ao
UbR On Xscveao)i—=eXs me) (Xan Vento) —— y, hence
max+(F*)sa+ :

d ao)
— (do); aS
ES aid epee ea ee = EACX y) 4 4s ’
y= (SP leat... (KN V) LO Unie ee

Omitting infinitesimals of higher order we have thie relations
OX ea (Xa) Outi Oy) —— 7 (Xe ey) Ob
as the infinitesimal transformations of a one-parameter group.

In the notation of Lie the symbol

ur=san(2jtren (XZ),

denoting the variation which a function / (x, y) undergoes when x, y
receive the increments 0 x, 0 y, is employed as the symbol of an infini-
tesimal transformation. Writing p, q instead of the partial derivative of
* (x, y) with respect to x and y, respectively, we have

U f= (x,y) P+ 7 (x, y) 4G.
The infinitesinal transformations of an r-parameter group would be given
by the symbol
Ux f = Sx (X,Y) p + 7 (3, y) g, K=—1, 2, 8,
4. The Group Criterion. One of Lie’s fundamental theorems furnishes
a test whether or not any given set of infinitesimal transformations, Ux f,

k=—1, 2, ... r, actually forms a group. This test is the application of
Jacobi's bracket expression

U; (Uj f)—Uj (Ui f), (i, j = 1, 2, .... 7, in all combinations).

*In this article the symbol (¢ +} will be used to denote the partial derivative of f with

regard to x, instead of the round d usually employed.

88

If the Jacobi bracket-expression, constructed for all combinations of
i, j, is equivalent to a linear function of the symbols Ux f with constant
coefficients, then are the symbols
Ux = &x (x, OAs ~~ m (X, Y) q, es L Pee r,

the infinitesimal transformations of an r-parameter group.*

5. The Extended Group. An infinitesimal transformation

pee
lay

may be extended in two ways. In the first place, the Taistion of the coor-

Spee ae pA ees er a

dinates of n points is simply the sum of the variations of the codérdi-
nates of the separate points; hence, U f extended in this manner becomes

k=n }
(A). Ufr= = {s (xe yey | | 7 (xx, yx) {4 | \

n= 1 ld xx ld yx
The symbol U / may also be extended so as to include the variation of
Pe DY ie ay net G2 Uae t
SSeS = eens = : ave
“ (dex 2! dx? : Gl xe ae

Ox SEX FO teh. Oy =— Ce, 0 iy
joy dx 6 dy —dyddx__ddy — yiddx

dx dx? dx
{day dé) f eh pee a
Nemo rp guile ce cea Lg) ee

= 1 (X,Y, y’) Ot.
In a similar manner,
J d7/ —y" , ds \
l dx dx J
and so on for higher variations.

F) y" = Ld G = 7! (x, y; ys y’) 6 t:

The infinitesimal transformation U f extended to include these higher

variations hecomes

wm). 0/a=e[ BE) 49{ HE} ou (SE) be (49m (HE).

Each of the members of an r-parameter group Ux/, k=1, 2, ... r, may
be extended, giving the infinitesimal transformations of the coordinates of
n points as indicated by equation (A); or each may be extended as in
(B) to include the variations of x, y ,y’, y’”, y’’”, -.. y™. A group of
transformations extended in style of (A) or (B) is called an extended group.

“Lie—Scheffers, Continuierliche Gruppen, p. 390.

89

6. Invariant Functions. The variation of any function * (x, y) when
operated upon by an infinitesimal transformation.

ehh a Uf=fp+rq
is given by

If © (x, y) is to remain unchanged, then U # = 0, and @ (x, y) is a solution
of the homogeneous linear partial differential equation

Uj fp 1a,
that is, ® (x, y) is an integral of Lagrange’s equation
dx _ ay
iS 7
® (x, y) so determined is called an invariant for the transformation
af — 2p 7 al.

A group of two or more independent transformations will not in general
have an invariant function. But when extended to include the codrdinates
of n points, as in (A) above, an r-parameter group

n
Ux fm = Bf a (Xi, yi) (2) <a (i, ni) (ae | \, ke) Decor

gives rise to 2 n — r independent functions
$) (Xio Vis --. Xn, Yn)y $a, $3, --. $2n—r’

which are point-invariants of the group Ux f, and which are derived by integrat-
ing the r partial differential equations U, fa —o, U,fra—o,... Urfn—o.

After the manner here indicated the writer has calculated all the point-
invariants for the twenty-seven finite continuous groups of the plane as
classified by Lie.* The results appear in the Proceedings of the Indiana
Academy of Science, 1898, pp. 119-135.

7. Differential Invariants. An infinitesimal transformation extended to
include the increment of y’ leaves invariant two functions 4, (xX. y, y’),
6, (X, y, y’), the solutions of

WfStp+r1a+7 (<7) =°

The functions ¢,, ¢, are called differential invariants of the infinitesimal
transformation U’/. Lie shows that when two independent differential

*See Lie-Scheffers, Contin. Gruppen, pp. 360-362.

90

invariants of a given transformation are known, then all others may be
found by differentiation.*

d¢, , dé
oa = b — 3
e de, se do,’
An r-parameter group Uxf extended to include the increments of
y’, y’, ... vy‘, when equated to zero, gives r partial differential equations

inv + 2 variables. These r equations have two independent solutions, ¢,
(Xx, y, y’, -.. y™), $5 (X, y, y’, .-- y™), which are differential invariants of
the r-parameter group. After the plan here indicated Lie has calculated
the differential invariants for the twenty-seven groups of the plane.

The calculation of differential invariants may be made by an entirely
different method than that used by Lie, and indeed without any knowledge
of the group extended as indicated above. A knowledge of the form of a
point invariant for the group is necessary.

Let a point invariant 4 (X,, y,;, X,, Yo, --.) be given, and suppose the
points X,, Y:3 Xe.» Yo; ---3 Xn, Yn, to be located upon a plane curve

spt si(tb) Seyes sue (tale
Then we would have

x7 —— it iG vee is Wid coe 2 = 1B (tn', Yn hy (tn),

Allowing x,, Yo; X3, Y33 .--3 Xn, yn to coalesce toward xi y1, we may then
expand x,, y,, .... in power-series

Xo =, 4 = dtp x Cts ee, Ya — Ve (eta ay ee
5)

2 2
(I) X,—x,1+x dt,+x/dt?+..., y;=yi + (y’) dt, — (y’”’) dt?-+...,
2 2
and so on for X,, Y4, .-. Xn, Yn, where
(1) Oh ES
alt, dt,? dt,:
dy d?y dey
7) / — » Le /f — =e //f = u w ee et
(2) (y ace (yt) dt? Ce) ats
The notation of (1), (2) should be changed from parameter notation to the
. dy a?y
Liebe yf hy
ordinary y az y aa
PS dy Be, (y’) / eo 4 / 7 +
SS = ee hence (cya) yx sini larly
dx x

(¥’”) = y’”’ (x’) 2 ainy” x’: (y’”) = yi’ (x’) 3 + Sy x! xe% Se x///-

(y?”) = yi" (4) 4 Oy Ge) 4 7 4 Sy (x) 2 hy x

(¥*) =y" (&’) ® 4 Oy (a) 8x ey (16 x’ (x) 27 + 10, x ae
yy" (10 eS MIS be xiv) + y’ x’,

and so on for higher derivatives.

*Lie, Math. Annalen, Bad. XXXII.

oa

If in any point invariant ¢, the values of x,, y,;x,, y,; ...., taken from
({) be substituted, and then the result developed into in infinite power-series
in the ascending powers of dt,, dt,;, dt,, ... dtn, the successive coefficients
of the separate powers of dt,, dt;, ..., and of the products dt,, dt,, .
are all invariant functions of x’, x”, x’, ..., (y’), (y’”), (y’”), .... These

separate invariant functions may then be changed by means of equations

dy su
(3) above so that only x’, x”, x”, x", .... andy’ = go is

occur. Then by algebraic manipulation the parameters x’, x’’, x’”’,
may be eliminated, leaving a differential invariant for the continuous
group from which the point invariant ¢ had been derived.

8. The Differential Invariants for the General Projective Group.
The general projective group: p, q, xq, Xp — yq, yp, xp + yq, x2p +
xyq, xyp + y’q, when extended leaves invariant the point-function.

hs x, y, | xX, yi 1 x, yi l x,y, l ‘
Qe— KX, Y21/+ |x, y2.1 5 Xe Sa S| Xe Vat .
X5 Y5 l X,Y, 1! x,y; 1 Sen nal!
Substituting in Q the series expansions of x,, y,, X3, Y3, .-. Xs, Y5 from

equations (I), and developing the determinants, we have the ratio of infinite
series which may be further developed into a single power series of the form

= (I,) (I; | (
Q' =a, + a, beck & bre) a= as [

where ai is an expression containing a function of dt,, dt,, dt,, dt, to
degree 7, and where

Ihe — x’ yi — XYZ (y”: — Wie GE
i — x’ (yi7%) pees x/// (4) —- Wer“ (A + oy (A) A
K) if — x’ (yi¥) a xiv (y’) = yiv (x’7)> at by? “7 (7) ex = ay (x7 )2
( + 4 yy? (x) Big’
1 — x’ (ye) fe x7 (y”) — Vita (x’) 8x7 — Vig (xs Bee ee + 3y”” x’ (42
and so on until all orders of differentials y’, y’, y’”, ...., yY#i have been
included. Now the separate ratios I, :1,,1,:1,,1, : I,, ...., are separate-

ly invariant, and when reduced as in equations (K) contain the arbitary
parameters x’, x’’, x’’”’”, xvii, The elimination of these parameters is

*See Pro. Ind. Acad., 1898, p. 135.

92
a tedious process, and will not be indicated here. When performed, how-

ever, there results the two differential invariants
Peete da ig Wer vem 8) Cay Ot a Hee LS LAE o Gg NS
1 == Pay Np OO eae ia he aoe 2\ == (A,)*;
fe [a.{a0—s MeN + 22 az}— 12/ A, —Pa, A, \{a.- oe
28 f A Ae
+ Bia,—2ail ‘| cee
where AS oy zc —4(y’’”)
A38 == yY (y’”’)’ —Aay** aes vy’ 4 +o ty?’“)*,
A, = 3y” (y”)3 — Q4yv Wee (y’”) 2 abe 60y’¥ (y”) 2 y”’ — 40 Ly

Au 22 Qyv” (y’”)* = 105y"’ Ly7)3 ys + 490 yv (vy? (y’”)? tad]
120 Aerts

LON
’

Add dar ots pia einer eh,
A, = 279’ (y’7) —48 A; y’” — 810 Ay (9/7)? — 2240 A, (y”)*
2240 re

=22800:A, (y’7)2 — 3-7)

ConsuGATE Functions AND CANONICAL TRANSFORMATIONS.
By Davip A. ROTHROCE.

(Abstract.)

It is known that any function, ¢ (Z), of a complex variable, Z= x -+

iy, may be separated into a real part #1 (x, y: an imaginary part,7%, x,y),
02 6 0 26 -
P+ —=/Or*, LAY VERY.
OX, OY,

elegant geometric interpretation of these two functions 9,, ¢, may be had

and that 0,, , each satisfy Laplace’s equation

by equating each to a third variable ¢ : ¢, (x, y) =, $2, (x, y) =¢. Hach
equation then represents a surface for any point of which Laplace’s equation
is true. By developing ¢ = ¢, (x, y) into a power series in the vicinity of
any point xo, yo, and using the Laplace equation, we have the theorem:
the projection of the section of a tangent plane to the surface ¢ = 9, (x, y)
upon the x, y-plane is a curve having a double point at Xo, yo with real,
orthogonal tangents, and hence the surface is hyperbolic at every point.

¢ =k gives lines of level on ¢ = 9, (x, y), while (=k, in¢=4@, (x,y)
gives cylinders which intersect ¢ = ¢, (x, y) in curves of quickest descent.

The second part of the paper deals with the linear fractional function

al B
Z, Berto which has the fundamental invariant points /,, /, about

yet 10

which a cauonical transformation may be constructed so that Z = o, when

Zi=f,;Z=«,2Z TEiis fecieeiob aes ee 2 (G—*)
| i=, foo CNIS PUNCbION IS = et = fi =e AES he

f é
ee set, respectively, equal to
constants give an elliptic system and an eae system of circles about

Z— a
The modulus of we “i , and amplitude of 7

and through the two points /,.,/,. Now the transformation

BS SE ool ee)
0B Al eae A= fers”

sets up a motion about /,,/, which is determined by the modulus

a— yf,

a—yfo

and the amplitude of If mod. + 1 and amp = 0, motion

O2@ d2
5x2 denotes the second pirtial of @ with regard to x, and so for dye!

*Where

94

goes along the hyperbolic circles, the elliptic circles interchanging. If
mod. = 1, amp. = 0, motion goes along elliptic circles, the hyperbolic
system being invariant. Ifmod.+1, amp. +0, motion is along neither family
but passes diagonally from curvilinear rectangle to curvilinear rectangle.
These respective transformations may be named hyperbolic, elliptic, lovodromic.
The circles about and through the fundamental poiuts are potential lines
and lines of flow in the well known problem of electricity of equal source
and sink.

BLOOMINGTON, IND., Nov. 28, 1906

95

Nores on “Sautt Lime.”

FRANK B. WADE.

“Ye are the salt of the earth: but if the salt have lost his savour,
wherewith shall it be salted? it is thenceforth good for nothing but to be
‘ast out and trodden under foot of men.’—Matthew, vy, 13.

This passage from “the Sermon on the Mount” has doubtless puzzled
many a chemist, for salt without savour is as much an anomaly as a smile
(vithout a face.

Last summer, while spending my vacation at the seashore, I came
across an old-fashioned ‘salt works,’ where common salt is prepared by
evaporation of sea water, partly by means of trickling it over masses of
brush and further by solar evaporation in shallow vats.

It was while investigating the process that I came upon what seems
to me to be a plausible explanation of the scriptural passage, and at the
same time I secured a quantity of the material called by the salt makers
“salt lime,’ which is the subject of this paper.

It seems that the first solid product to separate from the sea water
upon concentration by evaporation is a very slightly soluble, white, crystal-
line substance, which gathers in the first four or five shallow vats. These
mre provided, so that the tasteless, gritty substance may not come down
along with the salt and constitute an undesirable impurity in it. This
tasteless substance is “salt lime.”

As to the connection between this substance and the salt which had
lost its savour, I think it very probable that the ancient salt makers omit-
ted to provide separate vats for the first, very slightly soluble product, and
that as a result it got mixed up with their salt. Then, possibly, owing to
exposure to moisture, the real salt may have become dissolved away from
this less soluble part in certain instances, and the residue, being tasteless,
would naturally be supposed to have “lost its savour,” by the unscientific
mind of that time.

Having secured eight or ten pounds of salt lime, I made an examina-
tion of the substance to determine its nature.

In physical appearance it is grayish white in color, crystalline in struc-

96

ture and it forms a layer about one-quarter inch thick as scraped from
the evaporators. I was told by the owner of the salt works that not over
thirty or forty bushels were obtained from the evaporation of an amount
of sea water that would yield 5,000 bushels of salt; so it will be seen that
the substance represents a high degree of concentration as the average per
cent. of common salt in sea water is only 2.61 per cent.* and the amount
of “salt lime’ obtained is only about 1 per cent. of that of the common
salt.

This high degree of concentration has led me to investigate the sub-
stance to see if it possesses any radio-activity, as, owing to the wide dis-
tribution of radio-active material more or less of it must find its way into
the ocean, and, judging from the position of radium in the periodic sys-
tem, the salts of radium ought to be found as sulphates among the less
soluble constituents of the ocean water.

Experiments are now under way with a view to still further concen-
trate the material and to find whether it contains any trace of radio-active
material.

Upon consulting the literature to which I have had access, I find that
mention is made in nearly all cases of the separation of gypsum (CaSQ,,
2H.0) prior to the separation of Common salt in the evaporation of both
sea water and natural brines from wells.

I have conducted a qualitative analysis of the salt lime in the regular
way and find that it does Consist mainly of gypsum. It has the water of
crystallization and gives the reactions of Ca and SO, It gives, moreover,
evidence of the presence of a small amount of carbonate of calcium. I have
seen no mention of this last fact in the literature to which I have had ac-
cess. In order to determine the proportion of carbonate in the mixture
I pulverized about 20¢. in an agate mortar until it had all passed through
a 100-mesh sieve; then taking a “fair sample,” as in assaying, I weighed out
5.6625 grams into a Schrotter apparatus and determined the weight of CO,
lost, in the usual manner.

The weight of CO. lost was .0156g, indicating a weight of .4854¢ of
CaCO, (calculated) or .62 per cent. CaCO,. A second determination gave
-71 per cent.

1 have tested carefully for Ba and Sr, using the ordinary form of
chemical spectroscepe as well as the regular analytical tests, and have

“New [International Encyclopoedia, p.723. 3.5 parts solid in 100. 77.76 per cent ot
solid is salt.

97

found no trace of either. I have also tested for PO, and fluorine with nega-
tive results.

Pugin heating a sample of the salt Jime ina dry test tube, there was
a slight charring, possibly due to a slight amount of material from the
wooden vats or perhaps from sea algae. There was also a slight smell of
NH, on boiling a large mass of the finely-powdered substance with excess
of NaOH in an attempt to remove CaSO, to secure concentration of the
less soluble constituents. ‘This was probably also due to small amounts of
remains of sea algae..

From my study of the substance I would conclude that it consists
mainly of gypsum. but that it contains an appreciable amount of CaCO,
(.65 per cent.) and that it is remarkably free from other constituents, due
probably to the sharp distinctions in solubility between the less soluble and
the more soluble constituents of sea water. I hope to concentrate further
a considerable aniount of the substance and examine it for traces of radio-
active material or other constituents.

7—A. OF SCIENCE.

98

THe EFrect oF SuGAR ON SOURNESS.

P, N. EVANS.

It is common experience that some foods and beverages taste less sour
when sugar is added, and it seems worth while to seek an explanation of
the fact.

In books of popular science the statement is sometimes made that
the sugar “neutralizes” the acid—in some such way, presumably, as a base
might. This explanation is untenable from the chemist’s standpoint, in-
asmuch as sugar enters into no such reaction with acids.

Better informed writers sometimes ayer that since sugar can not neu-
tralize acids its value in such cases is only imaginary and not real. Since,
nowever, in matters of taste, if the imagination is satisfied the problem is
pracucally solved, it becomes of interest to know how the imagination is
satisfied in this instance.

Sourness is now known to be a property of the hydrogen ion; for all
acids, and acids only, are sour, and all have this constituent, and this only,
in common, when dissolved in water. A diminution in intensity of sour-
ness must therefore be due either to a reduction in the number of hydrogen
ions in a given volume of the solution, or to a lessened sensitiveness to
sourness on the part of the nerves of taste.

An investigation was made by the writer as to whether the introduction
of sugar diminished the degree of ionization of hydrochloric acid in a given
solution, using the freezing point method, and it was found that there was
no effect, the degree of ionization of the acid being the same in the pres-
ence and in the absence of sugar.

The value of sugar, then, must depend on its physiological effect on
the nerves of taste, not on any chemical action by which the concentration
of hydrogen ions is reduced.

Some years ago Professor T. W. Richards of Harvard University (Am.
Chem. Jour. 1898, 121), called attention to the delicacy of the sense of taste
in detecting sourness and in comparing it in different intensities. With the
assistance of Miss Carrie Richardson (now Mrs. C. E. Roth) the writer

99

made a series of over four hundred experiments in detecting acid in the
presence and in the absence of sugar.

The experiments were conducted as follows: Solutions of hydrochloric
acid of known strength were prepared, and equivalent solutions of sodium
hydroxide were added gradually, the solution being tasted after each ad-
dition until sourness disappeared. In other experiments the acid was
added to the alkali until sourness was noticeable. Both methods proved
about equally delicate. As long as the solution was strongly acid or alka-
line, ouly a drop or two was introduced into the mouth, but when the
neutral point was almost reached a cubic centimeter of liquid was used
and held in the mouth for a few seconds. The graduations of the burettes
were hidden during every titration, that the judgment might not be prej-
udiced.

Experiments were made with solutions of acid varying from 0.715
normal to 0.0143 normal, or solutions containing 0.715 to 0.0148 milligrams
of hydrogen ions per cubic centimeter. Sugar was added in quantities
ranging from 0.04 to 0.8 grams per cubic centimeter.

With the experience gained in about twenty titrations considerable
accuracy of taste had heen acquired, so that consistent results were then
obtained differing only about 1 part in 70 in a 15 cubic centimeter titration
with the stronger solutions and in the absence of sugar, from those ob-
tained with chemical indicators, the error being in almost all cases in the
same direction, as might be expected—sourness disappeared with the ad-
dition of less aikuli than the acidity as determined by phenolphthalein, or
sourness appeared only on adding slightly more acid than required by the
indicator. With the more dilute solutions, however, the absolute results
were more exact. This is accounted for by the presence at the end point
of less salt (due to the neutralized acid and alkali) in the more dilute solu-
tions, the presence of salt reducing the delicacy of the sense of taste for
sourness. With the most dilute solutions it was found possible to recog-
nize with certainty the presence of 0.U07 milligrams of hydrogen ions in
the mouth, in 1 cubic centimeter of liquid, although 4 milligrams of salt
were also present. In the most concentrated solution 0.01 milligrams of
hydrogen ions was recognizable in the presence of 34 milligrams of salt.

The presence of sugar had the same effect as that of salt—the more
sugar present in the solution the larger was the quantity of acid necessary
for detection by taste; even the largest quantities of sugar used (0.8 grams
per cubic centimeter) increased the necessary quantity of acid less than 1.5

100

times compared with that needed in the absence of sugar; 4.034 grams of
salt was about as effective as 0.8 graims of sugar. In other words, if the
mind is intent on noticing sourness, even large quantities of sugar do not
seriously interfere. In the usual eating of sweet and sour food, however,
the mind is, as it were, engrossed with the sensation of sweetness and ren-
dered correspondingly less sensitive to other tastes.

In al! probability any other powerful taste would be as effective in hid-
ing sourness as sweetness is, but no other taste in concentrated form is so
generally agreeable as sweetness. The sourness of lemonade would cer-
tainly be as thoroughly masked by highly salting it as by the addition of
sugar: the result would not, however, be as agreeable to the majority of
lemonade drinkers, probably.

In conclusion, brief reference might be made to a few experiments on
the effect of sugar on bitterness, as sweetness and bitterness are commonly
considered to be mutually exclusive terms—a thing can not be both sweet
and bitter, though it can be at once sweet and sour. The experiments were
made by the writer with mixtures of solutions of sugar and of quinine, but
it was found impossible to obtain any numerical results, for, no matter
what the proportion within very wide limits, the sensation of sweetness
preceded that of bitterness, the mixture tasting sweet at the first moment
and then bitter, the latter sensation being very lasting.

The use of sugar, then, to render sourness less intense, is based on a
physiological, not on any chemical effect; the nerves of taste are less sen-
sitive to one kind of taste in the presence of another, though the mind by

concentration can largely overcome this obscuring effect.

101

A Srvpite Metuop or Measurine Hyprotysis.

GrorGE A. ABBOTT.

Several methods of measuring the degree of hydrolysis of dissolved
salts have been proposed from time to time; e. g., the measurement of the
rate at which the solution saponifies an ester, such as ethyl acetate; the
rate of hydration of milk sugar; and the measurement of the partial pres-
sure of ammonia gas over solutions of its hydrolysed salts; but none of
these methods is precise, and even under the most favorable conditions,
they are far from satisfactory. The first is based upon the bold assump-
tion that the rate of saponification is proportional to the concentration of the
hydroxyl ions, and that it is nunaffeced by the presence of other molecular
aggregates; the second method involves a similar assumption; while the
last is of little if any practical value, owing to experimental difficulties.

The method about to be described was developed in the course of an
extended research on the dissociation relations of Ortho and Pyro Phos-
phorie Acids and their salts, which will be published in detail elsewhere.
It is simple and convenient, and should be capable of a fairly wide appli-
eation to the ammonium salts of other weak acids; therefore it has seemed
sufficiently interesting to justify a brief description at this time.

When an aqueous solution of ammonia is shaken up with chloroform,
the ammonia distributes itself between the two non-miscible solvents, and
the distribution ratio is constant at a given temperature. Fortunately this
ratio is of a magnitude which makes it possible to. determine the concen-
tration of the ammonia in the aqueous solution by simply titrating a meas-
ured volume of the chloroform with which the solution is in equilibrium.
It is obvious that we may take advantage of this fact to determine the con-
centration of the free ammonia in a solution of its hydrolysed salt, and thus
determine the degree of hydrolysis. It is free from assumptions and is as
direct as a chemical analysis itself.

But, simple in principle as the method appears, its successful applica-
tion requires attention to certain experimental details. The chief difficulty
arises from the fact that the ammoniacal solutions form emulsions with the
chloroform layer which remain turbid even after standing several hours in

102

the thermostat. Drops of the aqueous solution of variable size thus remain
suspended in the chloroform layer, making it impossible to obtain concord-
ant results when different samples are titrated. Fortunately this diffi-
culty may be easily overcome by merely rotating the solutions in glass-
stoppered bottles in the thermostat. For this purpose the bottles are fast-
ented to the axle of the rotary stirrer of the thermostat after the familiar
method of making solubility measurements, and allowed to rotate several]
hours (one to three), when the two phases invariably separate perfectly
clear, with a sharply defined bounding surface. In order to establish the
equilibrium between the solution of the hydrolysed salt and the chloroform,
the latter is vigorously shaken with the aqueous solution in a stoppered sep-
aratory funnel. The phases are allowed to separate, after which the water
layer is removed as completely as practicable, and another portion of the
solution is added. This process is repeated until three portions have been
shaken up with the chloroform; a fourth portion is then rotated with the
chloroform, at a constant temperature, as described above. It is important
to remove the sample of chloroform for titration without contamination by
any of the aqueous solution. This may be easily done by means of a
syphon. The short limb of the glass tube is sealed in the flame, and a
small thin bulb blown on the end. It may then be passed, closed, through
the aqueous layer, and opened by breaking against the bottom of the bottle.
The chloroform is syphoned into a clean, dry, vessel, measured, and titrated
with 0.02 Norinal hydrochloric, or nitric, acid, using methyl orange as in-
dicator. Enough pure water should be added to make a layer of convenient
depth to view the color of the indicator; since the latter does not enter the
chloroform, and the stoppered vessel should be vigorously shaken at in-
tervals during the titration.

The distribution coefficient of ammonia between chloroform and water
was measured, at 18°, at concentrations 0.1, 0.05, and 0.02 Normal, and the
mean of eight measurements gave 27.36. This is the ratio of the concen-
tration of the undissociated ammonia in the aqueous solution to the con-
centration of the ammonia in the chloroform.

The method was applied to the measurement of the degree of hy-
drolysis of Na.NH,PO,, at 18°, and concentrations 0.1, 0.05, and 0.02 molal,

with the following results:

103

Conc. Mols. per Litre. Per Cent. Hydrolysis.
0.1 95.39
0.05 95.44

0.02 95.65

That is, in a solution of Na,NH,PO,, at the above concentration, only
5 per cent. of the ammonia is chemically combined. When the hydrolysis
is large the method is accurate, and even v7hen it is small the results are
zood, as shown by the following values for the salt NaNH,HPO,:

Conc. Mols. per Litre. Per Cent. Hydrolysis.
0.1 2.98
2.92
2.98
0.05 3.02
3.13
3.02
2.90

Mean, 3.0

These values are corrected for the ionization of the ammonia at the
different concentrations.

104

Tue [onIzATION OF THE SuccEessIvVE HypROGENS OF ORTHO-
PHOSPHORIC ACID.

GEORGE A. ABBOTT.

The dissociation relations of polybasic acids are at present imperfectly
understood. Owing to the natural complexity of the compounds and the
experimental difficulties due to hyrolysis, hydration, and possibly asso-
ciation in solution. few investigators have attempted to determine the dis-
sociation constants of the different hydrogens of these acids; but the re-
cent development of physico-chemical methods of investigating the nature
of dissolved substances has made the solution of such problems appear en-
tirely practicable. Therefore an extended investigation was undertaken,
at the suggestion of Prof. A. A. Noyes, in the hope that an exhaustive study
of the dissociation relations of the phosphoric acids might contribute to-
ward a better understanding of their chemical behavior in inorganic re-
actions. ‘lhis investigation was conducted in the Research Laboratory of
Physical Chemistry of the Mass. Inst. of Technology.

In this paper I shail attempt to present briefly only a few results, in
the hope that they may prove sufficiently interesting to justify their presen-
tation. The method of measuring hydrolysis described in the previous pa-
per gives us at once a reliable means of determining the dissociation
constants of weak acids. ‘Vhen both acid and base are weak (slightly dis-
sociated), the following relation holds:

h2 Moers Kw
(d—h) Ky Ky

in which h# denotes the degree of hydrolysis of the salt, and Kw, Ka and
Ks are the dissociation constants of water, the acid and the base, respect-
ively. They are defined by the following expressions of the Mass Action
Law:

Kw = Cy & Con

Gy == (Chie CA

Cua
Ky = Cp x Con

”
Cou

105

The dissociation constants of the successive hydrogens of Orthophos-
phorie Acid will be designated K,. K. and K;. They are defined by the
Mass Action equations:

K, =H x 8H, PO,

H, Po,

Ke SH CaP OF
H, PO;

Ke POS
HPO;

They will be considered in inverse order.
Ks may be determined by substituting the value of h, obtained by the
partition method, in the hydrolysis equation.

9b:
Kw = 8 X 10°-!* (mols. per litre).
Kew ol Oma,

(.95)? xis 50: << 10-16
(dl. — .95)“—_ (K,) (1.72 X 10-7) whence,
K, = 6.48 x 10-'8 (mols. per litre).

Ks was also determined by an utterly independent method based upon
the measurement of the increase of electrical conductivity produced on
adding to solutions of Na.HPO,, varying amounts of ammonia. Time will
not permit a description of the method and calculations which are some-
what complicated, but the values obtained at different concentrations
agreed remarkably well with the above value.

In like manner Ix, may be calculated from the hydrolysis of NaNHy,
HPO, The value obtained by substitution in the above equation is K, =
3.9 x 10—", but this calculation fails to take into account the influence of
the unionized substances in the solution. :

The correction involves merely the application of the Mass Action Law,
and the principle that, in ab mixture of salts with a common ion each salt
has the same degree of ionization as if it were present alone at a concen-
tration equal to the sum of the concentration of the two salts. However,
the algebra involved is not particularly entertaining, and it will perhaps be
sufficient to give the mean corrected: value of K.—2.09 x 10—. It is then
seen that the correction is large. The value of K,, when corrected for the
influence of unionized substances becomes K.=5.55 x 10—".

The hydrolysis of the salt NH,H,PO, is too small to be measured by the

106

partition method, for the ionization of the first hydrogen of Orthophos-
phoric Acid is fairly large. It does not accurately obey the Mass Action
Law: hence K, has no defi-ite meaning. However, the degree of disso-
ciation was determined from the values of the electrical conductivity of the
acid and its salts, and other known data, and the following values were ob-

tained, at 18°C:

Cone. Mols. per Litre. Degree of Ionization.
0.1 0.286
0.05 .364
0.01 .602
0.002 .839
0.0002 .965

Ostwald’s Dilution Law requires that

Cr2

LF

1

wherein C represents the concentration and 7 the degree of ionization.
Substituting the values of * we obtain, for the values of K, at the different

concentrations :
Concentration. Ke
0.1 0.0114
05 .0104
01 .0091
002 .OO8T
0002 .0053

and it is seen that the deviation from the law is marked.
A comparison of the ionization constants of phosphoric acid with those

of some other acids is interesting.

Keo re

Acetic Acid, C,H,.O, — H 180,000.
Carbonic, HCO, — H 3,040.
Hydrosulphuric, HS — H 570.
Boric, H,BO, — H Ale
*Phenol, C,H,O0 — H 1.3
Phosphoric Acid, K, = H,PO, — H 100,000,000. (Approx. ).

= Se Ke — PO — Et 2,090.

© o> Ke P0744 — 0.00555

* These values are taken from Walker, ‘‘Zeit Phys. Chem.’’ 82, 137, 1900.

107

The first hydrogen of ortho phosphoric acid behaves in a manner an-
alogous to that of the strong acids; the second to that of a weak acid in-
termediate between carbonic and hydrosulphuric; while the third is even
weaker than phenol. ‘This accounts for the well-known behavior of the
acid toward indicators.

108

CoEFFICIENT OF EXPANSION OF Brick.

C. V. SEASTONE.

Inasmuch as brick is used extensively as a building material in differ-
ent ways and in different types of construction, and also beacuse it is used
to a large extent as a paving material, a knowledge of its physical proper-
ties is of value. With a view to increasing this knowledge a series of ex-
periments were made at Purdue University to determine the coefficient of
expansion of different grades of brick. It is the purpose of this paper to
give the results of these experiments.*

The method used to determine the coefficient was to subject a bar of
steel whose coefficient of expansion was known, and the specimen of brick,
to identical changes of temperature. The difference of expansion was
measured by the principal of the optical lever. This difference reduced to
unit length and unit temperature gave a correction to apply to the coef-
ficient of the metal bar.

The apparatus used for these experiments was designed by Professor
W. D. Pence, former Professor of Civil Engineering at Purdue University,
and used by him to determine the coefficient of expansion of concrete. It
consists of, first, the specimen to be tested; second, the bar of steel of
known coeflicient; third, a heating apparatus, consisting of a double-walled
steam jacket through which the mirror of the optical lever could be seen;
fourth, a rod in the opposite side of the room, whose image, reflected in the
mirror, was read by means of an engineer’s level. The thermometer is
hung inside the heater and is read through the glass door by the aid of an
incandescent lamp suspended alongside of it. The lamp is turned on only
for an instant in order not to affect the reading of the thermometer. Both
the level and the steam jacket were mounted upon a concrete foundation.
The arrangement of the apparatus and the method of conducting the ex-
periment will be easily understood from the figure.

*The experiments were conducted, under the writer’s direction, by W. J. Burton and

C. W. Wilson (1902-1903), and by G. W. Case and G. C. Curtiss (1904-1905), as thesis work in
the School of Civil Engineering, Purdue University.

109

Three qualities of brick were used. First, a good quality of No. 1
paving brick; second, a medium quality of No. 2 paving brick; third, a
soft quality of ordinary building brick. The brick were approximately
2”x4"x8” in dimension and were cemented together in order to obtain the
specimen of desired length.

Following is the mean yalue obtained for each of the above qualities of
brick:

No. 1 brick (hard) Coefficient of Expansion per degree F — .00000401.

No. 2 brick (medium), Coefficient of Expansion per degree F =
-00000401.

No. 3 brick (soft), Coefficient of Expansion per degree F — .00000393.

It will be noted that the hardness of the brick has little to do with the
amount of expansion, the three qualities giving essentially the same values.

110

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE KNOWLEDGE OF VEHICLE Woops.

W. K. Harr.

It is admitted by both the forester and the manufacturer of vehicley
that the supplies of hickory and like woods used in vehicle construction are
becoming scarce. The quality is poorer and the price is higher each suc-
ceeding year. Indeed, the condition with respect to the supply of vehicle
woods may be said to have become acute, and the various trade organiza-
tions have become aroused to such an extent that meetings have been held
to discuss means of increasing the sources of supply and economizing on the
construction.

Three ways in general are open:

First, an endeavor may be made to determine the availability of new
species as substitutes for such woods as hickory and white oak.

Second, planting operations might be made.a success.

Third, a more economical use may be made of the timber supplies now
entering the mills for manufacture into wagon parts.

The present paper discusses lines of effort in the substitution of new
and untried species, and in improving rules of grading in the mills so that
excellent material, fully available for service, may not be thrown out, as is
the case now, by incorrect rules of grading.

The Forest Service, United States: Department of Agriculture, and the
Purdue University Laboratory have for some years co-operated in the es-
tablishmnent of a timber testing station in the Laboratory for Testing Ma-
terials of Purdue University, at which studies have been made to determine
the essential mechanical properties of various species of wood, and what
effect various factors have upon these properties. Other studies to deter-
mine the correctness of the rules of grading for vehicle parts, and to ex-
amine into the merits of different designs of such parts as wagon axles,
and to investigate the properties of possible substitutes, have a direct ap-
plication to an important industry of the State. This Laboratory at Pur-
due University is one cf a series of laboratories operated by the Forest

111

Service at such institutions as the Yale lorest School, and the Universities
of California, Oregon and Washingten. ‘The writer of this paper has been
in charge of this work since is inception in the year 1903.

SUBSTITUTION OF NEW SPECIES.

The practice of substituting cheaper and weaker species for others
which have become scarce and high priced has been increasing for some
time. For instance, longleaf pine harvester poles have come into use in
place of oak poles, and those parts of vehicles not bearing a great strain
are now made of weaker woods. ‘She successful introduction of species
which are quite proper for the service is generally retarded by prejudice.
Consumers have demanded certain species regardless of their actual fitness,
and irrespective of the fact that ether and cheaper woods might answer the
purpose equally well. Tor instance. both poplar and red gum, which are
now held in such high estimation, have both had to fight their way for a
place on the market for such parts as wagon box boards.

It may be stated at the outset that there is probably none of our east-
ern species that can replace hickory for strength and general shock-resist-
ing properties and permanence of shape after it is bent. The lines of en-
deayor must be to use hickory in only such parts of the wagon where great
shock-resisting properties are required, and to correct the rules of grading
so that minor defects which do not affect the strength of the wagon are not
allowed to operate to throw a suitable piece of hickory out of use. A re-
cent study of the properties of the eucalypts in California by the Forest
Service seems to point to the value of some of these species for use in
wagon construction. The blue gum (Eucalyptus globulus) is the most com-
mon species in California, and has competed with black locust for insulator
pins, and has given satisfactory service in chisel and hammer handles, and
has been used locally for wagon tongues, axles. shafts, spokes, hubs and
felloes in California. The wood is hard, strong and tough, and grows very
fast. In bending the modulus of rupture is 23,000 pounds per square inch
for seasoned lumber, about equivalent to second-growth hickory. This
eucalypts seems to be the most promising species upon which to draw for
products requiring great strength. toughness and hardness.

GRADING RULES.

An instance of the method of attack to determine the correctness of
the grading is in the case of hickory wagon spokes, which are now graded

Jed

into six divisions: A, B, C, D, @ and Culls. Five hundred spokes were
procured from the Bannister Wheel Company of Muncie, Ind., and were
tested under a direct load as shown in the diagram, and the maximum load,
together with the amount of bending sidewise before fracture was noted.
This combination of maximum Joad and amount of side bending gives a
factor which represents toughness and shock-resisting capacity. The re-
sults, from the spoke tests show more than 50 per cent. error in the present
grading system, which is largely due to the traditional prejudice and con-
sequent discrimination against red hickory. No red spokes are now al-
lowed in the A and B grades, yet these tests show that a large proportion
of the red spokes now included in the lower grades should be, because of
their strength and toughness, included in the highest grades. It appears,
also, that weight for weight. the red spokes and the mixed red and white
spokes, are fuliy as strong as the entirely white spokes. These tests will
be supplemented by tests on various hickory buggy shafts containing typical
defecis. Such tests have an interest not only to the genral public, in that
a drain on a limited class of material is somewhat decreased, but they have
an interest also to the grower of tiniber, because they increase the market
value of a cousiderable portion of the product of the forests.

Tests have also been made on a number of wagon axles. Various
species of woods, not only from the western forests, but from eastern
forests. have been made up into axles at a mill and have been submitted
to the laboratory for test. At the present time the series is complete upon
hickory and maple axles of three different designs, and the method of at-
tacking the problem and of determining the qualities of the axles by actual
test will be of interest from a scientific standpoint. (Referring to the
photograph of an axle under test, the method of loading and measuring
and the behavior of the axle is shown in detail, and the various quantities
entering into an estimation of the value of the axle are explained.)

Another example is in a series of tests to determine the proper grad-
ing of pine harvester poles. <A large part of this material is shipped up
from the south to such markets as Chicago, and is there graded by the
manufacturers, the defective material being thrown out at a loss to the
shipper, not only of the cost of the material, but of the freight. It becomes
important, therefore, to know whether the poles thrown out might be used.
Poles containing different classes of defects were tested, and it was found
that at the present time there is an unjustifiable prejudice against the use
of poles containing a considerable per cent. of sapwood.

113

Another series of tests on the relative strength of oak and yellow pine
wagon poles is of interest, not only for the method of loading and measur-
ing the quality of the pole. but from the light it throws on the essential
difference between products from such woods as oak and such woods as
yellow pine. (Referring to the diagram, the method of loading and meas-
uring the various elements of the test were shown. The general results of
the investigation are also shown by the diagram and table, from which it
appears that while longleaf pine poles are as strong and elastic as the oak
poles, yet they lack the toughness, and the effect of a cross grain is much
more serious than in the ease of oak.)

These various instances are brought forward to show the method of
attack and scientific care in aiding the solution of a large commercial
problem of this kind. The results of these tests will appear in a publica-
tion by the Forest Service.

8—A. oF SCIENCE.

Notes Uvon tHe Rate oF TREE GROWTH IN GLACIAL. SOILS IN
NorTHERN INDIANA.

STANLEY COULTER.

The clearing of certain small timber areas near Lafayette in January
and February, 1906, gave an exceptional opportunity for studying the rate
of growth of certain native species of trees. The species occurring in suf-
ficient number to warrant deductions were the white oak, red oak and
black walnut. Of the red oak forty-nine trees were examined; of the white
oak, sixty, and of the black walnut, thirty-two. -It was assumed that the
annual rings gave a fair indication of the age, despite the occasional forma-
tion of two rings in a single year, or the apparent suppression of an annual
ring because of exceptionally unfavorable conditions, which were recog-
nized as possible contingencies. In the forms examined neither of these
conditions were indicated, the growth in each case having apparently pro-
ceeded in an orderly and orthodox fashion.

The measurements are the averages of the longest and shortest diam-
eters and were taken inside of the bark. Both the measurements and the
counting of the rings were made by four groups of students, insistence being
placed upon accuracy. In cases of discrepancy a recount or remeasurement,
or in some cases both, was directed. The tables, therefore, may be con-
sidered as exceptionally accurate, each specimen having been independently
studied by four groups working on different days.

The oaks, with but few exceptions, occurred on the highest levels, just
northwest of Purdue University. The general surface is rolling, with a
southeastern exposure, more or less interrupted by ravines formed by small
streams. Approximately the topographical conditions were the same.

The soil in the area under consideration is relatively thin. It consists
of a few inches of humus made up of the usual forest material; a few
inches (8-12) of a loam soil more or less alluvial in character, followed by
perhaps a foot of fairly heavy clay. Underlying this is the glacial drift,
extending downward from one hundred and ten to one hundred and twenty
feet to the bed of the river. The drift in this region is mainly sand and

115

gravel, with a few thin seams of light clay at various levels. Throughout
the area from which the oaks were cut, the soil overlying the drift ma-
teriai ranges from eight to twenty-three inches in thickness. So far as the
physical and chemical composition of the soil is concerned we have prac-
tically identical conditions over the entire area.

The black walnut was cut for the most part in an area lying in the
second river terrace, where, in addition to the forest humus, there occurs
from three to five feet of alluvial soil before the clay is struck. The clay
_ also in this area is perhaps twice as thick as in the former case. The ter-
race has an eastern exposure, while the curves of the river protect the par-
ticular tract in question from the north winds, but leave it open to winds
from the south. Upon the west it is protected by the escarpment of the
upper terrace. The area covers but a few acres and evidently furnishes
as uniform conditions as can be found in nature. The two tracts present,
however, fairly distiuct conditions, a fact which should be borne in mind in
any comparison of the rate of growth.

The measurements of the different species are given in tabular form as
furnishing in the main the data for the deductions drawn later in this
paper. Possible occasional errors may occur in the computation of per-
centages in spite of the fact that the figures have been reviewed three
times.

From the tables it is shown that in the area indicated and under the
conditions outlined the average yearly increase in white oak, based upon
sixty specimens, was .1995 of an inch; of red oak, based upon forty-nine
specimens, was .22674 of an inch; of black walnut, based upon thirty-two
specimens, was .27712 of an inch.

A number of interesting inferences seem plain.

1. There is a wide range in the growth rate in trees of the same
species, even when growing under the same conditions. Thus the range in
white oak is from .095 to .828 of an inch; in red oak, from .134 to .515 of
an inch; in black walnut, from .195 to .358 of an inch. Such wide range
under conditions so nearly identical must be referred to individual idiosyn-
cracies, probably referable in most cases to the vigor of the acorn, to the
character of the tree from which the acorn was derived, to inherited growth
tendencies or similar causes. An examination of the table of trees of simi-
lar age in respect to their diameters will show clearly this “personal equa-
tion” of the tree. For example, in Table II, numbers 38 to 45, inclusive,

116

Taste I. Quercus?ALBA.

Serial Number.

Inches
Diameter.

—
on
Orv Croc

Average
Yearly
Increase.

TaBLE II. QUERCUS RUBRA.

117

Serial Number. Inches
Diameter.
La SEL CR RE RO De Oe FERRO OT ORC ONE Se CADRE AOC ENE Rent n cane Anan 20
Jy a ie MEE PORTERS RS OSE a oe ep aS ce eee Re aera 15
PRE ee Geet ait mie IAe Aaa OTe ele more ST ehotstote tchalctehelststales dis 14
1 DOOR OR AR Ga OR ACCA Eee ito BORO Sr oes Sri iEe ae Reece 15
Fierch oe crenO OE SRI SES eae ele a TREO o ATa aA Ee BAROB a uCnC EE ei ie 14.5
(SESE CED D RR Ree ROO Oe Sain tne ACE Teen ES RRR A Arne 24
PE eae See Neate Race Merete Rte te oer Nata aka taate” hayite islabave) 22
Ee aee TTT Te Oe ec obec acacia ckcinte slabs aldistere trnaatd 22
Ee eS ect Broke PG nets atta WON cee teas cite eae aecns 20
Tae a ae rote rah ole ote ne wh erate eels nee iela ets cloister’ s 6 19
To Da aes Ee Bete RES E BUnE toa CADE AC en ORT Ache OLA Sn eee nD 16.5
L121, 5 is 8 Seiten cee Md EE A eS See ee a ne ee 15
LESS eee Nee a otra Yard SALA A ctovhis Beit creel ckedei as Kienslaiave"otetasalelsetshand 17
A ee Me ere tke Meee Otek Oke sce exe ale hora Ra eS cE 15
PEO re IN Pe rc eheCEe ra a ce rer aE OATS Sel ouslayeeiatsjchetats 9.5
1 Hoge Sees Ce eRe ORD COTE EE Be eer OO nee 15
LL, Boece ce hee Beene ad Ot Soa ene COE eBaer oer brcnanod 23
Re ea ORE eee crop teksts Tero tearte mea ore inate Oe Soars ciered eral aie Seale vctate ate 14.5
EERE Re cate, SP cere, cuit ce Lieve otal stoi Se Saree aie SA nis Soeinisle tearens alate 12
ENS AES coed eee yarn alah charac crate eoreiele, alas ine ce Pele alee are barctalatetenals 15.5
2 in SRR SERA ene o PB AGC OR OO AO ORCE RB Opor Don COnenomonenane 14.5
BI aA mA Se eres Utara er deer TP Date ORES TiBe Alo Ee ESOT ATS Fatale Sas 15.5
RCE aes cleo Eve i amiciem nish wise toca Orem e a Mac ereeiaverce 13.5
oe ROR yo Le aan (ie seri Oi Sie Pos Pea tn Reet aac Pegese eG 13
Ail, Andee CREE). | Oe Taipei Sees ay tae Se ree e Re een De Peer eye 11.5
NY pene by co Ee Sec RECS ICS RICO CITES c COR OED one Deer eer: 15
POF ass 3S a ee ie COC OE ECE ee aoe enon aete tes os 14.5
AS St Nid Sy Aa SEAN ee Scat RES clinch oie Oe oe SR Bi ioe cen a 16
Lanne AN gat Peet ys Ts Rater MIS i Pav BA Een Solheeis oleae oe ats 2250)
3 he cht wes AOR Sat RRR e RC rete Rene in ie PO te a coe ae ne ee 16
SiC res 5 cat So Ces PE PO ESE a ERIE D COE RC Rey eC ERISS Ota OTe 14.5
Bit BOs oO SASSO OR Re BO are ane RCE Ln tees ann oe ee 24
33) hacia DEE TEN OnO Baten dens ea OCU CREST C MS Ais heen er 20
SS sil CORA On DRO OT Re An 45 ACO CROC TOT tao ne caer 22
SORE T RET M eRe Res terete fe cle he rinicte eaters tle eiesaraye Siete sic Saat norte ate ts 20
2 Uniecnis odo Ge Oo RODE Sats Heb SEU REE Hei CCL Or ar ea eras 22
Sy (oe GE ROA Rr OE SELAt ace Ess ROBES ODOR SRST Ay a Dees cater arate 33
SPS Mee te tare ett yeny aera arte, Actas rcRofe eieter ste sition sreiheatarse's 22
SD se eA Oe Ss Chants Os Gene ORC ne 2 Het OR DIE eee Seen Ontse acco a nEnee 18.5
EAD) Soe es Se Eats & Bae ool eae ec = Se a oir Ai Cat nt or ee 20
LUN cats cap Ge RO Eg SE RIO ae IEE Oe SERS C ELA RS e Oas o Ie ca ena 19
ED ea teen ei ty te Ok eS pets SR eee 1 A BM ae bow So card 15
ES URN Te eh ToT eee ee A eee en ee ap maiming hkiteace ore 17
ee Ba Oe Din RED ere Re eae ET Se eT oO ce ener 15
CD isRn has todhe cee Ere mC E SO BORER ICE ORL Ieee aan ean 16.5
AD Meh tare PPA MT RN oe caters itera era she Simi et Nore, wee crore otek Se Ime eRe Best sls 13.5
Ee Aer Oe Phere h ped ea oe i afusi ais cree atc eeN eho oc etbeote aie Slee feld uw! 11
AS ERs eras PN ree Tee es en eieieiale oie oe Bite otcuteetauls emake tare a.s 23
AD Fi a deyetdcrtya Shs Ste A RS aa Tae clare sein ately oldie lake ope JER Matelavaiee os oo sites 18.5

No. of An,

Rings.

‘Average
Yearly
Tncrease.

118

Taste III, JUGLANS NIGRA.

Average
Serial Number. Inches | No. of An. Yearly
Diameter. Rings. Increase.
| ae ee Se a ee ane Re ee Pet I eee ee eee EIA A! 25 82 305
Ps ee feta 8 a Soe ie On ACOH Ona TA GORE Urteny SOO PAS 14 64 219
Die wc aaictas Aa Me ever ten aso ha tine tba aeale lore Baca wel episteiee me avi 15 77 195
CaS? Ne cote Sn en ee yn eae ee ee ae ere Sr rc 19 73 260
Sea iaiaie tie he have Saleic a wierecoja permis Gees aicleeMnlee nusn Minish @neeitaler eae 18 67 270
US See eE ere Soke Mee eA O te As fan Seria Ss Aer ete Bee a 21 81 260
Te wees RRR A EG tik nip asin, MO Reon ae Ee setae 19 58 327
BH a oyster Peete cabal NG GEG soos isle Sat ates See See Pee 20 64 312
DIGe Ee RCAS RNAS Sires EPIt CER S ORs coke Ee nea ee 18 76 237
DO ee ease ta io Riante cede telco ie aie BSN Se ears el Doren DEED 20 74 270
DMR ech whe Qe a Neate Oe Se A ER oe hs OS ede She Dae BEEP eRe 14 52 .270
OER RR Ee PSS Che oO aE OE eo DOCR otc ennas 15.5 68 .228
DS RR ie csr ae ARRON crore cre SNe EIR Re oe nee Us EPR CRORE Soe Ee 21.5 64 336
1 Ce RS ear hae Ite Ae as nS eee nn as Tae eee 21 72 291
DOR eeu & Se a at eee ere oe OE URE Cones ace ne eRe ee 2255 71 317
1 REI ORES Ree ae aA ee ee eh ae eR aS 20 66 303
NE e Ae ee he rte SON oe eae Une «chia Ritonts Ahem nate BE EE 24 67 358
ES GeO ORGS Cee EIS -t Pot on ee eee ccraticos: 15 45 333
DON Bane, Soe ee esr a ORE ROD cio a ache o Sn,. wierd ke Reece 22.5 | 88 255
SA ere oe eS aoe tre os Ree eR ee cee cee na onesies eRe 18 74 243
70 et Ee Ne ee aE SA 5 a TAPIA CRIS ARR ten 2 ee 19 76 250
De Ne oa nee RSA ERE Cee oor leas Oe ee ee eee 20 70 285
ORE Re Saas hon here Sook ioe ce A moeree eee ee ney ea eae 20 78 256
TER as oth ge oO aoe tials EL een PTI G lore, Sts rete Aisi ea eo a roe eee 24 80 |
oS ASS COne BAGO E Eee ae = eo ne eae Ee tacacdanec 17 63 | 270
BE eine eroven aes AO Seles al tee MnO alas aa hs STO oO CEE 16 60 | 266
DH oa Hee a Malas Doe ee eee sae iss ae alelenh woes ae heme G SERRE Ae 23 74 311
DOE ooo ee ne there DE eT re eae S ene ee OC eee A Ce eee nee 23 80 287
DORE Se ales Bd A OSOC Ra A eta Oe Dae aren olor Oe is Bis eo SA OS 22 77 285
DL eas ASE SAE I ft 8 «oe tas Spee ee co gan BY ae cs ee 22 83 265
2 be Pe tan NP Be MRP Dope Pet. oy Cee I ee one Bae pte ThA R See 19 79 240
DD sat oh ae sss GROEN oe NE EE he weer eae BRO Tae 20 75 266

are of the same age and grew on a gentle northward-facing slope in an area
of less than an acre, yet the diameters range from 15 to 22 inches.

2. Conclusions as to the rate of growth of various species, which fail
to take into account individual variations are manifestly misleading. This
variation may reach as much as 25 to 30 per cent. above or below the aver-
age growth rate. Incidentally it gives strong emphasis to the necessity of
great care in the selection of seeds for cultural work—since a careful se-
lection may increase the wood crop to the extent of 25 per cent. beyond the
average.

3. The growth rate in the area examined was exceedingly slow, especi-
ally in the case of the oaks. In a report of W. F. Fox, Superintendent of
State Forests, New York, it is stated that a vigorous three-inch white oak
sapling would, under favorable conditions, at the end of twenty years at-

119

tain a diameter of eleven inches, or make a net gain of eight inches. This
would give an average yearly increase of .4 of an inch, which is considerably
greater than the highest yearly increase in any of the sixty specimens ex-
amined, or .328 of an inch. Mr. Fox also states that a three-inch red oak
sapling would, in twenty years, attain a diameter of thirteen inches, thus
making a net gain of ten inches. This gives a yearly rate of .5 of an inch,
or more than double the average yearly rate (.22674 of an inch) of the forty-
nine specimens examined. It is true that specimen 37 shows an average
yearly growth of .515 of an inch, but the next is .336 of an inch and only
six out of the forty-nine show an average yearly growth in excess of .3
of an inch. An examination of a number of white and red oak logs at
local mills confirms the conclusion that the growth rate in the area studied
is exceedingly slow.

It is probable that the cause of this slow growth is to be found in
relatively thin soil underlaid by the hundred or more feet of drift. The
sand and gravel of the drift constitute a natural filter which rapidly car-
ries the soil water to lower levels. The thin soil and the stratum of clay
can not hold sufficient water to carry the trees through our long summer
drought and at the same time furnish a large amount of material for
growth. Observation of the trees of the Purdue campus furnishes confir-
mation of this view. ‘The soil conditions of the campus are practically the
same as in the area studied. The older trees of the campus were set out
between 1875 and 1880, and were largely maples and elms along the drive-
ways, other forms being scattered through the grounds. The maples and
elms are in sufficient numbers to justify a few generalizations. The trees
show an early period of rapid growth, a period of slow growth and finally a
practical cessation of growth. During this latter period the trees begin to
show all the signs of what might be called senility. In the early years, the
roots not having penetrated deeply, find sufficient available moisture in the
thin soil to provide for the maintenance of the tree and its normal growth.
A little later, the deeper penetrating roots reaching the drift find but little
water, so little, indeed, that under the most favorable conditions provision
can be made for only a slight growth. Still later the increasing demands
of the tree can not be satisfied and it begins to age, and we have the case
of elms and maples completing their life cycle in twenty-five or thirty years,
attaining in the meantime a diameter of from ten to fifteen inches. The
duration of life upon the campus is much less that in forest conditions, be-

120

cause of the absence of the forest floor and of its work in the conservation
of moisture and the enrichment of the soil.

4. It may be concluded that the most important factor in the growth
of trees is soil moisture. A confirmation of this may be found in the con-
ditions existing in areas of maximum development in number and size.
According to Sargent. the hardwoods of the United States find their maxi-
mum development in numbers and size in the lower stretches of the Wabash
Valley. In other words, in a region in which the soil possesses a rich water
content.

In any forecasts as to the results of reforestation, or as to the rate of
tree growth in any given locality the supreme factor to be considered is the
constancy of the water content of the soil.

5. In the case of the oaks an examination of the table will show a
period of rapid growth, a period of slower growth and finally a period of
scarcely appreciable increase. In the case of the walnut the growth is
much more uniform throughout the life of the tree. These are conditions
that would be expected if conclusion three is at all correct.

6. It is probable that red and white oak in regions such as the one
studied have reached their full size at from eighty to a hundred years, after
which they begin to deteriorate. The few large forms introduced in the
table are from the lowest river terrace and were introduced for purposes of
comparison.

7. The growth habit of the tree seems to control more largely than
external factors of growth. In a group of trees closely grouped the ma-
jority may show an exceptionally rapid growth in a given year, while one
or two show but a small increase. That this might be due to insect de-
foliation or other causes is of course possible, but an examination of the
growth through a series of years show a habit of slow growth as compared
with other individuals, whatever may be the external conditions. On the
other hand, individuals showing a habit of rapid growth are easily recog-
nized. No observable differences in the proportion of spring and summer
wood, in texture, in color cr in any gross characters are to be observed in
these differing forms. Some individuals of each species are rapid growers
and some are slow growers, whatever may be the origin of the habit. It
was impossible to determine whether or not this habit could be determined
by external features, as the trunks had been sent to the saw mill before
the area was found.

8. The conditions of the area described are fairly typical and apply

121
to a large part of the glaciated region of northern and northwestern Indi-
ana. Of course the immediate valleys and terraces of rivers and streams
furnish special conditions which must be considered as exceptional. It is
probable that any extended study of the rate of growth of the species dis-
cussed in the region indicated will show results but slightly varying from
those given above.

9. It is probable that under soil conditions such as those described,
larger forms than those found today but rarely occurred. A careful exam-
ination over wide areas for old stumps of the virgin forest, showed that
all of the large forms were found in alluvial soils and never by any chance
in the thin-soiled uplands.

These studies are being extended to include many of our native species
and arrangements have been made to increase the number of forms studied
of the species discussed in this paper.

The exact knowledge of the rate of growth of various species under
differing conditions is a matter of vital importance from the viewpoint of
wood-lot forestry. It is scarcely less far reaching in its application and of
searcely less economic significance than a knowledge of forest utilization.
If the conclusions here presented are warranted by the date very self-evi-
dent practical application necessarily follow. These, however, are not in-
cluded in the scope of this paper, but will be presented later.

Tue Micuitirnpa (Micuican) Sanp Dunes anp THEIR Fora.

STANLEY COULTER.

Nowhere is the struggle for a place in nature by plants more spectacular
or more severe than that with the sand dunes. The alignment of the op-
posing forces is so evident, their activity is so ceaseless, their modes of at-
tack so varied that one wonders that the plants ever succeed in fixing these
restless masses of sand. After the classic studies of Cowles upon the Dune
flora it would seem that little remains to be said, but to the botanist accus-
tomed to the placid plant life of mesophytic regions the struggle is irresist-
ibly fascinating and, as a rule, he is unable to resist the temptation of a
new consideration of some phases of the problem.

The region studied was a short stretch of beach dunes on the east shore
of Lake Michigan at a summer resort known as Michillinda, about twenty-
five miles north of Muskegon. That the region is exceptionally favorable
for such studies is evidenced by the fact that it is the place chosen by Dr.
Cowles for his classes when considering the problems presented by the
dune flora. ‘The study made was neither systematic nor exhaustive; it was
merely a part of a rest of three weeks after a summer school session. No
attempt was made to enumerate the constituent members of the flora or to
work out all of the factors determining the success or failure of the plant
invaders. The paper, therefore, touches only the more evident features of
the problem and treats even these in the line of suggestion rather than ex- °
planation.

The plants begin their struggle on what Cowles calls the middle beach,
a region beaten by the winter waves, but as a rule dry during the summer
months. The struggle here is almost hopeless and on the open stretches of
the beach the plants are extremely scattered. In the shelter of the drift
logs and debris, however, they are more numerous and may maintain a
precarious existence for some months. It is probably the area of greatest
stress. The fierce winter storms compel an absolute renewal of the struggle
each succeeding year, while the summer winds and sun make it possible
for only such plants as possess the most marked xerophytic characters to
maintain themselves. A severe Summer storm may overwhelm the beach,

123

killing all forms that have obtained a foothold, and the struggle must begin
all over. Such a storm swept the Michillinda beach for almost a week during
the past summer, blotting out absolutely the middle beach flora. In a week,
however, the brave plants began to show themselves again and to renew
the apparently hopeless struggle. The most notable member of this flora
was the succulent leaved erucifer, cakile edentula (Bigel.) Hook. The
adaptation in this case is plainly against the dessicating action of wind and
sun. The plant also is able to withstand, to a certain extent at least, a
sand covering of considerable thickness, forcing its way through it to the
surface apparently but little injured by its temporary burial. Its stubborn
erectness and unyielding rigidity are characters that at once serve to dis-
tinguish it from the other members of this flora.

More ninerous upon this stretch of beach is Cuphorbia polygonifolia L.
This prostrate spurge finds its protection in its close hugging of the sands
which are here always damp at a slight depth, whatever may be the sun’s
heat. A covering of sand does not seem to kill it, unless it is several inches
thick, new shoots emerging from the crown, finding their way to the surface
in a few days. In spite of these two species, the middle beach strikes one
as practically destitute of plants—and the wonder grows as the conditions
are studied that the few that do occur have found even a temporary lodg-
ment.

The upper beach and the active dune region present a much more varied
and consequently much more interesting flora. The opposing forces here
are the fierce rays of the sun, the almost constant winds and the shifting
sands. In high winds the mechanical action of the sands is very great,
often completely destroying well-established plants. These factors have led
to the development of the most pronounced xerophytie characters found in
this latitude, and this in spite of the fact that there is no scarcity of water
in the soil. Even after the long summer drought, the sand is moist at a
slight distance below the surface. ‘The most marked adaptations in this
region are those against the covering of the plant with sand, exposure of
roots by the shifting of the sand, excessive evaporation because of sun and
wind, and the mechanical action of the sand driven by storms. Practically
every device against these destructive agencies is here in evidence. They
are so well known that they need not be recited in this connection.

Most interesting, perhaps, are the provisions against submergence by
the sands. In the case of the poplars, willows and dogwoods, the sprouting
habit in connection with the habit of sending out roots from any node in

124

contact with the soil is sufficient protection, save in the most extreme cases.
These plants. therefore. while not strongly developed in the upper beach,
are rarely wanting on active dunes. The willows commonly found are
S. yuviatilis, gloucophyila and adenophylla. The dogwoods are C. stol-
onifera and Baileyi. The poplar is the cottonwood, P. deltoides. To the
botanist. the adaptation of these plants for such a position are self-evident,
but individual cases present continual variations. Nothing could more
clearly illustrate the extreme plasticity of these shrubby species than their
quick and sure response to these constantly varying factors.

These grasses lead in the attack upon the dunes. These
plants all arise from a single root stock.

In the case of the grasses, which are chiefly Andropogon, scoparius,
Ammophila arenaria, Calamovilfa longifolia, and Eleymus canadensis, there
is a quick setting of roots from the nodes when there is but a partial sub-
mergence, while the long, horizontal branching root stock is constantly
sending up new stools during the continuance of favorable conditions. The
first plants to obtain a foothold upon these shifting sands are usually the
grasses. From a single stool through the agency of the root stock there is
a rapid spread which covers a very considerable area. In various places
upon the most active portion of the dunes some one or more of these grasses
obtain a foothold and struggle fiercely to maintain the place they have
seized. So far as my personal observations go, the invasion of the dune is

125

made at its lower stretches, gradually creeping upward, until in a parti-
cularly favorable season the whole dune is fairly well covered with plants.
The binding together of the soil by the grasses. even for a short time, is
sufficient to permit the establishment of other forms, so that in places the
flora of the upper beach and active dune may be quite varied. On the upper
beach the most common of the plants are Artemisia caudata and A. Cana-
densis, while the attractive Carduus Pitcheri is scarcely less common. In
these plants the strong and long tap-root and dissected leaves serve as an
almost perfect protection against excessive evaporation and the mechanical

At the close of a favorable season the whole dune may be fairly well covered
with plants.

action of the sand in the case of high winds. In the case of the Artemisias
it was possible to observe in a considerable area, the perfection of the de-
fense the finely dissected leaves afford against the sand blasts of a storm
which lasted for nearly a week. Almost every other species in the area,
which lay open to the direct action of the wind-driven sand was completely
battered to pieces, while only about 15 per cent. of the Artemisias showed
any sign of having been subject to a long continued action of a destructive
force.

Upon the upper beach, also, is to be found in favored situations the
beach pea, Lathyrus maritimus, although in no instance was it at all a
dominant form. Upon the active dune is often to be found the frost grape,

126

Vitis cordifolia. Far more common, however, the common milk weed.
Asclepias Syriaca, the bug-seed, Corispermum hyssopifoliund and Puccoon,
Lithospormum Gmelini. This last is by far the most common of the groups,
consisting in many instances a large proportion of the plants. A golden
rod is not at all uncommon in such situations, but I am not certain what
species it is. TI am, however, confident it is not S. virgaurea gillmani, to
which it is referred by Dr. Cowles in “The Ecological Relations of the
Vegetation of the Sand Dunes of Lake Michigan.” In no two cases are the
conditions exactly similar, so that in spite of the paucity of species there is

At times the Artemisias are dominant plants over considerable areas.

no monotony. Different dominant species, differing proportions of those
occurring make each area «2 special study. if we add to these the varying
adaptations of the same species and the fact that at best any victory of the
plants is but apparent, we can understand something of the complexity of
the problem. The illustration on page 127 shows a large pine dying because
of an uncovering of its roots during the storm mentioned above.

The succulent type of annuals was not so strongly marked as I had ex-
pected, but dissected leaves, the profile position, inrolling of leaf blades, and
coverings of hairs seemed the dominant adaptations against the excessive
transpiration and doubtless also against the fierce heat of the sun. Against
the wind action the prostrate or trailing habit and great rigidity were the
prevailing adaptations among herbaceous plants. Against sand coverings,
nodal rooting and branching root stocks are almost universal among the

127

annuals. Where perennials have obtained a foothold, the long, thick tap-
root is usually sutticient to give a new lease of life. Against the mechanical
effects of the sand. the prostrate habit, the dissected leaves and at times

Any victory of the plants is but apparent. After years
of possession of the soil they may be dislodged by the shift-
ing of the soil under the action of the wind.

an extremely tough and resistant structure. ‘he first two are by far the
more common and apparently the more effective.

From the standpoint of the plant no situation can be more pitilessly
cruel than the stretches of white, restlessly shifting sand making up the
beaches and dunes. In a certain sense, no other situation furnishes ecologi-

128

cal problems of such apparent simplicity, but even here, as I have tried to
show, the problem is really one of extreme complexity. If in any measure
this paper serves to indicate how utterly without significance much so-
called ecological study really is, and to stimulate to werk along these lines
that is really analytic, that recognizes the fact that no ecological problem is
in reality simple and needs long-continued. oft-repeated observation and re-
flection before generalizations are made, it will have a distinct value quite
apart from the specific subject discussed.

129

Parasitic Puant DisEASES REPORTED FOR INDIANA.

FRANK D. KERN.

The following summary of plant diseases in Indiana has been made up
from information which has been accumulating during the past few years
at the Botanical Laboratory of the Indiana Hxperiment Station.

In this list only the more important diseases have been considered
from the standpoint of the cultivator. 'The information at hand is far from
complete, since the diseases are inyariably reported by common names, and
as it is impossible to investigate or verify each case there is a probability
that disturbances in growth and health doe not always have the proper
causes assigned. An effort has been made to classify the diseases according
to their pathological effects, fifty-six in all being discussed. Such a group-
ing is diflicult, owing to the lack of knowledge concerning the exact manner
in which many of the parasites act.

Before taking up the detailed account it will be of interest from the
point of view of the mycologist to consider the parasites which are held
responsible for the various diseased conditions of root, stem, leaf and fruit.
Out of fifty species under discussion forty-five are fungi, five bacteria, and
one a slime-nould. Three species are causes for two separate diseases each,
while three have no cause assigned, thus bringing the total up to fifty-six,
the number selected for consideration by this paper. The fungus parasites
are divided among thirty-two genera belonging to classes as follows: As-
comycetes, nine; Basidiomycetes, nine; Phycomycetes, one; Fungi Imper-
fecii, thirteen. Under the general term of Fungi Imperfecti are included 2
miscelianeous lot of forms whose life histories are imperfectly understood ;
some may have no other stages, while others may have connections not
yet discovered. Comparatively recently three which were formerly classed
here have had their perfect stages identified and have been transferred to
the ciass Ascomycetes. These are the Bitter-rot fungus of the apple, the
Scab-fungus of the apple and pear and the Brown-rot fungus of the peach
and pium. Jhe bacterial parasites are divided among two genera, both be-
longing to the same family, Bacieriaceae.

9—A. OF SCIENCE.

130

The enumeration of specific diseases is as follows:

i. Root diseases, affecting abscrption of food materials—

Crown gali (cause uncertain). On fruit trees, small fruits, known
to occur; extent of injury not reported.

Root-rot (Fungi not identified). On fruit trees; troublesome in
orchards, principally in southern part.

Club-root (Myxomycetes, Plasmodiaphora Crassicae). On cab-
bages and other cruciferae. Distribution not known. Re-
ported from market gardening regions about larger cities.

II. Stem diseases, affecting ascent of sap and transpiration—

Tire-blight (Bacillus amyloyorous). On apples, pears and quinces
in all parts of the State. Very destructive and difficult to
control.

Black-knot (Plowrightia morbosa). On plums and cherries. Com-
mon ail ove: State on plum trees. Cherries less injured by it.

Black-rust (Puccinia graminis). Qn wheat, chiefly, but attacking
also other grains and grasses. Occurs everywhere. Extent of
injury in any particular season usually dependent upon
weather.

Black-rot (Pseudomonas compestris). On cabbage, cauliflower and_
related plants. Affects leaves also, and finally entire head.
Very destructive in some localities.

Ill. Wood diseases, affecting absorption and transfer of water—

Wilt (Bacillus tracheiphilus). On melons and cucumbers. <A com-
mon ind injurious trouble affecting melons, especially in
southern countries. Few reports concerning cucumbers; this
crop of much less importance.

Blight (Bacillus salanacearum). On tomatoes. Few local reports
of this. May be due to other causes than bacteria,

lV. Bark diseases, affecting transpiration chiedy—

Canker (Spaerapsis malorum, Bacillus amylovorus, Glomerella

rufomaculaus). On apple trees. Cankers may be due to the

parasites mentioned or otbers. Occurrence of any except the
first mentioned has not been verified.

Asparagus rust (Puccinia asparagi). On asparagus. Bad locally
in northwestern portion of State.

Authracuose (Gleosporium venetum), On blackberries and
‘aspberries. Often very destructive.

131

V. leaf diseases. affecting assimilation and transpiration—

Rusts, caused by uvredineae (Gymmnosporangium sup.). On apple,
pear, quince and red cedar. Not reported as very destructive
on cultivated apples: common on wild crabs or thorns.

(Puccinia rubigo-vera.) On wheat. This is the leaf rust and is
usuatiy common, but not especially injurious.

(Puececinia graminis.) On wheat and other cereals. This is the
stem rust and only rarely occurs to any extent on the leaves.

(Puccinia caronata.) On oats. Occurs very commonly on leaves,
but is not accountable for losses of any extent.

(Uromyces trifalii.) On clover. Not known to be of much eco-
nomic importance, though quite common.

(Puecinia poarum.) On blue-grass, often in lawns.

(Puccinia sarghi.) On corn. Very widespread and common, but
not especially injurious. :

(Gymnoconia interstitialis.) On blackberry and raspberry, called
the orange leaf rust. Has a perennial mycelium, but mani-
fests itself only in the leaves. Common and distructive.

(KKuehneola albida.) On blackberry and raspberry. First noticed
this season. Not of importance.

(Uromyces appendiculatus.) On beans. Extent and damage un-
known.

(Uromyces caryaplylacearum.) On carnations in greenhouses.

(Puccinia chrysanthemi.) On chrysanthemums in greenhouses.

Spots and Biights—-

(Phylosticta spp.) On apple, often causing premature defatiation.

(Cylmdrosporium padi.) On cherry and plum. Not uncommon.

(Septoria ribes.) On gooseberry and currant. Extent unknown;
crop of minor importance.

(Septoria lycospersici.) On tomato. Very injurious in some lo-
calities.

(Cercospora beticola.) On beets. Two reports have been received.

(Atternariae brassicae nigressceus.) On muskmellons. This is
known as the leaf blight and is very injurious in some lo-
calities.

(Calletobuchum Lagenarium.) On melons. Known as_ anth-
raenace, and while affecting leaves, usually attacks stems and
eatyledons of young plants. Reported by several horticul-
turists.

Powdery mildew (Spaerothaera moro-uyae). On gooseberry. Ex-
tent of damage unkown.

Powdery mildew ‘Podosphaera oxyacanthae). On cherry. Ex-
tent of damage unknown.

Leaf curl (Exoascus defarmaus). On peach. Usually quite
prevalent.

Early blight (Alternaria solani). On potato. Usually prevalent,
doing considerable damage. :

Late blight (Phytophthora infestaus). On potato. Present to
some extent; usually very destructive.

Black-rot (Pseudomonas compestrio). On cabbage and closely re-
lated crops.

Fruit, Seed and Tuber diseases, affecting crop’s economic value, di-

rectly—

Apple rots. ripe or bitter (Glomerella rufomaculaus) ; Apple rots,
black (Sphaerapsis malorum). Usually common and causes
of considerable losses.

Brown rot (Scleratinia fructigena). On peaches and plums
chiefiy, often causing a loss of half the crops.

Seab (Venturia inaequalis). On apple: very common and injurious.
(Venturia pyrina). On pear; prevalent, but not especially
prevalent. (Cladosperium carphyllum). On peach; bad on
some varieties.

Black rot (Gnignardia bidwelli). On grape. Widespread and
injurious.

Fruit rot (cause uncertain). On tomato. Very injurious in some
localities.

Flyspeck and sooty blotch (Leptothyrum and Phyllachara spp.).
On apple, often affecting a considerable per cent. of the crop.

Smuts (Ustilago leae). On corn; widespread, sometimes causing
bad losses. (Ustilago avenae.) On oats; usually bad; losses
underestimated. (Ustilago tritici.) On wheat; so-called loose
smut; usually prevalent. (Tilletia foetaus.) On wheat; so-
called stinking smut; usually prevalent.

Wheat scab (Fusarium culmorum). On wheat; usually more or
less abundant; sometimes xccountable for heavy losses.

White mold of corn (Fusarium sp.). Very abundant in some locali-
ties during present and past seasons.

133

Potato scab (Vospora scabies). Occurs quite generally over the
State.

Brown rot of potato (Bacillus solanacearum). Often the cause of
considerable losses in al] parts of State.

Black rot of sweet potato (Ceratocyetis finbriata). Distribution
and extent of injury unreported.

sat

Selevotinia fructigena (ascus stage) showing apothecia about mummied peach.

154

NoTES ON THE OCCURRENCE OF SCLEROTINIA FRUCTIGENA.
FRANK D. KeErw.

The rotting of the peach and pium fruit at the beginning of the ripening
period is a rather familiar occurrence. Soft, brown spots appear, which
usually grow until the whole fruit becomes rotten and finally shrivels up,
becoming mummified. Twigs, leaves and flowers may also be attacked and
exhibit discolored areas.

The rot is caused by a fungus, doubtless best known as Monilia fructi-
gene, a name given it by Persoon' in 1801. That it was simply the conidial
form of some ascomycetous species, was strongly suspected by several inves-
tigators and Schroeter* was even confident enough to transfer it to the
genus Sclerotinia in 1893. This. however, remained a mere assumption

until 7902, when Norton® collected the apothecia at several localities in
Maryland, and established, by means of cultures, their relation to the coni-
dial form.

Aithough the perfect stage had been diligently searched for before
this was the first time it had ever been reported. Because this form has
been so rarely seen, and because of the economic importance of the fungus
in the other phase of its life history, it was with unusual delight and inter-
est that the apothecia were discovered in the spring of 1906 in Indiana.
Two collections were made, both at Lafayette, and by Prof. J. C. Arthur,
on buried peaches, under trees in his garden, April 21; another by Dr. E.
W. Olive and the writer, on buried plums, in a trash heap on a vacant lot,
May 3 The earlier collection was in perfect condition, while the latter
was somewhat dried. Both discharged clouds of spores when first dis-
turbed. and when jarred even after partial drying made several subse-
quent discharges.

Only the mummied fruits which were buried or partially covered bore
apothecia. On the pluins one to three or four arose from a single fruit,
while on the peaches as high as thirty or forty appeared about the sides of

1 Persoon, Syn. Fung., 693, 1801.

2 Schroeter, Krypt. Fl. Schles, 37:67, 1893.
°J.B.S. Norton, Irons. Acad. Sci., Sb. Louis, 12:91-97, pls. 18-21, 1902.

135

one fruit. (Illustration.) The disks are light brown, at first companulate,
becoming cup-shaped, averaging about one-half to three-fourths of a centi-
meter broad when full grown. The stipes are comparatively slender and
usually about one to two centimeters long, where that is sufficient to bring
the disks above the surface.

In every case there was reason to suppose that the fruits bearing the
ascus stage were not from the crop of the immediate preceding season, but
that they were one year older. In a receut conversation, Prof. Norton con-
firmed this opinion. Schellenberg* has found this to be true, also, of two
other species of Sclerotinia in Europe. The length of the period required
for the development of the apothecia is doubtless the factor which is re-
sponsible for their scarcity, since it affords so much time and opportunity
for the mummied fruits to be destroyed or removed from the vicinity of the
trees. ‘he above coilection in a trash heap shows that development takes
place wherever the dried rotted fruits are covered by soil or humus a suf-
ficient length of time, but in such a location it is only by accident that they
would be discovered.

While the ascoporic form is so excedingly rare, the conidial form is
just the opposite. As the cause of the brown rot of peaches and plums,
it is the most common and destructive enemy of these crops.

In 1905 it was estimated that brown rot caused a loss of one-fourth
of the peach crop in the southern counties of the State. In 1906 the rot
has been reported from twenty-six counties representing all parts of the
State. Estimates as to the amount of damage vary from 10 to 50 per cent.
of the entire crop. In the northern half of the State the early varieties
seemed to sustain almost double the loss of the later ones. This is an il-
lustration of the rapidity with which the rot spreads when the weather
conditions are favorable. The fungus is dependent for a start at the be-
ginning of a season chiefly upon conidiospores produced upon the mum-
mied fruits lying on the ground or hanging in the trees. Warm, moist
weather in August, at the ripening time, caused such a production of coni-
diospores from these mummy fruits that the fungus spread and caused
more notabie effects at that time than later, when the weather conditions
were less favorable.

Plums in all parts of the State have been attacked during the present

season, and a loss amounting in many instances to 75 per cent. of the crop
has been suffered.

+H. C.Schellenberg, Ueber Scheratinia Mespili und S. Ariae, Centr. f. Bak. 17:188-202,
pls. 1-4, 1906.

136

All of the facts thus far presented, which pertain to the life-histo: y of
the brown rot fungus and its methods of passing through unfavorable sea-
sons, emphasize the importance of collecting and destroying the so-called
mummied fruits as a means of control. If these infected fruits are allowed
to remain hanging to the trees or upon the surface of the ground the conid-
jal stage begins its destruction at once the following season, while if they
are permitted to become buried beneath the trees, ascospores form the seec-
ond season which are capable of producing in turn the conidial stage.

137

Appitions To InpIANA Ftiora No. 3.

CHas. C. DEAM.

(The determinations have been made: by competent authorities, and
specimens are deposited in my herbarium.)

Paspalum Muhlenbergii Nash.
Crawford County, July 11, 1899. In waste place near Wyandotte eave.
Panicum praecosius Hitchcock No. 1270.
Steuben County, July 23, 1906. On top of dry wooded gravelly hill on
east side of Hog-back Lake.
Festuca Shortii Kunth.
Allen County, June 3, 1906; Brown County, May 23, 1906; Fountain
County, June 4, 1905; Posey County, May 25, 1906.
Carex stricta angustata (Boott.) Bailey.
Allen County, June 3, 1906. In slough along St. Joe river east of Rob-
inson park,
Carex Haydeni Dewey.
Fountain County, June 5, 1905.
Carex pedicillata (Dewey) Britton.
Blackford County, April 29, 1906; Steuben County, May 28, 1905.
Carex rosea radiata Dewey.
Allen County, June 38, 1906.
Carex interior Bailey No. 980.
Porter County, June 16, 1900 (collected by L. M. Umbach); Wells
County, June 1, 1906.
Carex canescens Li
Fountain County, June 4, 1905.
Carex canescens disjuncta Fern.
Steuben County, May 28, 1905.
Carex siccata Dewey.
Steuben County, May 28, 1905.
Carex mirabilis Dewey.
Fountain County, June 5, 1905.

138

Carex festucacea brevior Fernald No. 1046.
Allen County, June 6, 1906.
Carex Bicknellit Britton.
Steuben County, June 16, 1903.
Batrachium longirostris (Godr.) F. Schultz.
Allen County, June 3, 1906; Wells County, June 13, 1899. No doubt
inost of the plants named trichophyllum (Chaix.) Bosch. should be
referred to this species.

Fragaria Virginiana Greyana (Vilm.) Rydb.
Biackford County, June 22, 1905; Franklin County, May 13, 1906;

Marion County, April 30, 1905: Wells County, June 16, 1901.
Viola couspersa Reich.

Wells County, May 11, 1906; Steuben County, May 13, 1906. It is quite
probable that what has been passing as Viola Labradonica Shrank
should be referred to this species.

Viola pallens (Banks) Brainard.

Blackford County, April 29, 1906; Wells County, June 1, 1906. Viola
blanda Willd. is often associated with this species and possibly
mistaken for it.

Rhamnus alnifolia L’Her.
Steuben County, August 1, 1903.
Campanula uliginosa Rydberg.

Nobie County, July 21, 1904; Steuben County, August 11, 1903; Wells
County, July 6, 1902. All specimens of Cumpanula aparinoides
Pursh I have examined should be referred to this species, although
aparinoides Pursh may occur in Indiana also.

Lactuca Saligna L. No. 1389.

Blackford County, August 3, 1906. This species was taken just south

of Hartford, aleng interurban right of way. a
Bidens comosa (A. Gray) Wiegand.
Blackford County, September 8, 1905: Wells County. September 21,

i902.

139

Tue Lummi InpIans.

ALBERT B. RraGan.

The Lummi Indians occupy the Lummi Peninsula just across Belling-
ham Bay west trom the City of Bellingham, Washington. The peninsula,
containing about two townships, is their reservation. They number in
all about three hundred and seventy-five, most of whom are half-breeds.
These resemble the mulattoes of the south very much as to physical ap-
pearance and color; their hair, of course, is black and straight. The full-
breeds are nearly all o!d Indians, most of whom are blind. They are all
fishing Indians by nature. Formerly they lived almost wholly by fishing
for salmon and trout; but since they took their allotments some years ago
they live on their farms and till the ground most of the year, fishing only
in August and September. At this time they sell fish to the canneries and
also dry it for their own use. In old times they made flour from the fern
root, but now the white-man’s flour has taken its place. Their farming is
very well done and their houses are often better than those of their white
neighbors, though usually not kept so neat inside. The tribe as known to-
day is made up of Nooksack, Lummi, Snowhommish and British Columbia
Indians. ‘lhey belong to the Salish linguistic stock, and now all talk the
Lummi branch of that language. When that fails they use the Chenook
jargon as a means of communication. 'The young people all speak English.
They are advanced in civilization almost to our standard; many of them
even take daily newspapers.

In old times these Indians practiced all the ceremonies known to their
linguistic group. They waged war for the sole purpose of capturing slaves.
They flattened their babies’ foreheads so that a modern hat fits them better
cross-wise than the way we wear it. They had mortuary dance cere-
monies. They believed in the superhuman power of medicine men. They
slashed themselves with knives and thrust their arms through with arrows
and elk bones in the medicine ceremonies. They had give-away dance feasts
at which the man who gave away most was made chief. And they carved
or painted their special dreams or visions (called in Chenook ‘‘ttomanawis” )
in conspicuous places in their “plank” houses, usually on totem poles, as a

140

mark of good luck or a guide to their lives. A carving of this sort is now
to be found on each of the totem-posts of an old give-away, feast dance hall
(“potlatch” house), now in ruins at the Portage on the reservation. An in-
terpretation of this totem-tomanawis was given me as follows by Mr. Mc-
Clusky (Indian), who also made me the copy of it given here:

“Chief Cha-we-tsot once owned the ‘potlatch’ house at the Portage.
The drawings on the totem-posts are his ‘tomanawis.’ The sun, carrying a
parcel of valuables in each hand, came to him in a dream and said: ‘Your

SUN

IR
ARM

To-ma-na-wis of Chief Cha-me-tsot.

storehouses (or trunks) will always be full. You will therefore give two
more feasts than the average chief; custom had established the rule that
the ordinary chief should give three feasts in a lifetime. So Chief Cha-we-
tsot built the ‘potlatch’ house and carved his ‘tomanawis’ on its totem-
posts. He then gave five feasts, two more than the average, as the sun
in the vision had commanded him.”

These Indians are now Catholics and all attend church every Sunday.
When the priest is present he gives his sermon first in English and then in
Chenook. When the priest is not present, the Indians pass around within
the church from left to right, while they sing and pray a few minutes in

141

Indian before each or the passion pictures, the altar, and the image of Christ
and of the Virgin Mary. Then the quietly leave the church, and, after
eating their picnic dinner, go to the Sunday ball game.

Their government school was abandoned this year and their reserva-
tion will propably be thrown open this winter.

142

THe MAMMALIAN REMAINS OF THE DoNALDSON CAVE.

WaALrer L. FAHN.

While occupying the Donaldson Farm Fellowship in Zoology in Indiana
University, the writer has had occasion to make frequent trips into the
Donaldson Cave, situated about three miles southeast of Mitchell, Indiana.
On one of these trips bones of small mammals were noticed and diligent
collecting on that and subsequent occasions has resulted in the finding of
identifiable remains of 244 individuals. representing eleven species. The
occurrence and relative abundance of some of these species is of consider-
able interest and this occasion is taken to place all on record.

The list follows

1. Didelphis virginiana Kerr. Opossum.

A portion of one skull found on a gravel deposit in a side passage

leading off from the “big room’ of the cave.
2. Odocoileus virginianus (Boddaert). Virginia deer.

A vertebra found not far from the preceding specimen has been
identified for me by Mr. J. M. Gidley, Vertebrate Paleontologist
of the National Museum, as the fourth cervical of this species.
It was doubtless carried in, either by a flood or by some ear-
niverous animal, in the days when deer were plentiful in In-
diana, and since that time has lain undisturbed in the dark-

ness of the cave.

Sylvilagus flovridanus (Allen). Rabbit.

Oo

Remains of three individuals found.

4. Peromyscus leucopus (Rafinesque). White-footed mouse.
Mandibles of four individuals found.

Mlicrotus pinetorum (Le Conte). Pine mouse.

Ot

Four of this species also.
6. Blarina brevicauda (Say). Large shrew.
One skull.

143

7. Pipistrellus subflavus (¥. Cuvier). Georgian bat.
Partial skulls and mandibles representing eight individuals of this
species were found at various points in or near the “big room.”
8. Lasiurus cinereus (Beauvois). Hoary bat.
This species is widely distributed, but everywhere rare. The find-
ing of two partial skulls and skeletons adds this locality to the
two previously recorded for Indiana.

9, Lasiurus borealis (Miiller). Red bat.

Remains of this species were far more abundant than of any other.
More or less eomplete skulls and skeletons of 203 individuals
were found. ‘rhe abundance of the species will be discussed
later.

10. Myotis subulatus i{Say). Say bat.
One skull can be unquestionably referred to this species.
11. Myotis lucifuygus (Ge Conte). Tittle brown bat.

Nine skulls could be positively referred to this species. Hight
others were probably J/. lucifugus, but were too badly broken
to determine with certainty whether they belonged to this or
to the last preceding species.

It will be noted that the above list contains a large number (2035) of
specimens of the red bat and but few (17) of the little brown bat. If we
turn to the living representatives of the two species this abundance is ex-
actly reversed. Mr. W. S. Blatchley informs me that the proportion of the
two species in Wyandotte Cave is about 1 to 1,000, the larger number being
the brown. Mr. A. M. Banta, who has had a very extensive acquaintance
with the cave fauna of Monroe and Lawrence counties, is of the opinion that
the red bat never enters caves at all. and that, though common above
ground, it is less abundant than the brown species. My own observations
are in complete accord with those of Mr. Banta.

The period at which this change in relative abundance has taken place
can not be determined accurately from the evidence now at hand. Evident-
ly it has been within recent geological times, since many of the bones were
found in places where they would have been destroyed by changes which
must have taken place during some receiut epoch. On the other hand
many of them were found partiaily covered with fragments of stone which
have gradually weathered away from the larger masses, and this would
seem to indicate that at least a part of the bones are many years, possibly

144

centuries, old. For the most part they seem to lie where they fell when
the animals dropped dead from the places where they clung to the roof of
the cave. ‘This seems to indicate that they died, one at a time, from natural
causes.

The above facts seem to warrant two conclusions: (1) The red bat is
less abundant than formerly: (2) it has changed its habits and no longer

frequents caves as it did formeriy.

145

Some Nores on Inptana Brirps.

Amos W. Pur Ler.

Nyctea nyctea (Snowy Owl).—One reported by Louis A. Test, upon
authority of J. Keegan, as having been taken near Washington, Daviess
County, Indiana, November 5, 1904.

I saw one in Deschler’s cigar store, Lahr House, Lafayette, which
was procured by Geo. M. Timberlake from a man who shot it about fifteen
miles south of Lafayette in the winter of 1901-02. Beasley and Parr, taxi-
dermists, Lebanon, report that they mounted this specimen in November
or early in December of 1901. Snowy Owls have been more generally dis-
tributed over the State the present winter and more individuals have been
reported than ever before since records have been kept.

November 25, 1905, while at Hammond, Lake County, Mr. LeGrand
Tl. Meyer told me that two fine specimens of this bird had been taken near
that place a few days before. One of these we saw afterwards in the
possession of Mr. Schmid, who mounted it and who also had the other ~
one at the same time in his work room. Mr. Meyer has kindly supplied
me with the following data of these, and three other birds of the same
species taken in that vicinity:

First—A man by the name of Johnson killed one on November 12,
1905, about a mile and a half southeast of Tolleston, Indiana, in the gravel
pits.

Second.—F red Burg shot one on the lake front of Lake Michigan, near
Indiana Harbor, on November 19, 1905, which is now in the possession of
Mr. Louis Freeze of Hammond.

Third—Wm. J. Thompson killed one near Wolf Lake ice houses in
Hammond, on November 25, 1905. This one was on the top of a telegraph
pole when killed.

Fourth.—One was killed on Wolf Lake, near Lake Michigan, in Ham-
mond, by a person unknown to me, which is now in the possession of Louis
Mankowski of this city, which was killed November 23, 1905.

Fifth.—At the time it was killed there was another one with it which
the hunter was unable to secure.

10—A, oF SCIENCE,

146

The specimens Mr. Schmid had were numbers one and four,’ given
above.

Beasley and Parr, Lebanon, Indiana, have mounted quite a number of
these birds recently. From information kindly supplied by them regarding
specimens in their hands I have been able, through extended correspond-
ence, to collect some interesting facts regarding this dispersion of these
owls over Indiana this winter. They have been reported from the follow-
ing counties: Allen, Benton, Fountain, Hancock, Johnson, Lake, Marion,
Miami, Montgomery, Noble, Shelby, Sullivan, Warren.

H. A. Dinius of Fort Wayne reports that two Snowy Owls were
observed on the Godfrey, Indiana, Reservation, west of that city, December
22, 1905.

One was shot by Clem Woodhams in Bolivar township, Benton County,
November 10, 1905. The same gentleman informs me that one was seen
north of Otterbein in that county about December 24, 1905.

One of two owls seen was shot nine miles east of Fowler, in Benton
County, November 4, 1905, by a corn husker working for Thomas East-
burn. It was wounded and brought alive to Fowler. The second one was
taken afterwards. They are reported to be male and female. They were
sent by J. F. Warner of Fowler to be mounted, who reports on January
4, 1906, another one observed some days before at Harl Park.

J. W. Crouch of Fowler has a Snowy Owl that was killed by Nelson
Hendricks five miles west of that place about February 12, 1906.

J. R. Opp has a specimen taken four miles west of Otterbein De-
cember 21, 1905. Another was shot near there on December 4, 1905.

One shot November 29, 1905, two miles southeast of Mellott, in Foun-
tain County, by John Whalen, just after dusk, after it had killed two old
hens. Mounted for Red Men’s Hall at Mellott.

One shot one mile northwest of Fortville. Hancock County, by Ottis
Shepherd. Reported by David Fair of Fortville.

John Hammer took a Snowy Owl about six miles south of Franklin,
Johnson County. It is now owned by 8S. B. Hecles.

Gus Habich, Indianapolis, received two of these owls recently. Both
were killed about December 1, 1905. One was shot by William Stroble,
near Shelby, Lake County; the other by Frank Hoffman, below Shelby-
ville, in Shelby County, Indiana.

One killed by Isom Kelsey, two and one-half miles southwest of
Shelbyville, November 30, 1905,

147

One killed by John ‘Tucker, four miles north of Fairland, Shelby
County, about November 16, 1905. Owned by D. H. Tucker.

One owned by Fletcher M. Noe, Indianapolis, he informs me was
taken near Southport, Marion County, Indiana, December 20, 1905. He
reports that six or seven have been brought in to him the present fall and
winter.

One, a male, killed by Frank Clark, in Brie Township, Miami County,
December 17, 1905. ‘The next day a female was killed in that vicinity by
Rawley Runnell. ‘The first one was mounted for the First National Bank
of Peru. Reported by Joseph H. Shirk.

One shot three miles northwest of Linden, Montgomery County, by
George Ciderdin, November 22, 1905. Owned by J. M. Hose of Linden.

One killed near Darlington, Montgomery County, November 21, 1905,
by N. Royer. Reported by S. G. Kersey.

One reported by Henry A. Link to have been killed near Avilla, Noble
County, Indiana, a few days prior to December 14, 1905.

W. 8S. Blatchley, State Geologist, has a photograph, taken the past fall,
of a bird of this species, in the pessession of J. W. Sampson, Farmersburg,
Sullivan Ceunty, Indiana. Mr. Sampson writes that another was killed
at Blackhawk, about six miles east of Farmersburg, about the same time.

John Morgan killed one in Warren County, December 21, 1905.

A fine specimen, seen in the window of the Starr Piano Co., Rich-
mond, Indiana, was killed by Mr. Edgar Moon, near Bowersville, Greene
County, Ohio, November 8, 1905. Reported by J. E. Perkins.

Mr. Louis A. Test of Lafayette reports, upon the authority of Mr. L.
J. Owens of that city, the capture of one by Mr. Carl Townsley at Chal-
mers, Indiana, about November 25, 1906.

Mr. Joseph i. Honecker reports seeing six of these owls near Oak For-
est, Franklin County, December 15, 1905.

Mr. J. W. Crouch informs me that a Snowy Owl, almost perfectly
white, was killed November 11 or 12, 1906, at Fowler, Benton County, and
- brought to him. This is interesting as giving an early record for this
year from the same county where a number were found in 1905.

Elanoides forficatus (ULinn.) Swallow-tailed Kite-——On September 3,
1906, one was seen one mile south of Brookville, Ind.—(Jos. F. Honecker.)

Falco peregrinus anatum (Bonap.) Duck Brice A pair were found
nesting in an old stone quarry near Laurel, Ind., April 28, 1906. The two
eggs were placed in a small cavity on the bare rock on a shelf ten or

148

twelve feet from the ground. About them were bones and feathers of
pigeons, chickens and ducks. The eggs are now in the collection of Jos. F.
Honecker, Oak Forest, Ind., by whom they were found and reported.

Eetopistes nrvigratorius. Passenger Pigeon; Wild Pigeon.—Joseph F.
Honecker reports seeing a Wild Pigeon, with young, near Haymond, in
Franklin County, in the spring of 1905. 'The same person says: “On May
i8, 1906. I had the good fortune to find three nests of the Wild Pigeon
about one half mile east of Oak Forest, Franklin County, Indiana. The
nests were about eight to fifteen feet from the ground in a small elm tree.
Two of them contained two eggs each and one contained two young only
a few days old. I saw the six adult birds at one time, and observed them
until the young were grown. They were last seen together in a flock, July

53. There is another record of the capture of a specimen in Shelby County.

Meleagris gallopavo. (Linn.) Wild Turkey.—According to Mr. E. J.
Chansler, a few are still to be found in the southern part of Knox County,
Ind.

Dendroica vigorsii. Pine Warbler.—C. P. Smith, during the summer of
1904, visited the sand dunes near Michigan City. There among the pine
trees he found Pine Warblers. They were fairly common June 19-23.
Though the birds were in full song, he did not find the nest. He de-
scribes the song as very similar to that of a Chipping Sparrow; in fact, so
similar that he was deceived by it at first. The preceding summer (1903)
the same observer, while studying the biology of the State Forest Reserve.
at Henryville, saw Pine Warblers three or four times among the pine-
covered “knobs.” The last of July he found adults feeding young that were
practically full grown. ‘hey doubtless nested there.

Pelidna alpina pacifica. Red-backed Sandpiper; Aremican Dunlin.—A
specimen taken October 11, 1905, from a flock of shore birds at a pond in
Marion County, north of Indianapolis, was presented to me by Philip Baker.
This is the first fall record for this vicinity.

Aegialitis meloda circumcincta. Belted Piping Plover.—A fine group of
these birds, with four eggs, in the collection of the Chicago Academy of
Sciences, was taken at Millers, Indiana, June 13, 1905 (F. M. Woodruff).

Numenius borealis. Eskimo Curlew.—There are few recorded speci-
mens of this rare migrant from Indiana. It, therefore, is of interest to
learn from Mr. J. H. ‘Fleming, Toronto, Ont., that he has one marked
Chalmers, Ind., male, April 19, 1890(?).

Phalacrocoraxz dilophas. Double-crested Cormorant.—Mr. Roman

149

Hichstodt of Michigan City has a specimen taken by him inside the break-
water there, the last of November, 1902. No others of this species were
seen.

Sula bassana. Gannet.—A few months ago I was taken to see a bird
of this species in the store of Roman Wichstodt. Michigan City, Ind. It

150

was In immature fall plumage, as determined by the U. S. Biological Sur-
vey, to which a photograph was sent. The bird was killed, according to the
owner, on Lake Michigan, in November, 1904, about two miles from Mich-
igan City. It was said to be unlike avything before seen in that vicinity.

Oceanodroma castro. (Oceanodroma cryptoleucura Ridgw.) Hawaiian
Petrel—A specimen ‘of this rare species, whose distribution seems to be
almost world wide, was given to me by Alden M. Hadley of Monrovia,
Ind. He obtained it from Mr. N. H. Gano, who, on June 15, 1902, found
it Huttering in a wheelbarrow iu his yard at Martinsville, Ind. He picked
up the bird, but it soon died. Its stomach was entirely empty and it had
evidently died of hunger and exhaustion. The bird was sent to Mr. Hadley,
who preserved the skin. It was recognized as a petrel, and the species was
kindly determined by Dr. C. W. Richmond of the Smithsonian Institution.
Five specimens of this bird, from its collection, were later sent me for

examination. The following notes and measurements in inches are given:

cat.No.| Sex. | Locality. Date. | Collector. Wing.| Tail. Tarsus. Tail.

| | | |

| | | | = — =

| | | | | |
132764 | o | Galapagos...... | April 4, 1891 | C.H.Townsend.| 6.125) ey .937 | Slightly forked.
189861 | © | Maderia........| Sept. 12,1902 |............... 5.750} 3.000) .937 | Much worn.
189860 |..... Maderia........| Oct. 14,1902 |...............| 6.500) 3.555} .987 | Very slightly forked.
115461) Sco an walidhonl eth ania | Knudsen.......| 5.750 3.968] 937 | Nearly square.
154436 | ? | Wash., D.C.. Aug. 29, 1893 | W. Palmer. .... | 6.250 3.125; .937 | Nearly square.

Martinsville, Ind.| June 15,1902 | N. H. Gano. ...| 6.000) 3.500} .937

151

Bioop PRESSURE IN MaN.

G. E. HorrMan,

(Abstract. )

The paper consists of a tabulation of the readings of blood pressure
in 220 men with age, day and hour of day, mental condition, and the con-
dition of arteries, heart and kidneys; with conclusions as to what factors
influence and are influenced by the blood pressure in man.

As the subjects were unfamiliar with the procedure it itself increased
the blood pressure in most cases so that the readings are high for them.
The highest, taking the systolic as most reliable, was 270 in an old man
with beady arteries; the lowest, SS; thirteen were above 200; six were
below 100; the averages for the series was 134 mmg Hg by the Rivi-Rocci
mercurial sphygmomanometer, Stanton’s form.

Age, by the changes in the blood vessels, is the most constant factor in
change of blood pressure, which increases with age; the condition of the
arteries is a determining factor; the more rigid their walls the higher
the blood pressure; all with high pressure have rigid arteries; coincidently,
easts and albumen occurred in the urine, indicative of lesion in the kid-
neys. Valvular lesion of the heart lessening its efficiency raises the sys-
tolic pressure.

In stupor invariably the blood pressure was low, as in the cases of
catalepsy, which gave the low records; likewise in dementia the blood
pressure is relatively low; also in maniacal conditions it is decreased, ap-
proaching its normal with recovery; and contrawise the blood pressure is
raised in melancholia and in states marked with delusions of persecution ;
in general paresis it varies according to the mental condition. This corre-
spondence of mental condition to blood pressure is tolerably uniform,

INDEX.

ABBOTT, GEORGE A., 101,104.
Annual Meeting, Program of the, 20.
Annual Meeting, The twenty-second, 22.

BIRDS, SOME NOTES ON. INDIANA,
145.

Blood Pressure in Man, 151.

Breeze, Fred J., 51.

Brick, The Coefficient of Expansion of, 108.

Butler, Amos W., 145.

By-Laws, 13.

COMMITTEES, 1906-1907, 9.

Conjugate Functions and Canonical Trans-
formations, 93.

Constitution, 11.

Contents, Table of, 4.

Correspondents, List of Foreign, 19.

Coulter, Stanley, 122, 114.

DEAM, CHARLES C., 187.

Diseases, Parasitic Plant, 129.

Donaldson Cave, The Mammalian Remains
of, 142.

EVANS, P.N., 98.

FLORA OF INDIANA, ADDITIONS TO
THE, 187.

GOSS, W. F. M., 71.

HAHN, WALTER L., 142.

Hatt, W. K., 110.

Hessler, Robert, 23.

Hotfman, G. E., 151.

Hydrolysis, a Simple Method of Measur
ing, 101.

Hygiene, The Newer, 82.

INDIANS, THE LUMMI, 139.

Invariants, Concerning Differential, 85.

Ionization of the Successive Hydrogens of
Orthophosphorie Acid, 104.

KERN, FRANK D., 129, 184.

MANWARING, WILFRED H., 82.
Medicine, The Evolution of in Indiana, 23.
Meeting, The Spring, 22.

Meeting, Program of the Annual, 20.
Meeting, The Twenty-second Annual, 22.
Members, 14.

OFFICERS, 1906-1907, 8.

PAPERS READ, LIST OF, 20.

Parasitic Plant Diseases, 129.

Park, A State Natural, 51.

Publication of Reports and Papers, An act
to provide for, 5.

REAGAN, ALBERT B., 139.

Reinforced Conerete, Experimental Stud-
ies in, 77.

Rothrock, David A., 85, 98.

SALT LIME, NOTES ON, 95.

Sand Dunes, The Michigan and their
Flora, 122.

Sclerotinia Fructigena, Notes on the oc-
eurrence of, 134.

Seastone, C. V., 108.

Shannon, Charles W., 53.

Smokeless City, Steps in the Development
Oe yak

Sourness, The effect of Sugar on, 98.

TREE GROWTH, NOTES UPON THE
RATE OF GROWTH IN THE GLA-
CIAL SOILS OF NORTHERN INDI-
ANA, 114.

WADE, FRANK B., 95.

White River, The Drainage Area of the
East Fork of, 53.

Woods, Contributions to the Knowledge of
Vehicle, 110.

(152)

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

Indiana Aradenty
of Srivure

120 7

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

Indiana Academy of Science

1907

EEO ase ae eh es a! Ke LYNN B. McMULLEN

LIBRARY
NEW YORK
BOTANICAL
INDIANAPOLIS, IND. GARDEN.
1908

D, PRINTER

POLIS

INDIANA

FO!
1908

Wo. B. B

EXECUTIVE DEPARTMENT,
March 24, 1908.

Received by the Governor, examined and referred to the Auditor of
State for verification of the financial statement.

THE STATE OF INDIANA,

OFFICE OF AUDITOR OF STATE,
INDIANAPOLIS, April 17, 1908.
The within report, so far as the same relates to moneys drawn from the
State Treasury, has been examined and found correct.
J. C. BILLHEIMER,
Auditor of State.

APRIL 17, 1908.

Returned by the Auditor of State, with above certificate, and trans-
mitted to Secretary of State for publication, upon the order of the Board
of Commissioners of Public Printing and Binding. ‘

FRED L. GEMMER,
Secretary to the Governor.

Filed in the office of the Secretary of State of the State of Indiana,

April 17, 1908.
FRED A. SIMS,

Secretary of State.

Received the within report and delivered to the printer April 17, 1908.

HARRY SLOUGH,
Clerk Printing Bureau.

(3)

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE.
An act to provide for the publication of the reports and papers of the Indiana

Academy OL Sciencer Tn nce, eS OO ee i eee 5
An act for the protection of birds, their nests and eggs................... 7
Officers’ 190 7=1908 Ses Sass 6 ee Rede ee SO ee eee 8
Committees; 19071908 1... Sn8 Ske fa a Se 9
Principal: officers since organization=..0 2: ..54< 50 tee ee ae eee 5 eee 10
Constitution: i2s.e57 se nos es oe ee eee DEL ae iil
By IEA WS ic See Ie a NE Re ae ee i 13
Members, WellowS-n.0e 0 See ee ee eee 14
Memibersssnon=resiclemtc ns icc eee re a 15
Members Sachlve.ortcoz aonlere ssa aes ce es eee CR ee 16
Program of the Twenty-third Annual Meeting...................-:..--- 20

Report of the Twenty-third Annual Meeting of the Indiana Academy of

SCION COs ais Na ape he as eis Cake Stee eee eS nen hd 22
int, Memioriaim ojo Ss satis 2 Seats hoe eee Ba ces Se 23
Papers presented at the Twenty-third Annual Meeting................... 28
Index cng kilo nk a a ee meee ee ee 159

(4)

2() 1908

NOUV

LIBRARY
NEW YORK
BOTANICAL

GARDEN.

AN ACT TO PROVIDE FOR THE PUBLICATION OF THE REPORTS
AND PAPERS OF THE INDIANA ACADEMY OF SCIENCE.

[Approved Mareh 11, 1895.]:

WHerrAS, The Indiana Academy of Science, a chartered
scientific association, has embodied in its constitution a SENOS
provision that it will, upon the request of the Governor, or of the several
departments of the State government, through the Governor, and through
its council as an advisory body. assist in the direction and execution of
any investigation within its province, without pecuniary gain to the Acad-
elny, provided only that the necessary expenses of such investigation are
borne by the State; and,

WHEREAS, The reports of the meetings of said Academy, with the sey-
eral papers read before it, have very great educational, industrial and eco-
nomic value, and should be preserved in permanent form; and

WuHuereas, The Constitution of the State makes it the duty of the Gen-
eral Assembly to encourage by all suitable means intellectual, scientific and
agricultural improvement; therefore.

Section 1. Be it enucted by the General Assembly of the Publication ot
State of Indiana, That hereafter the annual reports of the — the Reports of

the Indiana

Academy of
the report for the year 1894, including all papers of scientific Science.

meetings of the Indiana Academy of Science, beginning with

or economic value, presented at such meetings, after they shall have been
edited and prepared for publication as hereinafter provided, shall be pub-
lished by and under the direction of the Commissioners of Public Printing
and Binding.

Sec. 2. Said reports shall be edited and prepared for
publication without expense to the State, by a corps of Editing
editors to be selected and appointed by the Indiana Acadmey Reports.
of Science, who shall not. by reason of such services, have
any Claim against the State for compensation. The form, style of binding,
paper, typography and manner and extent of illustration of

Number of
such reports, shall be determined by the editors, subject to printed
the approval of the Commissioners of Public Printing and Reports.

Stationery. Not less than 1.500 nor more than 3,000 copies of each of said

(5)

6

reports shall be published, the size of the edition within said limits to be
determined by the concurrent action of the editors and the Commissioners
of Public Printing and Stationery: Provided, That not to exceed six
hundred dollars ($600) shall be expended for such publica-
Ease: tion in any one year, and not to extend beyond 1896: Pro-
vided, That no sums shal]l be deemed to be appropriated for the year 1894.
Sec. 38. All except three hundred copies of each volume
ne of said reports shall be placed in the custody of the State
Librarian, who shall furnish one copy thereof to each pub-
lic library in the State, one copy to each university, college or normal
schoo] in the State. one copy to each high school in the State having a
library, which shall make application therefor, and one copy to such other
institutions, societies or persons aS may be designated by the Academy
through its editors or its council. The remaining three hundred copies
shall be turned over to the Academy to be disposed of as it may determine.
In order to provide for the preservation of the same it shall be the duty
of the Custodian of the State House to provide and place at the disposal
of the Academy one of the unoccupied rooms of the State House, to be
designated as the office of the Indiana Academy of Science, wherein said
copies of said reports belonging to the Academy, together with the original
manuscripts, drawings, ete., thereof can be safely kept, and he shall also
equip the same with the necessary shelving and furniture.
Sec. 4. An emergency is hereby declared to exist for
BUSES EET fhe immediate taking effect of this act, and it shall there-

fore take effect and be in force from and after its passage.

AN ACT FOR THE PROTECTION OF BIRDS, THEIR NESTS AND
HGGS.

Section 602. It shall be unlawful for any person to

kill, trap or possess any wild bird, or to purchase or offer Bate
the same for sale, or to destroy the nests or the eggs of any wild bird ex-
cept as otherwise provided in this section. But this section shall not apply
to the following named game birds: The Anatidse, commonly called swans,
geese, brant, river and sea duck; the Rallids, commonly known as rails,
coots, mudhens, and gallinules; the Limicole, commonly known as shore
birds. plovers, surf birds, snipe, woodcock, sandpipers, tatlers and curlews ;
nor to English or Huropean house sparrows, crows, hawks, or other birds
of prey. Nor shall this section apply to any person taking birds or their
nests or eggs for scientific purposes under permit, as provided in the next
section. Any person violating the provisions of this section shall, upon con-
viction, be fined not less than ten dollars nor more than fifty dollars.

Src. 663. Permits may be granted by the Commissioner of Fisheries
and Game to any properly accredited person, permitting the holder there-
of to collect birds, their nests or eggs for strictly scientific purposes. In
order to obtain such permit the applicant for the same must present to
said Commissioner written testimonials from two well-known scientific
men certifying to the good character and fitness of said applicant to be
entrusted with such privilege, and pay to said Board one dollar therefor,
and file with him a properly executed bond in the sum of two hundred
dollars, payable to the State of Indiana, conditioned that he will obey the
terms of such permit, and signed by at least two responsible citizens of
the State as sureties. The bond may be forfeited and the permit revoked
upon proof to the satisfaction of such Commissioner that the holder of
such permit has killed any bird or taken the nests or eggs of any bird for

any other purpose than that named in this section.

Indiana Academy of Science.

OFFICERS, 1907-1908.

PRESIDENT
GLENN CULBERTSON.
VicE-PRESIDENT
A. I. Foury.
SECRETARY
JAMES H. RANSOM.
ASSISTANT SECRETARY
A. J. BIGNEY.
PRESS SECRETARY
GEORGE A. ABBOTT.
TREASURER

Witiiam A. McBeErH.

EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE

GLENN CULBERTSON, CaruL L. MEEs, A. W. BUTLER,

A. L. FoueEy, W. S. BLATCHLEY, W. A. Noyss,

J. H. Ransom, H. W. WILEY, J. C. ARTHUR,

A. J. BIGNEY, M. B. THomas, OSs RASElAtye

G. A. ABBOTT, D. W. DENNIS, T. C. MENDENHALL,
W. A. McBeETH, C. H. EIGceNMANN, J. C. BRANNER,

D. M. MortiEr, C. A. Waupo, J. P. D. Joun,
Ropert HESSLER, THOMAS GRAY, J. M. Courter,
Joun S. WriGuHrt, STANLEY COULTER, D. S. JorRDAN.

CURATORS

ES GIWAING YS hence aos eee ae RON a J. C. ARTHUR.

GH THY. OLOGY. Ue t eree oS anne Kee ae ht ae C. H. EIGENMANN.
HERPETOLOGY )

MAMMOLOGY RvR, in grooms eRe ie Rage ica gee cee eae W. BurLer.
ORNITHOLOGY |

PINTOMOLO GY aiiirnc: 0 el eee nO eee W. S. BLaTcHLeEY.

COMMITTEES, 1907-1908.

PROGRAM,

M. B. THomas, C. H. EIGENMANN, GLENN CULBERTSON.
MEMBERSHIP,

J. H. Ransom O. L. KeEtso, R. R. Ramsey.

A. J. BIGNEY, Jee NAYLOR:

NOMINATIONS,

W. J. MoENKHAUS, E. R. Cumines, M. B. THOMAS.
AUDITING,

C. ZELENY, M. B. THomas, Je PS NAYnORs

Strate LIBRARY,
W. S. BLATCHLEY, A. W. But Ler, G. W. Benton,
J. S. WRIGHT, L. B. McMuLLEN.

RESTRICTION OF WEEDS AND DISEASES,
R. HEssueEr, J. N. Hurry, A. W. BuTLeR
S. CouLTER, D. M. Morrier.

Directors oF BIOLOGICAL SURVEY,
STANLEY COULTER, C. R. Dryer, M. B. THomas,
C. H. E1IGENMANN, J. C. ARTHUR.

RELATIONS OF THE ACADEMY TO THE STATE,
R. W. McBripg, W. W. Woo.LteEn, C. A. WALDO,
W. S. BLATCHLEY.

DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROCEEDINGS,
J. S. WRIGHT, L. B. McMUuttueEn, L. J. RETTGER,
J. W. BEEDE, J. H. Ransom.

EpItor,
Lynn B. McMutten, Indianapolis, Ind,

10

HELO AN
UI ROI Ye AK
UPA VY MM
WPeeIn “VM
“UPON “V “AM |”
PHN “VY AM

TOAoog Lf
TeAoog Lf”
TPAOG Lf
TProog “Lf
TPAD Lf
‘uouUBYS “gq “MM |"
‘uouuvys “gq (MM |"
‘uouuRYys “qd “M
“uouuRys “gq “MM |"

OPTRA Vio)

‘OpTeM “VO

suryuef “q ‘O

‘suTyuoe “qO |’

TORE VE
ORV Vii)
MABIO “Y sopreyoH
os moaqy “yD
ey siuseha beth fe 9" fiear9)

Nei Nf 09}

" mOjUeg "\A “Oo

“uOqUOg “A,

"* UoJUN “A

meconlecys maa

00%)
ony 9)
O0r)

Aah ert ‘ Kousig 7 OS)
WLOsUBY “FT “f*
“-WOsUBYyT “FT “f°
“WOsUBYy “FT “f°

“*“(1OSUBYT “FT

“ouIpog, UOspreuodg
‘ouIpog, WOspleuod

“*uoJUVg “MA “O9*%)

‘sumquer ‘gO foo
‘suryuor “q ‘O
‘suryuor "gq ‘O

“SsuLyUo (*

On

Be OS imave ait
AZ4INYOS “WOT
SUE Se Arf ats|
“AouSIE, “CV

a Pour ENS)
Aousig, “f °W

"+ Kousig ‘¢ “W
“UBULION “MM AA

** UBULION “AA “MA |

*1a}[NON Aopunyg [

‘UAUNASVAY T,

“XUVLANOAG

“LSS

“AONAIOS AO AWHAVOV

7, PURLOSHB Ry EP it

UST, “gy wudry
Cee ‘ey UUATT
ener en “gy uUArT

“QYSLEA “SG uyor
VUSTIEA “SQ uyor
- VUSLIM “SS uyos

“4ySlt\ “S uyor
qu “9 uyor
hase HSI “8
WSN “S
WYSUM “8
HYSILM “9
WS MA “S

uyo;’
Ronee uyor
uyor
uyor
uyor

Fate metopeteae oa)

© Lop FOE, “AA SOULY

7" * TopINE, “AA SOUL

LopINE “A soury

“ "JONG “A soury
-TepNeyT “My soury

- Lepyney, “AA souly
-Topyne, “A soury
“ Teyyneg “AA sounry

“UV LOR OOS

~ UOS}LEq[N UUTS)
STON AN
“* LoSsopp Joqoy
WYSE “SG uyor
Peel s 0
| ASTOR “S “MA
"* KOTLAA “MA ee
“-sRulouy, “A “IN
oS Gee Nal
UURUUOOST “FY
OMG NY
Awdr) SVULOUT,
|'****gaq~nog AepueyS
rn ties LOE AW Y;
y= "SOKON OW
rian YOY Ap
Tf
“ABH ‘dO
TSIM SP ae Ow
gouuRde, “GQ UYOr'
MONE a ate
roqTNog “Ww uyor
URpPLOf “SQ PIAL]

"+++ -Treqdureg

“INGACISHA J

8061—-L061
LO61—-906T
9061-SO6L
SO6I-FO6T
POGI-E061
SO6I—GOGT
GOBL-LOGT
1061-0061
OO6L—-6681

6681-8681
S6ST-LOS8T
LO81—-968T

968 1—-C681
COST-POST
POST—-E68

SOS T-COST

GOSI-LOST
[681-0681
O68 T-6b88 I
6881-8881
S88I-Z8s8T
L881—-988T
988I-988T

‘SUV X

VNVICNI

HHL FO SUMOILMALO

11

CONSTITUTION.

ARTICLE I.

SecTION 1. This association shall be called the Indiana Academy of
Science.

Sec. 2. The objects of this Academy shall be scientific research and
the diffusion of knowledge concerning the various departments of science,
to promote intercourse between men engaged in scientific work, especially
in Indiana; to assist by investigation and discussion in developing and
mmaking known the material, educational and other resources and riches
of the State; to arrange and prepare for publication such reports of inves-
tigation and discussions as may further the aims and objects of the Acad-
emy as set forth in these articles.

Whereas, The State has undertaken the publication of such proceed-
ings, the Academy will, upon request of the Governor, or of one of the sev-
eral departments of the State, through the Governor, act through its coun-
cil as an advisory body in the direction and execution of any investigation
within its province as stated. The necessary expenses incurred in the prose-
cution of such investigation are to be borne by the State; no pecuniary gain
is to come to the Academy for its advice or direction of such investigation.

The regular proceedings of the Academy as published by the State
shall become a public document.

ARTICLE II.

Srcrion 1. Members of this Academy shall be honorary fellows, fel-
lows, non-resident members or active members.

Src. 2. Any person engaged in any department of scientific work, or
in original research in any department of science, shall be eligible to active
membershij,. Active members may be annual or life members. Annual
members may be elected at any meeting of the Academy; they shall sign
the constitution, pay an admission fee of two dollars, and thereafter an
annual fee of one dollar. Any person who shall at one time contribute

12

fifty dollars to the funds of this Academy may be elected a life member of
the Academy, free of assessment. Non-resident members may be elected
from those who have been active members but who have removed from the
‘State. Im any case, a three-fourths vote of the members present shall elect
to membership. Applications for membership in any of the foregoing classes
shall be referred to a committee on application for membership, who shall
consider such application and report to the Academy before the election.

Sec. 3. The members who are actively engaged in scientific work, who
have recognized standing as scientific men. and who have been members
of the Academy at least one year, may be recommended for nomination for
election as fellows by three fellows or members personally acquainted with
their work and character. Of members so nominated a number not exceed-
ing five in one year may, on recommendation of the Executive Committee,
be elected as fellows. At the meeting at which this is adopted, the mem-
bers of the Executive Committee for 1894 and fifteen others shall be elected
fellows, and those now honorary members shall become honorary fellows.
Tlonorary fellows may be elected ou account of special prominence in
science, on the written recommendation of two members of the Academy.
In any case a three-fourths vote of the members present shall elect.

ARTICLE III.

Section 1. The officers of this Academy shall be chosen by ballot at
the annual meeting, and shall hold office one year. They shall consist of a
President, Vice-President, Secretary, Assistant Secretary, Press Secretary
and Treasurer, who shall perform the duties usually pertaining to their
respective offices, and in addition, with the ex-Presidents of the Academy,
shall constitute an Executive Committee. The President shall, at each an-
nual meeting, appoint two members to be a committee, which shall prepare
the programs and have charge of the arrangements for all meetings for
one. year.

Sec. 2. The annual meeting of this Academy shall be held in the city
of Indianapolis within the week following Christmas of each year, unless
otherwise ordered by the Executive Committee. There shall also be a sum-
mer meeting at such time and place as may be decided upon by the: Execu-
tive Committee: Other meetings may be called at the discretion of the Ex-
ecutive Committee. The past Presidents. together with the officers and Ex-

ecutive Committee, shall constitute the council of the Academy, and repre-

13

sent it in the transaction of any necessary business not especially provided
for in this constitution, in the interim between general meetings.

Sec. 3. This constitution may be altered or amended at any annual
meeting by a three-fourths majority of the attending members of at least
one year’s standing No question of amendment shall be decided on the
day ot its presentation.

BY-LAWS.

1. On motion, any special department of science shall be assigned to
a curator, whose duty it shail be, with the assistance of the other members
interested in the same department, to endeavor to advance knowledge in
that particular department. Each curator shall report at such time and
place as the Academy shall direct. These reports shall include a brief sum-
mary of the progress of the department during the year preceding the pre-
sentation of the report.

2. The President shall deliver a public address on the morning of one
of the days of the meeting at the expiration of his term of office.

3. ‘The Press Secretary shall. attend to the securing of proper news-
paper reports of the meetings and assist the Secretary.

4. No special meeting of the Academy shall be held without a notice
ot the same having been sent to the address of each member at least fifteen
days before such meeting.

5. No bill against the Academy shall be paid without an order signed
by the President and countersigned by the Secretary.

6. Members who shall allow their dues to remain unpaid for two
years, having been annually notified of their arrearage by the Treasurer,
shall have their names stricken from the roll.

7. Ven members shall. constitute a quorum for the transaction of

business.

14

MEMBERS.

FELLOWS.
Rog. Aley >. .2 2 nce actin pete: Ae OOS cexeeres aOeee Bloomington
UG Artin Soren. ot eee ae eer ISOS seit kee ee Lafayette.
JW. IBeede sre ea eed aes ee LOG ee has ee eS Bloomington.
GEOTPE Wie wOMOE ee soc nace re ee er PSIG oe eek cere, Indianapolis.
IAs We eMOY =, wees pees ee cine ets ESOT aries ce cate oe Moore’s Hill.
Katherine Golden Bitting............. ESOS Cen os eae Lafayette.
Wass Blatehleyec ss ene eee VO ee ence tey ae Indianapolis.
Donaldson Bodie. = 5. -o.tss oo £8995. oer ser Crawfordsville.
EL Bramer its oe ene ecko Sea oe TROG Sacre, bs ake Irvington.
DE VETANCE HD ULEATC wae eres 1S 98 pi cnet Lafayette.
A SOW AS SQUIER oP orca Sot ns och os oh ON Sa IBIS cc ro et ctetes Indianapolis
TW Re OGRA oy, stce Gan iire cote eo rome ae 218 15 amet A es Bloomington.
IMG] BAER COOKS Ree ea sere cee tack econ dea 9023 ose ee Newark, Del.
Josue MeWoulters acerca LEO ois hee eee eee Chicago, Ill.
EADIGY COUMEE > strc sae Seat stoma PSUS Cosine ete ce Lafayette.
Glenn (Culbertsons 2... => sp eee ee | fold pare ar pic Hanover.
BO CUMMNIES yA2ek oF Le os os eee L906 a er ens Bloomington.
DS Wie DeNnIS 05. Pay carte coe are 1 SOS ie ee ee Richmond.
GR eDryertse Gree a ee ee LSOVEA Sapa re ee Terre Haute.
GrEL Migenmann S435 .fe0 2s <r re ile iar mearaie alee oat gre: Bloomington.
Rerey,Nortonuel vans eer eso cee GO Icey ene eters West Lafayette
oN] Wiel 100 C2 eke here ee ete Ieee ah NSS irae ace ones store Bloomington.
IME Jee GOlMO Die arc me none ere ase haaone NS 9O Ee seine cece Lafayette.
AW th MiG oss).c eet eee os eee ASOSR AS Aen eres Urbana, II.
Mhonvas: Grays co meee ne ecco eee TES as aes oe Terre Haute.
ARS wea bhawayeeee ac ee oe eee eee ees 189 See eee toe Terre Haute. °
WiiKey Eta tty tes Ae cree eae ire re 1902 Beet Seater Lafayette.
Robert Hessletsc32).=.. 2. sot ee eee TSO). eee tes eer Logansport.
FL GAG SEUIStONNe: 32.62 te eer eee NBOSE cic ees Chicago, Ill.
Bdwin §:Johonnatt: . 2a 2 4. Senos 1904S eee Terre Haute.
Robert. 35. yonsice s-5¢ oso. eerae eee 189625. sie ae ee Bloomington.
Wis sMe Betta. 24h ls eae 1904S arate oe Terre Haute.

“Date of election.

Waele VaNsterswmcirc.e tuts rinse mien et ace SIRO RTE en.
CE NY (fe) 120 ate ode ey ea Ai SOS es cx.
eT Neo IIS oe eat on epee coc See eee ia. oe ane POO ss 25%
WE Moenichalist’ sete iis ame oe TKO Ss Bae
ID VEMMOUGlerors cise crus het Se ee cae [303s ee ee
‘hel aint ni] Fe Cleat abet dae siegenare ye as eek ec OD 3 Aer ee
Wee AterIN@VeSitenen cm rt vc numiy cohen Its rere aoe
vollamReRaMse Vie ret s aetsqs eee 2 HOO GHeecee
NREL eNRbU ATS OMe seks foe mondiactaectissaecsoae 102M ae e
ru eine GLO elemta ticki ato hire anaes Mees L896 eee
MW avaCdhRiG bhiroekss a ias Gvctts cue oa wheels NQOGHe eee
eee S COV EI epee seas tate e toy sees Ncw ewes 1894......
JNO CORSS a0 TG] Mae eka ee ee USES chat
Wii SlOMenet. oct mea tet Bodie Gero TSO Say sere
NOSED MI OWA Re rae on se Se cee ws eens SOR a de
Mb ihomiasrer strs tao oe eee ISOS neste
(CCECAGRW oll Oper panacea nti: aaides Waoncl mete SO Sree ce
RES Wielbstersiter+.17.) clone cans hacen 1894. ....:.
NacobRWestlumnds Mca cet tors tenis Al L904 wae
EPA VIERA asc ays oe nas. ee TRO Rhee
Wiakinihe.: Waiebtie'.: +n fia saa. os cae SO 4S Bie,

* Date of election.

15

apa eee Bloomington,
Terre Haute.

Swarthmore, Pa.

Bloomington,

Bloomington,

SECA ot ont Greencastle.

Sea Bloomington,
Ne EONS Terre Haute.
Pe a Chicago, Ill.
deseo sac Lafayette.
cae pee oa Swarthmore, Pa.
Dred Ae ee) Crawfordsville.
Lafayette.
Washington, D. C.
Lafayette.
Washington, D. C.

Indianapolis.

NON-RESIDENT MEMBERS.

George H. Ashley
J. C. Branner
M. A. Brannon
D. H. Campbell
A. Wilmer Duff

Edward Hughes
O. P. Jenkins
D. 8. Jordan

Charleston, S. C.
Stanford University, Cal.
Grand Forks, N. D.
Stanford University, Cal.
Worcester, Mass
Washington, D. C.
Stanford University, Cal.
Columbia, Mo.

Syracuse, N. Y.

New York City.

Stockton, Cal

Stanford University, Cal.
Stanford University, Cal.

16

JAS: Bim ghey reer ec bh inet ete eee een See ee Tufts College, Mass.

D2 Mae ouigalicy (oat ache ee ee ee ee Bronx Park, New York City
Tay Mendenhall <s.-3..4 oop er ee oa Ae ea Worcester, Mass.

Alfred Sprnveranc.<2s 2 as een 2 tg ce Cincinnati, Ohio.
RoberticB Warder). pit cee. Benen eee ge eee Washington, D. C.

Ernest; Walker se5 xs neoes eo etee ee Gt gs spas Clemson College, 8. C.

ACTIVE MEMBERS.

George AbbOUt?. .Scireso. es iS ee Ae oe Indianapolis.
Walters) “Baker: oo os" Sacks tas Ne eae S Indianapolis.
Howard Hugh Bangs <0.2 420252 Ses ae ee Indianapolis.
eer hp Benne tiesnck eee poe ee ee eee Valparaiso.
Harry Maridge Bishops. cps ots ee Indianapolis.
WestersBlackwens Sothern aoe, so eimai ey ae.

William: N- Bianehard 3: es Scr k ree eee Greencastle.
Charlestse Bondi hor. erent me oe ee re Richmond.
EL @Brandon 36 a8 aes see as eee Bloomington.
Hired: Ise PCOZO ax a ard s7 See ec et er eee eee Remington.
SEMI MS TAT COs cis peo ese aie See tira oe eg eg Terre Haute.
MWewaist Clintons Carsonne:s. terse ee eee Detroit, Mich.
Herman 8. Chamberlain......... Pace Sete are ces Indianapolis.
J Chaneler) (ae 2 Ae a ao ee et en Bicknell.
Ottor OS Clayton) Seer ces ese ee ees ore Geneva.
Howard!W = Clarks *s425-52 oc ce en eee Chicago, Ill.
aM Clemas Acar Meats a rages tees ee ree de CR Monroeville.
Gharles (Glickener* $225 St te cc a eee ee Silverwood, R. D. No. 1.
Charles: Ant Colley: oi. ace ra ee Petersburg.
ivases' OACoxes pe sant: oc on evar ne een Terre Haute.
Walham! Clifford Cox neice. sen chy ee ier eee Columbus.
AS Creal. | cence g ae coe eee ee Site 25. eens Crawfordsville.
IMeahe Cro wellives cs are eee ea eee ee Franklin.
Moreno Daniela = se jecten oak eens en Laporte.

SC Da VvissOn? oe 5. faa tao eee tee tne nee Bloomington.
Charles ©; Deda hah ie aa to ee Cee Bluffton.
Martie Doan oe eae ete ten Gre nay eee Westfield.

J2P? Dolapsc.cr detects oko ee ee Syracuse.

A CETTPP STAIN BEGG Tei ot cy i ead iO Sete a a ea Crawfordsville.
Sse U EB 8 Uetmn sf eg ids tn Ate Ae aN hie <iy 5 soon Indianapolis.
JASE Loe Da aba Ree teed babe Rare a ora 5.) Ste o anee Logansport.
Penge mE MEETS Sot yah ens «he aa Ay ah ne Logansport.
WWE Wig 1D wird CFE senate oe ee ote 6 (Sect ang nee aan ee aod eRe Anderson.

+ Ric 27D 1 6) 21 PR ne ee en 2 he Ce a a Bloomington.
PPESE SPENCER CERIN 5.4 co ak Rah Cel ota agr eS PY eee Swe eieae AE Vincennes.
wera 111 INCOM BY) igs 9c Res BT In Peery See cay Se a Pa Evansville.
UIST SUES RIZE) SO Se a aera ara ae Logansport.
RUM ne Ne IsKG + Uetan es Ao Ta eins Deen fe eu Richmond.
US ADL U0 a a Ae aS Jeffersonville.
See POC ROEE Does NS Se eh Shin te his fain on SSS Madison.
UROTPe."GE s C001 6) on pate Nin eee Par er apenas ae ea Logansport.
2h GAUSS ar pa eee Naa Lafayette.
AIR AWN eA ADREH IE Sos Ma chon 2a wou Polat Se Pittsburg, Pa.
PONE cg MM TIN Nc, ot So, Se i aoa S Pathe ea es, Terre Haute.
ME TEOTIECLOV VIG ke oe, PROC ey Re ai cr ere Ne ay tena Rea Rochester.
Mra COOK MG TEEN BG ip) as Kym cae wy sd doe hawk ene do New Albany.
pena RaBE MNT c.f rye Mack. Sika yeh otes Pe eRe Mitchell.

1 FESS Ad Cees 8 Rr TC ET) Seagee OA e ereto eee a tna State College, Pa.
OE CLNE Cid 6 POG Loa ng a a ae 7 St. Louis.
Potinn te Methermoton 22. 20. hen betes Sek oe Logansport.
cc UE TREE 8 Fes A ee tip Bel RCS te ent eT la Bloomington.
pS SEE, Diz e No (OT ASS A ae Dey ge RR Indianapolis.
LOWES TL Tl ial Wy Fc A oe EN er haar Terre Haute.
Pcs EMSS tang reas Pi BGA) er an Se Madison.
ohmed-idebraindd: seassee sc see ee caao eos Logansport.
ric Ei Gs ereelh sri ee ns hao oad = ews Se SA Ate Logansport.
2s LTR D BA ED) SS geen ei RAE trea en Richmond.
LLANE Sg ied RD UE og 2 Ieee ee ep eee 2m ae AP South Bend.
cL ABLE TSAR 8 BV Fy gle epee nok mn EO Indianapolis.
Witte Bs) ODESS shines ater hy 5 Saeco ey ho greats Steak eetanas West Lafayette.
so pd Ley TE Fe BSR ae i eee S/S ge Terre Haute.
1Euieer eT Joes 0S 9 1 eat RR eT i Lafayette.
OLiioT g RES CORI C TT 0) 1 Sie nee a ye eae ae Urbana, Ill.
fic We Mecbridex ct. — ot a. osn- ey 3 ae ee ee ae Indianapolis.
Pech GMC Inskeep tS ee ae sie ace as td Terre Haute.
INGE MPG DONS fg Sy Pat toe erirne ee lh ie lok Lyons.

[2—18192]

NYG

18

Lymn. sMeMulleire tote eae at eo eee arnt meee Indianapolis
BidwamndaGres Mia linens tes eee ee ee West Lafayette
James E<Meinchester® see ceH- ascent gin ton eee Vincennes.
Waltre dels M amiw anit oe eam eet eet meet cease are Bloomington.
WoillinmniineaesMasonie near eee eae oo ee Borden.

(Gar kSiIMGi Clee eee ene se ee eee eh gt tiene ne Berkley, Cal.
GaRudolip i Miler? ose ae ces a ae 2 ane ene Bae Indianapolis.
Richard: BishopuMoore: onscreen et Indianapolis
RredeMarteiler=4¢.4 3... tea es HERON Sree Terre Haute.
CharlessB) Newline cert tee tes hae oor mason Irvington.

Johnie eING WSO Mle fs eee eer eka ee eee Stanford University, Cal
De TACO Welice terse tt cre cee eee anes oa Frankhn.

ROllOmEsP ences sae Tote Bas ree gn Beene Indianapolis
Raliphee ube aye eae ee cat < oeten tearem ae Greenwood.
James #AS Er Ce: dae Reece can ee estes eres na ee ee Ft. Wayne.
(ARTE SR tim lie tere oee ee eran aston go SR ee eee Fayetteville, Ark.
Albert dpe eataninr yo scl co eat eae Mora, Wash.
SMT PS AGS ta SY ig ove (el Ries Mien ned Pro ee nin Meme none Sanat Air Jmporia, Kansas.
GulesBiRipleyieey-reteans pes 4 sem en cree eee mere Decorah, lowa.
Geomre Ts Roberts. oc aitos es ahtva eee pee ee oe Muncie.

By ACO CINILEZE SINE aU ch ASE Pen Ope shasta cen Chicago, Il.

Wall Seah: 223555 on ct oak arpa eet seer are Bloomington.
Charles WmaSianmon:.. <x atte int ease Bloomington.
bredasilenye ¢°t.82 ke ist tomas Aleta ae ach ee ah Indianapolis.
Jr Slonakers. sess cosas ee hg eee ere Madison, Wis.

Al bertiSmuthy 2s cies eae ye acne ne Lafayette.

Essie Alma: so mait nene seseeese erent haces ee ee eee ere Bloomington.
CieRaperSnaithinws atc 12 a ae eee aera gece encase Pacific Grove, Cal.
JeeMisStoddard!tces 5 iene toc oct perenne oe Indianapolis.
Noein Wiha WhoYouany ysOVN ge Seok na asec a so oes sheen ome Owensville.
WerbasViameGordereertis stents sons cote ree rae Worthington.
EAS EM OOTMEGES tee erect once ecpalcee nv eerorereen Ft. Wayne.
baramikce Via ete ee eereee ar ene eerie a ee Indianapolis.
amelie Wielrsecateet see ee ents pete ae cae feecreneere Indianapolis.

y Need Del Wd ue ee Pem emer eee ots Bat enaraty wees DEA aro Connersville.
Gray West, WilSOn:, st yee tee eee note a chee ee Fayette, Iowa.
\Nialllitenaae Wiens Noll. oxo ge ccs saqmatesearaesc Indianapolis.

Herbertaviltoms Woollen re serseet tee er ele Indianapolis.

Jif ASRS 8 Sa als ear ea RS oa a a Indianapolis.
TLE RSAC 1 a aE CR SR we ng Ol Gt ae Hyattsville, Md.
| LVEVES ACs a eke aaa noma 9 he ete as SR en Terre Haute.
PETRIE PARODY e4 Reser att) Sudan eg ee Sie Ae net A Bloomington.
21 ey ey eee IS 2 0 re eee ee 53
Non-resident members. sk @S eo a le ee 19
PRCHERE UEC WEENIE Pee ent ah ee hpeae aisles ee ao 108
SCH Mn ER Tz AD Sok ates Be the LB AA 180

Note.—For list of Foreign Correspondents, see Proceedings of 1901.

19

20)

PROGRAM

OF THE

TWENTY-THIRD ANNUAL MEETING

OF THE

INDIANA ACADEMY OF SCIENCE,

SHORTRIDGE HIGH SCHOOL, INDIANAPOLIS,

NOVEMBER 28 AND 29, 1907.

*President’s Address—History and Control of Sex.......... ; ‘ Sy ie ee D. M. Mottier

GENERAL,
* 1. The Origin of Adaptation in the Fresh Water Fauna, 15m..... OE a Te BARNS 2 leaie C. H. Eigenmann
* 2. Spectacles—A Concession to the Theory of Evolution, 20m......................-.....4 A. G. Pohlman
* 3. New Science Laboratories in Moore’s Hill College, 10m.................-...------eeeeee ese A.J. Bigney
+540 AUStudy, injthe pexohatioun thesPnuibebly. id pM ani 6 yelee acetic tees iene oer eestor W. J. Moenkhaus
* 5. Some Photographs (Lantern Slides) of Daniel’s Comet, 1907, 20m. ...................... W. A. Cogshall
* 6. The Celebration by the New York Academy of Sciences of the Two Hundredth Anniversary of the
Binthtotlinnaeuss | Ome. cece tee res eee Barak SR PRE RS Pains hy a's G. W. Wilson
Ton HandeDexterity; “Lome sos8 ee en eee Satter ine Bae ae OEE eae A. G. Pohlman
8. /The-Autopsy im -Relation-to: the Public Health t2me= 2S. .- semi stesta< eee eae oe H. R. Alburger
* 9 An Investigation of the Fuel Value of Indiana Peats, 12m........ aire Pare alsa lo. UAT INS
ZOOLOGY.
1. Tardy Humming Birds, 5m............... Sawet Sito ote eo Wee) Mane Gorges
*2._ The Moulting Mechanism of Lizards (Lantern Slides), 20m ieee etn 6 AS: H. L. Bruner
35> A Grow Roost. near Reminzton.Indss bite eee oe he = eo eee F. J. Breeze
4. The Relation of the Degree of Injury to the Amount of Regeneration bard the Moulting Period in Gam-
MAES! fl hiner eee yk cies eee ea te ae eee Oe ee At ee Mary Harman
52) the Influenceiof Emvironment/on Mans 5m). .<- seer eee eee ieee Robert Hessiet

*6§. Some Internal Factors Controlling Regeneration in Secyphomeduson, Cassiopea Xamachana, 10m....
eer ees cac Jone Charles Zeleny

7. Selective Fertilization in Corian Fishes, 10m. . PM AR or co a oR W. J. Moenkhau3
8. Heredity in the Tumor Cell, 15m...... : Se eee aa H. R. Alburger
*9. The Circulation Through the Fetal Mecinaalian Ee art, isi ; ee ee Ae Geabohinian
*10. The Technique of the Three Dimension Reconstruction Model, 15m.....................4 A. G Pohlman
*11. Experiments on the Rate of Regeneration, 10m... : : eee tee oe woe ie

12. Observations on the Senses and Habits of Bats, 10m......... ..............-..025. ...W. L. Hahn
*13. Some notes on the Habits of the common Bux Turtl., 5m ee Glenn Culbertson
*14. Notes on Ecology of the Pitcher Plant......... eee 2 Se She veer ae Meee BES

Be OSS

*5.

sale
2.

*2.
*3.

21

BOTANY.
HhexPerongsaporsles’or, Indians, wh Ome -pasmerteetaetecle cctasiiecla foc.ce ous svete div ee a hace ieee G. W. Wilson
The Existence of Roestelia Pencillata and its Teliosporic Phase in North America, 15m........ F. D. Kern
The Heterotype Chromosomes in Pinus and Thuja, 10m..............0.0.00.00.000.00000.. I. M. Lews
insecinGalls ob indianaylOMss.2 rea teh parees Nak apace eae ere aisich a slore clots Aime ol bh aie Palo ets Mel T. Cook
GEOLOGY.
A Probable Origin of the Small Mounds of the Mississippi and Texas Regions, 15m......... A. B. Reagan
intianavoolliplypes: al OM sen vaya trea Ne Sars oe yorck Sicct wrest ys didi wioha ie'e acd Acanieche ee wee sleeve C. W. Shannon
Structures in the So-Called “Huron” Formation of Indiana, induced by the Solution of the Mississip-
PUAN MIME LONE MEN CH LeeLee rarferc cre se, cel eiel ereimsrAnye vere Aiai. see ele vial dead Aereleinge ae Shoes ars J. W. Beede
Stratigraphy of the Richmond Formation of Indiana, 20m.......................2...0.. E. R. Cumings

Some peculiarities of the Valley Erosion of Big Creek and its Tributaries in Jefferson County, 6m....
Se en ERE ether eis ee ee ae oan. ae eee nei es _..Glenn Culbertson

PHYSICS.
he Cause ofourtace ensign, 1ONm gsc. cee lege dee ee eon. os ere ee BO One eee A. L. Folev
Hossohewelghtun ChemicalsReactionS. 1 Oltscric-t-1ce owe ocPaatee peek eal canmincah centre J. B. Dutcher
CHEMISTRY.
The Electrolytic Production of Selenic Acid from Lead Selenate, 10m.................... I. C. Mathers
oder COMPleRuU Nerd sin OM a aekan Merl wer ee ee Cees te Bie epee er Scan ah ytaard that Yvon James Currie
Thiocarbonysalicylamide and DerivativessoIMec >. 1.2 clclvcapc 1ao-os ce So. ae Semel oe R. E. Lyons
The Volumetric Determination of Selenic Acid, 5m..... 2.0.2.0... 000002000 ce eee Bs Specie R. E. Lyons

* Papers so marked were read.

22

THE TWENTY-THIRD ANNUAL MEETING OF THE
INDIANA ACADEMY OF SCIENCE.

The twenty-third annual meeting of the Indiana Academy of Science
was held at Indianapolis, Thursday and Friday, November 28 and 29,
1907.

Thursday at 6 p. m. fifteen members of the Academy dined at the
Claypool. Following the dinner the Executive Committee met in regular
session at the headquarters.

At 9:30 Friday morning the Academy met in one of the rooms of the
Shortridge High School. President I). M. Mottier presided. The transac-
tion of business and the reading of papers occupied the attention of the
Academy until eleven o'clock when the President read his paper on “The
History and Control of Sex.”

Following the address an adjournment was taken until 2 o’clock. On
reassembling the business session was held after which other papers were
presented and discussed. At 4:30 p. m., the program having been com-
pleted in sectional groups. the meeting adjourned to meet at some educa-
tional institution in the State outside of Indianapolis, the place to be
decided by the program committee.

In Memoriam

LUCIEN MARCUS UNDERWOOD

BORN
NEW WOODSTOOK, NEW YORK,
OCTOBER TWENTY-SIXTH, EIGHTEEN HUNDRED FIFTY-THREE.

DIED

REDDING, CONNECTICUT,
NOVEMBER SIXTEENTH, NINETEEN HUNDRED SEVEN.

In Mymonrian

MOSES M. ELROD

DIED
COLUMBUS, INDIANA,
MAY TWENTIETH, NINETEEN HUNDRED SEVEN.

(23)

LUCIEN MARCUS UNDERWOOD.

A BIOGRAPHIOAL SKETCH.

Lucien M. Underwood was born October 26, 1853, in New Woodstock,
New York, and died at his home in Redding, Connecticut, November 16,
1907. At the age of fifteen he entered Cazenovia Seminary, where he pre-
pared for college. In the fall of 1873 he entered Syracuse University.
graduating from this institution in 1877. His career as a seminary and as
a college student was marked by unusual scholarship. In the college cur-
riculum his favorite studies were history. mathematics and geology. Dur-
ing this period he began the collection of an herbarium, and, self instructed,
undertook the study of the ferns. He also gave much attention to ento-
mology.

At the time of his graduation he decided to enter the profession of
teaching and for several years his work was in small institutions where
he was compelled to instruct in a wide range of subjects. In 1878 he took
his master’s degree at Syracuse University, having completed a year’s
graduate work in addition to performing the arduous duties incident to
the principalship of a school where he was obliged to conduct fourteen
classes a day. In 1878 and 1879 he taught natural science in Cazenovia
Seminary. In July of 1878 he published his first botanical paper, a list of
ferns occurring about Syracuse, N. Y. From this time on his inclination
to specialize in botany grew. but it was not until 1880, when he became
professor of geology and botany at the Illinois Wesleyan University at
Bloomington, that he had opportunity to do much botanical work.

In 1881, while at Bloomington, he published his manuscripts on ferns
under the title “Our Native I‘erns and How to Study Them.” This publica-
tion met with great success, the sixth edition appearing in 1900. In 1883
he was called to Syracuse University as instructor in geology, zoology and
botany and three years later was made professor—remaining in this posi-
tion until 1880 when he secured a year’s leave of absence to study the
collections of hepatics in Harvard University. While in Cambridge, Mass.,
he accepted a professorship of botany at DePauw University. This posi-
tion was the first which enabled him to devote his time to botany alone.
For four years, until 1895, he enjoyed at DePauw University a period of

20

work under congenial surroundings. publishing numerous papers on the
lower groups of plants. In 1895 he left DePauw to accept the professor-
ship of biology in the Alabama Polytechnic Institute at Auburn. After one
year at Auburn he became professor of botany in Columbia University in
July, 1896, and continued in this position the remainder of his life.

Dr. Underwood was a member of the original committee on nomencla-
ture at the Rochester meeting of the American Association in 1892 and was
selected as the delegate to carry the report of the American botanists on
this question to the International Botanical Congress in Genoa. He was
one of the vice-presidents of the Genoa Congress. He was vice-president
of the Botanical Section of the American Association at the New York
meeting in 1894.

At Columbia University his career was one of great honor. He was
one of the ten botanists elected at the Madison meeting of the American
Association for the Advancement of Science to form the Botanical Society
of America, and served as president of this organization, 1899 to 1900.
From 1898 to the end of 1902 he was editor of the publications of the Tor-
rey Gotanical Club. He was associate editor of the North American Flora.
He was a member of the Board of Scientific Directors of the New York
Botanical Garden, serving as chairman since 1901. Syracuse University
in 1906 conferred upon him the degree of Doctor of Laws in recognition
of his long and distinguished scientific service. Dr. Underwood’s published
botanical papers and texts number i198 titles. In addition he was the
author of other papers on zoology, geology, geneology and miscellaneous
subjects. (See article on the published works of L. M. Underwood by
John Hendiey Barnhart, Bulletin Torrey Botanical Club, page 17, January,
1908.)

Dr. Underwood was a man of cheerful, genial disposition, sympathetic
and helpful. He was especially kind to students and to young men in his
profession and all who came in contact with him were impressed with
his generosity and sincerity. He had rare power in making and keeping
friends and none who has had the good fortune to enjoy his acquaintance
will forget the charm of his delightful personality.

In 1881 Dr. Underwood was married to Miss Marie A. Spurr. By this
union there was one daughter Miss Helen Willoughby Underwood. Dr.
Underwood is survived by both wife and daughter.

During his residence in Indiana Dr. Underwood took a lively inter-

est in the Indiana Academy of Science, contributing many valuable papers

26

representing a large amount of research work preparatory to a biological
survey of the State. His work for the Academy was not confined to the
contribution of scientific papers, but included faithful service on comumit-
tees and aid in promoting the business interests of the organization.
Furthermore his concern for the Academy was maintained throughout his
life and after remova! from the State Dr. Underwood was ever solicitous
for the welfare of the Indiana Academy of Science. In the untimely death
of Dr. Underwood the members of the Academy have lost a valued co-
worker in science and a true and warm hearted friend whose memory will

always be held in most tender regard.

(Note.—The larger part of the data used in the above sketch was
taken from ‘A biographical sketch of Lucien Marcus Underwood, by Carl-
ton Clarence Curtis, Bulletin ‘Correy, Botanical Club, January, 1908.)

LIST OF PAPERS CONTRIBUTED BY LUCIEN M. UNDERWOOD TO
THE INDIANA ACADEMY OF SCIENCE PROCEEDINGS.

Proceedings, 1891—-
The Distribution of Tropical Ferns in Peninsular Florida, pp. 83-89.
Sone Additions to the State Flora from Putnam County, pp. 89-92.
Sonnecting Forms Among the Polyporoid Fungi, by title, p. 92.
Proceedings, 1892—
Marchantia Polymorpha. not a Typical or Representative Livewort, by
title, p. 41.
A State Bioiogical Survey—A Suggestion for Our Spring Meeting, by
title, p. 48.
The Need of a Large Library of Reference in Cryptogamic Botany in
Indiana; What the Colleges Are Doing to Supply the Deficiency,
by title, p. 49.
Vroceedings, 1895—
Report of the botanical division of the Indiana State biological survey,
pp. 18-19.
Bibliography of Indiana Botany. pp. 20-30.
List of Cryptogams at present known to Inhabit the State of Indiana,
pp. 39-67.
Our present Knowledge of the Distribution of Pteridophytes in Indi-

ana, pp. 254-258.

Proceedings, 1894—
Report of the botanical division of the Indiana State biological survey
for 1894, abstract, p. 66.
An increasing pear disease in Indiana, abstract, p. 67.
The variations of Polyporus Lucidus, abstract, p. 132.
Che proposed new systematic botany of North America, abstract, p. 133.
Report of the botanical division of the Indiana State biological survey
for 1894. With list of additions to the state flora, etc., pp. 144-156.
Proceedings, 1896—
Additions to the published lists of Indiana Cryptogams, pp. 171-172.

RESOLUTIONS ON THE DEATH OF LucIEN M. UNDERWOOD, PASSED BY THE
INDIANA ACADEMY OF SCIENCE, IN SESSION IN INDIANAPOLIS,
NOVEMBER 29, 1907.

WHEREAS, Lucien Marcus Underweod has been a member of the Indiana
Academy of Science and during his residence in Indiana took a lively in-
terest in its affairs evidenced by notable scientific researches and con-
tributions to its proceedings as well as by faithful services as a member
of its committees and help in promoting the business interests of the
Academy, and whereas. he maintained this interest in the affairs of the
Academy through life after his removal from the State, and whereas,
the members of this Academy held Dr. Underwood in the highest esteem
as a true and warm-hearted friend;

Be It Resolved, That in his untimely death November 16th, we have
lost a valued co-worker in science and a friend whose memory will always
be held in most tender regard. Furthermore, be it resolved, That in his
death America has lost one of her foremost naturalists, a botanist who has
done masterful work which brought him the highest academic honors and
marked recognition from his professional contemporaries everywhere. Itis
further

Resolved, That the secretary be instructed to spread these resolutions
upon the minutes of the Academy and that a copy be forwarded to the
widow and daughter of Dr. Underwood with whom we sympathize deeply
in their great bereavement.

D. M. MOTTIDR,

JOHN S. WRIGHT,

A. W. BUTLER,
Comittee.

Tue History anp ConTrROL oF SEx.

Davip M. Morrier.

The student of sex and closely related problems of heredity may ra-
tionally ask himself any or all of the following questions: What is the
significance of sex? or, in other words, why are organisms male and female?
Is the sex of the organism determined during the early development of the
individual? or is it predetermined in the germ cells? If the former, what
conditions of the environment are favorable to the development of males
and what to females? If the latter, what is it in the gametes or sex-cells
that predetermines maleness or feinaleness?

As in the establishment of the doctrine of sexuality itself, these ques-
tions can be answered by experiment only and by the microscopic investiga-
tion of the germ cells and the manner of their development. As an intro-
duction to what [ shall have to say in this paper concerning sex control, I
desire to point out briefly those lines of study which seem to me to have
been most effective in establishing the doctrine of sexuality in plants; for
it will be seen that the lines of investigation which established the theory
of sex are similar to those that are yielding the most fruitful results in
the study of the more difficult hereditary problems of the present day.

When in the history of civilized or semi-civilized man, the idea arose
that plants possess sex, no one can tell or perhaps imagine. Before the
days of written history the old Arabs of the desert knew that certain palm
trees produced fruit, while others did not, and, in order that the fruit
might develop abundantly. it was necessary to bring the flowers of the
sterile trees and hang them upon the branches of those which bore the
fruit. It is evident that they also practiced the caprification of the fig,
using the same methods employed at the present time in the fig-growing
localities along the Mediterranean, for we read in Herodotus who, in speak-
ing of the Babylonians, states that, ‘““The natives tie the fruit of the male
palms, as they are called by the Greeks, to the branches of the date-bearing
palm, to let the gall-fly enter the dates and ripen them, and to prevent the
fruit falling off. The male palins. like the wild fig trees, have usually the

f

29

gall-fly in their fruit.’ Wlerodotus was in error in regard to the presence
of the gall fly in the palm, and it is said that Theophrastus was the first
to point out the inaccuracy in the statement. This brilliant and gifted
pupil of Aristotle was probably the foremost of all ancient botanists, for,
it is said, he knew six hundred plants. The ideas of Theophrastus upon
this subject seemed to be more definite than those of his great teacher. He
regards the palm and terebinths as being some male and some female, for
“it is certain,” he says, “that among plants of the same species some produce
flowers and some do not; male palms, for instance, bear flowers, the female
only fruit.” Let it be borne in mind here that neither Theophrastus nor
the botanists of the 16th and 17th centuries considered the rudiment of
the fruit to be a part of the flower. Theophrastus probably added very
little to the knowledge of sexuality in plants which had been handed down
to him either in the form of tradition or through the scanty writings
upon natural history. 'That he seemed to have made no observations upon
the subject, but te have relied in a large measure upon heresay, is ap-
parent from the following: ‘‘What men say that the fruit of the female
date-palm does not perfect itself unless the blossom of the male with its
dust is shaken over it, is indeed wonderful. but it resembles the caprification
of the fig, and it might almost be concluded that the female plant is not
by itself sufficient for the perfecting of the foetus.” In the time of Pliny,
this idea of sexual difference in plants had been pretty well confirmed in
the minds of educated men. Jn his ‘Historia Mundi,” in describing the re-
lation between the male and female date-palm, Pliny calls the pollen-dust
the material of fertilization, and says that naturalists tell us that all trees
and even herbs have the two sexes.

Now while the ancients had seme notion of sex in plants, their ideas
were based chiefly upon certain apparent analogies with animals. It must
be borne in mind that whilst the ancients attributed to the pollen the power
of fertilization, they had no notion that this fertilization was anything
further than some unexplained subtile influence of the flower dust upon
the fruit. However, we should wonder only at how much they knew in
the days of Herodotus and Theophrastus as compared with the progress
of knowledge made along this line during the following two thousand
years: for the time from Aristotle to the discovery of the cell by Robert
Hooke, the publication of the great: works on anatomy by Malpighi and
Grew, and the experiments of Camerarius in the latter part of the 17th
century, was a lapse of long and dreary centuries in the history of science.

30

This was not because there were no men willing to devote their time to
natural history, but chiefly because of the attitude of mind which de-
manded that problems arising be not solved by observation and experi-
ment, but by the process of deductions from the authorities. The ques-
tion was not, what do the observed facts teach? but, how are they to be
interpreted from what Aristotle says?

The improvement of the microscope and the extensive studies on the
minute anatomy of piants did not bring the results that might have been
reasonably expected. In spite of his excellent work on the anatomy of
plants, Grew seemed to have been unable to gain any true insight into the
structure and function of pollen. He did not even consider the stamens as
the so-called male members of the Hower, speaking of them only as the
attire, but he records a conversation with an otherwise unknown botanist,
Sir Thomas Millingten, who was probably the first person to claim for the
stamens the character of male organs. I quote from the “Anatomy of
Plants” (chap. V, secs. 3 and 4, page 171): “In discourse hereof with our
learned Savilian professor, Sir Thomas Millington, he told me he conceived
that the attire doth serve as the male for the generation of the seed. I
immediately replied that i was of the same opinion and gave him some rea-
sons for it and answered some objections which might oppose them.” But
how badly Grew must bave been confused in the matter may be seen from
his description of the florets in the head of certain Composite. He re-
garded the style and stigma of the floral attire as a portion of the male
organ, Speaking of the small globulets (pollen grains) in the thecae (an-
thers) of the seedlike attire as a vegetable sperm which falls upon the seed
case and so “touches it with a prolific virtue.” Grew could conceive of sex
in plants only in the form of certain apparent analogies with animals. He
reasoned that the same plant may be both male and female, because snails
and some cther animals are so constituted, but to complete the similarity
between the plant and the animal would require that the plant should not
only resemble the animal, but should actually be one. Down to the year
1691, about all that was known concerning the sexuality in plants was com-
prised in the facts related by Theophrastus for the date-palm and the tere-
binth, and in the conjectures of Millington, Grew and others, while Mal-
pighi’s views in opposition to these authors were considered equally well
founded.

The doctrine of sexuality in plants could only be raised to the rank
of scientific fact by experiment. It was necessary to show that no seed

D1

capable of germination could be formed without the aid of pollen, and all
historic records concur in proving that Rudolph Jacob Camerarius was the
first to attempt to solve the problem in this way. Dioecious plants were
cultivated apart from each other, but no perfect seeds were formed. He
removed the stamens from the fiowers of the castor oil plant and the
stigmas from maize, with the result that no seeds were set in the castor
oil plant, and in the place of grains of corn only empty husks were to be
seen. The results of Camerarius were published in 1691-94. At this time
the authority of the ancients was So great that Camerarius thought it neces-
sary to insist that the views of Aristotle and Theophrastus were not op-
posed to the sexual theory. Among the few experiments carried out in the
next fifty years were those of the Governor of Pennsylvania, James Logan.
an Irishman by birth. Logan experimented with some plants of maize.
Upon a cob from which he removed some of the stigmas, or silks, he found
as many grains as there were stigmas remaining. One cob which was
wrapped in muslin before the silks appeared, produced no kernels. In 1751,
Gleditsch, director of the botanic garden in Berlin, had been told that a
date palm eighty years old, which had been brought from Africa, never
bore fruit. As there was no staminate tree of the species in Berlin, Gled-
itsch ordered pollen sent from Leipzig. The journey required nine days,
and although Gleditsch thought the pollen spoiled, the male inflorescence
was hung upon the Berlin tree, with the result that seeds were set which
germinated in the following spring.

The century following the discovery of Camerarius was characterized
by two lines of investigation which, wore than any other activity of bot-
anists, led to the complete establishment of the sexual theory. I refer to
the refutation of tbe old theory of evolution together with the birth of the
doctrine of epigenesis, and the discovery of hybridization; the first of these
being the outcome of microscopic studies, and the latter that of experimen-
tation. It may be said in this connection that the history of biological
science teaches that the greatest and the most substantial progress has
been made where the studies of the morphologist and of the experimenter
have gone on side by side, the one serving as a control upon the other.
According to the old theory of evolution, or the inclusion theory, that the
germ in every seed, for example, contained all the parts of the organism,
and that this germ enclosed a similar one in miniature, and so on, like a
box within a box. This view of the inclusion of germ within germ was
very prevalent in the 18th century, and Kaspar Friedrich Wolf (1759) has

32

been given the credit of refuting it. Wolf, in his doctor’s thesis on the
“Theory of Generation,” maintained that the embryo and organs of a plant
develop not by the unfolding of parts already present in miniature, but
that they grew out of undifferentiated rudiments, the theory of epigenesis.
However, Wolf’s argaments were far from convincing, as he held that the
act of fertilization was merely another form of nutrition.

About the same time experiments in hybridization were being carried
on by several investigators, and the results obtained supplied much more
convincing proof against the old theory of evolution. Among the fore-
most men in this held were Gottlieb Koelreuter and Christian Konrad
Sprengel. While Wkolreuter brought together many important observations
on the sexuality of plants, yet his greatest service consisted in the produc-
tion of hybrids. In this connection it may be of interest to note that his
first hybrids were produced between two species of tobacco plants. Nico-
tiana panicum and N. rustica. What he accomplished did not require be-
ing changed, but when combined with later observations has been used in
the discovery of general principles of hybridization. His work seems to
belong to our time. Koelreuter showed that only closely allied plants, and
not always these, were capable of producing hybrids, and that the mingling
of parentai characters in the hybrid was the best refutation of the theory
of evolution. It was no easy matter to place the proper estimate upon the
value of the contributions of this gifted observer. The collectors of the
Linnaean school, as well as the true systematists at the close of the 18th
century. who wielded a powerful influence upon botanical thought, had lit-
tle understanding for such labors as Ioelreuter’s, and incorreet ideas of
hybrids prevailed in spite of botanical literature. Hybrids were also incon-
venient for the believers in the constancy of species.

Koelreuter’s studies were not confined to hybridization alone, for he di-
rects attention to the natural way of the transfer of pollen from stamen
to stigma, being tiie first to recognize the agency of insects. He studied
pollen grains, showing that fertilization followed pollenation in the ab-
sence of light. and rejected the idea that the pollen grain passed bodily
into the ovary. With the microscope, however, he was less skillful than
as an experimenter, for he supposed the pollen grain to be solid tissue, and
the fertilizing substance to be oil which adheres to the outside of the grain
and tinds its way to the ovule. The pollen tube had not been discovered,
although the time was one hundred years after the discovery of the cell

by Robert Hooke.

33

As Camerarius first proved the sexuality of plants, and Koelreuter
showed that different species can unite sexually to produce hybrids, so
Sprengel demonstrated that a certain kind of hybridization was very com-
mon in the vegetable kingdom, namely the crossing of flowers of different
individuals of the same species. To him belongs the credit for having first
shown the part played by insects in cross pollenation, and pointing out the
correlation between such properties of the flower as color, odor, nectar,
special forms and markings, and so forth, and the visiting insects.

Karl Friederick Gaertner, son of Joseph Gaertner, took up the work so
ably begun by Koelreuter, and greatly extended the knowledge of hybridi-
zation, having kept accurate account of nine thousand experiments. His
work was published in 1849. Sachs states that ‘These observations once
more confirmed the existence of the sexuality in plants, and in such a
manner that it could never again be disputed. When facts were observed
in 1860, which led to the presumption that under certain circumstances in
certain individuals of some species of plants, the female organs might pro-
duce embryos capable of development without the help of the male, there
was no thought of using these cases of supposed parthenogenesis to dis-
prove the existence of sexuality as the general rule; men were concerned
only to verify first of all the occurrence of the phenomena, and then to
see how they were to be reasonably understood side by side with the ex-
isting ideas ot sexuality.” Gaertner’s experiments were conducted at
Claw, in Wurtemberg, the place in which Koelreuter carried on his studies ;
Camerarius worked in Tiibingen.

While the experimenters in hybridization were at work, the student
with the microscope was no less busy. In 1823, Amici discovered the pollen
tube in the stigma, and the fact was confirmed by others. In 18380, the
same observer traced the pollen tube into the ovule. Schleiden and
Schacht now caine forward with their erroneous theory of the formation
of the embyro in the seed. ‘They maintained that the embyro develops
from the end of the pollen tube after the latter enters the ovule. It is
clear that this doctrine would do away with the essential point in the
sexuality of plants, for the ovule would be regarded merely as an incu-
bator for the embyro. Amici, in 1846, brought forth decisive proof for the
view he had maintained. namely, that the embryo arises not from the end
of the pollen tube, but from a portion of the ovule which already existed
before fertilization, and that this part is fertilized by a fluid contained in

[8—18192]

o4

the pollen tube. ‘The correctness of this view was confirmed the following
year by von Moil and Hotineister, the latter of whom described the points
in detail which decided the question, and illustrated them with beautiful
figures.

Following the publication of Amici, a vehement controversy arose be-
tween the adherents of the views of Schleiden and those of Amici. <A prize
offered by the Institute of the Netherlands at Amsterdam was awarded to
an essay by Schacht in 1850, which defended Schleiden’s theory, and illus-
trated it by a number of drawings giving both incorrect and inconceivable
representations of the decisive points. In this case the prize essay was re-
futed before it appeared, by von Mohl, Hofmeister and Tulasne. Von Mohl’s
words uttered in 1863 in regard to the value of prize essays are so fitting
at the present day that I can not refrain from quoting. He said: “Now
that we know that Schleiden’s doctrine was an illusion, it is instructive,
but at the same time sad, to see how ready men were to accept the false
for the true; some, renouncing all observation of their own, dressed up
the phantom in theoretical principles; others with the microscope in hand,
but led astray by their preconceptions, believed that they saw what they
could not have seen, and endeavored to exhibit the correctness of Schlei-
den’s notious as raised above ali doubt by the aid of hundreds of figures,
which had everything but truth to recommend them; and how an academy
by rewarding such work gave fresh confirmation to an experience which
had been repeatedly made good especially in our own subject during many
years past. numeiy, that prize essays are little adapted to contribute to
the solution of a doubtful question in science.”

The discovery of the sexual process in cryptogams by Thuret, Prings-
heim and others followed within four or five years after the complete
establishment of that process in the higher plants. It seems strange to
us now that a phenomenon so easy of observation was pot discovered un-
til its occurrence had been completely demonstrated in organisms present-
ing the greatest difficulties to its investigation. However, it is of inter-
est to recall that just thirty-two years ago Strasburger traced the essen-
tial constitnents of the nucleus in unbroken sequence from one cell genera-
tion to another, thus establishing for the nucleus the rank of morphologi-
eal unity; and just thirty-two years ago also Oscar Hertwig showed that
fertilization. consists essentially in the union of the two gamete nuclei.
It only remained now for later studies on the cell to confirm and to estab-

lish the doctrine that the nucleus is the bearer of the heredity characters.

30

With this is view, we are now .ready to consider some of the modern
phases of our subject.

Any effort to trace the development of the sexual process with all cor-
related phenomena would lead us into an overwhelming mass of details.
Consequently, I shall merely recall that among the lowest plants sexuality
does not exist, and that, in the simplest plants with a sexual process, the
sex cells, or gametes, are scarcely to be distinguished from the non-
sexual reproductive cells. he conclusion is that gametes were originally
derived from a sexual propagative cells. There is accordingly no differen-
tiation into male and female. he life cycle of these simple sexual plants
is also simple, and it is reasonable to suppose that a corresponding degree
of differentiation obtains in the chromatin or hereditary substances of tue
sex cells. AS we ascend in the scale of evolution toward higher and more
complex organisms. we find a corresponding differentiation in all struc-
tures and functions. and may we not assume also that the hereditary sub-
stance, or germ plasm, is likewise specialized and differentiated? There-
fore, sex is the expression of a very fundamental sort of division of labor.
I do not mean by that a division of labor which is of a secondary nature
such as man has ascribed to the individuals of his own species, but that
of a purely hereditary character-—or may I say maleness and femaleness
in the broadest and most fundamental sense.

Tfow then did sex come about? And what is it that determines that
one individual or member of a life cycle will be male and another female?
To ask such questions fifty or even twenty-five years ago might have been
regarded as visionary. Not so today. Considered from the botanical stand-
point, the problem of sex determination has to deal with a certain category
of phenomena that are in many respects fundamentally different from those
presented by animals. in plants in which sex differentiation is well defined,
there is in every complete life cycle two phases known asthe sexual and the
asexual, or gametophyte and sporophyte. The sporophyte springs from the
fertilized egg or the union of sey cells. This sporophyte in turn bears
spores which give rise to gametophytes. This may be made clear by means
of an example such as the fern. The spores borne on the leaves of the fern
do not produce directly new ferns, but very small plants known as _ pro-
thallia, which in the simpler ferns are independent and self-nourishing in-
dividuals. The prothallia are the sexual plants. They bear the sex or-
gans, which is turn produce eggs and sperms. The prothallia may be

either purely male or female or hermaphrodite. When the egg is fertilized

36

it develops immediately into the sporophyte, or what we commonly know as
the fern. Thus the sexual plant, or gametophyte (female gametophyte)
not only produces the sex organs, but serves as the incubator and brooder
for the young sporophyte. ‘The life-cycle of the highest plants such as
trees and sunflowers consists also of these two generations, but the rela-
tive size and mutual relation of sporophyte and gametophyte are different
in the higher plants. For example, the beech tree is the sporophyte, the
gametophyte being the pollen tube and the embryosac of the undeveloped
seed. Here the reverse condition prevails as regards the mutual relation
of sporophyte and gametophyte to that in the fern, namely, the sporophyte
nourishes the young sporophyte as well as both gametophytes.

Now, we are in the habit of speaking of male and female flowers
according as they are wholly staminate or pistillate, and the plant that
bears only staminate flowers we call male, while the one bearing only pis-
tillate fiowers is designated as the female individual. However, in the
strict morphological sense the sporophyte is without sex, hence trees can
be neither male nor female, and to avoid trouble and useless discussion,
it is doubtless hetter to speak of staminate and pistillate trees; for we
shall see that the sex of any complete life-cycle is determined and fixed in
the germ cells. From the foregoing it is quite clear that in the animal
kingdom, apart from one or two cell generations. there is nothing in the
life-history that is comparable to sporophyte and gametophyte.

We are now ready to answer the question, upon what does the differ-
entiation into gametophyte and sporophyte depend? Our explanation of
this doctrine is based upon the theory of the hereditary substance. Doubt-
less nearly all biologists concur in the view that the hereditary charac-
ters are borne by a substance in the nucleus of the cell called chromatin.
When the nucleus divides the chromatin differentiates into a definite num-
ber of pieces known as chromosomes. The number of chromosomes is
always constant for the reproductive cells ‘of any species. In all the cells
of the sporophyte of any plant, which lie in the germ tract, there are, let
us say, a definite number of chromosomes designated by n. During the for-
mation of spores, however, the number is reduced to one-half, or m.
Now each spore has n, chromosomes. and the cells of the gametophyte re-
sulting therefrom will possess . chromosomes; consequently the egg and
the sperm will have each 7, chromosomes. It is apparent that when eg¢
and sperm unite, the fecundated egg and the individual arising from it

will contain n, plus n. or n chromosomes.

37

The most fundamental difference between sporophyte and gametophyte
lies in the fact that the latter possess just one-half as many chromosomes
as the former. ‘This hereditary difference between sporophyte and gameto-
phyte and the change which brings about the transition may be made clear
by means of the following figure, showing diagramatically the behavior of
the chromatin. Fig. 1 illustrates the behavior of the chromatin in an ordi-
nary vegetative cell. Here the chromatin segments passing into the new
nuclei are formed by a longitudinal fission of a single chromosome—an
equational division. In Fig. 2, a to f, is shown the first or reducing divi-
sion in spore mother cells. One-half of the somatic chromosomes pass to
one of the daughter nuclei and the other half to the other, thus bringing
about the reduction of the number. The second division in the spore
mother cell (7 te i) is equational.

Figs t.

Fig. 1. Diagrams showing the behavior of the chromatiniduring an ordinary somatic
mitosis. a. nucleus in resting condition, showing chromatin‘distributed in small granules
within the linin network and a nucleolus. b. the chromatin spirem has formed and it has
split longitudinally. c. the spirem has segmented into chromosomes, e. g., eight. d. spin-
dle stage; chromosomes arranged in the equatorial plate. e. anaphase; daughter chromo
somes moving toward the poles of the spindle. f. daughter nuclei, each containing
eight daughter chromosomes. Such a division is known as equational, since the two re-
sulting nuclei are hereditarily alike.

The paralle! between plants and animals is found in the phenomenon
of the reduced number of chromosomes in the sex-cells, with this distinction,

that in higher plants the reduction in the number of the chromosomes oc-

38

curs when the spores are formed, which may be many thousands of cell
generations remoyed from the time in ontogeny when eggs and sperms are
differentiated; while in animals the reduction immediately precedes the
formation of the gametes. In regard to the chromosomes themselves, the
view generally prevailing is that each possess a distinct identity or indi-
viduality which is maintained throughout ontogeny, and phenomena per-
taining thereto have been presented under the theory of the individuality
of the chromosomes. Very recently, however, the idea of individuality has
been taken away trom the chromosomes and applied to smaller units, such
as the chromomeres. or better the microscopically distinguishable granules
which make up the chromomeres. We may ¢all these particles pangens,
or select any name which may be convenient and likely of adoption. The
writer has expressed his views on this subject in greater detail in a recent
publication, and only a few brief statements will be made here, in as much
as a fuller discussion is regarded as being too technical for a general audi-
ence. The idea of individuality is applied to the chromomeres or the small
particles composing them, chiefly because the identity of the chromosome
is lost in the restin nucleus. ‘There are no good reasons to believe that
a given chromosome always contains the same hereditary qualities in- any
succession of cell generations. Iurthermore, no special importance should
be attached to the different sizes of the chromosomes, for, as a rule, one
of the most striking phenomena in a dividing nucleus is the marked differ-
ence in the size of the chromosomes. These small material particles, or
pangens, are respousible for the characters of the individual, although they
are not regarded as the immediate characters themselves. ‘They may be
roughly compared with ferments, bringing about changes which collectively
constitute development. and produce those chemical re-arrangements of
which form, color, and so forth, are the visible expression. Fused gamete
nuclei, however, do not constitute a chemical union but a mechanical mix-
ture. The numerical reduction of the chromosomes is a consequence and
a condition of sexuality. it is probably not a mere halving of the bulk of
the chromatin, but a selection and a distribution between daughter cells of
structural entities—the primordia of characters which are handed from
one generation to another. The Mendelian principle shows, if it shows
anything worth while, that these units act independently. The nucleus,
therefore, directs and controls cellular development. The outer manifesta-
tions known as variation are probably due to the inter action of nucleus

and cytoplasm.

39

h ]
Fig. 2.

Fig. 2. Diagrams illustrating the behavior of the chromatin during the two matura-
tion divisions in a spore mother cell. a-—f. first or heterotypic mitosis. a. resting
nucleus, same asin fig. 1. 0. longitudinally split chromatin spirem developed from a;
the halves of the spirem are twisted upon each other. c, spirem has segmented into
eight chromosomes which have approximated in pairs to form the four bivalent chromo-
somes. These eight chromosomes were united end to end in the spirem of 0, just as in
the ordinary somatic mitosis. d. spindle with the four bivalent chromosomes arranged
in the equatorial plate. e. anaphase, the four chromosomes retreating towards the poles
of the spindle. Each of these retreating chromosomes is now more clearly seen to be
composed of two halves which were formed by the longitudinal splitting in b. f. daugh-
ter nuclei in which the spirems will be formed by the union end to end of the daughter
segments. This is the division in which the number of chromosomes is reduced to one-
half, beeause whole chromosomes pass to each daughter nucleus. If these whole chromo-
somes are different in hereditary characters, the division is qualitative or differential.
g—i. second or homotypic mitosis. g. spindle showing the four chromosomes arranged
in the equatorial plate; the free ends of the daughter segments of each chromosome
diverge from each other. h. the segments passing to the poles of the spindle. 7%. the
grand-daughter nuclei resulting from the second mitosis. This is an equasional division,
because it consists of the separation of half chromosomes, or daughter segments, formed
by the longitudinal fission of whole chromosomes.

40

In speaking of sex, let us bear in mind that among both animals and
plants there may be three kinds of individuals: Dioecious species, in which
the individuals are unisexual, either male or female; monoecious, with
bisexual or hermaphrodite individuals; and parthenogenetic, in which in-
dividuals produce eggs that develop without fecundation. We may now take
uy the question. whether the sex of the individual is determined by fac-
tors of the environment, or is it predetermined in the chromatin of the
sex cells, i. e., in either sperm or egg or both? Of the environmental fac-
tors, that which is supposed to play the most important role is nutrition,
and in the case of plants, it is probably the only one that need be consid-
ered, for other important factors, such as light and heat, are only influ-
ential iz so far us they affect nutrition. But we should also understand
that we have two sorts or two categories of environmental conditions. In
case the fecundated egg develops wholly apart from the parental body, and
as a completely independent individual, its supply of nourishment is from
the external world; but in those cases in which the incubation of the fer-
lilized egg and the early development of the embyro take place within the
parental body, the food supply will depend upon the condition of the par-
ent. While the conditions of these two categories seem very different, yet
it will be found that the final results are essentially the same.

For the sake of simplicity, a few instances from the animal kingdom
will be mentioned. Experiments were carried on by Riley and others to
determine whether the starving of caterpillars of butterflies might influence
the number of males and females: far under normal conditions of nutri-
tion the caterpillars produce both males and females, and because it is not
possible, says Riley, to make caterpillars take more food than they do nat-
urally. ‘The results of the experiments showed that an excess or diminu-
tion of food dees not alter the proportion of the sexes. Upon this point
Morgan (Exp. Zool., p. 377) makes the following statement: “The futility
of many of these experiments has now become apparent, since it has been
shown that the sex of the caterpillar is already determined when it leaves
the egg. Under these circumstances it is not probable that feeding could
produce a change in the sex. it is much more probable that starvation or
overfeeding could only affect the proportion of males and females by bring-
ing about a greater mortality of the individuals of one sex.” Numerous
studies have been made upon the silk worm by Kellog and Bell, and by
Cuneot upon flies and moths, to determine the influence of food conditions

upon the sex of the individual and upon that of the egg and sperm, with

41

the conclusion that the sex is not determined by external conditions. While
the preponderance of evidence along this line seems to argue strongly
against any influence upon sex-determination by food conditions, yet there
is one case, that of Hydatena senta and the daphnid, Simocephalus, investi-
gated by Nussbaum and others, in which it seemed probable that food
might have some determining influence. Maupas, on the other hand, re-
guarded temperature and not tood as the influential factor. In this con-
nection, the studies of von Malsen (Archiy. f. mikr. Anat., 69: 63-97, 1906.)
upon a smal! worm, Dinophilus apatris, and of Issakowitsch (Idem) upon
daphnids, are of especial interest. Von Malsen found that a higher tem-
perature (26° C) was favorable to the development of males, while a lower
temperature gave an increased ratio of females. He does not attribute the
change in the sex ratio to the temperature directly, but indirectly as affect-
ing the nutrition of the animai. ‘The amount of food at the disposal of
the animal was the same, but at the higher temperature, the sexual ac-
tivity of the animal, i. e., the rapidity with which a large number of eggs
was produced, was abnornaily accelerated, so that the bodily nutrition was
insufficient for the proper nourishment of the eggs. Consequently, at a
higher temperature a larger number of eggs are produced, and among
them is a proportionately large number of smaller or male eggs. Ata
lower temperature, on the contrary, reproductive activity was slower, and
among the smaller number of eggs developed, a larger ratio of well nour-
ished female eggs was the result. There was more time for the develop-
ment of these eggs, and consequently more food placed at their disposal.
To estimate the value of these statements it is necessary to examine the
data upon which the conclusions are based. The number of eggs considered
and the sexual ratio in the warm and cool cultures are shown in the fol-
lowing tables:

NORMAL.
No. of Eggs. Male. Female. Ratio of Male : Female.
1140 3827 813 1:24
Number of eggs at each laying, 5.6.

COOL.

No. of Eggs. Male. Female. Ratio of Male : Female.
3948 978 2975 ieee
Number of eggs at each laying, 4.2.

WARM.

No. of Eggs. Male. lremale. Ratio of Male : Female.
1398 507 886 a bas (57
Number of eggs at each laying, 3.6.

At the higher temperatures it commonly happened that the eggs were
developed so rapidly that the body of the animal was entirely filled from
one end to the other, the head appearing as a smallpoint, the intestine
so compressed as to be scarcely visible. In this condition the animal is
unable to move and soon perishes. At the higher temperature, therefore,
a larger number of eggs are produced so rapidly that the body can not
properly nourish them. It seems to me that von Malsen’s conclusions
should be accepted with much reserve, because of certain probable sources
of error. In the first place he seemed to have based his estimate of males
and females upon the size of the eggs alone, the large ones representing fe-
males, the smaller eggs males. From the very marked variation in the size
of the female eggs, us given from his own measurements, it would seem that
size alone would not be a strictly accurate method of determining the
sexes. In the second place it does not seem improbable that, at higher tem-
peratures, and with a more rapid generative activity, fewer smaller eggs
would fall as prey to the larger eggs; for in these animals the larger
female eggs are frequently nourished at the expense of the smaller. If the
nutritive activity of these large eggs is increased proportionately to the
sexual activity by higher temperature, then the larger eggs should consume
the smaller ones in like ratio: but von Malsen does not seem to have shown
this to be true. It may be said that at lower temperatures the larger
female eggs have relatively more time in which to consume the smaller,
hence fewer small, or male, eggs are laid. The question then arises, does
von Malsen’s experiments prove that higher temperature leads to the produc-
tion of more female than male eggs from the generative tissue? or merely
that, at a higher temperature, of the relatively larger number of eggs
produced, a proportionately smaller number of male eggs is consumed in
the nutrition of the female eggs.

The researches of Issakowitsch upon a daphnid bring us face to face
with a different class of data. This author reared the descendants of
parthenogenetic females through several generations (six as a maximum),
and found that the production of females is paralleled with high tempera-
ture (24° C.), and that the males with lower temperature, the direct

43

opposite to that which happened in the worm Dinophilus. Issakowitsch
shows that temperature acted merely as influencing nutrition, for when the
animals were starved by being reared in distilled water, males and resting
eggs were developed. lifrom his experiments it would seem that, so far as
parthenogenetic eggs were concerned, nutrition may act as a sex-determin-
ing factor. Both von Malsen and Issakowitsch look upon nutrition as a
sex-determining factor from the influence it is supposed to produce upon the
plasmic relation in the nucleus, as set forth by Richard Hertwig.

The more recent researches of Punnett upon Hydatena seem to throw
new light upon the subject in that they point out probable errors in the
studies of Maupas and Nussbaum (R. C. Punnett: Sex-determination in
Hydatena, with some remarks on parthenogenesis. Proc. Royal Soc., Series
B., 78: 223, 1906). In Hydatena three kinds of females may be recognized
by the kinds of eggs they lay: (a) females which produce females par-
thenogenetically (thelytokous females) ; (b) females which produce males
parthenogenetically (arrenotokous females); and (c) the layers of fertil-
ized eggs. Of the first class of females, Punnett recognized from pedigree
cultures three different types. A. Females giving rise to a high percentage
of male producing individuals (arrenotokous females). B. Females giving
rise to a low percentage of male producing individuals. C. Purely female
producing individuals (pure thelytokous females).

In experiments designed to test the effect of temperature and nutrition,
it was found that in the purely female producing individuals (class C),
no male producing forms appeared, the strain remaining pure, and that in
the class B, the ratio of males was not raised as a result of starving. Con-
sequently it is difficult to see that either temperature or nutrition has any
influence in determining male producing forms. Punnett suggests ‘that
the females, producing females parthenogenetically (thelytokous), are
really hermaphrodite, though the male gametes may not exhibit the
orthodox form of spermatozoa. Such a view would account for the ob-
served absence of polar bodies in the female eggs, for it must be supposed
that the process of reduction and fertilization takes place before the
accumulation of yolky material.” It may be added also that if no polar
bodies are formed, there is no reduction in the number of chromosomes, and
we may have, as has been clearly shown in certain plants, not a case of
parthenogenesis but one of apogamy. Whitney (Whitney, David Day.
Determination of sex in Hydatena senta. Jrnl. Mxp. Zool., 5: 1-26, 1907),

in a still more recent study of Hydatena senta, finds that neither tempera-

44

ture nor nutrition has anything to do with the determination of sex. He
asserts also tnat the three strains of Punnett can be found in one strain
and each is capable of producing the other types according as the data
is scanty ov extensive.

Even if we admit that the results obtained with certain animals furnish
some evidence in favor of the view that nutrition may be instrumental in
determining sex, yet the vast majority of facts obtained from numerous
studies made upon lower and higher plants point unmistakably to the
opposite conclusion. I shall mention a few instances. Botanists have long
recognized the difficulty of obtaining for class use the zygospores, or the
sexually formed reproductive bodies, in the common bread mould Rhizopus
nigricans, and this was supposed to be due to the lack of knowledge of the
external conditions necessary to call forth sexual reproduction. Blakeslee
has recently shown that this common mould is dioecious, and that if male
strains are cultivated along with female strains, sexual reproduction will
take place irrespective of external conditions; whereas if the different
strains are grown separately, no zygospores will result, no matter what the
food conditions may be. Again, the well-known liverwort, Marchantia,
produces male and female sexual organs upon separate thalli, or individuals.
These individuals are propagated by bodies called gemmae, and it is re-
ported that Noll has cultivated individuals from the gemmae under all
sorts of growth conditions without being able to change the sex of any of
the thalli. The thalli arise primarily from spores that are apparently all
alike, and that come from the same capsule, yet some of these spores must
be strictly male and others female. The well-known studies of Prantl upon
fern prothallia are frequently quoted as supporting the doctrine that food
conditions determine sex. Prantl found that under poor conditions of nour-
ishment the prothallia produced only male organs, and if removed to con-
ditions affording good nourishment, female organs were developed. In
this as in many similar cases, there was no change of sex since monoecious
organisms were operated with, that is organisms capable of producing both
male and female gametes. Lack of nourishment merely inhibited the devel-
opment of the tissue upon which the female organs are borne, and con-
sequently only male organs were developed. These prothallia arise from
spores that contain the characters of both sexes, and external conditions
merely stimulate the development of one or the other of the sexes, or both.

The writer has recently begun the study upon a fern, whose prothallia

have been reported as strictly dioecious, and that if the spores are well

45

nourished female prothallia will predominate, while with poor nourish-
ment the vast majority of spores will give rise to male gametophytes. An
examination of cultures grown under favorable conditions for laboratory
use, in which the spores were sown thickly, showed’ that certain spores
produced strictly male plants, others female, and still others bisexual
prothallia. A small number of spores were isolated and grown under
similar and very favorable conditions, with similar results. The pure males
were almost equal in number to those bearing the female organs, while the
bisexual plants were few, being about four per cent. of the whole number.
The foregoing results seem to lend encouragement to the view that environ-
mental conditions may have much less to do with the development of male
and female prothallia than had hitherto been supposed. The very brief
study showed clearly that in the fern in question there is a great mortality
among the spores, which, as can be readily seen vary greatly in size.
Among the first things to establish in this and similar cases is whether
mortality is greatest among the smaller or larger spores, and whether
the prothallia springing from the small spores tend to remain small and
produce only antheridia, while the larger female plants arise only from
the larger spores, an so on. I have no notion what sort of results a careful
and #xtended study will bring forth.

Of all efforts to ascertain the influence of the environment upon the
determination of sex, doubtless the studies carried on upon dioecious plants
by Strasburger. and many others are the most noteworthy. Especially
interesting and instructive in this connection is a representative of the pink
family, the Red Campion, Lychnis dioica, which is attacked by a smut,
Ustilago violaceae, whose spores are produced in the anthers instead of
pollen. This red campion is dioecious, certain individuals bearing only
staminate and others pistillate flowers. The structure of the staminate and
pistillate tiowers are shown in the following figure.

If a plant, bearing staminate flowers, be infected by the smut, the
anthers when mature will be filled with smut spores instead of pollen.
Apart from the color of the anthers the form of the staminate flower is
unchanged by the presence cf the parasite. On the other hand, if a plant,
bearing pistillate flowers, is befallen by the smut, the blossoms on the
branches affected by the smut, will develop normally appearing stamens,
whose anthers are filled with smut spores instead of pollen, while the pistil
remains in a rudimentary condition. The only apparent difference between

a pistillate flower thus affected by the parasite and the normal staminate

46

blossom is an elongation of the axis between calyx and corolla (Fig. 3b’).
At fivst sight it might appear that the presence of the parasite was suffi-
cient to change the sex of the plant, for the fungus, when present in the
pistillate plant, leads regularly to the development of stamens and the
- suppression of the pistil. However, in this case the capacity to develop
stamens must be assumed to be present in the pistillate plant, and the
parasite is able to duce the conditions necessary to their formation and
the suppression of the pistil, and thus provide for the development of its
own spores. Extensive and elaborate experiments’ by Strasburger upon
uninfected plants with the view of duplicating the effects produced by the

parasite, led to no definite results.

Fig. 3.

Fig. 3. Staminate and pistillate flowers of Lychnis dioica L., halved longitudinally.
a. normal staminate flower. b. normal pistillate flower. a’ staminate flower affected
by the smut, Ustilago violaceae; the anthers contain smut spores instead of pollen.
b’ pistillate tower similarly affected: the pistil has remained rudimentary while anthers
have been developed, which, however, bear only smut spores. The presence of the
parasite has induced the development of anthers, the members of the flower bearing
male spores instead of the parts bearing the female spores,—After Strasburger.

47

Laurent (1903) has maintained that an excess of nitrogen or lime
favors the development of males in spinach, hemp, ete., while potash and
phosphoric acid favor the development of females, but his results are not
very convincing. Vemperature, light and moisture conditions, relative age
and vigor of parents, relative maturity of pollen, early and late planting,
pruning, etc., have all been carefully and elaborately tested without achiev-
ing satisfactory or convincing results. ‘he case of the anther smut cited in
the foregoing seems to furnish the best evidence among plants that the sex
of the spores to be developed can be changed by environmental conditions,
yet it must be admitted that the preponderance of evidence is against the
view that environmental conditions, either direct or indirect, can determine
sex. On the other hand, there are many who believe that sex is predeter-
mined in the germ ells, and that we are confronted with a problem which
is purely hereditary. According to this view certain parts of the hereditary
substance or chromatin contain male characters, or repesent maleness only
and certain other parts female characters, or femaleness, that is, there are
male determinants and female determinants in the chromatin. To illustrate
this statement. let us recall the case of the common liverwort, Marchantia.
Of the spores produced by any individual sporophyte, some will give rise
only to male thalli and others to female thalli irrespective of environmental
conditions. Now, the spores producing only male plants must contain only
male deterininants, or male determining parts of the chromatin must domi-
nate over the female determinating parts in those spores and vice versa.
If the determination of sex be regarded as a problem of heredity, and if
we believe that hereditary phenomena have a physical basis, some such
theory as the foregoing certainly affords a rational basis for further investi-

gation.

48

Tur CELEBRATION BY THE NEw YorkK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
oF THE T'wo HunpREDTH ANNIVERSARY OF THE
BrrtH or LINNAEUS.

Guy WEST WILSON.

The two hundredth anniversary of the birth of Linnaeus, the great
Swedish naturalist whom we regard as the father of modern biology, was
fittingly commemorated by the New York Academy of Sciences. For some
time the officials of that organization had been perfecting plans for the
observance of this anniversary. Perhaps few other societies in America
have at their command the resources for a celebration which would parallel
this one, as the New York Academy has affiliated with it all the learned
societies of the Greater City and has at its disposal for such an occasion
the magnificent museums of the metropolis. It accordingly gave me no
small pleasure to receive the honor which the president of the Indiana
Academy of Science conferred upon me in asking me to represent this body
at these exercises.

At 9:30 a.m. of the 23d of May the delegates from numerous American
and foreign societies and institutions met in the trustees’ room of the
American’ Museum of Natural History, and, in company with the officers
of the New York Academy, proceeded in a body to the lecture room where
the initial meeting was held. About three-quarters of an hour was devoted
to the reading of communications from the societies whose delegates were
present, and from a few noted foreign societies which were not represented.
These communications covered a wide range of topics, extending from greet-
ings from the various societies through outlines of the character of their
work and eulogies to the memory of Linnaeus to monographic considerations
of some phase of the work of Linnaeus. Of these last may be mentioned
the papers presented by the representatives of the Brooklyn Entomological
Society and of the Maryland Academy of Science. The first of these related
to the entomological work of Linnaeus and its relation to American ento-
mology, while the second was a learned and interesting discussion of
Linnaeus and the flora of Maryland. This part of the program was followed

49

by a learned address by Dr. T. A. Allen of New York on “Linnaeus and
American Zoology,’ which forms a most valuable contribution to the
history of zoology.

At the close of these exercises the delegates proceeded in a body to
“fia Hermatage,” a quaint little French hotel in the Borough of the Bronx
near the New York Botanical Garden. Here the party was joined by the
Swedish Minister to America and the members of the Swedish Legation in
New York City. After dining together the party returned to the lecture
room in the Museum building of the New York Botanical Garden. The
first address of the afternoon, “Linnaeus and American Botany,’ was
delivered by Dr. P. A. Rydberg, a fellow countryman of Linnaeus. This
address dealt in a masterly and interesting manner with the sources of
Linnaeus’ information concerning American plants, closing with a discus-
sion of the genus Linnwea which was at first supposed to contain a single
species, but to which subsequent exploration and study added two others.
To these a fourth was added from Arctic America. The second and closing
address of the afternoon was delivered by Dr. H. H. Rusby on the “Flowers
of North American plants known to Linnaeus.’ This lecture was made
doubly interesting by the fine display of lantern slides by which it was
accompanied. These belonged to the Van Brunt collection of the Botanical
Garden, which is one of the finest and most complete collections of hand
painted lantern slides of American plants.

After these exercises a walk of about three-quarters of a mile through
the magnificent natural forest of Bronx Park brought the party to the Lin-
naen bridge on Pelham Parkway. ‘ihe party was conducted by Dr. W. A.
Murrill, who pointed out a number of characteristic American trees known
to Linnaeus. At the bridge a tablet to the memory of Linnaeus was un-
veiled. Appropriate addresses were made by several persons of note and
the key to the tablet which contained various articles of scientific interest
was given to the New York Historical Society for safe keeping until the
23d of May, 1957, when another anniversary celebration is to be held
and the contents of the tablet examined. The members of the staff of the
New York Zoological Garden then conducted the party through their
grounds, showing the collections with especial reference to the American
animals known to Linnaeus.

The evening program consisted of a reception at the Aquarium in
Battery Park and of a series of addresses at the Brooklyn Museum of Arts

[4—18192]

50

and Sciences. The first of these was of great interest as it was the first
occasion upon which this magnificent collection had been viewed at night.
It was also the centennial of the building which has seen a varied career
of fort, amusement place, emigrant landing and repository of scientific
coilections. The second part of the program was taken up with several
addresses, but three of which need to be mentioned. The first was by
Professor KE. lL. Morris on the “Life of Linnaeus,’ and was pronounced by
his hearers a masterpiece of biography. This was followed by an address
upon “Linnaeus and American Natural History.” by Dr. F. A. Lucas who
treated his subject in a most interesting manner. The program was closed
by a talk by Dr. T. A. Grout on the “Plants and Animals Known to Lin-
naeus,” which was profusely illustrated by lantern slides.

Another feature of great interest in connection with this celebration
was the series of exhibits of objects of American natural history known
to Linnaeus. At the American Museum of Natural History extensive
exhibits were arranged to show the American animals and the rocks and
minerals known to Linnaeus and arranged according to his system of class-
ification, a full explanation of which accompanied the exhibit. At the New
York Botanical Garden there was a large collection of American plants
known to Linnaeus and arranged according to his system of classification.
Accompanying this exhibit was a very complete set of the botanical works
of Linnaeus and a very fine series of portraits of him. Enjoyable and profit-
able as were all the other features of this celebration these exhibits and
the lectures by Dr. Busby and Dr. Grout added much to the yalue and in-
terest of the celebration and to the delightful remembrances which the dele-
gates carried home with them.

New York City.

An INVESTIGATION OF THE Fust VALUE oF Inpriana Prat

Ropert HK. Lyons.

Peat is a moist, spongy, partially carbonized vegetable matter. It is
an incipient coal* containing the heat units stored up by the vegetation
from which it is formed. This form of crude fuel has been used in Europe
for centuries and today is used in Canada and in some places in the United
States.

Hundreds of thousands of acres of peat beds exist in the lake region of
Indiana embraced within the three or four northern tiers of counties. These
deposits constitute a source of cheap and easily obtained fuel for local
use. As the price of coal advances the use of peat for the manufacture of
briquettes will increase and the time will doubtless come when the cities
in that portion of the state will derive their fuel from the peat bogs of
that region.

It has recently been my privilege to investigate the fuel value of a
number of representative samples of Indiana peats which were collected by
the State Department of Geology and Natural Resources. The relative
fuel value of each of twenty-nine samples was determined by calorimetric
test with the Parr Standard instrument and the results expressed in
British 'Thermal Units. (B. '[T. U. = the amount of heat necessary to
raise the temperature of one pound of water one degree Fahrenheit.)
The results are also expressed in calories; a calorie being the amount of
heat required to raise one gram of water one degree centigrade. The test
Was made on samples of peat dried at 105° Cent., which give a slightly
higher thermal effect than would be obtainable in the practice with air

dried peat, because of the moisture held by peat even after prolonged air

“The following table from Ost, Technische Chemie, 1903, p 12, indicates the progressive
changes which peat might undergo in a possible conversion to anthracite coal:

Bituminous Anthracite

Wood. Peat. Lignite. Coal. Coal.
CErbONRitoctre aeons aeee 50 60 70 82 94
ELV ATO tennessee eae 6 6 5 5 3
ORV SEN tee eeion ciate 43 32 24 12 3}

INDO RON cae oeatanioa neta ene 1 2 1 1 Trace.

52

drying under favorable conditions. The advantage in using oven dried
peat in the calorimetric test is that all samples may be accurately compared
as to heating effect. The amount of moisture remaining after air drying
is dependent upon local conditions.

TABLE SHOWING THE FUEL VALUE OF TWENTY-NINE SAMPLES OF PEAT FROM NORTHERN

INDIANA.

| Evapora-
tive Effect

B. T. U., | Calories, | Pounds

& County, Township, Range and Section. | Oven Oven Water per
2 Dried Dried Pound of
g 105°C. 105°C. Oven Dried

Zz Peat.

1G DekalpeSeckO(GauNs,b2sbe) wects as erecta Leper a Saas Re ee ee 10232.77 5684.8 10.6
2 | Steuoen, Sec. 34 G7 N., 1 D301) Yarns Sal ae cette tao ae ASW ice Lae 9422.87 5234.3 9.7
3 LaGrange, Sections 2,11 ANGBLZA(AOUNE Sebo aioe eon ene 8513.29 4729.5 8.8
4 | LaGrange, Sections 4 “and 9 (37 N., 9 E ) ed Oe ace aid See peo egies beta arar 8924.47 4958.0 9.2
5 | Noble, Sections 28 and 29 (33 N., gE. D \Reereatt Sorte se ats naleae eStart rant 10335 .57 5741.9 10.7
Gul BNobles Sec rlSi(Say Nea Laebys ier. cence er te rcs ease eoennd edt cre pene 9217.28 5120.7 9.5
aleWihitleys Secs BU (GLEN HLOPBIA): arse Sacco ony eave epi iemeeromes Neg ett 4541.67 2523.1 4.7
8 | Kosciusko, Sections 11, ‘12 and 13 (GIENR GES ees ee 9715.68 5397.6 10.0
9 Kosciusko, Sections 32 and 33 (BBUNE GIRS) serra ee earner nat 6129.32 3405.1 6.3
10 | Elkhart, Sec. 4 (BGUINS DabA ia pace Cee Bee aren ee ee 8637.89 4799.4 8.9
11 Elkhart, Sections 10 and 11 (BENE GE) eas een eee er ee 7211.22 4006.0 7.4
125)’ Elkhart, Sections:26;and 27 (85)N., 5) Hi)! 3. snc-ec seca cose eee 7613.06 4229.4 7.8
13 Elkhart, Sec Si(eSene Gib ives nite eee tee eee 9628.78 5349.3 O29
14 | St. Joseph, Sections 28, 33 anids34i(BGINet2 i b:) een eee rianeniee wee 9840.28 5466.8 10.1
Ibe AStsdcsephesecso) (GOANGetaE)) meus Seer inva tena ae eine serene 9024.15 5013.4 9.3
16 | St. Joseph, Sections 11 fa LQ STN IEEE) ahi ne eee eee ckeeate ls 8503.95 4724.4 8.8
VPA Sieh rd Lost olin relrconl CO CYN PAD)) BRRES da Acie ene nacamam ce admnors aati 8236.06 4584.4 8.5
LS AES$sWose phe 20 l(STINe taIbe) seceraree nse reer ae eniaaniera cee Mey ee 8491.49 4717.5 8.8
19s); Marshall Sections: O:and 11) (G3 Newly Bis) cet cs eieera eerie 9946.19 5525.6 10.3
20 Marshall, Sect al (SLING tH) Mint aoe ante tet oma Eee eee tates 8497.72 4720.9 8.8
21 | Marshall, Sec. 10 N. ap LD ot aathe te eM emingne tia Ser aetac ost Ee 10466. 40 5814.6 10.8
22 | Starke, Sec. LONGB2INEYS eA) ee hi eh ce en Pye ries 9905.70 5503.1 10.2
20.1 Pulaski, (Secs ON(B LIN salle Wee) sce citer cee one OP ee oe erence 9774.87 5430.4 10.2
24 Pulaski, Sections)7,/S:andi9)(SieNie okie) aoe eerie ee ese 9064. 65 5035.9 9.3
25 Pulaski, Sectionso9 plOjana mln SleNendaWi)ee mes eer een ease 8472.80 4707.1 8.7
26 | Porter, Sections is 2 and 3 (BTANE OMW) PS tiers eee eee 5635.03 3130.5 5.8
27 Jasper, Sections 12, LS andsl4i(3OIN: OaWe ar acenace ct cae eee 8273.44 4596.3 8.0
287)|| Newtons Sections|o2 anda (ol Nes GuWe) nies = cine: seine ete 9033.50 5018.9 9.3
29) | Lakes sections 34; oo:and/o6\(g0 Nea OkWe)s ons. toda cs eee eeaoeee nee 8731.34 4850.7 | 9.0

The results of the tests show the moss peats to have a much higher
heat value than the peats of the grass and sedge variety. This fact is cor-
roborated by numerous other tests on peats from other regions.

Five typical specimens of peat were subjected to a more complete
chemical analysis, including the determination of the percentage of mois-
ture, volatile combustible matter, fixed carbon, coke, ash, sulphur and
nitrogen.

" CHEMICAL ANALYSES OF FIVE SAMPLES OF PEAT FROM NORIHERN INDIANA.

eee a ee aby aie os abe ig
8 County, Townsbip, Range and Section. Efe 2a Sa A A g A ae
g a= | 32 | fa | 2 | ad | B=) 86
a = > i iS) < a n
1 | Dekalb, Sec. 9 (83 N., 12 E.). 17.16 | 738.31 | 22.53 | 26.67 4.14 | 2.56 | 0.74
14 | St. Joseph, Secs. 28, 33 and 34 (36 N.,2 E.)| 12.24 | 70.21 23.45 | 29.78 6.33 | 2.22 | 0.87
15 | St. Joseph, Sec. 3 (36 IN es LOE) a) evte craters nies 11.40 |} 65.52 | 20.65 34.47 13.82 | 3.31 1.33
19 | Marshall, Secs. 10 and 11 (83 N.,1E.)....) 8.99 | 70.97 19.08 | 29.09 10.01 | 3.91 | 0.83
22 | Starke, Sec. 10 (83 N.,3 E.)............. 10.20 | 62.43 | 24.30 | 37.55 13.25 | 2.96 | 0.96

The value of any fuel depends upon the quantity of heat generated and
the temperature which can be obtained. The influence of moisture and
ash upon the heating power of peat is well shown in the following table*:

revere W UU OUeA SMe ch palate oo lacceee cco a aubee ea seevape ome erere moos 6500 calories
VARIED Wilting bo er ASM ci tee sok a is wie ace e 6 eh crsugheeets Soe dees a 6300 calories
OVD EA lG Mer MAS GMa at stare tena es aielclic @ ensarale soit Savors aie ere tae 5800 calories
Dyas PCA eWLM POO Come ln cre oocyte cyaseus or ach alelssorepdisi ere oaudicl ocerens 4500 calories
SSimmnenent with sar water sc: chs oscce te diet gat ches eecens 4700 calories
Same peat with 30% water ....... piBoie eeu ENE ae Rey eee 4100 calories
SAME aCe AWibls OO Toa Wiel lel rsrsvccous cite oieitein epic pore. cosohenel siclesehens 2700 calories
Same peat with 0% water and 15% ash.................. 5500 calories
Same, peat with 25% water.and 0% ash .........5....... 4700 calories
Same speat with: 30% water and. 10% ash ..2 2.5... .+ «00. 6. 3700 calories

It will be noticed that the difference between two samples of peat
having a different content of moisture is greater than that due merely to
the displacement of combustible matter. ‘The loss represents the amount of
heat consumed in vaporizing the moisture. This demonstrates the neces-
sity of preparing peat for use as fuel so as to contain the least possible
amount of moisture.

A comparison of the heating power of peat and various other fuels is
given in the following tables? :

* Hausding, Handbuch der Torfgewinung, 1904, p. 333.
+ First table from Hausding. Second table from Thurston’s Elements of Engineering

Ch eel ly M Bh pe lly
Combined. Held. Ash. Calories.
ANtHTAELLETCOnl sevasxrcienra eer ck 2 3 2 8305
Chanrcoalaiiedisyer- areata 0 12 2 6868
Charcoalee lcillnwalisvareerner eran 0) 0 3 7837
Wioodreaited yar seen hos eects Sa 39 20 1 3232
Wood kiln diy sensei are 49 0 1 4040
Peatens..* Baa Ores OIG 26 25 5 3950
Pentamiarinitachured ee ecco el 30 18 2 4430
B20.
Coal}, amir a Cite set... aoe ohewenc easkess kote sbcusrc cat necciionsie cisiese te 14833 14.98
Coal SHG wi OUSH ees seh tees cierto tsa ae eres Musas ote oie 14796 14.95
Coal lenite sry cis. acca cscs ieee ee ares ee cleaere 10150 10.25
j 2Xer7 | Patel CCU GLO REA eee ey See eh recite tenor inh cee Parting Uae Beer nar 10150 10.25
J EELS] peur ey NiCd ENZO ne th GRRE eer Am ie aa ram oe reise tee Ae 7650 (eas
WYO GES Rei las Gh ys 8 aac ras eet eee cetaks ds coap an et Sear 8020 8.10
A Y/Coye78 aarti beaC6 boa ape ster aan lee be ea earn Moran cae CR ERS ie 6385 6.45

From these tables it will be seen that unprepared peat has a higher

heating value than wood, but is inferior to coal.

COMPARISON OF INDIANA BITUMINOUS COALS AND INDIANA
PHATS.

I. CHEMICAL COMPOSITION :

(A) The extreme percentages of the constituents considered in connec-
tion with the fuel value of twenty samples of Indiana coal, analyzed by
Dr. W. A. Noyes? :

Volatile
Moisture Combustible Fixed
105°. Matter. Carbon. Coke. Ash. Sulphur.
WM p-<Hon Pah 4G 5 ood bic 13.82 45.16 TPIT BS (nre 9.76 4.01
IM bbaltneMb bil Aen 6.8 ool 6.08 Oe 41.80 49 .62 1.06 0.34

(B) Similar data from the analyses of Indiana peats (air dried) :

Minataapher) “2 gay oun a W7ss 61.98 24.30 See 13.82 11.333
Whhiiiobin S5onh64505 8.99 2a 19.08 26.67 4.14 0.74

*Report of State Geologist, 21, p. 105.

=

ays)

Il tHe HEATING AND EvAPoRATING EX¥FECT AS SHOWN BY THE CALORIMETRIC
TEST:

(A) Data from twenty samples of Indiana coal analyzed by Dr. W.

A. Noyes* :
Ye od pol OF Calories. caine sro g
NIGH 10000 6 Re eeer Reo e ee uniC CrenS Oar IC ie ae 13219 7344 13.4
aah Ae eet Sra oy OU ciara Ciao ote 11691 6495 12.1

(B) Data from twenty-nine samples of Indiana peat (oven dried) :
VERSA IINTIIN Gos oe foeet ass) cater ipa % disteus rele ers 10466 5814 10.8
AUT I oases. civ cetera Sates sie eS 4541 2523 4.7
SUMMARY.

Calories. Brn:
1 lb. best of 20 samples Indiana coal tested yields...... 7344 138.4

1 lb. best of 29 Indiana peat tested (oven dried), yields. 5814.6 10.8
1.26 ibs. best Indiana peat (No. 21) equals in thermal

effect 1 lb. of the best Indiana coal (No. 17, Report

State Geologist, 21, p. 106).

1 Ib. oven dry peat, average of 29 samples, yields....... 4288 8.0
falb: coal. -averace of 20°samples, yields... vs. ik noo 6860.8 12.8

1.6 lbs. average peat (oven dry) equals in thermal effect
1 lb. of average Indiana coal.

The cost of preparing the peat, or pressing it into briquettes, must
be considered in a comparison of peat with coal. Some peat briquetting
plants are already in operation in Indiana, e. g. The Indiana Peat Co. of
North Judson, Starke County. This firm estimates the operating expenses
for a small peat plant of thirty tons capacity, as follows :**

HE POEM eGo see x iN tee ese comin sutics cosrnrel se ees olecn.eforerote azo $3 00
INTE Be tae Sia ois ae bas ie SCO EEC ruc oa eae Peete ete
PEM NEM aan later So stoke ciate ee secede atcrere Gite arscenem ais, Shears 4 00
ATIDOVNG cece te ik aipre ei eet eae bias eStore soe sia state ETO eer 5 00
Meta Tier OTIS CNN martes sis ccs stray cscrsie eis stolen abe ane 1 50
PRINIETIMSULMPIECSSE, urcrctens cia cnarsreress tices a ots cratalaes wispelals i A OO

*Report of State Geologist, 21, p. 105.
**Report of State Geologist, 31, p. 99.

RSS TD dg BRODY ee hu anens Sencescoeeramie et ase Gren aR en Dacia ia yar Bsovot c $1 50
(Oi Weee Renee oie ae ean eRe eI Oe ac 5 00
il oy oF bei Re oe: cee ie I ROS re Se ect $26 75

According to this estimate the manufacturing of peat into briquettes
costs about 8&5 cents per ton.

PEAT AS A SOURCE OF PRODUCER GAS.

In ordinary direct firing the object is to effect complete combustion
in proximity to the fuel bed. Within the same chamber the fuel elements
are vaporized, distilled, gasified and completely burned. The first two
processes absorb heat only and there are advantages in separating them
from the point where combustion of the gases occurs and where high tem-
peratures are developed by the heat evolved. The gas producer or gen-
erator accomplishes this. Within it vaporization, distillation and gasifica-
tion result in a combustible gas, which, led away to a separate combustion
chamber, is there burned under conditions favoring a fuller realization of
the fuel value and the attainment of temperatures otherwise impossible.

Even with a close connection of producer to the furnace, and conse-
quent utilization of the sensible heat of the gas, there is a loss of energy,
but it should not exceed 15 to 18 per cent. of the calorific value of the
fuel. Notwithstanding this loss, experience has demonstrated that pro-
ducer gas accomplishes the same result with less fuel. It has made pos-
sible metallurgical operations which were impractical with direct firing,
and materials quite unsuited for heating operations are made available
by previous gasification in a producer. This is true of combustible sub-
stances containing much moisture, as wood, sawdust, peat, ete. The water
may be removed from the gases, which can then be applied to operations
requiring high temperature.

The yield of producer gas from different fuels varies within wide limits.*

Gas Yield per Pound

Material. in Cubic Feet.
Oe are OniiRenl, Ss oesqoudbesbacc Hoop oOOOD AOU SO ODS 104
StiATATSMOLVOU RS COMES sonmc od Su Ue OOOO SUC OCOC dO Og x 75
SLO Wal) COM arr ne esere trois Diakle ees a ols toraesepaeedokete oeonete 55
H Miia nena pers A oot Orn OUD COU Edom COUT COD 45
NiGi le ee oe nao Uaioe d PEGO MSDE Modo re oo oubDOESoOS 35

*R. D. Wood, Industrial Applications of Producer Gas, p. 25 and p. 26.

Oo”

It has been demonstrated by test at the United States coal testing sta-
tion in St. Louis that Indiana bituminous coal can be converted into pro-
ducer gas and that when this gas is burned in a gas engine it yields 2
to 21% times as much energy as could be obtained from burning the same
coal under a boiler.

The advantages of burning coal gas pertain equally to using peat as
a gaseous fuel. The use of solid peat fuel involves a loss of more than
25% of heat, which loss may be reduced to about 15% by first converting the
peat into gas and then burning the gas.

Peat gas is valued above coal gas in the steel industry on account of
its greater freedom from sulphur and phosphorus.

R. D. Wood & Co., of Philadelphia, have made experiments on the
application of Texas lignite in gas producers and have demonstrated its
value as a basis of gas production. This lignite is not far removed in
its chemical composition from peat. Lignite showed moisture 21.86, vola-
tile matter 31.81, fixed carbon 36.85, ash 9.48. The gas made from it is
high in hydrocarbons, and, as a consequence, its flame produces an intense
heat.*

A test of ‘machine peat” from Taunton, Mass., gave 4 cu. ft. of gas
with a calorific power of 654 B. ‘I. U. per cu. ft. from each pound of peat.+
Gas from “cut peat” averages about 1385 B. T. U.

+One ton of compressed peat analyzing: moisture 15, ash 7, fixed car-
bon 21, volatile matter 57, will yield not less than 100,000 cubic feet of
gas of not less than 150 B. T. U. per cubic foot.

Effort is now being made to utilize part of the peat deposits of Ire-
land by using peat for gas producer fuel in electric plants with recovery
of ammonia and other by-products.|| It is estimated that from 85 to 150
pounds of ammonia sulphate can be obtained per ton of peat with 1,780
cu. meters of gas. Acetate of lime, naphta, paraffin and volatile oils are
also obtained. One hundred pounds of dry peat are calculated to yield
675,000 B. T. U. realizable as gas in a Mond producer, which would give
76 indicated horsepower hours in a gas engine, assuming a 30% thermal
efficiency.

Carof has recently improved the well-known Mond process for mak-
ing producer gas in so far as he gasifies poor fuel in a mixture of air

*R. D. Wood, Industrial Applications of Producer Gas, p. 25 and p. 26.
tNorton: Report XV, Bog Fuel.

tT welfth Report Ontario Bureau of Mines, p. 281.

|Jour. Gas Lighting, 100, p. 760. 5

(Elektr. Zeitschrift, March, 1907.

58

and superheated steam. Extended experiments with this modified process
in the Mond works at Stockton show that it is possible to treat directly
wet peat, containing 50% to 55% water, with a simultaneous increase of
ammonium sulphate. The chief result in the success of this undertaking
is to render available the use of wet non-briquetted peat in gas producers.
while the ammonium sulphate obtained as a by-product will assure in
itself a fair interest on the capital invested.

Data concerning producer gas made from Indiana peat is not avail-
able at the present time. There is, however, no apparent reason why it
should not be as satisfactorily used.

In the opinion of the writer, the greatest development of the peat
fuel industry in Indiana will doubtless be as a source of producer gas.

59

Nores oN THE Humm™rine Birp.

WB: VANGORDER.

From information gathered through various sources the humming bird
is not often seen in Indiana after the middle of September of each year,
most of them leaving much earlier than this, while a few tarry longer, even
to the last of September. September 29 is the latest date of their appear-
ance in the State as given by Mr. Butler in his report of the birds of
Indiana. On September 8 I noticed one about the flowers in my garden;
also one on September 9. On September 15 I noticed one again. ‘This
attracted my attention, as I had marked September 9 for the last date for
1907. I decided now to watch more closely the flowers in my garden
and in my neighbor’s garden adjoining.

This was the result of my observations: The daily visits of these
birds being as follows: September 15, three visits; September 16, two
visits; September 17, three visits; September 18, three visits; September
19, two visits; September 20, two visits; September 21, none; September
22, two visits; September 23, one visit at 4:30 o’clock in the afternoon;
September 24, one visit at fifteen minutes past twelve, one at twenty min-
utes of five o'clock and one at 5:30 o'clock; September 25, one at seven
o'clock in. the morning ; September 26, one visit at seven o’clock
in the morning and one at twenty minutes past twelve; September
27, one visit at 6:30 in the morning; September 28, one visit at eight o’clock
and one at nine o’clock; September 29, one visit at fifteen minutes of
eight, one visit five minutes past nine, one at five minutes past ten, one at
ten thirty, one at eleven forty, one at ten minutes of four, one at four
thirty and one at five o’clock; September 30, one visit at twenty-five min-
utes past twelve; October 1, one visit at twelve o’clock and one at four
thirty; October 2, one at three thirty; October 8, one at twelve twenty;
October 4, one at five minutes of twelve and one at twenty minutes past
twelve; October 5, I watched two hours before I saw a humming bird at
' ten thirty, another visit at ten fifty and at five fifteen, one hovering about

a]

a few nasturtiums; October 6, one visit at one o’clock, one at one-thirty

a

and one at five o'clock. October 7 it rained all day and none was seen.

60

October 8 at five minutes past twelve, two came from the north and tar-
ried a few minutes about a bed of cannas and together flew direct south.
October 9 I saw one at twelve thirty hovering about the cannas. It came
from the north and flew to the south. I had noticed the flower garden was
approached by these birds from all directions up to the last two days,
when the visits were made as stated. As I was engaged in school work
my observations did not cover the whole day except in a few cases, but
the record here given is My own.

On October 1 a few persons were asked to make observations, which
they did, and with about the same results as here stated. Two of the
stations were more than two miles apart. Three reported seeing these
birds on October 8 and one on October 9.

It is often stated that the temperature governs the movements of
these birds. ‘The temperature for the time as reported to the weather
bureau by Mr. Charles Geckler is as foliows:

Mazi- Mini- Mazxi- Mini-

mum. mum. mum. mum.
Seplemper laces ee S87 62 September 30.......... 76 41
September 16.......... 87 63 October sneha eee 81 41
September 17.......... 88 63 Octobers2aes sen eee 83 56
September 18.......... 90 66 Octoher shes ees 81 62
September 19) 22.2.5... 90 65 October47k see ones 73 67
September 20..-:....... 89 62 OctobenwDascsis ste aes 75 45
September. 21-3 22 56. 83 62 OCtODEE: Gscs aceraeneees 76 42
September 22.......... (15) 49 OCtODERainc ee scence ral 56
September 28.......... 81 43 Octoberi8 iene eee 66 45
September 24.......... 80 56 October:29.e fae oes 68 37
September. 25.......... 65 36 OctoberAlO ree cece 68 36
September 26.......... fal 38 Octoheralees waoacteee 63 50
Septemberie2 (ric eecar ew 81 50 Octoberalacehuras. eee 56 37
September 28.......... 78 58 Octobernd 3s Se sae 55 31
September29 32) aes ne 59 53

The record for a few days past their last appearance is given for the
sake of comparison.

There was a white frost on the morning of September 25; also on the
morning of October 9. It is also stated these birds will remain as long
as there are flowers. There was an abundance of flowers until October

thirteen, when there was a killing frost.

61

THe Movuutinc MECHANISM IN THE Heaps oF Lizarps.

By H. L. BRUNER.

(Abstract.)

One of the muscles of this mechanism was described before the Acad-
emy of Science several years ago (1). The complete mechanism, which
T have recently described in the American Journal of Anatomy (2), in-
cludes the following more important parts:

1. The veins and blood sinuses of the head.

2. Special muscles which distend the sinuses and raise the venous
blood pressure. One of these muscles (m. constrictor yvenae jugularis in-
ternae) invests the chief cephalic vein at the point where it passes from
the head into the neck. A second muscle (m. protrusor oculi) lies behind
the orbit in close relation to the large orbital sinus.

3. The cardio-accelerator mechanism. During the operation of the
moulting mechanism the number of heart-beats increases and a larger
amount of blood is sent to the head.

In the operation of the moulting mechanism two stages occur. The
first stage is characterized by contraction of the constrictor muscle and
by acceleration of the heart-beat. The veins and sinuses of the head are
distended with blood; the eyes protrude. The second stage is caused by
contraction of the protrusor muscle and others which press upon the dis-
tended vessels and raise the blood pressure to a higher level.

The distension of vessels and elevation of blood pressure aid in exuvia-
tion by stretching the skin and by facilitating the processes of metabolism.
The moulting mechanism may be set in motion in an experimental way
by the application of court plaster, or similar material, to the head.

In snakes and turtles the imternal jugular vein is provided with a
constrictor muscle, but the protrusor oculi is wanting. The simpler mechan-
ism of these forms probably has the same function as the more compli-
eated apparatus of the lizards.

1 Proce. Ind. Acad. Science, 1898, p. 229.

2 Am. Jour. Anat., Vol. VII, 1907, pp. 1-117.

62

THe RELATION OF THE DEGREE oF INJURY TO THE RATE OF
REGENERATION AND THE Mountine PERtop IN THE GAMMARUS.

Mary TT. HARMAN.

INTRODUCTION.

In 1905 in some experiments on the crayfish, Zeleny found that in
the series of crayfish with the greater degree of injury each chela regen-
erated more rapidly than the chela in the series with the lesser degree
of injury. He also found that the members of the series with the greater
degree of injury moulted more rapidly than the members of the series
with the lesser degree of injury. In 1906, in some experiments on the
lobster, Emmel found that in the series of lobsters with the lesser degree
of injury the regeneration was more rapid than in the series with the
greater degree of injury and the members of the series with the lesser
degree of injury moulted more rapidly than the members of the series
with the greater degree of injury.

During the summer of 1905 at the Indiana University Biological Sta-
tion at Winona Lake, Indiana, the author tried some experiments on gam-
marus. The death rate was so great that the number of animals of each
series that survived was only six. and those showed little difference in
the per cent. of regeneration. The series with the lesser degree of injury
showed a little greater per cent. of regeneration than the series with the
greater degree of injury. No observations were made on the relation of
the degree of injury to the moulting period. During the summer of 1907
at the same place the author tried some similar experiments on the same
gammarus. ‘The death rate was again great and the difference in the
per cent. of regeneration was less than in the first experiments. The degree

of injury made very little difference in the length of the moulting period.

METHOD.
The gammarus used in these experiments were obtained from Winona
Lake, Indiana, near the mouth of Cherry Creek. On July 9, 1905, about

two hundred gammarus were taken from the lake near the mouth of

63

Cherry Creek and put in a glass jar partially filled with lake water. On
July 11, sixty of these were selected for operation. The right hind leg was
removed from each of thirty and the two pairs of hind legs were removed
from the other thirty. Each series was put into a glass dish partially
filled with lake water. The water was changed daily. At the end of
eighteen days the death rate had been so great that only six individuals
of each series survived. On examination it was found that some regenera-
tion had taken place and it was thought best to kill those that survived.
They were killed in eighty-five per cent. alcohol. The right hind leg of
each individual was removed and measured under the microscope segment
by segment. Likewise the right second leg was removed and measured.
A comparison was made between the regenerated right hind leg and the
normal right second leg. Also the body length was measured and its
length was compared with the length of the regenerated right hind leg.

On July 8, 1907, the author took several gammmarus from the lake near
the mouth of Cherry Creek. On July $, 9, and 10 the right hind leg was
removed from each of twenty-six individuals and the two pairs of hind
legs were removed from thirty individuals. This time the legs were
mounted in glycerine. Each gammarus was placed in a separate dish.
The animals were fed every five days and the water was changed daily.
Two days after the moult the gammarus were killed in eighty-five per cent.
alcohol. The right hind leg was removed and measured as before. The
length of the regenerated leg was compared with the length of the original
leg.

On July 17 several gammarus were taken from the lake in about the
Same place as before. ‘They were put in separate dishes partially filled
with lake water. The water was changed daily and the animals were fed
every five days. One day after the moult either the right hind leg or the
two pairs of hind legs were removed. The removed legs were mounted in
glycerine. Two days after the second moult each animal was killed in
eighty-five per cent. alcohol. The right hind leg was removed and meas-
ured as before. The length of the regenerated right hind leg was com-
pared with the length of the original leg.

64

‘s9[q4QNq 4 YA par[y oq 07 pousses w9Y} Jo [Je pue SZ] 439] OY} ULI) Jopuys a10UL dJOM SFO] 4YBNT

GZ ZR OdBIOAY “UOHL] SEM JUOMIIINSBOMT OY} 910JOq UO, SEM APOd OYJ»
9°88 "G+F'G+L'8
+IT TT = +66 08 9°88 PST UP e¢ 9 161 ty rg LAB tal mercige ee tae)
p ST Tere o+°9
1 9F1 £L+9°9+1'6
+h ST are +89 G8 ee 1 OF o 61 8¢ 19 L 6 G6 fl G9 Atl ea imma nuhe + g
G61 8 orl ork
GOST 8+4'9+'6
+£0'€T — +8118 Sse ¢ 9st P02 b9 9 ‘8 b 8% 8 9 (hd IN| ee A ana P
b 02 P9+9+'8
o SST F6+'8+4'6
+18 OI <7 +49 TL SS 6 SGT o 61 9 (a) ‘L 8°92 6 ‘8 PGi deli teeta hie, wall £
2 61 ‘Ott 9+ L
Tstt G9+09+1'8
+09 TT Sr +98°99 Se | LSbe Let GP 68 eg 8°02 G9 a9 | Wet: Sami Te Nha BY Rh G
L él GH+6 e+e
L6+h 2+ OT ,
AV Ae, es eae +92 COT ST * T24e | 68 18 | TOT 9°93 16 dL au he wep iean te
6 8+1'8+1 Ol
eB SARE De OEE Ee ae hal eee ee = - ree <6) Pas eeele wee
“yyauo] ‘3.0 ] , nol hi 1 greta lin oN aire. ey
Tee poe as soy poanfumug | mio, | °@ og | “eBoy | “Tog | TmoOL | f Hog | *@ Bog | “T os
-erouosayy |— pene een rovo nO ae ys : I ee a | ee ; ‘zoquinu Bopeye9
“4000 19g “AU Bo] ‘quad 10 ‘day pod
poyesouonoyy do] poywsouodoyy | “dol poyesd ud doy ‘Joy poanturuy)

‘Y saway—'] WAV,

65

+F6'9T

+8631

+ SF 61

“uory
~B1DUITOY
“quad Jog

P66

“YyyBus]
Apog

BLU] 20]
payes0ues0yy

“6L'PS WBBIOAY yozBfNoeo svar yuomFas yszy Oy} JO YIBU] OY, “FSO[ puB YO UOyxOIq O1OM JUOUIBOS 4S1Y PUG ALLO OYL%
aS: ee
D4 O+6'.
+6818 Son Soe r, 9°8IT Lot gg os 9 “Ole 19 “Ae Cy Aegis Me eae eit 9
Go+ao+'9
= = —— |__| —-—_ |__| |_—__ -— Le) ee
Si2-+ Or 6 :
+0616 aes Aes £821 8°06 9 69 SL 8°66 BL 9 TOT ga |e hs G
9+6'9+6°2
16+9'8 +8'TT
+6L°69 [hema Peed! G06 89 8°9 69 P62 16 G8 fit LIES se) Gs Sean ee P
89+8'9+6°9
IED og SR a ae oe ee ae WEAN Alnat TEES
8+6249°01 |
+EF 68 Saar alates! L&s 89 82 16 £96 ‘8 GL O70 Deedee oat ae ake £
S OTB L+T 6 |
|
te SS = SNe ae rs tac by ae 7 Mae ae | Wa
88+ 64901 |
+PT 99 Fe See Ee! G6T a!) co ‘L b 82 8'8 {i NO) aa eee a oe (4
| 9+ O+'L |
| |
| 9°8+8'8+S9 0 |
SRG Dail heer eeeetr eat ears |/0.Q61 P64 o6 8°6 101 6 1z 9°8 88 SOD rales. yg T
¢'6+8 6 +1 OT
ae 3) |
‘3
af aieentaran wo, |e Bog |Z Fog | “TP Bog | Troy | Fag | Zoe | “1 Hog
RIQUOBOYT “WaeUor | *Joquinu Foyle,"
“quad Jaq Bu] ABP ‘ age?
Bol payesoussy Bo] poyesouosoy “Bay posnfuruy,

‘g 8auag—JJ HTAV I,

‘[56—18192]

+809 edvIOAY

8 F+0S+8'F
+119 appre heal (ee £ oe 9& 9 PT 8 FP og SEP Cael ce aan ites pene a ae E ER T “TI-V-89
; "6 +6'E +9°E |
evattt abe NS dinrs PR als. aed, pee! seas ites nn Pe teas ae pee aye
Bu+O9+8 9 | | |
+9°99 WR BMER Ee 7 ONG ot oP oF | O87 (Oe 1 059 BORE web ude Mark acme Ny e's ee temas a Me ‘OI-¥-89
CEtCH+OF | | |
{ | | |
SP+sS+s'¢ | | | |
+L 19 PERS, & OL 6 L& 9°& | o St 8 FP |¢$ CEERI alma ainaieey Owe kena one ners a “8-V¥-89
ETL +9'8 |
one te piece eee Pee Ns aed ees
| | |
ZP+8'7+0'S | |
+8°O¢ Senne 166 Lan 8G | 0 Ft cP 8 fF pO) SP tee ag] sae te ah Serica dc Cae aang Ba 9-V-89
CCOTP STE | | |
| |
| |
U) slants) ug? 2) |
+8°69 STREET Een Gs OF ar | 8°21 9¢ 8¢ PRORE Mian [bgebOne a LUMO Ty 1. tA Nod rane ¥-V-89
GEtOF +E F
O9+E L+H L | |
+E Sg TP Rae PALL 96 9's GP 9°06 09 GL PaeteNLIPy |p oetoks WARD ate seo hak Sa £-V-89
9ET9 ETC PF | |
po+9'o+6'9 |
HSCS . Ee | a 8G 8% 86 | 6 21 iZ 8 9g NO Sea Ny a Arey tal Gee Mae tan ie wae ta NE
Sot8G+8'E | |
ra Se | eS r
3 .uU] : = | : ; here ‘ : reste vt Wena
cs, us BOT, eta 7seG 1 509 [BIOL @ Bag % dag ] dog
uo) oy pounturug, or | |
-B10U9D9Y — —— 7 ‘Jequinu Zo[e}e9
“quan Jaq ‘3 Ul
tO D9] poye1ouesaxy “Boy poayesrouasexy ‘Say pornfuray,
©

‘Pp 8aaV— TIT WIAVy,

i
co

+G°Z9 oBRIOAY

+6°8L

70" OL

“u0ry
~B197009}]
“4090 Jdq

PH PtE SG
PE+9'E+8'E

G+'94+2'9
StC E+ F
“G+9'G-+9°¢
Veto 6's

S7te S+'s
‘E+ 8 +0 'F
8S r+h G+s'¢
CEt8SC+E'E
9+9°9+8°9
€+°§ +6

‘BU
so] pornturuy,

BU]

do] poyesouosoyy

8°01

@ Or

9°6

9 OL

G6

$6

‘TOL

Fe 9%
‘fg ze
| ¥'8 ae

(aa 8%

'g “Sag % “BOS

‘BZo] poyessudsayy

(an O°St
(ae ¥ oT
(ae ¥ 61

T ‘Beg [e}O],

QF

8 FP

de] pornfujuy,

"g saIag—" AT BTAV YL,

nC enn ee ee

‘Jaquinu Boyeye

68

+09 edvieAy

“G+ o+h'¢

+209 Neca, 6 ze ae 9°61 “¢ ZG Bighe 4 [Posen eleven tieriesia ptr salient tat 60T
CEt E+E
6G+8'S+'9 |

+8 °8¢ a eT OVOL ae GE 9¢ | O20 GG 8°¢ [Kise Oliatp red lieeseape aise a ite aap ater ecaer oae 201
GE+3'§ +9

oth | Se a ({——— — = — — ~
G48 P+3¢ |

+9°29 ———— 76 ze ¢ Ze aoe dle 8 8 (SESE) So SEE OSES oa Na A a AC 18
Cacistei crate Gie

ete Se 3 es cane MES ae =
pty pte | | ;

+8°09 Seareraeegeaten ga car rane & | 8°81 ai vt PEGI mapa esigeages gad oe pe “*9)
GGtGGrEeE |
Cytopt¢

+h 09 —— as a8 ara GG 8G iar GF oF CSE ae ee Cigar at ihc Gre AN Aes ce ae 36
GETZ C+tE8G
G+PhS+8°¢

+F' 09 peared, Oe ae 86 re “g Fe Z 91 © 7'C ii = | ODE Pe ATO oraGdn DOCU moon oDooK Ord)
Paiste Grate viet

ef BJO “@ gag ‘GZ Beg “Bag “1G}0 G “Bo "2 “Bas ‘| Bos
“uoy Sa] pasntuiuy TOL, § 995 G 895 T #85 (GOL, § ré [ 39s
~BIIUITAY —--- | -——_—————_—_ — ———— — saquinu Zoyeyeg
*Juod 19[ BU]

Bat poperouasoy ‘doj poyesouazoyy “S91 pomnturay

“VP Satlagy—* A WIAV

69

+G°§¢ evI0AV

C+8 S98

+c'¢¢ Eee ee Nie igs 9% gz re FOI “¢ g'¢ Gig. [ect taten etree ctee sees dee ers an “SOT
tS I i
ie (ean? ite) iy

4+9°#¢ sas as | rare rz rata Paral re tr Qe [iter rere taee eee neice cieleneaa OOr
GGth C+EG
SE+ F+h 7

+9°09 Se ues a) ara rz 9°2 paral ge ; Bp | eta ge ele atte erie cie ne nas ste 16
PCTE7+9S
9F+8 F+0¢

42°09 eaied Senine CN ea 9°72 8's re 9'F1 9'F 8'F BQ 9. \rveere terres tence reese 98
E+E CTFE

|

\ SEtS Eth F

+8°99 ceo cS Ey or Zz 9°% ze ZI ge ge peu Mise ee oe ees toy
PCV STC E

Bu] ; ; i el ia
be “1230, "g “Bac *% Bag “BOQ B40, Bac ri) ‘T “sa
“uo Sa] peinfurug, TOL € 995 6 295 I 5 POL (5 LEIS G 995 [oS

~e19Uad0Y = — “roquinu 3ope}%9

“quad 19g ‘30 ]
52] payessues0y “B9] poyesrsuesey “da, peanturuy)

‘g saag— "TA BWIAV I,

70

Q 09 asesoay gy] estIOAW $2 OBtIOAY

| ; |
41°19 el “OL berrereeteeseces ag ggngmy [oot crentees ge pnp fetectc eee SoU GT a/v fuliee ase eens asaKe - TE-W-89
+9°99 02 eae cagth Ieee cen Op gendtiy |er soe eee 1G Ang |orsreer eee OPAMP st ees eeeane 0l-v-89
— | nat
+L 19 er 9 RonOve Sue ae. vinToOut 6g: inp |e eee GT UA[MP Nua eo ses rmecerian ye OTN secre en 8-V-89
+9°ce cl ¢ Soi ce eros og ae gg Ang [octets GT Ang [pore cetee eee: or Ang | Fan OsOpA nO pody Iuedae g-V-89
+9°89 6L | Fatah lS Cerri ia a aaa Or qsn3ny Rebeca reset shotetoa erates lati 2G Ayn OTD NO .crontr is Ow ature OL Ani | StL a Or OTA aon eG pmo f-V¥-89
|
+g 'e¢ gI foe Voalf2) 8) nt espn enaaeny ciat gz Aine i SOW Sidra eyo clea OO OL sTey | ROW ocaoa Ado ; “9 Ang leper Th diatom ampee e-y-99
+¢°7C 91 € CC ee Wee Aqne ee Il Aque Pee ee 8 Ane \lSarrey ocatenacocwnco: Z-V-89
“q]hoW puodes| “4,NouUr 4s1g
“uol} yun [gun
-elouazey | 4[NOW say uolyerado “q[houl puodves JO 9}Bq) “q[NOMI 4sIy jo aye ‘uoiesedo Jo aud | “JEQUINU DO[eyVy
*4ued Jeg Jaye sAep zozye Shep | |
jo Jequinyy | jo Joquinyy

"Vy sawag— TIA AIA

71

—¢'7Z9 WRIVAW ‘GT adRIOAV

‘g odvI0AY

+2°8L | ral Litem Meche apkpna ee TN ba Zz qsnany tig dhe os nwa elerersle cd alaies 1Z Aqne Pista Arann) mney calle cane a aes ase Or Aqne a athivews coe un (ot elere.crtsian tiene reid “O1-A-89
— ‘gc | eT 6 Ce 1g Ayne ee a er) SI Ayne sVejéhel ele ie Fushe,e totus aisle 6 Ane Ce er Or Oe nea 8-A-89
at =] ee | ee aan
“09 ZI p Cbeee Pe tet rcs Tete a ket det On Jee ed PX aCe | (oh Ayne: Ce etic sete ctne + oe « eT Ayne ee i a ey 6 Ayny PY CO Pee si ta ee cee ae eC 1-4-89
+0°0! ZI L Pa eee Ce Ce rr 82 Aqne PCR CRC Tea 91 Aqne eo tevelt ais ale vy eve .w bye. sem 6 Ayne OF Wrerog mye veliete fave ly altho leste tered G--89
+266 81 Pee np il Ipcasioes aoe gD Ura og Ang occ Tostaaoe ar Amp [occ g Ain |trcccttercse teers 7-4-989
a ETE — 3 = eee

+f Sh eZ z ee Zz ysnany Janene tere terete eseene OL Aqne . x Pe ee ee 8 Ayn eo £-€-89

“4]hOul puodes “4)NoUT 4s1y

‘u0%} {yun Thun
-tiouesey | 4fnowl sjzy | wolyeredo “VMOU puodes jo 9ye(T “yhOur 4s1y JO oye ‘uoeredo jo 0787 ‘raquinu Zoyeyep)
"que. Jog iajye skep | 104ye sfep
jo Joquinyy | jo Jequinyy

‘G sawag—TITA HIGVL

+6 (9 IF elaAY

‘ERT avelaay

+2 09 pL [titi ttetesereeteeteree rene: ep qsngny [occ teens 0g Ainp [ccc ene eee rees 60T
+8 ge I Sy hide Ue ates ioe ee Peed ke It Pk Pa ay Sd OL qysnony Ce ee ee ee ee oo. “1G Ayn Iiineauah a ecobeie ie tiaa aren hg ees Z01
+929 PL oe Neel Cust nsielun sats bana reine: g qendny |v cette 0g Aine | a PRTG seta STIPE ss ouecere avarantesre Para lie rape 18
Se ere ne ;
. |
+f . 09 ZI Pree Ce er eC Ce ey p qsnany Pent RC CNC aC Cr ee ee a Ce ee a er) 9% Ayne | PSC eCeC CMa Ce UC htt CCN aCe Mi eC CC eC fee PC Ya rt 86
+F°09 el] Shale ee th ust SinPatys callelis afin) s: nuslaheie]e) hy: €ee!,0] alle he ele 1Z Aqne ASSN SSS ea ceeds INS ep nee ern te teat eichpe teh a ct nicarahereter: neleaekehciceve CL
iss Daa a! Ve | zs
“uoryriedo |
“u01y pue y[nou
-e1UIFOY m99M494 “yO; Jo aye uorjesado yo a3Rqq ‘yaquinu Zoje}e/)
“quad Jaq sep
yo saquInyy
‘PV saiday— XJ ATAV GE

73

—G'6¢ edBI0Ay “FCT o#tI0Ay
+¢°¢¢ cl Ce ee ee Il qsn3ny Ce er er a er er a 2 2 1% Ane be et ie ACT eM aw Ie ia Yar ew rr i ae te OY Ce ey val ge e0L.
+8'FC (COC OL yendny [oe og Ang [ccc tee eee te es 0Or
49°09 ft a [pyendny [ocr eens ag Ang [occ es 16.
+2°09 (oe oe Q gandny [orccc ccc etree ag Ang [occ cect 9g
+89 A (ee Te Aing [ores e ee Bp Ang [ccc nes LL
“u0lyesedo
“uoly pure 4[nour °
-B19Uuadayy u9eMyoq “J{NOW JO a9R(T ‘uoryesado jo ayeq ‘goquinu Jopeyep
“quad Jog sep
jo Joquinyy

‘{ sauwag—'X AAV,

74

Explanation of Tables—

From the individuals in series A the two pairs of hinds legs were
removed. From the individuals in series B the right hind leg was removed.
The per cent. of regeneration was obtained by dividing the length of the
regenerated leg by the length of the leg with which it was compared.

The animals of tables I and II are those on which the experiments
were tried in 1905. The per cent. of regeneration was also obtained by
dividing the regenerated leg length by the body length.

The animals of tables III and IV are those that were kept until they
had moulted a second time.

The animals of tables V and VI are those that were operated upon on
the next day after the moult.

Tables VII, VIII, IX. and X give the date of operation, date of moult,
the time between moults and the per cent. of regeneration.

Discussion of results—

Table I shows that the average per cent. of regeneration as measured
by comparing the length of the regenerated right hind leg with the length
of the normal right second leg in series A is 82.25. Table II shows that
the per cent. of regeneration aS measured by comparing the length of regen-
erated right hind leg with the length of normal right second leg is 84.79.
This shows that the series with the lesser degree of injury has regenerated
2.54 per cent. more than the series with the greater dgree of injury. This
difference is scarcely enough to take into account.

Table III shows that the average per cent. of regeneration as meas-
ured by comparing the length of the regenerated right hind leg with the
length of the removed right hind leg in series A is 60.8. Table IV shows
that the per cent. of regeneration as measured in the same way as series
A, table III, in series B is 62.5. This shows that the series with the lesser
degree of injury has regenerated 1.7 per cent. more than the series with
the greater degree of injury. This difference is less than before.

Table V shows that the per cent. of regeneration as measured as above
in series A is 60.5. Table VI shows that the per cent. of regeneration
measured as above in series B is 59.5. This shows that the series with
the greater degree of injury has regenerated 1 per cent. more than the
series with the lesser degree of injury. In each case the two series com-
pared were treated in as nearly the same way as possible with the excep-

tion of the degree of injury.

75

Table VIL series A shows an average of 16 2-7 days between moults.
Table VIII, series B, shows an average of 15 days between moults. This
shows that the series with the greater degree of injury has an average
of 1 2-7 days longer between moults than the series with the lesser degree
of injury.

Table IX, series A, shows an average of 132-3 days between operation
and moult, which would make 142-3 days between moults. Table X,
series B, shows an average of 154-5 days between the operation and the
moult, which would make a period of 164-5 days between moults. This
shows that the series with the lesser degree of injury has an average of
1 2-15 days longer period between moults than the series with the greater
degree of injury. An average of the two sets of observations shows prac-
tically no difference between the length of the moulting period of the
series with the greater degree of injury and the series with the lesser
degree of injury. In each case the series with the longer period between
moults has the lesser per cent. of regeneration. Conclusions:

1. The degree of injury of the gammarus has no effect on the rate
of regeneration in the legs of the gammarus.

2. The degree of injury in the gammarus has no effect on the length
of the moulting period of the gammarus.

76

THe INFLUENCE OF ENVIRONMENT ON Man.

By RosBerrt HESSLER.

(Abstract. )

‘he paper traced in broad lines the influence of latitude as seen in
the frigid, torrid, and temperate zones. Factors that bear on the matter
of health and ill-health were taken up in some detail for the temperate
zone.

Local State conditions were then taken up from the standpoint of
the biologist and evolutionist, beginning with the primitive inhabitants,
the Indians; the absence of diseases on account of their environment and
customs was commented on. The white settlers who came in belonged to
a race where elimination through the action of disease had been going on
actively for ages and among whom the more susceptible had been killed
off and were still being killed off, but today largely dependent on modi-
fiable disease-producing conditions.

Individuals or families or strains whose history goes back to Euro-
pean city life may show quite a different reaction to present day environ-
ment than does that of those whose ancestry goes back to country life
with little elimination on account of diseases. The early Jews who ar-
rived in this country were almost exclusively from the cities where the
disease weeding out process had been most severe; the Jews coming in
today are mainly from the country districts where the air conditions are
good, and when these crowd into our dirty cities many fail. Asiatics,
again, coming from the highly unsanitary cities are able to thrive in our
own cities, because they are the survival of the fittest, fittest to live under
unsanitary surroundings.

Among the descendants of the pre-revolutionary immigrants to this
country we have to consider the ancestral urban or rural life, and similar
life conditions since in this country. with its attendant elimination or
non-elimination. A hardy stock transferred to an isolated environment,
as to the southern mountains, is to a large extent exempted from ex-
posure to diseases and practically all the offspring may reach the re

We

productive stage; when removal to the crowded city takes place elimina-
tion through disease is apt to go on actively.

Reaction to environment varies greatly, from a feeling of health to
ilhealth and disease. Pain is to be regarded as a warning from nature
and plays an important role in the process of adaptation to environment.
Some strains or individuals are wholly unadapted to city life with its
manifold disease-producing conditions. Many disease-producing conditions
have been eliminated from city life today, others are more active than ever,
notably the impure air factor.

A study of simple country conditions, of village conditions, of town
and small city conditions may shed much light on the complex city life.
Much of the illhealth and disease of the large city is preventable and the
lives of many can be lengthened. ‘The erection of more hospitals, as ordi-
narily conducted, is not a remedy for correcting the evils of city environ-
ment; the environmental influences are themselves to be largely altered.
Much depends on education and there is urgent need for an institution
that will take up the study of factors operative today.

78

Some Notes on THE Hapits oF THE Common Box TurRTLE

(Cistudo Carolina).

GLENN CULBERTSON.

During the latter part of last July, while passing through an exten-
sive tract of woodland in the so-called “Flats” or “Slashes” of Jefferson
county, I noticed a very unusual number of the common box turtle in a pool
of muddy water. The pool was less than ten feet in diameter and was
frequented by a number of hogs as a wallow.

On removing from the pool the turtles, some of which were visible
and others completely buried in the soft mud, I counted seventy-two. They
were all sizes from two or three inches in length up to eight inches. The
largest had the number 1867 carved on its under side, the number in all
probability having been placed there during that year.

The number of these animals found in this pool is certainly remark-
able. I have spent many hours in the woods and fields of Jefferson and
other counties of southeastern Indiana, and have never, until on this oc-
casion, seen more than two or three of these turtles together, or, in fact,
during any one day.

The explanation of this unusually large gathering of these turtles is
probably found in the intense heat of the ten days or two weeks pre-
ceding the date of their observation. Although the soil was not at all
dry, the heat probably drove them to the pool from all sides. On the
same day I observed two other turtles burying themselves in a muddy
spot but a foot or so in diameter.

When I had returned the animals to the pool, and while observing
them from a distance a number of hogs approached, and in a few moments
several of the largest had each picked up a turtle and were endeavoring
to crush the shells. I watched the performance with considerable interest,
as I had previously supposed that forest fires were about the only enemy
of these turtles. To my surprise the largest hogs, after many attempts,
and with a noise as though cracking walnuts, succeeded in crushing the

79

shells, and surrounded by a group of smaller animals of their kind, squeal-
ing for a share, they ate the contents with evident satisfaction.

I drove the hogs away, but on revisiting the place a few hours later
I found that the hogs had returned, and that they had crushed and eaten
the greater number of the smaller turtles, and some that were as much
as six inches in length.

From these observations it would seem that the hog has been one
of the principal enemies of this turtle, and that in recent years, since few
hogs have been allowed to range the woods and fields, the box turtle has
been rapidly increasing in number.

80)

THE PERONOSPORALES OF INDIANA.

Guy WEST WILSON.

The species of this order of fungi are all parasitic upon the higher
plants and are of two types known respectively as the White Rusts and
the Downy Mildews. The White Rusts (Albugo) are easily recognized by
their milk-white, glistening sori which are produced on the leaves and
stems, and even on the flowers and fruits of various weeds and a few
useful plauts. The Downy Mildews produce white mould-like patches
upon the under surface of the leaves of various plants. To this group
belongs the Downy Mildew of the grape (Rhysotheca viticola (B. & C.) G.
W. Wilson) which is one of our most destructive fungous diseases.

Our knowledge of the Indiana species of the order is in a great de-
gree due to the work of the late Dr. L. M. Underwood, whose ‘List of
Cryptogams at Present Known to Inhabit the State of Indiana”’* contains
a list of fourteen species of three genera on twenty-seven hosts which
were completely determined, besides six additional entries of. hosts by
generic name only. As a result of a study of the material in the herbaria
of Dr. J. C. Arthur and of the author, a paper entitled “The Phycomycetes
of Indiana” was prepared and presented to this Academy two years ago.
This paper contained four additional species of this order, one of them
being admitted on the authority of Dr. W. A. Kellerman. Since this time
Peronospora floerkeae Wellerman has been recorded as a member of our
flora.+

Within the last year the opportunity presented itself of restudying the
material in the herbarium of Dr. Underwood and of verifying the deter-
minations both of fungi and hosts. This resulted in the detection of a new
host and in the reduction of three of the six partially determined ones to
others already listed. Subsequent field work has supplemented the list
both of fungi and hosts until now twenty-two species of six genera on
forty-seven hosts are known from the state. ‘he number of genera
as compared with previous published records is doubled, the number of
species has been increased a third, and the list of hosts almost doubled,

*Proc. Ind. Acad. Sci. 1898: 31-83. 1894.
+Wilson, Torreya, 6:192. 1907.

81

7
In conclusion I wish to most heartily thank those botanists who have
so kindly co-operated with me in this work.

FAMILY 1. ALBUGINACEAHR.

1. ALBUGO BLITI (Biv.) Kuntze.

On Acnida tamariscina (Nutt). Wood, Hamilton, 8 :1907z.
On Amaranthus graecezans L., Tippecanoe, 10 :1907.

On Amaranthus hybridus L. (including A. sp. of Underwood),
Johnson. Putnam, Tippecanoe 1893 :31:—Madison, 8 :1907.

On Amaranthus retroflerus L., Johnson, 1893 :31 :—Hamilton.
7:1907: Madison, 8:1907; Tippecanoe, 10 :1905.

On Amaranthus spinosus L., Montgomery, 1893 :31 :—Hamilton,
7 :1907.

2 ALBUGO CANDIDA (Pers.) Roussel.

On Brassica arvensis (.) B. S. P., Putnam, 8 :1907.

On Brassica nigra (T..) Koch, Johnson, Tippecanoe, 1893 :32 :—
Hamilton, Putnam, 7 :1907.

On Bursa bursa-pastoris (1.) Britton, (Capsella Bursa-pastoris
Moench). Montgomery, Putnam, 1893 :32:—Hamilton, 7 :1907;
Tippecanoe, 5:1906.

On Cardamine bulbosa (Torr.), Britton, Montgomery, 1893 :328.
On Dentaria sp., Montgomery, 1893 :32.

2

Todanthus pinnatifidus (Michx.), Steud. (Thelypodiwn pin-
natifidum Wats.), Tippecanoe, 6:1907. (Arthur) Herbarium
Arthur.

On Lepidium virginicum L., Putnam, 7 :1907.

On Raphanus sativus L., Johnson, Putnam, 1893:32; Hamilton,
7 :1907.

On Roripa armoracea (lL.) A. S. Hitchcock (Nasturtium armo-
racia Fries). Putnam, 7:1897, 7:1907; Tippecanoe, 8 :1894.
(W. Stewart.) Herbarium Arthur.

On Roripa palustris (L.) Bessey (Nasturtium palustre DC.), Ham-
ilton, 8 :1907.

On Sinapus alba I.., Johnson, 1893 :32.

{Date of collection. Other references are to year and page of these proceedings, i. e.,
1893:31.

2 The material in the Underwood herbarium is labeled as above, but listed as C. bul-
bosa purpurea.

[G6-—18192]

82

os

10.

ial,

On Sisymbrium officinalis (l.) Scop., Brown, Putnam, 1893 :32 :-—
Hamilton, 7 :1907. |

On Sophia pinnata (Walt.), Britton (Sisyimbriom canescens Nutt).
Putnam, 1893 :32 :—-Tippecanoe, 5 :1905.

On Sophia millefoliwm Rydberg, Putnam, 1893 :32 (as Sisymbrium
CANESCENS Pp. p.).

ALBUGO IPOMOEAE-PANDUBANAE (Schw.) Swing.

On Ipomoeae hederucea Jacq. (1. nil.), Putnam, Tippecanoe, 1893 :
32 :—Hamilton, 8 :1907.

On Ipomoea pandurata (.) Meyer, Johnson, 1893 :32 :—Tippeca-
noe. 6:1898. (Arthur.) Herbarium Arthur.

ALBUGO PORTULACAE (DC.) Kuntze.

On Portulaca oleracea \.., Johnson, Montgomery, Putnam, Tippe-
canoe, 1893 :32:—Hamilton, 8:1907; Madison, 8 :1907.

ALBUGO TRAGOPOGONIS (DC.) S. F. Gray.

' On Ambrosia artemissiaefolia L., Putnam, 7 :1907.

FAMILY 2. PEHERONOSPORACEHAR.

BASIDIOPHORA ENTOSPROA Rtoze and Cornu.

On Aster novae-anglae L., Tippecanoe, 5 :1907.

SCLEROSPORA GRAMINICOLA (Sacc.} Schroter.

On Setaria sp., Steuben. (Kellerman.) Herbarium Ohio State
University.

RHYSOTHECA AUSTRALIS (Speg.) G. W. Wilson.

On Sicyos angulatus L., Johnson, 1893 :32 :—Tippecanoe, 9 :1905.

RHYSOTHECA GERANTI (Peck) G. W. Wilson.

On Geranium carolinianum L., Putnam, Vigo, 18938 :32.
RuHyYSOTHECA HALSTEDII (Farlow) G. W. Wilson.
On Bidens connata Miihl., Johnson, 1893 :82.
On Bidens frondosa L., Johnson, 1893 :32:—Hamilton, Madison,
8 :1907 ; Putnam, 7 :1907.
On Erigeron annuus L., Hamilton, 8 :1907.
On Helianthus annuus L., Montgomery, 1893 :32.
RHYSOTHECA OBDUCENS (Schréter) G. W. Wilson.
On Impatiens wurea Miihl. (J. pallida Nutt.), Tippecanoe, 18938 :32.
On Impatiens biflora Walt. (I. fulva Nutt., 7. sp, of Underwood),
Putnam, 1895 :32 :—Marion, 5 :1906. es

83

12. RuysorHeca viticota (B. & C.) G. W. Wilson.
On Vitis aestavilis Michx., Tippecanoe, 6:1894 (Arthur), Her-
barium Arthur; Lake, 7:1894 (Arthur). Herbarium Arthur.
On Vitis cordifolia Michx., Johnson, 1893 :32 :—Hamilton, Putnam,
7:1907; Tippecanoe. 9 :1905.
On Vitis labrusca L. (including Vitis sp. cult. of Underwood),
Crawford, Johnson. Montgomery, Putnam, 1893 :32 :—Hamil-
ton, 7:1907; Madison, 8 :1907.
13. BREMIA LACTUCAE Regel.
On Lactuca canadensis L., Hamilton, Putnam, 7 :1907.
On Lactuca sativa L., In Greenhouses, Tippecanoe, 3:1908, (Ar-
thur). UHerbarium Arthur.
14. PeRoNospora ALTA Fuckel.
On Plantago major L., Johnson, Putnam, 1893 :32 :—Hamilton,
8 :1907.
PERONOSPORA CORYDALIS de Bary.

—_
OU

On Bicucula canadensis (Goldie) Millsp. (Dicentra canadensis
DC.), Putnam, 1893 :32 :—Tippecanoe, 5 :1906.

On Bicucula cucularia (.) Millsp. (Dicentra cuclaria DC.),
Montgomery, 1893 :82.

16. PERONOSPORA EFFUSA (Grey.) Rabenh.

On Chenopodium album L. (including Chenopodium sp. of Under-
wood), Johnson, Putnam, 1893 :32:—-Hamilton, 8:1902; Tip-
pecanoe, 6:1894 (Olive).

17. PERONOSPORA EUPHORBIAE Fuckel.

On Euphoribia humistrata Engelm., Tippecanoe, 6:1902 (Arthur).
Herbarium Arthur.

On Euphorbia macuiata L., Hamilton, 8:1907; Putnam, 7 :1907.

18. PERONOSPORA FICARIAE Tul.
On Ranunculus recurvaius Poir (including Ranunculus sp. of Un-
derwood), Montgomery, Putnam,. 1893 :32.
19. PERONOSPORA FLOERKEAE Kellerman.
On Floerkea proscerpinacoides Willd., Hamilton, 5 :1906.
20. PERONOSPORA PARASITICA (Pers.) Fries.

On Brassica niyra (L.) Koch., Putnam, 8 :1907.

On Raphanus sativus L., Hamilton, 7 :1907.

On Sophia pinnata (Walt.) Britton (Sisymbrium canescens Nutt.)
Tippecanoe, 5 :1905.

84

22.

PERONOSPORA POLYGONI Thiimen. (/?. rumicis Aut. p. p.)

On Polygonum scandens 1.., Johnson, 1893 :33 :—Hamilton,. 7 :1907;

Putnam, 8 :1907.

PERONOSPORA POTENTILLAE de Bary.
On Potentilla monsepalensis L. (P. norvegica L.), Hamilton,

7:1907; Putnam, 8 :190T.
Upper Iowa University,
Fayette, Iowa.

Tur BEHAVIOR OF THE CHROMOSOMES IN Pinus ann THUYaA.

I. M. Lewis.

A more uniform interpretation prevails among botanists today con-
cerning the reduction of chromosomes in the spore mother cells of the
higher seed plants than at any time in the history of this most perplex-
ing of all questions. The view once prevalent that the reduction is brought
about by two longitudinal fissions of the chromatin has been almost en-
tirely abandoned, and there is a growing belief which is now almost uni-
versal that a .true numerical reduction takes place as proposed by Weis-
mann several years ago, although this occurs in the first instead of the
second mitosis.

The question of the occurrence of a true reducing division may be
taken, therefore, as quite definitely settled. The investigations which have
brought about this condition have, however, raised new questions which
are almost as difficult. Chief among these questions may be mentioned:
the individuality of chromosomes, the origin of chromosomes from the
spirem and the manner in which the characters are distributed to the germ
cells. Concerning these questions there are various conflicting views. It
is quite generally accepted among cytologists, that the maternal and pa-
ternal chromatin remain in a state of complete segregation throughout the
growth phase of the organism and that they become more or less completely
united at the time of synapsis. The behavior of chromosomes in hybrid
forms has had a great influence in bringing about this conception.

It is concerning the origin of the chromosomes from the resting neu-
cleus and their union in synapsis that the widest difference of opinion is
held. There is one group of investigators among whom Strasburger, Guig-
nard, Allen, Overton and others are prominent who maintain that the
chromosomes of each ancestry become arranged into a complete spirem pre-
vious to synapsis, that these two spirems then approach each other and
apparently fuse side by side into one during the synaptic phase. Follow-
ing synapsis the spirems again separate somewhat and cross segmentation
takes place. The somatic chromosomes which have been so united side
by side become variously oriented toward each other and thus give rise
to the heterotype bivalents typical of this mitosis.

86

The opposite view which has been supported by Farmer and Moore,
Mottier, Shaffner, Juel and others, holds that two spirems are not formed
previous to synapsis. but that the spirem is formed singly and the chromo-
somes are arranged tandem in the spirem. ‘The bivalent chromosomes
are formed by the spirem segmenting into pieces the length of two chromo-
somes. These pieces have often formed loops, but this is not always the
case. Some of the pieces become approximated after cross segmentation.

In the two genera investigated there are no signs of a complete spirem
previous to synapsis. The chromatin content of the nucleus always exists
as rather large granular chromatic lumps connected by delicate anasto-
mosing strands of linen. The number of these lumps is quite large, much
exceeding the number of somatic chromosomes typical of the species. There
is, therefore, no support in these genera for the theory of the individuality
of chromosomes based on the idea of prochromosomes as suggested by
Rosenburg for Drosera and by Overton for Thalictrum.

The first indication that the synaptic condition is approaching is the
withdrawal of the nuclear net work toward one side of the nuclear cavity.
There is no change whatever in its structure or staining reaction. Some
of the chromatin bodies may be seen lying together in close proximity, but
this is not interpreted as an indication that they are preparing for subse-
quent fusion. It is likewise clear that an occasional linen thread follows
for some distance the same course as one lying near it, but this does not
occur with anything like the regularity figured by Allen, Cardiff and
others and is regarded as occurring too irregularly to have any significance.
The synaptic condition is reached while the nuclear content is still in the
form of a reticulum. There is no pairing of chromomeres or of the linen
threads connecting them.

The chromatin emerges from the synaptic knot in the form of a rather
broad spirem or skein which frequently reveals a double nature and this
is interpreted as due to a longitudinal fission. The spirem becomes quite
evenly distributed throughout the cavity. It may frequently happen, how-
ever that the more regular spirem gives rise to a very irregular and some-
what lumpy reticulum before cross segmentation. Formation of the chromo-
somes now takes place. The chromosomes consist of two somatics, which
have either become approximated together or were not separated from
each other during segmentation.

The chromosomes now become arranged in the spindle plate by the
action of the fibers and their distribution to the daughter nuclei takes

87

place. This is affected in such a way that the members of the bivalent
are separated and one member passes entire to each daughter nucleus,
thus bringing about a qualitative division. The retreating chromosomes
undergo longitudinal fission as they pass to the poles. Having arrived at
the poles, they soon break up into smaller pieces, lose entirely their iden-
tity and form a complete resting nucleus. This condition lasts but a short
time when a spirem is again formed which segments into rod shaped
univalent segments. These segments have been quite generally assumed to
be identical with the ones which appeared at the poles of the spindle at
the close of the first mitosis, but since these segments were seen to lose
their identity entirely there is no basis in fact for such a supposition.
If these segments are not identical with the grand daughter segments of
the first mitosis then this division is not equational. The first division
in both genera is qualitative and reductional; the second may be conceived
either as equational or qualitative.

The investigations on which this preliminary report is based will ap-
pear later in a more complete form, together with figures illustrating the

entire process of mitosis.

88

THe Insect GALLs oF INbDIANA.

MEL T. Cook.

During the past summer I have received a large number of species of
galls from Mr. F. C. Greene, of New Albany, Indiana. This material was
collected in the vicinity of Winona Lake and contained a number of well
defined species, including 17 species not recorded in my ‘Insect Galls of
Indiana.”* In order to facilitate the work of future students on the
fiora and fauna of the state and also to give records of distribution to the
more general students who may be working over the material of a greater
territory, it has been considered advisable to publish descriptions of these
additional species.

Mr. Greene's collection and also my own Indiana collections made some
years ago contain a number of species which I am unable to determine
at this time and. in fact, many which I believe to be undescribed. My
studies were made primarily from the standpoint of the botanist, and as
all students of these groups well know there are frequently many difficul-
ties in making satisfactory determinations unless the insects are taken-
into consideration. In most cases I did not have the insects, but made
my determinations from the galls. However, I hope to take up the re-
maining species at a later date and make satisfactory disposition of them.

A summarization of the facts presented in this paper gives the fol-
lowing; an addition of 17 new species of galls making a total of 82
species known to the state. An addition of 5 new genera making a total
of 38 genera.* The host plants named in this list gives us two new orders,

five new families and ten new genera of host plants.

*29th Annual Report of the Department of Geology and Natural Resources of Indi-
ana, 1904, pp. 801-867.

*My Insect Galls of Indiana gave 25 Genera, but Aldrich in his Catalogue of North
American Diptera (1905) transfers Cecidomyia strobiloides O. S. to the genus Rhabdo-
phaga, Cecidomyia solidaginis Loew to the genus Dasyneura, and Trypeta solidaginis
Fitch to the genus Durosta, thus bringing my list from 25 to 28 genera.

89

The new orders, families and genera are indicated in the following
table by italics.

Orders. Families. Genera.
NSEALIVGCT Ces Whe St eaniclentarigins coc = SaIERCEAG mai oe sos ewes Salix
RTA AICS —..< cens so ates PIM CLAMNGAGEHE eos oe tee ss Hicoria.

Quercus.
FROST OSE gone cstete ule ees taaesteve TRVOSR NG Et ee he pa Sic BRE Spiraea.
SeEpLaG aeSia cans coc era Balsamimaceae .......... Impatiens.
UH AIIN BIOS eas sc so cose WITHCGAGR aes sais cc Hees we Nits:
MPLA QCS = Sak. oo Reales WG CCIIRACENC) ernie cette ie ere Vaccinium.
POVNOMAGLES Oo 2 oe Se TROUT Bre Penara Sa ees ete Glecomda.
Monarda.
Cichoriaeede 222202. 2 ee Lactuca.
A MOTOSICENE sar. bo eee Ambrosia.
SPOTTY OS WAND 1 CoS meee ae WE ee et Be wea Ses ee ee Vernonia.
(SOMPONTENE 9 Fuck ewe Seat ee Irigeron.
Pudbeckia.
HYMENOPTERA.
CYNIPIDAE.

DIASTROPHUS SIMILIS Bassett.

Diastrophus similis—

Bassett, Can. Entom. Vol. XIII, No. 5, May 1881. p. 95.

Smith, N. J. State Bd. Agriculture 1899.

Ashmead, Trans. Amer. Entom. Soc. 1885. p. 294.

Dalla Torre, Cat. Hymen. (Cynipidae) Vol. II. 1893, p. 108.

Cook, Ohio Nat. Vol. Ili, No. 7 1903, p. 428.

Cook, Ohio Nat. Vol. IV, No. 6 1904. pp. 119, 120.

This gall is spherical in shape varying from 1 to *4 inch in diameter.
with one and sometimes more larval chambers in the center. The larval
chamber is held in place by very coarse fibres which radiate from the
center to the thin outside covering. It is a pale green color and occurs
on the leaves and petioles of Glecoma hederacea. Sometimes two or more
galls coalesce forming a compound structure. It was at first described

90

by Bassett from Connecticut and Long Island material in 1881. It has
since been reported from New Jersey by Smith and the writer has cor-
lected it in Ohio.

ANDRICUS SINGULARIS Bassett.

Cynips quercus-singularis—
Bassett, Proc. Entomol. Soc. Phil. Vol. Il, 18638. p. 326.
Cynips singularis—
Osten-Sacken, Proc. Entom. Soc. Phil. Vol. LV, 1865, p. 555.
Walsh, Amer. nt. Vol. II. 1870. p. 184.
Osten-Sacken, 7th Rept. U. S. Geol. & Geog. Sur.-Zool. 1873 & 74. p. 567.
Andricus singularis—
Bassett, Amer. Nat. Vol. XVI. p. 246.
Mayr, 20 Jahresber. Comm: Oberrealsch. I. Bes. 1881. p. 28.
Ashmead, Trans. Amer. Entomol. Soc. Vol. XII. 1885, p. 295.
Gillette, 27th Ann. Agri. Rpt. of Mich. 1888, p. 469.
Gillette, Psyche Vol. V. 1889. p. 186.
Gillette, Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci. Vol. J. Pt. 2. 1890-91. pp. 110-114.
Packard, 5th Rpt. U. S. Ent. Com. (Forest Insects) 1890. p. 105.
Beutenmiiller, Bul. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. Vol. 1V. No. 1. 1892. p. 256.
Dalla Torre, Cat. Hymen. (Cynipidae) Vol. Il. 1893. p. 100.
Smith, N. J. State Bd. Agriculture. 1899.
Beutenmiiller, Amer. Mus. Jour. Vol. IV. No. +. 1904. p. 15.

This gall is formed in the spring and early summer, Is spherical, green
and varying from 4 to 14-inch in diameter. The larval chamber is oblong
and is held in its place by radiating fibers. The outer covering is smooth
and thin. It is so placed in the leaf that 2-3 project below the lower
surface and 1-3 above. It very much resembles Amphibolips inanis O. S.
except that it is smaller. It has been reported by Bassett from Connecti-
cut and has since been reported from New York, New Jersey, Lowa, Michi-
gan. The writer has also collected it in Ohio. The reports thus far indi-
cate that it is restricted to Quercus rubra.

(Note.—The gall described by me in Insects galls of Indiana. 29th Rpt.
of the Dept. of Geol. and Nat. Res. of Indiana 1904, p. 886, as Holcaspis
centricola O. S. was an error and should have been described as A. sin-
gcularis Bassett.)

91

AULUX TUMIDUS Bassett.

Aulax tumidus—
Bassett, Trams. Amer. Ent. Soc. Vol. XVII. 1890. p. 92.
Beutenmiiller, Bul. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. Vol. IV. No. 1. 1892. p. 263.
Beutenmiiller, Amer. Mus. Jour. Vol. [V. No. 4. 1904. p. 23.

Aulax tumida—

Dalla Torre, Cat. Hymen. (Cynipidae) Vol. II. 1898. p. 125.

This gall is a large, thick, knotty, irregular, rather ovate swelling
which may be so small as to be scarcely noticeable or which may attain
a length of two or three inches and a diameter of one inch. It is usually
near the summit of the stalk and covered with the short flower stems of
the panicle. The larvae are numerous, each enclosed in a thin transparent
chamber and imbedded in the soft pithy tissue which fills the gall. It
occurs on Lactuca canadense and possibly on other species. It was first
described by Bassett who does net state the source of his material. It has
since been reported from New York and the author has collected it in
Ohio and Delaware. It no doubt has a very wide range and always oc-
curs on Lactuca.

SOLENOZOPHERIA VACCINIT AShmead.

Solenozopheria vaccimi—
Ashmead, Trans. Amer. lint. Soc. Vol. XIV. 1887. p. 149.
Dalla Torre. Cat. Hymen (Cynipidae) Vol. II. 1893. p. 57.
Beutenmiiller. Amer Mus. Jour. Vol. IV. No. 4. 1904. p. 22.

A-more or less irregular, usually reniform gall varying from % to
1 inch in length. occasionally longer and may be as much as %-inch in
diameter. Green and rather pithy in summer, becoming brown, hard and
rather woody in winter. Contains a large number of larval chambers.
It occurs on the stems and is restricted to one side, causing the twig to
be so curved as to occupy the concave surface of the gall. This gall was
first described by Ashmead from collections on Florida material of Vac-
cinium corymbosum. He also states that he received what appeared to be
the same gall on V. pennsylvanicum from Mr. Wm. Brodie, of Toronto,
Canada. It has also been reported from New York by Beutenmiiller. The
writer has collected it in Delaware on V. corymbosum and another unde-
termined species of Vaccinium. Collected in Indiana on V. corymbosum.

Ne)
i)

TENTHREDINIDAE.
PONTANIA DESMODIOIDES Walsh.

Nematus salicis desmodioides—
Walsh, Proce. Ent. Soc. Phil. Vol. VI. 1866: p. 257.
Norton, Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc. Vol. I. 1867. p. 211.
Dalla Torre, Cat. Hymen. Vol. I. 1894. p. 259.
Nematus inquilinus—
Walsh, Proc. Ent. Soc. Phil. Vol. VI. 1866. p. 260.
Norton, Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc. Vol. 1. 1867. p. 2138.
Provancher, Can. Nat. Vol. X. 1878. p. 57.
Provancher, Faun. Wnt. Can. Hymen. 1883. p. 190.
Dalla Torre. Cat. Hymen. Vol. I. 1894. p. 230.
Pontania inquilina—
Marlatt. Proc. Ent. Soc. Wash. Vol. III. 1895. p.
Pontania desmodioides—
Marlatt, U. S. Dept. Agri. Div. Ent. Tech. Ser. 3. p. 40. 1896.
This gall has been recently described by Marlatt as follows: “The
gall is found on Saliz humilis. It is smooth, flattish, fleshy, sessile, yellow-

1)
er)
for)

ish green, monothalamous, semi-circular in general shape like the seed of
a Desmidium or the quarter of an orange. It is about equally divided be-
tween the two surfaces of the leaf; no rosy cheek. Generally there is but
one gall on the leaf; one leaf was seen with three upon it. Length 0.25 to
0.50 inch.” It has since been reported from Massachusetts, New York,
Indiana, Illinois, Missouri, and Canada.

PONTANIA POMUM Walsh.

Nematus salicis pomum—
Walsh, Proc. Ent. Soc. Phil. Vol. VI. 1866. p. 255.
Norton, Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc. Vol. I. 1867. p. 216.
Walsh and Riley, Amer. Ent. Vol. II. 1869. pp. 45-49.
Riley, 9th Rept. Ins. of Mo. 1877. p. 20.
Thomas, 10th Rept. Ins. of Ills. 1881. p. 68.
Provancher. Nat. Can. Vol. XIII. 1882. p. 292.
Provancher. Can. Hymen. 1883. ). 741.
Cresson, Syn. Hymen. Amer. 1887. p. 157.
Lintner, 5th Rept. Ins. of N. Y. 1889. p. 175.
Dalla Torre. Cat. Hymen. Vol. I. 1894. p. 259.

93

Nematus hospis—

Walsh, Proce. Ent. Soe. Phil. Vol. VI. 1866. p. 261.

Norton, ‘Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc. Vol. I. 1867. p. 218.

Dalla Torre, Cat. Hymen. Vol. I. 1894. p. 229.
Nematus pomum—

Beutenmiiller, Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. Vol. IV. No. 1. 1892. p. 263.

Beutenmiiller, Amer. Mus. Jour. Vol. IV. No. 4. 1904. p. 28.

Cook, Ohio Nat. Vol. IV. No. 6. 1904. p. 148.
Potania hospes—

Marlatt, Proc. Ent. Soc. Wash. Vol. III. 1895. p. 266.
Potania pomum—

Marlatt, U. S. Dept. Agri. Div. Ent. (Tech. Ser.) No. 3. 1896. p. 36.

This gall has recently been described by Marlatt as follows: “The
gall S. pomum found on Salix cordata and very rarely on S. discolor. A
smooth, fleshy. globular, or slightly oval monothalamous gall, like a minia-
ture apple, 0.80 to ©0.55-inch in diameter. growing on one side of the mid-
rib of a leaf, and extending to its edge or beyond it. ‘The principal part
of the gall projects from the under side of the leaf; very rarely it is
bisected by the leaf. Color greenish yellow, sometimes with very rosy
cheeks, especially the upper surface, and often with little dots.” It has
been reported from New York, Ohio and Illinois. Mr. Greene’s specimen
is on S. discolor(?).

DIPTERA.
CECIDOMYIDAR.
ASPONDYLIA COSPICUA Osten Sacken.

Aspondylia rudbeckiae conspicua—
Osten Sacken, Trans. Amer. Hnt. Soc. Vol. III. 1870. p. 51.
Beutenmiiller, Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. Vol. XXIII. Art. XVII. 1907, p.
387.
Beutenmiiller, Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. Vol. IV. No. 1. 1892. p. 278.
Aspondylia conspicua—
Aldrich, Cat. of N. A. Dipt. 1905. p. 156.
Bergenstammn & Low, Verh. Zool.-Bot. Gesell. Wien. Vol. XX VI. 1876.
p. 69.
This gall was first described by Osten Sacken as follows: ‘They were
in one case nearly round. of the size of a large apple; the other was an

94

aggregation of galls of various sizes, forming a large excrescence.”” It has
been reported from New York, North Carolina and Ohio. It occurs on
Rudbeckia triloba and R. laciniata. Mr. Greene’s specimen was on R.

laciniata.

CECIDOMYIA CARYAE Osten Nacken.
Diplosis caryae—

Osten Sacken, Stettin Entomol. Zeit. 22. 1861.

Osten Sacken, Mon. N. A. Dipt. I. 1862. p. 191.
Cecidomyia caryae—

Aldrich, Cat. of N. A. Dipt. 1905. p. 159.

This gall was originally described by Osten Sacken as follows: “Gall
subglobular, smooth, seed-like, 0.05 to 0.1-inch in diameter, with a small
nipple at the tip. in summer they are yellowish-green and their shell is
soft; in winter they become brownish, and the shell, although thin, is
hard and woody. They begin to grow in June. I gathered them in Octo-
ber, when the larva was full. grown.” He does not state the species of
Hicoria on which he collected his material. Mr. Greene’s Indiana ma-

terial is from H. alba.

CECIDOMYIA CARYAECOLA Osten Sacken.
Cecidomyia caryaecola—

Osten Sacken, Mon. of the Diptera of N. A. Pt. I. 1862. p. 192.

Glover M. S. Notes from my Journ. Dipt. plate XI. fig. 24.

Beutenmiiller, Amer. Mus. Jour. Vol. IV. No. 4. 1904. p. 27.

Smith, N. L. State Board of Agri. 1899.

Beutenmiiller, Amer. Mus. Jour. Vol. LV. No. 4, 1904. p. 27.

Aldrich, Cat. of N. A. Dipt. 1905. p. 162.

These galls are pale green, elongated, onion-shaped with a pointed
tip. Found through the summer in clusters on the under side of the leaves
of the hickory. Frequently associated with C. holotricha. This gall has
been recorded from New York and New Jersey, and I have collected it
near Sandusky, Ohio. It is said to occur on several species of Hicoria.
The Ohio and Indiana material were on H. alba.

CECIDOMYIA (?) VERNONIAE Beutenmiiller.
Cecidomyia (7?) vernoniae—
Beutenmiiller. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. Vol. XXIII, Art. XVII, 1907. p.
389.

95

This gall was recently described by Beutenmiiller as follows: “Green,
sometimes tinged with red, rounded or elongated and of the texture of the
stem of the plant. Inside it is soft, fleshy, and contains a single larva in
an elongated narrow channel. Length about 7 to 12 mm.; width 5 to
9 mm.”

“When dry the gall becomes brown and pithy inside and somewhat
resembles a cherry pit. It is usually situated on the midrib of the leaf
ot the ironweed (Vernonia noveboracensis).”

Mr. Beutenmiilier reports it from Black Mountains, N. C., Staten
Island, N. Y., and Indiana; the last records being from the writer’s ma-
terial. I have since collected it in Delaware. Mr. Greene’s specimen is
on Vernonia gigantia.

CECIDOMYIA SALICIFOLIA Osten Sacken.
Cecidomyia salicifolia—

Osten Sacken. Proc. Ent. Soc. Phil. Vol. VI. p. 220.

Aldrich, Cat. N. A. Dipt. 1905. p. 163.

This gall bears a striking resemblance to the gall of Cecidomyia gledit-
schiae O. S. The leaves are folded along the midrib, the edges uniting and
the sides bulging out, thus forming a pod like structure which may be %4-
inch or more in length.

This gall was first described by Osten Sacken from material collected
by Wim. Couper in Quebec. He also states that he found a similar gall
at Nahant on Spiraea tomentosa and I have received from Dr. L. M. Under-
wood, of Columbia University, what appears to be the same gall on SN.
tomentosa. I have collected what appears to be the same gall in Ohio on
S. salicifolia. Mr. Greene’s Indiana material is on NS. salicifolia.

CECIDOMYIA VITICOLA Osten Sacken.
Cecidomyia viticola—
Osten Sacken, Stettin. Entomol. Zeit. 22. 1861.
Osten Sacken, Mon. Dipt. of N. A. Pt. I. 1862. p. 202.
Williams, Sth Rpt. Ent. Soc. Ont. 1877.
Saunders, Ins. Inj. to Fruits. 1883. p. 292.
Beutenmiiller, Bul. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. Vol. IV. No. 1. 1892. p. 272.
Smith, N. J. State Board of Agri. 1899.
Beutenmiiller, Amer. Mus. Jour. Vol. 1V. No. 4. 1904. p. 32.
Aldrich, Cat. of N. A. Dipt. 1905. p. 164.

96

Cecidomyia vitis lituus—

Riley, 5th Rept. Nox. Ins. of Mo. p. 119.

Riley, Amer. Ent. Vol. II. pp. 28 & 118.

This gall may be either bright green or crimson red in color or any
variation between the two. It is narrow, elongated, conical, sometimes
slightly curved at tip and about 1-3 inch in length and usually on the upper
surface of the leaf in great numbers. It occurs on many species of Vitis
and has been reported from Ontario, New York, New Jersey and Missouri.
The writer has also collected it in Ohio. Saunders describes it in his
Insects Injurious to Fruits. So far as I know it does not attack the culti-
vated grapes and does not usually seriously injure the wild species. Riley
reports it as attacking V. cordifolia, V. riparia, V. labusca and V. vulpina.
Mr. Greene’s Indiana material was on V. bicolor.

CECIDOMYIA IMPATIENTIS Osten Sacken.
Cecidomyia impatientis—

Osten Sacken, Mon. Dipt. of N. A. Pt. I. 1862. p. 204.

Osten Sacken, Amer. Ent. Vol. IT. 1881. p. 638.

Glover, M. S. Notes from my Journal. Pl. XI. fig. 16.

Bentenmiiller, Bul. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. Vol. [V. No. 1. 1892. p. 269.

Smith, N. J. State Board Agri. 1899.

Beutenmiiller, Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. Vol. IV. No. 4. 1904. p. 30.

Cook, Ohio Naturalist. Vol. IV. No. 6. 1904. p. 140.

Aldrich, Cat. N. A. Dipt. 1905. p. 162.

A spherical, green, semi-transparent, succulent swelling at the base of
the flower or leaf and containing one or more larval chambers Sometimes
two or more galls unite forming a compound structure. Usually scarce.
Has been reported from New York, New Jersey and Ohio, and the writer
has recently collected it in Delaware. Mr. Greene’s material was on Jm-
patiens biflora and the Delaware record is for /. aurea.

CECIDOMYIA MONARDAE Brodie.

Cecidomyia monardae
Brodie, Biol. Rey. of Ont. I. 1894. pp. 109-111.
Aldrich, Cat. N. A. Dipt. 1905. p. 162.
Mr. Greene’s specimen answers the description of Brodie’s species
which so far as I know has not been reported since Brodie’s original de-

97

scription. Brodie’s description is as follows: ‘The galls appear like swell-
ings on the flowering branches of Jfonarda fistulosa, from 10 to 22 mm.
long, usually a little curved and retaining the quadranglar form of the
branch. The average of the side of the square of 20 of the largest was
3 mim., and ot the branches below the galls 1.5 mm.”

“This gall is usually found on plants growing in open woods, it is
very rare on robust plaints growing on exposed situations.”

“The walls of the gall are hard and woody but thin; the interior is
a soft, pith-like substance, through which the larva tunnels freely, and
on which it feeds.”

CECIDOMYIA EREGERONTIS Brodie (?)
Diplosis eregeroni—

Brodie, Biol. Kev. of Ont. Vol. I. No. 1. p. 18.
Cecidomyia eregerontis—

Aldrich, Cat. of N. A. Diptera. 1905. p. 162.

This gall was described by Brodie as follows: ‘“Variously situated
from base of stem to tips of branches of flowering panicle; galls irregu-
larly cylindrical, tapering at both ends, spindle-form, those on the branches
more or less spherical; from 1 to 15 galls on a plant, seldom more than
10;° found usually on diminutive plants such as grow on wet, sandy places
or on high dry banks.”

“As yet I have not found these galls on robust plants.”

“The galls appear like swellings of the stem or branches, uniform in
color with the p!ant, the surface with feint longitudinal lines, slightly ele-
vated ridges and ragged transverse elevations, resembling leaf scars.”

So far as I am able to determine this gall has not been reported since
the original description, but during the past summer I collected what ap-
pears to be the same gall at Lewes, Delaware. All collections to date
have been on Hrigeron canadense.

TRYPETIDAE.
OEDASPIS GIBBA Loew.
Trypeta gibba—
Osten Sacken, Psyche. Vol. III. No. 72. 1880. }. 58
[7—18192]

98

Oedaspis gibba—
Loew, Mon. of N. A: Dipt. Vol. 111. p. 260.
Aldrich, Cat. of the N. A. Dipt. 1965. p. 606. i:
The determination of this gall is uncertain, but it is probably Osten

Sacken’s J. gibba. which wus described from material collected by Mr.

J. Boll, Dallas, Texas. on Ambrosia sp. Osten Sacken’s description is very

short and as follows: “The gall is an oblong swelling of the stem. prob-

ably terminal.” Mr. Greene’s Indiana specimen was on A. trifida.

HEMIPTERIA.
APHIDAE.
PHYi.LOXERA DEPLANATA Pergande.
Phylloxera deplanata—

Pergande, North American Phylloxerinae. 1804. p. 205.

This gall has been reported from the PD. C. by Pergande, who states
that it is very similar to P. semen Walsh. He describes it as follows:
“The leaves of some of the smaller trees are often literally covered with
the galls of deplanata which then produce a sickly, yellowish and crumpled
appearance thereof. By the end of June the galls are deserted, brown and
dry, or else have completely decayed, leaving innumerable holes in the
affected leaves, seriously affecting the health of the tree. When but few
days old (first week in May) these galls resemble minute yellow specks.”

“The transverse diameter of the mature galls varies from 1 to 5 mim.;
height about 1 mm.:; walls rather thin above and beneath and semi-trans-
parent. Upper surface projecting but little above the plane of the leaf,
convex, usually with a shallow fovea: frequently not central and ocea-
sionally with a slight central elevation. Under side more strongly con-
vex, sometimes almost conical, the nipple usually more or less flattened
and. generally Jeaning to one side, as if pressed down when young; with
the orifice usually oval, though sometimes more or less rounded, and
which before maturity is perfectly closed and densely fringed with short
pale hairs. Color aboye either reddish with depression yellowish, or al-
most entirely greenish-yellow; below purplish, or dull greenish-yellow.
Many of the galls are conjoint, i. e., contains from 2 to 6 or more stem
mothers, together with a large number of eggs and sexual individuals,
the cavity being completely crowded.”

Pergande reports this gall on J/icoria tomentosa. Mr. Greene’s speci

men was on //. alba.

99

A ProBABLE ORIGIN OF THE SMALL Mounpbs or THE LOWER
Misstssrppr AND Texas Coast.

ALBERT B. REAGAN.

Noting several articles “On the Origin of the Small Mounds of the
Lower Mississippi and Texas,’ in Science Vol. XXIII (Mr. P. J. Farns-
worth, pp. 583-4; A. C. Veatch, p. 35; Irving H. Wentworth, p. 819), leads
me to make a few suggestions on the subject. In the region mentioned
these mounds are very numerous, too numerous, it seems, to be Indian
mounds, except the class of mounds mentioned by Mr. Irving H. Went-
worth.

The mounds mentioned by Mr. Wentworth are, no doubt, of Indian
origin. While with the Apache Indians some years ago, the writer saw
several mounds of this type constructed. All these were erected not as
places for sacrifice or any ceremonies of that sort, but as places jor cook-
ing the tuber-root of the Agave americana. In this cooking process, a
shallow pit is first dug and lined with cobble-stones. A fire is then built
in it and kept burning till the rocks are at white heat. Wet twigs (or
grass) are then placed in a thick layer over the live coals and rocks. On
these the Agave tubers, a wagon load or more, are quickly piled, and over
these, after they have been covered with twigs or grass, a thick layer
of cobble-stones are piled. All then is covered with wood, which is ig-
nited and kept burning for about twelve hours, while the Indians dance
around it. When the rocks are sufficiently cool, after the fire has been
let die down, the top is removed and the cooked tubers taken out of this

’

peculiar oven, packed in baskets, and taken to the distant ‘“‘tepees,” leay-
ing the rockpile with an elliptical. practically flat top. Probably the
mounds mentioned above were constructed for the same or for similar
purposes.

Concerning the other mounds of the region, may they not be due to
mudlump formation in a former geological epoch ?

In an article on “The Exceptional Nature and Genesis of the Missis-
sippi Delta.” Ff. W. Hilgard states (Science, Vol. XXIV, pp. 861-866) that

“inudlumps are now being upheaved in the channel of the lower Missis-

100

sippi,” that “mudlump formation is at present the normal mode of pro-
gression of the visible delta into the gulf, the principal mudlumps rising
immediately inside the bar, where the current excavates the river bed so
as to relieve the superincumbent pressure.” As to the origin of these mud-
lumps, Prof. Hilgard further states in substance (loc. cit.) that “in the
Mississippi delta region there is an impervious blue clay bottom reaching
out into the gulf for about twenty-eight miles beyond the present mouths
of the river,” that “superimposed on this is a semi-fluid blue clay stratum,”
and that ‘over this in the swamp-delta areas are deposited sandy bar
material much faster than the former can escape to seaward under pres-
sure. Consequently, wherever the river removes the superincumbent sandy,
gravelly deposits, the pressure on the areas adjacent forces the semi-fiuid
clay to the surface in the form of mudluimps. Escaping gases also seem
to aid in this mudlump formation.”

Now the mounds of the lower Mississippi-Texas region are not likely
identical with those of the delta proper in formation; but may they not
have been made in a similar manner: that is, on the principle of “creeps”?
If on an impervious bottom at the time the region in question was being
formed, there was a semi-fluid layer reaching any distance inland, as the
shore line advanced or receded. and this was being covered with another
lnyer faster than it could creep seaward, whether the superficial layer
was brought thereby wind or water, mudlumps would certainly have been
pushed up in all the spots where the latter layer was thin or wanting.
These, when dried, would become mounds.

101

Somer PECULIARITIES IN THE VALLEY Hrosion or Bia Creek
AND 'T’RIBUTARIES.

GLENN CULBERTSON.

Big creek and tributaries in Jefferson county, Indiana, present some
interesting features in their erosive work. The most striking of these,
presented by a map of the stream and its affluents are, on the one hand,
their almost uniform flow in a westerly direction, or, on the other hand,
in a course almost at right angles with those flowing westward.

These characters are clearly shown in the northerly courses of Lewis
and Little creeks, while their tributaries flow in a westerly direction. The
same is true of Big creek and its other tributaries, aS may be seen in the
central and northern parts of the map. Clifty creek, a smaller stream
emptying into the Ohio just below Madison, has the same peculiarities, as
has also the upper portion of the West Fork of Indian Kentucky creek. In
these cases the main stream flows south, while the tributaries enter from
the east and northeast.

Another interesting feature so noticeable in certain parts of Big
ereek and its larger tributaries, where the flow is either northerly or
southerly, is their remarkably meandering courses. We have been taught
that meanders have been found almost exclusively in streams of gentle
slope and with banks of alluvial soil. Both of these characteristics are
entirely wanting in the valleys here referred to. In the case of several
of the meanders the stream after flowing from one to two miles around
a curve, returns to within a very short distance of the starting point.
The banks of the stream, as well as the sides of the valley, where the
meanders are prominent, are almost perpendicular cliffs on the convex
side. These cliffs reach the height of 100 to 150 feet in the lower portions
of the stream. The concave side of the meanders have gentle slopes from
one-fourth to one-half a mile in length.

The peculiarities in the valley erosion of these streams is largely due
to the structure of the rocks. The rock strata of this region dip gently
towards the west and southwest. The amount of this dip in the more

102

eastern parts of the county is not more than ten or twelve feet to the
mile, but it increases to fifteen feet or more in the western part of the
county.

The streams flowing into the Ohio directly have had to erode their
valleys through the very resistant upper Hudson, Clinton and Niagara lime-
stones. Consequently their courses are short and gradients very steep.
The Wabash-Ohio divide in this part of Jefferson county is in places but
one or two miles from the Ohio river, and at a comparatively short dis-
tance from the outcropping edges of the resistant limestone formations
mentioned above.

Big creek and tributaries have not yet succeeded in lowering their
beds to these resistant rocks, except in a very few places. Their erosive
work has been in the softer corniferous limestones and New Albany black
shale of the Devonian formations. ‘The stream beds, in general, follow the
dip of the rocks. In places the bed of the stream is upon the same layer
of rock for long distances. Excellent examples of this may be found
in the bed of Harbert’s creek, between Volga and Smyrna church, as well
as along parts of Middle Fork and Big creek. The dip of the rock strata
has had much to do with the long, gently sloping streams flowing west-
ward. hs

The tributaries. that flow in an easterly direction and against the dip
are very short and their gradients very high. In many of them the water
pours into the main valleys over falls located but a few hundred feet from
the main stream. In one case an underground stream pours forth from the
face of a cliff into the principal stream. ‘The easterly flowing tributaries
eroding their beds largely or entirely in the black shale have cut some-
what longer courses than those in the limestone, but in no case do they
even approximate the length of the westward flowing tributaries.

The meanders of these streams are in all probability a consequence
of the variable resistance of the rocks followed by maximum erosion on
the convex side of streams. They are probably consequent on the slope
of the original land surface, although they may have been somewhat
modified by the thin mantle left by the glaciers.

Pp wp

Big Creek.
Lewis Creek.
Harbart’s Creek.
Middle Fork.
Little Creek.
Clifty Creek.

&

103

104 ee,

ELectTeoLytTic PropucTION cr SELENIC ACID FROM
Leap SELENATE.

F. C. MATHERS.

Mentzer* has shown that the electrolysis of a solution of copper sel-
enate results in the deposition of metallic copper upon the cathode and
the formation of selenic acid in the solution. To obtain pure selenic acid
the copper selenate must first be carefully purified by recrystallizing be-
fore electrolysis. In the experiments that are described in this paper,
lead selenate was used as the salt to be electrolysed on account of the
ease with which it could be prepared and purified.

Selenic acid was first prepared by oxidizing selenium dioxide in a
uitric acid solution with potassium permanganate. After the precipitate
of manganese dioxide had been removed by filtration, the selenic acid in
the filtrate was precipitated as lead selenate by the addition of lead nit-
rate. Lead selenate is very insoluble in water and so can be filtered and
easily washed free from the other salts in the solution.

For electrolysis, the lead selenate was placed in a platinum dish that
was filled with water. The platinum dish was used as the cathode and
a platinum wire coil was used as the anode. The resistance of the solu-
tion was very high at first, but it rapidly dropped as the electrolysis pro-
ceeded and the free selenic acid was formed.

To determine the amount of selenic acid that was formed during an
experiment, the electrolyte was filtered and the acid in the filtrate was
titrated with standard sodium hydroxide solution.

The current yield was best with low current density at the cathode,
hot solution, and a large quantity of lead selenate upon the cathode, and
decreased by the addition of powdered lead to the lead selenate. An in-
crease in the volume of the solution or the use of a mercury cathode were
without effect. The current yields were quite low—the maximum being

about 12%.

*Mentzer, Compt. Rend., 127, 54 (1898).

105

The per cent. yield of selenic acid from the lead selenate was best
with room temperature, thin layers of lead selenate upon the cathode, and
occasional stirring. 0.3 gm. of lead selenate when electrolysed with a cur-
rent density of 0.8 amperes per sq. dec. gave a yield of 95.4% of the theo-
retical value. Under the same conditions 3 gms. of lead selenate gave a
yield of 78.3%.

University of Indiana, Nov.. 1907.

106

Resutt oF Heating a MrxturE or AMMontIUM NITRATE AND
ManGANESE DIOXIDE.

JAMES H. RANSOM.

Practically all the work on catalysis, in which the oxides of the metals
were the catalytic agents, has been undertaken with those substances which
on heating decompose with the evolution of oxygen. It has been thought
by some of those who have given the subject careful investigation that,
in the case of manganese dioxide, at least, the reaction is one of alternate
exidation and reduction of the catalytic agent. The arguments are’ not
conclusive, however, so that the question whether the manganese dioxide
acts as a simple contact agent or takes a chemical part in the reaction
remains unanswered.

It occurred to the writer to try the effect of catalytic agents on sub-
stances which, on heating, decompose without the formation of oxygen.
It was thought that if the catalytic agent acted simply as a contact agent
the temperature of decomposition would be lowered but the products
would be the same as when the substance was heated alone; but if the
action were chemical the products would be different, perhaps more or
less oxidized than when the substance was heated by itself. It was rec-
ognized, however, that if the action followed the latter supposition it
would not of necessity demonstrate that all so-called cases of catalysis were
chemical. Among the substances easily available for such an experiment
is nmmonium nitrate, which, as is well known, decomposes quite smoothly
into nitrous oxide and water. The temperature of decomposition is 205°.

At my suggestion, therefore. Mr. O. C. Haworth, who was then study-
ing the effect of various catalytic agents, undertook the preliminary in-
vestigation of the effect of heating ammonium nitrate in the presence of
different oxides, among them being manganese dioxide. He established the
facts that the decomposition takes place at a lower temperature than
when the nitrate is heated alone; that little if any oxygen or nitrous oxide
is produced; that the gas evolved is nitrogen.

107

On consulting the literature it was found that in 1877 Gatehouse pub-
lished a short note in the Chemical News giving the results of an experi-
ment on heating a mixture of these substances. He observed that the gas
was nitrogen, and from its volume he developed an equation to explain the
reaction. According to him each molecule of the oxide reacts with four
molecules of the nitrate; producing six atoms of nitrogen and a molecule
of manganese nitrate. he presence of the last substance he does not
seem to have confirmed; and as the temperature to which he heated the
mixture was above that at which manganese nitrate decomposes it ap-
peared doubtful that the final products were as he thought. The work be-
gun by Mr. Haworth has been continued by the writer and the nature of
the reaction made more nearly complete.

In our earlier experiments some difficulties were encountered and
some facts observed which modified the procedure in the later work. First,
it was found most difficult so to regulate the temperature that the reac-
tiou would go smoothly and in one direction. The action would proceed
at about 200° until nearly one-half of the gas had been evolved, and then
suddenly without apparent cause the therinometer would suddenly mount
te 300° or more and brown gases be evolved in such quantities that the
stopper and connections would be forced out with explosive violence. It
was thought at first that manganese nitrate was being formed in the
earlier stage of the reaction and later was decomposing with evolution of
heat; but experiments with this substance showed that it decomposed in a
regular manner between 130° and 185°. But by heating for a time to
210°-220° and then cooling to 170° as the action proceeded it was found
possible to regulate the decomposition and get consistent results.

It was also noted that after extracting the residue to determine the
amount of soluble material the ayueous solution was very strongly acid
with what appeared to be a nitrogen acid. The residue left on evaporation
consisted of unchanged ammonium nitrate, and at times of a trace of a
manganese compound.

In the succeeding experiments the apparatus was so modified that the
gases could be passed through water to absorb the acid, and then collected
in a large gas burette made with litre cylinders and filled with dilute
alkali.» About equal weights of ammonium nitrate and manganese dioxide
were placed in a distilling flask connected with the acid absorbing bottle
and the air in the apparatus replaced with nitrogen. The mixture was
heated to 170° and then connected to the gas burette. Afterwards the

108

temperature was raised to between 220° and 230° and mnaintained there
until the gas was abeut one-half evolved. The temperature was then
lowered to 170° and kept there until the action was nearly complete, when
it was again raised to 230° as long as a gas was being evolved. Finally
it was cooled to 170° and the burette disconnected. Any oxygen in the
burette was absorbed by pyrogallate (usually a small amount) and the
nitrogen measured. Nitrogen was passed through the generator to sweep
any acid vapors into the water, and the amount of acid determined by
titrating against standard alkali. The residue was extracted several times
with boiling water and the water evaporated in a platinum basin. The
small amount of solid found on evaporation consisted mostly of unchanged
ammonium nitrate.

In three closely agreeing experiments carried out as described the
following figures were obtained:

1. 2.0079 gms. ammonium nitrate gave 500.5 ec. (corr.) (=0.6286
gms.) free nitrogen, and 0.7252 gms. acid (calculated as nitric).

2. 2.8955 gms. ammonium nitrate gave 635.6 cc. (corr.) (=0.7983
gms.) free nitrogen and 0.9998 gms. acid.

3. 3.8527 gms. ammonium nitrate gave 820 cc. (corr.) (=1.025 gms.)
free nitrogen and 1.1000 gms. acid.

In these experiments the average ratio of free nitrogen to acid is
1:1.15. This ratio approaches very nearly to that for two molecules of
nitrogen to one of the acid, viz., 1:1.125. The equation which best corre-
sponds to this ratio is as follows:

5 NH,NO,—2HNO,+4N,19H.0.

Reiset and Mellon have shown (Journ. fur Practische Chemie, 29-365)
that when ammonium nitrate is mixed with platinum sponge and heated,
decomposition begins at 160° and that the products are nitrogen and nitric
acid. The equation by which they express the reaction is identical with
that given above. It is unlikely that the platinum enters into the reac-
tion, though it is stated that an insoluble platinum compound is produced.
I have not been able to confirm this latter statement. If the platinum does
not enter into the reaction, but acts as a true contact agent, then there
seems no reason for believing that the manganese dioxide, in this reaction
at least, acts in a chemical way.

It is possible that an intermediate product containing manganese may
be isolated; and this will be the object of further research.

109

te MarxHematics oF Haut.

H. O. GARMAN.

Haul or the average distance earth is moved when taken from exca-
yation and placed in embankment has been the source of much discussion
at different times for many years. For a review of the literature on the
subject, “Overhaul,” the writer will call attention to the “Proceedings of
the American Railway HWngineering and Maintenance of Way Associa-
tion,” for 1906, vol. 7, pages 357 to 428. Among the contributors. to the
subject will be found Italians, French and Germans, but it seemed to
excite more interest among our American engineers.

The methematics of haul deals, of course, with the methods of com-
puting haul and overhaul, but it is the purpose here to discuss more par-
ticularly the means for locating the center of mass. ‘These centers of mass
may be located by any one of four methods, two algebraic and two graph-
ical. All four methods for locating the center of mass fail completely
for the volumes adjoining the grade point unless several extra interme-
diate sections are taken.

In all the calculations a close rapid approximation was used at these
points

Z
When the ground was a plane surface, the volume next the grade point
Was assumed at least a wedge, and the center of gravity then taken 4
the length of the wedge from its base. When the ground was a parabola
in longitudinal section, the center of gravity was taken 2 of the length
between section and grade point from the section.
The four methods of computation were carried on under the condi-
tions of the three general types of profile, i. e.:

110
Gro.

Ora

(LA
Gro

I Gg

NG

The above figure is Case 111, and shows the ground a porabola in longi-

tudinal section. This case most nearly coincides with the actual condi-
tions, for haul, of any of the three cases, and any variance discovered here
in the results of the four methods are about what would occur in actual
practice, while those discovered under Case If ave limiting values.

It being the object of the writer to discover the greatest variance that
could occur, thus ebtaining limiting values, most of the computations were
under Case II, with a few test investigations under Case III, to obtain
values that would be encountered more often in practice.

Method No, 1 depends. upon the general form that the center of gray-
ity of individual prismoids is located a distance from the mid-section to-
ward the larger section a distance

i Geeta Ca oe Moments

SS are and Haul = - -
fa Gilg Ae YVolumes.

For all practical purposes it is exact.

112

Method No. 2 depends upon the general form that the center of gray-
ity of each individual prismoid is located in from one end a distance
equal to

A

Re eon
A’ A. + A’

“

That is to say. it is located inversely proportional to the end areas, and

+>Moments
Haul

Volumes.
It gives results always in favor of the contractor and on very short
hauls is rarely in error to exceed say 3.0 per cent. and on long hauls rarely
if every exceeds 0.5 per cent.

Method No. ®% depends upon the general proposition that the position
of half mass point is approximately the position of the center of mass
and graphically looks like figure below.

Haul equals the mean length of the two sides of the given tropezoid
and the pay haul equals the aera of the tropezoid. This method gives re-
sults always in favor of the contractor and on very short hauls is rarely
in error to exceed say 4.0 per cent., and on long hauls rarely in error to
exceed say 6.0 per cent.

Method No. 4. the last one treated in this report. depends for its re-

sults upon the area of the mass diagram.

"

Haul

The pay haul is equal to the area of the rectangle which has for its

V

115

TOo7Q/

base the haul, and its altitude the total yardage or maximum ordinate,

the product of the two being also the area of the mass diagram.

If the points are connected by a curved line it will give practically

the true result. but if the points of the diagram are connected by straight

lines as is recommended by most engineers, and aS was done here, it gives

values always against the contractor; on short haul being in error as

high as 6 per cent., and on long haul about 1.0 per cent.

Final summary in tabular form:

Method.

Center of Gravity

Max. Error in ¢.

Number.| ‘General Form. of Individual Short Haul. | Long Haul.
Prismoid.
=M eA Ae ae |
ee. = Correct Correct
No. 1. | Haul = sv x GAra’ || (Practically). | (Practically).
»M A |
No. 2 Haul = — [Y =!1 ae 3 + 0.5
| =V A A+A’ |
- |
Haul = Length of chord |
No. 3 through middle of Maxi- |...................... + 4 + 6
mum ordinate.
Total Area Diagram
No. 4. Haul = — a rs —6 —1

Total Yardage

[S—18192]

114

Fauna OF THE FLORENA SHALE OF THE GRAND Summit SEc-
TION OF Kansas, AND REMARKS ON THE DEVELOP-
MENT OF DerRBYA MuuLtistrIATA MEEK AND HaybDEN.

EF. C. GREENE.

The Grand Summit section of Cowley county, Kansas, has been fa-
mous as one of the Classic collecting grounds of Kansas and many large
collections have been made there. It could probably be classed as Permo-
Carboniferous, very near the base of the Permian. The region was first
studied by Broadhead in 1882 and the account published in 1888 or 1884.
He says, “We now come to speak of the ‘Permian’ or limestones of the
‘Flint Hills, reaching, in Elk, Greenwood and the eastern half of Butler
and Cowley counties. from 1185 to 1700 feet above the sea, including about
500 feet thickness.’’*

Only the top part of broadhead’s section concerns us. Numbering from
top down, it is as follows :7
. 1. 134 feet, including beds of impure drab limestone, shaly and
crumbling, with occasional shale beds. with red shales 30 feet from bot-
tom.

2. d feet of bluish-drab or drab limestone containing many good char-
acteristic fossils, including Eumicrotis hawni, Myalina perattenuata, Avi-
culopecten occidentalis, etc. (This bed is persistent wherever its associated
strata are found.)

3. 10 feet of shales, the lower red.

4. 10 feet of rough limestone.

5. 27 feet of shales with thin shaly limestone beds.

6. 4 feet of flag-like limestone; a good building stone.
7. § feet of shelly buff magnesian limestone.
Ss. 4 feet of shaly Fusulina limestone.

9. 4 feet of cherty limestone; abound in Fusulina cylindrica, the
fossils often appearing in relief: the chert of deep blue. sg

*Trans, St. Louis Acad. Sci., Vol. 1V., Pt. 3. pages 486-487.
Loe. Cit.

115

10. 18 feet limestone and shales abounding in Fusulina cylindrica.

11. 2 feet drab magnesian limestone.

12. 28 feet shaly sandstone.

He considered all above number twelve of this section as Permian
which would make the base of the Permian about the horizon of the Em-
poria limestone of the recent geologists.

“Mr. George I. Adams has also described in a somewhat general way
the section along the line of railway through Moline, Grenola, Cambridge,
and Winfield.” |!

In 1896 Prof. Prosser hastily examined this section. He determined
number 27 of this section to be the lower part of the Strong limestone.
The Strong or Wreford is now supposed to be the base of the Permian.

In the field season of 1904 Prof. Beede made a detailed section at
Grand Summit as follows :§

29. Shales, blue with calcereous sheets and millions of

LOSS See seray! tebced econ kets Fete ener ce ahaa val eae ketenes sere eee 15 teet 0 inches
Le LMESTOMES > DINLGT CLAY Ge 1e5s river c-vichSies, al fyeceue oloremhercene rele parce OO) Se)
27.- Shales, blue, yellow above.............. Sea ty ee Daeee Ome se
26: Shales and shal yA liIMeStOnes ss. vies cles ace eee ee cesta el > geneous Ope az
25. Limestone, somewhat massive, weathering light...... Shes Ones
24. Shales, calcareous, and impure limestone............ Ue agp rps Ut e cess

23: Shales, clayey, with calcareous layer; very fossilifer-
ULSI CES oar Mises Parser lets Sains» foto soe wo oe eo gS Me SUE we dbaetialioyisy a TES 30 Me
22. Limestone, clayey, nodular, and clay shales. Some

POSSI jae sani saat ay Sunit aiakn Maree hs eo does Coca aons oeaps 3 ee Oras t
21.. Shales, yellow and blue with calcareous lenses, sea

URCHIN Spe oca te Pees epee a) OM Jee ewer o is Gather ihe «hy Fs yee Oa tenes
PO peSOVETEs = fiVG srCC LO esse aiarsen tel eee ayicnen at ole, antbaina ic carats wecanens fo yemaootied Oe r =
A) ares SEN eh Gy eTCN cette a cied sacar asteedarel cent iettese aye woe a, acre tate eccheleperehe see ip OF oraiss
See INA LOS FeO LU Ger Mie eucidaretean sine ee as octane sbatconera Sa encia. cote are loye | ose oad Ure
Pen haniestone: blues Massive se. ato Lek Saos eso oe TEES SS
16. Shales, yellow and red (foot of limestone near base)... 10 “ O “
15. Limestone, massive in one layer ...............20- SRiCARRAD Gin ee
14. Shales, VellowiSh=calcarecoustisc sc reins oie ok cosueee ere dt chi noms eat
13. Limestones, FSU ANE WY Ore lc te cs am RR aE Op eal

|Prosser: **The Permian and Upper Carboniferous of Southern Kansas.’’ Kan.
Univ. Quar., Vol. VI, No. 4, 1897. Series A.

ZBeede and Sellards, Stratigraphy of the Eastern Outcrop of the Kansas Permian.
The American Geologist, Vol. XXXVI, August, 1905, pages 83-111.

116

12) SDAICS esa wrenssens sparenegoiochons eusdpa lands <r sacendceliatnyios sueesue enelemseeee ek eae ML GG bee raIN GLa
11. Limestones, two thin ones ........ Sica estrone BO ee 3 sare Oita Fact ss
TOSSE SHALES) a0 eiecekcters wretstencrses pais Scraeiatate pavecicgarets Fe pec sae Oic: Ssys aC oa
9. Limestone, buff to brownish, large Fusulinas and
Civaany bay waver Woneie [RUAN Sonam onodacono dads 4 Sirals tee be, ere) area
SEES NCLA VG ce tanten: tence tener swenseelioueh ones SUSE Ma Me rei eine te OO es
7. Limestone, shaley to massive ................ poate aii, SS. ease aimee
GH eShaless -yellOwasiireto sever aiusnensrncncssseene siete secperenerenene MEME
5. Limestones, thin, with shale partings............... 3 7 oe Oe
4. Tiimestone; massive; nsiwor LaVerse. 5 ge i6 ee ewicln tee cets ee Be A er
8. Shales, yellowish, with calcareous layers richinfossils 9 “ QO “
2. Limestone, dark colored, in thin layers, full of
pelecypods ....... Be ce ete aetna Cara Sekorrcees so Ae Oe
1. Shales, red and blue, in creek north of the cut, east
of the trestle over the small creek................ dba eee Dea 0°
4 Lo) 20 Peta Ini oN ian eereeaner naar eaten nies Ne mcnen eka, aebepeeer arc 132 feet 7 inches

Numbers 24 to 29 inclusive, are of the Neosho member of the Garrison
formation, 23 represents the Florena shale, number 22, the Cottonwood
limestone,§ 10 to 21, inclusive, the Hskridge shales, 7 to 9, the Neva lime-
stone and from 6 down to water-level, the Elmdale formation.

The collections upon which this paper is based were made in the
summers of ’04 and ’05 by Prof. Beede and were taken from number 23 of
the foregoing section, that is, the Florena shale.

The lists of this fauna which have been published up to the present
time include about thirty-nine species. In Beede’s Grand Summit collec-
tion we find 74 species. In the following list, the numbers given may be
taken as representative of the fauna in the southern extension of the for-

mation. The following are found to be the characteristic species :

JD SLDD AOSTA) ease peo ain mh heaenot ocean See si zssohatetoro CEST EEE seared OOO
Qe Orania sham OGEStAlecsscn cere crore stat Bn Se A fant Se oe eae ty eg Me cies Nts
See AS SLMNUL Aa rAle OMe iiss ks gex cues ve rencila: syncs cece Coed suet cielo Dhow eeecoiee eas Meemeocin es!
AS SPrOduchis tSemitetieulabUSins sists. serie sien tons Sai one eases 00 tee eae 39
i POP FOGUCEUS! MEWLASGCEMS IS s.crcsecsreve rote oucrne telaue cotonstlen- om io taiian ceo Walteyaeemonanent .. 84
6. @honeteseranulifera 2... ee nee (angele aes sslnene aoe
(er ADETD Ya NCE ASSA Use eee el oacn e ereTa et ondce neo SEE Be ie ee oh eae TH ec css TKS)

{This statement is based on the field work of Prof. J. A. Yates in 1905.

SPenMec el ais Subial COSPsatalis = create) cee ue lic ere onsi"eife, Swlien.tha sn 'ejaical we elieispoceiayace vane 31
Gees NOM OPOLA Spiess tis eaeewslomca ea neuehons i vicia oie orenaitey of spaobet leet tra apepenes« 30
LOsse ANTS CUSiCS Whey sea Ne eee neces ebeta ae) «arson Sessa oe vate eure ators 30
Meledans ES satel leas: DOCU Cli kre tay ter seaae omnes b tetas oF opuicuniwts Tes jere, ooatione) WUE skein atre 100
ie Aare DECOOU AD EU tele tus ote ote cee tae, ©. Crass, fe cocenw leis ath iwhauspay Sie) sve e ors aps tabs 25
aly PeetE COTE DS ISU CEY elas ms cpp ner sewn ver or nates ey ne FOSNE claves oes ato feastnan Muna. ck oemee cuaeTe 128
aS NUCH Anas DeOMIS trial caer CUCM iele. fs) suaie cassis ie sieds Sesce-< sissies ceieiel lw susueliens 28
yee AV CULO PEGCLEM KOCCHGIIAUILS oy eis cet sce ie yencieye vaste: onset l/s elope Gaels = pels muerte. 40
Gers ClLOCY POM SMe ics vk cist cisnes eh Toc ees sks Sieg ec tpeie erste sigvetcle sesre aise ine 200
Ndophels WLMOT Ais CHEV SAIS prery ieee erancpar-is ctaiet oe. 5 stecseeuecem cists ok do eva eh hehene 25
[Rooms CHLETOPD MONE SPiraraiereracecss bate teactecuche ne te Scloroh cia) oepe Pocereeeigt a seerateenis ala misiteew 39
19220 Gastropod at W.GuSMAMOSPeClOS <0 Foie sie che itieseiee sch hae le Chale wes 500

This list comprises one species of Foraminifera, seven of Brachiopoda,
two Bryozoa; two ostracods, four pelecypeds, and four gastropods.

The Fusulina can not be said to be characteristic of the formation as a
whole as it is very rare farther north. The brachiopods, as a general rule
are somewhat larger than normal.

One of the most interesting species in the collection is Derbya multi-
striata Meek and Hayden. We find the first account of this species by
Meek, under the name of Orthisina umbraculum(?) Schlotheim. He de-
scribes it as follows:

“Orthisina wmbraculwm(?) Schlot. sp. Petrefact. I, p. 256, et 2, p. 67.
We find in Kansas ranging from 16 to 19 of the foregoing section, many
specimens of a large species of Orthisina, having almost the form and other
characters of O. wnbraculum, excepting that the striae appear to be more
numerous. According to Koninck that species has about 108 striae on each
valve, while on our Kansas specimens, we count from 160 to 200; conse-
quently we suspect it to be a distinct but closely allied species. If so we
would propose to designate it by the name of O. multistriatum. We find
it at Fort Riley and at several localities between there and Blue river,

also in the same position on Cottonwood creek.’’**
This species is not very abundant in the Florena shale, but in the shale

bed just beneath the Wreford limestone, that is, in a horizon higher than
this, it reaches its maximum development and becomes one of the pre-
dominating species of that fauna. Its characters are a high cardinal area,
and a hinge line shorter than the greatest width of the shell. These char

**Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., 1859, p. 26.

118

acters hold throughout the life history of an individual. Vrosser was the
first to refer this shell to Derbya.yy

On referring to de Koninck’s figure of his Orthis wmbraculwin Schlot-
heim|||| the striking similarity will at once be apparent and by comparing
this figure and description with that of Bronn,§§ of the Hiffel Devonian
(apparently after examining the types), the difference between the typical
O. wnbraculum and de Koninck’s specimen, and the similarity of the latter
with the American species at once becomes apparent. Koninck’s description
gives his species 108-109 striae and if this is true, it is hardly identical
with the American species as this (and de Koninck’s figure) give 160 to
206 on a specimen of the same size. As to the question of the name of the
American species, it is distinct from O. uwmbraculum and Meek’s term will
take precedence for the American form. If they are identical, as seems
probable, it will also apply to de Koninck’s shell.

On comparison of typical specimens of this shell with the description
and figures of Hall and Clarke’s Derbya cyibula it will be seen that they
are all identical. Vhis duplication is dué to a habit of Mr. Meek’s of
describing a species under one term, then at the close of the description
stating that in all probability it does not belong to the species referred to
but is probably a new species, then proposing the name at the end of the
whole description.* |

Qne of the specimens obtained was fortunately covered with young
specimens of whose relation there can be no doubt as Derbya multistriata
is the only Derbya in this horizon at Torrence where these specimens were
found. The smallest specimen measured a trifle over 1 mm. wide. In a
specimen 5 mm. wide the mesial septum is well developed.

The high cardinal area is well illustrated by the measurements of a
small specimen. ‘The pedicle valve length was 114mm. and width 3 mm.
The cardinal area was nearly square and measured 3 mm. x 2 mm., or larger
than the pedicle valve. At no time in its development was it seen to have
a form identical with the typical adult D. crassa. ;

++Kansas: River Section of the Permian and Permo-Carboniferous Rocks of Kansas.
Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., VI, p. 40, 1894.

Description des Animaux Fossiles de Koninck, pp. 222-224 and PI. XIII, fig. da. b.e
et fig. 7,.a, b, ec, et Pl. XIII bis. fig: 7, a, b.

22 Lethaea Geognostica Bronn, pp. 368-363 and PI, II’, fig. 11, a. b, ¢.
“*Pal, N. Y., Vol. VIII, Pt. I, page 348 Pio ibs fies2—3-

SSL Co ONES ies Cea nitas

ee

w w w NOY NNNNNNNY NY BR BH KBR HP BP BB KB eB et
SSESSRSASREKERSSRESSHASARHHES

. B4.

LIST OF SPECIES.

NTS TAINTED Ss ores pecatancos com eeheree are seshe isla dalle cecal seals saul ste pate mudi or plentiats
Lophophyllum profundum Edwards and Haime.................
@rinoideasp:- (plateszand" Seoments 1. sensi beara ces lars ties ens
CeLiocrinus= heMISHHETICUS TGS HUM) c.42 cays hte wites ne bye he eos, eyes
PH OMGOCIOATIS espa (SINC) sarotete renee arse: stsvalei'eyls oes ailey ores ceekerisio tater
ATEHEOCIGATISsSD (SPINES AMO PU ALES)) crc pict ore'erersi ol > nee eters se wyfelenclle, credence
Rhombopora Jepidendroides Meek 9: .. 2. 2.0. ce ati ce ee ts eee
SLENOPOLA CAL DONATIAL FOV OGLMEI)<:5, 9 tasterats cters) -- Sere bince aie) ser oleveleya ats
MENESTOI ATS orn ersicnss sic ars diets. el Sere) aah she we chaver ob cuesemeibpe lolvated olero-sterene eke
MIS tT OU A aS laeetere, © clidevercitegs stir ste talateia ene wicialn glehononraraiet sare nie eidecl leans is iste
Sireblotrypa prises. Gabp and: HOM ni. 6s cic eis bole) s wiz ee oie ers ye-
SOO TODOT AMES Dees eters srouevaiese acces aes ole oromdenane oe eletaray nie lena epee a alel seca ete
A PAINTL SCUS ESD cb. ten tenets ace crces eo che. auohe lotanase.eeey sual wsieder aegusraus e/svehe/ ayer slelal ore
LEVER LOY ADE als] Acs Aenean ene cOne tia eae a el cae ior NORCO ERC Be Caer OS eee es rem Oe
SRVOZ ODE SDscierac e Pa sneered SyeEARRIG Seri eel aenets ete dette at steneceinra ye
SUV. OZOH SRY aiaieay hates ac cece pe tenses epee Cea chaleteiee pal epe a poy eb oed i SUsl STA © oe teller cel elle als
OLDICHOId esas CONVEX Ac (SMU hes eisnste cages) cise olasmistensiads craved eesranerestro the
Cranianmodestas white ands St. GOWN: ites es lverseneals/eraicr eget = space oe
SELOPMaALOSTARSP Ee, serena scenes eee tenet oat Saettey has eee da eeoiers ys ac ehehegece tay suamole
Dielasma hovidenss GMOLrtOm)s ..xasieiceiers heme te oleve tice pied svereinte eins eaters ile
Seminilarare en tiara GS Mears ya anne osteredocke « eleher ate Sle tee wile svalet etelenele
Meekellai striatacostata” (Mc@hesney))) sr. )5 sj. «/<'teape clbte clas cle) ole ects
EroducniseseMmirer em atus: CVlartin yr... conteceee eaten sie ae ihe
Broduehus MEDLASCensis |OweMrae eee ucreciee eisctere coe ae ceereae iceaeua ets
G@honeteseranwmiberav Owens. cc sees ee cece bre Sees eee ees
Derbyax crassa MCMCEK:)ia sto sae aesrs.o cise eet aya Botte eat clelene eb een tos
WELD Yee LOM USCA ES) Pe GEL ANG) fer wiae severe cre tirs cietereclicte oc camticuotelonloesariters
Derbya multistriata (Meek and Hayden)...................-3..
Ampbocoeliasplanoconvexd : ( SHUM esicie oa ctsiclsrejots acne (oleae Sousvasitels
IST Not L a OMA TC OU er tan aretha hoc ats isle sist evelnc sro careaeceare atererac ale tete
Psuedomonotis hawni Meek : eo euaroh eee es 1 FRU Rete eed NIN SURO RUS
NV AN Aca SASENSIS MS MUM eee ccpers ey vise esa ee ou seeienoteta winee seer tekie ore
Myalina swallowi?) (McChesney) \ 5.2.4 fs. cdc. is cate ose a on oe ee lees
My aT A ST eee ears he cra eR IS ST chat ae 8c hoc af’ ccan Sistas tS pael as ebarahenbemtebete
Aviculopinna nebrascensis- Beede .......2....¢. chalga gle Sarees ee ee
Schizodus wheeleri Swallow ........0....-.05 Bb ssslerais sip ees ae
SEMIZOMUSCSD seererera a Soci ccc ees es iovs chee, oes oie osovens lors Siete joreuels siete reaver ests

30
30

30

56.

58.
59.
60.
61.

0

Hadmondia nebrascensise Meek 5.2 oc cnsisiste «bee oc) slater « akeueyeueneds aneteneeie 1
Hdmondia: reflexal Meeks oo055 see sa.ases areca sraigcel orators eater oeelel aro e) cane 3
NOLS Ho evo) LONE: We (avg erie O race ne eae sear OE eamers es rire deh tiara mei eans SHAS eG 5.0 2
Allorisma-subcunea tum: Meeks -~ fin cicic chavo brs ichel ot coche steele chee) scsrntoneete 2
Sedvewickia eranosuMis (Shi) mire popes ecwcnctesecss eaeiercneie scien weneraeenet 3
AUITOTISMIA: SP) 5 Sacaicu Bacecah ec cnehars er ov etancr ouskh (alist evdce veut atenebattoucyenthe Cnetalel rete Renae 1
Aviculopecten maAccoyily ME and Elsie. teclarc Wore visvee chet atadond easueueloue tenet 1
Chaenomya leavenworthensis M. and H.....................000- 1
Pteria ohioensis: GHerrick) Sack siene sichwiee toromne ee secrete obeteneperetneeene 20
Pteriaysulea tal: Geimits es scck eee ite och wasps Sa role) vee aye ee eove. cheval emer 128
PONTO LMM! (Saye SP yarn a otesaras acy octet ate Seortd waste devel ai awa ioverantewen nae tou shee Ree RE 1
INA CTHIAC SP ses afens wre osshe sod tre ecotch area anda seer oar eeae aus eee on eit tence 3
Nuculas wventricosae WiG@hesne yarn so sevens ota sikne si aietausiiciel sels is lal chert tenenene 1
OLGA IS Pi catina ove oibrd ahacogoteliouaaiel aoa rate Saco anoh oe) wie ansial ahemeconde Paras Coenen 5
Ma CLOG OM: "SDs See so eevaresaecfesah ahs jaa Jacelouera ehase Bieithanetons eet slleuete snl shee nemene 1
Aviculopectéen’ occidentalis G@ShUmMis) picks <iiescis ors sic cleteucieieys ceil ene 40
Nuculana~ bellistriata attenuata Meek. apie. « omc cicls srorelor eee 42
PIGULOPHOLUS) +SP sarcicisrn ween seas oR aTas ec eanon sel ek AT ST Cea OC ee 1
Peleeypod Younes SPECS. fiusrstese sienna cw Go te reke eho ae al cote Serene 200
Bulimorpha chrysalis (Meek and Worthen)..................... 25
Huomphalus catelloidese (Comma!) oye a cretevelera vierereeet cleaner ane tiohe cert eael 25
Bellerphonearbonariae Coxcce dyn. cs 0s cee eter cyencc chelate ai ensiokevene anne rae 3
PleuPOtOMATIA SP ese esis esate eel nase ae tay ot in catatemre ae ieee ie bela oreme ae erents Ha
BellerphOnmuspisc ica ccs ces gee ahs aoe ee cnae enc nage asec ya oleenia tee ratereeele 39
GA PUUS “SP ss rob aos Seseceig eos aaa Shaheen Seen IONS Te ayevan eae eee a alee 1
WUCOMISPITA = SP eso.60 Sacre sue aretha wre oma date Wh chee araUe Ie etanclieiey Sue he te lneede 1
Gastropodsp: -“CACHS/S (2) S)caeesw oem cliversit ollers ect oiecehayaicle oucls oeoneeenete 300
GAStPODOGSSDacd o scdicrecera mest etarapene alee eretens CS RL aie rovatel atatone inten Tey One Reon 200
OLEH OCETIEUEE RAS eA ees ete eee el al ewan e lovey altelretapentnae ate ceacieh eae Ree aroRetS 2
Bairdia beedeisUlrich-and Basslete.. -n s ee tia reqete @ oiete aici tee 100
Bairdial beedeihabruptagUs an SB: eae reais os tise eherare ech stc else fener eee renerene 25
Gta d ong pnvokea bhi] Bet ha(6 IN ace cea cNynaOmineuco dea ase cacor sic 1
Paraparchites humerosusaWs ands Bisiacals Aecrelecrets vievonie cna crenenetetennene 1
Beyrichella; bolliformistrumiidan Ue ais sayy. yels eo tstanay o etetchoierenstene 1
OSEPACOG SPs Waren scraete week arerorsu oa peomsadvouelv eran tunaselerear sleret severed lenetcrentane 2
Griffithides scitula (Meek and Worthen).................00ceeee 9
Cladodus mortifer Newberry and Worthen...................6.. 2

¢
aL YY “ys
Avs (ae © ee

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
PLATE I.
Derbya multistriata (Meek).

1. a. b. ec. Reproduced from de Koninck’s, pl. XIII, f. 7, a, b, e.

2. Figure 7a. pl. XIII bis. of de Koninck. These specimens are called
“Orthis umbraculum” by him. but are very different from those figured by

Bronn, from the Deyonian of Hiffel, after examining Schlotheim’s types.
8a. Specimen below average size, but possessing an unusually high
hinge area which is synimetrical, posterior view.
3b. Lateral profile of Same specimen.

All figures natural size.

[2eTeispy Ih

124

Pirate II.
Derbya multistriata (Meek).

1. Brachial valve of specimen with high area extending nearly back-
ward, due partly to compression.

2. Same view of another specimen with low beak and normal brachial
valve.

3. Pedicle vaive of another specimen showing surface marks and thir-
teen young specimens adhering to it. They are of the same species.

3a. Profile of number 3. Pedicle valve uppermost.

4. A profile of another and smaller specimen with a high and dis-
torted hinge area. Pedicle valve uppermost.

All figures natural size.

125

PLaTE II.

126

~

Prare III.
Derbya multistriata (Meek). :

ale Brachial valve of a specimen with an extremely elongated beak.
Shell adhering to it.

2. Brachial valve of another specimen showing its regular form and
the surface marks.

3. Another specimen, profile view, with beak extending backward and
twisted to the right.

4. Posterior view of another specimen with a hinge a shade lower
than normal. :

5. A pen drawing of No. 5 of previous plate. Note the mesial septum
in the little specimen, the central one of the three to the right of the beak.
which is only five millimeters in diameter.

All figures natura! size. ,

With the exception of figures 1 and 2 of plate I, all specimens are from
the top of the Neosho member of the Garrison formation, in the railroad
cut on the west side of Grouse creek, near the old station of Torrence.

Kansas, a few miles west of Cambridge.

Prats IIL.

OBSERVATIONS ON THE F'‘ORMATION AND ENLARGEMENT OF THE
TuBES OF THE MariIngE ANNELID, (Chaetopterus
Variopedatus).

Howarp E. ENDERS.

Chaetopterus variopedatus is a widely distributed tubiculous annelid
of the family Chaetopterida. The individuals of each country and of wide-
ly distributed areas in Europe were classified as distinct species till Joy-
eux-Laffuie showed conclusively, in 1890, that they are really a single
species. He also suggested that a close study of the species in. foreign
seas would probably result in referring them to a single species. A care-
ful comparison of the specimens found at Beaufort, North Carolina, with
Joyeux-Laffuie’s detailed description of Chaetopterus variopedatus, leads
me to regard the American representative, which Verrill and E. B. Wilson
named Chaetopterus pergamentaceus, as identical with the single Huro-
pean form.

This peculiar species of sedentary annelid is found in several localities
in the harbor of Beaufort, North Carolina, where the conditions for its
existence are afforded by the extensive sand-flats, either covered with a
thick growth of diatoms or continually exposed to currents of water
heavily charged with these plants. It is here found living within its
broadly U-shaped parchment tubes in nearly every portion of the harbor
wherever the sand-flats are formed in the quieter waters.

The presence of Chaetopterus may be recognized by the extremities
of the U-shaped tubes that usually protrude several centimeters above the
level of the shoal (Fig. 3). The extremities of some tubes are concealed
by ascidians, colonies of bryozoans or of hydroids, attached to them so that
it may be difficult to detect the circular whitish openings within the cluster
of attached animals.

The animal remains within its tube during its whole life but, as the
animal grows in size, it increases both the length and the diameter of its
tube. The horizontal portion of the U is of greater diameter than the

conical vertical arms that protrude a few centimeters above the sub-

129

stratum. 'The simple U-form is often modified in tubes that occur in shoals
of sand and shells. The arms may here be so constructed that they turn
abruptly aside from large shells that are in their way. Tubes with three
arms are frequently found (ig. 4). These are tubes that have been en-
larged by the extension of the horizontal portion and the formation of
anew (vertical) arm. <A septum at the base of the intermediate arm sep-
arates its cavity from that of the horizontal portion. I have found inter-
mediate arms with little or no sand, some completely filled, while many
have begun to macerate. Hvery large tube bears the shreds of one or more
of these macerated intermediate arms, or the crescentic scars that mark
their former union with the newly formed extension. The annulations
near the orifices and the longitudinal strips of thinner, sand-covered, parch-
ment alternating with the thicker portion of the tubes represent successive
steps in the formation and enlargement of the tubes.

There is great diversity in the size of the tubes. A very young worm
formed a characteristic U-shaped tube three millimeters in diameter at its
wider portion, and one and three-fourths millimeters at its orifices. The
distance between the orifices measured fourteen and one-half millimeters,
and the length of the arms (measured from the lower side of the horizontal
portion to its base) was sixteen millimeters. I have collected tubes which
ranged in length from six to fifty centimeters and with arms six to twenty-
two centimeters long.

The formation of the first tube and the subsequent enlargements was
observed on larvae of Chuetopterus variopedatus which I was fortunate
enough to collect in the tow-net. These larvae, which were transforming
rom the free-swimming mesatrochae into the creeping individuals, were
kept in aquaria of sea water well stocked with diatoms. When the larvae
move among the diatoms they leave a trail of mucus that cements the
sand and diatoms together. Later they make short, horizontal, mucus-
coated tunnels into the mass of diatoms and sand. One of these tunnels
may be extended to several times the length of the body and from this
simple tunnel of agglutinated sand and diatoms the larvae may build the
tube within which it subsequently remains confined.

The first tube in which the larvae lives and feeds for several days
is nearly a millimeter in diameter and from eighteen to twenty-two milli-
meters long. It is either a straight tube or a shallow U whose curved
portion is downward.

[9—18192]

130

After an interval of a day or two in the mucus-coated tunnel the
young worm, for it is now an adult in miniature, has outgrown it and a new
tube is constructed. This is done by splitting the tube at a point where
the upright arm meets the horizontal portion, in a U-shaped tube, or near
one end, in a straight tube, and then excavating a tunnel obliquely down-
wards and after nearly doubling the length of basal portion upwards to the
surface. This is its first lateral enlargement. The sand which the worm
excavates in constructing this extension is expelled from the opposite end
of its first tube. The walls of the tunnel are coated with mucus as the
tunnel advances, so that the U-shaped tube is completed when the exca-
vation reaches the surface. The tube becomes strengthened from time to
time by additioua! layers of mucus that hardens to form a parchment-like
material that gives the older tubes a laminated structure. They are
enlarged in the same vertical plane unless prevented from doing so by
some obstruction, as a shell, when they turn obliquely along the surface
of the obstruction or abandon the new enlargement and construct an en-
largement from the opposite end of the tube. Two or three days later the
process is repeated, possibly by the extension of the opposite end of the tube.
The horizonta! portion of each new enlargement is larger in diameter and
is buried deeper in the sand than the tube from which it is a branch
(Vig. 4). Enlargements are frequently of such length as to double the size
of the U-tube, and are completed to the surface of the sand in from twenty-
four to forty-eight hours. They are made indifferently at one end or other
of the smaller tube. The fate of the intermediate tubes has been discussed
in another part of the present paper.

The burrowing is done by the anterior region of the worm. Its setiger-
ous segments dislodge the sand and pass it to the middle and posterior
regions of the body, and they convey it backwards into the tube by the
combined contraction and expansion of the body, and the rythmic move-
ments of the palettes and lobes of the segments. The worm ceases burrow-
ing at intervals of a few minutes and expels the accumulated sand at one
end of the tube around which it falls and forms a mound; the other end,
or intermediate tube. is the incurrent tube so long as the burrowing is in
progress, but when the new burrow is complete a septum of parchment is
formed across the base of the intermediate tube and it ceases to be of any
use to the worm.

The worms which form their tubes in aquaria with a thin layer of sand

131

and diatoms on the bottom conform to the U-habit, though in a horizontal
plane, with one side of the tube cemented to the floor of the vessel.

The linear extensions of the tubes are formed at such intervals as the
rapid growth of the worm requires. ‘ihe length of the tubes, and the
dates on which the enlargements were completed by two worms which
I reared from larvae taken in the tow-net are as follows :*

SPECIMEN No. 2. SPECIMEN No. 4.
es wena. Date. Rater cae ees Date.
20 mm. August 7, 1905. 20 mm. August 7, 1905.
38 mm. August 10, 1905. 32 mm. August 9, 1905.
60 mm. August 15, 1905. 61 mm. August 16, 1905.

Early in September of 1905 I collected three worms whose tubes
averaged fifty-one millimeters between the orifices and five whose recently
discarded intermediate arms were sixty millimeters from the ends with
which they formed the smaller U-shaped tubes. The horizontal extensions
increased their length to fifteen centimeters in the smallest and twenty-two
and one-half in the longest specimen. Many thick-walled tubes are found
with scars of intermediate arms which indicate that they were increased
from about this size to about forty centimeters. The longest tubes show
that they were increased, by a linear extension of ten centimeters, to fifty
centimeters.

The tubes also undergo an enlargement in diameter as the animal grows
in thickness. This splitting and enlargement of one of its arms I observed
in specimen No. 4 during one night in September of 1905. The worm pushed
the rim of the buccal funnel nearly to the margin of the orifice, and slowly
moved the ends of the tentacles over the rim of the tube. (In order to
enter this narrow portion of the tube from below the edges of the buccal
funnel and anterior region of the body was curved dorsalwards and con-
siderably contracted till they become conical in form.) The animal re-
mained in this position in the tube about five seconds then slowly with-
drew into the deeper portion. This was repeated in thirty seconds but this
time it withdrew only to the level of the sand. Here the worm suddenly

*Both worms enlarged their tubes to 76 and 71 millimeters, respectively, between
September 12th, when they were brought to the Biological Laboratory of the Johns Hop-
kins University, and my return, October 4, 1905. The worm in No. 4 had extended its
tube to the glass wall of the aquarium on May 8-9, 1906. The U-shaped tube now meas-
ured 85 millimeters between the orifices.

132

expanded the first pair of setigerous segments and split the tube longitudi-
nally at its outer side, then withdrew quickly into the deeper portion of the
tube. Fifteen or twenty seconds later the worm reappeared at the level of
the sand, extended the rent a little higher and withdrew. This action was
repeated five times in extending the rent, seven millimeters, to the end of
the tube. The rent was produced by means of the expansion of the mus-
cular setigerous region and not by the sharp lance-shaped setae as one
might suppose. The rent occurred in a position opposite the ventral sur-
face of the body. When the tube was split to its extremity the worm
thrust one side of the anterior region through the cleft and removed the
sand about it by means of its setigerous notopodia. They pressed a portion
of the sand aside but some was removed backwards into the tube and later
discharged at the other end.

When the tube was split to its end the worm spread the basal portion
of the rent by a slight expansion of the ventral side of its lower lip and
the foremost portion of the anterior region. ‘The worm remained in this
position for fifteen or twenty seconds then withdrew into its tube for a
half minute, after which it took a position a little nearer to the orifice of
the tube. The performance was repeated till the edges were reunited by a
wedge-shaped insertion of parchment that widened to three millimeters
just below the level of the sand. I conld not determine which region of
the body was most active in the secretion of the mucus, which becomes
parchment-like, but I observed that it was shaped by the lower lip of the
buccal funnel, and that the parchment film had advanced a little higher
each time the animal applied its ventral lip to the cleft. The splitting of
the tube and the closure of the rent were completed in thirty-five minutes.

The splittings occur indifferently on any portion of the circumference
of the tube, but they are found chiefiy on the upper side of the horizontal
portion. When they are extensive it is indicated by the abundance of sand
discharged at long intervals from one arm of the tube. I have found some
large tubes that had strips of thin parchment two centimeters wide and
as long as the horizontal portion of the tube.

The new portion of the wall is thin and membranous at first and, while
it becomes thicker with age, can be observed, long after its formation, as a
strip somewhat thinner than the remaining portions of the wall. Its
inner surface is smooth, like the inner wall of the other portion, and its
outer surface is similarly covered with sand. The wide, horizontal portion
of nearly every tube bears one or more of these strips inserted between the

133

edges of a thicker laminated wall. This was true even in the smallest
specimens, No. 2 and No. 4, which I mentioned on page 131. The diameter
of their tubes was twice enlarged while they were thirty-eight and thirty-
two millimeters long, respectively, and before they constructed the next
linear enlargement.

The outer surface of the tubes is everywhere coated with sand, except-
ing about the terminal portions that protrude above the sand flats in
which they are imbedded. These terminal portions have one or more annu-
lations that give them the appearance of being formed of rings that dimin-
ish regularly in size upwards, so that the bases of the smaller rings are
overlapped by the top of the rings next below. Hach ring represents
the successive height of the orifice, though not its diameter, for they are
split from time to time as I have just mentioned. They are moulded,
like the other portions of the tube, by the ventral lip of the buccal funnel,
and the length of each ring represents the height to which the lip was
extended when the ring was formed. The rings are, at first, very thin and
transparent but they become laminated by successive additions of mucus
to their inner walls. The laminae of which they are the free ends may
be separated with ease from those next below.

SUMMARY.

The principal points that I have attempted to bring out in this paper
are:

1. The tubes are formed by the worm from mucus secreted by certain
cells of the body. Before the mucus hardens to a parchment-like material
it is molded by the ventral lip of the buccal funnel.

2. 'The tubes are first formed as tunnels in the diatoms, but later they
have the form of a U.

3. The tubes are enlarged either in length or diameter or by a combi-
nation of both these methods.

ce]
a)

PLATE I.

Fig. 1. View of dorsal side of female Chaetopterus Variopedatus. (3 Nat.)

Fig. 2. Dorsal view of male Chaetopterus removed from its tube. ( Nat.)

135

P £
z . iE rf
PuateE II.

Fig. 3. View of two orifices of the tube of Chaetopterus at low tide.

Vie. 4. Photograph of tube to show lateral enlargement and position of the discarded
intermediate arm. (4 Nat.)

136

NorTeEs oN THE ARTIFICIAL E'\ERTILIZATION OF THE HIGGS OF THE
Common Cram, (Venus Mercenaria).

H. E. ENpERS AND H. D. ALLER.

In view of the economic importance of the common clam we endeavored
to artificially fertilize its eggs during the past summer* at the United States
Fisheries Laboratory, at Beaufort, North Carolina. Many clams were full
of eggs or contained active spermatozoa when we first examined them in
July. This condition prevailed till the 12th of September, but early in
November of this year the spermatozoa were not active.

Several times during July and August we fertilized the eggs by the
addition of active spermatozoa from several males and observed the matura-
tion of the egg, the segmentation, and the early trochophore stage. In
one instance (August 1, 1906) the development continued to the young
veliger stage.

The female sexual element is a pear-shaped cell in which a large
germinal vesicle is found. Many of the cells become spherical fifteen or
twenty minutes after the addition of active spermatozoa. The eggs then
show no further evidence of being fertilized till two hours after the addi-
tion of sperm, when the first polar body is cast off and this followed by the
second at an interval of twenty or thirty minutes. ‘Thirty minutes later
the egg passes into the two-celled stage by a holoblastic and unequal divi-
sion. The next division occurs in a plane at right angles to the first and
this is followed by division in a plane at right angles to the other two.

The cells divide synchyonously up to the thirty-two-celled stage but
we were unable to determine whether this continues beyond this stage.

The percentage of eggs that could be fertilized was small during July ;
it increased during August and September, but during November the sper-
matozoa were not active and the eggs could not be fertilized.

While we have not reached a definite conclusion regarding the breeding
habits of the common clam we feel that these data are themselves signifi-

eant.

“Summer of 1905.

137

DETERMINATION OF ALL SURFACES FoR Wuicu, WHEN Lines
oF CURVATURE ARE ParamETER Lines (u—const., v=
const.), THE Six FunpAMENTAL Quantitiss, H, F, G, L,
M, N, are Functions oF ONE VARIABLE ONLY.

Wm. H. BatTss.

The following simplifications come out of the data:

(1) F=0= M (Since lines of curvature are parameter lines).

(2) The v — derivatives of E, G, L, N vanish. (Since the latter are
functions of u only.)

(3) We may substitute for u a function defined by the equation,

Edu? = du”,
which makes EH, G, L, and N functions of wv’ only. Also the system of
parameter curves is (as a whole) not changed, for when u — const, u’ =
const also. Now if we drop the prime from vu’, the substitution has exactly
the effect of making E — 1.

Let (Xi, Yi, Zi) and (X2, Y2, Ze) be direction cosines of tangents to
the v-curve and u-curve at any point of the surface. These tangents,
together with the normal to the surface (direction cosines of which are X,
Y, and Z) at the point form a rectangular system of axes.

Ox oy Oz
(1) Xi=—; N= —; ZA = — (since E = 1).
ou ou ou
ox 1 dy 1 062
(2) Xe—=———; Ye= —; LZ, = — —
V G ov VG dv VG ov

Then the differential equations for the general surface (see Bianchi,
1902 Edition, p. 123) become after introducing the above simplifications,

OX
(3) —= LX
ou
6X1 d/G
(4) —-= Xe
Oh du
aX
(6) —-=0

158

OXe N dG
(6) —-= x
éy of G du
OX
(7) —=—LN
ou
OX N
(8) —=— Xe
OV VG

and similar equations for Y and Z.

Note. These, together with the simplified Gauss and Codazzi equations, should
give by integration the required surfaces. In the attempt to perform the integration, the
following geometric solution was reached. I hope tocomplete the solution by integration

later.
The v-curves make principal sections.

The equation of principal normal to the surface is

Fy SS Se

2x d2y a2z
ds? ds? ds?
dx dx
—— - along v-curve
ds dsy
dx
= —, since ds, = Edu = du
du
Ox ox dv

ox
= —— since vi — Const:
ou
—— NG
d2x OX4
—_-_ = ——— Xt.
ds? ou

Similarly for y and z, giving

Se 7—yY ¢ —Z

x y Z

which is the normal to the surface at (x, y, z).

139

The v-curves are also plane curves.

1 d? du dv. 2
ae — Sale —) + (~ a (—) where 7, “, v are direction
ds
cosines of bi-normal to curve (here Xz, Ye, Ze)
dXo dX2 dXe dYe aZe 1
=== == — = = — =o and similarly —— — 0o.— —-— -.. = 0.
dsy du ou ds ds 4.

The u-curves have constant radius of curvature.

The che of radius of curvature is,

ee “G) G+ + (52)

ie ee
ds Page
d?x d
nS
ds? dsu
OX2 dv
os Ov dsu
1 dXe ha
= —— —, since dsu = y G dv
VG Ov
d2x 1 N d/G
Sole a)
ds? du
d2y 1 N d, ‘G
ea ies Sen z—- 1)
ds? V G | ‘G
dz 1 ( N _ ayG =)
—_——- _— area zz =e 1
ds? VG ore
l 1 N? avis 5
a fee | psp
p? G G : 1 du
== RIS a 3x, =

if en

= function of ud only.
-. const for u-—curves.

140

The u-curves are also plane curves, and thérefore circles.
We may write equation of torsion in}Ithe form,

1 o> < Geen Aen Agel
hee p? x” ys z/’
“ih x/// Vie Vike

(where primes denote derivatives with respect to s).
From last paragraph we haveifor u-curves,
d°x 1p Sy.

d ( 1 =")
x/// eee =oS5
dsu \yG@ dv
n) ( 1 0 ~) dv
Ov VG Ov dsu
G dv?

1 Nez dy G\ ?
— — E ~ (—) |] stom (6), (4) and (8)
G LG du

x/// = o(a) XxX,
Sony — 10 (a) eye

a’ => o(u) This
X, Y, Z,
1 ya pena
SSS 1 =: =: 2 Ay
4} /G ‘ :
Ret ees

Since the u-curves are plane and have constant radi of curvature they
are circles.

Finally, the plane of each v-curve is normal to every u-circle, and
therefore passes through its center. The intersection of any two v-planes
determines the line of centers of the u-circles. Thus all the required sur-
faces are surfaces of revolution. Taking the line of centers of u-circles as
z-axis and the plane of any u-circle as xy-plane, the equation of our sur-

faces are

(x =u.cosv
4 Yo Us. Siniy;
lz ==41(67)

141

LINES ON THE PSEUDOSPHERE AND THE SYNTRACTRIX OF ReEv-
OLUTION.

EK. L. HANcock.

INTRODUCTION.

Consider two surfaces of revolution S and Si generated by the revolu-
tion of the curves C and C; about the Z axis. Ci is formed by taking on
the tangents to C distances equal to the constant-k’ times the length of the
tangents. The length in each case is measured from the z-intercept toward
the point of tangency. Let C = O be given by z=f(u), then Ci = Owill
be given by,

a = (L — 1)umif’(Lu1) + f(Lm)
where L = 1/k’ and the equations of transformation from § to Si are,
Gg oy

vV— Vil

When the length of the tangent to the curve C is constant, as in the
tractrix, the curve Ci is the syntractrix (see Note), and the surfaces S and Si
are therefore the pseudosphere and the syntractrix of revolution.

What follows is the study of lines on these surfaces. The geodesic
lines on the pseudosphere have been studied by means of lines in the plane,
This surface being one of constant negative curvature (—l) may, accord-
ing to Beltrami (see Note 2), be represented geodesically by a system of
straight lines in the plane.

Much of the work outlined here for geodesics’on the pseudosphere may be
found in Darboux, Theorie des Surfaces, Vol. III, and is given here only in
the way of review and for completeness.

The claim made for the originality in this part of the work is in (1)
the classification of the geodesic lines and the study of certain systems of
geodesic lines and their corresponding lines in the plane; (2) the transforma-
tions of the system of circles into straight lines by making use of the sphere,

Notes 1.—The syntractrix is defined as the curve generated by taking a constant dis-
tance on’ the tangents to the tractrix. Peacock, p. 175.
Nots 2.—Beltrami, Annali di Matematica. Vol. 7, p. 185
Bianchi, Lukat, Differential—Geometrie, p. 486.

142

as indicated; (3) the study of the asymptotic lines and the loxodromic lines
on the pseudosphere and their representations in the plane.

In the second part of the work the lines on the syntractrix of revolu-
tion are studied. This work so far as I know has never been done before
In it I have worked out the equations of the geodesic, asymptotic and loxo-
dromic lines. These have been studied in particular by classifying the

surfaces Si according as d = 2C, where © is the length of the tangent to

the tractrix and d the constant distance taken on that tangent. When

d = 2C it happens that the geodesic lines on §: are all real and that the
kik | :

The loxodromic lines are represented in the plane by the same system

geodesic lines for d- 20 are real or imaginary according as r?~

of straight lines as the loxodromic lines of the pseudosphere. The draw-
ings are given for the sake of clearness.

CHAPTER I.
GEODESIC LINES ON THE PSEUDOSPHERE.

Taking the equation of the tractrix in the form,
x = C cosh.'c y — (C2 — y?)!/? we get for the given surface,
K == COB eo ee, en eee Oe oe (2)
¥ = UW sinty
z == C. cosh.—c/u — (C? — u?)!/?
and the fundamental quantities of the Gaussian (see Note 1) notation are,
BE = C?2/u?, F = 0, G= v2, D = (C?)/(u(C? — u2(7/?), D’ = 0,7
p= —a (C2 — ae)? Ke
Using the method of calculus of variations as developed by Weier-
struss (see Note 2) to obtain the equations of the geodesic lines, we have

to minimize the integral,

|= {* (Hau? + 2Fdudy + Gav’)! 7at

=. ft 272 2) | 7 2\1/2 ate
= $~,((C7a )/€u2) + w2v’?)2/ 2dt = J, Frat

Legendre’s condition for a minimum is Fy — (d/dv )Fv’ = 0 where
(Fv) = (6F)/(év) and Fv’ = (6F)/(d6v’).
Here Fy — 0, so that we get as the equations of the geodesics
Fy’ = (a2v’)/((C7a2/02) + n?v’2)1/2? =a (3)

Where « is the constant of integration.

Note i.—Bianchi, Differential-Geometrie, pp. 61 and 87.
Note 2.—Kneser, Variationsrechnung.
Osgood, Annals of Mathematics, Vol. 2, p. 105.

143

In considering these curves two cases may arise, (1) when « —0,
(2) « +0. Case (1) when x =—0, either u=—Oorv=0. But u+0
hence v’ = 0.and so v — constant. That is the meridians are geodesics.
Case (2) when x + 0, (3) becomes
Ves (Conn): (teen (4/2 Be) BE Eu (4)
This may, however, be put in a more convenient form, since in the present
case the geodesic lines vy = constant all meet in a point and the curves
u constant form a system of geodesic circles — the orthogonal trajec-
tories of the meridians. Under such conditions E may be equated to unity

(see Note 1). The new uz is then given by the relation us = { (E)2/? du.

Hence u = e”?/c, Replacing in (4) u by its value just found the equation
of the geodesic lines becomes
v= (C/a )(l — a 2e—4/c)1/24 B (see Note 2)...... (5)
This equation may be used to determine the allowable values of «
and 6. The constant 6 being additive has no effect except to turn the sur-
face about the z axis. Thus a geodesic line given by one value of 8 may

be made to coincide with one given by another value of { by revolution
about the z axis, x remaining constant. $ may vary from —o to4+ om.

From (5) it is seen that the lines are real or imaginary according as
oe 2/o 21,

(1), Let «**e—24/c>1, then’ | a | >et/c.

But for the pseudosphere u,<C log C so that the geodesics will be imagi-
nary when |x | >C. (2 & 8). Leta %e—*/c = 1, then la | = eu/c

Hence | x 1=—C gives real geodesics.
Equations (5) may be transformed into
x *(v? + C%e—/c) —2 8 ay 4+ ( 82.x 7 — CO?) =0 which when

v2? + C2%e—2u/c = y

Vk RAE i Eee oe EE i de dae Toc Sy er ee i oo (6)
may be represented in the plane by the straight lines,

5 ae i bre a(S E ST BIS ch) 9 De el ne ee ee RAE (7)
(6) may be broken up into two transformations
(a) Vi == \

Ce-2. — y f eee ee (8)

Nove 1.—Knoblauch, Theorie der Krummen Flachen, p. 133.
Nove 2.—Bianchi, p. 419.

144

which transforms S conformally on the plane so that the geodesics lines
go over into the circles,

Oe i en eee (See Note 1)
and (b) ae Sra Rey) oe (9)
Xe

which changes the circles into the straight lines,

Yi 2B eB NO ees yee a) i Sat (10)
By (9) the x axis goes into the parabola x? = y and all the lines y = con-
stant go into the parabolas x? —y + constant. The whole upper part of
the plane is represented inside the parabola x?—y. The points on the
lines x = constant are moved along the lines. The origin is the fixed point
of transformation.

Circles concentric at the origin correspond to lines y — constant while
every system of concentric circles on the x axis goes over into a system of
parallel lines. A system of circles given by (8) passing through a point
corresponds to a system of lines through a point. A system of circles with
the y axis as radical axis

x?+ y?— 26x + k?=0

and their orthogonal trajectories,

x? + y?—2hy = + d? (See Note 2)

corresponds to a sheaf of lines and a sheaf of conics.

The geodesics v = constant correspond to the lines x = constant i. e.
to the diameters of the parabola x?—=y. The entire real part of the sur-
face S is represented in the xy—plane by the strip y = C y= C/e
and in the xy—plane by the strip included by the curves x? = y — C?
and x? = y — C’/e*. Thecircles of (8) tangent to the line y — C/e go over
into a system of straight lines enveloping the parabola x? — y — C?/e?.

Since the representation given by (8) is conformal it is interesting to
note that the lines y = constant may be considered as the envelop of a
system of circles of constant radii and centers on the x axis given by the
equation,

(x — B)?+ y? = C?/k?
corresponding on the surface to the geodesics,

v2? + C%e—2u/c—26v +(8? — C?/k?) = 0 0 = eae

Note 1.—Bianchi, p. 419.
Note 2.—Salmon’s Conic Sections, p. 100.

145

These may be regarded as a system of geodesics having as an envelop the

geodesic circles u = ki fea eee A system of concentric circles with the
centers at any point (e, 0) on ox gives the geodesics
v? + O7e—74/c — dev + e? — C?/xa 7? = 0
If «.8 =C we get a system of circles through the origin
x?4+ y?— 26x = 0
which correspond to a system of geodesics through a point. In this case,
however, the point is not a real point of S.
A system of circles with the centers on ox and passing through a point
on the line y — k, C/e<k<C envelops a unicursal quartic of the form,
Ay? + A,x?+4 A,x’y? + 2A,x’y + 2A, xy” -+ 2A .xy = 0
This system of circles corresponds to a system of geodesics through a
real point and the quartic curve to the geodesic envelop
e—7u/c(A + Av? + 2A,v) + e—"/0(2A ,C—1v? + 2A .C—1v) + (A,/C?)v?=0
In this case the circles have a second common point on the line y — --k
so that the quartic envelope (which in this case is imaginary), having four
nodes, breaks up into two circles which are themselves curves of the sys-
tem and therefore correspond to the geodesics of the surface.
The orthogonal systems cf circles,
x? + y? — 26x —_ b*?= 0

x?+ (y —h)?=h? 4+ b?

having the radical axis correspond to the geodesics

- vy? + O%e—%1 C= 26y == -b2 0

and their orthogonal geodesic circles

v? + O%e—24/c — 2hOe-"/c + b? = 0

These may be such that the limiting points of the circles are real and
distinct, coincident or imaginary. It is interesting to note that this sys-
tem of circles, which in so many problems in applied mathematics repre-
sents lines of flow and equipotential lines may be mapped conformally on
the pseudosphere in such a way that the lines of flow and the equipoten-
tial lines are the geodesics of a system and their orthogonal geodesic cir-
cles.

Another straight line representation of the geodesic lines of the sur-
face S.

[10—18192]

146

If we project stereographically upon the sphere
g2 4 9? + (C — 1/2)? = 1/4
whose south pole is the point (0, 0, 0) and whose north pole is the point
(0, 0, 1), the circles given by the transformation v — x, Ce—"/c-y we shall
have the upper part of the xy—plane represented conformally upon the

hemisphere Lbd — C. The x—axis goes into the great circle Lbd and the

Fig. 1.

circles at right angles to o—x go into circles at right angles to Lbd.

If now we project orthogonally upon the plane Lbd we shall have the
representation in question as chords of Lbd. Since ¢ 7 ¢ are the co-ordin-
ates of the sphere we get as the equations of transformation from the plane
to the sphere,

x= (§)/(l—¢)
y=—(7)/A—?)
This gives for the circle
Bee ye ot Oo 0
the plane

(1 — B24 O4/a 7?) €— 2B E+ B* _C2/x?7=—0
which is independent of 7. It therefore represents the trace of the plane
on the plane 7 — 0 and hence the required straight line in the £ ¢ —plane.

147

The equations of transformation from the plane xy to the plane £ ¢ —plane

are,
> eee Ons V'h ieee.

Y= (CCR ee) A= 0) 72 h2
and the equations of transformation from the pseudosphere to this plane

are,
VP O76 Fe Crea —C-)

v=(f)/@—f)

DISCUSSION OF THE TRANSFORMATION,

The entire upper part of the xy—plane is represented inside the circle
g24+¢2__¢=0
The circles x? + y? — 23x + 3% — C?/x *=0 become the straight lines
(ae 3200 2 4+ C2) Gh ba te pa = CO?
The straight lines y = k go into a sheaf of conics,
(k? + 1)¢? — (2k* + 1) + §* +4 k?=0 _ through the point
(0, 1). And since —(k? + 1) is always negative the conics are all ellip-
ses. The real part of the pseudosphere is therefore represented in the area
included between the ellipses corresponding to the lines y — C and y= C/e.
N All the ellipses are tangent to the cir-
cle at the point (0, 1) and have their foci
on the ¢—axis. The circles concentric at
the origin become the lines ¢ — constant,
chords parallel to the g—axis. The system
of circles with centers on o—x and pass-
ing through the point a,b goes over into
the system of straight lines through the

point
§ = (a)/(a? + b? + 1)
C == (a* => 'b?)/(a® bt)
Fa. Mikes such systems properly related and
Fig. 2. having the point (a,b) on the same line

y — b go over into the two projectively related sheaves of lines whose cor-
responding rays intersect on the conic corresponding to y—b. In par-
ticular, in case the points (a,b) are on the x—axis the conic becomes the
circle o—b aud the corresponding rays are at right angles. Circles with
the centers on the x—axis and of equal radii go over into the straight lines
enveloping an ellipse. The line x — 0 goes into —0 the points being
moved along the line. _ The origin is the fixed point of transformation.

148

ASYMPTOTIC LINES ON S.

The asymptotic lines on the surface are defined by the equation

D du? + .2D’du.dv + D’dv? = 0 (See Note l) ... .. (12)
This becomes for the surface 8,

C) 42(07 = 67/04/24) ceive p) = (13)
and by (8) becomes in the x—y plane

ee ih) eve at Co a) ere. (14)

LoOxopDROMIC LINES ON §S.

The differential equation of the loxodromic lines of a surface are
given *by

((E)2/2/(G)2/2). - (du/dv) = tan «

Where « is the constant angle which the curves make with the curves
vy = constant. ForS (15) becomes,

(Cdu/u?) = + tan « . dy.

Hence tan«.uv+ku+O=0
This by the relation u — e”/© becomes,
Caner 62/ Give =k ei Ce Oe te ee (17)
which by (8) gives,
y === tances =k Dee oa ee (18)

This is a system of straight lines parallel to the line
Ve SS] ie Ek

and so a system of lines making a constant angle with the lines x = con-
stant. And this is as it should be since the geodesic lines v = constant go
over into the lines x — constant by the same transformation.

By selecting lines from different systems of loxodromic lines we may
envelop any geodesic except the meridians. This may be seen by changing
(17) to the form,

xsinx +ycosa + k,cosx — 0
Where if k, and cosx change so that k, cosx = constant we get a sys-

tem of lines enveloping a circle with the centers at the origin. This cor-
responds to the loxodromic lines on the surface enveloping a geodesic.

*Bianchi, p. 109.

—
i
eo)

CHAPTER II.

LINES ON THE SYNTRACTRIX OF REVOLUTION.

Taking the equation of the syntractrix in the form,

xe (ey ae sCOSN-=~ (G/¥ ia ee see (19)
the surface S is given by,

x =uUCOS V

y—usiny Sano (20)

Z— — (d?— u?)!/? + Ccosh—! (d/u)
or we may transform the equation of the tractrix by

= (C/d)y
x=x, + ((a—O)/ay(a? — yp4/? po @D

Giving as the relation between the surfaces S and §,,
(C/G) aL
is Wei
In this work C represents the length of the tangents tothe tractrix and
d the constant distance taken on these tangents to get the syntractrix.
Hence d = constant.C
We get for the fundamental qualities:
E, = (u? — Cd)?/(u?(d? — u?)) + 1, F, = 0, G, = u? and
D, — (u*(d? — 2Cd) + Cd) /(u(d? — uw?) ?)
D’ = 0), D4, =a —Ca))/ (a? = n)*/2
K, = ((u? — od)(u2(d? — 2Cd)+ Cd))/((d? — u?)(u2(d? — 2ed) + C2d?)
(Above equation is number 23 and is the equation of the Gaussian cur-
vature. )
When C — d, (23) becomes —1 or the curvature of the pseudosphere.
When C = d/2,K, becomes (2u? — d?)/(d? — u?)

Since for the surface d= u the denominator is always positive and the
numerator is positive or negative according as

Qu? — d*= 0

That is, according as u >(d/(2)'/*) and Bae (d)/((2) 4/7) or —(d/((2)1/?)
Ean (C2) 2) eee One — re d/((2)1/?) , =0. This means that for

the particular surface S, defined by d = 2C the Gaussian curvature is zero
for the circles u = et given by taking the distance d on the tangent
whose inclination to the z—axis is ~/4 or (37)/4. Tangents to the tractrix
whose inclination to the z axis is something between 7/4 and (37)/4 give
the curves u = coustant along which the surface have a negative curvature.

150
When C d/2 we have from (23) K, positive, negative or zero according
as (u2—cd) =0. But C <d/2 gives Cd<d?/2, so that u2(Cd < d?/2 is

the condition for the positive curvature. The curvature is zero or negative

when u? = cd - d2 2 (ud? — 2Cd) + Cd* = 0 giving the imaginary values

foru). This shows that the tangent line to the tractrix which gives the
parabolic circle has a different slope than in the case where d — 2C, since
in this case u/d<(2)1/2/2, i. e. sin 0 < (2)1!/?/2.

When d ~< 2C we might consider three cases viz.,C< d< 2C,C=d
or ©-d. It will only be noted here that when C = d the surface S* is the
same as the surface S and K? is therefore —1.

In any case u”’— Cd = 0 gives the valves of u for which the tangent

line to the curve C is parallel to the u—axis.

GEODESIC LINES ON S81.

Using the method of the calculus of variations as outlined in Chapter I
we get for the geodesic lines on the syntractrix of revolution,
Rv = (a7dy)/(E.,.du*=- G.dv*)*/7—=r
Here two cases may be considered according as
Te — OF Orst 0)
(1) When r = 0, then eitheru = O0ordv=—0. Butu=+0O, hencedv—0

and therefore v — constant. ‘That is the meridians are geodesic lines,
(2) When r + 0 we have

dv = ((r/a?)(u2(d? — 2Cd) + C2d?)'/2/((d2 — u*)(r? — u?)? 2)dv
(The above equation is number 24.)
To reduce this expression on the right hand side to a convenient form sub-

stitute,
maid 2 Cd) O20 — (C20 ti iCb—e) e (25)
This may be written u2k + k, — (k't?)/(t? — 1) for convenience then,
dy = (—k?/ & +? dt)/((kr?2,-- Kk. )2/2. (kd? + k,) 1/7 ((at?—1))=
(bb? == 1) 22) eas S eee (26)

Where a.= (kd?)/(kd?-+ k,) and b = (kr’)/(kr? + K,)
When r + 0 we may consider two cases
Whenr=—dandr=+d
When r = d equation (26) becomes,
dv. = (—k3/?d,dt)/ (kd? +k | (at*=—1)) "3 = = oe (27)

151

so that
v = (—k3/?d(/(a(kd? + k,)) (t + 1/2(a) '/ log((a) */2t—1)/((a) 1/41) +6

Eliminating ‘‘t’’ between (25) and (28) we have the the geodesic lines for
r — d given by

—(u*k + k,)!/? (kd? + k,)'/? d(w*k+k,)!/?—u(kd?+k, '1/2 +0
v= —-- - log —— ——_—__ —__- —_
u.d 2d? d(u*k+k,)1/?+n(kd?+k,)!/?

(The above equation is equation 29.)

When r — d (26) gives rise to an elliptic integral for the reduction of
which we recall from the general theory of elliptic integrais. (See Note 1.)
R(x) = Ax* -+ 4Bx* + 6Cx? + 4B’x + A’
g, = AA’ — 4BB’ + 3C?
g, — ACA’ + 2BCB’ — A’B? AB’? — ©3
In this case we have,
R(t) = abt* — (at+b)t? 4+ 1
g,—ab + (a+b)? 12
Z3 = (—ab(a+b))/6 + (a+b) */216
We also have
R’(t) = 4abt? —2a+bt
R’’(t) = 12abt? — 2(a+b)
Substituting in (26)
t=e«-+ (1/4 R’(e))/(pu — 1/24 R’(e)) (See Note 2)...... (30)
Where « is one of the roots of R(t) —0. Im this case take « = 1/(a)!/?
then, R/(1/(a) 1/2) = (2(b—a) )/(a) 1/?
Ryo ( (a) 2/2) = 2 bia)
So that (80) may be written,
t = 1/(a)*/? + ((b—a)/ (2(a)*/*))/(pu — pv)
when pv = (1/12)(5b — a) and therefore
abt? = b + (b(b—a))/(pu =e Oe | 4)((b(b —a) ?)/(pu — pv)?

Recalling now that,

SOAs AOR Ne eset ty PG oe = ata (31)
Pa ie ON rs Meg SES I) The eee A (32)
and also,
(pv)? (7a, — py)? + (pu-— pv) / (py)
UE i 6 es Ch Da Niet $) Ceres (83)

Note 1.—Klein, Modular, Functionen, Vol. I, p. 15.
Note 2.—Enneper, Elliptische Functionen, p. 30.

152

We get in the present case,

(p’v)? = ((b(b—a)’) /4

p’v = b(b—a)
Equation (26) may be written,

v= ((—K$/2r )/((ab(kr?-+k,)}/?)(kd?+k, +,*) .

fv = p(u+v) +p(u + v) + 2py)bu +9
and so
v = K((1/6)(b—a)u + (o’/o)(a + v) + (“/o)(a+v))+¢0~ ...... (34)
where K — ( —(kk) 1/2) /(d(ab) 3/ 2) % = :

The geodesic lines on S are then given by means of t,

uk + k, = (k,t?)*(t? — 1)

v=K git) + 4
* where o(t) is given in (34) and u = p-—'((b—a), (2(a)', *t — 2) + pv)

v = p—*((5/12)b — (a/12)) a

If (24) be put in the form
(du/dv) = (u2/r) ((d2 — u?)(r? — u?))*/2/(u2(d? — 2Cd) 4+ C2d2)1/?

it is seen at once that the equation is satisfied by the values u = constant.
But from the geometric consideration it is evident that, in general, the
circles u — constant are not geodesic lines since the normals to a geodesic
line must also be normal to the surface. And from figures V and VI it is
seen at once that this is only true for the circle u — d , where d> C, and
for the trivial case u — 0 no matter what the value of d.

The geodesic lines on the surfaces S, may be studied if the surfaces

are divided into classes according as d = 2U.

In the case d — 2C the general integral (26) takes the form,
vy = { ((d?r)/(2u)) ((du)/((a? — u*)(r? — u?))
which when u = 1/t may be written as
v = — (—a*r)/2 f (t2dt)/((a°t? — Yet? — 1)
Here R(t) = dr? t* — (d? 4+ r2)t? 4+ 1. It is evident that this is exactly
the same as the R(t) of the general case if we replace d? by a and r? by b.
Taking note of this we may write the geodesic lines in terms of t
Gh se bar
v = (—1/2r) (1/6 (r*—d?)u + (o’/o}(u+v) 4 (0’/c)(a—v)) + 4
where u = p—+((r2—d2)/(2dt—2) + pv) and v xe Deano 2_ 2) /(12). In this
case the geodesics are real for all values of r.

153

In particular when d = 2C and r = d (29) becomes

v = + (d/2ua) + (1/4) log (d—u)/(d+u) + 4
For the purpose of illustration let d = 1 then (85) becomes
vy = = (d/2u) = (1/4) log (1—u)/(1+u) — d
And since J is an added constant we may without loss of generality let
6+ 0.

This particular geodesic line has been drawn in figure 3. It is to be
noted that the line winds around the surface as it approaches smaller
values, and then again winds around approaching the circleu = i. The
lines r = d = 1 are all similar to this one and may be obtained by giving
different values too .

When d=2C , k = (d? — 2Cd) is positive and ab is positive and since
k, = Cd? is always positive and we have K always real so that the geo-
desic lines on the surface S, defined by d > 2C are all real.

When d < 2C , k = (d? — 2Cd) is negative and ab is positive or nega-
tive according as re | k,/k | or - | C7d*)/(a? — 2Cd | So that on the
surface S, defined by d<2C, K will be real or ams according as

> . . . .
r?_(K,/k) . Hence the geodesic lines on such surfaces become imaginary

lines when r?> | k,/k |, that is when r> | k,/k | 1/?andr<— |k,/k | ?/%.

AsymprTotTic LINES ON §,.

From the general equation of the asymptotic lines on a surface we get
for the asymptotic lines on 8 ,,
(u2(d? — 2Cd) + Cd3)1/2/(u((Cd — u?)(d? — u?)!/?)) du = 4+ dv

(The above equation is number 37).
The substitution of u*(d? + 2Cd) — Cd* =1/t? reduces (37) to the form,
(—kdt)/((1—k ,t?)((at? — 1)(bt? — 1))1/? — 4+ av.
Where k = d? — 2Cd, k, — Cd’, a— Cdk + k,, b= a+ k,.
In the particular case when d= 2C (37) becomes
((@2)/(u((d?2 —2u?2)(d?2 —u?))1/?)) . du = + dv
Which when u — 1/t reduces to
(—a’t . dt)/((d2t? — 2)(4t? —1))1/? = + adv ...... (39)
Here R(t) — d4t+ — 34%? 4 2 rf
R(t) = 4d+t* — 6d°t
R’(t) = 12d4t? — 6d?
g, = (11/4)d*
g, = (9/8)d°

154

y,

To reduce (39) substitute
= (a 4 (1 /4R“(a))/ (po — G24) R74 (a) see (40)

Where a is a root of R(t). In this case take a —1/d. Then equation (40)
may be written,

¢ = (Gy) == (a2) (pap) eee (41)
where pv — d?/+# i
Since TEA Beat DS eal) A) 2)d* and (—p’v)/pu — pv)
= (0’/c)(a + v) — (0’/c)(u — v) — 24(0’/c) (v) (Note 1) we have, remem-
bering the relation (dt/du) — (R(t))')? + v= (=) 2) (2) 2q_

a’

—(u + v)(07/o)(u — v)—2(0"/a)v)du + 0” + v = (—(d—(2)/*(07/a)(v a)

<= (2) 2/7) /2 logi(e(a a) te ( Be) 0
(The above is equation 42.)

Note: Schwarz, Formeln der elliptschen Functionen, p. 13.

155

Fic.-— 4

The asymptotic lines in this case are then given by the equations,
it
Vee EN SC
where ¥(t) is given in (42) & u=p- '((3d?— td*) (4— 4td))v— p-_'(d’/4)

Loxopromic LINES ON 81.

The general equations for the loxodromic lines on a_ surface
((E)1/2/(G@)!/?), du—= -+ tan o dv becomes in the case of S, ((u?(d2—2Cd)
atu AG.2)2/ 2) (u2(d2—n2)! 2) )du= + tan «- dv which by the substitu-
tion u2(d?— 2Cd) + C7d? = (C24 °t2), (t?— 1) reduces to the form,

((2C0 — d)(t2dt)) /((t? — 1)((a2 — 2Cd)t? — (d — C)?”)1/? = + tana- dv.

(The above equation is number 43.) This may be put in the form,
((20 — d)/(K,) '/?)- ((t?Ct)/((k7t*) — (k? 4 1)t?+4 1)*/* = + tane- dv.

(The above is equation 44.)

156

Where k, — (d—C)? and k? = (d? — 2Cd)/(d—C)?

Here,
R(t == k*t+ — (k? 4 1)t? +4 1

B/(t)\— 4448 = B(k2 1)t
R’” (t) = 12k°*t? — 2(k? 4 1)
g, = (1/12)(1 + 14k? 4 k4)
See (216) 3s kek)

(44) may be reduced by the substitution,

$= WE ke 1) 2pm pv.) = ee) eae (45)
Where pv = (1/12)\5k?—1) 3
Then k?t? — k? + (kk? — 11)/(pu — pv) + ((k2/4)(k?—1)”)/(pu— pv)?
and since dt/du — (R.t))'/* we get by using (31), (82) and (33) + fan
oe vy — (20—d)/((k,) 2/7 (Ck?) (1/6) (45 1) (07/0) (a ee
(u—y) ) ++ 6” Gants Se a (46)
We have then the loxodromic lines on the surface S, given in terms of f
by the equations,

u?(d?— 2Cd) + C?d? = (C2dt?)/(t? — 1)

Vv = 6(t) + 0”
where ¢(t) is given in (46) andu — p— ‘( (2/(k?— 1) (t—1)) + pv) v= p—!
((bk2 — 1)/(12)) a cS

Since k, — (d—c)? is always positive it is to be noted that ¢(t) is
always real.
In particular when d — 2C the equation, the general equation for the

loxodromic lines reduces to,

((d?/2)/(u2(d? — u2)!/?) du = + tanec: dv Ps (50)
and therefore ¢

(Stole Sih A) = SE ti nliceo 47 SS OS cuss (47a)
and these by the substitution ((d?—u?)?/? Qu) = y, V = x are given in the

x-y plane by the straight lines,
ye == SE Nee 25 ol” .... (48)
But this is the system of lines into which the loxodromic lines of the
pseudosphere may be transformed. Hence the loxodromic lines on S and
S, (when d — 2C) may be represented by the same set of straight lines in
the plane.
Suppose d = 2C — 1 and 0” —Oandthetanx —1. Then 47, becomes
( —(d? — u?)!/?)/(2u) = +4 v.
This gives a line on the surface from the point u,,v,) — (1, 0) making an
angle of 45° with the lines v = constant. The line winds about the surface
as shown in figure IV.

157
S
The surfaces S, might have been classified according as d—C. The

advantages of such a classification are not apparent in the analytical work
and can only be seen from the geometry of the surface or the generating
curve. In the work as presented the pseudosphere comes in as a special
case of the surfaces S, when d<2C, while if the classification had been
made as above indicated the pseudosphere d — C would be the dividing
surface in the classification. On the whole I think the classification
adopted is to be preferred. See figures V & VI for the different types of
generating curves d>C, d=C andd<C. The cut for d<C is not given,
but a general idea of the curve may be obtained by leaving off the loop in
figure V.

Fig- 9

Pres 6

oa

=

a

INDEX.

Page
Gi eLOlns CAemUrOULECULOMe Olam llCsmwalsrpsrne ceetc-s «le ot Sic eco oud Gus ceretie lee taeeevone shies ii
Act providing for the publication of the proceedings................ 5
PAULEY ped elias) eee hes teehee camer niente ep nae Meeeytilecei n: ais: falseclSiichieryas ab afiriece eave nsUane! Sorel a yerave aie ore 136
Ammonium nitrate and manganese dioxide, result of heating a mix-
esULT: as ede irc) ee Fed ears eased) SOT 2p aVian ys cessis eilay cc telka Shoay'emtantel wees lortaner sige Cobcoconstocl eh ePberatehie areas 106
AMIE Lins Ore ACHOEMIN mnie ap ic) tusievetse eteue siclers et oil wecetsrctsan elerees 22
HUES MV TIN gear et arn Arye asc aie a ud oN ayn Fe Bade iar es elhane® erheinln kein oe Bi
Box turtle, some notes on its habits, G. Culbertson........5:........ 7S
ERIM Oelwein sescenep owe ace euswnsyerehes cr ote wie akeveiarorenehe erate ae cis Gabe e arene austere © < 61
TRAE EASE ce RoI eRt eC: RADE ore CRO ONE OE NcaO eae Eee Unoee ERC er Caen behets) eeeerron a 13
Chromosomes in Pinus and=huya, le Me WewiS: «... <a:. aisles eeuence nie < ce 85
ACGME ES LOOT OO Baers. iva vs ieratencns Sneath apa tm sys pebsnaeemeh seat ca eaetnel sess 9
(COOTaRS HR GTO WEG a Bb arenes reece iar er pe ee sea eis hue es ner wn enter ee ge 11
SECO Kee VLC ay Tews oe cs enced eet euede aa le cores hrearete Cae teeta howe ome aey NT chap Sia A dees 88
SMU MEEESOTe, GON TM aencens kot gerne ci, Ck rae nag wernt er RUMI ot karte case eS 78-101
JE FOG ESTEE 1S Oy WSC bel DR Aces ores aR eA oe ot Reo Set Bec oRTR ANS Na, Ok RS me MEE Age OE 128-136
imyironment, its influence on man; R. Hessler... ... 203 .5..0.. se. ss 76
Hrosion of Big Creek and tributaries, G. Culbertson................. 101
Fauna of the Florena shale of the Grand Summit section of Kansas
and remarks on the development of PDerbya J/ultistriata Meek
AMG DAV EM Cost GANG aus tas lei ie Srna ereleL s Soe e Pile ates eunjedeya lee ee 114
Fertilization (artificial) of the eggs of the common clam, H. I. En-
eT Serre leeks, 1) Se ET ecu, se cretaus ae) ar cvensas ra eh trata onermiolsh eile RiGiene ara eras er aiens 136
Gammarus, the relation of the degree of injury to the rate of regenera-
MONAANG Ere MOUS erro d Wie es EGET ac cis yy is cis« cle toweshare © 62
Mere NgIA eT speakel ed) ss MeN e teaaetsne comico tarshcan ters. nine sete ooeeeces tne clei eftie a Arve ean 10€
Gree mH ie wera yA pswts Rereee cancun ee ctl oh ore CPO ace MR SEPALS ere ral oe laa Sve stl are soslces Sere. 114
Jeslea i av@oyed ee ail petal Dye ee 2a, costs clkuun on Pet acai yA NST hone eae ann ners ALA ae care 141
EWATeMID ATS Veh TS haf ie peepee metre en een Me tach te, Gna Sco Grat oqeceee stomebake rer eee oka es 62
Hatiesthesmathemancs: oii On Gamma: 5 cn sacs cs em cree alernereers < 109
JS (GNSS EN 57) 8400) O55 b] PRS acer eis Buses mt & Io) Gio mac EP ICE Ske otc n ARNE Seen eee eae ee eee 76
Etimmine birds notes"one thes Wirise) Wane GOrder, oc... ocls es cue © crore! « 59

(159)

160

Page
IGM en MNES OVE Minhtu, WE INS COM, SeeoodgaondocGcubonocdudquagnoote 88
Gammel Kev caKo Units) ice eee hes Po Set wry oie eet orc Cro nio.cad Old OTA G10 0:6.0-0 23
WAS) > ee Mize Sh cco ee a oligo oh cae elie ae dale eae oe iG eee otc te oe 85
Lines on the pseudosphere and the syntractrix of revolution, BH. L.

FRAT COIR |e eas Sea a eee ees as. 5 Tin ve te 0l oes RCO os ape tenes 141
Linnaeus, celebration of the birth of, G. W. Wilson.................. 48
Lizards, the moulting mechanism of, H. Iu. Bruner.................. 61
1 BAA £0) k= Pael 66) oY) liseli aA eee a sie. 3 et Etech aa na EMCNIE AS Both Ate Bininigg‘ovo.0 0'o c 51

Marine annelid, observations on the formation and enlargement of its

CUDES VEL: OE): GETS zs host ever ias tac hoes omen iter cae eheeeee ener meee 128
IME ATINO TES OR Oe ccccurise& Cand cies teecos Soe norco atnes ity wai et.) dd cris cr aR ORE EEL Ree ace 104
ANY (25 01] 024 STeRRE 1 Ol yt Serene ae reine cd aa ri iE ee Rie D ALS Mo mIS!ScOscro id oc 16
OVO WS erase tues. cs tmee ea reer eee ee aye Gee res ae Nenianle (ay arias! ata tel ct ele op 14
MONKETESIUG OM ty sececvenetera ci ue lars Comune edo eiiaean cost ame resa en usu chante chek Nia een 15
Mounds of the lower Mississippi, A. B. Reagan.....................- 99
Mo ttier* Divide Meo ee ree co Sie aa sane baie ol sb gw lad Rees Oe eee 28
OMEETS! AGO T-1GOS ics oh coh eho sie. ee rod ceed shal stie cr ote Ses SCR ie cd eee 8
| OFFS] Sea eer ink eee uae te renee Meier ee ENR M ns tin Sd SS CIGD ML 6.0 0° 10
Peat, an investigation of its fuel value, R. W. Lyoms................. 51
Perenosporales of sindianasG. Wis Wall SOU cppencis s cilenenet sence ueneicnens renames 80
[DiROyed ez o eer eRe meee om rcin mame cid oaeed easton een Ie Ona bach ordi clo ODO Gimo.0 400 C 20
EUAN OMA: MeV DUTIL OSes lisess cust cies caome cae ee aa AS) Scere eae ee 106
| Sees Wea Ha eames. OYo) b| el © tase eee eto ee ces 5 hae SIRE ats aie Giana iGlaip O15 .0.0 © 99
Sex. the history and: controlvot DAME; MOET c-yneeeeetens ts crete 28
Selenie acid from lead selenate by electrolysis, F. C. Mathers......... 104
Surfaces for which the six fundamental quantities are functions of
Oa cial varolhye Wolsey IBhiness ooadugodbadeouodougoudcdacccococ 137
Mj WES oy ever oy ee(GL0) 0K) a ho A ee RS oars oer ree’ maar biota ie) Ey rn, cies Cicvo odo 0 +4
Underwood, Lucien Marcus, a biographical sketch...............-.-- 24
Papers contributed to the Academiyer. a.) cri cis iota ene 26
Resolutions om tine deni Giesees eos acto ra seer ecciere (nes inane eens 20
Vea GORE Wis SE ies ro aie aace eee ae aslo Sactaee shee Na nee MAE ica) ee 59
Wilsons: Gury’ WESti ie a8 coae Sees Pec eset, ereiatiotioy oN tetcue Reales eae eae 48-80

her He hg
hie

‘i

a ahs Neo)
4

re

¥ "he

Pets
shih vit

‘o

Cane :
Lr ie

br anes an am
ve Sok -

_———— PH Lace Sp ay .
OO —— Niet oa Lage :

_} _————_— 2 F x 4 :
AR se Rett 2b 3 é
¥; 4 | =D de

“ ——

— ; ;

{oan

|

i
|

"
t R «
A eel “ he Th 4 a % : |
————— - eaten ; |
—— 4 | | |
=O} - 7 | :
2 = 3 gc | 3 | | . |
a f 4 :
—~_ 2 .
oS = a Oy SS ; 7 :
: ~~
ed “————1¢) ad * ' 4 ‘ 7 :
<4 ————= (O_o Sn > } 2 | :
Me — yeh et ie ’ ; ‘ . 3
———— ‘ Fe |
BESS 5 : : |
ary, i ————— 7 : |
——) 2——_ “ae a . habe ; : a 3
SE Co) ¢ i3? 5 \ - f i i }
=— ers F 2 |
_ as a F : | ; |
: s | | ; ; : ; 4 a >
a | f ) 3 : a .
| a, 3 he

SST Sa el
te!